SYSMAC CV-series
CV500/CV1000/CV2000/CVM1
Programmable Controllers
Operation Manual: Ladder Diagrams
Revised August 1998
iv
!
!
!
v
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam-
age to property.
DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers
to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PC” means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for any-
thing else.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation
of the product.
1, 2, 3...
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
OMRON, 1992
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any
form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permis-
sion of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is
constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change
without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no
responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the informa-
tion contained in this publication.
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
vii
PRECAUTIONS xiii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 Intended Audience xiv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 General Precautions xiv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Safety Precautions xiv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Operating Environment Precautions xv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Application Precautions xv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 1
Introduction 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1 Overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2 Relay Circuits: The Roots of PC Logic 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3 PC Terminology 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4 OMRON Product Terminology 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5 Overview of PC Operation 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6 PC Operating Modes 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7 Peripheral Devices 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-8 CV-series Manuals 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-9 C-series–CV-series System Compatibility 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-10 Networks and Remote I/O Systems 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-11 New CPUs and Related Units 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-12 CPU Comparison 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13 Improved Specifications 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 2
Hardware Considerations 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1 CPU Components 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2 Program Memory 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3 Memory Cards 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4 Data Memory and Expansion Data Memory Unit 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5 I/O Control Unit and I/O Interface Unit Displays 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6 Peripheral Devices 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7 PC Configuration 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 3
Memory Areas 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1 Introduction 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Data Area Structure 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3 CIO (Core I/O) Area 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 TR (Temporary Relay) Area 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5 CPU Bus Link Area 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6 Auxiliary Area 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7 Transition Area 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8 Step Area 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9 Timer Area 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10 Counter Area 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11 DM and EM Areas 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12 Index and Data Registers (IR and DR) 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TABLE OF CONTENTS
viii
SECTION 4
Writing Programs 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1 Basic Procedure 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 Instruction Terminology 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3 Basic Ladder Diagrams 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4 Mnemonic Code 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5 Branching Instruction Lines 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6 Jumps 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7 Controlling Bit Status 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8 Intermediate Instructions 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9 Work Bits (Internal Relays) 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10 Programming Precautions 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11 Program Execution 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12 Using Version-2 CVM1 CPUs 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13 Data Formats 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 5
Instruction Set 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1 Notation 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Instruction Format 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Data Areas, Definers, and Flags 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4 Differentiated and Immediate Refresh Instructions 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5 Coding Right-hand Instructions 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6 Ladder Diagram Instructions 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7 Bit Control Instructions 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8 INTERLOCK and INTERLOCK CLEAR: IL(002) and ILC(003) 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9 JUMP and JUMP END: JMP(004) and JME(005) 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10 CONDITIONAL JUMP: CJP(221)/CJPN(222) 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11 END: END(001) 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12 NO OPERATION: NOP(000) 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13 Timer and Counter Instructions 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14 Shift Instructions 159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15 Data Movement Instructions 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16 Comparison Instructions 205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17 Conversion Instructions 219. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18 BCD Calculation Instructions 249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19 Binary Calculation Instructions 261. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-20 Symbol Math Instructions 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21 Floating-point Math Instructions 293. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22 Increment/Decrement Instructions 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23 Special Math Instructions 319. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-24 PID and Related Instructions 330. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-25 Logic Instructions 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-26 Time Instructions 349. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-27 Special Instructions 354. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-28 Flag/Register Instructions 366. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-29 STEP DEFINE and STEP START: STEP(008)/SNXT(009) 368. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-30 Subroutines 377. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-31 Interrupt Control 382. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-32 Stack Instructions 389. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-33 Data Tracing 393. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-34 Memory Card Instructions 396. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-35 Special I/O Instructions 404. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-36 Network Instructions 413. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-37 SFC Control Instructions 427. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-38 Block Programming Instructions 438. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ix
SECTION 6
Program Execution Timing 451. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1 PC Operation 452. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2 Cycle Time 464. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3 Calculating Cycle Time 470. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4 Instruction Execution Times 472. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5 I/O Response Time 486. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 7
PC Setup 495. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1 PC Setup Overview 496. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 PC Setup Details 497. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 PC Setup Default Settings 501. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 8
Error Processing 503. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1 Alarm Indicators 504. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2 Programmed Alarms and Error Messages 504. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3 Reading and Clearing Errors and Messages 504. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4 Error Messages 504. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5 Error Flags 509. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendices
A Instruction Set 511. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B Error and Arithmetic Flag Operation 569. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C PC Setup Default Settings 575. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D Data Areas 577. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E I/O Assignment Sheets 583. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F Program Coding Sheet 589. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G Data Conversion Table 593. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H Extended ASCII 595. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary 597. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index 619. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Revision History 629. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
About this Manual:
This manual describes ladder diagram programming and memory allocation in the SYSMAC CV-series Program-
mable Controllers (PCs) (CV500, CV1000, CV2000, and CVM1). This manual is designed to be used together with
two other CV-series PC operation manuals and an installation guide. The entire set of CV-series PC manuals is listed
below . Only the basic portions of the catalog numbers are given; be sure you have the most recent version for your
area.
Manual Cat. No.
CV-series PC Installation Guide W195
CV-series PC Operation Manual: SFC W194
CV-series PC Operation Manual: Ladder Diagrams W202
CV-series PC Operation Manual: Host Interface W205
Programming and operating CV-series PCs are performed with the CV Support Software (CVSS), the SYSMAC Sup-
port Software (SSS), and the CV-series Programming Console for which the following manuals are available.
Product Manuals
CVSS The CV Series Getting Started Guidebook (W203) and the CV Support Software Opera-
tion Manuals: Basics (W196), Offline (W201), and Online (W200).
SSS SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manuals: Basics (W247), C-series PC Opera-
tions (W248), and CVM1 Operations (W249)
CV-series Programming Console CVM1-PRS21-E Programming Console Operation Manual (W222)
Note The CVSS does not support new instructions added for version-2 CVM1 PCs. The SSS does not support SFC
programming (CV500, CV1000, or CV2000).
Please read this manual completely together with the other CV-series manuals and be sure you understand the infor-
mation provide before attempting to install, program, or operate a CV-series PC. The basic content of each section of
this manual is outlined below.
Section 1
gives a brief overview of the history of Programmable Controllers and explains terms commonly used in
ladder-diagram programming. It also provides an overview of the process of programming and operating a PC. A list
of the manuals available to use with this manual is also provided.
Section 2
provides information on hardware aspects of the CV-series PCs relevant to programming and software
operation. This information is covered in more detail in the
CV-series PC Installation Guide
.
Section 3
describes the way in which PC memory is broken into various areas for different purposes. The contents of
each area and addressing conventions are also described.
Section 4
explains the basic steps and concepts involved in writing a basic ladder diagram program. The entire set
of instructions used in programming is described in
Section 5 Instruction Set
.
Section 5
explains each instruction in the CV-series PC instruction sets and provides the ladder diagram symbols,
data areas, and flags used with each. The instructions provided b y the CV-series PCs are described in following sub-
sections by instruction group.
Section 6
explains the execution cycle of the PC and shows how to calculate the cycle time and I/O response times.
I/O response times in Link Systems are described in the individual System Manuals. These manuals are listed at the
end of
Section 1 Introduction
.
Section 7
provides tables that list the parameters in the PC Setup, provide examples of normal application, and
provides the default values. The use of each parameter in the PC Setup is described where relevant in this manual
and in other CV-series manuals.
Section 8
provides information on hardware and software errors that may occur during PC operation. Although de-
scribed mainly in
Section 3 Memory Areas
, flags and other error information provided in the Auxiliary Area are listed in
8-5 Error Flags
.
Various appendices are also provided for convenience (see table of contents for a list).
WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in
personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each
section i n its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section
and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
!
xiii
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Controller (PC) and related devices.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the Programmable Con-
troller. Yo u must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a
PC system.
1 Intended Audience xiv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 General Precautions xiv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Safety Precautions xiv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Operating Environment Precautions xv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Application Precautions xv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
3Safety Precautions
xiv
1 Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowl-
edge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
•Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
•Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
•Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2 General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications
described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual
or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation
systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement ma-
chines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that
may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult
your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the
systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this manual
close at hand for reference during operation.
WARNING It is extremely important that a PC and all PC Units be used for the specified
purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that can
directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON
representative before applying a PC System to the above-mentioned
applications.
3 Safety Precautions
WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied. Doing so
may result in electric shock.
WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals while the power is being supplied. Doing so
may result in electric shock.
WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble, repair. or modify any Units. Any attempt to do so
may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.
WARNING There is a lithium battery built into the SRAM Memory Cards. Do not short the
positive and negative terminals of the battery, charge the battery, attempt to take
it apart, subject it to pressures that would deform it, incinerate it, or otherwise
mistreat it. Doing any of these could cause the battery to erupt, ignite, or leak.
Caution Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be caused
by extending the cycle time. Otherwise, the input signals may not be readable.
Caution Confirm safety at the destination node before transferring a program to another
node o r changing the I/O memory area. Doing either of these without confirming
safety may result in injury.
Caution Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to the
torque specified in the operation manual. The loose screws may result in burning
or malfunction.
!
!
!
!
!
5Application Precautions
xv
4 Operating Environment Precautions
Caution Do not operate the control system in the following places:
•Locations subject to direct sunlight.
•Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in
the specifications.
•Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tempera-
ture.
•Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
•Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
•Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
•Locations subject to shock or vibration.
Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the
following locations:
•Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
•Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
•Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
•Locations close to power supplies.
Caution The operating environment of the PC System can have a large effect on the lon-
gevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can lead to
malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PC System. Be
sure that the operating environment is within the specified conditions at installa-
tion and remains within the specified conditions during the life of the system.
5 Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the PC System.
WARNING Always heed these precautions. Failure to abide by the following precautions
could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury.
•Always connect to a class-3 ground (to 100 Ω or less) when installing the Units.
Not connecting to a class-3 ground may result in electric shock.
•Always turn off the power supply to the PC before attempting any of the follow-
ing. Not turning off the power supply may result in malfunction or electric
shock.
•Mounting o r dismounting I/O Units, CPU Units, Memory Cassettes, or a ny
other Units.
•Assembling the Units.
•Setting DIP switches or rotary switches.
•Connecting or wiring the cables.
•Connecting or disconnecting the connectors.
Caution Failure t o abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of the
PC or the system, or could damage the PC or PC Units. Always heed these pre-
cautions.
•Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines,
momentary power interruptions, or other causes.
5Application Precautions
xvi
•Interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety measures in external circuits
(i.e., not in the Programmable Controller) must be provided by the customer.
•Always use the power supply voltage specified in the operation manuals. An
incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning.
•Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the rated
voltage and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places where the
power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result in malfunction.
•Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuit-
ing in external wiring. Insufficient safety measures against short-circuiting may
result in burning.
•Do not apply voltages to the Input Units in excess of the rated input voltage.
Excess voltages may result in burning.
•Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the Output Units in excess of the
maximum switching capacity. Excess voltage or loads may result in burning.
•Disconnect the functional ground terminal when performing withstand voltage
tests. Not disconnecting the functional ground terminal may result in burning.
•Install the Unit properly as specified in the operation manual. Improper installa-
tion of the Unit may result in malfunction.
•Be sure that all the mounting screws, terminal screws, and cable connector
screws are tightened to the torque specified in the relevant manuals. Incorrect
tightening torque may result in malfunction.
•Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring. Removing the label may re-
sult in malfunction.
•Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipa-
tion. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.
•Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to
terminals. Connection of bare stranded wires may result in burning.
•Double-check all the wiring before turning on the power supply. Incorrect wir-
ing may result in burning.
•Mount the Unit only after checking the terminal block completely.
•Be sure that the terminal blocks, Memory Units, expansion cables, and other
items with locking devices are properly locked into place. Improper locking
may result in malfunction.
•Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on the
Unit. Not checking the program may result in an unexpected operation.
•Confirm that no adverse ef fect will occur in the system before attempting any of
the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
•Changing the operating mode of the PC.
•Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.
•Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.
•Resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit the contents of
the DM and HR Areas required for resuming operation. Not doing so may result
in an unexpected operation.
•Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit. Doing
either of these may break the cables.
•Do not place objects on top of the cables. Doing so may break the cables.
•When replacing parts, be sure to confirm that the rating of a new part is correct.
Not doing so may result in malfunction or burning.
•Before touching the Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in
order to discharge any static built-up. Not doing so may result in malfunction or
damage.
1
SECTION 1
Introduction
This section gives a brief overview of the history of Programmable Controllers and explains terms commonly used in
ladder-diagram programming. It also provides an overview of the process of programming and operating a PC and ex-
plains basic terminology used with OMRON PCs. A list of the manuals available to use with this manual for special PC
applications and products is also provided.
1-1 Overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2 Relay Circuits: The Roots of PC Logic 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3 PC Terminology 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4 OMRON Product Terminology 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5 Overview of PC Operation 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6 PC Operating Modes 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7 Peripheral Devices 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-8 CV-series Manuals 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-9 C-series–CV-series System Compatibility 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-10 Networks and Remote I/O Systems 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-11 New CPUs and Related Units 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-12 CPU Comparison 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13 Improved Specifications 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13-1 Upgraded Specifications 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13-2 Version-1 CPUs 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13-3 Version-2 CVM1 CPUs 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13-4 Upgraded Specifications 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-1 Overview A PC (Programmable Controller) is basically a CPU (Central Processing Unit)
containing a program and connected to input and output (I/O) devices. The pro-
gram controls the PC so that when an input signal from an input device turns ON
or OFF, the appropriate response is made. The response normally involves turn-
ing ON or OFF an output signal to some sort of output device. The input devices
could b e photoelectric sensors, pushbuttons on control panels, limit switches, or
any other device that can produce a signal that can be input into the PC. The
output devices could be solenoids, indicator lamps, relays turning on motors, or
any other devices that can be activated by signals output from the PC.
For example, a sensor detecting a passing product turns ON an input to the PC.
The PC responds by turning ON an output that activates a pusher that pushes
the product onto another conveyor for further processing. Another sensor, posi-
tioned higher than the first, turns ON a different input to indicate that the product
is too tall. The PC responds by turning on another pusher positioned before the
pusher mentioned above to push the too-tall product into a rejection box.
Although this example involves only two inputs and two outputs, it is typical of the
type of control operation that PCs can achieve. Actually even this example is
much more complex than it may at first appear because of the timing that would
be required, i.e., “How does the PC know when to activate each pusher?” Much
more complicated operations are also possible.
To achieve proper control, CV-series PCs use a form of PC logic called ladder-
diagram programming. A single ladder-diagram program can be used, as in C-
series PCs, but CV-series PCs are also support sequential function chart, or
SFC, programming. SFC programming breaks the program into sections based
on processes, greatly reducing program development and maintenance times,
and allowing program sections to be easily used in other programs. The follow-
ing diagram shows a simple SFC program, which consists of steps connected by
lines representing the flow of execution.
ST0000 01
TN0000
ST0001 02
000100
ST0011 02
000101
000200
ST0012 03
000201
ST0000
ST0020 00
000300
Initial step
Transition
Step
The transitions between the steps control when execution moves between the
steps and actions contained within the steps specify the actual executable ele-
ments of the program. Programming the actions and transitions within SFC pro-
gramming are generally achieved using ladder diagrams. There are also some
ladder diagram instructions that can be used to control the SFC program.
This manual is written to explain ladder-diagram programming and to prepare
the reader to program and operate the CV-series PCs. SFC programming is ex-
plained in the
CV-series PCs Operation Manual: SFC
.
Overview Section 1-1
3
1-2 Relay Circuits: The Roots of PC Logic
PCs historically originate in relay-based control systems. And although the inte-
grated circuits and internal logic of the PC have taken the place of the discrete
relays, timers, counters, and other such devices, actual PC operation proceeds
as if those discrete devices were still in place. PC control, however, also pro-
vides computer capabilities and accuracy to achieve a great deal more flexibility
and reliability than is possible with relays.
The symbols and other control concepts used to describe PC operation also
come from relay-based control and form the basis of the ladder-diagram pro-
gramming method. Most of the terms used to describe these symbols and con-
cepts, however, have come in from computer terminology.
Relay vs. PC Terminology The terminology used throughout this manual is somewhat different from relay
terminology, but the concepts are the same.
The following table shows the relationship between relay terms and the PC
terms used for OMRON PCs.
Relay term PC equivalent
contact input or condition
coil output or work bit
NO relay normally open condition
NC relay normally closed condition
Actually there is not a total equivalence between these terms. The term condi-
tion is only used to describe ladder diagram programs in general and is specifi-
cally equivalent to one of a certain set of basic instructions. The terms input a nd
output are not used in programming per se, except in reference to I/O bits that
are assigned to input and output signals coming into and leaving the PC. Nor-
mally open conditions and normally closed conditions are explained in
4-3 Basic
Ladder Diagrams
.
1-3 PC Terminology
Although also provided in the
Glossary
at the back of this manual, the following
terms are crucial to understanding PC operation and are thus introduced here.
PC Because CV-series PCs are Rack PCs, there is no single product that is a CV-
series PC. That is why we talk about the configuration of the PC, because a PC is
a configuration of smaller Units.
To have a functional PC, you would need to have a CPU Rack with at least one
Unit mounted to it that provides I/O points. When we refer to the PC, however, we
are generally talking about the CPU and all of the Units directly controlled by it
through the program. This does not include the I/O devices connected to PC in-
puts and outputs. The term PC is also used to refer to the controlling element of
the PC, i.e., the CPU.
If you are not familiar with the terms used above to describe a PC, refer to
Sec-
tion 2 Hardware Considerations
for explanations.
Inputs and Outputs A device connected to the PC that sends a signal to the PC is called an input
device; the signal it sends is called an input signal. A signal enters the PC
through terminals or through pins on a connector on a Unit. The place where a
signal enters the PC is called an input point. This input point is allocated a loca-
tion in memory that reflects its status, i.e., either ON or OFF. This memory loca-
tion is called an input bit. The CPU, in its normal processing cycle, monitors the
status of all input points and turns ON or OFF corresponding input bits accord-
ingly.
There are also output bits in memory that are allocated to output points on Units
through which output signals are sent to output devices, i.e., an output bit is
PC Terminology Section 1-3
4
turned O N t o send a signal to an output device through an output point. The CPU
periodically turns output points ON or OFF according to the status of the output
bits.
These terms are used when describing dif ferent aspects of PC operation. When
programming, one is concerned with what information is held in memory, and so
I/O bits are referred to. When talking about the Units that connect the PC to t h e
controlled system and the places on these Units where signals enter and leave
the PC, I/O points are referred to. When wiring these I/O points, the physical
counterparts o f the I/O points, either terminals or connector pins, are referred to.
When talking about the signals that enter or leave the PC, one refers to input
signals and output signals, or sometimes just inputs and outputs. It all depends
on what aspect of PC operation is being talked about.
The Control System includes the PC and all I/O devices it uses to control an ex-
ternal system. A sensor that provides information to achieve control is an input
device that is clearly part of the Control System. The controlled system is the
external system that is being controlled by the PC program through these I/O
devices. I/O devices can sometimes be considered part of the controlled sys-
tem, e.g., a motor used to drive a conveyor belt.
1-4 OMRON Product Terminology
OMRON products are divided into several functional groups that have generic
names.
Appendix A
Standard Models
lists products according to these groups.
The term Unit is used to refer to all of the OMRON PC products. Although a Unit
is any one of the building blocks that goes together to form a CV-series PC, its
meaning is generally, but not always, limited in context to refer to the Units that
are mounted to a Rack. Most, but not all, of these products have names that end
with the word Unit.
The largest group of OMRON products is the I/O Units. These include all of the
Rack-mounting Units that provide non-dedicated input or output points for gen-
eral use. I/O Units come with a variety of point connections and specifications.
Special I/O Units are dedicated Units that are designed to meet specific needs.
These include Position Control Units, High-speed Counter Units, and Analog I/O
Units. This group also includes some programmable Units, such as the ASCII
Unit, which is programmed in BASIC.
CPU Bus Units connect to the CPU bus and must be mounted on either the
CPU Rack or a Expansion CPU Rack. These include the SYSMAC NET Link
Unit, SYSMAC LINK Unit, SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O Master Unit, and BASIC
Unit.
Link Units are used to create communications links between PCs or between
PCs and other devices. Link Units include SYSMAC NET Link Unit, SYSMAC
LINK Unit, and, sometimes, SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O Master Unit.
Other product groups include Programming Devices, Peripheral Devices,
and DIN Track Products.
1-5 Overview of PC Operation
The following are the basic steps involved in programming and operating a CV-
series PC. Assuming you have already purchased one or more of these PCs,
you must have a reasonable idea of the required information for steps one and
two, which are discussed briefly below. The relevant sections of this manual that
provide more information are listed with relevant steps.
1, 2, 3...
1. Determine what the controlled system must do, in what order, and at what
times.
2. Determine what Racks and what Units will be required. Refer to the
CV-se-
ries PCs Installation Guide
. If a Link System is required, refer to the ap-
propriate
System Manual
.
Controlled System and
Control System
Overview of PC Operation Section 1-5
5
3. On paper, assign all input and output devices to I/O points on Units and de-
termine which I/O bits will be allocated to each. If the PC includes Special I/O
Units, CPU Bus Units, or Link Systems, refer to the individual
Operation
Manuals
or
System Manuals
for details on I/O bit allocation. (
Section 3
Memory Areas
)
4. Divide the required control actions into processes that need to be treated as
individual sections and create an SFC program to control the flow of execu-
tion of the processes. Refer to the
CV-series PCs Operation Manual: SFC
for details on the SFC program. If desired, you can also program the PC
without using an SFC program by setting the PC for ladder-only operation
from the CVSS/SSS.
5. Using relay ladder symbols, write a program that represents the sequence
of required operations within each process and their inter-relationships. If
you are using an SFC program, you will actually be writing transition pro-
grams and action programs within the SFC program. Be sure to also pro-
gram appropriate responses for all possible emergency situations. (
Section
4 Writing Programs, Section 5 Instruction Set, Section 6 Program Execution
Timing
)
6. Write the program in the CVSS/SSS of fline, and then switch to online opera-
tion and transfer the program to Program Memory in the CPU. The program
can also be written or altered online. Refer to the
CVSS/SSS Operation
Manual
for details.
7. Generate the I/O table with I/O Units installed. The I/O table can be gener-
ated either online from the CVSS/SSS, or edited offline and then trans-
ferred. Always turn the PC of f and on after transferring the I/O table. The PC
will not run until the I/O table has been registered. Refer to the
CVSS/SSS
Operation Manual
for details.
8. The PC Setup controls a variety of basic options in PC operation (such as
the method of I/O refreshing and PC mode at start-up). The operating pa-
rameters i n the PC Setup can be left in their default settings or changed with
the CVSS/SSS as required. Refer to
Section 7 PC Setup
for details.
9. Debug the program, first to eliminate any syntax errors, and then to find
execution errors. Refer to the three CVSS/SSS operation manuals for de-
tails on debugging operations. (
Section 8 Error Processing
)
10. Wire the PC to the controlled system. This step can actually be started as
soon a s step 3 has been completed. Refer to the
CV -series PCs Installation
Guide
and to other
Operation Manuals
and
System Manuals
for details on
individual Units.
11. Test the program in an actual control situation and carry out fine tuning as
required. Refer to the CVSS/SSS operation manuals for details on debug-
ging operations. (
Section 8 Error Processing
)
12. Record two copies of the finished program on masters and store them safely
in dif ferent locations. Refer to the CVSS/SSS operation manuals for details.
Note 1. The date and time are not set when the CPU is shipped. Set the date and
time by the procedure described in the
CVSS/SSS Operation Manuals
.
2. There is an error log in the PC. This log can be cleared by turning ON the
Error Log Reset Bit (A00014).
Control System Design Designing the Control System is the first step in automating any process. A PC
can be programmed and operated only after the overall Control System is fully
understood. Designing the Control System requires, first of all, a thorough un-
derstanding of the system that is to be controlled. The first step in designing a
Control System is thus determining the requirements of the controlled system.
Overview of PC Operation Section 1-5
6
Input/Output Requirements The first thing that must be assessed is the number of input and output points
that the controlled system will require. This is done by identifying each device
that is to send an input signal to the PC or which is to receive an output signal
from the PC. Keep in mind that the number of I/O points available depends on
the configuration of the PC.
Next, determine the sequence in which control operations are to occur and the
relative timing of the operations. Identify the physical relationships between the
I/O devices as well as the kinds of responses that should occur between them.
For instance, a photoelectric switch might be functionally tied to a motor by way
of a counter within the PC. When the PC receives an input from a start switch, it
could start the motor. The PC could then stop the motor when the counter has
received a specified number of input signals from the photoelectric switch.
Each o f the related tasks must be similarly determined, from the beginning of the
control operation to the end.
Unit Requirements The actual Units that will be mounted or connected to PC Racks must be deter-
mined according to the requirements of the I/O devices. Actual hardware specifi-
cations, such as voltage and current levels, as well as functional considerations,
such as those that require Special I/O Units, CPU Bus Units, or Link Systems will
need t o b e considered. In many cases, Special I/O Units, CPU Bus Units or Link
Systems can greatly reduce the programming burden. Details on these Units
and Link Systems are available in appropriate
Operation Manuals
and
System
Manuals
.
Once the entire Control System has been designed, the task of programming,
debugging, and operation as described in the remaining sections of this manual
can begin.
1-6 PC Operating Modes
CV-series PCs have four operation modes: PROGRAM, DEBUG, MONITOR,
and RUN. The Unit will automatically enter the mode specified in the PC Setup
(default setting: PROGRAM mode). Refer to
Section 7 PC Setup
for details. The
PC mode can be changed from a Peripheral Device. The function of each mode
is described briefly below.
PROGRAM mode is used when making basic changes to the PC program or set-
tings, such as transferring, writing, changing, or checking the program, generat-
ing or changing the I/O table, or changing the PC Setup. The program cannot be
executed in PROGRAM mode. Output points at Output Units will remain OFF,
even when the corresponding output bit is ON.
DEBUG mode is used to check program execution and I/O operation after syn-
tax errors in the program have been corrected. With SFC programs, a single
step can be checked for errors from a Peripheral Device using the DEBUG op-
eration. Output points at Output Units will remain OFF, even when the corre-
sponding output bit is ON.
MONITOR mode is used when monitoring program execution, such a s making a
trial run of a program. The program is executed just as it is in RUN mode, but bit
status, timer and counter SV/PV, and the data content of most words can be
changed online. PC operation in MONITOR mode is significantly slower than it is
in RUN mode. Output points at Output Units will be turned ON when the corre-
sponding output bit is ON.
RUN mode is used when operating the PC in normal control conditions. Bit sta-
tus cannot be Force Set or Reset, and SVs, PVs, and the data cannot be
changed online. Output points at Output Units will be turned ON when the corre-
sponding output bit is ON.
Sequence, Timing, and
Relationships
PROGRAM Mode
DEBUG Mode
MONITOR Mode
RUN Mode
PC Operating Modes Section 1-6
7
1-7 Peripheral Devices
The CV Support Software (CVSS) and the SYSMAC Support Software (SSS)
are the main Peripheral Device used to program and monitor CV-series PCs.
You must have the CVSS/SSS to program and operate these PCs. The following
Peripheral Devices are available for basic programming/monitoring.
Note The CVSS does not support new instructions added for version-2 CVM1 PCs.
The SSS does not support SFC programming (CV500, CV1000, and CV2000).
New instructions added for version-2 CVM1 PCs are also supported by ver-
sion-1 CV-series Programming Consoles.
The Graphics Programming Console (GPC) can be used for monitoring and pro-
gramming of PCs, but does not support SFC programming.
Programming Console The Programming Console can be used for onsite monitoring and programming
of PC, but does not support SFC programming and other advanced program-
ming/debugging operations.
Graphic Programming
Console
Peripheral Devices Section 1-7
8
1-8 CV-series Manuals
The following manuals are available for CV-series products. Manuals are also
available for compatible C-series products (see next section). Catalog number
suffixes have been omitted; be sure you have the current version for your region.
Product Manual Cat. No.
CV-series PCs CV-series PCs Installation Guide W195
CV-series PCs Operation Manual: SFC W194
CV-series PCs Operation Manual: Ladder Diagrams W202
CV-series PCs Operation Manual: Host Link System,
CV500-LK201 Host Link Unit W205
CV Support Software (CVSS) The CV Series Getting Started Guidebook W203
()
CV Support Software Operation Manual: Basics W196
CV Support Software Operation Manual: Offline W201
CV Support Software Operation Manual: Online W200
SYSMAC Support Software Operation
Manual: Basics SSS installation procedures, hardware information for the SSS, and
general basic operating procedures (including data conversion
between C-series and CVM1 PCs).
W247
SYSMAC Support Software Operation
Manual: C-series PC Operations Detailed operating procedures for the C-series PCs. W248
SYSMAC Support Software Operation
Manual: CVM1 Operations Detailed operating procedures for CVM1 PCs. W249
Graphic Programming Console (GPC) CV500-MP311-E Graphic Programming Console Operation Manual W216
Programming Console CVM1-PRS21-E Programming Console Operation Manual W222
SYSMAC NET Link System SYSMAC NET Link System Manual W213
SYSMAC LINK System SYSMAC LINK System Manual W212
SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O System SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O System Manual W204
CompoBus/D Device Network CompoBus/D (DeviceNet) Operation Manual) W267
CV-series Ethernet Unit CV-series Ethernet System Manual W242
BASIC Unit BASIC Unit Reference Manual W207
BASIC Unit Operation Manual W206
Personal Computer Unit Personal Computer Unit Operation Manual W251
Personal Computer Unit Technical Manual W252
Motion Control Unit Motion Control Unit Operation Manual: Introduction W254
Motion Control Unit Operation Manual: Details W255
Temperature Controller Data Link Unit CV500-TDL21 Temperature Controller Data Link Unit Operation
Manual W244
Memory Card Writer CV500-MCW01-E Memory Card Writer Operation Manual W214
Optical Fiber Cable Optical Fiber Cable Installation Guide W156
CV-series Manuals Section 1-8
9
1-9 C-series–CV-series System Compatibility
The following table shows when C-series Units can be used and when CV-series
Units must be used. Any C-series Unit or Peripheral Device not listed in this table
cannot be used with the CV-series PCs.
Unit C Series CV Series Remarks
CPU Rack CPU No Yes CV500-CPU01-EV1, CV1000-CPU01-EV1,
CV2000-CPU01-EV1, CVM1-CPU01-EV2,
CVM1-CPU11-EV2, and CVM1-CPU21-EV2
Power Supply No Yes CV500-PS221, CV500-PS211, and
CVM1-PA208
CPU Backplane No Yes CV500-BC031, CV500-BC051, CV500-BC101,
CVM1-BC103, and CVM1-BC053
I/O Control Unit No Yes CV500-IC01
Expansion CPU Backplane No Yes CV500-BI111
Expansion I/O Backplane No Yes CV500-BI042, CV500-BI062, CV500-BI112,
CVM1-BI114, and CVM1-BI064 (C500
Expansion I/O Racks can be used with certain
limitations.)
16-/32-/64-point I/O Units Yes Yes ---
Special I/O Units Yes Yes Applicable Units include Analog Input, Analog
Output, High-speed Counter, PID, Position
Control, Magnetic Card, ASCII, ID Sensor, and
Ladder Program I/O Units (The C500-ASC03
cannot be used.)
BASIC Unit No Yes CV500-BSC1
Personal Computer Unit No Yes CV500-VP213-E/217-E/223-E/227-E
Temperature Control Data Link Unit No Yes CV500-TDL21
Link
S
SYSMAC NET No Yes CV500-SNT31
Systems SYSMAC LINK No Yes CV500-SLK11 and CV500-SLK21
Host Link Unit No Yes CV500-LK201
Ethernet Unit No Yes CV500-ETN01
Remote I/O
S
SYSMAC BUS Units Yes Yes ---
Systems SYSMAC BUS/2 No Yes CV500-RM211/221 and CV500-RT211/221
Peripheral
Devices CV Support Software No Yes
(See note.) CV500-ZS3AT1-EV2 (3 1/2” floppy disks) and
CV500-ZS5AT1-EV2 (5 1/4” floppy disks) for
IBM PC/AT compatible
SYSMAC Support
Software (SSS) Yes Yes
(See note.) C500-ZL3AT1-E (3.5” floppy disks) for IBM
PC/AT compatible
Graphic Programming
Console Yes (Main
unit only) Yes
(System
Cassette)
(See note.)
GPC: 3G2C5-GPC03-E
System Cassette: CV500-MP311-E
Programming Console No Yes
(See note.) CVM1-PRS21-EV1 (set)
Note The CVSS does not support new instructions added for version-2 CVM1 PCs.
The SSS does not support SFC programming (CV500, CV1000, and CV2000).
New instructions added for version-2 CVM1 PCs are also supported by ver-
sion-1 CV-series Programming Consoles.
C-series – CV-series System Compatibility Section 1-9
10
1-10 Networks and Remote I/O Systems
Systems that can be used to create networks and enable remote I/O are
introduced in this section. Refer to the operation manuals for the Systems for
details.
The SYSMAC NET Link System is a LAN (local area network) for use in factory
automation systems. The SYSMAC NET Link System can consist of up to 128
nodes among which communications may be accomplished via datagrams,
data transfers, or automatic data links.
Datagrams transmit and receive data using a command/response format. Com-
mands can be issued from the user program by the DELIVER COMMAND
instruction (CMND(194)).
Data can also be transmitted and received using the NETWORK SEND and
NETWORK RECEIVE (SEND(192)/RECV(193)) instructions in the user pro-
gram. Up to 256 words of data can be transferred for each instruction.
Automatic data links allow PCs and computers to create common data areas.
SYSMAC NET Link Unit
CV500-SNT31
Up to 4 Units can
be mounted.
CV-series
CPU Rack/Expansion CPU Rack
Line Server
Center Power
Feeder
C200H
C500
C1000H
C2000H
Personal
computer
Note Up to four SYSMAC NET Link Units (CV500-SNT31) can be mounted to the
CPU Rack and/or Expansion CPU Rack of each CV-series PC.
SYSMAC NET Link System
Networks and Remote I/O Systems Section 1-10
11
SYSMAC LINK System Networks can also be created using SYSMAC LINK Systems. A SYSMAC LINK
System can consist of up to 62 PCs, including the CV500, CV1000, CV2000,
CVM1, C200H, C1000H, and C2000H. Communications between the PCs is ac-
complished via datagrams, data transfers, or automatic data links in ways simi-
lar to the SYSMAC NET Link System.
The main differences between SYSMAC NET Link and SYSMAC LINK Systems
is in the structure of automatic data links and in the system configuration, e.g.,
only PCs can be linked in SYSMAC LINK Systems, whereas other devices can
form nodes in SYSMAC NET Link Systems.
Datagrams transmit and receive data using a command/response format. Com-
mands can be issued from the user program by the DELIVER COMMAND
instruction (CMND(194)).
Data can also be transmitted and received using the NETWORK SEND and
NETWORK RECEIVE (SEND(192)/RECV(193)) instructions in the user pro-
gram. Up to 256 words of data can be transferred for each instruction.
Automatic data links allow PCs and computers to create common data areas.
SYSMAC LINK Unit
CV500-SLK11 (optical)
CV500-SLK21 (wired)
Up to 4 Units can
be mounted. CV-series
CPU Rack/Expansion CPU Rack
CV500/CV1000/
CV2000/CVM1
C200H/C1000H/
C2000H
Note Up to four SYSMAC LINK Units (CV500-SLK11/21) can be mounted to the CPU
Rack and/or Expansion CPU Rack of each CV-series PC.
Networks and Remote I/O Systems Section 1-10
12
Remote I/O can be enabled by adding a SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O System to
the PC. The SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O System is available in two types: opti-
cal and wired.
Two Remote I/O Master Units, optical or wired, can be mounted to the CV500 or
CVM1-CPU01-EV2 CPU Rack or Expansion CPU Rack. Four Remote I/O Mas-
ter Units can be mounted to the CV1000, CV2000, CVM1-CPU11-EV2, or
CVM1-CPU21-EV2 CPU Rack or Expansion CPU Rack.
Up to eight Remote I/O Slave Racks can be connected per PC.
Slaves can be used to provide up to 1,024 remote I/O points for the CV500 or
CVM1-CPU01-EV2, and up to 2,048 remote I/O points for the CV1000, CV2000,
CVM1-CPU11-EV2, or CVM1-CPU21-EV2.
A Programming Device (such as the CVSS/SSS) can be connected to up to two
Remote I/O Slave Units for each Remote I/O Master Unit as long as a total of no
more than four Programming Devices are connected per PC.
Remote I/O Master Unit
CV500-RM211 (optical)
CV500-RM221 (wired)
CV500, CVM1-CPU01-EV2: 2 Masters max. can be mounted
CV1000, CV2000, CVM1-CPU11-EV2, CVM1-CPU21-EV2:
4 Masters max. can be mounted
CV-series
CPU Rack/Expansion CPU Rack
Remote I/O Slave
Up to 8 Slave can be con-
nected per PC for 58M
Slaves; 4 Slaves for 122M
or 54MH Slaves.
Remote I/O Slave Unit
CV500-RT211 (optical)
CV500-RT221 (wired)
SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O
System
Networks and Remote I/O Systems Section 1-10
13
Remote I/O can also be enabled by using the C-series SYSMAC BUS Remote
I/O System with CV-series PC.
Remote I/O Master Units can be mounted on any slot of the CPU Rack, Expan-
sion CPU Rack, or Expansion I/O Rack. Up to four Masters can be mounted for
the CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2, up to eight Masters for the CV1000, CV2000,
CVM1-CPU11-EV2, or CVM1-CPU21-EV2.
For each Master, up to two Slave Racks can be connected for the CV500 or
CVM1-CPU01-EV2; up to eight Slave Racks for the CV1000, CV2000,
CVM1-CPU11-EV2, or CVM1-CPU21-EV2. No more than 16 Slave Racks can
be connected per PC.
Slaves can be used to provide up to 512 remote I/O points for the CV500 or
CVM1-CPU01-EV2; up to 1,024 remote I/O points for the CV1000, CV2000, o r
CVM1-CPU11-EV2, and up to 2,048 remote I/O points for the
CVM1-CPU21-EV2.
Programming Devices cannot be connected to SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks.
When a C200H 10-slot Backplane is used is used as a SYSMAC BUS Slave
Rack, only the eight leftmost slots can be used.
Remote I/O Master Unit
3G2A5-RM001-(P)EV1 (optical)
C500-RM201 (wired)
Up to 8 Units CV-series
CPU Rack/Expansion CPU
Rack/Expansion I/O Rack
C-series
Remote I/O Slave Rack
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O
System
Networks and Remote I/O Systems Section 1-10
14
The CV-series PCs can be connected to a host computer with the host link con-
nector via the CPU or a CV500-LK201 Host Link Unit mounted to a Rack.
RS-232C o r RS-422 communications can be used depending on the switch set-
ting. When RS-422 is selected, up to 32 PCs can be connected to a single host.
Data is transmitted and received by commands and responses.
Host link connector
Host
computer
BASIC Unit The BASIC Unit can be connected to a personal computer to enable commu-
nications with the PC using the BASIC programming language. Up to 512 bytes
(256 words) of data can be transferred between the BASIC Unit and the CPU b y
the PC READ/WRITE command without using the PC program.
Up to 256 words of data can also be transferred between the BASIC Unit and the
PC’s CPU by using the NETWORK SEND and NETWORK RECEIVE
(SEND(192)/RECV(193)) instructions in the PC program.
Host Link System
(SYSMAC WAY)
Networks and Remote I/O Systems Section 1-10
15
Data can also be transferred to other BASIC Units mounted on the same PC, or
to BASIC Units mounted to other PCs connected by networks formed using a
SYSMAC NET Link or SYSMAC LINK System. RS-232C, RS-422, Centronics,
and GPIB interfaces are available.
BASIC Unit
CV500-BSC1
Personal com-
puter
CV-series
CPU Rack/Expansion
CPU Rack
Personal Computer Unit The Personal Computer Unit is a full-fledged IBM PC/AT compatible that can be
used to run independent programming directly on a Rack to eliminate the need
for separate installation space. It can run along or connected to any of the normal
peripherals supported by IBM PC/AT compatibles (mice, keyboards, monitors,
data storage devices, etc.), and as a CPU Bus Unit, the Personal Computer Unit
interfaces directly to the PC’s CPU though the CPU bus to eliminate the need for
special interface hardware, protocols, or programming.
1-11 New CPUs and Related Units
The following new CV-series CPUs and related Units are included in this version
of the manual for the first time. Refer to relevant sections of this manual or the
CV-series PC Operation Manual: Ladder Diagrams
for further details.
Unit Model number Main specifications
CPU CVM1-CPU01-EV2 I/O capacity: 512 pts; Ladder diagrams only
CVM1-CPU11-EV2 I/O capacity: 1,024 pts; Ladder diagrams only
CVM1-CPU21-EV2 I/O capacity: 2,048 pts; Ladder diagrams only
CV500-CPU01-EV1 I/O capacity: 512 pts; Ladder diagrams or SFC + ladder diagrams
CV1000-CPU01-EV1 I/O capacity: 1,024 pts; Ladder diagrams or SFC + ladder diagrams
CV2000-CPU01-EV1 I/O capacity: 2,048 pts; Ladder diagrams or SFC + ladder diagrams
Temperature Controller
Data Link Unit CV500-TDL21 Connects up to 64 temperature controllers via 2 ports.
New CPUs and Related Units Section 1-11
16
1-12 CPU Comparison
The following table shows differences between the various CV-series CPUs.
CPU CVM1-
CPU01-EV2 CVM1-
CPU11-EV2 CVM1-
CPU21-EV2 CV500-
CPU01-EV1 CV1000-
CPU01-EV1 CV2000-
CPU01-EV1
P
Ladder diagrams Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
Program-
ming
SFC Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported Supported Supported
m
i
ng Instructions 284 284 285 169 170 170
Speed Basic
instructions (ms) 0.15 to 0.45 0.125 to 0.375 0.125 to 0.375 0.15 to 0.45 0.125 to 0.375 0.125 to 0.375
Other
instructions (ms) 0.6 to 9.9 0.5 to 8.25 0.5 to 8.25 0.6 to 9.9 0.5 to 8.25 0.5 to 8.25
Program capacity 30K words 30K words 62K words 30K words 62K words 62K words
Local I/O capacity 512 pts 1,024 pts 2,048 pts 512 pts 1,024 pts 2,048 pts
Remote
I/O
SYSMAC BUS/2 1,024 pts 2,048 pts 2,048 pts 1,024 pts 2,048 pts 2,048 pts
I/O
capacity SYSMAC BUS 512 pts 1,024 pts 2,048 pts 512 pts 1,024 pts 1,024 pts
DM Area 8K words 24K words 24K words 8K words 24K words 24K words
Expansion DM Area Not supported Not supported 32K words
each for 8
banks Not supported 32K words
each for 8
banks
32K words
each for 8
banks
Timers 512 1,024 1,024 512 1,024 1,024
Counters 512 1,024 1,024 512 1,024 1,024
SFC steps None None None 512 1,024 1,024
Step Flags None None None 512 1,024 1,024
Transition Flags None None None 512 1,024 1,024
1-13 Improved Specifications
1-13-1Upgraded Specifications
The following improvements were made December 1992 and are applicable to
all CV500-CPU01-E and CV1000-CPU01-E CPUs with lot numbers in which the
rightmost digit is 3 (3) or higher.
1, 2, 3...
1. The MLPX(110) (4-TO-16 DECODER) instruction has been improved to
also function as a 8-to-256 decoder and the DMPX(111) (16-TO-4 ENCOD-
ER) instruction has been improved to also function as a 256-to-8 encoder.
To enable this improvement, the digit designator (Di) has been changed as
shown below. Refer to
5-17-8 DATA DECODER – MLPX(110)
and
5-17-9
DATA ENCODER – DMPX(111)
for details on these instructions.
Specifies the first digit to be converted
4-to-16/16-to-4: 0 to 3
8-to-256/256-to-8: 0 or 1
Number of digits to be converted
4-to-16/16-to-4: 0 to 3 (1 to 4 digits)
8-to-256/256-to-8: 0 or 1 (1 or 2 digits)
Process
0: 4-to-16/16-to-4
1: 8-to-256/256-to-8
Digit number: 3210
0
2. The following operating parameter has been added to the PC Setup. Refer
to
Section 7 PC Setup
for details on the PC Setup.
JMP(004) 0000 Processing
Y: Enable multiple usage (default)
N: Disable multiple usage
Improved Specifications Section 1-13
17
3. The operation of Completion Flags for timers has been changed so that the
Completion Flag for a timer turns ON only when the timer instruction is
executed with a PV of 0000 and not when the timer’s PV is refreshed to a PV
value of 0000, as was previously done.
Only the timing of the activation of the Completion Flag has been changed,
and the timer’s PV is still refreshed at the same times (i.e., when the timer
instruction is executed, at the end of user program execution, and every
80 ms if the cycle time exceeds 80 ms).
Refer t o
5-3 Data Areas, Definers, and Flags
for details on timer and counter
instructions.
4. The READ(190) (I/O READ) and WRIT(191) (I/O WRITE) instructions have
been improved so that they can be used for Special I/O Units on Slave
Racks under the following conditions.
a) The lot number of the Remote I/O Master Unit and Remote I/O Slave Unit
must be the same as or latter than the following.
1992
October (Y: November; Z: December)
1st
01 X 2
b) The DIP switch on the Remote I/O Slave Unit must be set to “54MH.”
c) The Special I/O Unit must be one of the following: AD101, CT012,
CT021, CT041, ASC04, IDS01-V1, IDS02, IDS21, IDS22, or LDP01-V1.
(The NC221-E, NC222, CP131, and FZ001 cannot be mounted to Slave
Racks.)
Refer t o
5-35-1 I/O READ – READ(190)
and
5-35-3 I/O WRITE – WRIT(191)
for details on these instructions.
1-13-2Version-1 CPUs
CV-series CPUs were changed to version 1 from December 1993. The new
model numbers are as follows: CVM1-CPU01-EV1, CVM1-CPU11-EV1,
CV500-CPU-EV1, CV1000-CPU-EV1, and CV2000-CPU-EV1. (Of these, all
CVM1 CPUs were changed to version 2 from December 1994; refer to the next
sections for details.)
The following additions and improvements were made to create the version-1
CPUs.
PT Link Function The host link interface on the CPU can be used to connect directly to Program-
mable Terminals (PTs) to create high-speed data links. To use the PT links, turn
ON pin 3 of the DIP switch on the CPU. Pin 3 must be turned OFF for host link
connections.
EEPROM Writes With the new CPUs, you can write to EEPROM Memory Cards mounted to the
CPU by using the file write operation from a Peripheral Device. A Memory Card
Writer is no longer required for this write operation. Writing is possible in PRO-
GRAM mode only.
New Command A new I/O REGISTER command (QQ) has been added so that words from differ-
ent data areas can be read at the same time.
Faster Host Links The communications response time for the built-in host link interface on the CPU
has been improved by a factor of approximately 1.2.
Faster Searches The search speed from Peripheral Devices for instructions and operands has
been nearly doubled.
Improved Specifications Section 1-13
18
1-13-3Version-2 CVM1 CPUs
CVM1 CPUs were changed to version 2 and a new CPU was added from De-
cember 1994. The new model numbers are as follows: CVM1-CPU01-EV2,
CVM1-CPU11-EV2, and CVM1-CPU21-EV2.
The following additions and improvements were made to create the version-2
CPUs.
CMP/CMPL New versions of the CMP(020) and CMPL(021) have been added that are not
intermediate instructions. The new instructions are CMP(028) and CMPL(029)
and are programs as right-hand (final) instructions. A total of 24 other new com-
parison instructions have also been added with symbol mnemonics (e.g., >, +,
and <).
XFER(040) This instruction has been upgraded so that source and destination areas can
overlap.
DMPX(111) This instruction has been upgraded so that either the MSB or the LSB can be
specified for use as the end code. Previously only the the MSB could be used.
New Flags Underflow and Overflow Flags have been added at A50009 and A50010, re-
spectively. These flags can be turned ON or OFF when executing ADB, ADBL,
SBB, and SBBL and can be saved or loaded using CCL and CCS.
New Instructions A total of 125 new instructions have been added. These instructions are sup-
ported by version-2 CPUs only.
Faster Online Editing The time that operation is stopped for online editing has been reduced and is no
longer added to the cycle time. The following are just a couple of examples.
Edit Time operation is stopped
Adding or deleting one instruction block at the
beginning of a 62K-word program Approx. 0.5 s
Deleting an instruction block containing JME
from the beginning of a 62K-word program Approx. 2.0 s
The above speed increase also applies to all V1 CPUs with lot numbers in which
the rightmost digit is 5 (5) or higher.
New Host Link Commands New C-mode commands have been added and the functionality of existing com-
mands has been improved as follows:
New Commands
•RL/WL: Read and write commands for the CIO Area.
•RH/WH: Read and write commands for the CIO Area.
•CR: Read command for the DM Area.
•R#/R$/R%: SV read commands.
•W#/W$/W%: SV change commands.
•*: Initialization command.
Improved Commands
•The Link Area (CIO 1000 to CIO 1063) and Holding Area (CIO 1200 to
CIO 1299) can now be specified for the KS, KR, KC, and QQ commands.
•CVM1-CPU21-EV1 can now be read for the MM command.
The above new and improved commands can also be used with all V1 CPUs
with lot numbers in which the rightmost digit is 5 (5) or higher.
Note Only the following Programming Devices support version-2 CPUs: SSS
(C500-ZL3AT-E) and the CVM1-PRS21-V1 Programming Console
(CVM1-MP201-V1). Of these, the SSS does not support SFC and thus cannot
be used for the CV500, CV1000, and CV2000. Use the CVSS for these PCs.
Improved Specifications Section 1-13
19
1-13-4Upgraded Specifications
The following improvements were made December 1995 and are applicable to
all CV500/CV1000/CV2000-CPU01-EV1 and CVM1-CPU01/CPU11/CPU21-EV2
CPUs with lot numbers in which the rightmost digit is 6 (6) or higher.
Simplified Backup Function Added
Specifications have been changed so that the user program, Extended PC Set-
up, and IOM/DM data can be backed up from memory in the CPU Unit to a
Memory Card without using a Programming Device, and so that the data backed
up in the Memory Card can be transferred back to memory in the CPU Unit with-
out using a Programming Device. (This method is provided as an easy way to
backup and restore data. We still recommend that a Programming Device be
used to confirm all essential backup and restore operations.)
Use the following procedure to prepare to backup data in the memory of the CPU
Unit to a Memory Card.
1, 2, 3...
1. Insert a Memory Card that is not write-protected and check to be sure the
available capacity is sufficient for the files that will be created.
2. Confirm that the Memory Card is not being accessed by file memory opera-
tions or from a Programming Device.
3. Turn OFF pin 5 on the DIP switch on the CPU Unit.
Use the following procedure to prepare to transfer data on the Memory Card to
the memory of the CPU Unit.
1, 2, 3...
1. Insert the Memory Card and be sure that it contains the desired files.
2. Check the file checksums and sizes to be sure that they are correct.
3. Confirm that the CPU Unit is in PROGRAM mode.
4. Confirm that the Memory Card is not being accessed from a Programming
Device.
5. Turn ON pin 5 on the DIP switch on the CPU Unit.
Pins 1 and 2 on the DIP switch are used to specify the files to be transferred.
These pins are normally used to specify the baud rate for a Programming De-
vice, so b e sure to return them to their original settings when you finish backing
up or restoring data. Set pins 1 and 2 as shown in the following table.
Pin 1 Pin2 User program Extended PC Setup IOM/DM
OFF OFF Transferred. Transferred. Transferred.
OFF ON Transferred. Not transferred. Not transferred.
ON OFF Not transferred. Transferred. Not transferred.
ON ON Not transferred. Not transferred. Transferred.
File name
(See note.) BACKUP.OBJ BACKUP.STD IOM: BACKUP.IOM
DM: BACKUPDM.IOM
EM: BACKUPE*.IOM
(* = bank number)
Note Any files of the same name will be automatically overwritten when backing up to
Memory Card.
Data transfers are started by pressing the Memory Card power switch for 3 se-
conds. If the transfer ends normally, the Memory Card indicator will flash once
and will then go out when the transfer has completed. The time required will de-
pend o n the about of data being transferred. If there is insuf ficient memory avail-
able o n the Memory Card to back up the specified data or if the specified files are
not present on the Memory Card when restoring data, the Memory Card indica-
tor will flash 5 times and then go out.
Note Approximately 1 7 s will be required to backup all data except the EM files for the
CV1000 using a 1-Mbyte Memory Card. Approximately 2 s will be required to
restore the same data to the CPU Unit’s memory.
Backing Up Data to a
Memory Card
Transferring Data Back to
CPU Unit Memory
Specifying Files
Starting and Confirming
Data Transfers
Improved Specifications Section 1-13
20
Application of Commercial Memory Cards
The following commercially available memory cards can be used. The proce-
dures and applications for using these memory cards is exactly the same as for
the Memory Cards provided by OMRON.
•RAM Memory Cards conforming to JEIDA4.0 and of the following sizes:
64 Kbytes, 128 Kbytes, 256 Kbytes, 512 Kbytes, 1 Mbyte, and 2 Mbytes.
Note The 2-Mbyte Memory Cards cannot be used in the CV500-MCW01 Memory
Card Writer.
Improved Specifications Section 1-13
21
SECTION 2
Hardware Considerations
This section provides information on hardware aspects of CV-series PCs that are relevant to programming and software op-
eration. These include indicators on the CPU and basic PC configuration. This information is covered in more detail in the
CV-series PC Installation Guide.
2-1 CPU Components 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-1 Indicators 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-2 Switches 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2 Program Memory 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3 Memory Cards 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-1 Mounting and Removing Memory Cards 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-2 File Transfer between the CPU and Memory Card 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4 Data Memory and Expansion Data Memory Unit 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5 I/O Control Unit and I/O Interface Unit Displays 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6 Peripheral Devices 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7 PC Configuration 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
2-1 CPU Components
The following diagram shows the basic components of the CPU that are used in
general operation of the PC.
Indicators
EM Card compartment
(CV1000, CV2000, or
CVM1-CPU21-EV2 only;
optional)
Memory Card (optional), DIP switch,
and battery compartment
Do not pull out the Memory Card while
the Memory Card indicator is lit. The
Memory Card power switch must be
ON for the Memory Card to operate.
Protect keyswitch
Used to write-protect the Pro-
gram Memory (i.e., the Ex-
tended PC Setup and the user
program).
Peripheral device connector
Host interface
RS-422/RS-232C selector
Memory Card indicator
Lit when power is supplied to
the Memory Card.
2-1-1 Indicators CPU indicators provide visual information on the general operation of the PC.
Although not substitutes for proper error programming using the flags and other
error indicators provided in the data areas of memory, these indicators provide
ready confirmation of proper operation. CPU indicators are shown below and
are described in the following table. Indicators are the same for all CV-series
PCs.
Indicator Function
POWER (green) Lights when power is supplied to the CPU.
RUN (green) Lights when the CPU is operating normally.
ERROR (red) Lights when an error is discovered in diagnostic operations. When this indicator lights, the RUN
indicator will go off, CPU operation will be stopped, and all outputs from the PC will be turned OFF.
WDT (red) Lights when a CPU error (watchdog timer error) has been detected. When this indicator lights, the
RUN indicator will go off, CPU operation will be stopped, and all outputs from the PC will be turned
OFF.
ALARM (red) Lights when an error is discovered in diagnostic operations. PC operation will continue.
OUT INH (orange) Lights when the Output OFF Bit, A00015, is turned ON. All PC outputs will be turned OFF.
COMM (orange) Lights when the host link interface is transmitting or receiving data.
M/C ON (orange) Lights when power is supplied to the Memory Card. Press the Memory Card power switch once to
turn the power OFF or ON. Do not remove the Memory Card while the power is ON. It may flicker
when the simplified backup function operates. Refer to
1-13-4 Upgraded Specifications
for details.
CPU Components Section 2-1
23
2-1-2 Switches
The DIP switch and memory card power switch are shown below and the setting
of these and the other CPU switches are described in the following table.
Switches are the same for all CV-series PCs.
Switch Position Function
Protect keyswitch Vertical Program Memory (i.e., the Extended PC Setup
and the user program) is write-protected.
(See note 1)
Horizontal Program Memory is not write-protected.
RS-422/RS-232C
selector Up Host link communications set for RS-232.
(Also see CPU DIP switch pins 4 and 6 below.)
Down Host link communications set for RS-422.
(Also see CPU DIP switch pins 4 and 6 below.)
Memory Card power
switch (See note 4.) Not
applicable Press and release to turn the power on or off.
(The M/C ON indicator lights when power is on.)
CPU DIP Pins 1, 2
(S
OFF, OFF Peripheral device communications: 50,000 bps
(See
notes 3
ON, OFF Peripheral device communications: 19,200 bps
notes
3
and 4.) OFF, ON Peripheral device communications: 9,600 bps
ON, ON Peripheral device communications: 4,800 bps
Pin 3 OFF Communicate via Host Link communications
ON Communicate with PT via NT Link communica-
tions.
Pin 4 OFF Host link communications governed by PC Set-
up. (See note 2)
ON Following settings used for host link communica-
tions, regardless of PC Setup: 9,600 bps, unit
number 00, even parity, 7-bit data, 2 stop bits.
Note: The above settings apply to CPUs
manufactured from July 1995 (lot number **75
for July 1995). For CPUs manufactured before
July 1995 (lot number **65 for June 1995), only
1 stop bit will be set and the baud rate will be
2,400 bps.
Pin 5
(See
note 4.)
OFF Files are not transferred from the Memory Card
automatically at start-up.
ON The program file (AUTOEXEC.OBJ) and PC
Setup file (AUTOEXEC.STD) will be transferred
from the Memory Card to the CPU automatically
at start-up.
Pin 6 OFF The termination resistance is off.
ON The termination resistance is on.
(This setting is used for the last Unit in a RS-422
Host Link System only; intermediate Units must
be set to OFF.)
Note 1. The user program can also be protected from a Peripheral Device.
2. Factory settings are 9,600 bps, 7-bit data, even parity, and 2 stop bits.
3. The baud rate must be set to 50,000 bps when the Graphic Programming
Console o r Programming Console is connected to the PC, and to 9,600 bps
when a computer running the CV Support Software is connected.
4. The following switches and pins are also used for the simplified backup
function. Pins 1 and 2 are used to specify files, pin 5 is used to specify the
direction o f the transfer, and the Memory Card power switch is used to start
data transfers. Refer to
1-13-4 Upgraded Specifications
for details.
CPU Components Section 2-1
OFF ON
123456ON
Memory Card
power switch
DIP switch
24
2-2 Program Memory
Program Memory is contained in the CPU and is divided into two areas, the PC
Setup and the Program Area. There are 32K words of Program Memory avail-
able in the CV500, CVM1-CPU01-EV2, or CVM1-CPU11-EV2, and 64K words
available in the CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1-CPU21-EV2. The first 2K words in
both groups of PCs is taken up by the PC Setup, leaving 30K words in the
CV500, CVM1-CPU01-EV2, or CVM1-CPU11-EV2 Program Area, and 62K
words in the CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1-CPU21-EV2 Program Area. (One word
contains two bytes.)
Program Memory is backed up by the CPU battery, so data will not be lost during
a power interruption.
Note The program memory chip is built into CV-series PCs and does not need to be
installed by the user.
This area of Program Memory contains the settings described in
Section 7 PC
Setup
. Basic options in PC operation (such as the method of I/O refreshing and
the PC mode at start-up) are specified in these settings.
The PC Setup is stored in EEPROM, so this data will not be lost even if the back-
up battery power is interrupted.
This area of Program Memory contains the SFC and/or ladder program.
The following table shows the maximum program size (combined total of the
SFC and ladder programs) when SFC programming is used and the maximum
number of steps, transitions, and actions in the SFC program.
PC Program capacity SFC steps SFC transitions SFC actions
CV500 30K words 512 512 1,024
CV1000 62K words 1,024 1,024 2,048
CV2000 62K words 1,024 1,024 2,048
CVM1-CPU01/11-EV2 30K words None (SFC programming is not supported.)
CVM1-CPU21-EV2 62K words
(gg )
Note When ladder programming is used, the program capacity includes 1.85K words
reserved for system use.
PC Setup
Program Area
Program Memory Section 2-2
!
25
2-3 Memory Cards
File memory (used to store programs and other data) is attached to the CPU in
the form of Memory Cards. The portable, high-capacity Cards allow large quan-
tities of data to be handled by simply switching Memory Cards. Because
Memory Cards are not provided with the PC, they must be selected and installed
in the CPU. Three types of Memory Card are available: RAM, EPROM, and EE-
PROM. Each of these comes in various capacities. Some of the memory is used
for file management and directories.
Memory type Total capacity File capacity Model No. Battery life
(See note 1)
RAM 64K bytes 61K bytes HMC-ES641 About 5 yrs
128K bytes 125K bytes HMC-ES151 About 3 yrs
256K bytes 251K bytes HMC-ES251 About 1 yr
512K bytes 506K bytes HMC-ES551 About 0.5 yrs
EEPROM
(S 2)
64K bytes 61K bytes HMC-EE641 Not applicable
(See note 2) 128K bytes 125K bytes HMC-EE151
EPROM
(S 2)
512K bytes 506K bytes HMC-EP551
(See note 2) 1 Mbyte 1016K bytes HMC-EP161
Note 1. Batteries should be replaced before the end of their life expectancy. Refer to
the
CV-series PC Installation Guide
for details on battery replacement.
2. Cannot be used without an CV500-MCW Memory Card Writer.
The following commercially available memory cards can be used for all
CV500/CV1000/CV2000-CPU01-EV1 and CVM1-CPU01/CPU11/CPU21-EV2
CPUs with lot numbers in which the rightmost digit is 6 (6) or higher. The
procedures and applications for using these memory cards is exactly the same
as for the Memory Cards provided by OMRON.
• RAM Memory Cards conforming to JEIDA4.0 and of the following sizes:
64 Kbytes, 128 Kbytes, 256 Kbytes, 512 Kbytes, 1 Mbyte, and 2 Mbytes.
Note The 2-Mbyte Memory Cards cannot be used in the CV500-MCW01 Memory
Card Writer.
Memory Cards must be formatted before use. RAM and EEPROM Cards can be
formatted with the CVSS/SSS or the CV500-MCW Memory Card Writer;
EPROM Memory Cards can be formatted with the CV500-MCW Memory
Card Writer only.
Caution Memory Cards can be damaged by twisting, shock, or exposure to high temper-
ature, humidity, or direct sunlight. Handle them with care.
2-3-1 Mounting and Removing Memory Cards
Mount a Memory Card to the CPU using the following procedure.
1, 2, 3...
1. Open the cover of the Memory Card compartment.
2. If the Memory Card is RAM or EEPROM, set the write-protect switch to OFF
so that data can be written to the Card.
3. Insert the Memory Card into its compartment. In doing so, a slight resistance
will be felt as the connector on the Memory Card mates with the connector
on the CPU. Continue pushing until the Memory Card is inserted completely
into the CPU. If the Memory Card ON/OFF switch is ON, the Memory Card
indicator will light.
Mounting a Memory Card
Memory Cards Section 2-3
26
4. Close the cover.
Memory Card indicator
Memory Card
ON/OFF switch
Memory Card
eject button
Memory Card
Cover
Removing a Memory Card
1, 2, 3...
1. Open the cover of the Memory Card compartment.
2. Press the Memory Card ON/OFF switch once if the Memory Card indicator
is lit. The Memory Card indicator will turn OFF.
3. Press the Memory Card eject button. The Memory Card will be released al-
lowing it to be removed.
4. Pull out the Memory Card.
5. Close the cover.
Note 1. Do not expose the Memory Card to high temperature, humidity, or direct
sunlight.
2. Do not bend the Card or subject it to shock.
3. Do not apply excess force to the Card when inserting or removing it.
4. Do not remove the Card while the Memory Card indicator is lit; doing so may
result in data errors in the memory.
2-3-2 File Transfer between the CPU and Memory Card
Data files can be transferred between the Memory Card and PC data areas with
the FILR(180) and FILW(181) instructions. A program file can be transferred
from the Memory Card with FILP(182) or FLSP(183) to change the program dur-
ing operation. Refer to details on these instructions later in the manual.
Memory Card files are identified by both their filename and filename extension.
The following table lists the filenames and filename extensions that are used
with the PC. Filenames are eight characters long and recorded in ASCII. If fewer
than eight characters are needed, enter spaces (ASCII 20) in the remaining b y -
tes.
Type of file Filename
Extended PC Setup1
filename
.STD
Data files
filename
.IOM
Ladder program files (files saved with the partial save
operation)
filename
.LDP
SFC program files (one step)
filename
.SFC
Program file (complete program)
filename
.OBJ
Extended PC Setup1 (transferred at start-up) AUTOEXEC.STD
Program file (complete program transferred at start-up) AUTOEXEC.OBJ
Note 1. Extended PC Setup includes the PC Setup, I/O table, routing tables, data
link tables for data links in SYSMAC LINK and SYSMAC NET Link Systems,
Memory Card Files
Memory Cards Section 2-3
27
Communications Unit settings, BASIC Unit memory switches, and custom-
ized settings (function codes and data areas).
2. The files that will be transferred at start-up must be named “AUTOEXEC.”
3. Files called BACKUP are created when the simplified backup function is
used. Refer to
1-13-4 Upgraded Specifications
for details.
There are two methods for automatic transfer of files at start-up:
1, 2, 3...
1. When pin 5 of the CPU DIP switch is ON, the Extended PC Setup file (AUTO-
EXEC.STD) and the program file (AUT OEXEC.OBJ) are both transferred t o
Program Memory at start-up. If either of the files is missing, a memory error
will occur and neither file will be transferred.
2. The PC Setup can be set (setting D, Program Transfer at Start-up) to trans-
fer the program file (AUTOEXEC.OBJ) from the Memory Card to the PC au-
tomatically when the PC is turned on. In this case the extended PC Setup file
(AUTOEXEC.STD) is not transferred.
With either method, the transfer will not proceed if the write-protect switch is ON,
but will proceed even if the program memory access right is restricted from the
CVSS/SSS. The transfer normally takes about 4 seconds.
To enable file transfer at start-up, the proper files must be recorded on a Memory
Card in advance from the CVSS/SSS. The Extended PC Setup file (AUTOEX-
EC.STD) can be transferred directly from the PC to the Memory Card in online
operations from the CVSS/SSS. The program file (AUTOEXEC.OBJ) can be
created on the Memory Card using one of the following two operations.
• In online operations, transfer the program and other files to the PC and then
transfer the program file to the Memory Card from the PC.
• Convert the program into an object file in offline CVSS/SSS operations, and
then transfer it directly to the Memory Card in online operations.
If the PC is set to transfer the program at start-up but the transfer cannot be com-
pleted for some reason, the Memory Card Startup Transfer Error Flag (A40309)
will b e turned ON, a memory error will occur, and the PC will not begin operation.
When the program is not transferred, either find and eliminate the cause of the
error or change the PC settings so that the program won’t be transferred, and
then turn the PC of f and on. The following are possible reasons that the program
cannot be transferred:
• The write-protect switch is ON.
• One or both AUTOEXEC files are missing.
• The Memory Card power is OFF. (If the M/C ON indicator is not lit when the PC
power is ON, press the Memory Card power switch.)
• The Memory Card is not installed.
It is not possible to write to an EPROM Card installed in the CPU. Use the
CV500-MCW Memory Card Writer t o write to an EPROM Card. Refer to the
File Transfer at Start-up
Reading and Writing
Memory Card Files
Memory Cards Section 2-3
28
Memory Card Writer Operation Manual
for details. Set the drive name to “0”
when accessing a Memory Card.
The RAM and EEPROM cards have a write-protect switch, as shown in the dia-
gram below. Turn this switch to OFF when writing to or erasing the Memory Card.
ON
OFF
The three methods of reading and writing Memory Card files are listed below.
1, 2, 3...
1. Reading and writing can be performed as an online operation with a Periph-
eral Device, e.g., the CVSS/SSS.
2. Reading and writing can be performed by a command from a host computer.
3. Reading and writing can be performed by instructions in the ladder diagram
program. The four instructions are described in the following table. Refer to
Section 5 Instruction Set
for details.
Instruction Function Filename
FILR(180)
(READ DATA FILE) Reads the specified data file from the Memory Card and writes it to a
specified data area.
filename
.IOM
FILW(181)
(WRITE DATA FILE) Reads a specified amount of data file from a specified data area and
writes it to (or creates) the specified data file in the Memory Card.
filename
.IOM
FILP(182)
(READ PROGRAM FILE) Reads the specified ladder program file (either one action program or
one transition program if SFC programming is being used) from the
Memory Card and writes it in Program Memory.
filename
.LDP
FLSP(183)
(CHANGE STEP PROGRAM) Reads the specified SFC program file (one step) from the Memory
Card and writes it in Program Memory.
filename
.SFC
4. Reading and writing can be performed by using the simplified backup func-
tion. Refer to
1-13-4 Upgraded Specifications
for details.
2-4 Data Memory and Expansion Data Memory Unit
The size of the Data Memory Area for the CV-series PCs is shown in the follow-
ing table.
PC DM Area capacity Addresses
CV500 or
CVM1-CPU01-EV2 8K words D00000 to D08191
CV1000, CV2000,
CVM1-CPU11-EV2 or
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
24K words D00000 to D24575
If the above capacities are insufficient, an Expansion Data Memory Unit can be
added to create an EM (Expansion Data Memory) Area with the CV1000,
CV2000, or CVM1-CPU21-EV2. This Unit must be purchased separately as an
option and is not available for other PCs. The EM Area operates the same as the
DM Area, but the EM Area memory is contained in the EM Unit, while DM Area
memory is internal.
EM Area memory is divided into banks of 32K words each. Words E00000 to
E32765 of the current bank can be accessed. The current bank number is con-
tained in the least significant digit of A511. A511 is in a read-only area, but the
Data Memory and Expansion Data Memory Unit Section 2-4
29
current bank number can be changed with the EMBC(171) instruction. Refer to
Section 5 Instruction Set
for details.
There are three models of EM Units available, as shown in the following table.
Model Memory capacity Memory banks
CV1000-DM641 64K words 2 (0 and 1)
CV1000-DM151 128K words 4 (0 to 3)
CV1000-DM251 256K words 8 (0 to 7)
The following diagram shows the structure of the EM Unit and identifies its main
components.
Memory element
Pullout
lever
Backup
capacitor
Expansion Data Memory Unit
CPU
connector
2-5 I/O Control Unit and I/O Interface Unit Displays
The I/O Control Unit and I/O Interface Unit have four-character 7-segment dis-
plays on the front. There are four display modes that display various information
from the CPU, and the current display mode is indicated by the position of the
decimal point on the display, as shown in the following diagram.
Lit in mode 1
Lit in mode 2
Lit in mode 3
Lit in mode 4
Pressing the mode selector switch changes the display to the next mode. The
Unit will automatically enter the mode specified in the PC Setup (default setting:
mode 1). Refer to
Section 7 PC Setup
for details.
If the CPU Rack power supply is OFF or an initialization error has occurred, the
displays will show “––––” and the rack number will be displayed when the mode
selector switch is held down, but the mode will not be changed.
I/O Control Unit and I/O Interface Unit Displays Section 2-5
30
In mode 1, the first I/O word allocated to that Rack is displayed. If the I/O table
hasn’t been registered yet, or an error occurred during registration, the display
will show “0000.” In the following example, the first word allocated is CIO 0036.
16-
pt.
I/O
Word
36
Indicates mode 1
Word
37 Word
38
16-
pt.
I/O
In mode 2, the current CPU status and the rack number of that Rack are dis-
played. The information displayed by the four digits is listed below.
1, 2, 3...
1. The leftmost digit indicates whether or not the CPU is operating.
“a” indicates it is operating.
“” indicates it is stopped.
2. The second digit indicates whether or not an error has occurred in the PC.
“e” indicates that a fatal error has occurred.
“f” indicates that a non-fatal error has occurred.
“” indicates that no errors have occurred.
3. The third digit from the left indicates whether or not a peripheral device is
connected to the CPU or Expansion CPU Rack. If a peripheral device is al-
ready connected, another cannot be connected.
“b” indicates that a peripheral device is connected.
“” indicates that a peripheral device is not connected.
Note Only one Peripheral Device can be connected to the CPU and I/O In-
terface Units for each PC, but three additional Peripheral Devices
can be connected to the SYSMAC BUS/2 Slave Racks.
4. The rightmost digit indicates the rack number.
Indicates the CPU is in the RUN mode, a non-fatal error has occurred,
a Peripheral Device is connected, and the rack number is 2.
Indicates the rack number
Indicates whether or not Peripheral Devices are connected.
: A Peripheral Device is connected to the CPU or to an I/O Inter-
face Unit.
: No Peripheral Device is connected to the CPU or to an I/O Inter-
face Unit.
Indicates mode 2
Indicates the error status of the CPU.
: A fatal error has occurred.
: A non-fatal error has occurred.
: No error has occurred.
Indicates the operating status of the CPU.
: The CPU is operating.
: The CPU has stopped.
In mode 3, the display shows a 4-character message when an IODP(189)
instruction i s executed in the program for that Unit. The display mode of the des-
Display Mode 1
Display Mode 2
Display Mode 3
I/O Control Unit and I/O Interface Unit Displays Section 2-5
31
tination unit can be changed to mode 3 automatically by the instruction. Refer to
Section 5 Instruction Set
for details on IODP(189).
Mode 4 i s not being used currently. In mode 4, the display will show only the deci-
mal point indicating it is in mode 4.
2-6 Peripheral Devices
A total of four Peripheral Devices can be connected to a CV-series PC, as shown
in the following table. Only one Peripheral Device can be connected to the CPU
or an I/O Interface Unit.
If a Peripheral Device is connected to the CPU or an I/O Interface Unit, 3 more
Peripheral Devices can be connected to SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O Slave
Units. I f n o Peripheral Devices are connected to the CPU or I/O Interface Unit, 4
Peripheral Devices can be connected to SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O Slave
Units. U p t o 2 Peripheral Devices can be connected to Remote I/O Slaves under
a single Remote I/O Master Unit.
Connecting Unit Max. connection combinations
CPU 1 0 0
I/O Interface Unit 0 1 0
SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O Slave
Units 334
Peripheral Devices can be connected even when the PC is ON. Insert the cable
connector until it locks. Using pins 1 and 2 on the CPU DIP switch, set the baud
rate to 50,000 bps for the Graphic Programming Console or Programming Con-
sole or to 9,600 bps for a computer running the CV Support Software.
If the ERROR indicator lights when the PC is turned ON, find the source of the
error by displaying error messages at the terminal. For a memory error, perform
the memory clear or program transfer operation online from the CVSS/SSS and
then clear the error. If a memory error cannot be cleared, there might be a hard-
ware problem in the CPU.
Note 1. I/O tables cannot be created or edited and broadcast testing is not possible
for SYSMAC LINK Systems if the Peripheral Device is connected to a Slave
in a SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O System.
2. Refer to
Appendix A Standard Models
in the
CV-series PC Installation
Guide
for a list of available Peripheral Devices.
2-7 PC Configuration
The following is an overview of the PC configuration. Refer to the
CV -series P C
Installation Guide
for details.
The basic PC configuration consists of three types of Rack: a CPU Rack, an Ex-
pansion CPU Rack, and one or more Expansion I/O Racks. The Expansion CPU
Rack and Expansion I/O Racks are not a required part of the basic system.
An Expansion CPU Rack is used when the CPU Rack cannot accommodate the
required number of CPU Bus Units (SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O Master Units,
BASIC Units, SYSMAC NET Link Units, and SYSMAC LINK Units). Expansion
I/O Racks are used to increase the number of I/O points, but do not support CPU
Bus Units. An illustration of these Racks is provided in
3-3-1 I/O Area
.
An Expansion CPU Rack cannot be connected to a CVM1-BC103/053 Back-
plane.
A fourth type of Rack, called a Slave Rack, can be used when the PC is provided
with a SYSMAC BUS or SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O System.
A CPU Rack consists of four components: (1) The CPU Backplane, to which the
CPU, the Power Supply, and other Units are mounted. (2) The CPU, which
Display Mode 4
Connecting Peripheral
Devices
CPU Racks
PC Configuration Section 2-7
32
executes the program and controls the PC. (3) Other Units, such as I/O Units,
Special I/O Units, and Link Units, which provide the physical I/O terminals corre-
sponding to I/O points. (4) The I/O Control Unit which provides connections to an
Expansion CPU Rack and Expansion I/O Racks. The I/O Control Unit is not re-
quired if an Expansion CPU Rack and Expansion I/O Racks are not connected
and connect be mounted to CVM1-BC103/053 Backplanes. (5) The Power Sup-
ply, which provides power to the CPU Rack.
A CPU Rack can be used alone or it can be connected to other Racks to provide
additional I/O points. The CPU Backplane provides slots to which other Units
can be mounted. Depending on the model of Backplane used, either three, five,
or ten slots are available for other Units.
An Expansion CPU Rack Consists of an Expansion CPU Backplane, a Power
Supply, and an I/O Interface Unit to connect to the CPU Rack. Eleven slots are
available for other Units. Up to 16 CPU Bus Units can be connected to the CPU
Rack and Expansion CPU Rack. Expansion I/O Racks can be connected to the
Expansion CPU Rack.
An Expansion CPU Rack cannot be connected to a CVM1-BC103/053 Back-
plane.
An Expansion I/O Rack can be thought of as an extension of the PC because it
provides additional slots to which other Units (except CPU Bus Units) can be
mounted. It is built onto an Expansion I/O Backplane to which a Power Supply
and other Units are mounted. Depending on the model of Backplane used, either
four, six, or 11 slots are available for other Units.
An I/O Interface Unit is also mounted to any Expansion I/O Rack to interface the
Rack to the CPU or Expansion CPU Rack. Also, an I/O Control Unit must be
mounted to any CPU Rack to which more than one Expansion I/O Rack is
mounted. If only one Expansion I/O Rack and no Expansion CPU Rack is con-
nected, the I/O Interface and I/O Control Units are not required and the Expan-
sion I/O Rack can be connected directly to the CPU Rack.
An Expansion I/O Rack is always connected to the CPU via the connectors on
the Backplanes, allowing communication between the two Racks. With C-series
Expansion I/O Racks, up to seven Expansion I/O Racks can be connected in
series to the CPU Rack. With CV-series Expansion I/O Racks, up to seven Ex-
pansion I/O Racks can be connected to the CPU Rack in two series. If an Expan-
sion CPU Rack is used, only six Expansion I/O Racks can be connected.
Only one Expansion I/O Rack cannot be connected to a CVM1-BC103/053
Backplane.
I/O words are allocated to Units mounted on the CPU, Expansion CPU, and Ex -
pansion I/O Racks by rack number, regardless of the order in which the Racks
are connected. The CPU Rack number is fixed at 0, so I/O bits are always allo-
cated first to Units on the CPU Rack. Never set the rack number of an Expansion
CPU or Expansion I/O Rack to 0.
Note The PC Setup can be used to control I/O word allocation to Racks and override
allocation by rack number. Refer to
Section 7 PC Setup
for details.
The rack numbers for Expansion CPU and Expansion I/O Racks are set with the
rack number switch (RACK No.) on the I/O Interface Unit mounted on the Rack.
Set the rack number with a standard screwdriver after turning off the Rack power
supply and be careful not to damage the switch groove.
Note 1. A duplication error will occur if 2 or more Racks have the same rack number .
2. If a rack number is set to 8 or 9, the Rack will not be recognized by the CPU.
3. If a single Expansion I/O Rack is connected to a CPU Rack, an I/O Interface
Unit is not required and the rack number of Expansion I/O Rack is fixed at 1.
4. When mounting an Interrupt Input Unit to an Expansion CPU Rack, always
set the rack number of the Expansion CPU Rack to 1.
Expansion CPU Racks
Expansion I/O Racks
Setting Rack Numbers
PC Configuration Section 2-7
33
SECTION 3
Memory Areas
This section describes the way in which PC memory is broken into various areas used for different purposes. The contents of
each area and addressing conventions, including the use of indirect addressing and addressing registers, are also described.
3-1 Introduction 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Data Area Structure 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3 CIO (Core I/O) Area 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-1 I/O Area 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-2 Work Areas 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-3 SYSMAC BUS/2 Area 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-4 Link Area 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-5 Holding Area 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-6 CPU Bus Unit Area 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-7 CompoBus/D Areas 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-8 SYSMAC BUS Area 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 TR (Temporary Relay) Area 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5 CPU Bus Link Area 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6 Auxiliary Area 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-1 Restart Continuation Bit 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-2 IOM Hold Bit 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-3 Forced Status Hold Bit 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-4 Error Log Reset Bit 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-5 Output OFF Bit 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-6 CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-7 SYSMAC BUS Error Check Bits 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-8 Momentary Power Interruption Time 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-9 CVSS/SSS Flags 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-10 Start-up Time 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-11 Power Interruption Time 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-12 Number of Power Interruptions 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-13 Service Disable Bits 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-14 Message Flags 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-15 Error Log Area 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-16 CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-17 Wait Flags 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-18 Peripheral Device Flags 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-19 CPU Bus Unit Service Interval 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-20 Memory Card Flags 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-21 Error Code 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-22 FALS Flag 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-23 SFC Fatal Error Flag and Error Code 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-24 Cycle Time Too Long Flag 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-25 Program Error Flag 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-26 I/O Setting Error Flag 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-27 Too Many I/O Points Flag 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-28 CPU Bus Error and Unit Flags 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-29 Duplication Error Flag and Duplicate Rack/CPU Bus Unit Numbers 61. . . . . . . . .
3-6-30 I/O Bus Error Flag and I/O Bus Error Slot/Rack Numbers 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-31 Memory Error Flag 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-32 Power Interruption Flag 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
3-6-33 CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Flag and Unit Number 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-34 Battery Low Flags 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-35 SYSMAC BUS Error Flag, Check Bits, and Master/Unit Numbers 62. . . . . . . . . .
3-6-36 SYSMAC BUS/2 Error Flag and Master/Unit Numbers 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-37 CPU Bus Unit Error Flag and Unit Numbers 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-38 I/O Verification Error Flag 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-39 SFC Non-fatal Error Flag and Error Code 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-40 Indirect DM BCD Error Flag 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-41 Jump Error Flag 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-42 FAL Flag and FAL Number 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-43 Memory Error Area Location 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-44 Memory Card Start-up Transfer Error Flag 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-45 CPU-recognized Rack Numbers 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-46 CPU Bus Unit Number Setting Error Flag 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-47 CPU Bus Link Error Flag 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-48 Maximum Cycle Time 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-49 Present Cycle Time 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-50 Instruction Execution Error Flag, ER 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-51 Arithmetic Flags 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-52 Step Flag 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-53 First Cycle Flag 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-54 Clock Pulse Bits 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-55 Network Status Flags 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-56 EM Status Flags 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7 Transition Area 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8 Step Area 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9 Timer Area 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10 Counter Area 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11 DM and EM Areas 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12 Index and Data Registers (IR and DR) 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
3-1 Introduction
Various types of data are required to achieve effective and correct control. To
facilitate managing this data, the PC is provided with various memory areas
for data, each of which performs a different function. The areas generally ac-
cessible by the user for use in programming are classified as data areas.
Details, including the name, range, and function of each area are summa-
rized in the following table. The PC memory addresses are shown in paren-
theses. These memory address are used for indirect addressing. Refer to
3-11 DM and EM Areas
and to
5-3 Data Areas, Definers, and Flags
for de-
tails on indirect addressing.
Area PC Range Function
CIO Area
(Core I/O) All Words: CIO 0000 to CIO 2555
Bits: CIO 000000 to CIO 255515
($0000 to $09FB)
The CIO (Core I/O) Area is divided into
eight sections, five controlling I/O and three
used to store and manipulate data
internally.
Refer to
3-3 CIO (Core I/O) Area
for details.
Temporary
Relay Area All TR0 to TR7 (bits only)
($09FF) Used to temporarily store execution
conditions. TR bits are not input when
programming directly in ladder diagrams,
and are used only when programming in
mnemonic form.
CPU Bus
Link Area All Words: G000 to G255
Bits: G00000 to G25515
($0A00 to $0AFF)
G000 is the PC Status Area; G001 to G004,
the Clock Area. G008 to G127 contain PC
output bits; G128 to G255, CPU Bus Unit
output bits.
Auxiliary
Area All Words: A000 to A511
Bits: A00000 to A51115
($0B00 to $0CFF)
Contains flags and bits with special
functions.
Transition
Area CV500 TN0000 to TN0511
($0D00 to $0D1F) Transition Flags for the transitions in the
SFC program.
CV1000/CV2000 TN0000 to TN1023 ($0D00 to $0D3F)
Step Area CV500 ST0000 to ST0511 ($0E00 to $0E1F) Step Flags for steps in the SFC program. A
i i h i fl i ON
CV1000/CV2000 ST0000 to ST1023 ($0E00 to $0E3F)
gg
step is active when its flag is ON.
Timer Area CV500/
CVM1-CPU01-EV2 T0000 to T0511
(Completion Flags: $0F00 to $0F1F
Present Values: $1000 to $11FF)
Used to define timers (normal, high-speed,
and totalizing) and to access Completion
Flags, PV, and SV.
CV1000/CV2000/
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
T0000 to T1023
(Completion Flags: $0F00 to $0F3F
Present Values: $1000 to $13FF)
Counter
Area CV500/
CVM1-CPU01-EV2 C0000 to C0511
(Completion Flags: $0F80 to $0F9F
Present Values: $1800 to $19FF)
Used to define counters (normal, reversible,
and transition) and to access Completion
Flags, PV, and SV.
CV1000/CV2000/
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
C0000 to C1023
(Completion Flags: $0F80 to $0FBF
Present Values: $1800 to $1BFF)
DM Area CV500/
CVM1-CPU01-EV2 D00000 to D08191 ($2000 to $3FFF) Used for internal data storage and
manipulation.
CV1000/CV2000/
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
D00000 to D24575 ($2000 to $7FFF)
EM Area CV1000/CV2000
CVM1-CPU21-EV2 E00000 to E32765 for each bank; 2,
4, or 8 banks ($8000 to $8FFD) EM functions just like DM. An Extended
Data Memory Unit must be installed.
Index
registers All IR0 to IR2 Used for indirect addressing.
Data
registers All DR0 to DR2 Generally used for indirect addressing.
Introduction Section 3-1
36
Some data areas contain flags and/or control bits. Flags are bits that are au-
tomatically turned ON and OFF to indicate particular operation status. Al-
though some flags (e.g., the Carry Flag) can be turned ON and OFF by the
user, most flags are read only; they cannot be controlled directly.
Control bits are bits turned ON and OFF by the user to control specific as-
pects of operation. Any bit given a name using the word bit rather than the
word flag is a control bit, e.g., Restart Bits are control bits.
3-2 Data Area Structure
Addresses There are two different sets of addresses that can be used to access PC
memory: data area addresses or memory addresses. Data area addresses ar e
used when specifying an address directly as an operand for an instruction.
Memory addresses are used when using indirect addressing.
When designating a data area address, the acronym for the area (the let-
ter(s) identifying the data area) is always required for any area except the
CIO (Core I/O) Area. Although the CIO acronym is given for clarity in text ex-
planations, it is not required and not entered when programming.
It is possible also to access any memory location through its hexadecimal PC
memory address with indirect addressing. Refer to
3-11 DM and EM Areas
,
and
3-12 IR and DR Areas
, for details on indirect addressing.
Word Structure Memory areas are divided up into words, each of which consists of 16 bits num-
bered 00 through 15 from right (least significant) to left (most significant). CIO
words 0000 and 0001 are shown below with bit numbers. Here, the content of
each word is shown as all zeros. Bit 00 is called the rightmost bit; bit 15, the left-
most bit.
The term least significant bit is often used for rightmost bit; the term most
significant bit, for leftmost bit.
Bit number
CIO word 0000 0000000000000000
CIO word 0001 0000000000000000
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Data in the DM Area and EM Area, as well as Timer and Counter PVs can be
accessed as words only. Transition Flags, Step Flags, and Timer and Count-
er Completion Flags can be accessed as bits only. You cannot designate any
of these for operands requiring bit data. Data in the CIO, CPU Bus Link, and
Auxiliary Areas is accessible either by word or by bit, depending on the
instruction in which the data is being used.
To designate one of these areas by word, all that is necessary is the acro-
nym, if required, and the two-, three-, or four-digit word address. To desig-
nate an area by bit, the word address is combined with the bit number as a
single four- to six-digit address. The following table shows examples of this.
The two rightmost digits of a bit address must indicate a bit between 00 and
15, e.g., the rightmost digit must be 5 or less when the next digit to the left
is 1.
Flags and Control Bits
Data Area Structure Section 3-2
37
The same timer and counter numbers can be used to designate either the
present value (PV) of the timer or counter, or the Completion Flag for the tim-
er or counter. This is explained in more detail in
3-9 Timer Area
and
3-10
Counter Area
.
Area Word designation Bit designation
CIO 0000 000015 (leftmost bit in word CIO 0000)
CIO 0252 025200 (rightmost bit in word CIO 0252)
DM D01250 Not possible
TT215 (designates PV) T215 (designates Completion Flag)
A A012 A01200
To designate a word by its PC Memory address, write the hexadecimal ad-
dress to an Index Register, DM, or EM word and indirectly address the oper-
and through that register or word. Refer to
3-11 DM and EM Areas
and
3-12
IR and DR Areas
for details on indirect addressing.
Word data input as decimal values is stored in binary-coded decimal (BCD);
word data entered as hexadecimal is stored in binary form. Each four bits of
a word represent one digit, either a hexadecimal or decimal digit, numerically
equivalent to the value of the binary bits. One word of data thus contains four
digits, which are numbered from right to left. These digit numbers and the
corresponding bit numbers for one word are shown below.
Bit number
Contents 0000000000000000
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Digit number 3210
When referring to the entire word, the digit numbered 0 is called the right-
most digit; the one numbered 3, the leftmost digit.
When inputting data, it must be input in the proper form for the intended pur-
pose. This is no problem when designating bits, which are turned ON (equiv-
alent to a binary value of 1) or OFF (a binary value of 0). When inputting
word data, however, it is important to input it either as decimal or as hexade-
cimal, depending on what is called for by the instruction it is to be used for.
Section 5 Instruction Set
specifies when a particular form of data is required
for an instruction.
Binary and hexadecimal can be easily converted back and forth because
each four bits of a binary number is numerically equivalent to one digit of a
hexadecimal number. The binary number 0101111101011111 is converted to
hexadecimal by considering each set of four bits in order from the right.
Binary 1111 is hexadecimal F; binary 0101 is hexadecimal 5. The hexadeci-
mal equivalent would thus be 5F5F, or 24,415 in decimal (163 x 5 + 162 x 15
+ 16 x 5 + 15).
Decimal and BCD are easily converted back and forth. In this case, each
BCD digit (i.e., each group of four BCD bits) is numerically equivalent to the
corresponding decimal digit. The BCD bits 0101011101010111 are converted
to decimal by considering each four bits from the right. Binary 0101 is deci-
mal 5; binary 0111 is decimal 7. The decimal equivalent would thus be 5,757.
Note that this is not the same numeric value as the hexadecimal equivalent
of 0101011101010111, which would be 5,757 hexadecimal, or 22,359 in deci-
mal (163 x 5 + 162 x 7 + 16 x 5 + 7).
Data Structure
Converting Different Forms
of Data
Data Area Structure Section 3-2
38
Because the numeric equivalent of each four BCD binary bits must be nu-
merically equivalent to a decimal value, any four bit combination numerically
greater than 9 cannot be used, e.g., 1011 is not allowed because it is numeri-
cally equivalent to 11, which cannot be expressed as a single digit in decimal
notation. The binary bits 1011 are of course allowed in hexadecimal and are
equivalent to the hexadecimal digit B.
There are instructions provided to convert data between BCD and hexadeci-
mal. Refer to
5-15 Data Conversion
for details. Tables of binary equivalents
to hexadecimal and BCD digits are provided in the appendices for reference.
Decimal points are used in timers only. The least significant digit represents
tenths of a second. All arithmetic instructions operate on integers only. When
inputting data for use by Special I/O Units or other special applications, be
sure to check on the type of data required for the application.
Signed and Unsigned Data
This section explains signed and unsigned binary data formats. Three instruc-
tions, MAX(165), MIN(166), and SUM(167), can use either signed or unsigned
data.
Unsigned binary is the standard format used in OMRON PCs. Data in this manu-
al are unsigned unless otherwise stated. Unsigned binary values are always
positive and range from 0 ($0000) to 65,535 ($FFFF). Eight-digit values range
from 0 ($0000 0000) to 4,294,967,295 ($FFFF FFFF).
Bit number
Contents 0000000000000000
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Digit value 163162161160
Signed binary data can have either a positive and negative value. The sign is
indicated b y the status of bit 15. If bit 15 is OFF, the number is positive and if bit 15
is ON, the number is negative. Positive signed binary values range from 0
($0000) to 32,767 ($7FFF), and negative signed binary values range from
–32,768 ($8000) to –1 ($FFFF).
Bit number
Contents 0000000000000000
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Digit value 163162161160
Sign indicator
Eight-digit positive values range from 0 ($0000 0000) to 2,147,483,647 ($7FFF
FFFF), and eight-digit negative values range from –2,147,483,648 ($8000
0000) to –1 ($FFFF FFFF).
Decimal Points
Unsigned binary
Signed Binary
Data Area Structure Section 3-2
39
Positive signed binary data is identical to unsigned binary data (up to 32,767)
and can be converted using BIN(100). The following procedure converts nega-
tive decimal values between –32,768 and –1 to signed binary. In this example
–12345 is converted to CFC7.
Bit number
Contents 0011000000111001
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
1. First take the absolute value (12345) and convert to unsigned binary:
Bit number
Contents 1100111111000110
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
2. Next take the complement:
Bit number
Contents 1100111111000111
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
3. Finally add one:
Reverse the procedure to convert negative signed binary data to decimal.
Converting Decimal to
Signed Binary
Data Area Structure Section 3-2
40
3-3 CIO (Core I/O) Area
CIO Area addresses run from words CIO 0000 through CIO 2555 and bits
CIO 000000 through CIO 255515 and are divided into eight data areas. Five
of these data areas are used to control I/O points and Special Units, and
three data areas are used to manipulate and store data internally. The CIO
Area is accessible either by bit or by word. No prefix is required when input-
ting data area addresses; the CIO prefix is used only for clarity in descrip-
tions.
The name, range, and function of each data area within the CIO Area are sum-
marized in the following table. PC memory addresses are in parentheses.
Area PC Range Function
I/O Area CV500
CVM1-CPU01-EV2 Words: CIO 0000 to CIO 0031
Bits: CIO 000000 to CIO 003115
($0000 to $001F)
Allocated to I/O in the System and used to
control I/O points. Bits not used to control
I/O points can be used as work bits. The PC
St bdttlllti
CV1000
CVM1-CPU11-EV2 Words: CIO 0000 to CIO 0063
Bits: CIO 000000 to CIO 006315
($0000 to $003F)
Setup can be used to control allocations.
Once I/O table has been registered, input
bits are displayed on CVSS/SSS with an I;
CV2000
CVM1-CPU21-EV2 Words: CIO 0000 to CIO 0127
Bits: CIO 000000 to CIO 012715
($0000 to $007F)
bits
are
dis layed
on
CVSS/SSS
with
an
I
output bits, with a Q.
Work Area CV500
CVM1-CPU01-EV2 Words: CIO 0032 to CIO 0199
Bits: CIO 003200 to CIO 019915
($0020 to $00C7)
These bits are used in the program to
manipulate or to temporarily store data.
CV1000
CVM1-CPU11-EV2 Words: CIO 0064 to CIO 0199
Bits: CIO 006400 to CIO 019915
($0040 to $00C7)
CV2000
CVM1-CPU21-EV2 Words: CIO 0128 to CIO 0199
Bits: CIO 012800 to CIO 019915
($0080 to $00C7)
SYSMAC
BUS/2
Area
CV500/
CVM1-CPU01-EV2 Words: CIO 0200 to CIO 0599
Bits: CIO 020000 to CIO 059915
($00C8 to $0257)
These bits are used for remote I/O points in
the SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O System
unless the default allocations are changed in
the PC Setup.
CV1000/CV2000/
CVM1-CPU11-EV2 Words: CIO 0200 to CIO 0999
Bits: CIO 020000 to CIO 099915
($00C8 to $03E7)
Bits not used to control I/O points can be
used as work bits.
Link Area All Words: CIO 1000 to CIO 1199
Bits: CIO 100000 to CIO 119915
($03E8 to $04AF)
These bits are used for SYSMAC NET Link
and SYSMAC LINK Systems. Bits not used
for data links can be used as work bits.
These bits can be set as holding bits via PC
Setup.
Holding
Area All Words: CIO 1200 to CIO 1499
Bits: CIO 120000 to CIO 149915
($04B0 to $05DB)
Used to store data and to retain the data
values when the power is turned off.
CPU Bus
Unit Area All Words: CIO 1500 to CIO 1899
Bits: CIO 150000 to CIO 189915
($05DC to $076B)
Used to store the operating status of CPU
Bus Units. Bits not used by CPU Bus Units
can be used as work bits. These bits can be
set as holding bits via the PC Setup.
CompoBus
/D Areas All Words: CIO 1900 to CIO 1963
Bits: CIO 190000 to CIO 196315
($076C to $0AB)
Words: CIO 2000 to CIO 2063
Bits: CIO 200000 to CIO 206315
($07D0 to $080F)
These bits are used in CompoBus/D
networks. Bits not used for CompoBus/D
can be used as work bits.
CIO (Core I/O) Area Section 3-3
41
Area FunctionRangePC
Work
Areas All Words: CIO 1964 to CIO 1999
Bits: CIO 196400 to CIO 199915
($07AC to $07CF)
Words: CIO 2064 to CIO 2299
Bits: CIO 206400 to CIO 229915
($0810 to $08FB)
These bits are used in the program to
manipulate or to temporarily store data.
These bits can be set as holding bits via the
PC Setup.
SYSMAC
BUS Area CV500
CVM1-CPU01-EV2 Words: CIO 2300 to CIO 2427
Bits: CIO 230000 to CIO 242715
($08FC to $097B)
These bits are used for remote I/O points in
the SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O System
unless the default allocations are changed in
the PC Setup.
CV1000/CV2000
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
Words: CIO 2300 to CIO 2555
Bits: CIO 230000 to CIO 255515
($08FC to $09FB)
Bits not used to control I/O points can be
used as work bits. Up to word 2399 can be
set as holding bits via the PC Setup.
3-3-1 I/O Area The I/O Area is used as data to control I/O points.Those words that are used to
control I/O points are called I/O words. Bits in I/O words are called I/O bits. I/O
Area bits that are not allocated as I/O bits are reset when power is interrupted o r
PC operation is stopped. The number of I/O words varies between the PCs as
shown in the following table.
PC I/O words I/O bits
CV500/
CVM1-CPU01-EV2 CIO 0000 to CIO 0031 CIO 000000 to CIO 003115
CV1000/
CVM1-CPU11-EV2 CIO 0000 to CIO 0063 CIO 000000 to CIO 006315
CV2000
CVM1-CPU21-EV2 CIO 0000 to CIO 0127 CIO 000000 to CIO 012715
The maximum number of I/O bits is 16 (bits/word) times the number of I/O
words, i.e., 512 bits for the CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2; 1,024 for the
CV1000 or CVM1-CPU11-EV2; and 2,048 for the CV2000 or
CVM1-CPU21-EV2. I/O bits are assigned to input or output points on Units
connected at various locations in the PC System, as described later in this
section (see
Word Allocations
).
If an I/O point on a Unit brings an input into the PC, the bit assigned to it is an
input bit; if the point sends an output from the PC, the bit assigned to it is an
output bit. To turn ON an output, the output bit assigned to it must be turned
ON from the program or from a Peripheral Device. When an input turns ON,
the input bit assigned to it also turns ON and the status of the input can be
accessed indirectly by reading the status of the input bit assigned to it. Input
status and control output status is thus manipulated through I/O bits.
After the I/O Table has been registered (see
Word Allocations
, below), an “I” will
appear before input bit addresses and a “Q” will appear before output bit ad-
dresses on CVSS/SSS (CV Support Software/SYSMAC Support Software) dis-
plays.
I/O bits that are not assigned to I/O points can be used as work bits.
Input bits record external signals input to the PC and can be used in any or-
der in programming. Each input bit can also be used in as many instructions
as required to achieve effective and proper control. They cannot be used as
operands in instructions that control bit status, e.g., the OUTPUT, DIFFER-
ENTIATE UP, and KEEP instructions. In other words, input bits should be
treated as read-only bits.
Output bits are used to output program execution results and can be used in
any order in programming. Generally speaking, any one output bit should be
I/O Words
Input Bit Usage
Output Bit Usage
CIO (Core I/O) Area Section 3-3
42
used in only one instruction that controls its status, including OUT, KEEP(11),
DIFU(13), DIFD(14), and SFT(10). If an output bit is used in more than one
such instruction, only the status determined by the last instruction will actual-
ly be output from the PC during the normal I/O refresh period.
If you control the status of an output bit in more than one instruction, be sure
to consider proper output timing and test the program before actual applica-
tion. See
5-14-1 SHIFT REGISTER – SFT(050)
for an example that uses an
output bit in two “bit-control” instructions.
I/O words in the CIO Area are allocated to Units mounted on Racks or other-
wise connected to the PC by performing the I/O Table Registration operation.
This operation creates in memory a table called an I/O table that records
what words and how many words are allocated to the Units and whether
these words are input or output words. The actual procedure for this opera-
tion is described in the
CVSS/SSS Operation Manuals
.
The first word allocated to each Rack can be set with the CVSS/SSS under the
PC Setup. When the I/O Table Registration operation is performed, the system
assigns word addresses to Units in the order in which they are mounted left to
right on each Rack, beginning with the first word set in the PC Setup. The as-
signed words must be between CIO 0000 and CIO 0511.
For any Racks not assigned a first word in the PC Setup menu when the I/O
Table is registered, the system automatically assigns word addresses to
Units. Word allocation begins with the leftmost Unit on the CPU Rack, and
then continues left to right on the CPU Expansion Rack or Expansion I/O
Rack with the lowest rack number set on its I/O Interface Unit. The order in
which the Expansion I/O Racks are connected is not relevant in word alloca-
tion, only the rack numbers. I/O words start from CIO 0000 for the first Unit
on the CPU Rack and continue consecutively: CIO 0001, CIO 0002, etc.
If the lowest word assigned to a Rack in the PC Setup menu is not higher than the
total number of words required by Racks that aren’t assigned a first word, the
same word will be assigned to two Units and a duplication error will occur. A du -
plication error will also occur if words assigned to Racks overlap those assigned
to Units controlled through Remote I/O Masters in the SYSMAC BUS/2 Area,
which begins at CIO 0200. Be careful when setting areas from the CVSS/SSS to
avoid overlapping allocations.
There are no specific words associated with any particular slot because dif-
ferent Units can require a different number of words. Rather, each Unit is as-
signed the next word(s) following the word(s) assigned to the previous Unit. If
there are any empty slots, no words will be assigned to those slots. Words
are only assigned when a Unit is mounted; all empty slots are skipped. The
numbers of I/O words allocated to the most common types of Unit are shown
below.
Unit Words required
16-pt I/O Units 1 word
24- or 32-pt I/O Units 2 words
64-pt I/O Units 4 words
Interrupt Input Unit 1 word
Dummy I/O Unit Set to 1, 2, or 4 words
Analog I/O Units 2 or 4 words
High-speed Counter Units CT012/CT041: 2 words
CT021: 2 or 4 words
MCR Units (See note 1) 4 words
PID Unit (See notes 1 and 2) 4 words
Word Allocations
CIO (Core I/O) Area Section 3-3
43
Unit Words required
Position Control Units (See note 2) NC111/NC103/NC112/NC121: 4 words
NC222: 2 words
I/O Interface Unit None
Cam Positioner 2 or 4 words
Ladder Program I/O Unit 2 words
ASCII Unit (ASC03 not applicable; use
ASC04.) 2 or 4 words
SYSMAC NET Link Unit None (assigned CIO Link Area words)
SYSMAC LINK Unit None (assigned CIO Link Area words)
SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O Master Unit None (See note 1)
CompoBus/D Master Unit None
BASIC Unit None
Personal Computer Unit None (See note 3)
Motion Control Units None
Temperature Control Data Link Unit None
Ethernet Unit None
Remote I/O Master Unit None (See note 4)
Remote I/O Slave Unit None (See note 4)
I/O Link Unit 1 or 2 words (See note 5)
I/O Control Unit None
Note 1. PID Units, Magnetic Card Reader Units, Fuzzy Logic Units, and Cam Posi-
tion Units cannot be mounted to Slave Racks in SYSMAC BUS/2 Systems.
2. The PID Unit and some Position Control Units require two slots on a Rack.
3. The Personal Computer Unit requires four slots on a Rack.
4. Although no words are allocated to the Remote I/O Master and Slave Units
themselves, words are allocated to Units mounted to Slave Racks or other-
wise connected to the Remote I/O System. Refer to
3-3-3 SYSMAC BUS/2
Area
and
3-3-8 SYSMAC BUS Area
, for details.
5. 3G2A5-LK010-E I/O Link Units and C500-ETL01 Teaching Tool cannot be
set to 16 point input/16 point output on a CV-series PC.
6. The I/O READ and I/O WRITE instructions (READ(190)/WRIT(191)) can be
used for Units mounted to Slave Racks in SYSMAC BUS/2 Systems (but not
in SYSMAC BUS Systems) under the following conditions.
a) The lot number of the Remote I/O Master Unit and Remote I/O Slave Unit
must be the same as or latter than the following.
1992
October (Y: November; Z: December)
1st
01 X 2
b) The DIP switch on the Remote I/O Slave Unit must be set to “54MH.”
c) The Special I/O Unit must be one of the following: AD101, CT012,
CT041, ASC04, IDS01-V1, IDS02, IDS21, IDS22, LDP01-V1, or NC222.
7. Refer to the
CV -series PC Installation Guide
or to the operation manuals for
individual Units for specific mounting procedures and limitations.
Once the word(s) assigned to a Unit has been determined, the use of individ-
ual bits in the word(s) is determined by the type of Unit. If the Unit is a Spe-
cial I/O Unit, I/O Link Unit, or CPU Bus Unit, each bit will have a dedicated
function. Refer to the
Operation Manuals
for the relevant Units for details.
With I/O Units, bits within a word are assigned to terminals starting at the top
of the I/O Unit with bit 00 and going sequentially to the bottom. If the first Unit
CIO (Core I/O) Area Section 3-3
44
on the left of the CPU Rack is an Input Unit, the top terminals (i.e., the top
input point) will be assigned CIO 000000, the next terminals, CIO 000001,
and so forth for all of the terminals on the Unit. The allocation order is illus-
trated below. Arrows indicate the order in which words are allocated to Units
for the rack number settings indicated.
CPU Rack
Starting point
Empty slots or Units not
requiring word allocation
(no words allocated)
CPU
Power Supply Unit
Power Supply Unit
Expansion CPU Rack
I/O Control UnitI/O Interface Unit
Rack #1
Basic I/O Allocation I/O Word Allocation Example
CPU
Power Supply Unit
Power Supply Unit
I/O Control UnitI/O Interface Unit
CPU Rack
Expansion I/O Rack
CIO 0000
CIO 0001
CIO 0002 and 0003
CIO 0004
CIO 0005
CIO 0006
CIO 0007
CIO 0008 and 0009
CIO 0010
CIO 0011
CIO 0012 and 0013
CIO 0014
CIO 0015
CIO 0016
CIO 0017
CIO 0018
CIO 0019 and 0020
CIO 0021
Empty (no allocation)
CIO 0022
CIO 0023
Power Supply Unit
I/O Interface Unit
Expansion I/O Rack
Rack #1
Power Supply Unit
I/O Interface Unit
CIO 0031
CIO 0032
CIO 0033
CIO 0034
CIO 0035
CIO 0036
CIO 0037
CIO 0038
CIO 0039
CIO 0040
CIO 0041
Power Supply Unit
I/O Interface Unit
Rack #3
Expansion I/O Rack
Power Supply Unit
I/O Interface Unit
CIO 0024
CIO 0025
CIO 0026
CIO 0027
CIO 0028
CIO 0029
CIO 0030
Empty (no allocation)
Power Supply Unit
I/O Interface Unit
Expansion I/O Rack
Rack #2
Empty (no allocation)
Empty (no allocation)
Empty (no allocation)
Once Units have been mounted and the I/O Table Registration operation has
been performed, a change to any Unit mounted to a Rack that affects the
type of I/O word, or the number of words required by the Unit will cause an
I/O verification error to occur. This includes adding Units to previously un-
used slots or removing Units that have already been allocated word(s). A
Unit can, however, be replaced with another Unit that requires the same
number of input words and the same number of output words without gener-
Rack Changes
CIO (Core I/O) Area Section 3-3
!
45
ating an I/O verification error. Dummy I/O Units are available to fill slots for
future use or to replace Units that are no longer needed (see
Word Reserva-
tions
, below).
There are two ways, however, to change the I/O table registered in memory.
One is to allocate words to a slot that is not currently being used. This meth-
od is described below in
Word Reservations
.
The other way is to perform the I/O Table Registration operation again. When
this is done, all I/O words will be reallocated according to the Units mounted
to the Racks at the time. If the number of words allocated to any one slot
changes, all word allocations past that slot will also change, requiring that the
program be changed to allow for this.
Sometimes program changes can be avoided when a Unit is removed from a
Rack or you know that you are going to have to add a Unit later by reserving
words. Although designed to enable slot reservations for future use, a slot
reservation can be left permanently to prevent what could be extensive pro-
gram changes.
Caution Always be sure to change word and bit addresses in the program whenever a
change t o Units on a Rack af fects word allocations. Failure to do so may cause
improper I/O operations.
Words can be reserved at a certain slot for future use either by mounting a
Dummy I/O Unit to the slot before performing the I/O Table Registration op-
eration or by performing an I/O Table Change operation after performing the
I/O Table Registration operation.
A Dummy I/O Unit provides settings to designate word types (input or output)
and length (one, two, or four words). After I/O Table Generation has been
performed and a Dummy I/O Unit has been allocated the words designated
by these settings, it can be replaced at any time with a Unit that requires the
same type and number of words, e.g., if a Dummy I/O Unit is set for two input
words, it can be replaced with any 24- or 32-point Input Unit or any other Unit
that requires two input words.
Once an I/O table has been registered, it can be changed using the I/O Table
Change operation described in
CVSS/SSS Operation Manuals
. This opera-
tion can be used to reserve up to four input words, output words, or non-de-
fined words at a time. The I/O Table Change operation must be performed
after the I/O Table Registration operation. If I/O Table Registration is re-
peated, all word reservations will be cancelled, and I/O Table Change will
have to be repeated.
3-3-2 Work Areas
There are two W ork Areas available in PC memory. Words and bits in the W ork
Areas can be used in programming as required to control other bits, but are not
used for direct external I/O. Other bits and words in the CIO Area which are not
being used for their intended purpose can also be used as work words and work
bits. Actual application of work bits and work words is described in
Section 4
Writing Programs
.
Word Reservations
CIO (Core I/O) Area Section 3-3
46
Work words and bits are reset when power is interrupted or PC operation is
stopped, but they are not reset when a FALS error instruction is executed in the
program.
PC Work words Work bits
CV500
CVM1-CPU01-EV2 CIO 0032 to CIO 0199 CIO 003200 to CIO 019915
CV1000
CVM1-CPU11-EV2 CIO 0064 to CIO 0199 CIO 006400 to CIO 019915
CV2000
CVM1-CPU21-EV2 CIO 0128 to CIO 0199 CIO 012800 to CIO 019915
All CIO 1964 to CIO 1999
CIO 2064 to CIO 2299 CIO 196400 to CIO 199915
CIO 206400 to CIO 229915
3-3-3 SYSMAC BUS/2 Area
I/O bits allocated in the SYSMAC BUS/2 Area correspond to I/O points on I/O
Terminals (group-1 and group-2 Slaves), Units mounted to Slave Racks
(group-3 Slaves), or other Units connected to SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O Mas-
ter Units (RM/2). Up to four Masters can be connected to the CV1000, CV2000,
CVM1-CPU11-EV2, o r CVM1-CPU21-EV2 (RM/2 #0 to RM/2 #3), and up to two
Masters can be connected to the CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2 (RM/2 #0 and
RM/2 #1). The total number of I/O points required for I/O Terminals, Units on
Slave Racks, and other Units in the SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O System must
not exceed 2,048 (128 words) for the CV1000, CV2000, CVM1-CPU11-EV2, or
CVM1-CPU21-EV2, and 1,024 (64 words) for the CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2.
SYSMAC BUS/2 Area address allocation can be customized with the PC Set-
up using the CVSS/SSS. The first word allocated to the group-1, group-2,
and group-3 Slaves, as well as the size of each of these areas, can be
changed. The following table shows the default address allocations.
RM/2 # Group-1 Slaves* Group-2 Slaves* Group-3 Slaves
0CIO 0200 to CIO 0249 CIO 0250 to CIO 0299 CIO 0300 to CIO 0399
1 CIO 0400 to CIO 0449 CIO 0450 to CIO 0499 CIO 0500 to CIO 0599
2 CIO 0600 to CIO 0649 CIO 0650 to CIO 0699 CIO 0700 to CIO 0799
3 CIO 0800 to CIO 0849 CIO 0850 to CIO 0899 CIO 0900 to CIO 0999
*Group-1 Slaves allocated up to 64 I/O points. Group-2 Slaves are medium-sized Units
allocated up to 128 I/O points. Group-3 Slaves are used to form Slave Racks.
As with I/O area allocations to CPU, Expansion CPU, and Expansion I/O
Racks, word allocation begins with the Slaves connected to the Master with
the lowest unit number, RM/2 #0, regardless of the order that the Masters are
mounted. Likewise, word allocation to Units connected to RM/2 #0 begins
with the Slaves that have the lowest unit numbers, regardless of the order
that the Slaves are mounted.
Up to 8 Slave Racks can be connected to each RM/2 Master. Word address-
es are assigned to Units on Slave Racks in the order in which they are
mounted left to right. Refer to the
SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O System
Manual
for details on word allocation to Slaves and Units on Slave Racks.
After the I/O Table has been registered or edited, an “I” will appear before
input bit addresses and a “Q” will appear before output bit addresses on
CVSS/SSS displays. Refer to the
CVSS/SSS Operation Manuals
for details
on the PC Setup.
3-3-4 Link Area The Link Area is used as a common data area to automatically transfer in-
formation between PCs. This data transfer is achieved through data links in
CIO (Core I/O) Area Section 3-3
47
either a SYSMAC LINK System or a SYSMAC NET Link System. Link Area
addresses run from CIO 1000 through CIO 1199. Link Area words CIO 1000
through CIO 1063 and DM Area words D00000 through D00127 are auto-
matically used for data link tables unless specific link words are designated.
Allocations can be designated from the CVSS/SSS. Refer to the
CVSS/SSS
Operation Manuals
, and the
SYSMAC LINK System Manual
, or
SYSMAC
NET Link System Manual
for details.
3-3-5 Holding Area
The Holding Area is used to store/manipulate various kinds of data and can
be accessed either by word or by bit. Holding Area bits can be used in any
order required and can be programmed as often as required.
The default Holding Area word addresses range from CIO 1200 through CIO
1499; bit addresses, from CIO 120000 through CIO 149915. The range of the
Holding Area can be changed to any size between CIO 1000 through CIO
2399 with the PC Setup from the CVSS/SSS. If the Holding Area is in-
creased, it will overlap other areas. An “H” will appear before Holding Area bit
addresses on the CVSS/SSS screen. Refer to the
CVSS/SSS Operation
Manuals
for details.
The Holding Area retains status when the operating mode is changed, power
is interrupted, or PC operation is stopped.
Holding Area bits and words can be used to preserve data whenever PC op-
eration is stopped. Holding bits also have various special applications, such
as creating latching relays with the KEEP instruction and forming self-holding
outputs. These are discussed in
Section 4 Writing Programs
and
Section 5
Instruction Set
.
3-3-6 CPU Bus Unit Area
Two types of external bus are provided for CV-series PCs: the high-speed CPU
bus (S Bus) and the I/O bus. Units that connect to the CPU bus on the CPU or
Expansion CPU Rack are called CPU Bus Units and include the SYSMAC NET
Link Unit, SYSMAC LINK Unit, SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O Master Unit, BASIC
Unit, and Personal Computer Unit.
CPU Bus Unit Area addresses range from CIO 1500 through CIO 1899. These
400 words are divided into 16 groups of 25 words each. These are allocated to
CPU Bus Units according their unit number settings as shown in the following
tables.
Unit # 01234567
CIO
words 1500
to
1524
1525
to
1549
1550
to
1574
1575
to
1599
1600
to
1624
1625
to
1649
1650
to
1674
1675
to
1699
Unit # 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CIO
words 1700
to
1724
1725
to
1749
1750
to
1774
1775
to
1799
1800
to
1824
1825
to
1849
1850
to
1874
1875
to
1899
An additional1600 words in the DM Area (D02000 to D03599) are provided for
CPU Bus Units. The particular function of words allocated to the Unit depends on
the CPU Bus Unit being used.
3-3-7 CompoBus/D Areas
I/O bits allocated to CompoBus/D correspond to external I/O points on the de-
vices connected to the CompoBus/D device network. Refer to
CompoBus/D
(DeviceNet) Operation Manual
(W267) for further information.
CIO (Core I/O) Area Section 3-3
48
3-3-8 SYSMAC BUS Area
I/O bits allocated in the SYSMAC BUS Area correspond to external I/O points on
I/O Terminals, Optical I/O Units, or I/O Units mounted to Slave Racks that are
connected to SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Units (RM). Up to 8 Masters
can be connected to the CV1000, CV2000, CVM1-CPU11-EV2, or
CVM1-CPU21-EV2, and up to 4 Masters can be connected to the CV500 or
CVM1-CPU01-EV2. The total number of I/O points in the SYSMAC BUS System
must not exceed 2,048 (128 words) for the CVM1-CPU21-EV2, 1024 (64 words)
for the CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1-CPU11-EV2, and 512 (32 words) for the
CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2.
Unit numbers are assigned to Masters automatically when the I/O Table is
registered or edited, according to the order in which the Masters are mounted
(taking into account rack number settings). The first word allocated to each
Master can be changed with the PC Setup using the CVSS/SSS.
SYSMAC BUS Area addresses range from CIO 2300 through CIO 2555. These
256 words are divided into 8 groups of 32 words each and are allocated to Mas-
ters according their number setting. The following table shows the default ad-
dress allocation.
RM # 01234567
CIO
words 2300
to
2331
2332
to
2363
2364
to
2395
2396
to
2427
2428
to
2459
2460
to
2491
2492
to
2523
2524
to
2555
Words are allocated to Units on Slave Racks in order beginning with the
Slave Rack with the lowest unit number. Up to 8 Slave Racks can be con-
nected to each Master. Word addresses are assigned to Units in the first
Slave Rack in the order in which they are mounted left to right. Word alloca-
tion then continues left to right on the Slave Rack with the next lowest unit
number, and so on until words have been allocated to all of the Slave Racks.
Words are allocated to I/O Terminals and Optical I/O Units according to word set-
tings o n the Unit. The word allocated is calculated by adding the first word of the
Master and the word setting on the Unit. To minimize the chance of overlapping
with words allocated to Slave Racks, it is recommended to set I/O Terminal and
Optical I/O Unit settings beginning from 31, the last word allocated to the Master,
and continuing down to lower settings.
Refer to the
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O System Manual
for details on word
allocation to I/O Terminals and Slave Racks.
After the I/O Table has been registered or edited, an “I” will appear before
input bit addresses and a “Q” will appear before output bit addresses on
CVSS/SSS displays. Refer to the
CVSS/SSS Operation Manuals
for details
on the PC Setup.
3-4 TR (Temporary Relay) Area
The TR Area provides eight bits that are used only with the LD and OUT
instructions to enable certain types of branching ladder diagram program-
ming. It is only necessary to use TR bits when entering the program using
mnemonic code. The CVSS/SSS enters TR bits automatically, although the
TR bits are not shown on the CVSS/SSS screen. The use of TR bits is de-
scribed in
Section 4 Writing Programs
.
TR addresses range from TR0 though TR7. Each of these bits can be used
as many times as required and in any order required as long as the same TR
bit is not used twice in the same instruction block.
TR (Temporary Relay) Area Section 3-4
!
49
3-5 CPU Bus Link Area
The CPU Bus Link Area is indicated by a G prefix. Addresses range from G000
to G255. The CPU Bus Link Area can be divided into 3 sections, the PC Status
Area, Clock/Calendar Area, and Data Link Area.
G000 is the PC Status Area and contains flags and control bits relating to PC
status. G001 to G004 are the Clock/Calendar Area, and G005 to G007 are not
used.
Most o f the CPU Bus Link Area (G008 to G255) is taken up by the Data Link Area
which is used to transfer information between CPU Bus Units and the CPU. CPU
Bus Units connect to the CPU bus on the CPU Rack or Expansion CPU Rack.
Caution The CPU Bus Link Area words G000 through G007 cannot be written to from the
user program and can only be read from to access the data provided there.
PC Status Area The following table shows the specific functions of flags and control bits in
the PC Status Area, G000.
G000 bit(s) Function
00 ON when the PC is in PROGRAM mode.
01 ON when the PC is in DEBUG mode.
02 ON when the PC is in MONITOR mode.
03 ON when the PC is in RUN mode.
04 ON when the program is being executed (RUN or MONITOR mode).
05 Not used.
06 ON when a non-fatal error has occured. (PC operation continues.)
07 ON when a fatal error has occured. (PC stops.)
08 to 10 Not used.
11 UM Protect Bit. Prevents both reading out and writing to Program
Memory when turned ON. Set with the CVSS/SSS.
12 Memory Card Protect Bit. Prevents writing to Memory Cards when
turned ON. Set with the Memory Card Protect Switch.
13 and 14 Not used.
15 UM Protect Bit. Prevents writing to Program Memory when turned
ON. Set with the System Protect Key Switch.
Calendar/Clock Area The following table shows the function of bits in the Calendar/Clock Area,
G001 to G004. The clock is set with the CVSS/SSS. Refer to the
CVSS/SSS
Operation Manuals
for more details.
Word Bits Contents Possible values
G001 00 to 07 Seconds 00 to 59
08 to 15 Minutes 00 to 59
G002 00 to 07 Hours 00 to 23 (24-hour system)
08 to 15 Day of month 01 to 31 (adjusted by month and for leap year)
G003 00 to 07 Month 1 to 12
08 to 15 Year 00 to 99 (Rightmost two digits of year)
G004 00 to 07 Day of week 00 to 06 (00: Sun.; 01: Mon.; 02: Tues.;
03: Wed.; 04: Thurs.; 05: Fri.; 06: Sat.)
Note The accuracy of the internal clock depends on the ambient temperature. Refer
to the following table.
Ambient temperature Error per month
55C–3 to 0 min
25C±1 min
C–2 to 0 min
CPU Bus Link Area Section 3-5
!
50
Data Link Area The CPU Bus Link Area is disabled by default in the PC Setup and must be
enabled with the CVSS/SSS in order to use the Data Link Area.
The 120 words of CPU Bus Link Area from G008 to G127 are used for outputs
from the CPU to BASIC Units. The 128 words from G128 to G255 are used for
outputs from the BASIC Units. These are divided into 16 groups of 8 words each
and allocated to CPU Bus Units according their unit number settings as shown in
the following tables. All words not output by a particular BASIC Unit are read by it
as inputs from the other BASIC Units.
Unit # 01234567
Words G128
to
G135
G136
to
G143
G144
to
G151
G152
to
G159
G160
to
G167
G168
to
G175
G176
to
G183
G184
to
G191
Unit # 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Words G192
to
G199
G200
to
G207
G208
to
G215
G216
to
G223
G224
to
G231
G232
to
G239
G240
to
G247
G248
to
G255
When the PC Setup have been changed to enable the CPU Bus Link, bit 15 of
the first word allocated to each Unit (e.g., bit G12815 for Unit #0) will be OFF
during data reception.
3-6 Auxiliary Area
The Auxiliary Area contains flags and control bits used for monitoring and
controlling PC operation, accessing clock pulses, and signalling errors. Auxil-
iary Area word addresses range from A000 through A511; bit addresses,
from A00000 through A51115. Addresses A000 through A255 are read/write,
but addresses A256 through A511 are read only.
The Force Set/Reset operations from the CVSS/SSS behave like the
SET(016) and RSET(017) instructions when applied to words A000 through
A255.
Unused Auxiliary Area words and bits cannot be used as work words and
bits.
Caution The Auxiliary Area contains two sections. The section between A000 and A255
can be read from or written to from the user program. The section between A256
and A511, however, can be read from to access the data provided there, but it
cannot be written to from the user program.
The following table lists the functions of Auxiliary Area flags and control bits.
Most of these bits are described in more detail following the table. Descrip-
tions are in order by address, except that some bits/words with related func-
tions are explained together.
Word(s) Bit(s) Function
A000 00 to 10 Not used.
11 Restart Continuation Bit
12 IOM Hold Bit
13 Forced Status Hold Bit
14 Error Log Reset Bit
15 Output OFF Bit
A001 00 to 15 CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits
A002 to A004 00 to 15 Not used.
A005 00 to 07 SYSMAC BUS Error Check Bits
08 to 15 Not used.
Auxiliary Area Section 3-6
51
Word(s) FunctionBit(s)
A006 00 to 15 Not used.
A007 00 to 15 Momentary Power Interruption Time (BCD)
A008 00 to 06 Not used.
07 Stop Monitor Flag
08 Execution Time Measured Flag
09 Differentiate Monitor Completed Flag
10 Stop Monitor Completed Flag
11 Trace Trigger Monitor Flag
12 Trace Completed Flag
13 Trace Busy Flag
14 Trace Start Bit
15 Sampling Start Bit
A009 00 to 15 Not used.
A010 to A011 00 to 15 Startup Time (BCD)
A012 to A013 00 to 15 Power Interruption Time (BCD)
A014 00 to 15 Number of Power Interruptions (BCD)
A015 00 to 15 CPU Bus Service Disable Bits
A016 00 to 15 Not used.
A017 00 to 02 Not used.
03 Host Link Service Disable Bit
04 Peripheral Service Disable Bit
05 I/O Refresh Disable Bit
06 to 15 Not used.
A018 to A089 00 to 15 Not used.
A090 to A097 00 to 15 Reserved for system use
A098 00 FPD(177) Teaching Bit
01 to 15 Not used.
A099 00 to 07 Message #0 to #7 Flags
08 to 15 Not used.
A100 to A199 00 to 15 Error Log Area (20 × 5 words)
A200 to A203 00 to 15 Macro area inputs
A204 to A207 00 to 15 Macro area outputs
A208 to A255 00 to 15 Not used.
A20 to A299 00 to 15 Not used.
A300 00 to 15 Error Log Pointer (binary)
A301 00 to 15 Not used.
A302 00 to 15 CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags
A303 to A305 00 to 15 Not used.
A306 00 Start Input Wait Flag
01 I/O Verification Error Wait Flag
02 SYSMAC BUS Terminator Wait Flag
03 CPU Bus Unit Initializing Wait Flag
04 to 07 Not used.
08 to 11 Connected Device Code 2: GPC
3: Programming Console
12 to 14 Not used.
15 Peripheral Connected Flag
A307 00 to 07 Peripheral Connected Flags for RT #0 to RT #7 of
RM/2 #0
Auxiliary Area Section 3-6
52
Word(s) FunctionBit(s)
08 to 15 Peripheral Connected Flags for RT #0 to RT #7 of
RM/2 #1
A308 00 to 07 Peripheral Connected Flags for RT #0 to RT #7 of
RM/2 #2
08 to 15 Peripheral Connected Flags for RT #0 to RT #7 of
RM/2 #3
A309 00 to 15 Peripheral Device Cycle Time (binary)
A310 to A325 00 to 15 CPU Bus Unit Service Interval (binary)
A326 to A342 00 to 15 Not used.
A343 00 to 02 Memory Card Type
03 to 06 Not used.
07 Memory Card Format Error Flag
08 Memory Card Transfer Error Flag
09 Memory Card Write Error Flag
10 Memory Card Read Error Flag
11 FIle Missing Flag
12 Memory Card Write Flag
13 Memory Card Instruction Flag
14 Accessing Memory Card Flag
15 Memory Card Protected Flag
A344 to 345 00 to 15 Not used.
A346 00 to 15 Number of Words Remaining to transfer to memory
card for a file read/write instruction (BCD)
A347 to A399 00 to 15 Not used.
A400 00 to 15 Error Code
A401 00 to 04 Not used.
06 FALS Error Flag
07 SFC Fatal Error Flag
08 Cycle Time Too Long Flag
09 Program Error Flag
10 I/O Setting Error Flag
11 Too Many I/O Points Flag
12 CPU Bus Error Flag
13 Duplication Error Flag
14 I/O Bus Error Flag
15 Memory Error Flag
A402 00 to 01 Not used.
02 Power Interruption Flag
03 CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Flag
04 Battery Low Flag
05 SYSMAC BUS Error Flag
06 SYSMAC BUS/2 Error Flag
07 CPU Bus Unit Error Flag
08 Not used.
09 I/O Verification Error Flag
10 Not used.
11 SFC Non-fatal Error Flag
12 Indirect DM Error Flag
13 Jump Error Flag
14 Not used.
15 FAL Error Flag
Auxiliary Area Section 3-6
53
Word(s) FunctionBit(s)
A403 00 to 08 Memory Error Area Location
09 Memory Card Startup Transfer Error Flag
10 to 15 Not used.
A404 00 to 07 I/O Bus Error Slot Number (BCD)
08 to 15 I/O Bus Error Rack Number (BCD)
A405 00 to 15 CPU Bus Unit Error Unit Number
A406 00 to 15 Not used.
A407 00 to 15 Total I/O Words on CPU and Expansion Racks
(BCD)
A408 00 to 15 Total SYSMAC BUS/2 I/O Words (BCD)
A409 00 to 07 Duplicate Rack Number
08 to 14 Not used
15 Duplicate System Parameter Words Flag
A410 00 to 15 CPU Bus Unit Duplicate Number
A411 to A413 00 to 15 Not used.
A414 00 to 15 SFC Fatal Error Code
A415 to A417 00 to 15 Not used.
A418 00 to 15 SFC Non-fatal Error Code
A419 00 to 07 CPU-recognized Rack Numbers
08 to 15 Not used.
A420 to A421 00 to 15 Not used.
A422 00 to 15 CPU Bus Unit Error Unit Number
A423 00 to 13 Not used.
14 CPU Bus Unit Number Setting Error Flag
15 CPU Bus Link Error Flag
A424 00 to 03 SYSMAC BUS/2 Error Master Number
04 to 15 Not used.
A425 00 to 07 SYSMAC BUS Error Master Number
08 to 15 Not used.
A426 00 to 13 Not used
14 Memory Card Battery Low Flag
15 PC Battery Low Flag
A427 00 to 15 CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Unit Number
A428 to A429 00 to 15 Not used.
A430 to A461 00 to 15 Executed FAL Number
A462 to A463 00 to 15 Maximum Cycle Time (BCD, 8 digits)
A464 to A465 00 to 15 Present Cycle Time (BCD, 8 digits)
A466 to A469 00 to 15 Not used.
A470 to A477 00 to 15 SYSMAC BUS Error Codes:
RM # 0 (A470) RM #1 (A471)
RM # 2 (A472) RM #3 (A473)
RM # 4 (A474) RM #5 (A475)
RM # 6 (A476) RM #7 (A477)
A478 00 to 15 Total SYSMAC BUS I/O Words (BCD)
A479 00 to 15 Not used.
A480 to A499 00 to 15 SYSMAC BUS/2 Error Unit Number:
RM # 0 (A480 to A484) RM #1 (A485 to A489)
RM # 2 (A490 to A494) RM #3 (A495 to A499)
Auxiliary Area Section 3-6
54
Word(s) FunctionBit(s)
A500 00 to 02 Not used.
03 Instruction Execution Error Flag
04 Carry Flag
05 Greater Than Flag
06 Equals Flag
07 Less Than Flag
08 Negative Flag
09 Overflow Flag
10 Underflow Flag
11 Not used.
12 First Cycle Flag when one-step operation is started
with STEP instruction
13 Always ON Flag
14 Always OFF Flag
15 First Cycle Flag
A501 00 0.1-s Clock Pulse
01 0.2-s Clock Pulse
02 1.0-s Clock Pulse
03 0.02-s Clock Pulse
04 to 15 Not used.
A502 00 to 07 Port #0 to #7 Enabled Flags
08 to 15 Port #0 to #7 Execute Error Flags
A503 to A510 00 to 15 Port #0 to #7 Completion Codes
A511 00 to 04 Current EM Bank (0 to 7)
05 to 14 Not used.
15 EM Installed Flag
Note Do not use A50013 (Always ON Flag), A50014 (Always OFF Flag), or A50015
(First Cycle Flag) to control execution of dif ferentiated instructions. The instruc-
tions will never be executed.
3-6-1 Restart Continuation Bit
Bit A00011 can be turned ON to make the PC automatically resume opera-
tion from the point that operation stopped due to a power interruption. If bit
A00011 is OFF, the PC will enter the start-up mode set in the PC Setup and
will begin operation from the first step if the start-up mode is RUN or MON-
ITOR mode.
When the Restart Continuation Bit is turned ON, several parameters in the PC
Setup must also be made for the PC to restart properly. Refer to
Section 7 PC
Setup
for more details.
3-6-2 IOM Hold Bit Bit A00012 can be turned ON to preserve the status of the CIO Area, Transi-
tion Flags, Timer Flags, Timer PVs, index registers, data registers, and the
Current EM Bank Number when shifting from PROGRAM or DEBUG to
MONITOR or RUN mode or when shifting from MONITOR or RUN mode to
PROGRAM or DEBUG mode. (I/O Memory includes the CIO Area, TR Area,
CPU Bus Link Area, Auxiliary Area, Transition Flags, Step Flags, Timer
Completion Flags, and Counter Completion Flags.)
When the IOM Hold Bit is OFF, the CIO Area, Transition Flags, Timer Flags, T im-
er PVs, index registers, data registers, and the Current EM Bank Number are
cleared when switching between these modes.
Auxiliary Area Section 3-6
55
If the IOM Hold Bit is ON, and the status of the IOM Hold Bit itself is pre-
served in the PC Setup (Setting B, IOM Hold Bit status), then I/O Memory is
also preserved when the PC is turned ON or power is interrupted.
3-6-3 Forced Status Hold Bit
Bit A00013 can be turned ON to preserve the status of bits that have been
force-set or force-reset when switching modes (except RUN mode). When
the Forced Status Hold Bit is OFF, bits that have been force-set or force-re-
set will return to default status when switching between modes.
If the Forced Status Hold Bit is ON, and the status of the Forced Status Hold
Bit itself is preserved in the PC Setup (Setting B, Forced Status Hold Bit sta-
tus), then the status of bits that have been force-set or force-reset is also pre-
served when the PC is turned ON or power is interrupted.
In any case, bits that have been force-set or force-reset will return to default sta-
tus when switching to RUN mode.
3-6-4 Error Log Reset Bit
Bit A00014 can be turned ON to clear the contents of the Error Log Area
(words A100 to A199), and reset the Error Record Pointer to 0. The Error Log
Reset Bit is automatically turned OFF after the Error Log Area is cleared.
3-6-5 Output OFF Bit
Bit A00015 can be turned ON to turn OFF all outputs from the PC. The OUT
INH. indicator on the front panel of the CPU will light. The Output OFF Bit is
turned ON automatically when Restart Continuation (bit A00011) has taken
place. It is therefore necessary to include a step in the program to turn this bit
OFF to continue operation after a power interruption. Refer to
6-1 PC Opera-
tion
for details.
3-6-6 CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits
Bits A00100 through A00115 can be turned ON to reset CPU Bus Units number
#0 through #15, respectively. The Restart Bits are turned OFF automatically
when restarting is completed.
Do not turn these bits ON and OFF in the program; manipulate them from the
CVSS/SSS.
3-6-7 SYSMAC BUS Error Check Bits
Bits A00500 through A00507 can be turned ON to read out the error codes
(stored in words A470 through A477) for Masters numbered #0 through #7, re-
spectively. The Error Check Bits are turned OFF automatically after the informa-
tion has been read out. Refer to
3-6-35 SYSMAC BUS Error Flag
for more de-
tails.
3-6-8 Momentary Power Interruption Time
Word A007 contains the duration of the most recent power interruption. The
time is recorded in 4-digit BCD in milliseconds (0000 ms to 9999 ms), as
shown in the following table.
Bits
15 to 12 11 to 08 07 to 04 03 to 00
103102101100
Auxiliary Area Section 3-6
56
The power interruption time is output to words A012 and A013, and the number
of power interruptions is output to word A014.
3-6-9 CVSS/SSS Flags
Word A008 contains flags that indicate the status of commands and instructions
performed with the CVSS/SSS.
Bit A00807 is turned ON when the Stop Monitor is used from the CVSS/SSS,
and is turned OFF when it is completed.
Bit A00808 is turned ON when the execution time has been measured with
MARK(174) instructions with the CVSS/SSS.
Bit A00809 is turned ON when the differentiate monitor condition has been
established with the CVSS/SSS.
Bit A00810 is turned ON when the Stop Monitor operation has been com-
pleted with the CVSS/SSS.
Bit A00811 is turned ON when one of the trigger conditions has been estab-
lished during execution of a Data or Program Trace with the CVSS/SSS.
Bit A00812 is turned ON upon when the sampling of a region of trace
memory has been completed during execution of a Data or Program Trace
with the CVSS/SSS.
Bit A00813 is turned ON when a Data or Program Trace is executed with the
CVSS/SSS, and is turned OFF when it is completed.
The Trigger conditions are established when bit A00814 is turned ON by one
of trigger conditions of a Data or Program Trace of the CVSS/SSS.
Bit A00815 is turned ON to start a Data Trace.
3-6-10Start-up Time Words A010 and A011 contain the start-up time, in BCD format, as shown in the
following table. The start-up time i s updated every time the power is turned ON.
Word Bits Contents Possible values
A010 00 to 07 Seconds 00 to 99
08 to 15 Minutes 00 to 59
A011 00 to 07 Hours 00 to 23 (24-hour system)
08 to 15 Day of month 01 to 31 (adjusted by month and for leap year)
3-6-11 Power Interruption Time
Words A012 and A013 contain, in BCD format, the time at which power was in-
terrupted, as shown in the following table. The power interruption time is up-
dated every time the power is interrupted.
Word Bits Contents Possible values
A012 00 to 07 Seconds 00 to 99
08 to 15 Minutes 00 to 59
A013 00 to 07 Hours 00 to 23 (24-hour system)
08 to 15 Day of month 01 to 31 (adjusted by month and for leap year)
Stop Monitor Flag (A00807)
Execution Time Measured
Flag (A00808)
Differentiate Monitor
Completed Flag (A00809)
Stop Monitor Completed
Flag (A00810)
Trace Trigger Monitor Flag
(A00811)
Trace Completed Flag
(A00812)
Trace Busy Flag (A00813)
Trace Start Bit (A00814)
Sampling Start Bit (A00815)
Auxiliary Area Section 3-6
57
3-6-12Number of Power Interruptions
Word A014 contains the number of times that power has been interrupted since
the PC was first turned on. The number is in BCD, and can be reset by writing
#0000 to word A014.
3-6-13Service Disable Bits
Words A015 and A017 contain control bits that disable I/O servicing to certain
Units and periodic refreshing.Turn these bits ON and OFF in the program. The
service disable bits are automatically turned OFF when power is turned on or PC
operation is stopped.
Bits A01500 through A01515 can be turned ON to stop service to CPU Bus
Units numbered #0 through #15, respectively. Turn the appropriate bit OFF
again to resume service to the CPU Bus Unit.
Bit A01703 can be turned ON to stop Host Link System servicing. Turn OFF
again to resume service to the Host Link System.
Bit A01704 can be turned ON to stop service to Peripheral Devices. Turn
OFF again to resume service to Peripheral Devices.
Bit A01705 can be turned ON to stop periodic and SYSMAC BUS refreshing.
Turn OFF again to resume periodic and SYSMAC BUS refreshing.
3-6-14Message FlagsWhen the MESSAGE instruction (MSG(195)) is executed, the bit in A099 corre-
sponding to the message number is turned ON. Bits 00 through 07 correspond
to message numbers 0 through 7, respectively.
3-6-15Error Log AreaWords A100 through A199 contain up to 20 records that show the nature, time,
and date of errors that have occurred in the PC. The Error Log Area will store
system-generated or FAL(006)/FALS(007)-generated error codes. Refer to
Section 8 Error Processing
for details on error codes.
The Error Log Area can be moved to the DM or EM Areas and its size can be
increased to store up to 2,047 records with the PC Setup.
With the default PC Setup, error records occupy five words each stored be-
tween words A100 and A199. The last record that was stored can be ob-
tained via the content of word A300 (Error Record Pointer). The record num-
ber, Auxiliary Area words, and pointer value for each of the twenty records
are as follows:
Record Addresses Pointer value*
None N.A. 0000
1A100 to A104 0001
2 A105 to A109 0002
3A110 to A114 0003
4 A115 to A119 0004
5A120 to A124 0005
6 A125 to A129 0006
7 A130 to A134 0007
8 A135 to A139 0008
9 A140 to A144 0009
CPU Service Disable Bits
Host Link Service Disable
Bit
Peripheral Service Disable
Bit
I/O Refresh Disable Bit
Area Structure
Auxiliary Area Section 3-6
58
Record Pointer value*Addresses
10 A145 to A149 000A
11 A150 to A154 000B
12 A155 to A159 000C
13 A160 to A164 000D
14 A165 to A169 000E
15 A170 to A174 000F
16 A175 to A179 0010
17 A180 to A184 0011
18 A185 to A189 0012
19 A190 to A194 0013
20 A195 to A199 0014
*The pointer value is in word A300, which is in the read-only area (words A256 to A511).
Although each of them contains a different record, the structure of each re-
cord is the same: the first word contains the error code; the second word, the
error contents, and the third, fourth, and fifth words, the time, day, and date.
The error code will be either one generated by the system or by
FAL(006)/FALS(007); the time and date will be the time and date from the
Calendar/Clock Area, words G001 to G004. This structure is shown below.
Word Bit Content
First 00 to 15 Error code
Second 00 to 15 Error contents
Third 00 to 07 Seconds
08 to 15 Minutes
Fourth 00 to 07 Hours
08 to 15 Day of month
Fifth 00 to 07 Month
08 to 15 Year
Operation When the first error code is generated, the relevant data will be placed in the
error record after the one indicated by the Log Record Pointer (initially this
will be record 1) and the Pointer will be incremented. Any other error codes
generated thereafter will be placed in consecutive records until the last one is
used.
If there are words allocated for n errors and n errors occur, the next error will
be written into the last position, n, the contents of previous error will be
moved to record n–1, and so on until the contents of record 1 is moved off
the end and lost, i.e., the area functions like a shift register that moves data
in units of error records (5 words). The Record Pointer will remain set to n
(binary).
The Error Log Area can be reset by turning ON bit A00014 (Error Log Reset
Bit). When this is done, the Record Pointer will be reset to 0000, the Error
Log Area will be cleared, and any further error codes will be recorded from
the beginning of the Error Log Area.
3-6-16CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags
Bits A30200 through A30215 turn ON while the corresponding CPU Bus Units
(Units #0 through #15, respectively) are initializing.
3-6-17Wait Flags
Bit A30600 is ON when the CPU Rack Power Supply Unit start input termi-
nals are OFF.
Start-up Wait Flag (A30600)
Auxiliary Area Section 3-6
59
Bit A30601 is ON when the PC is not running because an I/O Verification Er-
ror has occurred, and the PC Setup are set so the PC does not run when an
I/O Verification Error occurs. The PC Setup can be changed to enable opera-
tion during I/O Verification Errors. Refer to “Comparison error process” in the
PC Setup.
Bit A30602 is ON when the PC is not running because there is a terminator
missing in the SYSMAC BUS System.
Bit A30603 is ON when the PC is not running because a CPU Bus Unit is
initializing, or a terminator missing in the SYSMAC BUS/2 System.
3-6-18Peripheral Device Flags
Bits A30608 through A30611 contain a binary code that identifies the type of
Peripheral Device (0: FIT10; 1: FIT20; 2: GPC; 3: Programming Console)
connected to the CPU, the Expansion CPU, or an Expansion I/O Rack.
Bit A30615 is ON when a Peripheral Device is connected to the CPU, the
Expansion CPU, or an Expansion I/O Rack.
Bits A30700 through A30815 are turned ON when a Peripheral Device is
connected to the corresponding Slave Rack, as shown in the following table.
Word Bits
00 to 07 08 to 15
A307 Racks #0 to #7 on Master #0 Racks #0 to #7 on Master #1
A308 Racks #0 to #7 on Master #2 Racks #0 to #7 on Master #3
Word A309 contains the cycle time in ms (in binary) required to service Pe-
ripheral Devices, Host Link, and CPU Bus Units. Refer to
6-2 Cycle Time
for
details.
3-6-19CPU Bus Unit Service Interval
Words A310 through A325 contain the interval in ms (binary) between CPU Bus
Unit services for Units #0 through #15, respectively. Measuring the service inter-
val can be enabled or disabled in the PC Setup.
3-6-20Memory Card Flags
The binary number stored in A34300 to A34303 indicates the type of Memory
Card, if any, installed in the Memory Card Drive. (0: None, 1: RAM,
2: EPROM, 3: EEPROM)
Bit A34307 is turned ON when the Memory Card is not formatted or a format-
ting error has occurred.
Bit A34308 is turned ON when an error occurs while writing to the Memory
Card.
Bit A34309 is turned ON when the Memory Card cannot be written to be-
cause the card is write-protected, EPROM, EEPROM, data is beyond the
capacity of the card, or there are too many files.
Bit A34310 is turned ON when the specified file is damaged and cannot be
read.
I/O Verification Error W ait
Flag (A30601)
SYSMAC BUS Terminator
Wait Flag (A30602)
CPU Bus Unit Initializing
Wait Flag (A30603)
Connected Device Code
(A30608 to A30611)
Peripheral Connected Flag
(A30615)
SYSMAC BUS/2 Peripheral
Flags (A307 and A308)
Peripheral Device Cycle
Time (A309)
Memory Card Type
(A34300 to A34303)
Memory Card Format Error
Flag (A34307)
Memory Card Transfer Error
Flag (A34308)
Memory Card Write Error
Flag (A34309)
Memory Card Read Error
Flag (A34310)
Auxiliary Area Section 3-6
60
Bit A34311 is turned ON when the specified file is not on the installed card or
no card is installed.
Bit A34312 is turned ON when the Memory Card is being written to from the
program (FILW(181)).
Bit A34313 is turned ON when an instruction affecting Memory Card files
(FILR(180), FILW(181), FILP(182), or FLSP(183)) is being executed.
Bit A34314 is turned ON when the Memory Card is being accessed.
Bit A34315 is turned ON when the Memory Card is write-protected by the
write-protect switch on the card.
Word A346 contains the number of words left to transfer to or from the
Memory Card (FILW(181) or FILR(180)). When either instruction is first
executed, the number of words in the file is placed in word A346 and as data
is transferred, the number of words transferred is subtracted from this num-
ber.
The number of words to transfer is recorded in 4-digit BCD.
A346 bits
15 to 12 11 to 08 07 to 04 03 to 00
103102101100
3-6-21Error Code When an error or alarm occurs, the error code is written to A400. If two errors
occur simultaneously, the more serious error, with a higher error code, is re-
corded. Refer to
Section 8 Error Processing
for details on error codes.
3-6-22FALS Flag Bit A40106 is turned ON when the SEVERE ALARM FAILURE instruction
(FALS(007)) is executed. The FAL number is written to word A400.
3-6-23SFC Fatal Error Flag and Error Code
Bit A40107 is turned ON if an error that stops operation occurs while the SFC
program i s being executed. The SFC Fatal Error Code is written in BCD to word
A414. Refer to
Section 8 Error Processing
for details on the error codes.
3-6-24Cycle Time Too Long Flag
Bit A40108 is turned ON if the cycle time exceeds the cycle time monitoring
time (i.e., the maximum cycle time) set in the PC Setup.
3-6-25Program Error Flag
Bit A40109 is turned ON if there is a program syntax error (including no
END(001) instruction).
3-6-26I/O Setting Error Flag
Bit A40110 is turned ON if the I/O designation of a slot has changed, e.g., an
Input Unit has been installed in an Output Unit’s slot, or vice versa.
3-6-27Too Many I/O Points Flag
Bit A40111 is turned ON if the total number of I/O points being used exceeds the
maximum for the PC. The total number of I/O points being used on CPU and Ex-
File Missing Flag (A34311)
Memory Card Write Flag
(A34312)
Memory Card Instruction
Flag (A34313)
Accessing Memory Card
Flag (A34314)
Memory Card Protected
Flag (A34315)
Number of Words to
Transfer (A346)
Auxiliary Area Section 3-6
61
pansion Racks is written to word A407; in the SYSMAC BUS/2 system, to word
A408; and in the SYSMAC BUS system, to word A478.
3-6-28CPU Bus Error and Unit Flags
Bit A40112 is turned ON when an error occurs during the transmission of data
between the CPU and CPU Bus Units, or a WDT (watchdog timer) error occurs
in a CPU Bus Unit. The unit number of the CPU Bus Unit involved is contained in
word A405.
Bits A40500 through A40515 correspond to CPU Bus Units #0 through #15, re-
spectively. When a CPU Bus Error occurs, the bit corresponding to the unit num-
ber of the CPU Bus Unit involved is turned ON.
3-6-29Duplication Error Flag and Duplicate Rack/CPU Bus Unit Numbers
Bit A40113 is turned ON when two Racks are assigned the same rack number,
two CPU Bus Units are assigned the same unit number, or the same words are
allocated to more than one Rack or Unit in the PC Setup. The duplicate Expan-
sion I/O Rack number is written to word A409, and the duplicate CPU Bus Unit
number is written to word A410.
Bits A40900 through A40907 correspond to Racks #0 through #7, respectively.
When two Racks have the same rack number, the bits corresponding to the rack
numbers involved are turned ON. Bit A40915 is also turned ON to indicate that
the same words are allocated to more than one Rack or Unit in the PC Setup.
Bits A41000 through A41015 correspond to CPU Bus Units #0 through #15, re-
spectively. When two CPU Bus Units have the same unit number, the bits corre-
sponding to the unit numbers of the CPU Bus Units involved are turned ON.
3-6-30I/O Bus Error Flag and I/O Bus Error Slot/Rack Numbers
Bit A40114 is turned ON when an error occurs during the transmission of data
between the CPU and I/O Units through the I/O bus, or a terminator is not
installed correctly. The rack/slot number of the Unit involved is written to word
A404.
Bits A40400 through A40407 contain the slot number, in BCD, of the I/O Unit
where the error occurred. If the error did not occur with an I/O Unit, then these
bits contain #0F. Bits A40408 through A40415 contain the rack number, in BCD,
of the Rack where the error occurred.
If the error occurred because of a terminator setting, word A404 will contain
#0E0F for line 0 (IOC right connector), or #0F0F for line 1 (IOC left connector).
3-6-31Memory Error Flag
Bit A40115 is turned ON when an error occurs in memory. The memory area in-
volved is written to word A403.
3-6-32Power Interruption Flag
Bit A40202 is turned ON when power is momentarily interrupted if a momentary
power interruption i s set as an error in the PC Setup (see “Error on power of f” in
the PC Setup). The time and date of the most recent power interruption is written
to words A012 and A013, and the number of power interruptions is written to
word A014.
3-6-33CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Flag and Unit Number
Bit A40203 is turned ON when the CPU Bus Units actually installed differ from
the Units registered in the I/O table. The unit number of the CPU Bus Unit in-
volved is written to word A427.
Bits A42700 through A42715 correspond to CPU Bus Units #0 through #15, re-
spectively. When a error occurs, the bit corresponding to the unit number of the
CPU Bus Unit involved is turned ON.
Auxiliary Area Section 3-6
62
3-6-34Battery Low Flags
Bit A40204 is turned ON if the voltage of the CPU or Memory Card battery drops.
If the problem has occurred with the Memory Card battery, bit A42614 will be
turned ON, and if the problem has occurred with the CPU battery, bit A42615 will
be turned ON.
3-6-35SYSMAC BUS Error Flag, Check Bits, and Master/Unit Numbers
Bit A40205 is turned ON when an error occurs during the transmission of data in
the SYSMAC BUS system. The number of the Master involved is written to word
A425, and information about the Unit(s) involved is written to words A470
through A477.
Bits A42500 through A42507 correspond to Masters #0 through #7, respective-
ly. When a error occurs, the bit corresponding to the number of the Master in-
volved is turned ON.
Words A470 through A477 are used to indicate which Unit is involved in the
error on Masters #0 through #7, respectively. The function of each bit is de-
scribed below. Refer to the
Optical
and
Wired Remote I/O System Manuals
for details.
Not used.
Bit 03 turns ON when an error has occurred in remote I/O.
If the content of bits 12 through 15 is B, an error has occurred in a Remote
I/O Master or Slave Unit, and the content of bits 08 through 11 will indicate
the number of the Master of the Remote I/O Subsystem involved. These
numbers are assigned to Masters in the order that they are mounted to the
CPU and Expansion Racks. If the error is in the Master, the value of bits 4 to
7 will be 8. If the error is in a Slave, bits 4 to 7 will contain the unit number of
the Slave where the error occurred.
If the content of bits 12 through 15 is other than B, an error has occurred in
an Optical I/O Unit, I/O Link Unit, or I/O Terminal. Here, bits 08 through 15
will provide the word address (#00 to #31) that has been set on the Unit.
When this Unit is an Optical I/O Unit, bit 04 will be ON if the Unit is assigned
leftmost bits (08 through 15), and OFF if it is assigned rightmost bits (00
through 07).
If there are errors in more than one Unit for a single Master, words A470
through A477 will contain error information for only the first one. Data for the
remaining Units will be stored in memory and can be accessed by turning ON
the Error Check Bit for that Master. Bits A00500 through A00507 are the Er-
ror Check Bits for Masters #0 through #7, respectively. Error Check Bits are
automatically turned OFF when data has been accessed. Write down the
data for the first error if required before using the Error Check Bit; previous
data will be cleared when data for the next error is displayed.
3-6-36SYSMAC BUS/2 Error Flag and Master/Unit Numbers
Bit A40206 is turned ON when an error occurs during the transmission of data in
the SYSMAC BUS/2 System. The number of the Master involved is written to
word A424, and information about the Slave Unit(s) involved is written to words
A480 through A499.
Bits A42400 through A42403 are turned ON when the error involves Masters # 0
through #3, respectively.
Bits 00 to 02
Bit 03 – Remote I/O Error
Flag
Bits 04 to 15
Error Check Bits
(A00500 to A00507)
Auxiliary Area Section 3-6
63
Information identifying the Slave Unit(s) involved is contained in words A480
through A499, which are divided into four groups of five words, one group for
each Master, as shown below.
Words Master number
A480 to A484 0
A485 to A489 1
A490 to A494 2
A495 to A499 3
Bits are turned ON to indicate which of the Slaves connected to the Master
was involved in the error, as shown below.
Word Bits Slave
First 00 to 15 Group-1 Slaves #0 to #15
Second 00 to 15 Group-1 Slaves #16 to #31
Third 00 to 15 Group-2 Slaves #0 to #15
Fourth 00 to 07 Slave Racks #0 to #7
(Group-3 Slaves)
08 to 15 Not used.
Fifth 00 to 15 Not used
3-6-37CPU Bus Unit Error Flag and Unit Numbers
Bit A40207 is turned ON when a parity error occurs during the transmission of
data between the CPU and CPU Bus Units. The unit number of the CPU Bus Unit
involved is written to word A422.
Bits A42200 through A42215 correspond to CPU Bus Units #0 through #15, re-
spectively. When a CPU Bus Unit Error occurs, the bit corresponding to the unit
number of the CPU Bus Unit involved is turned ON.
3-6-38I/O Verification Error Flag
Bit A40209 is turned ON when the Units mounted in the system disagree with
the I/O table registered in the CPU. To ensure proper operation, PC opera-
tion should be stopped, Units checked, and the I/O table corrected whenever
this flag goes ON.
3-6-39SFC Non-fatal Error Flag and Error Code
Bit A40211 is turned ON if an error that does not stop operation occurs while the
SFC program is being executed. The error code is written to word A418. Refer to
Section 8 Error Processing
for details on the error codes.
3-6-40Indirect DM BCD Error Flag
Bit A40212 is turned ON if the content of an indirectly addressed DM word is not
BCD when BCD is specified in the PC Setup.
The contents of indirectly addressed DM words can be set to either binary or
BCD with the PC Setup. Binary addresses will access memory according to PC
memory addresses. BCD will access other DM words according to DM Area ad-
dresses. If binary addresses are used, this flag will not operate.
3-6-41Jump Error Flag
Bit A40213 is turned ON if there is no destination for a JMP(004) instruction.
3-6-42FAL Flag and FAL Number
Bit A40215 is turned ON when the FAL(006) instruction is executed. The FAL
number i s then written to words A430 to A461. Bits from A43001 to A46115 cor-
respond consecutively to FAL numbers 001 to 511
Auxiliary Area Section 3-6
64
3-6-43Memory Error Area Location
Bits A40300 to A40308 are turned ON to indicate the memory area in which a
memory error has occurred. The bits correspond to memory areas as follows:
00: Program Memory 05: I/O Table
01: Memory Card 06: System Memory
02: I/O Memory 07: Routing Tables
03: EM 08: CPU Bus Unit Software Switches
04: PC Setup
3-6-44Memory Card Start-up Transfer Error Flag
Bit A40309 is turned ON when an error occurs during the transmission of the
program from the Memory Card when power is turned ON. An error can occur
because the AUT OEXEC file is missing, the Memory Card is not installed, or the
System Protect setting is ON.
3-6-45CPU-recognized Rack Numbers
Bits A41900 through A41907 are turned ON when Expansion Racks #0 through
#7, respectively, are recognized by the CPU.
3-6-46CPU Bus Unit Number Setting Error Flag
Bit A42314 is turned ON when a CPU Bus Unit is not set to an acceptable unit
number (0 to 15).
3-6-47CPU Bus Link Error Flag
Bit A42315 is turned ON when a parity error occurs with CPU bus links.
3-6-48Maximum Cycle Time
Words A462 and A463 contain the maximum cycle time that has occurred
since operation was started. If the maximum cycle time is exceeded, howev-
er, the previous maximum cycle time will remain in words A462 and A463.
The time is recorded in 8-digit BCD in tenths of milliseconds (0000000.0 ms
to 9999999.9 ms), as shown in the following table.
Word Bits
15 to 12 11 to 08 07 to 04 03 to 00
A463 106105104103
A462 10210110010–1
3-6-49Present Cycle Time
Words A464 and A465 contain the present cycle time unless the maximum
cycle time is exceeded, in which case the previous cycle time will remain.
The time is recorded in 8-digit BCD in tenths of milliseconds (0000000.0 ms
to 9999999.9 ms), as shown in the following table.
Word Bits
15 to 12 11 to 08 07 to 04 03 to 00
A465 106105104103
A464 10210110010–1
3-6-50 Instruction Execution Error Flag, ER
Bit A50003 is turned ON if an attempt is made to execute an instruction with
incorrect operand data. Common causes of an instruction error are non-BCD
operand data when BCD data is required, or an indirectly addressed DM
Auxiliary Area Section 3-6
!
!
65
word that is non-existent. When the ER Flag is ON, the current instruction
will not be executed.
3-6-51 Arithmetic Flags
The following flags are used in data shifting, arithmetic calculation, and com-
parison instructions. They are generally referred to only by their two-letter
abbreviations.
Caution These flags are all reset when the END instruction is executed, and therefore
cannot be monitored from a Peripheral Device.
Refer to
5-14 Shift Instructions
,
5-16 Comparison Instructions
,
5-18 BCD Cal-
culation Instructions
, and
5-19 Binary Calculation Instructions
for details.
Bit A50004 is turned ON when there is a carry in the result of an arithmetic
operation or when a rotate or shift instruction moves a “1” into CY. The con-
tent of CY is also used in some arithmetic operations, e.g., it is added or sub-
tracted along with other operands. This flag can be set and cleared from the
program using the SET CARRY and CLEAR CARRY instructions. This Flag
is also used by the I/O READ and I/O WRITE instructions. Refer to page 405
for details.
Bit A50005 is turned ON when the result of a comparison shows the first of
two operands to be greater than the second.
Bit A50006 is turned ON when the result of a comparison shows two oper-
ands to be equal or when the result of an arithmetic operation is zero.
Bit A50007 is turned ON when the result of a comparison shows the first of
two operands to be less than the second.
Bit A50008 is turned ON when the highest bit in the result of a calculation is
ON.
Bit A50009 is turned ON when the absolute value of the result is greater than
the maximum value that can be expressed.
Bit A50010 is turned ON when absolute value of the result is less than the
minimum value that can be expressed.
Caution The previous seven flags are cleared when END(001) is is executed.
3-6-52 Step Flag Bit A50012 is turned ON for one cycle when step execution is started with the
STEP(008) instruction.
3-6-53 First Cycle Flag
When ladder-only programming is used, bit A50015 turns ON when PC op-
eration begins and then turns OFF after one cycle of the program. When
SFC programming is used, A50015 turns ON for one cycle at the beginning
of action program execution. A50015 also turns ON at the beginning of
scheduled interrupt execution. The First Cycle Flag is useful in initializing
counter values and other operations. An example of this is provided in
5-13
Timer and Counter Instructions
.
Carry Flag, CY
Greater Than Flag, GR
Equals Flag, EQ
Less Than Flag, LE
Negative Flag, N
Overflow Flag, OF
Underflow Flag, UF
Auxiliary Area Section 3-6
!
66
Note Do not use A50015 to control execution of differentiated instructions. The
instructions will never be executed.
3-6-54 Clock Pulse Bits
Four clock pulses are available to control program timing. Each clock pulse
bit is ON for the first half of the rated pulse time, then OFF for the second
half. In other words, each clock pulse has a duty factor of 50%.
These clock pulse bits are often used with counter instructions to create tim-
ers. Refer to
5-13 Timer and Counter Instructions
for an example of this.
Pulse width 0.1 s 0.2 s 1.0 s 0.02 s
Bit A50100 A50101 A50102 A50103
Bit A50103
0.02-s clock pulse
Bit A50100
0.1-s clock pulse Bit A50101
0.2-s clock pulse
Bit A50102
1.0-s clock pulse
0.1 s
.05 s .05 s
1.0 s
0.5 s 0.5 s
0.2 s
0.1 s 0.1 s
0.02 s
.01 s .01 s
Caution Because the 0.1-second and 0.02-second clock pulse bits have ON times of 50
and 10 ms, respectively , the CPU may not be able to accurately read the pulses i f
program execution time is too long.
3-6-55Network Status Flags
Bits A50200 through A50207 are turned ON to indicate that ports #0 through
#7, respectively, are enabled for the SEND(192), RECV(193), and
CMND(194) in either a SYSMAC NET Link or SYSMAC LINK System. Bits
A50208 through A50215 are turned ON to indicate that an error has occurred
in ports #0 through #7, respectively, during data communications using
SEND(192), RECV(193), or CMND(194).
A503 through A510 contain the completion codes for ports #0 through #7, re-
spectively, following data communications using SEND(192), RECV(193), or
CMND(194). Refer to the
SYSMAC NET Link System Manual
or
SYSMAC LINK
System Manual
for details on completion codes.
3-6-56EM Status Flags
The rightmost digit of A511 will contain the current bank number . Bit A51115 (the
EM Installed Flag) is turned ON when a EM Unit is mounted to the CPU.
3-7 Transition Area
A transition is a condition which moves the active status from one step to the next
in the SFC program. Flags in the Transition Area are turned ON when a
TOUT(202) instruction is executed with an ON execution condition, or a
TCNT(123) counter times out.
The CV500 has 512 Transition Flags, numbered TN0000 to TN0511, and the
CV1000 o r CV2000 has 1,024 Transition Flags, numbered TN0000 to TN1023.
Transition Area Section 3-7
67
Input the transition number as a bit operand when designating Transition Flags
in instructions.
The CVM1 does not support SFC programming and is not equipped with a Tran-
sition Area.
3-8 Step Area
A step in the program represents a single process. All SFC programs are
executed b y step. Each step must have its own unique step number. Flags in the
Step Area are turned ON to indicate that a step is active.
The CV500 has 512 Step Flags, numbered ST0000 to ST0511, and the CV1000
or CV2000 has 1,024 Step Flags, numbered ST0000 to ST1023. Input the step
number as a bit operand when designating Step Flags in instructions.
The CVM1 does not support SFC programming and is not equipped with a Step
Area.
3-9 Timer Area
Timer Completion Flags and present values (PV) are accessed through timer
numbers ranging from T0000 through T0511 for the CV500 or
CVM1-CPU01-EV2 and from T0000 through T1023 for the CV1000, CV2000,
CVM1-CPU11-EV2, or CVM1-CPU21-EV2. Each timer number and its set
value (SV) are defined using timer instructions. No prefix is required when
using a timer number to create a timer in one of these instructions.
The same timer number can be defined using more than one of these
instructions as long as the instructions are not executed in the same cycle. If
the same timer number is defined in more than one of these instructions or in
the same instruction twice, an error will be generated during the program
check, but as long as the instructions are not executed in the same cycle,
they will operate correctly. There are no restrictions on the order in which tim-
er numbers can be used.
Once defined, a timer number can be designated as an operand in one or
more of certain instructions. Timer numbers can be designated for operands
that require bit data or for operands that require word data. When designated
as an operand that requires bit data, the timer number accesses the Comple-
tion Flag of the timer. The Completion Flag will be ON when the timer has
timed out. When designated as an operand that requires word data, the timer
number accesses a memory location that holds the PV of the timer.
Timer PVs are reset when PC operation is begun, when the CNR(236)
instruction is executed, and when in interlocked program sections when the
execution condition for IL(002) is OFF. Refer to
5-8 Interlock and Interlock
Clear – IL(02) and ILC(03)
for details on timer operation in interlocked pro-
gram sections.
When the cycle time exceeds 10 ms, define TIMH(015) instructions with timer
numbers T0000 through T0127 for the CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2, and
T0000 through T0255 for the CV1000, CV2000, CVM1-CPU11-EV2, or
CVM1-CPU21-EV2, to ensure accuracy.
TIM timers are not affected by the cycle time, but TTIM(120) timers time slowly if
the cycle time exceeds 100 ms.
Timer Area Section 3-9
68
3-10 Counter Area
Counter Completion Flags and present values (PV) are accessed through
counter numbers ranging from C0000 through C0511 for the CV500 or
CVM1-CPU01-EV2 and from C0000 through C1023 for the CV1000,
CV2000, CVM1-CPU11-EV2, or CVM1-CPU21-EV2. Each counter number
and its set value (SV) are defined using counter instructions. No prefix is re-
quired when using a counter number to create a counter in a counter instruc-
tion.
The same counter number can be defined using more than one of these
instructions as long as the instructions are not executed in the same cycle. If
the same counter number is defined in more than one of these instructions or
in the same instruction twice, an error will be generated during the program
check, but as long as the instructions are not executed in the same cycle,
they will operate correctly. There are no restrictions on the order in which
counter numbers can be used.
Once defined, a counter number can be designated as an operand in one or
more of certain instructions other than those listed above. Counter numbers
can be designated for operands that require bit data or for operands that re-
quire word data. When designated as an operand that requires bit data, the
counter number accesses the completion flag of the counter. When desig-
nated as an operand that requires word data, the counter number accesses a
memory location that holds the PV of the counter.
Counter PVs are reset when the CNR(236) instruction is executed, but unlike
timers, counters maintain their status when PC operation is begun, and when
in interlocked program sections when the execution condition for IL(002) is
OFF.
3-11 DM and EM Areas
The DM (Data Memory) Area is used for internal data storage and manipula-
tion and is accessible only by word. Addresses range from D00000 through
D08191 for the CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2; from D00000 through D24575
for the CV1000, CV2000, CVM1-CPU11-EV2, or CVM1-CPU21-EV2.
The EM (Extended Data Memory) Area is available with the CV1000,
CV2000, or CVM1-CPU21-EV2 only and only if purchased and installed as
an option. EM Area and DM Area functions are identical. The main difference
between EM and DM is that DM is internal, while EM is contained on an EM
Unit, a card that fits into a slot on the CV1000, CV2000, or
CVM1-CPU21-EV2 CPU. There are three models of Memory Units available,
with 64K words (E00000 to E32765 × 2 banks), 128K words (E00000 to
E32765 × 4 banks), and 256K words (E00000 to E32765 × 8 banks).
When the PC is turned on, the EM bank number is automatically set to 0, but can
be changed with the EMBC(171) instruction.
When using the SYSMAC NET Link or SYSMAC LINK systems, D00000
through D00127 are automatically allocated as part of the Data Link Table
unless data link are set manually from the CVSS/SSS. The 1,l600 words
from D02000 to D03599 are allocated for CPU Bus Units, 100 words for each
Unit. The particular function depends on the type of CPU Bus Unit being
used. Refer to the CPU Bus Unit’s
Operation Manual
for details.
Note D02000 to D03599 are not used by SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O Master Units.
DM and EM Areas Section 3-11
69
Although composed of 16 bits just like any other word in memory, DM and
EM words cannot be specified by bit for use in instructions with bit-size oper-
ands, such as LD, OUT, AND, and OR, nor can DM words be used with the
SHIFT instruction.
The DM and EM Areas retain status during power interruptions.
Normally, when the content of a data area word is specified for an instruction,
the instruction is performed directly on the content of that word. For example,
suppose CMP(020) (COMPARE) is used in the program with CIO 0005 as
the first operand and D00010 as the second operand. When this instruction
is executed, the content of CIO 0005 is compared with that of D00010.
It is also possible, however, to use indirect DM and EM addresses as oper-
ands for instructions. If *D00100 is specified as the data for a programming
instruction, the asterisk in front of D indicates that it is an indirect address
that specifies another which contains the actual operand data. Likewise, EM
indirect addressing is indicated by an asterisk in front of the E, *E. When ad-
dressed indirectly, the content of *D00100 can be read as either BCD or
binary (hexadecimal) data, depending on the PC Setup for indirect addres-
sing.
If the PC Setup define the content of a *DM (or *EM) address as BCD, the
number indicates another DM (or EM) address. If the contents of the *DM
address are not BCD, a *DM BCD error will occur, and an error flag, A50003,
will be turned ON. Because only the last four digits of the final address can
be specified in one word, the range of possible BCD numbers is #0000 to
#9999, and the range of DM addresses that can be addressed indirectly is
D00000 to D09999.
If the content of D00100 is #0324, then *D00100 indicates D00324 as the
word that contains the desired data, and the content of D00324 is used as
the operand in the instruction. The following shows an example of this with
the MOVE instruction.
Word Content
D00099 4C59
D00100 0324
D00101 F35A
D00324 5555
D00325 2506
D00326 D541 5555 moved
to A0090.
Indicates
D00324.
Indirect
address
(030)
MOV *D00100 A090
If the PC Setup define the content of a *DM address as binary, the number
indicates a PC memory address. The range of possible binary numbers,
$0000 to $FFFF, allows all memory areas, including EM, to be indirectly ad-
dressed.
wIf, in this case, the content of D00100 is $0324, then *D00100 indicates PC
memory address $0324, which is CIO 0804 in the SYSMAC BUS/2 Area, as the
word that contains the desired data, and the content of CIO 0804 is used as the
operand in the instruction. The following example shows this type of indirect ad-
dressing with the MOVE instruction.
Indirect Addressing
DM and EM Areas Section 3-11
70
Word Content
D00099 4C59
D00100 0200
D00101 F35A
CIO 0512 5555
CIO 0513 2506
CIO 0514 D541 5555 moved
to A090.
Indicates
CIO 0512.
Indirect
address
(030)
MOV *D00100 A090
Indirect addressing can also be used in instructions that require bit operands
for bits in the Core I/O Area ($0000 to $0FFF). These bits are designated by
using the rightmost digits of the memory address as the leftmost three digits
of the hexadecimal address and adding the bit number as the rightmost digit.
For example, the CIO bit 190000 is designated by $76CA where 76C is the
rightmost three digits of the memory address (CIO word 1900 is $076C) and
A is bit 10.
3-12 Index and Data Registers (IR and DR)
The Index Registers, IR0, IR1, and IR2, which contain a single word of data, are
used for indirect addressing. A “,” prefix is included before an Index Register to
indicate indirect addressing, just as the “*” prefix is used to indicate indirect ad-
dressing with DM and EM.
If an Index Register is used as an operand in an instruction without the “,”
prefix, the instruction is performed directly on the content of that Index Regis-
ter, as in the following example.
08FC moved
to IR0.
Word Content
D00000 08FC Word Content
IR0 08FC
(030)
MOV D00000 IR0
If an Index Register is used as an operand in an instruction with the “,” prefix,
the instruction is performed on the word at the PC memory address indicated
by that Index Register, as in the following example.
Word Content
IR0 076C
08FC moved
to CIO 1900.
Indicates 076C
(CIO 1900)
Indirect
address
Word Content
D00000 08FC Word Content
CIO 1900 08FC
(030)
MOV D00000 ,IR0
Indirect addressing can also be used in instructions that require bit operands
for bits in the Core I/O Area ($0000 to $0FFF). These bits are designated by
using the rightmost digits of the memory address as the leftmost three digits
Direct Addressing
Indirect Addressing
Index and Data Registers (IR and DR) Section 3-12
71
of the hexadecimal address and adding the bit number as the rightmost digit.
For example, the CIO bit 190000 is designated by $76CA where 76C is the
rightmost three digits of the memory address (CIO word 1900 is $076C) and
A is bit 10.
The PC memory address indicated in an Index Register can be offset by a
specified constant or by the content of a Data Register (DR0, DR1, or DR2)
by inputting the constant or the Data Register before the “,” prefix. The
constant must be in BCD between –2047 and +2047. To offset the indirect
addressing by +31 words, simply input +31, before the “,” prefix, as shown.
Register Content
IR0 076C
+31 1F
078B
08FC moved
to CIO 1931.
Indicates 078B
(CIO 1931)
Word Content
D00000 08FC Word Content
CIO 1931 08FC
(030)
MOV D00000 +31,IR0
Indirect
address
If a Data Register is input before the “,” prefix, the content of the Data Register
will be added to the content of the Index Register, and the result is the PC
memory address that is indirectly addressed. If the result exceeds $FFFF, the
carry to the fifth digit is truncated (effectively subtracting $10000 (65,536, deci-
mal) from the result). In the following example, DR1 is added to IR0. The content
of DR1 is $FFE1, so adding $FFE1 is equivalent to subtracting 1F ($0FFE1 –
$10000 = –1F), for all IR0 values greater than or equal to $001F.
08FC moved
to CIO 1869.
Indicates 074D
(CIO 1869)
Word Content
D00000 08FC Word Content
CIO 1869 08FC
Register Content
DR1 FFE1
IR0 076C
1074D
Indirect
address
(030)
MOV D00000 DR1,IR0
An auto-increment increases the contents of an Index Register by 1 or 2 after
executing the instruction. A “+” suffix indicates an auto-increment of 1, and a
“++” suffix indicates an auto-increment of 2.
An auto-decrement decreases the contents of an Index Register by 1 o r 2 before
executing the instruction. A“–” prefix indicates an auto-decrement of 1, and a
“––” prefix indicates an auto-decrement of 2. The notation for auto-increments
and auto-decrements is as follows:
,IRn+: After execution, increase the contents of IRn by 1.
,IRn++: After execution, increase the contents of IRn by 2.
,–IRn: Decrease the contents of IRn by 1 before execution.
,––IRn: Decrease the contents of IRn by 2 before execution.
Both a n auto-increment and an auto-decrement are used in the following exam-
ple. The data movement for the first execution is shown. The second execution
Offset Indirect Addressing
Auto-increments and
Auto-decrements
Index and Data Registers (IR and DR) Section 3-12
72
would move the contents of CIO 1902 to CIO 1898; the third execution would
move the contents of CIO 1904 to CIO 1897; etc.
Word Content
CIO 1900 08FC Word Content
CIO 1899 08FC
Register Content
IR1 076C
IR0 076C
(030)
MOV IR0++ IR1–
CIO 1900 – 1
CIO 1900
Index and Data Registers (IR and DR) Section 3-12
73
SECTION 4
Writing Programs
This section explains the basic steps and concepts involved in writing a basic ladder diagram program. It introduces the
instructions that are used to build the basic structure of the ladder diagram and control its execution, along with a few other
instructions of special interest in programming. It also introduces the new version-2 CVM1 CPUs instructions and explains
the data formats that they can utilize.
The entire set of instructions used in programming is described in Section 5 Instruction Set.
4-1 Basic Procedure 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 Instruction Terminology 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3 Basic Ladder Diagrams 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-1 Basic Terms 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-2 Basic Mnemonic Code 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-3 Ladder Instructions 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-4 OUTPUT and OUTPUT NOT 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-5 The END Instruction 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4 Mnemonic Code 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-1 Logic Block Instructions 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-2 Coding Multiple Right-hand Instructions 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5 Branching Instruction Lines 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-1 TR Bits 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-2 Interlocks 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6 Jumps 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7 Controlling Bit Status 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7-1 DIFFERENTIATE UP and DIFFERENTIATE DOWN 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7-2 SET and RESET 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7-3 KEEP 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7-4 Self-maintaining Bits (Seal) 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8 Intermediate Instructions 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9 Work Bits (Internal Relays) 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10 Programming Precautions 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11 Program Execution 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12 Using Version-2 CVM1 CPUs 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12-1 Input Comparison Instructions 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12-2 CMP and CMPL 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12-3 Enhanced Math Instructions 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13 Data Formats 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13-1 Unsigned Binary Data 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13-2 Signed Binary Data 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13-3 BCD Data 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13-4 Signed BCD Data 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13-5 Floating-point Data 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
4-1 Basic Procedure
There are several basic steps involved in writing a program. Sheets tha t can be
copied t o aid in programming are provided in
Appendix E I/O Assignment Sheets
and
Appendix F Program Coding Sheet
.
1, 2, 3...
1. Obtain a list of all I/O devices and the I/O points that have been assigned to
them and prepare a table that shows the I/O bit allocated to each I/O device.
2. If the PC has any Units that are allocated words in data areas other than the
CIO area or are allocated CIO words in which the function of each bit is spe-
cified by the Unit, prepare similar tables to show what words are used for
which Units and what function is served by each bit within the words. These
Units include CPU Bus Units, Special I/O Units, and Link Units.
3. Determine what words are available for work bits and prepare a table in
which you can allocate these as you use them.
4. Also prepare tables of timer and counter numbers and jump numbers so that
you can allocate these as you use them. Remember, timer and counter
numbers can be defined only once within the program; jump numbers can
be used only once each. (timer/counter numbers are described in
5-13 Tim-
er and Counter Instructions
; jump numbers are described in this section.)
5. Draw the ladder diagram. If SFC programming is being used, you will need
to write a ladder diagram for each action program and each transition pro-
gram. You will also need to write interrupt programs if they are required.
Note The CVM1 does not support SFC programming.
6. Input the program into the CPU. Actual input is done from the CVSS and is
possible in either ladder diagram or mnemonic form.
7. Check the program for syntax errors and correct these.
8. Execute the program to check for execution errors and correct these.
9. After the entire Control System has been installed and is ready for use,
execute the program and fine tune it if required.
The basics of ladder-diagram programming and conversion to mnemonic code
are described in
4-3 Basic Ladder Diagrams
. The rest of Section 4 covers more
advanced programming, programming precautions, and program execution. All
instructions are covered in
Section 5 Instruction Set
.
Section 8 Error Processing
provides information required for debugging. Refer to the
CVSS Operation
Manuals
for program input, debugging, and monitoring procedures.
4-2 Instruction Terminology
There are basically two types of instructions used in ladder-diagram program-
ming: instructions that correspond to the conditions on the rungs of the ladder
diagram and are used in instruction form only when converting a program to
mnemonic code, and instructions that are used on the right side of the ladder
diagram and are executed according to the conditions on the instruction lines
leading to them.
Most instructions have at least one or more operands associated with them.
Operands indicate or provide the data on which an instruction is performed.
These are sometimes input as the actual numeric values, but are usually the ad-
dresses of data area words or bits that contain the data to be used. For instance,
a MOVE instruction that has CIO 0000 designated as the source operand will
move the contents of CIO 0000 to some other location. The other location is also
designated a s a n operand. A bit whose address is designated as an operand is
called an operand bit; a word whose address is designated as an operand is
called a n operand word. If the value is entered as a constant, it is preceded by #
to indicate it is not an address, but the actual value to be used in the instruction.
Refer t o
Section 5 Instruction Set
for other terms used in describing instructions.
Instruction Terminology Section 4-2
75
4-3 Basic Ladder Diagrams
A ladder diagram consists of two vertical lines running down the sides with lines
branching in between them. The vertical lines are called bus bars; the branch-
ing lines, instruction lines or rungs. Along the instruction lines are placed
conditions that lead to other instructions next to the right bus bar. The logical
combinations o f the conditions on the instruction lines determine when and how
the instructions at the right are executed. A ladder diagram is shown below.
Instruction
Instruction
0000
00 0063
15 0252
08 0001
09 0025
03 0244
00 0244
01
0000
01 0005
01 0005
02 0005
03 0005
04
0001
00 0000
02 0000
03 0000
50 0000
07 T000
01 0005
15 0004
03 0004
05
0000
10
0000
11
0210
01 0210
02
0210
05 0210
07
As shown in the diagram above, instruction lines can branch apart and they can
join back together. The short vertical pairs of lines are cal le d conditions. Condi-
tions without diagonal lines through them are called normally open conditions
and correspond to a LOAD, AND, or OR instruction. The conditions with diago-
nal lines through them are called normally closed conditions and correspond
to a LOAD NOT, AND NOT, or OR NOT instruction. The number above each
condition indicates the operand bit for the instruction. It is the status of the bit
associated with each condition that determines the execution condition for fol-
lowing instructions. Only these conditions and a limited number of intermediate
instructions can appear along the instruction lines. All other instructions must
appear next to the right bus bar. Instructions that appear next to the right bus bar
are called right-hand instructions.
The way the operation of each of the instructions corresponds to a condition is
described below. Before we consider these, however, there are some basic
terms that must be explained.
4-3-1 Basic Terms
Each condition in a ladder diagram is either ON or OFF depending on the status
of the operand bit that has been assigned to it. A normally open condition is ON if
the operand bit is ON; OFF if the operand bit is OFF. A normally closed condition
is ON if the operand bit is OFF; OFF if the operand bit is ON. Generally speaking,
you use a normally open condition when you want something to happen when a
bit is ON, and a normally closed condition when you want something to happen
when a bit is OFF.
0000
00
0000
00
Instruction
Instruction Instruction is executed when
CIO bit 00000 is ON.
Instruction is executed when
CIO bit 00000 is OFF.
Normally open
condition
Normally closed
condition
Normally Open and
Normally Closed
Conditions
Basic Ladder Diagrams Section 4-3
76
In ladder diagram programming, the logical combination of ON and OFF condi-
tions before an instruction determines the compound condition under which the
instruction is executed. This condition, which is either ON or OFF, is called the
execution condition for the instruction. All instructions other than LOAD instruc-
tions have execution conditions. Execution conditions are maintained in buffers
in memory and are continuously changed by each instruction that is executed
until a LOAD or LOAD NOT instruction is used to start a new instruction line and
thus a new execution condition.
The operands designated for any of the ladder instructions can be any bit in the
data areas accessible by bit (e.g., not the DM or EM Areas). This means that the
conditions in a ladder diagram can be determined by I/O bits, flags, work bits,
timers/counters, etc. LOAD and OUTPUT instructions can also use TR Area
bits, but they do so only in special applications. Refer to
4-5-1 TR Bits
for details.
The relationship between the conditions on the instruction lines that lead to an
instruction determine the execution condition for the instruction. Any group of
conditions that go together to create an execution condition for an instruction is
called a logic block. Although ladder diagrams can be written without actually
analyzing individual logic blocks, understanding logic blocks is necessary for ef-
ficient programming and is essential when programs are to be input in mnemon-
ic code.
Version-2 CVM1 CPUs support the block programming instructions of the
C1000H and C2000H. Block programming is a form of programming that can
make it easier to program complex operations such as a series of data calcula-
tions that would be difficult to program using ladder diagrams. Creating struc-
tured programs can shorten cycle time, thereby improving overall system pro-
cessing speed.
4-3-2 Basic Mnemonic Code
Programs can be input from a Peripheral Device in either graphic form (i.e., as a
ladder diagram) or in mnemonic form (i.e., as a list of code). The mnemonic code
provides exactly the same information as the ladder diagram. You can program
directly in mnemonic code, although it is not recommended for beginners or for
complex programs. Programming in mnemonic code is also necessary when a
logic block contains more than twenty instruction lines.
Because of the importance of mnemonic code in complete understanding of a
program, we will introduce and describe the mnemonic code along with ladder
diagrams.
The program is input into addresses in Program Memory. Addresses in Program
Memory are slightly different to those in other memory areas because each ad-
dress does not necessarily hold the same amount of data. Rather, each address
holds one instruction and all of the definers and operands (described in more
detail later) required for that instruction.
With a CV-series PC, instructions can require between one and eight words in
memory. The length of an instruction depends not only on the instruction, but
also on the operands used for the instruction. If an index register is addressed
directly or a data register is used as an operand, the instruction will require on e
word less than when specifying a word address for the operand. If a constant is
designated for instructions that use 2-word operands, the instruction will require
one word more than when specifying a word address for the operand. The pos-
sible lengths for each instruction are provided in
Section 6 Program Execution
Timing
.
Program Memory addresses start at 00000 and run until the capacity of Program
Memory has been exhausted. The first word at each address defines the instruc-
tion. Any definers used by the instruction are placed on the same line of code.
Execution Conditions
Operand Bits
Logic Blocks
Block Programming
Program Memory Structure
Basic Ladder Diagrams Section 4-3
77
Also, if an instruction requires only a single bit operand (with no definer), the bit
operand i s also placed on the same line as the instruction. The rest of the words
required by an instruction contain the operands that specify what data is to be
used. All other instructions are written with the instruction on the first line fol-
lowed by the operands one to a line. An example of mnemonic code is shown
below. The instructions used in it are described later in the manual. When input-
ting programs in mnemonic form from the CVSS, most operands are separated
only by spaces. Refer to the
CVSS Operation Manuals
for details.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 AND 000001
00002 OR 000002
00003 LD NOT 000100
00004 AND 000101
00005 AND LD 000102
00006 MOV(030) 0000
D00000
00007 CMP(020) D00000
0000
00008 LD 025505
00009 OUT 000501
00010 MOV(030) D00000
D00500
00011 DIFU(013) 000502
00012 AND 000005
00013 OUT 000503
The address and instruction columns of the mnemonic code table are filled in for
the instruction word only. For all other lines, the left two columns are left blank. If
the instruction requires no definer or bit operand, the operand column is left
blank for first line. It is a good idea to cross through any blank data column
spaces (for all instruction words that do not require data) so that the data column
can be quickly scanned to see if any addresses have been left out.
When programming, addresses are automatically displayed and do not have to
be input unless for some reason a different location is desired for the instruction.
When converting to mnemonic code, it is best to start at Program Memory ad-
dress 00000 unless there is a specific reason for starting elsewhere.
4-3-3 Ladder Instructions
The ladder instructions are those instructions that correspond to the conditions
on the ladder diagram. Ladder instructions, either independently or in combina-
tion with the logic block instructions described later, form the execution condi-
tions upon which the execution of all other instructions are based.
Basic Ladder Diagrams Section 4-3
78
The first condition that starts any logic block within a ladder diagram corre-
sponds t o a LOAD or LOAD NOT instruction. Each of these instructions is written
on one line of mnemonic code. “Instruction” is used as a dummy instruction in the
following examples and could be any of the right-hand instructions described lat-
er in this manual.
A LOAD instruction.
A LOAD NOT instruction.
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 Instruction
00002 LD NOT 000000
00003 Instruction
Operands
0000
00
0000
00
When this is the only condition on the instruction line, the execution condition for
the instruction at the right is ON when the execution condition is ON. For the
LOAD instruction (i.e., a normally open condition), an ON execution condition
would be produced when CIO 000000 was ON; for the LOAD NOT instruction
(i.e., a normally closed condition), an ON execution condition would be pro-
duced when CIO 000000 was OFF.
When two or more conditions lie in series on the same instruction line, the first
one corresponds to a LOAD or LOAD NOT instruction, and the rest of the condi-
tions correspond to AND or AND NOT instructions. The following example
shows three conditions which correspond in order from the left to a LOAD, an
AND NOT, and an AND instruction. Again, each of these instructions is written
on one line of mnemonic code.
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 AND NOT 000100
00002 AND 000200
00003 Instruction
0000
00 0001
00 0002
00 Instruction Operands
The instruction would have an ON execution condition only when CIO 000000
was ON, CIO 000100 was OFF, and CIO 000200 was ON.
AND instructions in series can be considered individually, with each taking the
logical AND of the execution condition produced by the preceding instruction
and the status of the AND instruction’s operand bit. If both of these are ON, an
ON execution condition will be produced for the next instruction. If either is OFF,
the resulting execution condition will also be OFF.
Each AND NOT instruction in a series would take the logical AND between the
execution condition produced by the preceding instruction and the inverse of its
operand bit.
When two or more conditions lie on separate instruction lines running in parallel
and then joining together, the first condition corresponds to a LOAD or LOAD
NOT instruction; the rest of the conditions correspond to OR or OR NOT instruc-
tions. The following example shows three conditions which correspond in order
from the top to a LOAD NOT, an OR NOT, and an OR instruction. Again, each of
these instructions requires one line of mnemonic code.
Address Instruction
00000 LD NOT 000000
00001 OR NOT 000100
00002 OR 000200
00003 Instruction
Operands
0000
00
0001
00
0002
00
Instruction
LOAD and LOAD NOT
AND and AND NOT
OR and OR NOT
Basic Ladder Diagrams Section 4-3
79
The instruction at the right would have an ON execution condition when any one
of the three conditions was ON, i.e., when CIO 00000 was OFF, when CIO 00100
was OFF, or when CIO 000200 was ON.
OR and OR NOT instructions can be considered individually, each taking the
logical OR between the execution condition produced by the preceding instruc-
tions and the status of the OR instruction’s operand bit. If either one of these
were ON, an ON execution condition would be produced for the next instruction.
When AND and OR instructions are combined in more complicated diagrams,
they can sometimes be considered individually, with each instruction performing
a logic operation on the current execution condition and the status of the oper-
and bit. The following is one example. Study this example until you are con-
vinced that the mnemonic code follows the same logic flow as the ladder dia-
gram.
Instruction
0000
03
0000
00 0000
01 0000
02
0002
00
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 AND 000001
00002 OR 000200
00003 AND 000002
00004 AND NOT 000003
00005 Instruction
Here, an AND is taken between the status of CIO 000000 and that of
CIO 000001 to determine the execution condition for an OR with the status of
CIO 000200. The result of this operation determines the execution condition for
an AND with the status of CIO 000002, which in turn determines the execution
condition for an AND with the inverse (i.e., and AND NOT) of the status of
CIO 000003.
In more complicated diagrams, it is necessary to consider logic blocks before an
execution condition can be determined for the final instruction, and that’s where
AND LOAD and OR LOAD instructions are used. Before we consider more com-
plicated diagrams, however, we’ll look at the instructions required to complete a
simple “input-output” program.
4-3-4 OUTPUT and OUTPUT NOT
The simplest way to output the results of combining execution conditions is to
output it directly with the OUTPUT and OUTPUT NOT. These instructions are
used to control the status of the designated operand bit according to the execu-
tion condition. With the OUTPUT instruction, the operand bit will be turned ON
as long as the execution condition is ON and will be turned OFF as long as the
execution condition is OFF. With the OUTPUT NOT instruction, the operand bit
will be turned ON as long as the execution condition is OFF and turned OFF as
long as the execution condition is ON. These appear as shown below. In mne-
monic code, each of these instructions requires one line.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 OUT 000200
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000001
00001 OUT NOT 000201
0002
00
0002
01
0000
00
0000
01
Combining AND and OR
Instructions
Basic Ladder Diagrams Section 4-3
80
In the above examples, CIO 000200 will be ON as long as CIO 000000 is ON and
CIO 000201 will be ON as long as CIO 000001 is OFF. Here, CIO 000000 and
CIO 000001 would be input bits and CIO 000200 and CIO 000201 output bits
assigned t o the Units controlled by the PC, i.e., the signals coming in through the
input points assigned CIO 000000 and CIO 000001 are controlling the output
points to which CIO 000200 and CIO 000201 are allocated.
The length of time that a bit is ON or OFF can be controlled by combining the
OUTPUT or OUTPUT NOT instruction with Timer instructions. Refer to Exam-
ples under
5-13-1 Timer – TIM
for details.
4-3-5 The END Instruction
The last instruction required to complete any program is the END instruction.
When the CPU scans a program, it executes all instructions up to the first END
instruction before returning to the beginning of the program and beginning
execution again. Although an END instruction can be placed at any point in a
program, which is sometimes done when debugging, no instructions past the
first END instruction will be executed. The number following the END instruction
in the mnemonic code is its function code, which is used when inputting most
instructions into the PC. Function codes are described in more detail later. The
END instruction requires no operands and no conditions can be placed on the
instruction line with it.
Program
execution
ends here.
Address Instruction
00500 LD 000000
00501 AND NOT 000001
00502 Instruction
00503 END(001) ---
Operands
Instruction
0000
00 0000
01
(001)
END
If there is no END instruction anywhere in a program, the program will not be
executed at all.
4-4 Mnemonic Code
4-4-1 Logic Block Instructions
Logic block instructions do not correspond to specific conditions on the ladder
diagram; rather, they describe relationships between logic blocks. Each logic
block is started with a LOAD or LOAD NOT instruction. Whenever a LOAD or
LOAD NOT instruction is executed, a new execution condition is created and the
previous execution condition is stored in a buffer. The AND LOAD instruction
logically ANDs the execution conditions produced by two logic blocks, i.e., gen-
eral speaking, it ANDs the current execution condition with the last execution
condition stored in a buffer. The OR LOAD instruction logically ORs the execu-
tion conditions produced by two logic blocks.
Mnemonic Code Section 4-4
81
Although simple in appearance, the diagram below requires an AND LOAD
instruction.
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 OR 000001
00002 LD 000002
00003 OR NOT 000003
00004 AND LD ---
0000
00 Instruction
0000
02
0000
01 0000
03
Operands
The two logic blocks are indicated by dotted lines. Studying this example shows
that a n O N execution condition will be produced when: either of the conditions in
the left logic block is ON (i.e., when either CIO 000000 or CIO 000001 is ON) and
either of the conditions in the right logic block is ON (i.e., when either
CIO 000002 is ON or CIO 000003 is OFF).
The above ladder diagram cannot be converted to mnemonic code using AND
and OR instructions alone. If an AND between CIO 000002 and the results of an
OR between CIO 000000 and CIO 000001 is attempted, the OR NOT between
CIO 000002 and CIO 000003 is lost and the OR NOT ends up being an O R NOT
between just CIO 000003 and the result of an AND between CIO 000002 and the
first OR. What we need is a way to do the OR (NOT)’s independently and then
combine the results.
To do this, we can use the LOAD or LOAD NOT instruction in the middle of an
instruction line. When LOAD or LOAD NOT is executed in this way, the current
execution condition is saved in special buffers and the logic process is begun
over . To combine the results of the current execution condition with that of a pre-
vious “unused” execution condition, an AND LOAD or an OR LOAD instruction is
used. Here “LOAD” refers to loading the last unused execution condition. An u n -
used execution condition is produced by using the LOAD or LOAD NOT instruc-
tion for any but the first condition on an instruction line.
Analyzing the above ladder diagram in terms of mnemonic instructions, the
condition for CIO 000000 is a LOAD instruction and the condition below it is an
OR instruction between the status of CIO 000000 and that of CIO 000001. The
condition a t CIO 000002 is another LOAD instruction and the condition below is
an OR NOT instruction, i.e., an OR between the status of CIO 000002 and the
inverse of the status of CIO 000003. To arrive at the execution condition for the
instruction a t the right, the logical AND of the execution conditions resulting from
these two blocks would have to be taken. AND LOAD does this. The mnemonic
code for the ladder diagram is shown to the right of the diagram. The AND LOAD
instruction requires no operands of its own, because it operates on previously
determined execution conditions. Here too, dashes are used to indicate that no
operands needs designated or input.
AND LOAD
Mnemonic Code Section 4-4
82
The following diagram requires an OR LOAD instruction between the top logic
block and the bottom logic block. An ON execution condition would be produced
for the instruction at the right either when CIO 000000 is ON and CIO 000001 is
OFF or when CIO 000002 and CIO 000003 are both ON. The operation of and
mnemonic code for the OR LOAD instruction is exactly the same as those for a
AND LOAD instruction except that the current execution condition is ORed with
the last unused execution condition.
0000
00 0000
01
0000
02 0000
03
InstructionInstruction Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 AND 000001
00002 LD 000002
00003 AND NOT 000003
00004 OR LD ---
Operands
Naturally, some diagrams will require both AND LOAD and OR LOAD instruc-
tions.
To code diagrams with logic block instructions in series, the diagram must be
divided into logic blocks. Each block is coded using a LOAD instruction to code
the first condition, and then AND LOAD or OR LOAD is used to logically combine
the blocks. With both AND LOAD and OR LOAD there are two ways to achieve
this. One is to code the logic block instruction after the first two blocks and then
after each additional block. The other is to code all of the blocks to be combined,
starting each block with LOAD or LOAD NOT, and then to code the logic block
instructions which combine them. In this case, the instructions for the last pair of
blocks should be combined first, and then each preceding block should be com-
bined, working progressively back to the first block. Although either of these
methods will produce exactly the same result, the second method, that of coding
all logic block instructions together , can be used only if eight or fewer blocks a re
being combined, i.e., if seven or fewer logic block instructions are required.
The following diagram requires AND LOAD to be converted to mnemonic code
because three pairs of parallel conditions lie in series. The two means of coding
the programs are also shown.
00000 LD 000000
00001 OR NOT 000001
00002 LD NOT 000002
00003 OR 000003
00004 LD 000004
00005 OR 000005
00006 AND LD ---
00007 AND LD ---
00008 OUT 000500
0000
00 0000
02
0000
01 0000
03 0000
05
0000
04 0005
00
Address Instruction Operands
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 OR NOT 000001
00002 LD NOT 000002
00003 OR 000003
00004 AND LD ---
00005 LD 000004
00006 OR 000005
00007 AND LD ---
00008 OUT 000500
OR LOAD
Logic Block Instructions in
Series
Mnemonic Code Section 4-4
83
Again, with the second method, a maximum of eight blocks can be combined.
There i s n o l i m i t t o the number of blocks that can be combined with the first meth-
od.
The following diagram requires OR LOAD instructions to be converted to mne-
monic code because three pairs of conditions in series lie in parallel to each oth-
er.
0000
01
0000
03
0000
05
0000
00
0000
02
0000
04
0005
01
00000 LD 000000
00001 AND NOT 000001
00002 LD NOT 000002
00003 AND NOT 000003
00004 LD 000004
00005 AND 000005
00006 OR LD —
00007 OR LD —
00008 OUT 000501
Address Instruction Operands
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 AND NOT 000001
00002 LD NOT 000002
00003 AND NOT 000003
00004 OR LD —
00005 LD 000004
00006 AND 000005
00007 OR LD —
00008 OUT 000501
The first of each pair of conditions is converted to LOAD with the assigned bit
operand and then ANDed with the other condition. The first two blocks can be
coded first, followed by OR LOAD, the last block, and another OR LOAD, or the
three blocks can be coded first followed by two OR LOADs. The mnemonic code
for both methods is shown to the right of the ladder diagram.
Again, with the second method, a maximum of eight blocks can be combined.
There i s n o l i m i t t o the number of blocks that can be combined with the first meth-
od.
Both o f the coding methods described above can also be used when using AND
LOAD and OR LOAD, as long as the number of blocks being combined does no t
exceed eight.
The following diagram contains only two logic blocks as shown. It is not neces-
sary to further separate block b components, because it can be coded directly
using only AND and OR.
Block
aBlock
b
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 AND NOT 000001
00002 LD 000002
00003 AND 000003
00004 OR 000201
00005 OR 000004
00006 AND LD —
00007 OUT 000501
0000
01
0000
00 0005
01
0000
02 0000
03
0002
01
0000
04
Operands
Combining AND LOAD and
OR LOAD
Mnemonic Code Section 4-4
84
Although the following diagram is similar to the one above, block b in the diagram
below cannot be coded without separating it into two blocks combined with OR
LOAD. In this example, the three blocks have been coded first and then OR
LOAD has been used to combine the last two blocks followed by AND LOAD to
combine the execution condition produced by the OR LOAD with the execution
condition of block a.
When coding the logic block instructions together at the end of the logic blocks
they are combining, they must, as shown below, be coded in reverse order, i.e.,
the logic block instruction for the last two blocks is coded first, followed by the
one to combine the execution condition resulting from the first logic block
instruction and the execution condition of the logic block third from the end, and
on back to the first logic block that is being combined.
Block
aBlock
b
Block
b2
Block
b1
0000
00 0000
01 0005
02
0000
02
0002
02
0000
03
0000
04
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD NOT 000000
00001 AND 000001
00002 LD 000002
00003 AND NOT 000003
00004 LD NOT 000004
00005 AND 000202
00006 OR LD —
00007 AND LD —
00008 OUT 000502
When determining what logic block instructions will be required to code a dia-
gram, i t i s sometimes necessary to break the diagram into large blocks and then
continue breaking the large blocks down until logic blocks that can be coded
without logic block instructions have been formed. These blocks are then coded,
combining the small blocks first, and then combining the larger blocks. Either
AND LOAD or OR LOAD is used to combine the blocks, i.e., AND LOAD or OR
LOAD always combines the last two execution conditions that existed, regard-
less of whether the execution conditions resulted from a single condition, from
logic blocks, or from previous logic block instructions.
When working with complicated diagrams, blocks will ultimately be coded start-
ing at the top left and moving down before moving across. This will generally
mean that, when there might be a choice, OR LOAD will be coded before AND
LOAD.
The following diagram must be broken down into two blocks and each of these
then broken into two blocks before it can be coded. As shown below, blocks a
and b require an AND LOAD. Before AND LOAD can be used, however, OR
LOAD must be used to combine the top and bottom blocks on both sides, i.e., to
combine a1 and a2; b1 and b2.
Block
aBlock
b
Block
b2
Block
b1
Block
a2
Block
a1
0000
02
0000
00 0005
03
0000
04
0002
07
0000
01
0000
03
0000
05
0000
06
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 AND NOT 000001
00002 LD NOT 000002
00003 AND 000003
00004 OR LD —
00005 LD 000004
00006 AND 000005
00007 LD 000006
00008 AND 000007
00009 OR LD —
00010 AND LD —
00011 OUT 000503
Blocks a1 and a2
Blocks b1 and b2
Blocks a and b
Complicated Diagrams
Mnemonic Code Section 4-4
85
The following type of diagram can be coded easily if each block is coded in order:
first top to bottom and then left to right. In the following diagram, blocks a and b
would be combined using AND LOAD as shown above, and then block c would
be coded and a second AND LOAD would be used to combined it with the execu-
tion condition from the first AND LOAD. Then block d would be coded, a third
AND LOAD would be used to combine the execution condition from block d with
the execution condition from the second AND LOAD, and so on through to
block n.
0005
00
Block
aBlock
bBlock
n
Block
c
The following diagram requires an OR LOAD followed by an AND LOAD to code
the top of the three blocks, and then two more OR LOADs to complete the mne-
monic code.
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 LD 000001
00002 LD 000002
00003 AND NOT 000003
00004 OR LD ––
00005 AND LD ––
00006 LD NOT 000004
00007 AND 000005
00008 OR LD ––
00009 LD NOT 000006
00010 AND 000007
00011 OR LD ––
00012 OUT 000200
0000
00 0000
01
0000
02 0000
03
0000
05
0000
04
0000
06 0000
07
0002
00 Operands
Although the program will execute as written, this diagram could be drawn as
shown below to eliminate the need for the first OR LOAD and the AND LOAD,
simplifying the program and saving memory space.
0000
03
0000
02 0000
00
0000
01
0000
05
0000
06 0000
07
0000
04
0002
00
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000002
00001 AND NOT 000003
00002 OR 000001
00003 AND 000000
00004 LD NOT 000004
00005 AND 000005
00006 OR LD ––
00007 LD NOT 000006
00008 AND 000007
00009 OR LD ––
00010 OUT 000200
Mnemonic Code Section 4-4
86
The following diagram requires five blocks, which here are coded in order before
using OR LOAD and AND LOAD to combine them starting from the last two
blocks and working backward. The OR LOAD at program address 00008 com-
bines blocks blocks d and e, the following AND LOAD combines the resulting
execution condition with that of block c, etc.
Address Instruction
Blocks d and e
Block c with result of above
Block b with result of above
Block a with result of above
00000 LD 000000
00001 LD 000001
00002 AND 000002
00003 LD 000003
00004 AND 000004
00005 LD 000005
00006 LD 000006
00007 AND 000007
00008 OR LD ––
00009 AND LD ––
00010 OR LD ––
00011 AND LD ––
00012 OUT 000200
0000
00 0000
01
0000
03
0002
00
0000
02
0000
04 0000
05
0000
06 0000
07
Block
e
Block
d
Block
c
Block
b
Block a
OperandsAddress Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 LD 000001
00002 AND 000002
00003 LD 000003
00004 AND 000004
00005 LD 000005
00006 LD 000006
00007 AND 000007
00008 OR LD ––
00009 AND LD ––
00010 OR LD ––
00011 AND LD ––
00012 OUT 000200
Again, this diagram can be redrawn as follows to simplify program structure and
coding and to save memory space.
0000
06 0002
00
0000
07 0000
03 0000
04 0000
00
0000
05
0000
01 0000
02
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000006
00001 AND 000007
00002 OR 000005
00003 AND 000003
00004 AND 000004
00005 LD 000001
00006 AND 000002
00007 OR LD ––
00008 AND 000000
00009 OUT 000200
The next and final example may at first appear very complicated but can be
coded using only two logic block instructions. The diagram appears as follows:
Block cBlock b
Block a
0000
00 0005
00
0000
01 0000
02 0000
04
0000
03
0010
00 0010
01
0005
00
0000
06
0000
05
Mnemonic Code Section 4-4
87
The first logic block instruction is used to combine the execution conditions re-
sulting from blocks a and b, and the second one is to combine the execution
condition of block c with the execution condition resulting from the normally
closed condition assigned CIO 000003. The rest of the diagram can be coded
with OR, AND, and AND NOT instructions. The logical flow for this and the re-
sulting code are shown below.
000000 000001
000500
000002 000003
001000 001001
000004 000005
000500
000006
Block c
Block bBlock a
OR LD
LD 000000
AND 000001
OR 000500
AND 000002
AND NOT 000003
LD 001000
AND 001001
OR 000006
LD 000004
AND 000005
AND LD
00000 LD 000000
00001 AND 000001
00002 LD 001000
00003 AND 001001
00004 OR LD ––
00005 OR 000500
00006 AND 000002
00007 AND NOT 000003
00008 LD 000004
00009 AND 000005
00010 OR 000006
00011 AND LD ––
00012 OUT 000500
Address Instruction Operands
4-4-2 Coding Multiple Right-hand Instructions
If there is more than one right-hand instruction executed with the same execu-
tion condition, they are coded consecutively following the last condition on the
instruction line. In the following example, the last instruction line contains one
more condition that corresponds to an AND with CIO 000400.
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 OR 000001
00002 OR 000002
00003 OR 000200
00004 AND 000003
00005 OUT 000001
00006 OUT 000500
00007 AND 000400
00008 OUT 000506
Operands
0000
01
0005
00
0005
06
0000
00 0000
03
0004
00
0000
01
0000
02
0002
00
4-5 Branching Instruction Lines
When a n instruction line branches into two or more lines, it is sometimes neces-
sary to use either interlocks or TR bits to maintain the execution condition that
existed at a branching point. This is because instruction lines are executed
across to a right-hand instruction before returning to the branching point to
execute instructions one a branch line. If a condition exists on any of the instruc-
tion lines after the branching point, the execution condition could change during
this time making proper execution impossible. The following diagrams illustrate
Branching Instruction Lines Section 4-5
88
this. I n both diagrams, instruction 1 is executed before returning to the branching
point and moving on to the branch line leading to instruction 2.
Instruction 2
00000 LD 000000
00001 AND 000001
00002 Instruction 1
00003 AND 000002
00004 Instruction 2
00000 LD 000000
00001 Instruction 1
00002 AND 000002
00003 Instruction 2
Branching
point
Diagram B: Incorrect Operation
Diagram A: Correct Operation
Address Instruction
Address Instruction
Operands
Operands
0000
00
0000
02
Instruction 1
0000
00
0000
02 Instruction 2
Instruction 1
Branching
point 0000
01
If, as shown in diagram A, the execution condition that existed at the branching
point cannot be changed before returning to the branch line (instructions at the
far right do not change the execution condition), then the branch line will be
executed correctly and no special programming measure is required.
If, as shown in diagram B, a condition exists between the branching point and the
last instruction on the top instruction line, the execution condition at the branch-
ing point and the execution condition after completing the top instruction line will
sometimes b e di fferent, making it impossible to ensure correct execution of the
branch line.
There are two means of programming branching programs to preserve the
execution condition. One is to use TR bits; the other, to use interlocks
(IL(002)/ILC(003)).
4-5-1 TR Bits The TR area provides eight bits, TR0 through TR7, that can be used to tempo-
rarily preserve execution conditions. If a TR bit is placed at a branching point, the
current execution condition will be stored at the designated TR bit. When return-
ing to the branching point, the TR bit restores the execution status that was
saved when the branching point was first reached in program execution.
Note When programming in graphic ladder diagram form from the CVSS, it is not nec-
essary to input TR bits and none will appear on the screen. The CVSS will auto-
matically process TR bits for you as required and input them into the program.
You will have to input TR bit when programming in mnemonic form.
The previous diagram B can be written as shown below to ensure correct execu-
tion. I n mnemonic code, the execution condition is stored at the branching point
using the TR bit as the operand of the OUTPUT instruction. This execution
condition is then restored after executing the right-hand instruction by using the
same TR bit as the operand of a LOAD instruction
Diagram B: Corrected Using a TR bit
TR0 Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 OUT TR0
00002 AND 000001
00003 Instruction 1
00004 LD TR0
00005 AND 000002
00006 Instruction 2
Operands
0000
00
0000
02
0000
01
Instruction 2
Instruction 1
Branching Instruction Lines Section 4-5
89
In terms of actual instructions the above diagram would be as follows: The status
of CIO 000000 is loaded (a LOAD instruction) to establish the initial execution
condition. This execution condition is then output using an OUTPUT instruction
to TR0 to store the execution condition at the branching point. The execution
condition is then ANDed with the status of CIO 000001 and instruction 1 is
executed accordingly. The execution condition that was stored at the branching
point is then re-loaded (a LOAD instruction with TR0 as the operand), this is
ANDed with the status of CIO 000002, and instruction 2 is executed accordingly.
The following example shows an application using two TR bits.
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 OUT TR0
00002 AND 000001
00003 OUT TR1
00004 AND 000002
00005 OUT 000500
00006 LD TR1
00007 AND 000003
00008 OUT 000501
00009 LD TR0
00010 AND 000004
00011 OUT 000502
00012 LD TR0
00013 AND NOT 000005
00014 OUT 000503
Operands
0000
05
0000
00 0000
01 0000
02
0000
03
0000
04
0005
00
0005
01
0005
02
0005
03
TR0 TR1
In this example, TR0 and TR1 are used to store the execution conditions at the
branching points. After executing instruction 1, the execution condition stored i n
TR1 is loaded for an AND with the status CIO 000003. The execution condition
stored in TR0 is loaded twice, the first time for an AND with the status of
CIO 000004 and the second time for an AND with the inverse of the status of
CIO 000005.
TR bits can be used as many times as required as long as the same TR bit is not
used more than once in the same instruction block. A new instruction block is
begun each time execution returns to the bus bar . If, in a single instruction block,
it is necessary to have more than eight branching points that require the execu-
tion condition be saved, interlocks (which are described next) must be used.
When drawing a ladder diagram, be careful not to use TR bits unless necessary.
Often the number of instructions required for a program can be reduced and
ease of understanding a program increased by redrawing a diagram that would
otherwise required TR bits. In both of the following pairs of diagrams, the bottom
versions require fewer instructions and do not require TR bits. I n th e first exam-
ple, this is achieved by reorganizing the parts of the instruction block: the bottom
one, by separating the second OUTPUT instruction and using another LOAD
instruction to create the proper execution condition for it.
Branching Instruction Lines Section 4-5
90
Note Although simplifying programs is always a concern, the order of execution of
instructions is sometimes important. For example, a MOVE instruction may be
required before the execution of a BINAR Y ADD instruction to place the proper
data i n the required operand word. Be sure that you have considered execution
order before reorganizing a program to simplify it.
0000
00 0000
01
0000
00
0000
01
Instruction 2
Instruction 1
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
TR0
0000
00
0000
01
0000
04
0000
03
Instruction 2
Instruction 1
Instruction 1
0000
01 0000
02 0000
03
0000
00
0000
01 0000
04
0000
02
Instruction 2
TR0
4-5-2 Interlocks
The problem of storing execution conditions at branching points can also be
handled by using the INTERLOCK (IL(002)) and INTERLOCK CLEAR
(ILC(003)) instructions to eliminate the branching point completely while allow-
ing a specific execution condition to control a group of instructions. The INTER-
LOCK and INTERLOCK CLEAR instructions are always used together.
When an INTERLOCK instruction is placed before a section of a ladder pro-
gram, the execution condition for the INTERLOCK instruction will control the
execution o f all instruction up to the next INTERLOCK CLEAR instruction. If the
execution condition for the INTERLOCK instruction is OFF, all right-hand
instructions through the next INTERLOCK CLEAR instruction will be executed
with OFF execution conditions to reset the entire section of the ladder diagram.
The effect that this has on particular instructions is described in
5-8 INTERLOCK
and INTERLOCK CLEAR – IL(002) and ILC(003)
.
Branching Instruction Lines Section 4-5
91
Diagram B can also be corrected with an interlock. Here, the conditions leading
up to the branching point are placed on an instruction line for the INTERLOCK
instruction, all of lines leading from the branching point are written as separate
instruction lines, and another instruction line is added for the INTERLOCK
CLEAR instruction. No conditions are allowed on the instruction line for INTER-
LOCK CLEAR. INTERLOCK and INTERLOCK CLEAR does not use operands.
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 IL(002) ---
00002 LD 000001
00003 Instruction 1
00004 LD 000002
00005 Instruction 2
00006 ILC(003) ---
Operands
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
(002)
IL
0000
00
0000
01
0000
02
(003)
ILC
If CIO 000000 is ON in the revised version of diagram B, above, the status of
CIO 000001 and that of CIO 000002 would determine the execution conditions
for instructions 1 and 2, respectively. Because CIO 000000 is ON, this would
produce the same results as ANDing the status of each of these bits. If
CIO 000000 is OF F, the INTERLOCK instruction would produce an OFF execu-
tion condition for instructions 1 and 2 and then execution would continue with t he
instruction line following the INTERLOCK CLEAR instruction.
As shown below, multiple INTERLOCK instructions can be used in one instruc-
tion block; each is ef fective through the next INTERLOCK CLEAR instruction.
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 IL(002) ---
00002 LD 000001
00003 Instruction 1
00004 LD 000002
00005 IL(002) ---
00006 LD 000003
00007 AND NOT 000004
00008 Instruction 2
00009 LD 000005
00010 Instruction 3
00011 LD 000006
00012 Instruction 4
00013 ILC(003) ---
Operands
Instruction 4
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
Instruction 3
(002)
IL
(003)
ILC
0000
00 (002)
IL
0000
01
0000
02
0000
03 0000
04
0000
05
0000
06
If CIO 000000 in the above diagram is OFF (i.e., if the execution condition for the
first INTERLOCK instruction is OFF), instructions 1 through 4 would be
executed with OFF execution conditions and execution would move to the
instruction following the INTERLOCK CLEAR instruction. If CIO 000000 is ON,
the status of CIO 000001 would be loaded as the execution condition for instruc-
tion 1 and then the status of CIO 000002 would be loaded to form the execution
condition for the second INTERLOCK instruction. If CIO 000002 is OFF, instruc-
tions 2 through 4 will be executed with OFF execution conditions. If CIO 000002
is ON, CIO 000003, CIO 000005, and CIO 000006 will determine the first execu-
tion condition in new instruction lines.
Branching Instruction Lines Section 4-5
92
4-6 Jumps A specific section of a program can be skipped according to a designated execu-
tion condition. Although this is similar to what happens when the execution
condition for an INTERLOCK instruction is OFF, with jumps, the operands for all
instructions maintain status. Jumps can therefore be used to control devices
that require a sustained output, e.g., pneumatics and hydraulics, whereas inter-
locks can be used to control devices that do not required a sustained output,
e.g., electronic instruments.
Jumps are created using the JUMP (JMP(004)) and JUMP END (JME(005))
instructions. I f the execution condition for a JUMP instruction is ON, the program
is executed normally as if the jump did not exist. If the execution condition for the
JUMP instruction is OFF, program execution moves immediately to a JUMP
END instruction without changing the status of anything between the JUMP and
JUMP END instruction.
All JUMP and JUMP END instructions are assigned jump numbers ranging be-
tween 0000 and 0999. A jump can be defined once using any of the jump num-
bers 0000 through 0999. When a JUMP instruction assigned one of these num-
bers is executed, execution moves immediately to the JUMP END instruction
that has the same number as if all of the instruction between them did not exist.
The JUMP END instruction may be either before or after the JUMP instruction.
Diagram B from the TR bit and interlock example could be redrawn as shown
below using a jump. Although 0001 has been used as the jump number, any
number between 0001 and 0999 could be used. JUMP and JUMP END require
no other operand and JUMP END never has conditions on the instruction line
leading to it.
00000 LD 000000
00001 JMP(004) #0001
00002 LD 000001
00003 Instruction 1
00004 LD 000002
00005 Instruction 2
00006 JME(005) #0001
Diagram B: Corrected with a Jump
Address Instruction Operands
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
(005)
JME #0001
(004)
JMP #0001
0000
00
0000
01
0000
02
This version of diagram B would have a shorter execution time when 00000 was
OFF than any of the other versions.
There must be a JUMP END with the same jump number for each JUMP instruc-
tion in the program. If SFC programming is being used, the JUMP END instruc-
tion must be contained within the same action or transition program.
Jumps Section 4-6
!
93
The same jump number cannot be used in more than one JUMP END instruc-
tion. If you include more than one JUMP END instruction with the same jump
number, all JUMP instructions with that jump number will jump to the first JUMP
END instruction in the program with the same jump number. An exception to this
is when jump number 0000 is set for multiple usage in the PC Setup (see follow-
ing explanation and page 499). The same jump number can be used in more
than one JUMP instruction to jump to the same destination in the program. The
following example illustrates a program with two jumps to the same destination.
Instruction 1
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 JMP(004) #0001
00002 LD 000001
00003 Instruction 1
00004 LD 000002
00005 JMP(004) #0001
00006 LD 000003
00007 AND NOT 000004
00008 Instruction 2
00009 LD 000005
00010 Instruction 3
00011 LD 000006
00012 Instruction 4
00013 JME(005) #0001
Operands
0000
04
0000
00
Instruction 2
Instruction 3
(004)
JMP #0001
(004)
JMP #0001
0000
01
0000
02
0000
03
0000
05
(005)
JME #0001
Instruction 4
0000
06
Caution Because instructions are not examined when jumps are made in the program,
differentiated outputs can remain ON for more than one cycle if programmed
within the area of the program that is jumped.
JUMP 0000 The PC Setup can be used to control the operation of jumps created using jump
number 0000. If multiple jumps with 0000 are disabled, jumps created with 0000
will operate as described above. If multiple jumps are enabled, any JMP 0000
instruction will jump to the next JME 0000 in the program (and not the first
JME 0000 i n the program). When multiple jumps for 0000 are enabled, you can-
not overlap or nest the jumps, i.e., each JMP 0000 must be followed by a
JME 0000 before the next JMP 0000 in the program and each JME 0000 must
be followed by a JMP 0000 before the next JME 0000 in the program.
Note Version-2 CVM1 CPUs also support the CJP(221) and CJPN(222) jump instruc-
tions that can also be used to create jumps in programs. Refer to
Section 5
Instruction Set
for details.
4-7 Controlling Bit Status
There are instructions that can be used generally to control individual bit status.
These include the OUTPUT, OUTPUT NOT, DIFFERENTIATE UP, DIFFER-
ENTIATE DOWN, SET, RESET and KEEP instructions. All of these instructions
appear as the rightmost instruction in an instruction line and take a bit address
for an operand. Although details are provided in
5-7 Bit Control Instructions
,
these instructions (except for OUTPUT and OUTPUT NOT, which have already
been introduced) are described here because of their importance in most pro-
grams. Although these instructions are used to turn ON and OFF output bits in
the I/O Memory (i.e., to send or stop output signals to external devices), they are
also used to control the status of other bits in the I/O memory or in other data
areas.
Controlling Bit Status Section 4-7
94
4-7-1 DIFFERENTIATE UP and DIFFERENTIATE DOWN
DIFFERENTIATE UP and DIFFERENTIATE DOWN instructions are used to
turn the operand bit ON for one scan at a time. The DIFFERENTIATE UP instruc-
tion turns ON the operand bit for one scan after the execution condition for it
goes from OFF to ON; the DIFFERENTIATE DOWN instruction turns ON the op-
erand bit for one scan after the execution condition for it goes from ON to OFF.
Both of these instructions require only one line of mnemonic code.
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 DIFU(013) 000200
Operands
00002 LD 000001
00003 DIFD(014) 000200
(013)
DIFU 000200
(014)
DIFD 000200
0000
00
0000
01
Here, CIO 000200 will be turned ON for one scan after CIO 000000 goes ON.
The next time DIFU(013) 000200 is executed, CIO 000200 will be turned OFF,
regardless of the status of CIO 000000. With the DIFFERENTIATE DOWN
instruction, CIO 000200 will be turned ON for one scan after CIO 000001 goes
OFF (CIO 000200 will be kept OFF until then), and will be turned OFF the next
time DIFD(014) 000200 is executed.
Note Version-2 CVM1 CPUs also provide UP(018) and DOWN(019) that can be used
to dif ferentiate changes in the execution condition to control execution. Refer to
Section 5 Instruction Set
for details.
4-7-2 SET and RESET
SET and RESET instructions are used to control the status of the operand bit
while the execution condition for them is ON. When the execution condition is
OFF, the status of the operand bit will not be changed.
(015)
SET 000200
00000
00
00000 LD 000000
00001 SET(015) 000200
00002 LD 000001
00003 RSET(016) 000201
Address Instruction Operands
(016)
RSET 000201
00000
01
In the above example, CIO 000200 will be turned ON when CIO 000000 goes
ON and will remain ON even after CIO 00000 goes OFF unless turned OFF
somewhere else in the program. CIO 000201 will be turned OFF when
CIO 000001 goes ON and will remain OFF even after CIO 00000 goes OFF un-
less turned ON somewhere else in the program.
4-7-3 KEEP
The KEEP instruction is used to maintain the status of the operand bit based on
two execution conditions. To do this, the KEEP instruction is connected to two
instruction lines. When the execution condition at the end of the first instruction
line is ON, the operand bit of the KEEP instruction is turned ON. When the
execution condition at the end of the second instruction line is ON, the operand
bit of the KEEP instruction is turned OFF. The operand bit for the KEEP instruc-
tion will maintain its ON or OFF status even if it is located in an interlocked sec-
tion of the diagram.
Controlling Bit Status Section 4-7
95
In the following example, CIO 000200 will be turned ON when CIO 000002 is ON
and CIO 000003 is OFF. CIO 000200 will then remain ON until either CIO
000004 or CIO 000005 turns ON. With KEEP, as with all instructions requiring
more than one instruction line, the instruction lines are coded first before the
instruction that they control.
R: reset input
S: set input Address Instruction
00000 LD 000002
00001 AND NOT 000003
00002 LD 000004
00003 OR 000005
00004 KEEP(011) 000200
Operands
(011)
KEEP 000200
0000
02 0000
03
0000
04
0000
05
4-7-4 Self-maintaining Bits (Seal)
Although the KEEP instruction can be used to create self-maintaining bits, it is
sometimes necessary to create self-maintaining bits in another way so that they
can be turned OFF when in an interlocked section of a program.
To create a self-maintaining bit, the operand bit of an OUTPUT instruction is
used a s a condition for the same OUTPUT instruction in an OR setup so that the
operand bit of the OUTPUT instruction will remain ON or OFF until changes oc-
cur in other bits. At least one other condition is used just before the OUTPUT
instruction to function as a reset. Without this reset, there would be no way to
control the operand bit of the OUTPUT instruction.
The above diagram for the KEEP instruction can be rewritten as shown below.
The only difference in these diagrams would be their operation in an interlocked
program section when the execution condition for the INTERLOCK instruction
was ON. Here, just as in the same diagram using the KEEP instruction, two reset
bits are used, i.e., CIO 000200 can be turned OFF by turning ON either
CIO 000004 or CIO 000005.
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000200
00001 AND NOT 000003
00002 OR 000000
00003 AND NOT 000004
00004 AND NOT 000005
00005 OUT 000200
Operands
0002
00 0000
03
0000
00
0000
04 0002
00
0000
05
Controlling Bit Status Section 4-7
96
4-8 Intermediate Instructions
There are some instructions that can appear on instructions lines with conditions
to help determine the execution conditions for other instructions. These instruc-
tions are called intermediate instructions. Intermediate instructions cannot be
placed next to the right bus bar, only between conditions or between a condition
and a right-hand instruction. The four instructions shown below, NOT(010),
CMP(020), CMPL(021), and EQU(025), are intermediate instructions, and are
described in
Section 5 Instruction Set
. The input comparison instructions de-
scribed in
4-12-1 Input Comparison Instructions
also intermediate instructions.
(010)
NOT
(020)
CMP Cp1 Cp2
(021)
CMPLCp1 Cp2
(025)
EQU Cp1 Cp2
4-9 Work Bits (Internal Relays)
In programming, combining conditions to directly produce execution conditions
is often extremely difficult. These dif ficulties are easily overcome, however, by
using certain bits to trigger other instructions indirectly. Such programming is
achieved b y using work bits. Sometimes entire words are required for these pur-
poses. These words are referred to as work words.
Work bits are not transferred to or from the PC. They are bits selected by the
programmer to facilitate programming as described above. I/O bits and other
dedicated bits cannot be used as works bits. All bits in the I/O Memory that are
not allocated as I/O bits are available for use as work bits. Be careful to keep an
accurate record of how and where you use work bits. This helps in program plan-
ning and writing, and also aids in debugging operations.
Work Bit Applications Examples given later in this subsection show two of the most common ways
to employ work bits. These should act as a guide to the almost limitless num-
ber of ways in which the work bits can be used. Whenever difficulties arise in
programming a control action, consideration should be given to work bits and
how they might be used to simplify programming.
Work bits are often used with instructions that control bit status. The work bit is
used first as the operand for one of these instructions so that later it can be used
as a condition that will determine how other instructions will be executed. Work
bits can also be used with other instructions, e.g., with the SHIFT REGISTER
instruction (SFT(050)). An example of the use of work words and bits with the
SHIFT REGISTER instruction is provided in
5-14-1 SHIFT REGISTER –
SFT(050)
.
Although they are not always specifically referred to as work bits, many of the
bits used in the examples in
Section 5 Instruction Set
use work bits. Understand-
ing the use of these bits is essential to effective programming.
Work Bits (Internal Relays) Section 4-9
97
Work bits can be used to simplify programming when a certain combination of
conditions i s repeatedly used in combination with other conditions. In the follow-
ing example, CIO 000000, CIO 000001, CIO 000002, and CIO 000003 are com-
bined i n a logic block that stores the resulting execution condition as the status of
CIO 024600. CIO 024600 is then combined with various other conditions to de-
termine output conditions for CIO 000100, CIO 000101, and CIO 000102, i.e., to
turn the outputs allocated to these bits ON or OFF.
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 AND NOT 000001
00002 OR 000002
00003 OR NOT 000003
00004 OUT 024600
00005 LD 024600
00006 AND 000004
00007 AND NOT 000005
00008 OUT 000100
00009 LD 024600
00010 OR NOT 000004
00011 AND 000005
00012 OUT 000101
00013 LD NOT 024600
00014 OR 000006
00015 OR 000007
00016 OUT 000102
Operands
0000
00
0000
03
0000
02
0000
01
0246
00 0000
04 0000
05
0246
00 0000
05
0000
04
0246
00
0000
06
0000
07
0246
00
0001
00
0001
01
0001
02
Differentiated Conditions W ork bits can also be used if differential treatment is necessary for some, but
not all, of the conditions required for execution of an instruction. In this exam-
ple, CIO 000100 must be left ON continuously as long as CIO 000001 is ON
and both CIO 000002 and CIO 000003 are OFF, or as long as CIO 000004 is
ON and CIO 000005 is OFF. It must be turned ON for only one scan each
time CIO 000000 turns ON (unless one of the preceding conditions is keep-
ing it ON continuously).
This action is easily programmed by using CIO 022500 as a work bit as the oper-
and of the DIFFERENTIATE UP instruction (DIFU(013)). When CIO 000000
turns ON, CIO 022500 will be turned ON for one scan and then be turned OFF
the next scan by DIFU(013). Assuming the other conditions controlling CIO
000100 are not keeping it ON, the work bit CIO 022500 will turn CIO 000100 ON
for one scan only.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 DIFU(013) 022500
00002 LD 022500
00003 LD 000001
00004 AND NOT 000002
00005 AND NOT 000003
00006 OR LD ---
00007 LD 000004
00008 AND NOT 000005
00009 OR LD ---
00010 OUT 000100
0225
00
0000
01
0000
04
0000
02 0000
03
0001
00
0000
05
0000
00 (013)
DIFU 022500
Reducing Complex
Conditions
Work Bits (Internal Relays) Section 4-9
98
4-10 Programming Precautions
The number of conditions that can be used in series or parallel is unlimited as
long a s the memory capacity of the PC is not exceeded. Therefore, use as many
conditions as required to draw clear diagrams. Although very complicated dia-
grams can be drawn with instruction lines, there must not be any conditions on
lines running vertically between two other instruction lines. Diagram A shown
below, for example, is not possible, and should be drawn as diagram B. Mne-
monic code is provided for diagram B only; coding diagram A would be impossi-
ble.
Diagram A
Diagram B
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000001
00001 AND 000004
00002 OR 000000
00003 AND 000002
00004 Instruction 1
00005 LD 000000
00006 AND 000004
00007 OR 000001
00008 AND NOT 000003
00009 Instruction 2
Operands
0000
00
0000
01
0000
02
0000
03
0000
04
0000
01
0000
00
0000
04 0000
02
0000
00
0000
01
0000
04 0000
03
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
Instruction 2
Instruction 1
The number of times any particular bit can be assigned to conditions is not lim-
ited, so use them as many times as required to simplify your program. Often,
complicated programs are the result of attempts to reduce the number of times a
bit is used.
Except for instructions for which conditions are not allowed (e.g., INTERLOCK
CLEAR and JUMP END, see below), every instruction line must also have at
least one condition on it to determine the execution condition for the instruction
at the right. Again, diagram A , below, must be drawn as diagram B. If an instruc-
tion must be continuously executed (e.g., if an output must always be kept ON
while the program is being executed), the Always ON Flag (A50013) in the Auxil-
iary Area can be used.
Diagram A
Diagram B
Address Instruction
00000 LD A50013
00001 Instruction
Operands
Instruction
A500
13
Instruction
There are a few exceptions to this rule, including the INTERLOCK CLEAR,
JUMP END, and step instructions. Each of these instructions is used as the se-
cond of a pair of instructions and is controlled by the execution condition of the
first o f the pair. Conditions should not be placed on the instruction lines leading to
these instructions. Refer to
Section 5 Instruction Set
for details.
Programming Precautions Section 4-10
99
When drawing ladder diagrams, it is important to keep in mind the number of
instructions that will be required to input it. In diagram A, below, an OR LOAD
instruction will be required to combine the top and bottom instruction lines. This
can be avoided by redrawing as shown in diagram B so that no AND LOAD or OR
LOAD instructions are required. Refer to
5-6-5 AND LOAD and OR LOAD
for
more details and
4-4-1 Logic Block Instructions
for further examples of diagrams
requiring AND LOAD and OR LOAD.
Diagram A
Diagram B
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 LD 000001
00002 AND 000207
00003 OR LD ---
00004 OUT 000207
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000001
00001 AND 000207
00002 OR 000000
00003 OUT 000207
Operands
Operands
0000
01 0002
07
0000
00
0000
01 0002
07
0000
00
0002
07
0002
07
4-11 Program Execution
When execution or a ladder diagram is started, the CPU scans the program from
top to bottom, checking all conditions and executing all instructions accordingly
as it moves down the bus bar. It is important that instructions be placed in the
proper order so that, for example, the desired data is moved to a word before that
word is used as the operand for an instruction. Remember that an instruction line
is completed to the terminal instruction at the right before executing instruction
lines branching from the first instruction line to other terminal instructions at th e
right.
Program execution is only one of the tasks carried out by the CPU as part of the
scan time. Refer to
Section 6 Program Execution Timing
for details.
4-12 Using Version-2 CVM1 CPUs
The most significant improvement that the version-2 CVM1 CPUs offers in com-
parison with version-1 CPUs is a greatly enhanced instruction set. This section
explains the basics that the user should be familiar with before attempting to us e
the new instructions. All of these instructions can be used when the SYSMAC
Support Software and the CVM1-PRS21-EV1 Programming Console are used.
They are not supported by the CVSS or other Programming Devices.
4-12-1Input Comparison Instructions
The version-2 CVM1 CPUs provide 24 new comparison instructions. The func-
tions of these instructions are shown as symbols, making them easy to under-
stand at a glance.
Using Version-2 CVM1 CPUs Section 4-12
100
Most of these instructions are shown with a symbol and options. When the op-
tions are not included, the instructions will handle unsigned one-word data.
Symbol Option (data format) Option (data length)
= (Equal)
< > (Not equal)
< (Less than)
<= (Less than or equal)
> (Greater than)
>= (Greater than or equal)
S (signed) L (double)
Unsigned input comparison instructions (i.e., instructions without the S option)
can handle unsigned binary or BCD data. Signed input comparison instructions
(i.e., instructions with the S option) can handle signed binary data. For informa-
tion concerning signed binary data, refer to
4-13
Data Formats
.
The following table shows the function codes, mnemonics, and names of all of
the input comparison instructions. For details, refer to
5-16-7
Input Comparison
Instructions (300 to 328)
.
Code Mnemonic Name
300 = EQUAL
301 =L DOUBLE EQUAL
302 =S SIGNED EQUAL
303 =SL DOUBLE SIGNED EQUAL
305 <> NOT EQUAL
306 <>L DOUBLE NOT EQUAL
307 <>S SIGNED NOT EQUAL
308 <>SL DOUBLE SIGNED NOT EQUAL
310 < LESS THAN
311 <L DOUBLE LESS THAN
312 <S SIGNED LESS THAN
313 <SL DOUBLE SIGNED LESS THAN
315 <= LESS THAN OR EQUAL
316 <=L DOUBLE LESS THAN OR EQUAL
317 <=S SIGNED LESS THAN OR EQUAL
318 <=SL DOUBLE SIGNED LESS THAN OR EQUAL
320 > GREATER THAN
321 >L DOUBLE GREATER THAN
322 >S SIGNED GREATER THAN
323 >SL DOUBLE SIGNED GREATER THAN
325 >= GREATER THAN OR EQUAL
326 >=L DOUBLE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL
327 >=S SIGNED GREATER THAN OR EQUAL
328 >=SL DOUBLE SIGNED GREATER THAN OR EQUAL
With the earlier comparison instructions, CMP(020) and CMPL(021), the com-
parison result was output to the Greater Than Flag (A50005), Equals Flag
(A50006), and Less Than Flag (A50007), and those flags then had to serve as
the input condition for subsequent processing in accordance with the compari-
son result.
Features
Using Version-2 CVM1 CPUs Section 4-12
101
With the input comparison instructions, however, the comparison results are di-
rectly reflected as the input condition for the next instruction. This simplifies pro-
gramming requirements by eliminating the need to use flags for that purpose.
(020)
CMP D00000 D01000
Execution
condition A50006
(=) 010000
CMP(020) Example
(300)
= D00000 D01000
Execution
condition 010000
Input Comparison Instruction Example
Input comparison instructions must have an execution condition preceding them
on the instruction line; they cannot be directly connected to the left bus line. In
addition, because they are intermediate instructions, they must have another
instruction following them on the same instruction line. As shown in the example
above, place the execution condition, the instruction, and the output (or other
right-hand instruction) in order.
Multiple input comparison instructions can be used together, as shown in the fol-
lowing example.
(300)
= D00000 D00001
A50013 010000
(320)
> D00002 D00003
To input this instruction block using the Programming Console, input the follow-
ing mnemonics.
LD A50013
OUT TR0
= (300) D00000 D00001
LD TR0
>(320) D00002 D00003
OR LD
OUT 010000
There are two ways to input input comparison instructions. The first is to input th e
symbol directly and the second is to input the function code.
Direct Symbol Input
Direct string inputs are possible using the SYSMAC Support Software. Input the
symbol and the options in order. For example, “>=L(326)” can be entered by sim-
ply inputting “>=L.”
Function Code Input
Function codes can be input using the SYSMAC Support Software or the
CVM1-PRS21-EV1 Programming Console. Simply input the instruction’s func-
tion code.
Precautions
Instruction Input Methods
Using Version-2 CVM1 CPUs Section 4-12
102
4-12-2CMP and CMPL
CMP(020) and CMPL(021) are the same in the CV-series and CVM1-series as
in the C-series in that they all output the comparison results to comparison flags.
There are differences, however, in the way that are depicted in ladder diagrams.
(020)
CMP D00000 D00000
Comparison
flag
In the version-2 CVM1 CPUs, CMP(028) and CMPL(029) operate the same as
comparison i n s t r u c t ions in C-series PC in that they output results to comparison
flags, but they are programmed as right-hand instructions. The signed binary
comparison instructions CPS(026) and CPSL(027) also output results to the
comparison flags, but are programmed as right-hand instructions in the same
was as for comparison instructions in the C-series PCs, as shown in the follow-
ing program section.
(028)
CMP D00000 D00000
Comparison flag
(026)
CPS D00002 D00003
Comparison flag
In the version-2 CVM1 CPUs, CMP(028), CMPL(029), CPS(026), and
CPSL(027) are not intermediate instructions, and no other instructions can be
programmed o n the same instruction line between them and the right-hand bus
bar.
Input methods and instruction sets vary according to which support software is
used.
CV Support Software
Entering “CMP” or “CMPL” by means of string input specifies CMP(020) or
CMPL(021).
SYSMAC Support Software
Entering “CMP” or “CMPL” by means of string input specifies CMP(028) or
CMPL(029). In order to input CMP(020) or CMPL(021), it is necessary to input
the function code.
Converting Programs
When a C-series ladder program is converted from C to CV using the SYSMAC
Support Software, CMP and CMPL instructions in the program are converted to
CMP(028) and CMPL(029), respectively.
Precautions when
Programming
Using Version-2 CVM1 CPUs Section 4-12
103
4-12-3Enhanced Math Instructions
The version-2 CVM1 CPUs provides symbol math instructions as an improve-
ment over the earlier BCD and binary math instructions. The basic data format
for these instructions is signed binary, although unsigned, BCD, and floating-
point data options can be specified. The functions of these instructions are
shown as symbols, making them easy to understand at a glance.
Most of these instructions are shown with a symbol and options. When the op-
tions are not included, the instruction will handle data as signed one-word binary
data without carry.
Symbol Data format options Carry option Data length option
+ (Add)
– (Subtract)
*(Multiply)
/ (Divide)
B (BCD)
U (Unsigned binary)
F (Floating point)
C (with carry) L (double)
The following table shows the function codes, mnemonics, and names of all of
the symbol math instructions. For details, refer to
5-20
Symbol Math Instruc-
tions
.
Code Mnemonic Name
400 + SIGNED BINARY ADD WITHOUT CARRY
401 +L DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY ADD WITHOUT CARRY
402 +C SIGNED BINARY ADD WITH CARRY
403 +CL DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY ADD WITH CARRY
404 +B BCD ADD WITHOUT CARRY
405 +BL DOUBLE BCD ADD WITHOUT CARRY
406 +BC BCD ADD WITH CARRY
407 +BCL DOUBLE BCD ADD WITH CARRY
410 – SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY
411 –L DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY
412 –C SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITH CARRY
413 –CL DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITH CARRY
414 –B BCD SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY
415 –BL DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY
416 –BC BCD SUBTRACT WITH CARRY
417 –BCL DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT WITH CARRY
420 *SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY
421 *LDOUBLE SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY
422 *UUNSIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY
423 *UL DOUBLE UNSIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY
424 *BBCD MULTIPLY
425 *BL DOUBLE BCD MULTIPLY
430 / SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE
431 /L DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE
432 /U UNSIGNED BINARY DIVIDE
433 /UL DOUBLE UNSIGNED BINARY DIVIDE
434 /B BCD DIVIDE
435 /BL DOUBLE BCD DIVIDE
Using Version-2 CVM1 CPUs Section 4-12
104
The following table shows the correspondence between the symbol math
instructions and the existing BCD and binary calculation instructions.
Existing instructions Version-2 instructions
BCD ADD ADD(070) +BC (406)
BCD SUBTRACT SUB(071) –BC(416)
BCD MULTIPLY MUL(072) *B(424)
BCD DIVIDE DIV(073) /B(434)
DOUBLE BCD ADD ADDL(074) +BCL (407)
DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT SUBL(075) –BCL(417)
DOUBLE BCD MULTIPLY MULL(076) *BL(425)
DOUBLE BCD DIVIDE DIVL(077) /BL(435)
BINARY ADD ADB(080) +C (402)
BINARY SUBTRACT SBB(081) –C(412)
BINARY MULTIPLY MLB(082) *U(422)
BINARY DIVIDE DVB(083) /U(432)
DOUBLE BINARY ADD ADBL(084) +CL (403)
DOUBLE BINARY
SUBTRACT SBBL(085) –CL(413)
DOUBLE BINARY MULTIPLY MLBL(086) *UL(423)
DOUBLE BINARY DIVIDE DVBL(087) /UL(433)
There are two ways to input symbol math instructions. The first is to input the
symbol directly and the second is to input the function code.
Direct Symbol Input
Direct string inputs are possible using the SYSMAC Support Software. Input the
symbol and the options in order. For example, “+BL(405)” can be entered by
simply inputting “+BL.”
Function Code Input
Function codes can be input using the SYSMAC Support Software or the
CVM1-PRS21-EV1 Programming Console. Simply input the instruction’s func-
tion code.
4-13 Data FormatsThe following data formats can be handled by the various calculation and con-
version instructions.
•Unsigned binary
•Signed binary
•Unsigned BCD
•Signed BCD
•Floating-point
4-13-1Unsigned Binary Data
Data i s configured in words, with 16 bits per word. This data is regarded as 16-bit
binary data. Unsigned binary data is often written as four-digit hexadecimal
(0000 to FFFF).
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
215 214 213 212 211 210 29282726252423222120
↓↓↓↓↓↓↓↓↓↓↓↓↓↓↓↓
23222120232221202322212023222120
Digit 163162161160
Correspondence with
Existing Instructions
Instruction Input Methods
Data Formats Section 4-13
105
The following example shows the bit status of CIO 0000 as
“0011110000001110.” This would be represented as “3C0E” in hexadecimal.
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
ON/OFF 0011110000001110
23222120232221202322212023222120
21 + 20 = 3 23 + 22 =12 0 23 + 22 +21 =14
Digit 3 C 0 E
With unsigned binary data, the digits expressed in hexadecimal can be con-
verted to decimal by multiplying the value of each digit by its respective factor.
For example, the hexadecimal value “3C0E” would be converted as follows:
(3 x 163) + (12 x 162) + (0 x 161) + (14 x 160) = 15,374
The range that can be expressed in hexadecimal 0000 to FFFF (i.e., 0 to 65,535
decimal).
Two-word data is handled as 32-bit binary data. Values can be expressed as
eight-digit hexadecimal (0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF), and the equivalent decimal
range is 0 to 4,294,967,295.
4-13-2Signed Binary Data
Data i s configured in words, with 16 bits per word. This data is regarded as 16-bit
binary data, with the leftmost bit (i.e., the most significant bit, or MSB) used as
the sign bit. Signed binary data is often written as four digits hexadecimal.
When the leftmost bit is OFF, (i.e., set to 0), the number is positive and the value
is expressed as four-digit hexadecimal, from 0000 to 7FFF.
When the leftmost bit is ON, (i.e., set to 1), the number is negative. The value is
expressed as four-digit hexadecimal, from 8000 to FFFF, in 2’s complement.
Because the leftmost bit is used as the sign bit, the absolute value that can be
expressed is less than that for unsigned binary data.
With signed binary data, the status of the sign bit (i.e., the MSB) determines
whether the number will be positive or negative. When the sign bit is OFF, the
number will be either positive or zero. As with unsigned binary data, the value
can be converted to decimal by multiplying the value of each digit by its respec-
tive factor. For example, the hexadecimal value “258C” would be converted as
follows:
(2 x 163) + (5 x 162) + (8 x 161) + (12 x 160) = +9,612
Conversion to Decimal
Range of Expression
Double Data
Conversion to Decimal
Data Formats Section 4-13
106
When the sign bit is ON, on the other hand, the number will be negative, and the
method for converting to decimal will be different. Because the value is ex-
pressed in 2 ’s complement, it must first be converted to a negative number and
then the value of each digit can be multiplied by its respective factor. For exam-
ple,the hexadecimal value “CFC7” would be converted as follows:
1100
C
1111
F
1100
C
0111
7
1100
C
1111
F
1100
C
0110
6
0011
3
0000
0
0011
3
1001
9
2’s complement
True value (negative)
Subtract 1.
Reverse the status of each bit.
The negative decimal number is then calculated as follows:
–[(3 x 163) + (0 x 162) + (3 x 161) + (9 x 160)] = –12,345
Note To convert a negative decimal number into signed binary data, follow the above
procedure in reverse. In other words, first convert the absolute value into 2’s
complement, then reverse the bits and add one.
The hexadecimal range is 0000 to 7FFF for a positive number and 8000 to FFFF
for a negative number . These are equivalent in decimal to 0 to +32,767 for a posi-
tive number and -32,768 to -1 for a negative number.
Two-word data is handled as 32 bits of binary data, with the leftmost bit of the
leftmost word used as the sign bit. Values can be expressed as eight-digit hexa-
decimal (0000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF, 8000 0000 to FFFF FFFF), and the equiva-
lent decimal range is 0 to +2,147,483,647 (positive) and –1 to –2,147,483,648
(negative).
Unsigned binary data Decimal number Signed binary data
FFFF +65,535
FFFE +65,534
etc. etc. Cannot be expressed.
8001 +32,769
8000 +32,768
7FFF +32,767 7FFF
7FFE +32,766 7FFE
etc. etc. etc.
0002 +2 0002
0001 +1 0001
0000 0 0000
-1 FFFF
-2 FFFE
Cannot be expressed. etc. etc.
-32,767 8001
-32,768 8000
Range of Expression
Double Data
Correlation Between Binary
Data and Decimal Numbers
Data Formats Section 4-13
107
The following instructions carry out calculations on signed binary data.
Operation Mnemonic Code Name
Addition + 400 SIGNED BINARY ADD WITHOUT CARRY
+L 401 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY ADD WITHOUT
CARRY
+C 402 SIGNED BINARY ADD WITH CARRY
+CL 403 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY ADD WITH
CARRY
Subtraction – 410 SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITHOUT
CARRY
–L 411 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT
WITHOUT CARRY
–C 412 SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITH CARRY
–CL 413 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT
WITH CARRY
Multiplication *420 SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY
*L421 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY
Division / 430 SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE
/L 431 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE
Comparison =S 302 SIGNED EQUAL
=SL 303 DOUBLE SIGNED EQUAL
<>S 307 SIGNED NOT EQUAL
<>SL 308 DOUBLE SIGNED NOT EQUAL
<S 312 SIGNED LESS THAN
<SL 313 DOUBLE SIGNED LESS THAN
<=S 317 SIGNED LESS THAN OR EQUAL
<=SL 318 DOUBLE SIGNED LESS THAN OR EQUAL
>S 322 SIGNED GREATER THAN
>SL 323 DOUBLE SIGNED GREATER THAN
>=S 327 SIGNED GREATER THAN OR EQUAL
>=SL 328 DOUBLE SIGNED GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
Signed Binary Data
Calculations
Data Formats Section 4-13
108
4-13-3BCD Data With BCD data, 16-bit word data is expressed as 4-digit binary data (0000 to
9999) using only the hexadecimal numbers 0 to 9. If the data in any digit corre-
sponds to the hexadecimal numbers A to F, an error will be generated.
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
215 214 213 212 211 210 29282726252423222120
↓↓↓↓↓↓↓↓↓↓↓↓↓↓↓↓
23222120232221202322212023222120
Digit 103102101100
In the following example, the bit status of CIO 0000 is shown as
“0011100000000111.” This value is “3807” in BCD, and would thus be 3,807 in
decimal format.
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
ON/OFF 0011100000000111
23222120232221202322212023222120
21 + 20 = 3 23 =8 0 22 + 21 +20 =7
Digit 3807
The range that can be expressed as BCD data is 0000 to 9999 ( 0 to 9,999 deci-
mal).
Two-word data is handled as 8-digit BCD data, with a decimal range of 0 to
99,999,999.
4-13-4Signed BCD Data
Signed BCD data is a formatted in special data patterns in order to express neg-
ative numbers for 16-bit word data. This format depends on the application, but
in the version-2 CVM1 CPUs four formats are used.
The BINS(275), BISL(277), BCDS(276), and BDSL(278) instructions are pro-
vided for converting between BCD and binary. For details, refer to the explana-
tions of individual instructions in
Section 5 Instruction Set
.
4-13-5Floating-point Data
Floating-point data is stored as 2-word (32-bit) data in a format defined in
IEEE754. The version-2 CVM1 CPUs provides a number of floating-point opera-
tion instructions, including math instructions, logarithms, exponents. All of these
handle floating-point data.
The FIX(450), FIXL(451), FLT(452), and FLTL(453) instructions are provided for
converting between floating-point and signed binary data. For details, refer to
the explanations of individual instructions in
Section 5 Instruction Set
.
Range of Expression
Double Data
Data Formats Section 4-13
109
SECTION 5
Instruction Set
This section explains each instruction in the CV-series PC instruction sets and provides the ladder diagram symbols, data
areas, and flags used with each. The instructions provided by the CV-series PC are described in following subsections by
instruction group.
Some instructions, such as Timer and Counter instructions, are used to control execution of other instructions. For example, a
timer Completion Flag might be used to turn ON a bit when the time period set for the timer has expired. Although these other
instructions are often used to control output bits through the OUTPUT instruction, they can be used to control execution of
other instructions as well. The OUTPUT instructions used in examples in this manual can therefore generally be replaced by
other instructions to modify the program for specific applications other than controlling output bits directly.
5-1 Notation 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Instruction Format 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Data Areas, Definers, and Flags 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4 Differentiated and Immediate Refresh Instructions 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5 Coding Right-hand Instructions 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6 Ladder Diagram Instructions 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-1 LOAD, LOAD NOT, AND, AND NOT, OR, and OR NOT 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-2 CONDITION ON/OFF: UP(018) and DOWN(019) 123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-3 BIT TEST: TST(350) and TSTN(351) 124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-4 NOT: NOT(010) 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-5 AND LOAD and OR LOAD 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7 Bit Control Instructions 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-1 OUTPUT and OUTPUT NOT: OUT and OUT NOT 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-2 DIFFERENTIATE UP/DOWN: DIFU(013) and DIFD(014) 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-3 SET and RESET: SET(016) and RSET(017) 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-4 MULTIPLE BIT SET/RESET: SETA(047)/RSTA(048) 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-5 KEEP: KEEP(011) 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8 INTERLOCK and INTERLOCK CLEAR: IL(002) and ILC(003) 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9 JUMP and JUMP END: JMP(004) and JME(005) 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10 CONDITIONAL JUMP: CJP(221)/CJPN(222) 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11 END: END(001) 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12 NO OPERATION: NOP(000) 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13 Timer and Counter Instructions 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13-1 TIMER: TIM 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13-2 HIGH-SPEED TIMER: TIMH(015) 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13-3 ACCUMULATIVE TIMER: TTIM(120) 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13-4 LONG TIMER: TIML(121) 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13-5 MULTI-OUTPUT TIMER: MTIM(122) 151. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13-6 COUNTER: CNT 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13-7 REVERSIBLE COUNTER: CNTR(012) 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13-8 RESET TIMER/COUNTER: CNR(236) 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14 Shift Instructions 159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14-1 SHIFT REGISTER: SFT(050) 159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14-2 REVERSIBLE SHIFT REGISTER: SFTR(051) 162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14-3 ASYNCHRONOUS SHIFT REGISTER: ASFT(052) 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14-4 WORD SHIFT: WSFT(053) 165. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14-5 SHIFT N-BIT DATA LEFT: NSFL(054) 166. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14-6 SHIFT N-BIT DATA RIGHT: NSFR(055) 167. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14-7 SHIFT N-BITS LEFT: NASL(056) 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14-8 SHIFT N-BITS RIGHT: NASR(057) 169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14-9 DOUBLE SHIFT N-BITS LEFT: NSLL(058) 170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
110
5-14-10 DOUBLE SHIFT N-BITS RIGHT : NSRL(059) 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14-11 ARITHMETIC SHIFT LEFT : ASL(060) 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14-12 ARITHMETIC SHIFT RIGHT : ASR(061) 174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14-13 ROTATE LEFT: ROL(062) 175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14-14 ROTATE RIGHT: ROR(063) 176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14-15 DOUBLE SHIFT LEFT: ASLL(064) 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14-16 DOUBLE SHIFT RIGHT: ASRL(065) 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14-17 DOUBLE ROTATE LEFT: ROLL(066) 179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14-18 ROTATE LEFT WITHOUT CARRY: RLNC(260) 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14-19 DOUBLE ROTATE LEFT WITHOUT CARRY: RLNL(262) 181. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14-20 DOUBLE ROTATE RIGHT: RORL(067) 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14-21 ROTATE RIGHT WITHOUT CARRY: RRNC(261) 183. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14-22 DOUBLE ROTATE RIGHT W/O CARRY: RRNL(263) 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14-23 ONE DIGIT SHIFT LEFT: SLD(068) 185. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14-24 ONE DIGIT SHIFT RIGHT: SRD(069) 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15 Data Movement Instructions 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15-1 MOVE: MOV(030) 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15-2 MOVE NOT: MVN(031) 188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15-3 DOUBLE MOVE: MOVL(032) 189. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15-4 DOUBLE MOVE NOT: MVNL(033) 190. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15-5 DATA EXCHANGE: XCHG(034) 191. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15-6 DOUBLE DATA EXCHANGE: XCGL(035) 192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15-7 MOVE TO REGISTER: MOVR(036) 193. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15-8 MOVE QUICK: MOVQ(037) 194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15-9 MULTIPLE BIT TRANSFER: XFRB(038) 195. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15-10 BLOCK TRANSFER: XFER(040) 197. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15-11 BLOCK SET : BSET(041) 198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15-12 MOVE BIT: MOVB(042) 199. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15-13 MOVE DIGIT: MOVD(043) 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15-14 SINGLE WORD DISTRIBUTE: DIST(044) 202. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15-15 DATA COLLECT: COLL(045) 203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15-16 INTERBANK BLOCK TRANSFER: BXFR(046) 204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16 Comparison Instructions 205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16-1 COMPARE: CMP(020) 205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16-2 DOUBLE COMPARE: CMPL(021) 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16-3 BLOCK COMPARE: BCMP(022) 208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16-4 TABLE COMPARE: TCMP(023) 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16-5 MULTIPLE COMPARE: MCMP(024) 211. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16-6 EQUAL: EQU(025) 212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16-7 Input Comparison Instructions (300 to 328) 213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16-8 SIGNED BINARY COMPARE: CPS(026) 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16-9 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY COMPARE: CPSL(027) 216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16-10 UNSIGNED COMPARE: CMP(028) 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16-11 DOUBLE UNSIGNED COMPARE: CMPL(029) 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17 Conversion Instructions 219. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17-1 BCD-TO-BINARY: BIN(100) 219. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17-2 BINARY-TO-BCD: BCD(101) 220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17-3 DOUBLE BCD-TO-DOUBLE BINARY: BINL(102) 221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17-4 DOUBLE BINARY-TO-DOUBLE BCD: BCDL(103) 222. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17-5 2’S COMPLEMENT: NEG(104) 223. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17-6 DOUBLE 2’S COMPLEMENT: NEGL(105) 224. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17-7 SIGN: SIGN(106) 225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17-8 DATA DECODER: MLPX(110) 226. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17-9 DATA ENCODER: DMPX(111) 228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17-10 7-SEGMENT DECODER: SDEC(112) 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17-11 ASCII CONVERT: ASC(113) 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17-12 BIT COUNTER: BCNT(114) 236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
5-17-13 COLUMN TO LINE: LINE(115) 237. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17-14 LINE TO COLUMN: COLM(116) 238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17-15 ASCII TO HEX: HEX(117) 239. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17-16 SIGNED BCD-TO-BINARY: BINS(275) 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17-17 SIGNED BINARY-TO-BCD: BCDS(276) 244. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17-18 DOUBLE SIGNED BCD-TO-BINARY: BISL(277) 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17-19 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY-TO-BCD: BDSL(278) 248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18 BCD Calculation Instructions 249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18-1 SET CARRY: STC(078) 250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18-2 CLEAR CARRY: CLC(079) 250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18-3 BCD ADD: ADD(070) 250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18-4 BCD SUBTRACT: SUB(071) 251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18-5 BCD MULTIPLY: MUL(072) 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18-6 BCD DIVIDE: DIV(073) 254. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18-7 DOUBLE BCD ADD: ADDL(074) 255. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18-8 DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT: SUBL(075) 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18-9 DOUBLE BCD MULTIPLY: MULL(076) 257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18-10 DOUBLE BCD DIVIDE: DIVL(077) 258. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19 Binary Calculation Instructions 261. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19-1 BINARY ADD: ADB(080) 261. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19-2 BINARY SUBTRACT: SBB(081) 262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19-3 BINARY MULTIPLY: MLB(082) 264. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19-4 BINARY DIVIDE: DVB(083) 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19-5 DOUBLE BINARY ADD: ADBL(084) 266. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19-6 DOUBLE BINARY SUBTRACT: SBBL(085) 268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19-7 DOUBLE BINARY MULTIPLY: MLBL(086) 269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19-8 DOUBLE BINARY DIVIDE: DVBL(087) 270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-20 Symbol Math Instructions 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-20-1 Binary Addition: +(400)/+L(401)/+C(402)/+CL(403) 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-20-2 BCD Addition: +B(404)/ +BL(405)/+BC(406)/+BCL(407) 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-20-3 Binary Subtraction: –(410)/ –L(411)/–C(412)/–CL(413) 276. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-20-4 BCD Subtraction: –B(414)/ –BL(415)/–BC(416)/–BCL(417) 281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-20-5 Binary Multiplication: *(420)/ *L(421)/*U(422)/*UL(423) 285. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-20-6 BCD Multiplication: *B(424)/ *BL(425) 287. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-20-7 Binary Division: /(430)/ /L(431)//U(432)//UL(433) 289. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-20-8 BCD Division: /B(434)/ /BL(435) 291. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21 Floating-point Math Instructions 293. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21-1 FLOATING TO 16-BIT: FIX(450) 296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21-2 FLOATING TO 32-BIT: FIXL(451) 297. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21-3 16-BIT TO FLOATING: FLT(452) 298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21-4 32-BIT TO FLOATING: FLTL(453) 298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21-5 FLOATING-POINT ADD: +F(454) 299. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21-6 FLOATING-POINT SUBTRACT: –F(455) 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21-7 FLOATING-POINT MULTIPLY: *F(456) 301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21-8 FLOATING-POINT DIVIDE: /F(457) 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21-9 DEGREES TO RADIANS: RAD(458) 303. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21-10 RADIANS TO DEGREES: DEG(459) 304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21-11 SINE: SIN(460) 305. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21-12 COSINE: COS(461) 306. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21-13 TANGENT: TAN(462) 307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21-14 SINE TO ANGLE: ASIN(463) 308. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21-15 COSINE TO ANGLE: ACOS(464) 309. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21-16 TANGENT TO ANGLE: ATAN(465) 310. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21-17 SQUARE ROOT : SQRT(466) 311. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21-18 EXPONENT: EXP(467) 312. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21-19 LOGARITHM: LOG(468) 313. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22 Increment/Decrement Instructions 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
5-22-1 INCREMENT BCD: INC(090) 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22-2 DECREMENT BCD: DEC(091) 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22-3 INCREMENT BINARY: INCB(092) 315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22-4 DECREMENT BINARY: DECB(093) 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22-5 DOUBLE INCREMENT BCD: INCL(094) 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22-6 DOUBLE DECREMENT BCD: DECL(095) 317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22-7 DOUBLE INCREMENT BINARY: INBL(096) 317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22-8 DOUBLE DECREMENT BINARY: DCBL(097) 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23 Special Math Instructions 319. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23-1 FIND MAXIMUM: MAX(165) 319. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23-2 FIND MINIMUM: MIN(166) 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23-3 SUM: SUM(167) 322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23-4 BCD SQUARE ROOT: ROOT(140) 323. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23-5 BINARY ROOT: ROTB(274) 325. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23-6 FLOATING POINT DIVIDE: FDIV(141) 326. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23-7 ARITHMETIC PROCESS: APR(142) 328. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-24 PID and Related Instructions 330. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-24-1 PID CONTROL: PID(270) 330. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-24-2 LIMIT CONTROL: LMT(271) 337. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-24-3 DEAD-BAND CONTROL: BAND(272) 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-24-4 DEAD-ZONE CONTROL: ZONE(273) 340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-25 Logic Instructions 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-25-1 LOGICAL AND: ANDW(130) 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-25-2 LOGICAL OR: ORW(131) 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-25-3 EXCLUSIVE OR: XORW(132) 343. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-25-4 EXCLUSIVE NOR: XNRW(133) 343. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-25-5 DOUBLE LOGICAL AND: ANDL(134) 344. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-25-6 DOUBLE LOGICAL OR: ORWL(135) 345. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-25-7 DOUBLE EXCLUSIVE OR: XORL(136) 346. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-25-8 DOUBLE EXCLUSIVE NOR: XNRL(137) 346. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-25-9 COMPLEMENT: COM(138) 347. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-25-10 DOUBLE COMPLEMENT: COML(139) 348. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-26 Time Instructions 349. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-26-1 HOURS TO SECONDS: SEC(143) 349. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-26-2 SECONDS TO HOURS: HMS(144) 350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-26-3 CALENDAR ADD: CADD(145) 350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-26-4 CALENDAR SUBTRACT: CSUB(146) 352. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-26-5 CLOCK COMPENSATION: DATE(179) 353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-27 Special Instructions 354. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-27-1 FAILURE/SEVERE FAILURE ALARM: FAL(006) and FALS(007) 354. . . . . . . . .
5-27-2 FAILURE POINT DETECTION: FPD(177) 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-27-3 MAXIMUM CYCLE TIME EXTEND: WDT(178) 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-27-4 I/O REFRESH: IORF(184) 362. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-27-5 I/O DISPLAY: IODP(189) 362. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-27-6 SELECT EM BANK: EMBC(171) 364. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-27-7 DATA SEARCH: SRCH(164) 365. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-28 Flag/Register Instructions 366. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-28-1 LOAD FLAGS: CCL(172) 366. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-28-2 SAVE FLAGS: CCS(173) 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-28-3 LOAD REGISTER: REGL(175) 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-28-4 SAVE REGISTER: REGS(176) 368. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-29 STEP DEFINE and STEP START: STEP(008)/SNXT(009) 368. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-30 Subroutines 377. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-30-1 SUBROUTINE ENTRY and RETURN: SBN(150)/RET(152) 377. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-30-2 SUBROUTINE CALL: SBS(151) 378. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-30-3 MACRO: MCRO(156) 380. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-31 Interrupt Control 382. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
5-31-1 INTERRUPT MASK: MSKS(153) 385. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-31-2 CLEAR INTERRUPT: CLI(154) 386. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-31-3 READ MASK: MSKR(155) 388. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-32 Stack Instructions 389. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-32-1 SET STACK: SSET(160) 389. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-32-2 PUSH ONTO STACK: PUSH(161) 390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-32-3 LAST IN FIRST OUT: LIFO(162) 391. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-32-4 FIRST IN FIRST OUT: FIFO(163) 392. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-33 Data Tracing 393. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-33-1 TRACE MEMORY SAMPLING: TRSM(170) 393. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-33-2 MARK TRACE: MARK(174) 395. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-34 Memory Card Instructions 396. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-34-1 READ DATA FILE: FILR(180) 396. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-34-2 WRITE DATA FILE: FILW(181) 398. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-34-3 READ PROGRAM FILE: FILP(182) 400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-34-4 CHANGE STEP PROGRAM: FLSP(183) 402. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-35 Special I/O Instructions 404. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-35-1 I/O READ: READ(190) 404. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-35-2 I/O READ 2: RD2(280) 406. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-35-3 I/O WRITE: WRIT(191) 408. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-35-4 I/O WRITE 2: WR2(281) 411. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-36 Network Instructions 413. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-36-1 DISABLE ACCESS: IOSP(187) 413. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-36-2 ENABLE ACCESS: IORS(188) 414. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-36-3 DISPLAY MESSAGE: MSG(195) 414. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-36-4 NETWORK SEND: SEND(192) 415. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-36-5 NETWORK RECEIVE: RECV(193) 418. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-36-6 DELIVER COMMAND: CMND(194) 420. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-36-7 About SYSMAC NET Link/SYSMAC LINK Operations 423. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-37 SFC Control Instructions 427. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-37-1 ACTIVATE STEP: SA(210) 427. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-37-2 PAUSE STEP: SP(211) 428. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-37-3 RESTART STEP: SR(212) 429. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-37-4 END STEP: SF(213) 430. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-37-5 DEACTIVATE STEP: SE(214) 431. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-37-6 RESET STEP: SOFF(215) 432. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-37-7 TRANSITION OUTPUT: TOUT(202) 433. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-37-8 TRANSITION COUNTER: TCNT(123) 434. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-37-9 READ STEP TIMER: TSR(124) 435. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-37-10 WRITE STEP TIMER: TSW(125) 436. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-37-11 SFC Control Program Example 437. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-38 Block Programming Instructions 438. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-38-1 Overview 438. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-38-2 BLOCK PROGRAM BEGIN/END: BPRG(250) / BEND<001> 439. . . . . . . . . . . .
5-38-3 Branching–IF<002>, ELSE<003>, and IEND<004> 440. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-38-4 ONE CYCLE AND WAIT: WAIT<005> 443. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-38-5 CONDITIONAL BLOCK EXIT: EXIT<006> 444. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-38-6 Loop Control–LOOP<009>/LEND<010> 445. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-38-7 BLOCK PROGRAM PAUSE/RESTART : BPPS<011>/BPRS<012> 446. . . . . . . . .
5-38-8 HIGH-SPEED TIMER/TIMER WAIT: TIMW<013>/TMHW<015> 447. . . . . . . . .
5-38-9 COUNTER WAIT: CNTW<014> 448. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
114
5-1 Notation In the remainder of this manual, instructions will be referred to by their mnemon-
ics. For example, the OUTPUT instruction will be called OUT; the AND LOAD
instruction, AND LD. If you’re not sure of the instruction a mnemonic is for , refer
to
Appendix B Programming Instructions
.
If an instruction is assigned a function code, it will be given in parentheses after
the mnemonic. These function codes, which are 3-digit decimal numbers, can
be used to input instructions into the CPU and are described briefly below. A
table o f instructions listed in order of function codes is also provided in
Appendix
B
.
An up or down arrow , j or i, at the beginning of a mnemonic indicates a differen-
tiated up or down version of that instruction. An exclamation mark, !, before a
mnemonic indicates an immediate refresh version of that instruction. Differen-
tiated and immediate refresh instructions are explained on page 117.
5-2 Instruction Format
Most instructions have at least one or more operands associated with them. Op-
erands indicate or provide the data on which an instruction is to be performed.
These are sometimes input as the actual numeric values (i.e., as constants), but
are usually the addresses of data area words or bits that contain the data to be
used. A bit whose address is designated as an operand is called an operand bit;
a word whose address is designated as an operand is called an operand word.
In some instructions, the word address designated in an instruction indicates the
first of multiple words containing the desired data.
Each instruction requires one or more words in Program Memory. The first word
is the instruction word, which specifies the instruction and contains any defin-
ers (described below) or operand bits required by the instruction. Other oper-
ands required by the instruction are contained in following words, one operand
per word. Some instructions require up to four words.
A definer is an operand associated with an instruction and contained in the
same word as the instruction itself. These operands define the instruction rather
than telling what data it is to use. Examples of definers are timer and counter
numbers, which are used in timer and counter instructions to create timers and
counters, as well as jump numbers, which define which JUMP instruction is
paired with which JUMP END instruction. Bit operands are also contained in the
same word as the instruction itself, although these are not considered definers.
5-3 Data Areas, Definers, and Flags
Each instruction is introduced with a frame that shows the basic form of the
instruction, the variations of the instruction, and the data areas that can be used
for each operand, as shown in the following illustration
Data areas allowed for operandsBasic ladder symbol
(210)
SA N1 N2
N2: Subchart number ST or 9999
N1: Step number ST
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j SA
Instruction variations available
Data Areas, Definer Values, and Flags Section 5-3
!
115
Basic Ladder Symbol The ladder symbol shows how the instruction will appear in a program. The func-
tion code (here, 210) is provided above the mnemonic (SA) and the operands
are provided to the right (here, N1 and N2). The ladder symbol is the same for any
of the variations of the instruction except that the mnemonic changes.
Variations The alternate forms of the instruction are listed here, including immediate re-
fresh and differentiated forms.
The data areas are listed that can be used for each instruction. The actual oper-
and will be a number, such as a word address, a bit address, an indirect address,
or a constant, depending on the requirements of the instruction and the needs of
the program.
Not all addresses in the specified data areas are necessarily allowed for an oper-
and, e.g., if an operand requires two words, the last word in a data area cannot
be designated as the first word of the operand because all words for a single op-
erand must be within the same data area. Refer to
Section 3 Memory Areas
for
addressing conventions and the addresses of specific flags and control bits.
For example, the second operand (CB) in the BLOCK COMPARE instruction
(BCMP(022), shown below) specifies the first word of a comparison table that is
32 words long. This operand thus cannot be any of the last 31 words in an data
area, e.g., if the CPU Bus Link Area is used, the last word that could be desig-
nated would be G224. Designating G245 would cause an error and the instruc-
tion would not be executed.
Variations
j BCMP(022)
(022)
BCMP S CB R CB: 1st block word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
R: Result word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM, DR, IR
S: Source data CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Note: The DM Area, IR, and DR are not listed as operand data areas unless they can
be addressed directly. These areas can be used for indirectly addressing oper-
ands provided that the address being pointed to is a legal address. For example,
for BCMP(022) (shown above) and Index Register could be used to indirectly
address a DM address for the second operand, CB. Refer to the discussion on
Indirect Addressing
later in this section.
Caution The Auxiliary Area words between A000 and A255 and the CPU Bus Link Area
words G008 through G255 can be read from or written to from the user program.
A256 t o A 5 11 and G000 to G007, however, can be read from to access the data
provided there, but cannot be written to from the user program, i.e., they cannot
be used as operands if the instruction alters the contents of the operand during
processing.
Designating Constants
Although data area addresses are most often given as operands, many oper-
ands can be input as constants. The available value range for a given operand
depends on the particular instruction that uses it. Constants must also be en-
tered in the form required by the instruction, i.e., in BCD or in hexadecimal.
Constants are also input as either four digits or as either digits, depending on the
requirements of the instruction (e.g., constants for double, or long, instructions
require eight digits).
Operand Data Area
Precautions
Data Areas, Definer Values, and Flags Section 5-3
!
116
Flags The
Flags
subsection lists flags that are affected by execution of an instruction.
These flags include the following Auxiliary Area flags.
Abbreviation Name Bit
ER Instruction Execution Error Flag A50003
CY Carry Flag A50004
GR Greater Than Flag A50005
EQ Equals Flag A50006
LE Less Than Flag A50007
NNegative Flag A50008
ER is the flag most commonly used for monitoring an instruction’s execution.
When ER goes ON, it indicates that an error has occurred in attempting to
execute an instruction. The
Flags
subsection of each instruction lists possible
reasons for ER going ON. ER will turn ON if operands are not entered correctly.
Caution Most instructions are not executed when ER is ON. A table of instructions and
the flags they affect is provided in
Appendix B Error and Arithmetic Flag Opera-
tion
.
Indirect Addressing The DM or EM Area can be used to indirectly address an operand. Indirect DM or
EM addressing is specified by placing an asterisk before the D or E: *D or *E.
(EM Area is available as an option for the CV1000, CV2000, or
CVM1-CPU21-EV2 only.)
The operation of indirect addressing is affected by the PC Setup specified from
the CVSS. The PC Setup can be used to specify whether the content of a word
containing an indirect address contains the BCD data area address or contains
the binary (hexadecimal) PC memory address.
BCD Addressing When indirect DM data is designated as BCD, the address of the desired word
must be in BCD and it must specify the data area address of a word within the
DM or EM Area. The content of the operand word containing the indirect address
(e.g., *D00000) has to be in BCD and has to be between 0000 and 8191 for the
CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2 and between 0000 and 9999 for the CV1000,
CV2000, CVM1-CPU11-EV2, or CVM1-CPU21-EV2. Although CV1000,
CV2000, and CVM1-CPU21-EV2 DM and EM Area addresses go to D24575
and E32765, only the first 10,000 words can be indirectly addressed when indi-
rect DM data is designated as BCD.
When an indirect DM or EM address is specified in BCD, the DM or EM word
specified for the operand will contain the address of the DM or EM word that con-
tains the data that will be used as the operand of the instruction. If, for example,
*D00001 was designated as the first operand of MOV(030), the contents of
D00001 was 2222, and D02222 contained 5555, the value 5555 would be
moved to the word specified for the second operand.
Word Content
D00000 4C59
D00001 2222
D00002 F35A
D02222 5555
D02223 2506
D02224 D541 5555 moved
to A001.
Indicates
D02222.
Indirect
address
(030)
MOV *D00001 A001
Data Areas, Definer Values, and Flags Section 5-3
117
When indirect DM data is designated as binary, the content of the *D or *E ad-
dress specifies the PC memory address, and thus can have any value between
$0000 and $FFFF, as long as the instruction can be executed with the specified
PC memory address.
When an indirect DM or EM address is specified in binary (hexadecimal), the
designated D M o r E M word will contain the PC memory address of the word that
contains the data that will be used as the operand of the instruction. If, for exam-
ple, *E00001 was designated as the first operand of MOV(030), the contents of
E00001 was $0A00, and $0A00 (G000, CPU Bus Link Area) contained 8014, the
value 8014 would be moved to the word specified for the second operand.
Word Content
E00000 4C59
E00001 0A00
E00002 F35A
G000 8014
G001 2506
G002 D541 8014 moved
to D02000.
Indicates
G000 ($0A00).
Indirect
address
(030)
MOV *E00001 D02000
Index and Data Registers Index and data registers can also be used to indirectly address memory. Refer to
3-12 Index and Data Registers (IR and DR)
for details and examples.
5-4 Differentiated and Immediate Refresh Instructions
Differentiated Instructions Most instructions are provided in both non-differentiated and differentiate up
forms, and some instructions are also provided with a differentiate down form.
Differentiated instructions are distinguished by an up or down arrow, j or i, just
before the instruction mnemonic.
A non-differentiated instruction is executed each time it is scanned. A differenti-
ate up instruction is executed only once after its execution condition goes from
OFF to ON. If the execution condition has not changed or has changed from ON
to OFF since the last time the instruction was scanned, the instruction will not be
executed.
A differentiate down instruction is executed only once after its execution condi-
tion goes from ON to OFF. If the execution condition has not changed or has
changed from OFF to ON since the last time the instruction was scanned, the
instruction will not be executed.
Note: Do not use A50013 (Always ON Flag), A50014 (Always OFF Flag), or A50015
(First Cycle Flag) to control execution of dif ferentiated instructions. The instruc-
tions will never be executed.
The following examples show how this works with MOV(030) and jMOV(030)
which are used to move the data in the address designated by the first operand
to the address designated by the second operand.
Binary Indirect Addressing
Differentiated and Immediate Refresh Instructions Section 5-4
118
The execution condition is always compared to the execution condition that ex-
isted the last time the instruction was scanned, which may not be the previous
cycle if a n instruction is in a step in an SFC program, in a section of the program
skipped by a jump, in a subroutine, etc. In the following examples, we will as-
sume that the MOVE instruction is scanned each cycle.
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 MOV(030) A0001
D00000
00000 LD 000000
00001 jMOV(030) A001
D00000
Operands
Address Instruction Operands
0000
00
0000
00
(030)
MOV A001 D00000
(030)
jMOV A001 D00000
Diagram A
Diagram B
In diagram A, the non-differentiated MOV(030) will move the content of A001 t o
D00000 whenever it is scanned with 000000 ON. If the cycle time is 80 ms and
000000 remains ON for 2.0 seconds, this move operation will be performed 25
times and D00000 will contain the last value moved to it.
In diagram B, the differentiate up instruction jMOV(030) will move the content of
A001 to D00000 only once after 000000 goes ON. Even if 000000 remains ON
for 2.0 seconds, the move operation will be executed only during the first cycle in
which 000000 has changed from OFF to ON. Because the content of A001 could
very well change during the 2 seconds while 000000 is ON, the final content of
D00000 after the 2 seconds could be dif ferent depending on whether MOV(030)
or jMOV(030) was used.
All operands and other specifications for instructions are the same regardless o f
whether the differentiated or non-differentiated form of an instruction is used.
When inputting, the same function codes are also used.
Operation of differentiated instructions can be uncertain when the instructions
are programmed between IL and ILC, between JMP and JME, or in subroutines.
Refer to
5-8 INTERLOCK and INTERLOCK CLEAR – IL(002) and ILC(003)
,
5-9
JUMP and JUMP END – JMP(004) and JME(005)
, and
5-30 Subroutines
and
5-31 Interrupt Control
for details.
CV-series PCs also provide differentiation instructions: DIFU(013) and
DIFD(014). These instruction operate as the differentiated variations of the
OUTPUT instruction: DIFU(013) turns ON a bit for one cycle when the execution
condition has changed from OFF to ON and DIFD(014) turns ON a bit for one
cycle when the execution condition has changed from ON to OFF. Refer to
5-7-2
DIFFERENTIATE UP/DOWN – DIFU(013) and DIFD(014)
for details.
Up or down differentiation can be combined with immediate refreshing in a
single instruction.
Immediate Refreshing Many instructions are provided in an immediate refresh version, distinguished
by an exclamation mark, !, at the beginning of the mnemonic. An immediate re-
fresh instruction updates the status of input bits just before, or output bits just
after, the instruction is executed. If the instruction has a word operand, the whole
word is updated, and if the instruction has a bit operand, only the byte (leftmost
or rightmost 8 bits) containing the bit operand is updated.
The I/O response time is reduced with an immediate refresh instruction because
status is read from the input bit or written to the output bit without waiting for the
next I/O refresh period. Refer to
6-5 I/O Response Time
for details o n the effects
of immediate refresh instructions on I/O response time.
Differentiated and Immediate Refresh Instructions Section 5-4
119
Immediate refreshing and up or down dif ferentiation can be combined in a single
instruction. Immediate refresh instructions cannot be used for I/O points on
Units mounted to Slave Racks in a SYSMAC BUS or SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote
I/O System.
5-5 Coding Right-hand Instructions
Writing mnemonic code for ladder instructions is described in
Section 4 Writing
Programs
. Converting the information in the ladder diagram symbol for all other
instructions follows the same pattern, as described below, and is not specified
for each instruction individually.
The first word of any instruction defines the instruction and provides any defin-
ers. The bit operand is also placed on the same line as the mnemonic for some
instructions with certain operands. All other operands are placed on lines after
the instruction line, one operand per line and in the same order as they appear in
the ladder symbol for the instruction.
The address and instruction columns of the mnemonic code table are filled in for
the instruction word only. For all other lines, the left two columns are left blank. If
the instruction requires no definer or bit operand, the data column is left blank for
first line. It is a good idea to cross through any blank data column spaces (for all
instruction words that do not require data) so that the data column can be quickly
scanned to see if any addresses have been left out.
If a CIO address is used in the data column, the left side of the column is left
blank. I f any other data area is used, the data area abbreviation is placed on the
left side and the address is placed on the right side. If a constant is to be input,
the number symbol (#) is placed on the left side of the data column and the num-
ber to be input is placed on the right side. Any numbers input as definers in the
instruction word do not require the number symbol on the right side.
When coding an instruction that has a function code, be sure to write in the func-
tion code, which can be used when inputting the instruction via the Peripheral
Device. Also be sure to designate differentiated instructions with the j or i sym-
bol.
Coding Right-hand Instructions Section 5-5
120
The following diagram and corresponding mnemonic code illustrates the points
described above.
Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 AND 000001
00002 OR 000002
00003 DIFU(013) 022500
00004 LD 000100
00005 AND NOT 000200
00006 LD 001001
00007 AND NOT 001002
00008 AND NOT A50006
00009 OR LD ––
00010 AND 022500
00011 BCNT(114) ––
#0001
0004
A001
00012 LD 000005
00013 T0000
#0150
00014 LD T0000
00015 MOV(030) ––
1200
A001
00016 LD 120015
00017 OUT NOT 000500
Address Operands
0000
00 0000
01
0000
02
0001
00 0225
00 (114)
BCNT #0001 0004 A001
(013)
DIFU 022500
(TIM 0000 #0150
(030)
MOV 1200 A0001
0010
01
0000
05
T0000
1200
15
0002
00
0010
02 A500
06
0005
00
If a right-hand instruction requires multiple instruction lines, all of the lines for the
instruction are entered before the right-hand instruction when inputting in mne-
monic form (although this is not always true when inputting using ladder dia-
grams). Each line of the instruction is coded first to form ‘logic blocks’ combined
by the right-hand instruction. An example of this for SFT(050) is shown below.
00000 LD 000000
00001 AND 000001
00002 LD 000002
00003 LD 000100
00004 AND NOT 000200
00005 LD 001001
00006 AND NOT 001002
00007 AND NOT A50006
00008 OR LD ––
00009 AND 022500
00010 SFT(050) ––
1200
1200
00011 LD 120015
00012 OUT NOT 000500
Address Instruction Operands
(050)
SFT 1200 1200
0000
00 0000
01
0000
02
0001
00 0002
00
0010
01 0010
02 A500
06
0225
00
1200
15 0005
00
I
P
R
When you have finished coding the program, make sure you have placed
END(001) at the last address.
Multiple Instruction Lines
END(001)
Coding Right-hand Instructions Section 5-5
121
5-6 Ladder Diagram Instructions
Ladder Diagram Instructions include Ladder Instructions and Logic Block
Instructions. Ladder Instructions correspond to the conditions on the ladder
diagram. Logic Block Instructions are used to relate more complex parts of
the diagram that cannot be programmed with Ladder Instructions alone.
5-6-1 LOAD, LOAD NOT, AND, AND NOT, OR, and OR NOT
LOAD: LD
B: Bit CIO, G, A, T, C, ST, TN
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbols
Mnemonics
LD
j LD ! j LD
i LD ! i LD
! LD
B
B
B
B
B
B
LOAD NOT: LD NOT
B: Bit CIO, G, A, T, C, ST, TN
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbols
Mnemonics
LD NOT ! LD NOT
B
B
AND: AND
B: Bit CIO, G, A, T, C, ST, TN
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbols
Mnemonics
AND
j AND ! j AND
i AND ! i AND
! AND
B
B
B
B
B
B
AND NOT: AND NOT
B: Bit CIO, G, A, T, C, ST, TN
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbols
Mnemonics
AND NOT ! AND NOT
B
B
Ladder Diagram Instructions Section 5-6
122
OR: OR
B: Bit CIO, G, A, T, C, ST, TN
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbols
Mnemonics
OR
j OR ! j OR
i OR ! i OR
! OR
B
B
B
B
B
B
OR NOT: OR NOT
B: Bit CIO, G, A, T, C, ST, TN
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbols
Mnemonics
OR NOT ! OR NOT
B
B
Description These six basic instructions correspond to the conditions on a ladder diagram.
As described in
Section 4 Writing Programs
, the status of the bits assigned to
each instruction determines the execution conditions for all other instructions.
Each of these instructions and each bit address can be used as many times as
required. Each bit can be used in as many of these instructions as required.
The status of the bit operand (B) assigned to LD or LD NOT determines the first
execution condition. AND takes the logical AND between the execution condi-
tion and the status of its bit operand; AND NOT, the logical AND between the
execution condition and the inverse of the status of its bit operand. OR takes the
logical OR between the execution condition and the status of its bit operand; OR
NOT, the logical OR between the execution condition and the inverse of the sta-
tus of its bit operand.
These six instructions use only one word of program memory, not two, when the
operand is in the CIO Area between CIO 000000 and CIO 051115, saving pro-
gram memory and reducing the instruction execution time. Two words of pro-
gram memory are required for all other operands.
TR bits are added to the program automatically when creating the program with
the ladder diagram using the CVSS. Input TR bits only when inputting the pro-
gram with mnemonics. The ladder symbol for loading TR bits is different from
that shown above for LD and LD NOT. Refer to
4-3-3 Ladder Instructions
for de-
tails.
Precautions There is n o limit to the number of any of these instructions, or restrictions in the
order in which they must be used, as long as the program memory capacity of
the PC is not exceeded.
Flags There are no flags affected by these instructions.
Ladder Diagram Instructions Section 5-6
123
5-6-2 CONDITION ON/OFF: UP(018) and DOWN(019)
DOWN
Ladder Symbols
(018)
UP
(019)
Description UP(018) turns ON the execution condition for one cycle at the rising edge (OFF
to ON) of the execution condition and then turns OFF the execution condition
until the next time a rising edge is detected.
DOWN(019) turns ON the execution condition for one cycle at the falling edge
(ON to OFF) of the execution condition and then turns OFF the execution condi-
tion until the next time a falling edge is detected.
Another instruction must follow UP(018) or DOWN(019), i.e., they cannot be
used as right-hand instructions.
Precautions Be careful when using UP(018) and DOWN(019) in subroutines between IL and
ILC, and between JMP and JME instructions, because the execution condition
may remain ON for more than one scan. Refer to
5-8 INTERLOCK and INTER-
LOCK CLEAR: IL(002) and ILC(003), 5-9 JUMP and JUMP END: JMP(004) and
JME(005)
, and
5-30 Subroutines
and
5-31 Interrupt Control
for details.
UP(018) and DOWN(019) can only be used with CVM1 version 2 or later CPUs.
They cannot be used with version 1 or earlier CPUs; use DIFU(013) and
DIFD(014). Refer to
5-7-2 DIFFERENTIATE UP/DOWN: DIFU(013) and
DIFD(014)
.
The DIFU(013) and DIFD(014) instructions can also be used for the same pur-
pose, but they require work bits. UP(018) and DOWN(019) simplify program-
ming by reducing the number of work bits and program addresses needed.
Flags There are no flags affected by UP(018) or DOWN(019).
Example The timing chart illustrates the operation of UP(018) and DOWN(019) in the fol-
lowing example.
(018)
UP
0000
01
0000
02
0001
01
0001
02
(019)
DOWN
00001 LD 000001
00002 OR 000002
00003 OUT TR0
00004 UP(018)
00005 OUT 00101
00006 LD TR0
00007 DOWN(019)
00008 OUT 000102
Address Instruction Operands
Input CIO 000001
Input CIO 000002
Output CIO 000101
Output CIO 000102 t: Cycle time
TR0
(CVM1 V2)
Ladder Diagram Instructions Section 5-6
(350)
TST D00010 #0000
0000
00
0000
01
0050
00
0050
01
(351)
TSTN D00020 #0005
124
5-6-3 BIT TEST: TST(350) and TSTN(351)
S: Source word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
(350)
TST S N
(351)
TSTN S N
N: Bit number CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Description TST(350) turns ON the execution condition when the specified bit in the speci-
fied word is ON and turns OFF the execution condition when the bit is OFF.
TSTN(351) turns OFF the execution condition when the specified bit in the spe-
cified word is ON and turns ON the execution condition when the bit is OFF.
The bit position is designated in N between 0000 and 0015 in BCD.
Precautions TST(350) and TSTN(351) cannot be used as right-hand instructions, i.e., anoth-
er instruction must appear between them and the right bus bar.
N must be BCD between 0000 and 0015.
Note: Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): N is not 0000 to 0015 BCD.
Content of *DM word is not BCD.
Example In the first instruction line below, when CIO 000000 turns ON, TST(350) checks
whether the designated bit (bit 00 in D00010) is ON or OF F. In this case, because
it is ON, CIO 005000 is turned ON.
In the second instruction line below, when CIO 000001 turns ON, TST(350)
checks whether the designated bit (bit 05 in D00020) is ON or OFF. In this case,
because it is OFF, CIO 005001 is turned ON.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 TST(350) D00010
#0000
00002 OUT 005000
00003 LD 000001
00004 TSTN(351) D00020
#0005
00005 OUT 005001
Designated bit
Designated bit
(CVM1 V2)
Ladder Diagram Instructions Section 5-6
125
5-6-4 NOT: NOT(010)
Ladder Symbol
(010)
NOT
Description NOT(010) reverses the execution condition.
NOT(010) is a n intermediate instruction that inverts the execution condition that
precedes it. As an intermediate instruction, it cannot be placed at the end of an
instruction line, only between conditions or between a condition and a right-hand
instruction.
Precautions NOT(010) cannot be used as right-hand instructions, i.e., another instruction
must appear between them and the right bus bar.
Flags There are no flags affected by NOT(010).
Example The following example and bit status table show the operation of NOT(010).
00000 LD 000000
00001 OR 000012
00002 AND 000502
00003 NOT(010) ---
00004 OUT 000505
00005 END(001) ---
Address Instruction Operands
(001)
NOT
0000
00 0005
05
0000
12
0005
02
(001)
END
Bit Bit status
000000 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
000012 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
000502 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
000505 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON
5-6-5 AND LOAD and OR LOAD
AND LOAD: AND LD OR LOAD: OR LD
Ladder Symbol
000002
000003
000000
000001
Ladder Symbol
000000 000001
000002 000003
Description When instructions are combined into blocks that cannot be logically combined
using only OR and AND operations, AND LD and OR LD are used. Whereas
AND and OR operations logically combine a bit status and an execution condi-
tion, AND LD and OR LD logically combine two execution conditions, the current
one and the last unused one.
AND LD and OR LD are not necessary when drawing ladder diagrams or when
inputting ladder diagrams using ladder diagram programming. They are re-
quired, however, to convert the program to and input it in mnemonic form.
In order to reduce the number of programming instructions required, a basic un -
derstanding of logic block instructions is required. For an introduction to logic
blocks, refer to
4-4-1 Logic Block Instructions
.
Flags There are no flags affected by these instructions.
Ladder Diagram Instructions Section 5-6
126
5-7 Bit Control Instructions
The instructions in this section are used to control bit status. These instructions
are used to turn bits ON and OFF in different ways.
5-7-1 OUTPUT and OUTPUT NOT: OUT and OUT NOT
OUTPUT: OUT
B: Bit CIO, G, A, TR
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbols
Mnemonics
OUT ! OUT
B
B
OUTPUT NOT: OUT NOT
B: Bit CIO, G, A
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbols
Mnemonics
OUT NOT ! OUT NOT
B
B
Description OUT and OUT NOT are used to control the status of the designated bit according
to the execution condition.
OUT turns ON the designated bit for an ON execution condition, and turns OFF
the designated bit for an OFF execution condition. With a TR bit, OUT appears at
a branching point rather than at the end of an instruction line. Refer to
4-5
Branching Instruction Lines
for details.
OUT NOT turns ON the designated bit for a OFF execution condition, and turns
OFF the designated bit for an ON execution condition.
OUT and OUT NOT can be used to control execution by turning ON and OFF bits
that are assigned to conditions on the ladder diagram, thus determining execu-
tion conditions for other instructions. This is particularly helpful and allows a
complex set of conditions to be used to control the status of a single work bit, and
then that work bit can be used to control other instructions.
The length of time that a bit is ON or OFF can be controlled by combining the
OUT or OUT NOT with TIM. Refer to Examples under
5-13-1 TIMER: TIM
for
details.
Precautions Any output bit is generally used in only one instruction that controls its status.
Note: Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags There are no flags affected by these instructions.
Bit Control Instructions Section 5-7
127
5-7-2 DIFFERENTIATE UP/DOWN: DIFU(013) and DIFD(014)
DIFFERENTIATE UP: DIFU(013)
(013)
DIFU B B: Bit CIO, G, A
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
!DIFU(013)
DIFFERENTIATE DOWN: DIFD(014)
(014)
DIFD B B: Bit CIO, G, A
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
!DIFD(014)
Description DIFU(013) and DIFD(014) are used to turn the designated bit ON for one cycle
only.
Whenever executed, DIFU(013) compares its current execution with the pre-
vious execution condition. If the previous execution condition was OFF and the
current one is ON, DIFU(013) will turn ON the designated bit. If the previous
execution condition was ON and the current execution condition is either ON or
OFF, DIFU(013) will either turn the designated bit OFF or leave it OFF (i.e., if the
designated bit is already OFF). The designated bit will thus never be ON for long-
er than one cycle, assuming it is executed each cycle (see
Precautions
, below).
Whenever executed, DIFD(014) compares its current execution with the pre-
vious execution condition. If the previous execution condition is ON and the cur-
rent one is OFF, DIFD(014) will turn ON the designated bit. If the previous execu-
tion condition was OFF and the current execution condition is either ON or OFF,
DIFD(014) will either turn the designated bit OFF or leave it OFF. The desig-
nated bit will thus never be ON for longer than one cycle, assuming it is executed
each cycle (see
Precautions
, below).
These instructions are used when dif ferentiated instructions (i.e., those prefixed
with a j or i,) are not available and single-cycle execution of a particular instruc-
tion is desired. They can also be used with non-dif ferentiated forms of instruc-
tions that have differentiated forms when their use will simplify programming.
Examples of these are shown below.
Precautions Any output bit is generally used in only one instruction that controls its status.
DIFU(013) and DIFD(014), operation can be uncertain when the instructions are
programmed between IL and ILC, between JMP and JME, or in subroutines. Re-
fer to
5-8 INTERLOCK and INTERLOCK CLEAR: IL(002) and ILC(003), 5-9
JUMP and JUMP END: JMP(004) and JME(005)
, and
5-30 Subroutines
and
5-31 Interrupt Control
for details.
Note: Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags There are no flags affected by these instructions.
Bit Control Instructions Section 5-7
128
In diagram A, below, whenever MOVQ(037) is executed with an ON execution
condition i t will move the contents of CIO 1200 to A001. If the execution condition
remains ON, the content of A001 will be changed each cycle that the content of
CIO 1200 changes. Diagram B, however, is an example of how DIFU(013) can
be used to ensure that MOVQ(037) is executed only once each time the desired
execution condition goes ON. Here, the contents of A001 will remain the same
until CIO 022500 goes from OFF to ON.
Diagram A
Diagram B
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 MOVQ(037) 1200
A001
0000
00
0000
00
0225
00
(037)
MOVQ 1200 A0001
(037)
MOVQ 1200 A0001
(013)
DIFU 022500
Operands
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 DIFU(013) 022500
00002 LD 022500
00003 MOVQ(037) 1200
A001
Note: UP(018) and DOWN(019) can also be used to control differentiated execution of
instructions. Refer to page 123 for details.
Although a differentiated form of MOV(030) is available, the following diagram
would be very complicated to draw using it because only one of the conditions
determining the execution condition for MOV(030) requires differentiated treat-
ment.
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 DIFU(013) 022500
00002 LD 022500
00003 LD 000001
00004 AND NOT 000002
00005 AND NOT 000003
00006 OR LD ---
00007 LD 000004
00008 AND NOT 000005
00009 OR LD ---
00010 MOV(030) 1210
D00000
(030)
MOV 1210 D00000
0000
00 (013)
DIFU 022500
0225
00
0000
01
0000
04
0000
02 0000
03
0000
05
Operands
Example 1: Use when
There’s No Differentiated
Instruction
Example 2: Use to Simplify
Programming
Bit Control Instructions Section 5-7
129
5-7-3 SET and RESET: SET(016) and RSET(017)
SET: SET(016)
(016)
SET B B: Bit CIO, G, A
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
jSET(016)
!jSET(016) iSET(016)
!iSET(016) !SET(016)
RESET: RSET(017)
(017)
RSET B B: Bit CIO, G, A
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
jRSET(017)
!jRSET(017) iRSET(017)
!iRSET(017) !RSET(017)
Description SET(016) turns the operand bit ON when the execution condition is ON, and
does not affect the status of the operand bit when the execution condition is OFF.
RSET(017) turns the operand bit OFF when the execution condition is ON, and
does not affect the status of the operand bit when the execution condition is OFF.
The operation of SET(016) differs from that of OUT because the OUT instruction
turns the operand bit OFF when its execution condition is OFF. Likewise,
RSET(017) d i ffers from OUT NOT because OUT NOT turns the operand bit ON
when its execution condition is OFF.
The following example shows the operations of the variations of SET(016).
0000
00
0000
00
0000
00
0000
00
0000
00
0000
00
0000
00
0001
05
0001
04
(013)
DIFU 000106
(016)
SET 000103
(016)
jSET 000102
(016)
iSET 000101
(016)
SET 000100
000100
000101
000102
000103
000104
000105
000106
000000
Bit Control Instructions Section 5-7
0000
00
0050
00
0500
00
0000
01
(016)
SET 050000
(017)
RSET 050000
130
Precautions The status of operand bits for SET(016) and RSET (017) programmed between
IL(002) and ILC(003) or JMP(004) and JME(005) will not change when the inter-
lock or jump condition is met (i.e., when IL(002) or JMP(004) is executed with an
OFF execution condition).
Note: Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags There are no flags affected by these instructions.
Example In the example below, CIO 050000 is turned ON whenever CIO 000000 is ON,
and turned OFF whenever CIO 000001 is ON.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 SET(016) 050000
00002 LD 050000
00003 OUT 005000
00004 LD 000001
00005 RSET(017) 050000
5-7-4 MULTIPLE BIT SET/RESET: SETA(047)/RSTA(048)
(047)
SETA D N1 N2
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
↑SETA(047), ↑RSTA(048)
(048)
RSTA D N1 N2
N1: Beginning bit CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
N2: Number of bits CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
D: Rightmost word for set CIO, G, A
Description When the execution condition is OFF, SETA(047) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, SETA(047) turns ON a designated number of bits,
beginning from the designated bit of the designated word, and continuing to t he
left (more-significant bits). All other bits are left unchanged.
Unchanged Number of bits
Rightmost word
Unchanged
Beginning bit
When the execution condition is OFF, RSTA(048) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, RSTA(048) turns OFF a designated number of bits,
beginning from the designated bit of the designated word, and continuing to th e
left (more-significant bits). All other bits are left unchanged.
Unchanged Number of bits
Rightmost word
Unchanged
Beginning bit
(CVM1 V2)
Bit Control Instructions Section 5-7
(048)
RSTA 0010 #0012 #0004
(047)
SETA 0005 #0008 #0008
0000
00
0000
01
(048)
RSTA 0010 #0012 #0024
(047)
SETA 0005 #0008 #0032
0000
00
0000
01
131
Precautions N1 must be between 0000 and 0015 and must be BCD. N2 must be BCD.
Note: Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): N1 is not 0000 to 0015 BCD.
N2 is not BCD.
Content of *DM word is not BCD.
Example 1 SETA Operation
When CIO 000000 turns ON in the first instruction line in the following example,
eight bits beginning with bit 08 in CIO 0005 are all turned ON.
RSTA Operation
When CIO 000001 turns ON in the second instruction line, the eight bits begin-
ning with bit 12 in CIO 0010 are all turned OFF.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 SETA(047) 0005
#0008
#0008
00002 LD 000001
00003 RSTA(048) 0010
#0012
#0004
Unchanged
Unchanged
CIO 0005
CIO 0010
Example 2 SETA Operation
When CIO 000000 turns ON in the first instruction line in the following example,
32 bits beginning with bit 08 in CIO 0005 are all turned ON.
RSTA Operation
When CIO 000001 turns ON in the second instruction line, 24 bits beginning with
bit 12 in CIO 0010 are all turned OFF.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 SETA(047) 0005
#0008
#0032
00002 LD 000001
00003 RSTA(048) 0010
#0012
#0024
Bit Control Instructions Section 5-7
132
Unchanged
Unchanged
Unchanged
Unchanged
CIO 0005
CIO 0006
CIO 0007
CIO 0010
CIO 0011
CIO 0012
5-7-5 KEEP: KEEP(011)
(011)
KEEP B B: Bit CIO, G, A
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
!KEEP(011)
S
R
Description KEEP(011) is used to maintain the status of the designated bit based on two
execution conditions. These execution conditions are labeled S and R. S is the
set input; R, the reset input. KEEP(011) operates like a latching relay that is set
by S and reset by R.
When S turns ON, the designated bit will go ON and stay ON until reset, regard-
less of whether S stays ON or goes OFF. When R turns ON, the designated bit
will g o OFF and stay OFF until reset, regardless of whether R stays ON or goes
OFF. The relationship between execution conditions and KEEP(011) bit status is
shown below.
S execution condition
R execution condition
Status of B
Bit Control Instructions Section 5-7
133
KEEP(011) operates like the self-maintaining bit described in
4-7-4 Self-main-
taining B i t s ( Seal)
. The following two diagrams would function identically, though
the one using KEEP(011) requires one less instruction to program and would
maintain status even in an interlocked program section.
00000 LD 000002
00001 OR 000500
00002 AND NOT 000003
00003 OUT 000500
00000 LD 000002
00001 LD 000003
00002 KEEP(011) 000500
S
R
Address Instruction Operands
Address Instruction Operands
0005
00
0000
02
0005
00
0000
03
0000
02 (011)
KEEP 000500
0000
03
Example KEEP(011) can be used to create flip-flops as shown below.
0000 (011)
KEEP 000001
0000
00
00
0000
01
0000
01
↑
↑
000000
000001
00000 LD000000
00001 AND NOT 000001
00002 LD000000
00003 AND 000001
00004 KEEP(011) 000001
Address Instruction Operands
Precautions Any output bit is generally used in only one instruction that controls its status.
Never use an input bit in a normally closed condition on the reset (R) for
KEEP(011) when the input device uses an AC power supply. The delay in shut-
ting down the PC’ s DC power supply (relative to the AC power supply to the input
device) can cause the operand bit of KEEP(011) to be reset. This situation is
shown below.
Input Unit
A
NEVER
S(011)
[ KEEP 120000 ]
R
A
Bits used in KEEP are not reset in interlocks. Refer to the
5-8 INTERLOCK and
INTERLOCK CLEAR: IL(002) and ILC(003)
for details.
Note: Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags There are no flags affected by this instruction.
Bit Control Instructions Section 5-7
134
Example If a holding bit (default range: CIO 1200 to CIO 1499) is used, bit status will be
retained even during a power interruption. KEEP(011) can thus be used to pro-
gram bits that will maintain status after restarting the PC following a power inter-
ruption. A n example of this that can be used to produce a warning display follow-
ing a system shutdown for an emergency situation is shown below. Bits 000002,
000003, and 000004 would be turned ON to indicate some type of error. Bit
000005 would be turned ON to reset the warning display. Bit 120000, which is
turned ON when any one of the three bits indicates an emergency situation, is
used to turn ON the warning indicator through 000500.
00000 LD 000002
00001 OR 000003
00002 OR 000004
00003 LD 000005
00004 KEEP(011) 120000
00005 LD 120000
00006 OUT 000500
Address Instruction Operands
0000
02
0000
03
0000
04
(011)
KEEP 120000
0000
05
1200
00 0005
00
Reset input
Indicates
emergency
situation
S
R
Activates
warning
display
The status of I/O Area bits can be retained in the event of a power interruption by
turning ON the IOM Hold Bit and setting IOM Hold Bit Hold in the PC Setup. If the
IOM Hold Bit is not specified to be held in the PC Setup, all I/O Area bits will be
turned OFF when the power is turned ON. Be sure to restart the PC after chang-
ing the PC Setup; otherwise the new settings will not be used.
KEEP(011) can also be combined with TIM to produce delays in turning bits ON
and OFF. Refer to
5-13-1 TIMER: TIM
for details.
5-8 INTERLOCK and INTERLOCK CLEAR: IL(002) and ILC(003)
INTERLOCK: IL(002) INTERLOCK CLEAR: IL(003)
(002)
IL
Ladder Symbol
(003)
ILC
Ladder Symbol
Description IL(002) is always used in conjunction with ILC(003) to create interlocks. Inter-
locks are used to create program sections that are executed normally when a
specific execution condition is ON or reset when the specific execution condition
is OFF. Logically, the treatment is similar to enabling branching with TR bits, but
treatment o f instructions between IL(002) and ILC(003) dif fers from that with TR
bits when the execution condition for IL(002) is OFF. The execution condition of
IL(002) is call the interlock condition and controls execution of the interlocked
section of program. When the interlock condition is ON, the program will be
executed as written.
INTERLOCK and INTERLOCK CLEAR: IL(002) and ILC(003) Section 5-8
135
If the execution condition for IL(002) is OFF, the interlocked section between
IL(002) and ILC(003) will be treated as shown in the following table:
Instruction Treatment
OUT and OUT NOT Designated bit turned OFF.
TIM, TIMH(015), and TIML(121) Reset.
CNT, CNTR(012), TTIM(120), and MTIM(122) PV maintained.
KEEP(011), SFT(050) Bit status maintained.
DIFU(013) and DIFD(014) Not executed (see below).
All others Not executed.
IL(002) and ILC(003) do not necessarily have to be used in pairs. IL(002) can be
used several times in a row, with each IL(002) creating an interlocked section
through the next ILC(003). ILC(003) cannot be used unless there is at least one
IL(002) between it and any previous ILC(003).
Differentiation in Interlocks Changes in the execution condition for DIFU(013), DIFD(014), or a differen-
tiated instruction are not recorded if the DIFU(013) or DIFD(014) is in an inter-
locked section and the execution condition for the IL(002) is OFF. When
DIFU(013), DIFD(014), or a differentiated instruction is executed in an inter-
locked section immediately after the execution condition for the IL(002) has
gone ON, the execution condition for the DIFU(013), DIFD(014), or differen-
tiated instruction will be compared to the execution condition that existed before
the interlock became effective (i.e., before the interlock condition for IL(002)
went OFF). The ladder diagram and bit status changes for a DIFU(013) instruc-
tion in an interlock are shown below. The interlock is in effect while 000000 is
OFF. Bit 001000 is not turned ON at the point labeled A even though 000001 has
turned OFF and then back ON because the OFF status of 000001 just before A
was not detected while the interlock condition was OFF.
000000
000001
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
001000 ON
OFF
A
Address Instruction Operands
0000
00
0000
01
(002)
IL
(013)
DIFU 001000
(003)
ILC
00000 LD 000000
00001 IL(002)
00002 LD 000001
00003 DIFU(013) 001000
00004 ILC(003)
There must be an ILC(003) following any one or more IL(002).
Although as many IL(002) instructions as are necessary can be used with one
ILC(003), ILC(003) instructions cannot be used consecutively without at least
one IL(002) in between, i.e., nesting is not possible. Whenever a ILC(003) is
executed, all interlocks between the active ILC(003) and the preceding ILC(003)
are cleared.
When more than one IL(002) is used with a single ILC(003), an error message
will appear when the program check is performed, but execution will proceed
normally.
Note: Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
There are no flags affected by these instructions.
Precautions
Flags
INTERLOCK and INTERLOCK CLEAR: IL(002) and ILC(003) Section 5-8
136
The following diagram shows IL(002) being used twice with one ILC(003).
00000 LD 000000
00001 IL(002)
00002 LD 000001
00003 T00511
#0015
00004 LD 000002
00005 IL(002)
00006 LD 000003
00007 AND NOT 000004
00008 LD 000100
00009 C00001
0010
00010 LD 000005
00011 OUT 000502
00012 ILC(003)
1.5 s
SV in
CIO 0010
Address Instruction Operands
0000
00 (002)
IL
TIM 0511 #0015
0000
01
(002)
IL
0000
02
0000
03
CNT 0001 0010
0000
04
0000
05
(003)
ILC
0005
02
0001
00
CP
R
When the execution condition for the first IL(002) is OFF, T0511 will be reset to
1.5 s, C0001 will not be changed, and 000502 will be turned OFF. When the
execution condition for the first IL(002) is ON and the execution condition for the
second IL(002) is OFF, T0511 will be executed according to the status of
000001, C0001 will not be changed, and 000502 will be turned OFF. When the
execution conditions for both the IL(002) are ON, the program will execute as
written.
5-9 JUMP and JUMP END: JMP(004) and JME(005)
JUMP: JMP(004)
(004)
JMP N N: Jump number CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
JUMP END: JME(005)
(005)
JME N N: Jump number #
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Description JMP(004) is always used in conjunction with JME(005) to create jumps, i.e., to
skip from one point in a ladder diagram to another point. JMP(004) defines the
point from which the jump will be made; JME(005) defines the destination of the
jump. When the execution condition for JMP(004) is ON, no jump is made and
the program is executed consecutively as written.
When the execution condition for JMP(004) is OFF, program execution will go
immediately to the first JME(005) in the program with the same jump number
without executing any instructions in between (See
JUMP 0000
, below, for ex-
ception). The status of timers, counters, bits used in OUT, bits used in OUT NOT,
and all other status controlled by the instructions between JMP(004) and
JME(005) will not be changed, except for TIM and TIMH(015), which continue
counting. Because all of instructions between JMP(004) and JME(005) are
skipped, jumps can be used to reduce cycle time.
Example
JUMP and JUMP END: JMP(004) and JME(005) Section 5-9
137
Only one JME(005) instruction per jump number should be used in a program. If
two or more JME(005) instructions with the same jump number are used in a
program, program execution will skip to the JME(005) instruction at the lowest
program address, even if it precedes the JMP(004) instruction. Programming
multiple JMP(005) instructions for the same JME(004) instruction can be useful
in programming.
Differentiation in Jumps Although DIFU(013) and DIFD(014) are designed to turn ON the designated bit
for one cycle, they will not necessarily do so when written between JMP(004)
and JME(005). Once DIFU(013) or DIFD(014) has turned ON a bit, it will remain
ON until the next time DIFU(013) or DIFD(014) is executed again. In normal pro-
gramming, this means the next cycle. In a jump, this means the next time the
jump from JMP(004) to JME(005) is not made, i.e., if a bit is turned ON by
DIFU(013) or DIFD(014) and then a jump is made in the next cycle so that
DIFU(013) o r DIFD(014) are skipped, the designated bit will remain ON until the
next time the execution condition for the JMP(004) controlling the jump is ON.
When DIFU(013), DIFD(014), or a differentiated instruction is executed in an
jumped section immediately after the execution condition for the JMP(004) has
gone ON, the execution condition for the DIFU(013), DIFD(014), or differen-
tiated instruction will be compared to the execution condition that existed before
the jump became effective (i.e., before the execution condition for JMP(004)
went OFF).
JUMP 0000 The PC Setup can be used to control the operation of jumps created using jump
number 0000. If multiple jumps with 0000 are disabled, jumps created with 0000
will operate as described above. If multiple jumps are enabled, any JMP 0000
instruction will jump to the next JME 0000 in the program (and not the first
JME 0000 i n the program). When multiple jumps for 0000 are enabled, you can-
not overlap or nest the jumps, i.e., each JMP 0000 must be followed by a
JME 0000 before the next JMP 0000 in the program and each JME 0000 must
be followed by a JMP 0000 before the next JME 0000 in the program.
Even if the JMP condition is OFF, all instructions between JMP 0000 and
JME 0000 are still processed as NOPs, increasing the cycle time accordingly.
If the JMP condition is OFF when JMP 0001 through JMP 0999 are being used,
the program will jump directly to JME(005). Any instructions between JMP(004)
and JME(005) are not executed at all, and the cycle time is shortened according-
ly.
Precautions The jump number N must be BCD between 0000 and 0999.
When JMP(004) and JME(005) are not used in pairs, an error message will ap-
pear when the program check is performed. If a JME(005) instruction precedes
a JMP(004) instruction with the same jump number, a loop might occur, so the
END(001) instruction is never executed, causing a Cycle Time Over error.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Jump number is not BCD or not between 0000 and 0999.
JMP(004) in the program without a corresponding JME(005).
Also turns ON the Jump Error Flag A40213.
Example Examples of jump programs are provided in
4-6 Jumps
.
JUMP and JUMP END: JMP(004) and JME(005) Section 5-9
138
5-10 CONDITIONAL JUMP: CJP(221)/CJPN(222)
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
(221)
CJP N
(222)
CJP N
N: Jump number CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Description CJP(221) operates in the reverse of JMP(004). When the execution condition
turns ON, the program up until JME(005) is skipped. When the execution condi-
tion is OFF, the instructions after CJP(221) are executed normally.
The CJPN(222) operates similar to JMP(004). When the execution condition is
ON, the instructions after CJPN(222) are executed normally. When the execu-
tion condition is OFF, the program up until JME(005) is skipped.
JMP(004), CJP(221), and CJPN(222) all operate differently, however, when
used in a block program. With JMP(004), the program jumps to JME(005) un-
conditionally. With CJP(221), the program jumps to JME(005) when the condi-
tion just before the CJP(221) instruction is ON. With CJPN(222), the program
jumps to JME(005) when the condition just before the CJP(221) instruction is
OFF.
When a jump occurs, the status of outputs from the program (output bits, timers,
counters, shift registers, keep, etc.) is maintained and timing continues for TIM/
TIMH(015).
If there are two or more JME(005) instructions in a program for the same jump
number, the one at the lower address is valid and the ones at higher addresses
are ignored.
(221)
CJP #0100
0000
00
0000
01 (222)
CJPN #0101
(005)
JME #0100
(005)
JME #0101
When the execution condition (CIO 000000) is ON, the program
up to the JME(005) instruction with jump number 0100 is ignored.
When the execution condition (CIO 000001) is OFF, the program
up to the JME(005) instruction with jump number 0101 is ignored.
Precautions The jump number (N) must be BCD between 0000 and 0999.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Jump number is not BCD or not between 0000 and 0999.
CJP(221) or CJPN(222) in program without a corresponding
JME(005). Also turns ON the Jump Error Flag A40213.
(CVM1 V2)
CONDITIONAL JUMP: CJP(221)/CJPN(222) Section 5-10
139
5-11 END: END(001)
(001)
END
Ladder Symbol
Description END(001) is required as the last instruction in any program, including all action
and transition programs. No instruction written after END(001) will be executed.
The END(001) instruction indicates the end of the relevant program for that
cycle. For SFC and ladder programming, it indicates the end of the relevant ac-
tion o r transition program. For ladder programming alone, it indicates the end of
the entire program.
If there is no END(001) in a program, no instructions will be executed and the
error message “NO END INST” will appear.
Flags END(001) turns OFF the ER, CY, GR, EQ, LE, and N Flags.
5-12 NO OPERATION: NOP(000)
(000)
NOP
Ladder Symbol
NOP(000) i s not generally required in programming. When NOP(000) is found in
a program, nothing is executed and the program execution moves to the next
instruction. When memory is cleared prior to programming, NOP(000) is written
at all addresses.
NOP(000) can only be used with mnemonic display, and not with ladder pro-
grams.
Example NOP(000) can be inserted in a program at the position where an instruction is to
be inserted later. Then when the instruction is inserted there will be no gap in the
addresses.
Flags There are no flags affected by NOP(000).
5-13 T imer and Counter Instructions
Timers The timer instructions in this section are used to create timers. Most timers re-
quire a timer number and a set value (SV). Timer numbers run from T0000
through T0511 in the CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2 and from T0000 through
T1023 i n the CV1000, CV2000, CVM1-CPU11-EV2 or CVM1-CPU21-EV2, and
are used to access timer PVs and Completion Flags in memory areas set aside
specifically for this purpose.
TIML(121) and MTIM(122) do not require timer numbers. The PVs and Comple-
tion Flags for these timers are contained in addresses specified by the user
when inputting the instructions.
Any one timer number cannot be defined twice, i.e., once it has been used in any
of the timer instructions it cannot be used again unless the two timers are never
active simultaneously. I f two timers share a single timer number, but are not used
simultaneously, a duplication error will be generated when the program is
checked, but the timers will operate normally. Once defined, a timer number can
be used as many times as required as an operand in other instructions to access
the present value and Completion Flag of the timer.
Description
Precautions
Timer and Counter Instructions Section 5-13
140
Present values (PV) and Completion Flags for TIM and TIMH(015) timers are
refreshed as shown in the following table.
Instruction At execution At END(01) Interrupts
TIM PV refreshed and
Completion Flag turned
ON if PV is 0000.
PV
refreshed PV refreshed every
80 ms if cycle time
exceeds 80 ms.
TIMH using
T0000 to T0255 Not refreshed Not
refreshed PV refreshed every
10 ms and Completion
Flag turned ON if PV is
0000.
TIMH using
T0256 to T1023 PV refreshed and
Completion Flag turned
ON if PV is 0000.
Not
refreshed Not refreshed
Counters The counter instructions in this section are used to create counter. Most count-
ers require a counter number and a SV, and are connected to multiple instruction
lines which serve as input signals, resets, etc. TCNT(123), an SFC control
instruction, also requires a counter number. Refer to
5-37 SFC Control Instruc-
tions
, for details on TCNT(123).
Any one counter number cannot be defined twice, i.e., once it has been used in
any of the counter instructions it cannot be used again unless the two counters
are never active simultaneously. If two counters share a single counter number,
but are not used simultaneously, a duplication error will be generated when the
program is checked, but the counters will operate normally. Once defined, a
counter number can be used as many times as required as an operand in other
instructions to access the present value and Completion Flag of the counter.
Set Values A timer or counter SV can be input as a constant or as a word address in a data
area. If an I/O Area word assigned to an Input Unit is designated as the word
address, the Input Unit can be wired so that the SV can be set externally through
thumbwheel switches or similar devices. T imers wired in this way can only be set
externally during RUN or MONITOR mode. All SVs, including those set external-
ly, must be in BCD.
Although set values may be set to 0 for timers and counters, it will disable them,
i.e., turn ON the Completion Flag immediately.
T/C Numbers as Operands No prefix is required when using a timer or counter number as a definer in a timer
or counter instruction. Once a timer or counter number has been used to create
a timer/counter, it can be prefixed with T or C for use as an operand in various
instructions.
T imer and counter numbers can be designated as operands that require either
bit or word data. When designated as an operand that requires bit data, the timer
or counter number accesses a bit that functions as a Completion Flag that indi-
cates when the timer or counter has completed counting, i.e., the Completion
Flag, which is normally OFF, will turn ON when the timer has timed out or counter
counted out.
When designated as an operand that requires word data, the timer or counter
number accesses a memory location that holds the present value (PV) of the
timer o r counter. The PV of a timer or counter can thus be used as an operand in
CMP(020), or any other instruction for which the Timer or Counter Area is al-
lowed.
Note that “T0000” is used to designate both the Completion Flag for the timer
and to designate the PV of the timer. The meaning of the term in context should
be clear, i.e., the first is always a bit operand and the second is always a word
operand. The same is true of all other timer or counter numbers.
Timer and Counter Instructions Section 5-13
!
!
141
Indirect Addressing Timer and counter numbers for TIM, TIMH(015), TTIM(120), CNT, CNTR(012),
TIMW<013>, CNTW<014>, and TMHW<015> can be indirectly addressed us-
ing the Index Registers by moving the PC memory address of the PV of the timer
or counter number to the Index Register. PVs for timers T0000 through T1023
are contained in PC memory addresses $1000 through $13FF, and PVs for
counters C0000 through C1023 are contained in PC memory addresses $1800
through $1BFF. MOVR(036) can be used to move memory addresses for
Completion Flags to Index Registers.
Caution If the Index Register doesn’t contain a valid address for a timer or counter PV, the
instruction will not be executed, and the ER (A50003) Flag will not be turned ON.
The following example shows a program section that uses indirect addressing to
define and start 100 timers with SVs contained in D00100 through D00199. IR0
contains the PC memory address of the timer PV and IR1 contains the PC
memory address of the timer Completion Flag.
DM address Content Function
D00100 0010 SV for T0000
D00101 0100 SV for T0001
D00102 0050 SV for T0002
. . .
. . .
. . .
D00199 0999 SV for T0099
00000 LD A50013
00001 MOV(030) #1000
IR0
00002 MOVR(036) T0000
IR1
00003 MOVR(036) 200000
IR2
00004 MOV(030) #0100
D00000
00005 JME(005) #0001
00006 LD NOT ,IR2+
00007 TIM ,IR0+
*D00000
00008 LD ,IR1+
00009 OUT ,IR2+
00010 LD A50013
00011 INC(090) D00000
00012 CMP(020) #0200
D00000
00013 LD A50006
00014 JMP(004) #0001
Address Instruction Operands
A500
13
A500
13
A500
06
(030)
MOV #1000 IR0
(036)
MOVR T0000 IR1
(030)
MOV #0100 D00000
(005)
JME #0001
(030)
TIM ,IR0+ *D00000
(090)
INC D00000
(020)
CMP #0200 D00000
(004)
JMP #0001
,IR2+
(036)
MOVR 200000 IR2
,IR2+
, IR1+
Caution Do not use jump number 0000 in the above type of programming.
Timer and Counter Instructions Section 5-13
142
The first MOV(030) instruction moves the PC memory address of the PV for tim-
er T0000 ($1000) to IR0. The first MOVR(036) instruction moves the PC
memory address of the Completion Flag for timer T0000 to IR1, and the second
one moves the starting address into IR2. The second MOV(030) instruction
moves the address (00100) of the DM word that contains the SV for timer T0000
to D00000. A50013 is an Always ON Flag.
JME(005) and JMP(004) form a loop in which the content of IR0, IR1, and
D00000 are incremented by one each time the program executes the loop,
successively defining and starting the 100 timers T0000 through T0199. The
loop continues until the content of D00000 is 0200, i.e., until all 100 timers have
been defined and started. A50006 is the Equals Flag.
The subroutine above is equivalent to the 400 instructions below.
00000 LD NOT 200000
00001 TIM 0000
D00100
00002 LD T0000
00003 OUT 200000
00004 LD NOT 200001
00005 TIM 0001
D00101
00006 LD T0001
00007 OUT 200001
00008 LD NOT 200002
00009 TIM 0002
D00102
00010 LD T0002
00011 OUT 200002
00396 LD NOT 200602
00397 TIM 0099
D00199
00398 LD T0000
00399 OUT 200602
InstructionAddress Operands
2000
2000
2000
2006
TIM 0000 D00100
TIM 0001 D00101
TIM 0002 D00102
TIM 0099 D00199
2000
T0000 00
2000
T0001 01
2000
T0000 02
2006
T0099 02
00
01
02
02
5-13-1TIMER: TIM
TIM N S S: Set value CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
*Refer to page 141 for details on indirectly addressing timers.
N: Timer number #
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Description A timer is activated when its execution condition goes ON and is reset (to SV)
when the execution condition goes OFF. Once activated, TIM measures in units
of 0.1 second from the SV. TIM accuracy is +0.0/–0.1 second.
The timer PV is updated when the TIM instruction is executed, during cyclic re-
freshing, or interrupt refreshing (when the cycle time exceeds 80 ms). Refer to
6-2 Cycle Time
for details.
If the execution condition remains ON long enough for TIM to time down to zero,
the Completion Flag for the timer number used will turn ON and will remain ON
until TIM is reset (i.e., until its execution condition goes OFF or CNR(236) is
executed).
Timer and Counter Instructions Section 5-13
143
The following figure illustrates the relationship between the execution condition
for TIM and the Completion Flag assigned to it.
Execution condition
Completion Flag
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
SV SV
Precautions SV must be between 000.0 and 999.9 and must be BCD. The decimal point is not
entered.
Each timer number can be used to define only one timer instruction unless the
timers are never active simultaneously.
Timer numbers are as shown in the following table. The “high-speed” timer num-
bers should not be used for other timer instructions if they are required for
TIMH(015). Refer to
5-13-2 HIGH-SPEED TIMER: TIMH(015)
for details.
PC Instructions Timer numbers
CV500 or
CVM1 CPU01 EV2
All timers T0000 through T0511
CVM1-CPU01-EV2 High-speed timers T0000 through T0127
CV1000, CV2000,
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
All timers T0000 through T1023
CVM1
-
CPU11
-
EV2
,
CVM1-CPU21-EV2 High-speed timers T0000 through T0255
When using SFC, TIM and TIMH(015) timers are reset at the transition between
steps. If required, use the hold option with the action qualifier to prevent timers
from being automatically resetting at transitions.
Timers in interlocked program sections are reset when the execution condition
for IL(002) is OFF. Timers in jumped program sections continue timing. Power
interruptions also reset timers. If a timer that is not reset under these conditions
is desired, Auxiliary Area clock pulse bits can be counted to produce timers us-
ing CNT. Refer to
5-13-6 COUNTER: CNT
for details.
If the same timer number is used in different SFC program steps, or the IOM
Hold Bit and PC Setup are set to retain IOM (which includes timer PVs and
Completion Flags), the timer must be reset before starting it to prevent possible
malfunctions.
A delay of one cycle is sometimes required for a Completion Flag to be turned
ON after the timer times out.
If you convert a TIM instruction to a TIMH(015) instruction using online program-
ming operations, always reset the TIM instruction’s Completion Flag. Proper op-
eration will not be possible unless the Completion Flag is reset.
Note: Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Content of S (SV) is not BCD.
Examples All of the following examples use OUT in diagrams that would generally be used
to control output bits in the I/O Area. These diagrams can be modified to control
execution of other instructions.
Timer and Counter Instructions Section 5-13
144
The following example shows two timers, one set with a constant and one set vi a
input word 0005. Here, 000200 will be turned ON after 000000 goes ON and
stays ON for at least 15 seconds. When 000000 goes OFF, the timer will be reset
and 000200 will be turned OFF. When 000001 goes ON, T0001 is started from
the SV provided through word 0005. Bit 000201 is also turned ON when 000001
goes ON. When the SV in 0005 has timed out, 000201 is turned OFF. This bit will
also be turned OFF when T0001 is reset, regardless of whether or not SV has
expired.
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 TIM 0000
#0150
00002 LD T0000
00003 OUT 000200
00004 LD 000001
00005 TIM 0001
0005
00006 AND NOT T0001
00007 OUT 000201
15 s
SV in
CIO 0005
Operands
0000
00
T0000
0000
01
T0001
0002
00
0002
01
TIM 0000 #0150
TIM 0001 0005
There are three ways to achieve timers that operate for longer than 999.9 se-
conds. One way is to use TIML(121). The second way is to program consecutive
timers, with the Completion Flag of each timer used to activate the next timer. A
simple example with two 900.0-second (15-minute) timers combined to func-
tionally form a 30-minute timer is shown below.
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 TIM 0001
#9000
00002 LD T0001
00003 TIM 0002
#9000
00004 LD T0002
00005 OUT 000200
900.0 s
900.0 s
Operands
0000
00
TIM 0001 #9000
T0001
TIM 0002 #9000
T0002 0002
00
In this example, 000200 will be turned ON 30 minutes after 000000 goes ON
assuming that 000000 stays ON.
The third way to create longer timers is to combined TIM with CNT or to used
CNT to count Auxiliary Area clock pulse bits to produce longer timers. An exam-
ple is provided in
5-13-6 COUNTER: CNT
.
TIM can be combined with KEEP(011) to delay turning a bit ON and OFF in refer-
ence to a desired execution condition. KEEP(011) is described in
5-7-5 KEEP:
KEEP(011)
.
To create delays, the Completion Flags for two TIM are used to determine the
execution conditions for setting and resetting the bit designated for KEEP(011).
The bit whose manipulation is to be delayed is used in KEEP(011). Turning ON
and OFF the bit designated for KEEP(011) is thus delayed by the SV for the two
TIM timers. The two SV could naturally be the same if desired.
Example 1:
Basic Application
Example 2:
Extended Timers
Example 3:
ON/OFF Delays
Timer and Counter Instructions Section 5-13
145
In the following example, 000500 would be turned ON 5.0 seconds after 000000
goes O N and then turned OFF 3.0 seconds after 000000 goes OFF. It is neces-
sary to use both 000500 and 000000 to determine the execution condition for
T0002; 000000 in a normally closed condition is necessary to reset T0002 when
000000 goes ON and 000500 is necessary to activate T0002 (when 000000 is
OFF).
000000
000500
5.0 s 3.0 s
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 TIM 0001
#0050
00002 LD 000500
00003 AND NOT 000000
00004 TIM 0002
#0030
00005 LD T0001
00006 LD T0002
00007 KEEP(011) 000500
5.0 s
3.0 s
Operands
(011)
KEEP 000500
0000
00
TIM 0001 #0050
0005
00
TIM 0002 #0030
0000
00
T0001
T0002
S
R
The length of time that a bit is kept ON or OFF can be controlled by combining
TIM with OUT or OUT NOT. The following diagram demonstrates how this is
possible. In this example, 000204 would remain ON for 1.5 seconds after
000000 goes ON regardless of the time 000000 stays ON. This is achieved by
using 001000 as a self-maintaining bit activated by 000000 and turning ON
000204 through it. When T0001 comes ON (i.e., when the SV of T0001 has ex-
pired), 000204 will be turned OFF through T0001 (i.e., T0001 will turn ON which,
as a normally closed condition, creates an OFF execution condition for OUT
000204).
00000 LD 001000
00001 AND NOT 010000
00002 OR 000000
00003 OUT 001000
00004 LD 001000
00005 TIM 0001
#0015
00006 LD T0001
00007 OUT 010000
00008 LD 001000
00009 AND NOT 010000
00010 OUT 000204
000000
000204
1.5 s 1.5 s
Address Instruction Operands
1.5 s
0010
00
0000
00
0010
00
0010
00
0010
00
0002
04
TIM 0001 #0015
0100
T0001 00
0100
00
0100
00
Example 4:
One-Shot Bits
Timer and Counter Instructions Section 5-13
146
Bits can be programmed to turn ON and OFF at regular intervals while a desig-
nated execution condition is ON by using TIM twice. One TIM functions to turn
ON and OFF a specified bit, i.e., the Completion Flag of this TIM turns the speci-
fied bit ON and OFF. The other TIM functions to control the operation of the first
TIM, i.e., when the first TIM’s Completion Flag goes ON, the second TIM is
started and when the second TIM’s Completion Flag goes ON, the first TIM is
started.
000000
000205
1.5 s1.0 s 1.5 s1.0 s
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 AND T0002
00002 TIM 0001
#0010
00003 LD 000205
00004 TIM 0002
#0015
00005 LD T0001
00006 OUT 000205
Operands
1.5 s
1.0 s
0000
00 T0002
000205
TIM 0002 #0015
TIM 0001 #0010
T0001 0002
05
A simpler but less flexible method of creating a flicker bit is to AND one of the
Auxiliary Area clock pulse bits with the execution condition that is to be ON when
the flicker bit is operating. Although this method does not use TIM, it is included
here for comparison. This method is more limited because the ON and OFF
times must be the same and they depend on the clock pulse bits available in the
Auxiliary Area.
In the following example the 1-second clock pulse is used (A50102) so that
000206 would be turned ON and OFF every second, i.e., it would be ON for 0.5
seconds and OFF for 0.5 seconds. Precise timing and the initial status of 000206
would depend on the status of the clock pulse when 000000 goes ON.
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 AND A50102
00002 OUT 000206
Operands
0000
00 A501
02 0002
06
5-13-2HIGH-SPEED TIMER: TIMH(015)
(015)
TIMH N S S: Set value CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
*Refer to page 141 for details on indirectly addressing timers.
N: Timer number #
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Description TIMH(015) operates in the same way as TIM except that TIMH measures in
units of 0.01 second.
The cycle time affects TIMH(015) accuracy if T0128 through T0511 in t he CV500
or CVM1-CPU01-EV2 or T0256 through T1023 in the CV1000, CV2000, or
CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2 are used. If the cycle time is longer than 10 ms, use timer
numbers T0000 through T0127 in the CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2 or T0000
through T0255 in the CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2.
High-speed timer PVs are updated when the TIMH instruction is executed, dur-
ing cyclic refreshing, or interrupt refreshing. Interrupt refreshing updates active
high-speed timers every 10 ms. Refer to
6-2 Cycle Time
for details.
Example 5:
Flicker Bits
Timer and Counter Instructions Section 5-13
147
Refer t o
5-13-1 TIMER: TIM
for operational details and examples. Except for the
items mentioned above, all aspects of operation are the same.
Precautions SV must be between 00.02 and 99.99 and must be BCD. The decimal point is not
entered.
Each timer number can be used to define only one timer instruction unless the
timers are never active simultaneously.
Timer numbers are as shown in the following table. The “high-speed” timer num-
bers must be used for TIMH(015) to ensure accuracy if the cycle time is longer
than 10 ms. The present value for high-speed timers created with these timer
numbers are refreshed every 10 ms. The present value for high-speed timers
created with other timer number are refreshed only when the instruction is
executed.
PC Instructions Timer numbers
CV500 or
CVM1 CPU01 EV2
All timers T0000 through T0511
CVM1-CPU01-EV2 High-speed timers T0000 through T0127
CV1000, CV2000, or
CVM1 CPU11/21 EV2
All timers T0000 through T1023
,,
CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2 High-speed timers T0000 through T0255
When using SFC, TIM and TIMH(015) timers are reset at the transition between
steps. If required, use the hold option with the action qualifier to prevent timers
from being automatically reset at transitions.
Timers in interlocked program sections are reset when the execution condition
for IL(002) is OFF. Timers in jumped program sections continue timing. Power
interruptions also reset timers. If a timer that is not reset under these conditions
is desired, Auxiliary Area clock pulse bits can be counted to produce timers us-
ing CNT. Refer to
5-13-6 COUNTER: CNT
for details.
If the same timer number is used in different SFC program steps, or the IOM
Hold Bit and PC Setup are set to retain IOM (which includes timer PVs and
Completion Flags), the timer must be reset before starting it to prevent possible
malfunctions.
A delay of one cycle is sometimes required for a Completion Flag to be turned
ON after the timer times out.
If you convert a TIM instruction to a TIMH(015) instruction using online program-
ming operations, always reset the TIM instruction’s Completion Flag. Proper op-
eration will not be possible unless the Completion Flag is reset.
Note: Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Content of S (SV) is not BCD.
Timer and Counter Instructions Section 5-13
0005
01
T0001
0000
00
0000
01
0005
00
(015)
TIMH 0001 0020
(015)
TIMH 0000 #0150 1.5 s
T0000
CIO 0020
148
Example The following timing chart illustrates the operation of the first TIMH(015) in the
following example.
Completion Flag
000500 1.50 s
Timer input
000000
When CIO 000001 is ON, the SV for the second TIMH(015) in the following ex-
ample will be read from CIO 0020, allowing the SV of the timer to be control from
an external device connected through CIO 0020.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 TIMH(015) 0000
#0150
00002 LD T0000
00003 OUT 000500
00004 LD 000001
00005 TIMH(015) 0001
00020
00006 AND NOT T0001
00007 OUT 000501
5-13-3ACCUMULATIVE TIMER: TTIM(120)
(120)
TTIM N S S: Set value CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
*Refer to page 141 for details on indirectly addressing timers.
N: Timer number #
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
I
R
Description A TTIM(120) timer is based on two execution conditions. These execution
conditions are labeled I and R. I is the timer input; R, the reset input. The timer PV
is clocked while the timer input is ON, maintained when I is OFF, and reset to
zero when R is ON. If both I and R are ON simultaneously, the timer is reset.
TTIM(120) increments in units of 0.1 second from zero. TTIM(120) accuracy is
+0.0/–0.1 second.
Timer input (I)
Reset input (R)
Completion Flag
(T0128)
Present value: 0100
0000
Timer and Counter Instructions Section 5-13
149
Precautions SV must be between 000.0 and 999.9 and must be BCD. The decimal point is not
entered.
Timer numbers are a s shown in the following table. The “high-speed” timer num-
bers should not be used for other timer instructions if they are required for
TIMH(015). Refer to
5-13-2 HIGH-SPEED TIMER: TIMH(015)
for details.
PC Instructions Timer numbers
CV500 or
CVM1 CPU01 EV2
All timers T0000 through T0511
CVM1-CPU01-EV2 High-speed timers T0000 through T0127
CV1000, CV2000, or
CVM1 CPU11/21 EV2
All timers T0000 through T1023
,,
CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2 High-speed timers T0000 through T0255
The PVs of accumulative timers in interlocked program sections are maintained
when the execution condition for IL(002) is OFF. Unlike timers and high-speed
timers, accumulative timers in jumped program sections do not continue count-
ing, but maintain the PV.
Power interruptions will reset timers unless the IOM Hold Bit and PC Setup are
set to retain timer PVs during power interruptions. If a timer that is not reset un-
der these conditions is desired, Auxiliary Area clock pulse bits can be counted to
produce accumulative timers using CNT. Refer to
5-13-6 COUNTER: CNT
for
details.
Accumulative timers will not restart after timing out unless the PV is changed to a
value below the SV, the reset input is turned ON, or CNR(236) is executed to
reset the timer. Accumulative timers are not reset in action programs when the
step goes inactive.
A delay of one cycle is sometimes required for a Completion Flag to be turned
ON after the timer times out.
The PV and Completion Flag for TTIM(120) are refreshed when the instruction is
executed. TTIM(120) will thus not execute correctly if the cycle time is 100 ms or
larger.
Note: Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
SV is not BCD.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the PV will be incremented by
1 every 0.1 s and the Completion Flag (T128) will turn ON when the PV reaches
0100. I f CIO 000001 turns ON, the PV will be reset to 0000 and the Completion
Flag will be turned OFF. The PV will be maintained whenever CIO 000000 is
OFF.
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 LD 000001
00002 TTIM(120) 0128
#0100
0000
00 (120)
TIM 0128 #0100
0000
01
I
R
0000
00 Operands
10.0S
The following figure illustrates the relationship between the execution conditions
for an accumulative timer with a set value of 10 s, its PV, and the Completion
Flag.
Timer and Counter Instructions Section 5-13
150
CIO 000000 (input)
CIO 000001 (reset)
Completion Flag (T128)
PV
5-13-4LONG TIMER: TIML(121)
(121)
TIML D1D2SD2: PV word CIO, G, A, DM
S: SV word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
D1: Completion Flag CIO, G, A, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Description TIML(121) is a decrementing ON-delay timer that can time up to 9,999,999.9 s
(approx. 115 days). A long timer is activated when its execution condition goes
ON and is reset (to SV) when the execution condition goes OFF. Once activated,
TIML(121) times down in units of 0.1 second from the SV. TIML(121) accuracy is
+0.0/–0.1 second.
Unlike most other timers, long timers are not defined using a timer number and
timer numbers are not needed to access the Completion Flag and PV. The
Completion Flag is bit 00 of D1, the PV is maintained in D2 and D2+1, and the SV
is specified in S and S+1. Bits 01 through 15 of D1 cannot be used.
Precautions D2 and S cannot be the last address in a data area because these operands des-
ignate the first of two words.
The set value must be BCD between 0,000,000.0 and 9,999,999.9 and must be
BCD. The decimal point is not entered.
The same D1, D2, and D2+1 can be used in only one TIML(121) instruction.
Long timers in interlocked program sections are reset when the execution condi-
tion for IL(002) is OFF. Unlike TIM timers and high-speed timers, long timers in
jumped program sections do not continue counting, but maintain the PV.
Power interruptions will reset timers unless the IOM Hold Bit and PC Setup are
set to retain timer PVs during power interruptions. If a timer that is not reset un-
der these conditions is desired, Auxiliary Area clock pulse bits can be counted to
produce accumulative timers using CNT. Refer to
5-13-6 COUNTER: CNT
for
details.
Long timers will not restart after timing out unless reset by turning OFF the
execution condition or unless the PV is set to a value other than zero.
A delay of one cycle is sometimes required for a Completion Flag to be turned
ON after the timer times out.
The long timer is inaccurate when the cycle time exceeds 25 s.
Physical limitations restrict TIML(121) accuracy to a maximum of ±0.36 s/h.
Note: Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
SV is not BCD.
Example When CIO 00000 turns ON in the following example, the SV (0086 4000) will be
set into CIO 0101 and CIO 0100. As long as CIO 000000 remains ON, the PV in
Timer and Counter Instructions Section 5-13
151
CIO 0101 and CIO 0100 will be decremented by –1 every 0.1 s. If the PV reaches
0000 0000, the Completion Flag (CIO 015000) will turn ON. If CIO 000000 turns
OFF, the PV will again be set to the SV.
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 TIML(121) 0150
0100
#00864000
(121)
TIML 0150 0100 #00864000
0000
00 Operands
The following figure illustrates the relationship between the execution condition
for a long timer with a SV of 0086400.0 s (1 day), its PV, and the Completion Flag
assigned to it.
Timer input (000000)
Completion Flag
(015000)
PV: 0086 4000
0000 0000 1 day
5-13-5MULTI-OUTPUT TIMER: MTIM(122)
(122)
MTIM D1D2SD2: PV word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM, DR, IR
S: First SV word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
D1: Completion Flags CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Description MTIM(122) i s a n accumulative timer that can have up to eight pairs of set values
and Completion Flags. Unlike most timer instructions, MTIM(122) is not defined
using a timer number and timer numbers are not needed to access the Comple-
tion Flags and PV. The timer is activated when the MTIM(122) execution condi-
tion is ON and the reset bit (bit 08 of D1) goes from ON to OFF.
Once activated, MTIM(122) increments the content of D2 (the PV) from zero in
units o f 0.1 second. If the PV reaches 999.9 s, it continues counting from 000.0,
and all Completion Flags are reset to zero. MTIM(122) accuracy is +0.0/–0.1 se-
cond.
Each time the instruction is executed, the PV (content of D 2) is compared to the
eight SVs in S through S+7, and if any of the SVs is less than or equal to the PV,
the corresponding Completion Flag (D1 bits 00 through 07) is turned ON. For
greater accuracy, the same MTIM(122) instruction can be input into the program
several times so the PV:SV comparison is made more frequently.
The timer can be reset by turning ON the reset bit (bit 08 of D1), which resets the
PV and all Completion Flags to zero. Counting resumes from zero when the re-
set bit is turned OFF if the instruction execution condition is ON.
The pause bit (bit 09 of D1) can be turned ON to stop counting while maintaining
the status of the PV and Completion Flags. The MTIM(122) instruction is treated
as a NOP(000) instruction when the pause bit is ON and the reset bit is OFF.
When the pause bit is turned OFF, counting resumes from the previous PV.
Timer and Counter Instructions Section 5-13
!
(122)
MTIM 0050 D02000 0002
0000
00
152
If D 1 is in the CIO, G, or A Area, the reset bit and pause bit can be controlled with
SET(016) and RSET(017). If D1 is in the DM or EM Area, these bits can be con-
trolled with the ANDW(130) and ORW(131) instructions. The pause bit and the
reset bit are effective only when the instruction execution condition is ON.
When fewer than eight outputs are needed, set the SV that follows the last one to
0000. SVs following the one set to 0000 are not compared to the PV.
The following figure shows the functions of bits in D1.
15 to 10 not used 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Completion Flags for
SVs in S through S+7
(Bit 0n contains the
Flag for the SV in
S+n.)
Pause Bit
Reset Bit
D1:
Precautions S cannot be one of the last seven addresses in a data area because this operand
designates the first of eight words.
The set value must be BCD between 000.0 and 999.9. The decimal point is not
entered.
Caution A50003 (Error Flag) will not turn ON and execution will continue even if the SV i s
not BCD.
The MTIM(122) PV is inaccurate when the time between instruction executions
exceeds 1.6 s. The same MTIM(122) instruction can be input into the program
several times so the instruction is executed more frequently, but only as many as
necessary should be added to minimize the program execution time.
The set values in S through S+7 must be BCD, but the ER (A50003) Flag will not
be turned ON, and the instruction will be executed even if the contents are not
BCD.
Note: Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Example Timing will start in the following example when CIO 000000 is ON and
CIO 000508 changes from OFF to ON. The PV will be output to D02000
Comparisons will be made between the value in D02000 and the SV in CIO 0002
through CIO 0009 (S to S+7) and the corresponding bits in CIO 0050 will be
turned on whenever the PV is greater than or equal to an SV, for example, CIO
005000 will be turned ON when the PV reaches 0155 (15.5 s).
The timer will restart from 0000 when the PV reaches 9999.
If CIO 005008 turns ON, the PV will be reset to 0000 and all Completion Flags
will be turned OFF and then counting will restart when CIO 005008 turns OFF
again.
If CIO 005009 turns ON, timing will stop until CIO 005009 turns OFF again.
CIO 005008 and CIO 005009 are effective only while CIO 00000 is ON.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 MTIM(122) 0050
D02000
0002
Timer and Counter Instructions Section 5-13
153
S CIO 0002 0155 CIO 005000
S+1 CIO 0003 2506 CIO 005001
S+2 CIO 0004 1029 CIO 005002
S+3 CIO 0005 6047 CIO 005003
S+4 CIO 0006 4106 CIO 005004
S+5 CIO 0007 7910 CIO 005005
S+6 CIO 0008 1050 CIO 005006
S+7 CIO 0009 9800 CIO 005007
SVs Completion Flags
5-13-6COUNTER: CNT
CNT N S S: Set value CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
*Refer to page 141 for details on indirectly addressing
counters.
N: Counter number #
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
CP
R
Description CNT is used to count down from the SV when the execution condition on the
count pulse, CP, goes from OFF to ON, i.e., the present value (PV) will be de-
cremented by one whenever CNT is executed with an ON execution condition
for CP and the execution condition was OFF for the last execution. If the execu-
tion condition has not changed or has changed from ON to OFF, the PV of CNT
will not be changed. The Completion Flag for a counter is turned ON when the
PV reaches zero and will remain ON until the counter is reset.
CNT is reset with a reset input, R. When R goes from OFF to ON, the PV is reset
to the SV. The PV will not be decremented while R is ON. Counting down from
SV will begin again when R goes OFF. The PV for CNT will not be reset in inter-
locked program sections or by power interruptions.
The counter will not restarted after it has counted down to zero until it is reset by
turning ON R or executing CNR(236).
Changes in execution conditions, the Completion Flag, and the PV are illus-
trated below. PV line height is meant only to indicate changes in the PV and not
absolute values.
Execution condition
on count pulse (CP)
Execution condition
on reset (R)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Completion Flag ON
OFF
PV SV
SV – 1
SV – 2
0002
0001
0000
SV
When inputting CNT using ladder diagrams, first input the count pulse (CP), then
the CNT instruction, and then the reset input (R). When using mnemonics, first
input the count pulse, then the reset input, and then the CNT instruction.
Precautions SV must be BCD between 0000 and 9999.
Timer and Counter Instructions Section 5-13
154
Counter numbers are as shown in the following table. Each counter number can
be used to define only one counter instruction unless the counters are never ac-
tive simultaneously.
PC Counter numbers
CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2 C0000 through C0511
CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2 C0000 through C1023
Note: Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Content of S (SV) is not BCD.
In the following example, the PV will be decremented whenever both 000000
and 000001 are ON provided that 000002 is OFF and either 000000 or 000001
was OFF the last time C0004 was executed. When 150 pulses have been
counted down (i.e., when PV reaches zero), 000205 will be turned ON.
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 AND 000001
00002 LD 000002
00003 CNT 0004
#0150
00004 LD C0004
00005 OUT 000205
Operands
0000
00
0002
05
0000
01
0000
02
C0004
CNT 0004 #0150
CP
R
Here, 000000 can be used to control when CNT is operative and 000001 can be
used as the bit whose OFF to ON changes are being counted.
The above CNT can be modified to restart from SV each time power is turned ON
to the PC. This is done by using the First Cycle Flag in the Auxiliary Area
(A50015) to reset CNT as shown below.
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 AND 000001
00002 LD 000002
00003 OR A50015
00004 CNT 0004
#0150
00005 LD C0004
00006 OUT 000205
Operands
0000
00
0002
05
0000
01
0000
02
A500
15
CNT 0004 #0150
CP
R
C0004
Counters that can count past 9,999 can be programmed by using one CNT to
count the number of times another CNT has counted to zero from SV.
In the following example, 000000 is used to control when C0001 operates.
When 000000 is ON, C0001 counts down the number of OFF to ON changes in
000001. C0001 is reset by its Completion Flag, i.e., it starts counting again as
soon as its PV reaches zero. C0002 counts the number of times the Completion
Flag for C0001 goes ON. Bit 000002 serves as a reset for the entire extended
counter, resetting both C0001 and C0002 when it is OFF. The Completion Flag
for C0002 is also used to reset C0001 to inhibit C0001 operation once the SV for
C0002 has been reached and until the entire extended counter is reset via
000002.
Because in this example the SV for C0001 is 100 and the SV for C0002 is 200,
the Completion Flag for C0002 turns ON when 100 x 200 or 20,000 OFF to ON
changes have been counted in 000001. This would result in 000203 being
turned ON.
Example 1:
Basic Application
Example 2: Extended
Counter
Timer and Counter Instructions Section 5-13
155
CNT can be used in sequence as many times as required to produce counters
capable of counting any desired values.
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 AND 000001
00002 LD NOT 000002
00003 OR C0001
00004 OR C0002
00005 CNT 0001
#0100
00006 LD C0001
00007 LD NOT 000002
00008 CNT 0002
#0200
00009 LD C0002
00010 OUT 000203
CNT 0002 #0200
CP
R
0000
00 0000
01
CNT 0001 #0100
CP
R
0000
02
C0001
C0002
C0001
0000
02
C0002 0002
03
Operands
CNT can be used to create extended timers in two ways: by combining TIM with
CNT and by counting Auxiliary Area clock pulse bits.
In the following example, C0002 counts the number of times T0001 reaches
zero from its SV. The Completion Flag for T0001 is used to reset T0001 so that it
runs continuously and C0002 counts the number of times the Completion Flag
for T0001 goes ON (C0002 would be executed once each time between when
the Completion Flag for T0001 goes ON and T0001 is reset by its Completion
Flag). T0001 is also reset by the Completion Flag for C0002 so that the extended
timer would not start again until C0002 was reset by 000001, which serves as the
reset for the entire extended timer.
Because i n this example the SV for T0001 is 5.0 seconds and the SV for C0002
is 100, the Completion Flag for C0002 turns ON when 5 seconds x 100 times,
i.e., 500 seconds (or 8 minutes and 20 seconds), have expired. This would result
in 000201 being turned ON.
00000 LD 010000
00001 LD 000001
00002 CNT 0002
#0100
00003 LD 000000
00004 AND NOT 010000
00005 AND NOT C0002
00006 TIM 0001
#0050
00007 LD T0001
00008 OUT 010000
00009 LD C0002
00010 OUT 000200
Address Instruction Operands
CNT 0002 #0100
CP
R
0000
00
TIM 0001 #0050
0100 C0002
0100
0000
01
T0001 0100
00
00
C0002 0002
00
00
In the following example, C0001 counts the number of times the 1-second clock
pulse bit (A50102) goes from OFF to ON. Here again, 000000 is used to control
CNT operation.
Example 3:
Extended Timers
Timer and Counter Instructions Section 5-13
!
156
Because i n this example the SV for C0001 is 700, the Completion Flag for C0002
turns ON when 1 second x 700 times, or 11 minutes and 40 seconds, have ex-
pired. This would result in 000202 being turned ON.
Address Instruction
00000 LD 000000
00001 AND A50102
00002 LD NOT 000001
00003 CNT 0001
#0700
00004 LD C00001
00005 OUT 000202
Operands
0000
00
0000
01
C000
01 0002
02
A501
02
CNT 0001 #0700
CP
R
Caution The shorter clock pulses will not necessarily produce accurate timers because
their short ON times might not be read accurately during longer cycles. In partic-
ular, the 0.02-second and 0.1-second clock pulses should not be used to create
timers.
5-13-7REVERSIBLE COUNTER: CNTR(012)
(012)
CNTR N S S: Set value CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
*Refer to page 141 for details on indirectly addressing
counters.
N: Counter number #
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
II
DI
R
Description The CNTR(012) is a reversible, up/down circular counter, i.e., it is used to count
between zero and SV according to changes in two execution conditions, those
on the increment input (II) and those in the decrement input (DI).
The present value (PV) will be incremented by one whenever CNTR(012) is
executed with an ON execution condition for II and the last execution condition
for II was OFF. The present value (PV) will be decremented by one whenever
CNTR(012) is executed with an ON execution condition for DI and the last
execution condition for DI was OFF. If OFF to ON changes have occurred in both
II and DI since the last execution, the PV will not be changed.
If the execution conditions have not changed or have changed from ON to OFF
for both II and DI, the PV of CNTR(012) will not be changed.
When decremented below 0000, the present value is set to SV and the Comple-
tion Flag is turned ON until the PV is decremented again. When incremented
above SV, the PV is set to 0000 and the Completion Flag is turned ON until the
PV is incremented again.
CNTR(012) i s reset with a reset input, R. When R goes from OFF to ON, the PV
is reset to zero. The PV will not be incremented or decremented while R is ON.
Counting will begin again when R goes OFF. The PV for CNTR(012) will not be
reset in interlocked program sections or by power interruptions.
Timer and Counter Instructions Section 5-13
0200
08
0000
03
0000
04
C0007
0000
05
(012)
CNTR 0007 0001 SV: CIO 0001
157
When inputting the CNTR(012) instruction with mnemonics, first enter the incre-
ment input (II), then the decrement input (DI), the reset input (R), and finally the
CNTR(012) instruction. When entering with the ladder diagrams, first input the
increment input (II), then the CNTR(012) instruction, the decrement input (DI),
and finally the reset input (R).
Changes i n I I and DI execution conditions, the Completion Flag, and the PV are
illustrated below starting from part way through CNTR(012) operation (i.e.,
when reset, counting begins from zero). PV line height is meant only to indicate
changes in the PV and not absolute values.
Execution condition
on increment (II)
Execution condition
on decrement (DI)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Completion Flag ON
OFF
PV SV
SV – 1
SV – 2 0001
0000 0000
SV
SV – 1
SV – 2
Precautions SV must be BCD between 0000 and 9999.
Counter numbers are as shown in the following table. Each counter number can
be used to define only one counter instruction unless the counters are never ac-
tive simultaneously.
PC Counter numbers
CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2 C0000 through C0511
CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2 C0000 through C1023
Note: Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Content of S (SV) is not BCD.
Example The counter in the following example will count up when CIO 000003 changes
from OFF to ON and will count down when CIO 000004 changes from OFF to
ON. If CIO 000005 turns ON, the PV will be reset to 0000 and counting will be
disabled until CIO 000005 turns OFF.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000003
00001 LD 000004
00002 LD 000005
00003 CNTR(012) 0007
0001
00004 LD NOT C0007
00005 OUT 020008
Timer and Counter Instructions Section 5-13
0000
00 (236)
CNR T0001 T0005
158
The following diagram illustrates the operation of the Completion Flag (C0007)
when the content of CIO 0001 (i.e., the SV) is 5000.
4999 5000 0 1 2
1 0 5000 4999
CIO 00003
CIO 00004
Completion Flag
(C00007)
5-13-8RESET TIMER/COUNTER: CNR(236)
(236)
CNR D1D2D2: Second Word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
D1: First Word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
jCNR(236)
Description When D 1 and D2 are timer or counter numbers, CNR(236) resets the PV of tim-
ers from D1 through D2 without starting the timers or counters. PVs for TIM,
TIMH(015), C N T, and TCNT(123) are reset to the SV, while PVs for CNTR(012)
and TTIM(120) are reset to zero. TIML(121) and MTIM(122) timers cannot be
reset with CNR(236).
If only one timer or counter needs to be reset, that timer or counter number can
be entered alone. It is not necessary to enter both D1 and D2.
If two or more timer or counter instructions are defined with the same timer or
counter number and have different SVs, the PV for that timer or counter number
will b e reset to one or the other SV when CNR(236) is executed. The operation of
the timer or counter instruction will not be affected, however, because the correct
SV will be reset the next time that each timer or counter instruction is executed.
When D1 and D2 are addresses in a data area, CNR(236) sets the content of
words D1 through D2 to zero.
Precautions D1 and D2 must be in the same data area, and D1 must be less than or equal to
D2. If D1D2, only D1 will be reset.
Note: Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Example The CNR(236) instruction in the example below resets timers T0001 to T0005 to
their SV whenever CIO 000000 turns ON.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 CNR(236) T0001
T0005
Timer and Counter Instructions Section 5-13
159
5-14 Shift Instructions
All of the Shift Instructions are used to shift data within or between words, but in
differing amounts and directions.
5-14-1 SHIFT REGISTER: SFT(050)
(050)
SFT St E E: End word CIO, G, A
St: Starting word CIO, G, A
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
I
P
R
SFT(050) is controlled by three execution conditions, I, P, and R. If SFT(050) is
executed and 1) execution condition P is ON and was OFF the last execution
and 2) R is OFF, then execution condition I is shifted into the rightmost bit of a
shift register defined between St and E, i.e., if I is ON, a 1 is shifted into the regis-
ter; i f I i s O F F, a 0 i s shifted in. When I is shifted into the register, all bits previously
in the register are shifted to the left and the leftmost bit of the register is lost.
Execution
condition I
Lost
data
ESt+1, St+2, ... St
The execution condition on P functions like a differentiated instruction, i.e., I will
be shifted into the register only when P is ON and was OFF the last time
SFT(050) was executed. If execution condition P has not changed or has gone
from ON to OFF, the shift register will remain unaffected.
St designates the rightmost word of the shift register; E designates the leftmost.
The shift register includes both of these words and all words between them. The
same word may be designated for St and E to create a 16-bit (i.e., 1-word) shift
register.
When execution condition R goes ON, all bits in the shift register will be turned
OFF (i.e., set to 0) and the shift register will not operate until R goes OFF again.
Precautions St must be less than or equal to E. St and E must be in the same data area.
If a bit address in one of the words used in a shift register is also used in an in-
struction that controls individual bit status (e.g., OUT, KEEP(011), SET(016), an
error (“COIL DUPL”) will be generated when program syntax is checked on a
Peripheral Device. The program, however, will be executed as written. See
Ex-
ample 2 : Controlling Bits in Shift Registers
for a programming example that does
this.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags There are no flags affected by SFT(050).
Description
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
160
The following example uses the 1-second clock pulse bit (A50102) so that the
execution condition produced by CIO 000005 is shifted into a 3-word register
between CIO 0128 and CIO 0130 every second.
(050)
SFT 0128 0130
0000
05
A501
02
0000
06
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000005
00001 LD A50102
00002 LD 000006
00003 SFT(050) 0128
0130
The following program is used to control the status of the 17th bit of a shift regis-
ter running from CIO 0200 through CIO 0201. When the 17th bit is to be set,
CIO 000004 is turned ON. This causes the jump for JMP(004) 0000 not to be
made for that one scan, and bit 020100 (the 17th bit) will be turned ON. When bit
012800 i s OFF (i.e., at all times except during the first scan after CIO 000004 has
changed from OFF to ON), the jump is executed and the status of bit 020100 will
not be changed.
00000 LD 000200
00001 AND 000201
00002 LD 000202
00003 LD 000203
00004 SFT(050) 0200
0201
00005 LD 000004
00006 DIFU(013) 012800
00007 LD 012800
00008 JMP(004) #0000
00009 LD 012800
00010 OUT 020100
00011 JME(005) #0000
Address Instruction Operands
(050)
SFT 0200 0201
0002
00 0002
01
0002
02
0002
03
(013)
DIFU 012800
(004)
JMP #0000
0201
00
(005)
JME #0000
0128
00
0000
04
0128
00
When a bit that is part of a shift register is used in OUT (or any other instruction
that controls bit status), a syntax error will be generated during the program
check, but the program will executed properly (i.e., as written).
The following program controls the conveyor line shown below so that faulty
products detected at the sensor are pushed down a chute. To do this, the execu-
tion condition determined by inputs from the first sensor (000001) are stored in a
shift register: ON for good products; OFF for faulty ones. Conveyor speed has
been adjusted so that bit 120003 (in the Holding Area) of the shift register can be
used to activate a pusher (000500) when a faulty product reaches it, i.e., when
bit 120003 turns ON, 000500 is turned ON to activate the pusher.
Example 1:
Basic Application
Example 2:
Controlling Bits in Shift
Registers
Example 3:
Control Action
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
161
The program is set up so that a rotary encoder (000000) controls execution of
SFT(050) through a DIFU(013), the rotary encoder is set up to turn ON and OFF
each time a product passes the first sensor. Another sensor (000002) is used to
detect faulty products in the chute so that the pusher output and bit 120003 of the
shift register can be reset as required.
Sensor
Chute
(00002)
(00500)
Sensor
(00001)
Rotary Encoder
(00000)
Pusher
(050)
SFT 1200 1201 00000 LD 000001
00001 LD 000000
00002 LD 000003
00003 SFT(050) 1200
1201
00004 LD 120003
00005 OUT 000500
00006 LD 000002
00007 OUT NOT 000500
00008 OUT NOT 120003
0000
01
0000
00
0000
03
1200
03
0000
02
0005
00
0005
00
1200
03
Address Instruction Operands
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
162
5-14-2 REVERSIBLE SHIFT REGISTER: SFTR(051)
Variations
j SFTR(051)
(051)
SFTR C St E
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
C: Control word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
E: End word CIO, G, A, DM
St: Starting word CIO, G, A, DM
SFTR(051) i s used to create a single- or multiple-word shift register that can shift
data t o either the right or the left. To create a single-word register, designate the
same word for St and E. The control word provides the shift direction, the status
to be put into the register, the shift pulse, and the reset input. The control word is
allocated as follows:
15 14 13 12 Not used.
Shift direction
1 (ON): Left
0 (OFF): Right
Status to input into register
Shift pulse bit
Reset
The data in the shift register will be shifted one bit in the direction indicated by
bit 12, shifting one bit out to CY and the status of bit 13 into the other end when-
ever SFTR(051) is executed with an ON execution condition as long as the reset
bit is OFF and as long as bit 14 is ON. If SFTR(051) is executed with an OFF
execution condition or if SFTR(051) is executed with bit 14 OFF, the shift register
will remain unchanged. If SFTR(051) is executed with an ON execution condi-
tion and the reset bit (bit 15) is OFF, the entire shift register and CY will be set to
zero.
St must be less than or equal to E, and St and E must be in the same data area.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of a *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
St and E are not in the same data area or St is greater than
E.
CY (A50004): Receives the status of bit 00 of St or bit 15 of E, depending
on the shift direction.
Description
Precautions
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
163
In the following example, CIO bits 000005, 000006, 000007, and 000008 are
used to control the bits of C used in j SFTR(051). The shift register is between
words 0020 and 0021, and it is controlled through bit 000009.
00000 LD 000005
00001 OUT 005012
00002 LD 000006
00003 OUT 005013
00004 LD 000007
00005 OUT 005014
00006 LD 000008
00007 OUT 005015
00008 LD 000009
00009 jSFTR(051) 0050
0020
0021
(051)
jSFTR 0050 0020 0021
0000
05
0000
06
0000
07
0000
08
0000
09
0050
12
0050
13
0050
14
0050
15
Direction
Status to input
Shift pulse
Reset
Address Instruction Operands
5-14-3 ASYNCHRONOUS SHIFT REGISTER: ASFT(052)
Variations
j ASFT(052)
(052)
ASFT C St E
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
C: Control word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
E: End word CIO, G, A, DM
St: Starting word CIO, G, A, DM
Description When the execution condition is OFF, ASFT(052) is not executed. When the ex -
ecution condition is ON, ASFT(052) is used to create and control a reversible
asynchronous word shift register between St and E. This shift register reverses
the contents of adjacent words when the content of one of the words is zero and
the other is non-zero.
Bit 13 of C determines whether the non-zero is shifted toward St or toward E. By
repeating the instruction several times, all of the words with a content of zero
accumulate at the lower or higher end of the range defined by St and E. If no
words in the register contain zero or all of the words with a content of zero have
accumulated at one end of the range, nothing is shifted.
When the Reset Bit is ON, the content of every word from St to E is set to zero.
Control Word Bits 0 0 through 12 of C are not used. Bit 13 is the shift direction: turn bit 13 OFF to
shift the non-zero data toward E (toward higher addressed words) and ON to
shift toward St (toward lower addressed words). Bit 14 is the Shift Enable Bit:
turn bit 14 OFF to enable shift register operation according to bit 13, and ON to
disable the register. Bit 15 is the Reset Bit: the register will be reset (set to zero)
between St and E when ASFT(052) is executed with bit 15 OFF. Turn bit 15 ON
for normal operation.
15 14 13 Not used.
Shift direction
0 (OFF): Non-zero data shifted toward E
1 (ON): Non-zero data shifted toward St
Shift Enable Bit
Reset
Example
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
164
Content of C Function of ASFT(052)
#4000 Shift non-zero data toward E
#6000 Shift non-zero data toward St
#8000 Reset all words to zero
St must be less than or equal to E. St and E must be in the same data area.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
The St and E words are in different areas, or St is greater
than E.
Example The following instruction is used to shift words in an 11-word shift register
created between D 00100 and D 00110 with C=#6000. Non-zero data is shifted
towards St (D00110).
D00100 1234 1234 1234
D00101 0000 0000 2345
D00102 0000 2345 3456
D00103 2345 0000 4567
D00104 3456 3456 5678
D00105 0000 4567 6789
D00106 4567 0000 789A
D00107 5678 5678 0000
D00108 6789 6789 0000
D00109 0000 789A 0000
D00110 789A 0000 0000
Before
execution After one
execution After seven
executions
(052)
ASFT #6000 D00100 D00110
0000
00
Precautions
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
165
5-14-4 WORD SHIFT: WSFT(053)
Variations
j WSFT(053)
(053)
WSFT S St E
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
S: Source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
E: End word CIO, G, A, DM
St: Starting word CIO, G, A, DM
When the execution condition is OFF, WSFT(053) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, WSFT(053) shifts data between St and E in word units.
The data in S is copied into St and the content of E is lost.
F0C234521029
E St + 1 St
345210294BC0
E St + 1 St
Lost
4BC0
S
St must be less than or equal to E. St and E must be in the same data area.
The shift operation might not be completed if a power interruption occurs during
execution of the instruction.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
The St and E words are in different areas, or St is greater
than E.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, FF00 is shifted into D00010,
the word data in D00010 is shifted to D00011, the word data in D00011 is shifted
to D00012, and the word data in D00012 is lost.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 WSFT(053) #FF00
D00010
D00012
Lost data St+1: D00011
5 6 7 8
E: D00012
5678
St+1: D00011
9 A B C
9 A B C
St: D00010
F F 0 0
S : #FF00
E: D00012
1 2 3 4
St: D00010
Description
Precautions
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
(053)
WSFT #FF00 D00010 D00012
0000
00
166
5-14-5 SHIFT N-BIT DATA LEFT: NSFL(054)
(054)
NSFL D C N
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
↑NSFL(054)
N: Shift data length CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
D: Beginning word for shift CIO, G, A
C: Beginning bit CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
When the execution condition is OFF, NSFL(054) is not executed. When the ex -
ecution condition is ON, NSFL(054) shifts the specified number of bits (i.e., the
shift data length) from the beginning bit in the beginning word (bit C of word D),
one bit to the left. A “0” is shifted into the beginning bit. The status of the Nth bit is
shifted to CY (A50004).
If the shift data length (D) is “0,” the beginning bit (C) data will be copied to CY
and the status of the beginning bit (C) will not be changed.
Set the beginning bit to a value from 0000 to 0015 BCD.
CY
D Wd: C bit
N bits
0
D Wd
Precautions C must be between 0000 and 0015 and must be BCD.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): C is not 0000 to 0015 BCD.
Content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): “1” has been shifted to CY.
Example When t h e C I O 000000 is ON in the following example, the 18 bits of data starting
from bit 03 of CIO 0001 are shifted to the left one bit at a time. A “0” is entered for
the beginning bit (CIO 000103) of the shift. The status of bit CIO 000204 is
shifted to CY.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 NSFL(054) 0001
#0003
#0018
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
(054)
NSFL 0001 #0003 #0018
0000
00
167
D+1: Wd 0002 D: Wd 0001
N: 18 bits
After one execution
CY 0
000
00 0 00011111111
04 03MSB LSB
000 00 0 00011111111
04 03MSB LSB
CY
1
1
0
5-14-6 SHIFT N-BIT DATA RIGHT: NSFR(055)
(055)
NSFR D C N
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
↑NSFR(055)
N: Shift data length CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
D: Beginning word for shift CIO, G, A
C: Beginning bit CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
When the execution condition is OFF, NSFR(055) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, NSFR(055) shifts the specified number of bits (i.e., the
shift data length) from the beginning bit of the beginning word (bit C of word D),
one bit to the right. A “0” is entered for the beginning bit. The status of the Nth bit
is shifted to CY (A50004).
If the shift data length (D) is “0,” the beginning bit (C) data will be copied to C and
the status of the beginning bit (C) will not be changed.
Set the beginning bit to a value from 0000 to 0015 BCD.
CY
D Wd: C bit
N bits
0
D Wd
Precautions C must be between 0000 and 0015 and must be BCD.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): C is not 0000 to 0015 BCD.
Content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): “1” has been shifted to CY.
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
168
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the18 bits of data beginning
from bit 03 of CIO 0001 are shifted to the right, one at a time. A “0” is entered for
the beginning bit (CIO 000204) of the shift. The status of bit CIO 000103 is
shifted to CY.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 NSFR(055) 0001
#0003
#0018
D+1: Wd 0002 D: Wd 0001
N: 18 bits
Executed once
CY
0
000
00 0 00011111111
04 03MSB LSB
00000 0 0 0011111111
04 03MSB LSB
CY
1
0
1
5-14-7 SHIFT N-BITS LEFT: NASL(056)
(056)
NASL D C
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol (NASL)
Variations
↑NASL(056)
D: Shift word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
C: Control word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
When the execution condition is O FF, NASL(056) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, NASL(056) shifts the status of the 16 bits in the speci-
fied word to the left the specified number of bits.
The number of bits to shift is set in the two rightmost digits of the control word. If
the number is “0,” the data will not be shifted. The appropriate flags (see below)
will turn ON and OFF, however, according to data in the specified word.
CY Wd D
. . . . .
Number of bits shifted
A5004
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
(055)
NSFR 0001 #0003 #0018
0000
00
169
After the bits have been shifted, the status of the bits from which data was shifted
(i.e., the number of bits shifted, beginning with the rightmost bit of the specified
word) will be set to “0” or to the status of the LSB, depending on the control word
setting.
Number of bits to shift (00 to 16)
Control Word Contents
MSB LSB
Status of remaining bits
0: 0
8: Status of LSB
0
Precautions Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Number of bits to shift is out of range.
Content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): “1” has been shifted to CY.
EQ (A50006) Content of D after the shift is all zeros
N (A50008) Same status as leftmost bit (MSB) of word D after shift.
Example See the example provided in
5-14-9 DOUBLE SHIFT N-BITS LEFT: NSLL(058)
.
5-14-8 SHIFT N-BITS RIGHT: NASR(057)
(057)
NASR D C
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
↑NASR(057)
D: Shift word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
C: Control word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
When the execution condition is OFF, NASR(057) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, NASR(057) shifts the status of the 16 bits in the speci-
fied word to the right the specified number of bits
The number of bits to shift is set in the two rightmost digits of the control word. If
the number is “0,” the data will not be shifted. The appropriate flags will turn ON
and OFF, however, according to data in the specified word.
CY
Wd D
. . . . .
Number of bits shifted A5004
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
170
After the bits have been shifted, the status of the bits from which data was shifted
(i.e., the number of bits shifted, beginning with the leftmost bit of the specified
word) will be set to “0” or to the status of the MSB, depending on the control word
setting.
Number of bits to shift (00 to 16)
Control Word Contents
MSB LSB
Status of remaining bits
0: 0
8: Status of MSB
0
Precautions Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Number of bits to shift is out of range.
Content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): “1” has been shifted to CY.
EQ (A50006) Content of word D after the shift is all zeros.
N (A50008) Same status as leftmost bit (MSB) of word D after shift.
Example See the example provided in
5-14-10 DOUBLE SHIFT N-BITS RIGHT:
NSRL(059)
.
5-14-9 DOUBLE SHIFT N-BITS LEFT: NSLL(058)
(058)
NSLL D C
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑NSLL(058)
D: Beginning shift word CIO, G, A, DM
C: Control word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
Operand Data Areas
When the execution condition is OFF, NSLL(058) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, NSLL(058) shifts the status of the 32 bits in the specified
words to the left the specified number of bits.
The number of bits to shift is set in the two rightmost digits of the control word. If
the number is “0,” the word data will not be shifted. The appropriate flags will turn
ON and OFF, however, according to data in the specified word.
CY
Wd D
. . . .
Number of bits shifted
A5004 . . . .
Wd D+1
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
171
After the bits have been shifted, the status of the bits from which data was shifted
(i.e., the number of bits shifted, beginning with the rightmost bit of the specified
word) will be set to “0” or to the status of the LSB, depending on the control word
setting.
Number of bits shift (00 to 32)
Control Word Contents
MSB LSB
Status of remaining bits
0: 0
8: Status of LSB
0
Precautions Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Number of bits to shift is out of range.
Content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): “1” has been shifted to CY.
EQ (A50006) Content of words D and D+1 after the shift is all zeros.
N (A50008) Same status as leftmost bit (MSB) of word D+1 after shift.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the 32 bits in D00201 and
D00200 are shifted three bits to the left. The status of the three rightmost bits of
D00200 are set to “0.”
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 NSLL(058) D00200
#8003
0 entered.
Lost
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
(058)
NSLL D00200 #8003
0000
00
172
5-14-10DOUBLE SHIFT N-BITS RIGHT: NSRL(059)
Operand Data Areas
(059)
NSRL D C
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑NSRL(059)
D: Shift word address CIO, G, A, DM,
C: Control word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM,
When the execution condition is OFF, NSRL(059) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, NSRL(059) shifts the status of the 32 bits in the speci-
fied words to the right the specified number of bits.
The number of bits to shift is set in the two rightmost digits of the control word. If
the number is “0,” the word data will not be shifted. The appropriate flags will turn
ON and OFF, however, according to data in the specified word.
CY
Wd D
. . . .
Number of bits shifted A5004
. . . .
Wd D+1
After the bits have been shifted, the status of the bits from which data was shifted
(i.e., the number of bits shifted, beginning with the leftmost bit of the specified
word) will be set to “0” or to the status of the MSB, depending on the control word
setting.
Number of bits to shift (00 to 32)
Control Word Contents
MSB LSB
Status of remaining bits
0: 0
8: Status of MSB
0
Precautions Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Number of bits to shift is out of range.
Content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): “1” has been shifted to CY.
EQ (A50006) Content of word D and D+1 after the shift is all zeros.
N (A50008) Same as leftmost bit (MSB) of word D+1 after shift.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the 32 bits in D00200 and
D00201 are shifted three bits to the right. The status of the three leftmost bits of
D00201 are set to “0.”
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 NSLL(059) D00200
#8003
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
(059)
NSLL D00200 #8003
0000
00
173
0 entered.
Lost
5-14-11 ARITHMETIC SHIFT LEFT: ASL(060)
(060)
ASL Wd Wd: Word CIO, G, A, DM,
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j ASL(060)
When the execution condition is OFF, ASL(060) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, ASL(060) shifts a 0 into bit 00 of Wd, shifts the bits of Wd
one bit to the left, and shifts the status of bit 15 into CY.
1001110001010011
CY Bit
00
Bit
15 0
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): Receives the status of bit 15.
EQ (A50006): Content of Wd is 0 after a shift.
N (A50008): Same status as bit 15 of D + 1 after shift.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, 0 is shifted into bit 00 of
D00010, the status of all bits within D00010 are shifted left one position, and the
status of bit 15 is shifted to CY.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 ASL(060) D00010
CY LSBMSB
1LSBMSB
Wd: D00010
1001110001010011
0011100010100110
“0”
Description
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
0000
00 (060)
ASL D00010
174
5-14-12ARITHMETIC SHIFT RIGHT: ASR(061)
(061)
ASR Wd Wd: Word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j ASR(061)
When the execution condition is OFF, ASR(061) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, ASR(061) shifts a 0 into bit 15 of Wd, shifts the bits of Wd
one bit to the right, and shifts the status of bit 00 into CY.
1001011001100101
Bit
00
Bit
15 CY
0
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): Receives the status of bit 00.
EQ (A50006): Content of Wd is 0 after a shift.
N (A50008): OFF.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, 0 is shifted into bit 15 of
D00010, the status of all bits within D00010 are shifted right one position, and
the status of bit 00 is shifted to CY.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 ASR(061) D00010
LSBMSB
0CY
LSBMSB 0
CY
0110010110011001
1100101100110010
Wd: D00010
Description
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
0000
00 (061)
ASR D00010
175
5-14-13ROTATE LEFT: ROL(062)
(062)
ROL Wd Wd: Word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j ROL(062)
When the execution condition is OFF, ROL(062) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, ROL(062) shifts all Wd bits one bit to the left, shifting CY
into bit 00 of Wd and shifting bit 15 of Wd into CY.
10110011100011010
CY Bit
00
Bit
15
Use STC(078) to set CY to 1 or CLC(079) to set CY to 0 if necessary before do-
ing a rotate operation to ensure that CY contains the proper status before ex-
ecuting ROL(062).
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): Receives the status of bit 15 from Wd.
EQ (A50006): Content of Wd is 0 after execution.
N (A50008): Same status as bit 15 of Wd after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the status of CY is shifted into
bit 00 of D00010, the status of all bits within D00010 are shifted left one position,
and the status of bit 15 is shifted to CY.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 ROL(062) D00010
0LSBMSB
LSBMSB
CY
1
CY
Wd: D00010
1011001110001101
0110011100011010
Description
Precautions
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
0000
00 (062)
ROL D00010
176
5-14-14ROTATE RIGHT: ROR(063)
(063)
ROR Wd Wd: Word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j ROR(063)
When the execution condition is OFF, ROR(063) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, ROR(063) shifts all Wd bits one bit to the right, shifting
CY into bit 15 of Wd and shifting bit 00 of Wd into CY.
01010100011100010
Bit
15
CY Bit
00
Use STC(078) to set CY to 1 or CLC(079) to set CY to 0 if necessary before do-
ing a rotate operation to ensure that CY contains the proper status before ex-
ecuting ROR(063).
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): Receives the status of bit 15 from Wd.
EQ (A50006): Content of Wd is 0 after execution.
N (A50008): Same status as bit 15 of Wd after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the status of CY is shifted into
bit 15 of D00010, the status of all bits within D00010 are shifted right one posi-
tion, and the status of bit 00 is shifted to CY.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 ROR(063) D00010
0
CY LSBMSB
1010110011100011
0101011001110001
1
CY LSBMSB
Wd: D00010
Description
Precautions
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
0000
00 (063)
ROR D00010
177
5-14-15DOUBLE SHIFT LEFT: ASLL(064)
(064)
ASLL Wd Wd: Word CIO, G, A, DM
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j ASLL(064)
When the execution condition is OFF, ASLL(064) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, ASLL(064) shifts a 0 into bit 00 of Wd, all bits previously
in Wd and Wd+1 are shifted to the left, and bit 15 of Wd+1 is shifted into CY.
0
CY
Wd+1 Wd
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): Receives the status of bit 15 from Wd+1.
EQ (A50006): Content of Wd and Wd+1 are 0 after a shift.
N (A50008): Same status as bit 15 of Wd+1 after shift.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, 0 is shifted into bit 00 of
CIO 0200, the status of all bits within CIO 0200 are shifted left one position, the
status of bit 15 is shifted to bit 00 of CIO 0201, the status of all bits within
CIO 0201 are shifted left one position, and the status of bit 15 is shifted to CY.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 ASLL(064) 0200
CY LSB
MSB LSBMSB 0
1
CY LSBMSB LSBMSB
Wd: CIO 0200Wd+1: CIO 0201
0 0 0 to 1 1
0 0 1to 1 0
1 1 0 to 0 1
1 0 to 1 0
Wd: CIO 0200Wd+1: CIO 0201
Description
Precautions
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
0000
00 (064)
ASLL 0200
178
5-14-16DOUBLE SHIFT RIGHT: ASRL(065)
(065)
ASRL Wd Wd: Word CIO, G, A, DM
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j ASRL(065)
When the execution condition is OFF, ASRL(065) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, ASRL(065) shifts a 0 into bit 15 of Wd+1, all bits pre-
viously in Wd and Wd+1 are shifted to the right, and bit 00 of Wd is shifted into
CY.
0CY
Wd+1 Wd
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): Receives the status of bit 00 from Wd.
EQ (A50006): Content of Wd and Wd+1 are 0 after a shift.
N (A50008): Same status as bit 15 of Wd+1 after shift.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, 0 is shifted into bit 15 of
D01001, the status of all bits within D01001 are shifted right one position, the
status of bit 00 of D01001 is shifted to bit 15 of D01000, the status of all bits within
D01000 are shifted right one position, and the status of bit 00 is shifted to CY.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 ASRL(065) D01000
00 100
MSBLSBMSB
0CYLSB
0
MSBLSBMSB CYLSB
Wd+1: D01001
Wd: D01000
Wd: 01000
Wd+1: D01001
100 11
1 0 0 1 01 0 0 1 1
Description
Precautions
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
0000
00 (065)
ASRL D01000
179
5-14-17DOUBLE ROTATE LEFT: ROLL(066)
(066)
ROLL Wd Wd: Word CIO, G, A, DM
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j ROLL(066)
When the execution condition is OFF, ROLL(066) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, ROLL(066) shifts CY into bit 00 of Wd, all bits previously
in Wd and Wd+1 are shifted to the left, and bit 15 of Wd+1 is shifted into CY.
Wd+1 WdCY
Use STC(078) to set CY to 1 or CLC(079) to set CY to 0 if necessary before do-
ing a rotate operation to ensure that CY contains the proper status before ex-
ecuting ROLL(066).
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): Receives the status of bit 15 from Wd+1.
EQ (A50006): Content of Wd and Wd+1 are 0 after execution.
N (A50008): Same status as bit 15 of Wd+1 after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the status of CY is shifted into
bit 00 of CIO 0100, the status of all bits within CIO 0100 are shifted left one posi-
tion, the status of bit 15 of CIO 0100 is shifted to bit 00 of CIO 0101, the status of
all bits within CIO 0101 are shifted left one position, and the status of bit 15 is
shifted to CY.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 ROLL(066) 0100
1000 1110
0
CY LSBMSB
0001 1100
1
CY LSBMSB
0010 1001
0100 0110
LSBMSB
LSBMSB
Wd+1: CIO 0101 Wd: CIO 0100
Wd+1: CIO 0101 Wd: CIO 0100
Description
Precautions
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
0000
00 (066)
ROLL 0100
180
5-14-18ROTATE LEFT WITHOUT CARRY: RLNC(260)
(260)
RLNC Wd Wd: Word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
↑RNLC(260)
When the execution condition is OFF, RLNC(260) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, RLNC(260) shifts all Wd bits one bit to the left, shifting
the status of bit 15 of Wd into both bit 00 and CY.
10110011100011010
CY Bit
00
Bit
15
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): Receives the status of bit 15 from Wd.
EQ (A50006): Content of Wd is 0 after execution.
N (A50008): Same status as bit 15 of Wd after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the status of bit 15 of
CIO 0100 is shifted into bit 00 of CIO 0100 and into CR and the status of all bits
within CIO 0100 are shifted left one position.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 RLNC(260) 0100
0LSBMSB
LSBMSB
CY
1
CY
Wd: CIO 0100
1011001110001101
0110011100011011
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
0000
00 (260)
RLNC 0100
181
5-14-19DOUBLE ROTATE LEFT WITHOUT CARRY: RLNL(262)
(262)
RLNL Wd Wd: Word CIO, G, A, DM
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
↑RLNL(262)
When the execution condition is OFF, RLNL(262) is not executed. When the ex -
ecution condition is ON, RLNL(262) shifts all bits previously in Wd and Wd+1 to
the left, and bit 15 of Wd+1 is shifted into both bit 00 of Wd and into CY.
Wd+1 WdCY
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): Receives the status of bit 15 from Wd+1.
EQ (A50006): Content of Wd and Wd+1 are 0 after execution.
N (A50008): Same status as bit 15 of Wd+1 after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the status of bit 15 of
CIO 0101 is shifted into bit 00 of CIO 0100 and into CY, the status of all bits within
CIO 0100 are shifted left one position, the status of bit 15 is shifted to bit 00 of
CIO 0101, and the status of all bits within CIO 0101 are shifted left one position.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 RLNL(262) 0100
1000 1110
0
CY LSBMSB
0001 1100
1
CY LSBMSB
0010 1001
0100 011LSBMSB
LSBMSB
Wd+1: CIO 0101 Wd: CIO 0100
Wd+1: CIO 0101 Wd: CIO 0100
1
Description
Precautions
(CVM1 V2)
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
0000
00 (262)
RLNL 0100
182
5-14-20DOUBLE ROTATE RIGHT: RORL(067)
(067)
RORL Wd Wd: Word CIO, G, A, DM
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j RORL(067)
When the execution condition is OFF, RORL(067) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, RORL(067) shifts CY into bit 15 of Wd+1, all bits pre-
viously in Wd and Wd+1 are shifted to the right, and bit 00 of Wd is shifted into
CY.
Wd+1 Wd CY
Use STC(078) to set CY to 1 or CLC(079) to set CY to 0 if necessary before do-
ing a rotate operation to ensure that CY contains the proper status before ex-
ecuting RORL(067).
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): Receives the status of bit 00 from Wd.
EQ (A50006): Content of Wd and Wd+1 are 0 after execution.
N (A50008): Same status as bit 15 of Wd+1 after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the status of CY is shifted into
bit 15 of CIO 0801, the status of all bits within CIO 0801 are shifted right one
position, the status of bit 00 of CIO 0801 is shifted into bit 00 of CIO 0800, the
status of a l l b i t s w i t h i n C I O 0800 are shifted right one position, the status of bit 00
of CIO 0800 is shifted into CY.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 RORL(067) 0800
1001 0110 0
CY
LSBMSB
0100 0011 1
CY
LSBMSB
1011 001
0101 1101
LSBMSB
LSB
MSB
Wd+1: CIO 0801 Wd: CIO 0800
Wd+1: CIO 0801 Wd: CIO 0800
Description
Precautions
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
0000
00 (067)
RORL 0800
183
5-14-21ROTATE RIGHT WITHOUT CARRY: RRNC(261)
(261)
RRNC Wd Wd: Word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
↑RRNC(261)
When the execution condition is OFF, RRNC(261) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, RRNC(261) shifts all Wd bits one bit to the right, shift-
ing the status of bit 00 into both bit 15 of Wd and into CY.
0101010001110001 0
Bit
15 CY
Bit
00
Wd
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): Receives the status of bit 15 from Wd.
EQ (A50006): Content of Wd is 0 after execution.
N (A50008): Same status as bit 15 of Wd after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the status of bit 00 of
CIO 0100 is shifted into bit 15 of CIO 0100 and into CR and the status of all bits
within CIO 0100 are shifted right one position.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 RRNC(261) 0100
0
CY
LSBMSB
1010110011100011
101011001110001 1
CY
LSBMSB
Wd: CIO 0100
1
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
0000
00 (261)
RRNC 0100
184
5-14-22DOUBLE ROTATE RIGHT W/O CARRY: RRNL(263)
(263)
RRNL Wd Wd: Word CIO, G, A, DM
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
↑RRNL(263)
When the execution condition is OFF, RRNL(263) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, RRNL(263) shifts all bits previously in W d and Wd+1 to
the right, and bit 00 of Wd is shifted into both bit 15 of Wd+1 and into CY.
Wd+1 Wd CY
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): Receives the status of bit 00 from Wd.
EQ (A50006): Content of Wd and Wd+1 are 0 after execution.
N (A50008): Same status as bit 15 of Wd+1 after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the status of bit 00 of
CIO 0800 is shifted into bit 15 of CIO 0801 and into CY, the status of all bits within
CIO 0801 are shifted right one position, the status of bit 00 is shifted to bit 15 of
CIO 0800, and the status of all bits within CIO 0800 are shifted left one position.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 RRNL(263) 0100
1001 0110 0
CY
LSBMSB
100 0011 1
CY
LSBMSB
1011 001
0101 1101
LSBMSB
LSB
MSB
Wd+1: CIO 0801 Wd: CIO 0800
Wd+1: CIO 0801 Wd: CIO 0800
1
Description
Precautions
(CVM1 V2)
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
0000
00 (263)
RRNL 0100
185
5-14-23ONE DIGIT SHIFT LEFT: SLD(068)
(068)
SLD St E E: End word CIO, G, A, DM
St: Starting word CIO, G, A, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j SLD(068)
When the execution condition is OFF, SLD(068) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, SLD(068) shifts data between St and E (inclusive) by
one digit (four bits) to the left. 0 is written into the rightmost digit of the St, and the
content of the leftmost digit of E is lost.
5
E
8 1
St
F C 97D
Lost data 0
...
St must be less than or equal to E. St and E must be in the same data area.
The shift operation might not be completed if a power failure occurs during ex-
ecution of the instruction.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
St and E are in different areas, or St is greater than E.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, 0 is shifted into digit 0 of
D00010, the contents of all digits in D00010 are shifted one digit to the left, the
content o f digit 3 of D00010 is shifted to digit 0 of D00011, the contents of all dig-
its in D00011 are shifted one digit to the left, the content of digit 3 of D00011 is
shifted to digit 0 of D00012, the contents of all digits in D00012 are shifted one
digit to the left, and the content of digit 3 of D00012 is lost.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 00000
00001 SLD(068) D00010
D00012
1 2 3 4
163162161160
E: D00012 St: D00010St+1: D00011
5678
163162161160
9 A B C
163162161160
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C 0
163162161160163162161160163162161160
E: D00012 St: D00010St+1: D00011
“0”
Lost data
Description
Precautions
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
0000
00 (068)
SLD D00010 D00012
186
5-14-24ONE DIGIT SHIFT RIGHT: SRD(069)
(069)
SRD St E E: End word CIO, G, A, DM
St: Starting word CIO, G, A, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j SRD(069)
When the execution condition is OFF, SRD(069) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, SRD(069) shifts data between St and E (inclusive) by
one digit (four bits) to the right. 0 is written into the leftmost digit of E and the right-
most digit of St is lost.
2
E
3 1
St
4 5 C8F
0
...
Lost data
St must be less than or equal to E. St and E must be in the same data area.
The shift operation might not be completed if a power interruption occurs during
execution of the instruction.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
The St and E words are in different areas, or St is greater
than E.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, 0 is shifted into digit 3 of
D00012, the contents of all digits in D00012 are shifted one digit to the right, the
content o f digit 0 of D00012 is shifted to digit 3 of D00011, the contents of all dig-
its in D00011 are shifted one digit to the right, the content of digit 0 of D00011 is
shifted to digit 3 of D00010, the contents of all digits in D00010 are shifted one
digit to the right, and the content of digit 0 of D00010 is lost.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 SRD(069) D00010
D00012
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B
163162161160163162161160163162161160
163162161160163162161160163162161160
E: D00012 St+1: D00011
E: D00012 St: D00010St+1: D00011
“0” Lost data
St: D00010
Description
Precautions
Shift Instructions Section 5-14
0000
00 (069)
SRD D00010 D00012
187
5-15 Data Movement Instructions
Data Movement Instructions are used for moving data between different ad-
dresses in data areas. These movements can be programmed to be within the
same data area or between different data areas. Data movement is essential for
utilizing all of the data areas of the PC. Effective communications in networks
also requires data movement. All of these instructions change only the content
of the words to which data is being moved, i.e., the content of source words is the
same before and after execution of any of the data movement instructions.
5-15-1 MOVE: MOV(030)
(030)
MOV S D D: Destination CIO, G, A, T, C, DM, DR, IR
S: Source CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j MOV(030)
! MOV(030) ! j MOV(030)
When the execution condition is OFF, MOV(030) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, MOV(030) copies the content of S to D.
If !MOV(030) or !jMOV(030) is used, input bits used for S will refreshed just be-
fore, and output bits used for D will be refreshed just after execution.
Source word Destination word
Bit status
not changed.
Abide by the following guidelines when using MOV(030) to transfer data from
the CPU to Special I/O Units.
•Be sure that any require data processing has been completed before execut-
ing the move.
•Be sure that the data being transfer remains stable in memory long enough to
complete the transfer.
•Be sure to allow enough time between transfers to ensure that data processing
is completed.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): Content of D is 0 after execution.
N (A50008): Same status as bit 15 of D after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the content of D00100 is co-
pied into CIO 0005.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 MOV(030) D00100
0005
3D00100 5 2 1
00005 0 0 0
3D00100 5 2 1
30005 5 2 1
Before
execution After
execution
Description
Precautions
Data Movement Instructions Section 5-15
(030)
MOV D00100 0005
0000
00
188
5-15-2 MOVE NOT: MVN(031)
(031)
MVN S D D: Destination CIO, G, A, T, C, DM, DR, IR
S: Source CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j MVN(031)
When the execution condition is OFF, MVN(031) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, MVN(031) transfers the complement of the content of S
(specified word or four-digit hexadecimal constant) to D, i.e., for each ON bit in S ,
the corresponding bit in D is turned OFF, and for each OFF bit in S, the corre-
sponding bit in D is turned ON.
Source word Destination word
Bit status
inverted.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): Content of D is 0 after execution.
N (A50008): Same status as bit 15 of D after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the complement of the con-
tent of D00100 is transferred to the CIO 0002.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 MVN(031) D00100
0002
8D00100 0 1 F
00002 0 0 0
8D00100 0 1 F
70002 F E 0
Before
execution After
execution
Complement
The bit contents of D00100 and its complement are illustrated below:
1000000000011111
801F
D00100
0111111111100000
7FE0
Complement
Description
Data Movement Instructions Section 5-15
(031)
MVN D00100 0002
0000
00
189
5-15-3 DOUBLE MOVE: MOVL(032)
(032)
MOVL S D D: Destination CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
S: Source CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j MOVL(032)
When the execution condition is OFF, MOVL(032) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, MOVL(032) copies the content of S and S+1 to D and
D+1.
S D
Bit status
not changed.
S+1 D+1
Neither D nor S can be the last word in a data area because they designate the
first of two words.
Constants are input using eight digits.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): Content of D and D+1 are 0 after execution.
N (A50008): Same status as bit 15 of D+1 after execution.
Example When CIO 000005 is ON in the following example, the contents of A400 and
A401 are copied into D00200 and D00201, respectively.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000005
00001 MOVL(032) A400
D00200
Before
execution After
execution
3A400 7 0 0
0A401 1 F 9
3A400 7 0 0
0A401 1 F 9
0D00200 0 0 0
0D00201 0 0 0 3D00200 7 0 0
0D00201 1 F 9
Description
Precautions
Data Movement Instructions Section 5-15
(032)
MOVL A400 D00200
0000
05
190
5-15-4 DOUBLE MOVE NOT: MVNL(033)
(033)
MVNL S D D: Destination CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
S: Source CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j MVNL(033)
When the execution condition is OFF, MVNL(033) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, MVNL(033) transfers the complement of the content of
S and S+1 (specified words or eight-digit hexadecimal constant) to D and D+1,
i.e., for each ON bit in S and S+1, the corresponding bit in D and D+1 is turned
OFF, and for each OFF bit in S and S+1, the corresponding bit in D and D+1 is
turned ON.
S DS+1 D+1
Bit status
inverted.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): Content of D and D+1 are 0 after execution.
N (A50008): Same status as bit 15 of D+1 after execution.
Example When CIO 000002 is ON in the following example, the complement of the con-
tents of A400 and A401 are copied into D01500 and D01501, respectively.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000002
00001 MVNL(033) 0120
D01500
CIO 0120 7008
CIO 0121 AFFO
012000 0
012001 0
012002 0
012003 1
D01500 8FF7
D01501 500F
1
1
1
0
012112 0
012113 1
012114 0
012115 1
1
0
1
0
00
01
02
03
12
13
14
15
D01501
D01501
8
A
7
5
Description
Precautions
Data Movement Instructions Section 5-15
0000
02 (033)
MVNL 0120 D01500
191
5-15-5 DATA EXCHANGE: XCHG(034)
(034)
XCHG E1E2E2: 2nd Exchange word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM, DR, IR
E1: 1st Exchange word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j XCHG(034)
When the execution condition is OFF, XCHG(034) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, XCHG(034) exchanges the content of E1 and E2.
E2
E1
If you want to exchange the content of blocks longer than 2 words, use
XCGL(035) and/or XCHG(034) and use work words as an intermediate buffer to
hold one of the blocks.
Data 2Data 1
Buffer Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the content of CIO 0001 is
moved to D00010 and the content of D00010 is moved to CIO 0001.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 XCHG(034) 0001
D00010
ABCDBefore execution 1234
D00010
1234After execution ABCD
D00010
CIO 0001
CIO 0001
Description
Data Movement Instructions Section 5-15
(034)
XCHG 0001 D00010
0000
00
192
5-15-6 DOUBLE DATA EXCHANGE: XCGL(035)
(035)
XCGL E1E2E2: 2nd Exchange word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
E1: 1st Exchange word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j XCGL(035)
When the execution condition is OFF, XCGL(035) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, XCGL(035) exchanges the content of E1 and E1+1 with
that of E2 and E2+1.
E2
E1E1+1 E2+2
If you want to exchange the content of blocks longer than 2 words, use
XCGL(035) and/or XCHG(034) and use work words as an intermediate buffer to
hold one of the blocks.
Data 2Data 1
Buffer Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the contents of CIO 0000 and
CIO 0001 are moved to D01500 and D01501, and the contents D01500 and
D01501 are moved to CIO 0000 and CIO 0001.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 XCGL(035) 1000
D01500
1234 5678 9ABC DEF0
9ABC DEF0 1234
D01501
5678
D01500
CIO 1001 CIO 1000 D01501 D01500
CIO 1001 CIO 1000
Before execution
After execution
Description
Precautions
Data Movement Instructions Section 5-15
(035)
XCGL 1000 D01500
0000
00
193
5-15-7 MOVE TO REGISTER: MOVR(036)
(036)
MOVR S D D: Destination IR
S: Source CIO, G, A, TN, ST, T, C, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j MOVR(036)
When the execution condition is OFF, MOVR(036) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, MOVR(036) copies the PC memory address of word
or bit S to the index register designated in D. The index register must be directly
addressed.
When S contains a timer or counter number, the PC memory bit address of the
timer or counter Completion Flag is copied to the index register. To access the
PC memory address of a timer or counter PV with an index register , move the PC
memory address of the timer or counter PV (#1000 or #1800) to an index register
with MOV(030)
If the index register contains a PC memory address for a timer/counter Comple-
tion Flag, a Transition Flag, or a Step Flag, the leftmost three digits indicate the
PC memory word address, and the rightmost digit indicates the bit.
Precautions Only direct addresses can be used for IR.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): 0000 was placed in the index register.
Example The following example demonstrates the difference between MOV(030) and
MOVR(036). I n the first instruction line, MOVR(036) copies the PC memory ad-
dress of CIO 0020 to IR0 when CIO 000000 is ON. In the second instruction line,
MOV(030) copies the content of CIO 0020 to IR0 when CIO 000000 is ON.
0000
00
0000
00
(036)
MOVR 0020 IR0
1 2 3 4 0 0 1 4
$0014
CIO 0020 IR0
(Address of Wd 0020)
(030)
MOV 0020 IR0
1 2 3 4
$0014
IR0
1 2 3 4
MOV
(Address of Wd 0020)
CIO 0020
Description
Data Movement Instructions Section 5-15
194
5-15-8 MOVE QUICK: MOVQ(037)
(037)
MOVQ S D D: Destination CIO, G, A, T, C
S: Source CIO, G, A, T, C, #
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, MOVQ(037) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, MOVQ(037) copies the content of S to D at high
speed. MOVQ(037) copies the content of S to D at least 10 times faster than
MOV(030).
Source word Destination word
Bit status
not changed.
Flags There are no flags affected by MOVQ(037).
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, 5A00 is copied into CIO 0000.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 MOVQ(037) #5A00
0800
0
080000 0
080002 0
080004 0
080006 0
080007 0
080008 0
080009 1
080010 0
080011 1
080012 1
080013 0
080014 1
080015 0
080001 0
080003 0
080005 0
0
21
25
0
26
0
27
0
0
0
0
20
24
22
23
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
212
214
215
28
29
210
211
213
“0”
“0”
“A”
“5”
D: CIO 0800S: #00A5
Description
Data Movement Instructions Section 5-15
0000
00 (037)
MOVQ #5A00 0800
195
5-15-9 MULTIPLE BIT TRANSFER: XFRB(038)
(038)
XFRB C S D
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
↑XFRB(038)
S: First source word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
C: Control word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
D: First destination word CIO, G, A, DM
When the execution condition is OFF, XFRB(038) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, XFRB(038) transfers specified consecutive bits to a
destination beginning with a specified bit in a specified word.
The address of the beginning bit to be transferred is designated in hexadecimal
(0 to F) in the control word (C). The number of bits to be transferred can be speci-
fied within a range of 0 to 255, in hexadecimal (00 to FF). If “0” is specified, no
data will be transferred.
Number of bits to be transferred (00 to FF)
Control Word Contents
Beginning transfer bit address in source word (0 to F)
Beginning transfer bit address in destination word (0 to F)
Except for the bits that are transferred, none of the contents of the destination
word(s) will be changed.
Precautions Be sure that the last word in the transfer source or transfer destination does not
exceed the data area.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Example 1 When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, eight bits from D00200 (be-
ginning with bit 04) will be transferred to D00500 (beginning with bit 08), accord-
ing to the contents of D00100.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 XFRB(038) D00000
D00200
D00500
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Data Movement Instructions Section 5-15
(038)
XFRB D00000 D00200 D00500
0000
00
196
Number of bits transferred
8 bits
Example 2 When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, 24 bits beginning with bit 12
of D00200 are transferred to D00500 (beginning with bit 08), as specified by the
contents of D00100.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 XFRB(038) D00000
D00200
D00500
Number of bits transferred
24 bits
Data Movement Instructions Section 5-15
(038)
XFRB D00000 D00200 D00500
0000
00
197
5-15-10BLOCK TRANSFER: XFER(040)
Variations
j XFER(040)
(040)
XFER N S D
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
N: Number of words CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
D: 1st destination word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
S: 1st source word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
When the execution condition is OFF, XFER(040) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, XFER(040) copies the contents of S, S+1, ..., S+N to D,
D+1, ..., D+N.
2
D
345
1
D+1
345
2
D+2
342
2
D+N
645
2
S
345
1
S+1
345
2
S+2
342
2
S+N
645
Both S and D may be in the same data area, but their respective block areas
must not overlap. S and S+N must be in the same data area, as must D and D+N.
N must be BCD.
Note 1. For version-2 CVM1 CPUs, transfer source and destination words can over-
lap. This is not possible for other CPUs.
2. Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): N is not BCD.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the contents of CIO 0001
through CIO 0003 are copied into D00010 through D00012, as specified by the
first operand (#0003).
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 XFER(040) #0003
0001
D00010
1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0
F F F F
1 2 3 4D00010
D00011
D00012 0 0 0 0
F F F F
W: #0003 CIO 0001
CIO 0002
CIO 0003
Description
Precautions
Data Movement Instructions Section 5-15
(040)
XFER #0003 0001 D00010
0000
00
198
5-15-11 BLOCK SET: BSET(041)
Variations
j BSET(041)
(041)
BSET S St E
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
S: Source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
E: End word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
St: Starting word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
When the execution condition is O FF, BSET(041) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, BSET(041) copies the content of S to all words from S t
through E.
2
S
3 4 5 2
St
345
2
St+1
345
2
St+2
345
2
E
345
BSET(041) can be used to change timer/counter PV. BSET(041) can also be
used to clear sections of a data area, i.e., the DM area, to prepare for executing
other instructions.
St must be less than or equal to E. St and E must be in the same data area.
The BSET(041) operation might not be completed if a power interruption occurs
during execution of the instruction.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
St is greater than E.
Description
Precautions
Data Movement Instructions Section 5-15
199
The following example shows how to use BSET(041) to change the PV of a timer
depending on the status of CIO 000003 and CIO 000004. When CIO 000003 is
ON, TIM 0010 will operate as a 50-second timer; when CIO 000004 is ON,
TIM 0010 will operate as a 30-second timer.
TIM 0010 #9999
00000 LD 000003
00001 AND NOT 000004
00002 jBSET(041) #0500
T0010
T0010
00003 LD 000004
00004 AND NOT 000003
00005 jBSET(041) #0300
T0010
T0010
00006 LD 000003
00007 OR 000004
00008 TIM 0010
#9999
(041)
jBSET #0500 T0010 T0010
(041)
jBSET #0300 T0010 T0010
0000
04
0000
03
0000
03
0000
04
0000
03
0000
04
Address Instruction Operands
5-15-12MOVE BIT: MOVB(042)
(042)
MOVB S C D
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
↑MOVB(042)
S: Source word or data CIO, G, A, #, DM, DR, IR
C: Control word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
D: Destination word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
When the execution condition is OFF, MOVB(042) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, MOVB(042) transfers a single specified bit from the
source word to the specified bit in the destination word. The other bits in the des-
tination word are not changed.
Source bit (00 to 15)
Destination bit (00 to 15)
Control Word Contents
Source word (S)
Destination word (D)
Precautions C must be BCD and must be within the values specified above.
Flags ER (A50003): Control word content is not BCD.
Rightmost and leftmost eight bits are not 00 to 15.
Content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Example
Description
Data Movement Instructions Section 5-15
200
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the content of bit 02 of the
transfer source word (D00000) is copied to bit 12 of the transfer destination word
(CIO 0005) as specified by the contents (1202) of control word (CIO 0035).
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 MOVB(042) D00000
0035
0005
Specifies bit 12
of word 0005.
Specifies bit 02
of word D00000.
0
000500
000502
00504
000506
000507
000508
000509
0005I0
000511
000512 1
000513
000514
000515
000501
000503
000505
1
01
05
1
06
0
07
1
0
1
0
00
04
02
03
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
12
14
15
08
10
11
13
D00000
1202
CIO 0005
CIO 0035
09
Data Movement Instructions Section 5-15
(042)
MOVB D00000 0035 0005
0000
00
201
5-15-13MOVE DIGIT: MOVD(043)
Variations
j MOVD(043)
(043)
MOVD S Di D
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
S: Source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
D: Destination word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM, DR, IR
Di: Digit designator CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
When the execution condition is OFF, MOVD(043) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, MOVD(043) copies the content of the specified dig-
it(s) in S t o the specified digit(s) in D. Up to four digits can be transferred at one
time. The first digit to be copied, the number of digits to be copied, and the first
digit to receive the copy are designated in Di as shown below. Digits from S will
be copied to consecutive digits in D starting from the designated first digit and
continued for the designated number of digits. If the last digit is reached in either
S or D, further digits are used starting back at digit 0.
First digit in S (0 to 3)
Number of digits (0 to 3)
0: 1 digit
1: 2 digits
2: 3 digits
3: 4 digits
First digit in D (0 to 3)
Digit number: 3210
Not used.
The following show examples of the data movements for various values of Di.
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
S
Di: 0031 Di: 0023
Di: 0030Di: 0010 S
S
S
0
1
2
3
D
0
1
2
3
D
0
1
2
3
D0
1
2
3
D
The rightmost three digits of Di must each be between 0 and 3.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
At least one of the rightmost three digits of Di is not between
0 and 3.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 MOVD(043) D00000
#0201
D00003
Description
Digit Designator
Precautions
Data Movement Instructions Section 5-15
(043)
MOVD D00000 #0201 D00003
0000
00
202
103102101100
0201
56BA
163162161160
B
163162161160
C : #0201
S : D00000
D : D00003
MSB LSB
First digit in S:
Number of digits: 1 digit
First digit in D:
5-15-14SINGLE WORD DISTRIBUTE: DIST(044)
Variations
j DIST(044)
(044)
DIST S DBs Of
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
S: Source data CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Of: Offset data CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
DBs: Destination base CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
When the execution condition is OFF, DIST(044) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, DIST(044) copies the content of S to DBs+Of, i.e.,Of is
added to DBs to determine the destination word.
2
DBs + Of
3452
S
345
Of must be BCD.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Of is not BCD.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): Content of S is 0.
N (A50008): Same status as bit 15 of D+Of after execution.
Example When CIO 000010 is ON in the following example, the content of CIO 0002 is
copied into D00410. The destination word D00410 is determined by adding the
content of C0030 (i.e., 10) to D00400.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000010
00001 DIST(044) 0002
D00400
0030
Description
Precautions
Data Movement Instructions Section 5-15
(044)
DIST 0002 D00400 0030
0000
10
203
Before
execution After
execution
4CIO 0002 5 6 7
0CIO 0030 0 1 0
0D00410 0 0 0
4567
0010
4567
CIO 0002
CIO 0030
D00410
5-15-15DATA COLLECT: COLL(045)
Variations
j COLL(045)
(045)
COLL SBs Of D
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
SBs: Source base CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
D: Destination word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM, DR, IR
Of: Offset data CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
When the execution condition is OFF, COLL(045) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, COLL(045) copies the content of SBs + Of to D, i.e., Of
is added to SBs to determine the source word.
2
D
3452
SBs + Of
345
Of must be BCD.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Of is not BCD.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): Content of S is 0.
N (A50008): Same status as bit 15 of D after execution.
Example When CIO 000005 is ON in the following example, the source word (CIO 0007) i s
calculated by adding 5 (the content of CIO 0020) to the source base word
(CIO 0002). The content of CIO 0007 is then copied to the destination word
(D00200).
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000005
00001 COLL(045) 0002
0020
D00200
Before
execution After
execution
0CIO 0020 0 0 5
4CIO 007 0 9 5
0D00200 0 0 0
0005
4095
4095
CIO 0020
CIO 007
D00200
Description
Precautions
Data Movement Instructions Section 5-15
(045)
COLL 0002 0020 D00200
0000
05
204
5-15-16INTERBANK BLOCK TRANSFER: BXFR(046)
(046)
BXFR C S D
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
↑BXFR(046)
S: First source word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
C: First control word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
D: First destination word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
When the execution condition is OFF, BXFR(046) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, BXFR(046) transfers specified consecutive words from
the source bank to a destination beginning with a specified word in a specified
bank (D).
The number of words to be transferred and the bank numbers are set as BCD
data i n two control words (C and C+1). Make sure that the last word in the trans-
fer source or transfer destination does not exceed the data area.
Control Word Contents
Number of words transferred
1 to 32,766
Dest. bank no. Source bank no. Bank no.: 0 to 7
x103x102x101x100
x104
000
Precautions The source and destination words can both be in same data area, but they must
not overlap.
If the words specified by S and D are not EM words, the specified bank number
will not be valid.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Bank number is not 00 to 07.
No EM for the specified bank number.
Content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, E00010 through E15000
from EM bank 1 are transferred to EM bank 5 beginning with E00011, according
to the contents of D00001 through D00003.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 BXFR(046) D00001
E00010
E00011
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Data Movement Instructions Section 5-15
(046)
BXFR D00001 E00010 E00011
0000
00
205
Bank 1 Bank 5
5-16 Comparison Instructions
Comparison Instructions are used for comparing data. All comparison instruc-
tions affect only the comparison flags and/or results output words. They do not
affect the content of the data being compared.
Refer to page 99 for information explanations on comparison instructions sup-
ported by version-2 CVM1 CPUs.
5-16-1 COMPARE: CMP(020)
Cp2: 2nd compare word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Cp1: 1st compare word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
! CMP(020)
(020)
CMP Cp1Cp2
When the execution condition is OFF, CMP(020) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, CMP(020) compares Cp1 and Cp2 and outputs the re-
sult to the GR, EQ, and LE Flags in the Auxiliary Area.
If !CMP(020) is used, any input bits used for Cp1 and Cp2 are refreshed just be-
fore execution.
CMP(020) is an intermediate instruction, like NOT(010), CMPL(021), and
EQU(025). Intermediate instructions are entered between conditions or be-
tween a condition and a right-hand instruction. Intermediate instructions cannot
be placed at the end of an instruction.
When comparing a value to the PV of a timer or counter, the value must be in
BCD.
Description
Precautions
Comparison Instructions Section 5-16
206
Placing other instructions between CMP(020) and the operation which ac-
cesses the EQ, LE, and GR Flags may change the status of these flags. Be sure
to access them before the desired status is changed.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
GR (A50005): ON if Cp1 is greater than Cp2.
EQ (A50006): ON if Cp1 equals Cp2.
LE (A50007): ON if Cp1 is less than Cp2.
The following example shows how to save the comparison result immediately. If
the content of word 0010 is greater than that of word 1209, bit 000200 is turned
ON; if the two contents are equal, bit 000201 is turned ON; if content of word
0010 is less than that of word 1209, bit 000202 is turned ON. In some applica-
tions, only one of the three OUTs would be necessary, making the use of TR 0
unnecessary. With this type of programming, bits 000200, 000201, and 000202
are changed only when CMP(020) is executed.
00000 LD 000000
00001 CMP(020) 0010
1209
00002 OUT TR0
00003 AND A50005
00004 OUT 000200
00005 LD TR0
00006 AND A50006
00007 OUT 000201
00008 LD TR0
00009 AND A50007
00010 OUT 000202
(020)
CMP 0010 1209
0000
00 A500 0002
00
05(>)
0002
01
0002
02
A500
06(=)
A500
07(<)
TR0 Greater Than
Equal
Less Than
Address Instruction Operands
The following example uses TIM, CMP(020), and the LE Flag (A50007) to pro-
duce outputs at particular times in the timer’s countdown. The timer is started by
turning O N bit 000000. When bit 000000 is OFF, TIM 0010 is reset and the sec-
ond two CMP(020)s are not executed (i.e., executed with OFF execution condi-
tions). Output 000200 is produced after 100 seconds; output 000201, after 200
seconds; output 000202, after 300 seconds; and output 000204, after 500 sec-
onds.
Example 1:
Saving CMP(020) Results
Example 2:
Obtaining Indications
during Timer Operation
Comparison Instructions Section 5-16
207
The branching structure of this diagram is important in order to ensure that
000200, 000201, and 000202 are controlled properly as the timer counts down.
Because all of the comparisons here use the timer’s PV as reference, the other
operand for each CMP(020) must be in 4-digit BCD.
00000 LD 000000
00001 TIM 0010
#5000
00002 CMP(020) T0010
#4000
00003 AND A50007
00004 OUT 000200
00005 LD 000200
00006 CMP(020) T0010
#3000
00007 AND A50007
00008 OUT 000201
00009 LD 000201
00010 CMP(020) T0010
#2000
00011 AND A50007
00012 OUT 000202
00013 LD T0010
00014 OUT 000203
0000
00
(020)
CMP T0010 #4000
A500
07(<)
TIM 0010 #5000
0002
00
0002
01
(020)
CMP T0010 #3000
0002
02
(020)
CMP T0010 #2000
0002
03
0002
00
0002
01
T0010
A500
07(<)
A500
07(<)
Output at
100 s.
Output at
200 s.
Output at
300 s.
Output at
500 s.
Address Instruction Operands
5-16-2 DOUBLE COMPARE: CMPL(021)
Cp2: 2nd compare word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
Cp1: 1st compare word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
(021)
CMPLCp1 Cp2
When the execution condition is OFF, CMPL(021) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, CMPL(021) compares the eight-digit content of Cp1+1
and Cp1 to the eight-digit content of Cp2+1 and Cp2 and outputs the result to the
GR, EQ, and LE Flags in the Auxiliary Area.
CMPL(021) is an intermediate instruction, like CMP(020). Intermediate instruc-
tions are entered between conditions or between a condition and a right-hand
instruction. Intermediate instructions cannot be placed at the end of an instruc-
tion line.
For version-2 CVM1 CPUs models onwards, non-intermediate instructions
CMP(028) and CMPL(029) are standard.
Constants are expressed in eight digits.
When comparing a value to the PVs of timers or counters, the value must be in
BCD.
Placing other instructions between CMPL(021) and the operation which ac-
cesses the EQ, LE, and GR Flags may change the status of these flags. Be sure
to access them before the desired status is changed.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Description
Precautions
Comparison Instructions Section 5-16
208
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
GR (A50005): Cp1+1 and Cp1 is greater than Cp2+1 and Cp2.
EQ (A50006): Cp1+1 and Cp1 equals Cp2+1 and Cp2.
LE (A50007): Cp1+1 and Cp1 is less than Cp2+1 and Cp2.
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the eight-digit content of
CIO 0011 and CIO 0010 is compared to the eight-digit content of CIO 0009 and
CIO 0008 and the result is output to the GR, EQ, and LE Flags. The results re-
corded in the GR, EQ, and LE Flags are immediately saved to CIO 000200
(Greater Than), CIO 000201 (Equals), and CIO 000202 (Less Than).
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 CMPL(021) 0010
0008
00002 OUT TR0
00003 AND A50005
00004 OUT 000200
00005 LD TR0
00006 AND A50006
00007 OUT 000201
00008 LD TR0
00009 AND A50007
00010 OUT 000202
5-16-3 BLOCK COMPARE: BCMP(022)
Variations
j BCMP(022)
(022)
BCMP S CB R CB: 1st block word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
R: Result word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM, DR, IR
S: Source data CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, BCMP(022) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, BCMP(022) compares S to the ranges defined by a
block consisting of of CB, CB+1, CB+2, ..., CB+32. Each range is defined by two
words, the first one providing the lower limit and the second word providing the
upper limit. If S is found to be within any of these ranges (inclusive of the upper
and lower limits), the corresponding bit in R is set. The comparisons that are
made and the corresponding bit in R that is set for each true comparison are
shown below. The rest of the bits in R will be turned OFF.
CB ≤S ≤CB+1 Bit 00
CB+2 ≤S ≤CB+3 Bit 01
CB+4 ≤S ≤CB+5 Bit 02
CB+6 ≤S ≤CB+7 Bit 03
CB+8 ≤S ≤CB+9 Bit 04
CB+10 ≤S ≤CB+11 Bit 05
CB+12 ≤S ≤CB+13 Bit 06
CB+14 ≤S ≤CB+15 Bit 07
CB+16 ≤S ≤CB+17 Bit 08
CB+18 ≤S ≤CB+19 Bit 09
CB+20 ≤S ≤CB+21 Bit 10
CB+22 ≤S ≤CB+23 Bit 11
Example
Description
Comparison Instructions Section 5-16
0000
00 A500
05(>)
A500
06(=)
0002
00
0002
01
A500
07(<) 0002
02
TR0
(021)
CMPL 0010 0008
209
CB+24 ≤S ≤CB+25 Bit 12
CB+26 ≤S ≤CB+27 Bit 13
CB+28 ≤S ≤CB+29 Bit 14
CB+30 ≤S ≤CB+31 Bit 15
Each lower limit word in the comparison block must be less than or equal to the
upper limit.
CB cannot be one of the last 31 words in a data area because it designates the
first of 32 words.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): Content of R is zero after execution.
The following example shows the comparisons made and the results provided
for BCMP(022). Here, the comparison is made during each scan when
CIO 000000 is ON.
S: 0001 Lower limits Upper limits R: 1205
0001 0210 1210 0000 1211 0100 120500 0
1212 0101 1213 0200 120501 0
1214 0201 1215 0300 120502 1
1216 0301 1217 0400 120503 0
1218 0401 1219 0500 120504 0
1220 0501 1221 0600 120505 0
1222 0601 1223 0700 120506 0
1224 0701 1225 0800 120507 0
1226 0801 1227 0900 120508 0
1228 0901 1229 1000 120509 0
1230 1001 1231 1100 120510 0
1232 1101 1233 1200 120511 0
1234 1201 1235 1300 120512 0
1236 1301 1237 1400 120513 0
1238 1401 1239 1500 120514 0
1240 1501 1241 1600 120515 0
Compare data in 0001
(which contains 0210)
with the given ranges.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 BCMP(022) 0001
1210
1205
0000
00 (022)
BCMP 0001 1210 1205
Precautions
Example
Comparison Instructions Section 5-16
210
5-16-4 TABLE COMPARE: TCMP(023)
Variations
j TCMP(023)
(023)
TCMP S TB R TB: 1st table word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
R: Result word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM, DR, IR
S: Source data CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, TCMP(023) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, TCMP(023) compares S to the content of TB, TB+1,
TB+2, ..., and TB+15. If S is equal to the content of any of these words, the corre-
sponding bit in R is turned ON, i.e., if S equals the content of TB, bit 00 is turned
ON, if it equals the content of TB+1, bit 01 is turned ON, etc. The rest of the bits in
R will be turned OFF.
TB cannot be one of the last 15 words in a data area because it designates the
first of 16 words.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): Content of R is zero after execution.
The following example shows the comparisons made and the results provided
for TCMP(023). Here, the comparison is made during each scan when CIO
000000 is ON.
00000 LD 000000
00001 TCMP(023) 0001
1210
1205
S: 0001 Compare table R: 1205
0001 0210 1210 0100 120500 0
1211 0200 120501 0
1212 0210 120502 1
1213 0400 120503 0
1214 0500 120504 0
1215 0600 120505 0
1216 0210 120506 1
1217 0800 120507 0
1218 0900 120508 0
1219 1000 120509 0
1220 0210 120510 1
1221 1200 120511 0
1222 1300 120512 0
1223 1400 120513 0
1224 0210 120514 1
1225 1600 120515 0
Compare the data in
CIO 0001 with the given
values.
0000
00 (023)
TCMP 0001 1210 1205 Address Instruction Operands
Description
Precautions
Example
Comparison Instructions Section 5-16
211
5-16-5 MULTIPLE COMPARE: MCMP(024)
Variations
j MCMP(024)
(024)
MCMP TB1TB2RTB2: 2nd table word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
TB1: 1st table word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, MCMP(024) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, MCMP(024) compares the contents of the 16 words
TB1 through TB1+15 to the contents of the 16 words TB2 through TB2+15, and
turns ON the corresponding bit in word R when the contents are not equal. The
content of TB1 is compared to the content of TB2, the content of TB1+1 to the
content o f T B 2+1, ..., and the content of TB 1+15 to the content of TB2+15. If the
content of TB1+n is equal to the content of TB2+n, bit n of R is turned ON, if the
contents are not equal, bit n of R is turned OFF.
TB1 and TB2 cannot be one of the last 15 words in a data area because they
designate the first of 16 words.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): Content of R is zero after execution (i.e., if the contents of
TB1 through TB1+15 and TB2 through TB2+15 are identical)
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, words from CIO 1001 through
CIO 1016 are compared in order to words from D20005 through D20020 and
corresponding bits in CIO 2001 are turn ON when for any pairs of values that are
not equal.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 MCMP(024) 1001
D20005
2001
0628
ABCD
50FC
0628
AB56
50FC
CIO 1001
CIO 1002
to
CIO 1016
D20005
D20006
D20020
to
00
01
15
0
1
0
to
CIO 2001
Description
Precautions
Comparison Instructions Section 5-16
(024)
MCMP 1001 D20005 2001
0000
00
212
5-16-6 EQUAL: EQU(025)
(025)
EQU Cp1Cp2Cp2: 2nd compare word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Cp1: 1st compare word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j EQU(025)
When the execution condition is OF F, EQU(025) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, EQU(025) compares the content of Cp 1 to the content of
Cp2 and creates an ON execution condition if the two values are equal or it
creates an OFF execution condition if they are not equal.
EQU(025) is an intermediate instruction, like NOT(010), CMP(020), and
CMPL(021). Intermediate instructions are entered between conditions or be-
tween a condition and a right-hand instruction. Intermediate instructions cannot
be placed at the end of an instruction line.
The up-differentiated version of EQU(025) behaves like the undifferentiated ver-
sion when Cp1 is equal to Cp2 and will turn OFF for one scan only when Cp1 is
not equal to Cp2.
EQU Cp1Cp2
EQU Cp1Cp2
jEQU Cp1Cp2
A
A
j
A
B1
B2
B3
A
B1
B2
B3
A
B1
B2
B3
1 scan
1 scan
When Cp1 is equal to Cp2.When Cp1 is not equal to Cp2.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Description
Comparison Instructions Section 5-16
213
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the content of CIO 0010 is
compared to the content of D05000 and MOV(030) and INC(090) are executed
only if the contents are the same.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 EQU(025) 0010
D05000
00002 MOV(030) 0101
D05001
00003 INC(090) 0100
5-16-7 Input Comparison Instructions (300 to 328)
(***)
Mnemonic S1 S2
Ladder Symbol Operand Data Areas
S1: Comparison data 1 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
S2: Comparison data 2 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
When the execution condition is OFF, input comparison instructions are not
executed and execution continues to the remainder of the instruction line. When
the execution is ON, input comparison instructions compare constants and/or
the contents of specified words for either signed or unsigned data and will create
an ON execution condition when the comparison condition is met. If the compar-
ison condition is not met, the remainder of the instruction line will be skipped and
execution will move to the next instruction line.
A total of 24 input comparison instructions are available. These can be input us-
ing various combinations of symbols and options. If no options are specified, th e
comparison will be for one-word unsigned data.
Symbol Option (data format) Option (data length)
= (Equal)
< > (Not equal)
< (Less than)
<= (Less than or equal)
> (Greater than)
>= (Greater than or equal)
S (signed data) L (double length)
Unsigned input comparison instructions (i.e., instructions without the S option)
can handle unsigned binary or BCD data. Signed input comparison instructions
(i.e., instructions with the S option) handle signed binary data.
When using input comparison instructions, follow each input comparison
instruction in the program with another instruction on the same instruction line.
The following table shows the function codes, mnemonics, names, and func-
tions of the input comparison instructions.
Code Mnemonic Name Function
300 = EQUAL TRUE WHEN S1 = S2
301 =L DOUBLE EQUAL
1 2
302 =S SIGNED EQUAL
303 =SL DOUBLE SIGNED EQUAL
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Comparison Instructions Section 5-16
0000
00 (030)
MOV 0101 D05001
(025)
EQU 0010 D05000
(090)
INC 0100
214
Code FunctionNameMnemonic
305 <> NOT EQUAL TRUE WHEN S1 ≠ S2
306 <>L DOUBLE NOT EQUAL
1 2
307 <>S SIGNED NOT EQUAL
308 <>SL DOUBLE SIGNED NOT
EQUAL
310 < LESS THAN TRUE WHEN S1 < S2
311 <L DOUBLE LESS THAN
1 2
312 <S SIGNED LESS THAN
313 <SL DOUBLE SIGNED LESS
THAN
315 <= LESS THAN OR EQUAL TRUE WHEN S1 S2
316 <=L DOUBLE LESS THAN OR
EQUAL
12
317 <=S SIGNED LESS THAN OR
EQUAL
318 <=SL DOUBLE SIGNED LESS
THAN OR EQUAL
320 > GREATER THAN TRUE WHEN S1 > S2
321 >L DOUBLE GREATER THAN
1 2
322 >S SIGNED GREATER THAN
323 >SL DOUBLE SIGNED GREATER
THAN
325 >= GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TRUE WHEN S1 S2
326 >=L DOUBLE GREATER THAN
OR EQUAL
12
327 >=S SIGNED GREATER THAN
OR EQUAL
328 >=SL DOUBLE SIGNED GREATER
THAN OR EQUAL
Input comparison instructions cannot be used as right-hand instructions, i.e.,
another instruction must be used between them and the right bus bar.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Example < (310)
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the contents of D00100 and
D00200 are compared in as binary data. If the contents of D00100 is less than
that of D00200, CIO 005000 is turned ON and execution proceeds to the next
line. I f the content of D00100 is not less than that of D00200, the remainder of the
instruction line is skipped and execution moves to the next instruction line.
When CIO 000000 is OFF, CIO 005000 is turned OFF.
<S(312)
When CIO 000001 is ON in the following example, the contents of D00110 and
D00210 are compared as binary data. If the content of D00110 is less than that of
D00210, CIO 005001 is turned ON and execution proceeds to the next line. If t he
content o f D00110 is not less than that of D00210, the remainder of the instruc-
tion line is skipped and execution moves to the next instruction line.
Precautions
Comparison Instructions Section 5-16
215
When CIO 000001 is OFF, CIO 005001 is turned OFF.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 <(310) D00100
D00200
00002 LD 000001
00003 <S(312) D00110
D00210
8714
S1: D00100
Decimal: 34580 3A1C
S2: D00200
Decimal: 14876
34580 > 14876
(Will not proceed to next line.)
Comparison
without sign (<)
Comparison
with sign (<S) 8714
S1: D00110
Decimal: -30956 3A1C
S2: D00210
Decimal: 14876
-30956 > 14876
(Will proceed to next line.)
5-16-8 SIGNED BINARY COMPARE: CPS(026)
(026)
CPS S1 S2
Ladder Symbol
Variations
! CPS(026)
Operand Data Areas
S1: Comparison word 1 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
S2: Comparison word 2 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
When the execution condition is OFF, CPS(026) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, CPS(026) compares constants and/or the contents of
specified words as signed 16-bit binary data and changes the status of compari-
son flags according to the results.
After CPS(026) execution, the A50005 (GR), A50006 (EQ), and A50007 (LE)
Flags will turn ON and OFF as shown in the following table.
Comparison result A50005
(GR) A50006
(EQ) A50007
(LE)
S1 > S2ON OFF OFF
S1 = S2OFF ON OFF
S1 < S2OFF OFF ON
The range that can be specified for comparison is 8000 to 7FFF (i.e., -32,768 to
32,767 in decimal).
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
GR (A40213), EQ (A50006), LE (A50007): (Refer to tables above.)
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Comparison Instructions Section 5-16
(312)
<S D00110 D00210
(310)
< D00100 D00200
0000
00
0000
01
0050
00
0050
01
216
5-16-9 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY COMPARE: CPSL(027)
(027)
CPSL S1 S2
Ladder Symbol Operand Data Areas
S1: First comparison word 1 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM,
S2: First comparison word 2 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM,
When the execution condition is O FF, CPSL(027) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, CPSL(027) compares constants and/or the contents of
specified sets of words as signed 32-bit binary data and changes the status of
comparison flags according to the results. The content of S1 and S1+1 is
compared to that of S2 and S2+1.
After CPSL(027) execution, the A50005 (GR), A50006 (EQ), and A50007 (LE)
flags turn ON and OFF as shown in the following table.
Comparison result A50005 (GR) A50006 (EQ) A50007 (LE)
S1 + 1, S1 > S2 + 1, S2ON OFF OFF
S1 + 1, S1 = S2 + 1, S2OFF ON OFF
S1 + 1, S1 < S2 + 1, S2OFF OFF ON
The range that can be specified for comparison is 80000000 to 7FFFFFFF (i.e.,
-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 in decimal).
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
GR (A40213), EQ (A50006), LE (A50007): (Refer to tables above.)
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the content of D00002 and
D00001 is compared with the content of D00006 and D00005 as signed binary
data.
•If the content of D00002 and D00001 is greater than that of D00006 and
D00005, then A50005 (GR) will turn ON, causing CIO 002000 to be turned
ON.
•If the content of D00002 and D00001 is equal to that of D00006 and D00005,
then A50006 (EQ) will turn ON, causing CIO 002001 to be turned ON.
•If the content of D00002 and D00001 is less than that of D00006 and D00005,
then A50007 (LE) will turn ON, causing CIO 002002 to be turned ON.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 CPSL(027) D00001
D00005
00002 AND A50005
00003 OUT 002000
00004 AND A50006
00005 OUT 00201
00006 AND A50007
00007 OUT 002002
0124
D00002 D00001
805C
D00006 D00005
23BD AF82
Comparison
Comparison Results
A50005 (GR) ON
A50006 (EQ) OFF
A50007 (LE) OFF
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Comparison Instructions Section 5-16
(027)
CPSL D00001 D00005
0000
00
0020
00
A50005
(GR)
0020
01
A50006
(EQ)
0020
02
A50007
(LE)
217
5-16-10UNSIGNED COMPARE: CMP(028)
Ladder Symbol
Variations
! CMP(028)
Operand Data Areas
S1: Comparison word 1 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
S2: Comparison word 2 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
(028)
CMP S1 S2
When the execution condition is OFF, CMP(028) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, CMP(028) compares constants and/or the contents of
specified words as unsigned 16-bit binary data and changes the status of com-
parison flags according to the results.
After CMP(028) execution, the A50005 (GR), A50006 (EQ), and A50007 (LE)
flags turn ON and OFF as shown in the following table.
Comparison result A50005 (GR) A50006 (EQ) A50007 (LE)
S1 > S2ON OFF OFF
S1 = S2OFF ON OFF
S1 < S2OFF OFF ON
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
GR (A40213), EQ (A50006), LE (A50007): (Refer to tables above.)
5-16-11 DOUBLE UNSIGNED COMPARE: CMPL(029)
(029)
CMPL S1 S2
Ladder Symbol Operand Data Areas
S1: First comparison word 1 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM,
S2: First comparison word 2 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM,
When the execution condition is OFF, CMPL(029) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, CMPL(029) compares constants and/or the contents of
specified sets of words as unsigned 32-bit data and changes the status of com-
parison flags according to the results. The content of S1 and S1+1 is compared
to that of S2 and S2+1.
After CMPL(029) execution, the A50005 (GR), A50006 (EQ), and A50007 (LE)
flags turn ON and OFF as shown in the following table.
Comparison result A50005 (GR) A50006 (EQ) A50007 (LE)
S1 + 1, S1 > S2 + 1, S2ON OFF OFF
S1 + 1, S1 = S2 + 1, S2OFF ON OFF
S1 + 1, S1 < S2 + 1, S2OFF OFF ON
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
GR (A40213), EQ (A50006), LE (A50007): (Refer to tables above.)
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the content of CIO 0011 and
CIO 0010 is compared with that of CIO 0009 and CIO 0008 as binary data.
•If the content of CIO 0011 and CIO 0010 is greater than that of CIO 0009 and
CIO 0008, then output CIO 002000 will turn ON.
•If the content of CIO 0011 and CIO 0010 is equal to that of CIO 0009 and
CIO 0008, then output CIO 002001 will turn ON.
Description
Description
(CVM1 V2)
(CVM1 V2)
Comparison Instructions Section 5-16
218
•If the content of CIO 0011 and CIO 0010 is less than that of CIO 0009 and
CIO 0008, then output CIO 002002 will turn ON.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 CMPL(029) 0010
0008
00002 AND A50005
00003 OUT 002000
00004 AND A50006
00005 OUT 00201
00006 AND A50007
00007 OUT 002002
1234
S1 + 1 = 0011 ABCD
5678 EF12
Comparison
S1 + 1 = 0010 S2 + 1 = 0009 S2 + 1 = 0008
Comparison Results
A50005 (GR) OFF
A50006 (EQ) OFF
A50007 (LE) ON
Comparison Instructions Section 5-16
(029)
CMPL 0010 0008
0000
00
0020
00
A50005
(GR)
0020
01
A50006
(EQ)
0020
02
A50007
(LE)
(100)
BIN D00010 D00011
0000
00
219
5-17 Conversion Instructions
The Conversion Instructions convert word data that is in one format into another
format and output the converted data to specified result word(s). All of these
instructions change only the content of the words to which converted data is be-
ing moved, i.e., the content of source words is the same before and after execu-
tion of any of the conversion instructions. Refer to
5-26 Time Instructions
for
instructions that convert between different time formats.
5-17-1BCD-TO-BINARY: BIN(100)
(100)
BIN S R R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
S: Source word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j BIN(100)
When the execution condition is OFF, BIN(100) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, BIN(100) converts the BCD content of S into the nu-
merically equivalent binary bits, and outputs the binary value to R. Only the con-
tent of R is changed; the content of S is left unchanged.
S
R
BCD
Binary
BIN(100) can be used to convert BCD to binary so that displays on Peripheral
Devices will appear in hexadecimal rather than decimal. It can also be used to
convert to binary to perform binary arithmetic operations rather than BCD arith-
metic operations, e.g., when BCD and binary values must be added.
S must be BCD.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): S or content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): 0 has been placed in R
N (A50008): OFF
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the content of D00010 is con-
verted from BCD to binary and stored into D00011. The content of D00010 is left
unchanged.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 BIN(100) D00010
D00011
4D00010 0 9 5
0D00011 0 0 0
4D00010 0 9 5
0D00011 F F F
befor
execution after
execution
Description
Precautions
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
(101)
BCD D00150 D00160
0000
06
220
The bit contents of words D00010 and D00011 after execution are:
0100000010010101
4095
D00010
0000111111111111
0FFF
D00011
5-17-2BINARY-TO-BCD: BCD(101)
(101)
BCD S R R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
S: Source word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j BCD(101)
When the execution condition is OFF, BCD(101) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, BCD(101) converts the binary (hexadecimal) content
of S into the numerically equivalent BCD digits and outputs the BCD bits to R.
Only the content of R is changed; the content of S is left unchanged.
S
R
BCD
Binary
BCD(101) can be used to convert binary to BCD so that displays on a Peripheral
Device will appear in decimal rather than hexadecimal. It can also be used to
convert to BCD to perform BCD arithmetic operations rather than binary arith-
metic operations, e.g., when BCD and binary values must be added.
If the content of S exceeds 270F, the converted result will exceed 9999,
BCD(101) will not be executed, and the Error Flag (A50003) will be turned ON.
When the instruction is not executed, the content of R remains unchanged.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Content of S exceeds 270F.
EQ (A50006): 0 has been placed in R
Example When C I O 0 0 0006 is ON in the following example, the content of word D00150 is
converted from binary to BCD and stored in D00160. The content of D00150 is
left unchanged.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000006
00001 BCD(101) D00150
D00160
Description
Precautions
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
(102)
BINL 0010 D00200
0000
00
221
0D00150 F F F
0D00160 0 0 0
0D00150 F F F
4D00160 0 9 5
Before
execution After
execution
The bit contents of words D00150 and D00160 after execution are:
0000111111111111
0FFF
D00150
0100000010010101
4095
D00160
5-17-3DOUBLE BCD-TO-DOUBLE BINARY: BINL(102)
(102)
BINL S R R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM
S: Source word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j BINL(102)
When the execution condition is OFF, BINL(102) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, BINL(102) converts an 8-digit BCD number in S and
S+1 into 32-bit binary data, and outputs the converted data to R and R+1.
S + 1 S
R + 1 R
BCD
Binary
S and S+1 must be BCD.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of S or S+1 is not BCD.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): 0 has been placed in R.
N (A50008): OFF
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the BCD value in CIO 0010
and CIO 0010 is converted to a hexadecimal (binary) value and stored in
D00200 and D00201.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 BINL(102) 0010
D00200
Description
Precautions
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
(103)
BCDL 0010 D00100
0000
00
222
0 0 2 0 0 0 5 0
x103 x102 x101 x100
x107 x106 x105 x104
0 0 0 3 0 D 7 2
x163 x162 x161 x160
x167 x166 x165 x164
S+1: CIO 0011 S: CIO 0010
R+1: D00201 R: D00200
200050=3X164+13X162+7X161+2X160
5-17-4DOUBLE BINARY-TO-DOUBLE BCD: BCDL(103)
(103)
BCDL S R R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM
S: Source word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j BCDL(103)
When the execution condition is OFF, BCDL(103) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, BCDL(103) converts the 32-bit binary content of S
and S+1 into eight digits of BCD data and outputs the converted data to R and
R+1.
S + 1 S
R + 1 R
BCD
Binary
If the content of S exceeds 05F5E0FF, the converted result will exceed
99999999, BCDL(103) will not be executed, and the Error Flag (A50003) will be
turned ON. When the instruction is not executed, the content of R and R+1 re-
main unchanged.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Content of S and S+1 exceeds 05F5E0FF.
EQ (A50006): 0 has been placed in R
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the hexadecimal value in
CIO 0011 and CIO 0010 is converted to a BCD value and stored in D00200 and
D00201.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 BCDL(103) 0010
D00100
Description
Precautions
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
(104)
NEG 0005 D00020
0000
08
223
3 2 0 A
0 0 2 D
x167x166x165 x164
S+1: CIO 0011 S: CIO 0010
x163x162x161 x160
1 9 3 0
0 2 9 6
x107x106x105 x104x103x102x101x100
2X165+13X164+3X163+2X162+10=2961930
R+1: D00101 R: D00100
MBS
MBS LSB
LSB
5-17-52’S COMPLEMENT: NEG(104)
(104)
NEG S R R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
S: Source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j NEG(104)
When the execution condition is OFF, NEG(104) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, NEG(104) converts the 4-digit hexadecimal content
of the source word (S) to its 2’s complement and outputs the result to the result
word (R). This operation is effectively the same as subtracting S from $0000 and
outputting the result to R.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): Content of S is 0 (the content of R will also be 0 after execu-
tion)
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of R after execution.
Example When CIO 000008 is ON in the following example, the 4-digit hexadecimal con-
tent of CIO 0005 is converted to its 2’s complement equivalent and stored in
D00020.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000008
00001 NEG(104) 0005
D00020
00005 0 0 1
0D00020 0 0 0
00005 0 0 1
FD00020 F F F
befor
execution after
execution
The bit contents of word 0005 and word D00020 after execution is as follows.
0000000000000001
0001
0005
1111111111111111
FFFF
D00020
Description
Precautions
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
(105)
NEGL 0800 D01100
0000
00
224
5-17-6DOUBLE 2’S COMPLEMENT: NEGL(105)
(105)
NEGL S R R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
S: 1st source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j NEGL(105)
When the execution condition is OFF, NEGL(105) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, NEGL(105) converts the 8-digit hexadecimal content
of the source words (S and S+1) to its 2’s complement and outputs the result to
the result words (R and R+1). This operation is e ffectively the same as subtract-
ing the 8-digit content S and S+1 from $0000 0000 and outputting the result to R
and R+1.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): Content of S and S+1 is 0 (the content of R and R+1 will also
be 0 after execution)
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of R+1 after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the 8-digit hexadecimal con-
tent of CIO 0000 and CIO 0001 is converted to its 2’s complement equivalent
and stored in D01100 and D01101.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 NEGL(105) 0800
D01100
F F F F F F F F
x103 x102 x101 x100
x107 x106 x105 x104
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
S+1: CIO 0801 S: CIO 0800
#00000000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
R+1: D01101 R: D00100
Description
Precautions
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
(106)
SIGN D00500 D01000
0000
00
225
5-17-7SIGN: SIGN(106)
(106)
SIGN S R R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
S: Source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j SIGN(106)
When the execution condition is OFF, SIGN(106) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, SIGN(106) copies the 4-digit signed binary source
word (S) to R, extracts the sign from bit 15 of S, and outputs the result to R+1. If
bit 15 of S is ON, $FFFF is output to R+1, and if bit 15 of S is OFF, $0000 is output
to R+1. Refer to
3-2 Data Area Structure
for details on signed data.
In the following example, the content of S is 8000, so 8000 is transferred to R and
FFFF is transferred to R+1 because bit 15 of S is ON.
Source word (S)
1000000000000000
The content of S is
transferred “as is” to R.
1st result word (R)
1000000000000000
2
nd result word (R+1)
1111111111111111
If bit 15 of S is 1, FFFF is transferred to R+1.
If bit 15 of S is 0, 0000 is transferred to R+1.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): Content of R and R+1 is 0 after execution
N (A50008): Content of R+1 is FFFF after execution.
Example When t h e CI O 000000 is ON in the following example, the 4-digit signed content
of D00500 is copied to D01000 and the sign from bit 15 of D00500 is output to bit
15 of D01001.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 SIGN(106) D00500
D01000
8000
8 0 0 0F F F F
1 0 0 0
8
“1”
MSB
#FFFF
S: D00500
R: D01000R+1: D01001
Description
Precautions
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
226
5-17-8DATA DECODER: MLPX(110)
Variations
j MLPX(110)
(110)
MLPX S Di R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
S: Source word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM, DR, IR
R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM,
Di: Digit designator CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
When the execution condition is OFF, MLPX(110) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, MLPX(110) can be used to convert either 4-bit units
or 8-bit units. The type of conversion used is specified in the leftmost bit of Di.
For 4-bit conversion, MLPX(110) converts up to four 4-bit hexadecimal digits
from S into decimal values from 0 to 15, each of which is used to indicate a bit
position. The bit whose number corresponds to each converted value is then
turned O N i n a result word. If more than one digit is specified, then one bit will be
turned ON in each of consecutive words beginning with R. (See examples, be-
low.)
The following is an example of a one-digit decode operation from digit number 1
of S, i.e., here Di would be 0001.
Source word
First result word
C
0001000000000000
Bit C (i.e., bit number 12) turned ON.
For 8-bit conversion, MLPX(110) converts up to two 8-bit digits from S into deci-
mal values from 0 to 255, each of which is used to indicate a bit position in con-
secutive result words. The bit corresponding to each converted value counting
from the first result word is turned ON in the result words. If more than one digit is
specified, then one bit will be turned ON in each set of consecutive words begin-
ning with R. (See examples, below.)
The following is an example of a one-digit decode operation from digit number 1
of S, i.e., here Di would be 1001.
Source word
First result word: R
12
0000000000000000
18th bit (12 hex is 18 decimal) turned ON.
R + 1
0100000000000000
The first digit and the number of digits to be converted are designated in Di. If
more digits are designated than remain in S (counting from the designated first
digit), the remaining digits will be taken starting back at the beginning of S.
Description
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
227
The digits of Di are set as shown below.
Specifies the first digit to be converted
4-to-16: 0 to 3
8-to-256: 0 or 1
Number of digits to be converted
4-to-16: 0 to 3 (1 to 4 digits)
8-to-256: 0 or 1 (1 or 2 digits)
Process
0: 4-to-16
1: 8-to-256
Digit number: 3210
0
Some example Di values and the digit-to-word conversions that they produce
are shown below for 4-bit conversion.
0
1
2
3
R
R + 1
R
R + 1
R + 2
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
R
R + 1
R + 2
R + 3
R
R + 1
R + 2
R + 3
S
Di: 0031 Di: 0023
Di: 0030Di: 0010 S
S
S
Some example Di values and the digit-to-word conversions that they produce
are shown below for 8-bit conversion.
0
1
R
R + 1
etc.
R+15
R+16
R+17
etc.
R+31
SDi: 1011Di: 1010
0
1
R
R + 1
etc.
R+15
R+16
R+17
etc.
R+31
S
The rightmost two digits of Di must each be between 0 and 3; the leftmost digit
must be 0 to 1.
All result words must be in the same data area. MLPX(110) requires either 4 or
32 result words, depending on the type of conversion performed.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Improper digit designator.
Digit Designator
Precautions
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
228
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, three digits of data from
CIO 0020 is converted to bit positions and the corresponding bits in three con-
secutive words starting with D 00100 are turned ON to indicate the position of th e
ON bits.
00000 LD 000000
00001 MLPX(110) 0200
#0021
1210
0000
00 (110)
MLPX 0020 #0021 1210 Address Instruction Operands
S: 0020 R: D00100 R+1: D00101 R+2: D00102
Bit 00 20 00 0 00 0 00 1
Bit 01 21 01 0 01 0 01 0
Bit 02 22 02 0 02 0 02 0
Bit 03 23 03 0 03 0 03 0
Bit 04 1 20 04 0 04 0 04 0
Bit 05 1 21 1 05 0 05 0 05 0
Bit 06 1 22 06 0 06 1 06 0
Bit 07 1 23 07 0 07 0 07 0
Bit 08 0 20 08 0 08 0 08 0
Bit 09 1 21 2 09 0 09 0 09 0
Bit 10 1 22 10 0 10 0 10 0
Bit 11 0 23 11 0 11 0 11 0
Bit 12 0 20 12 0 12 0 12 0
Bit 13 0 21 3 13 0 13 0 13 0
Bit 14 0 22 14 0 14 0 14 0
Bit 15 0 23 15 1 15 0 15 0
15
6
0
Not
Converted
5-17-9DATA ENCODER: DMPX(111)
Variations
j DMPX(111)
(111)
DMPX SB R Di
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
SB: 1st source word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
Di: Digit designator CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
When the execution condition is OFF, DMPX(111) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, DMPX(111) can be used to convert either 16-bit units
(2 words) or 256-bit units (32 words). The type of conversion used is specified in
the leftmost bit of Di.
Example
Description
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
229
For 16-bit conversion, DMPX(111) determines the position of the highest ON bit
in SB, encodes it into one-digit hexadecimal value corresponding to the bit num-
ber of the highest ON bit, then transfers the hexadecimal value to the specified
4-bit digit in R. The digits to receive the results are specified in Di, which also
specifies the number of digits to be encoded.
The following is an example of a one-digit encode operation to digit number 1 of
R, i.e., here Di would be 0001.
Result word
First source word
C
0001000100010110
C transferred to indicate bit number 12 as
the highest ON bit.
For 256-bit conversion, DMPX(111) determines the position of the highest ON
bit in SB to SB+15, encodes it into two-digit hexadecimal value corresponding to
the bit number of the highest ON bit, then transfers the hexadecimal value to the
specified 8-bit digit in R. The first digit to receive the results is specified in Di,
which also specifies the number of digits to be encoded.
The following is an example of a one-digit encode operation to digit number 1 of
R, i.e., here Di would be 1001.
Result word
First source word: SB
12
0000000000000000
12 transferred to indicate that the 18th bit
is the highest ON bit.
SB + 1
0100000000000000
The number of digits (words) to be encoded and the first digit to receive con-
verted data are specified in Di. If more digits are designated than remain in R
(counting from the designated first digit), the remaining digits will be placed at
digits starting back at the beginning of R.
The final word(s) to be converted must be in the same data area as SB.
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
230
The digits of Di are set as shown below.
Specifies the first digit to receive converted data
16-to-4: 0 to 3
256-to-8: 0 or 1
Number of digits to be converted
16-to-4: 0 to 3 (1 to 4 digits)
256-to-8: 0 or 1 (1 or 2 digits)
Encoding bit (See note.)
0: Leftmost bit
1: Rightmost bit
Process
0: 16-to-4
1: 256-to-8
Digit number: 3210
Note The encoding bit can be specified for version-2 CVM1 CPUs only. For earlier
CPUs, only the leftmost bit can be encoded.
Some example Di values and the word-to-digit conversions that they produce
are shown below for 16-bit conversion.
0
1
2
3
R
Di: 0011
S
S + 1 0
1
2
3
S
S + 1
S + 2
S + 3
Di: 0030 R
S
S + 1
S + 2
S + 3
0
1
2
3
Di: 0032 R
Di: 0013
0
1
2
3
S
S + 1
R
Some example Di values and the digit-to-word conversions that they produce
are shown below for 256-bit conversion.
0
1
R
R + 1
etc.
R+15
R+16
R+17
etc.
R+31
SDi: 1011Di: 1010
0
1
R
R + 1
etc.
R+15
R+16
R+17
etc.
R+31
S
The rightmost two digits of Di must each be between 0 and 3.
All source words must be in the same data area. DMPX(111) requires either 4 or
32 source words, depending on the type of conversion performed.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Improper digit designator.
Content of a source word is 0.
Digit Designator
Precautions
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
231
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the bit positions of the highest
ON bits in CIO 0010 and 0011 are written to the first two digits of CIO 0020 and
the bit positions of the highest ON bits in CIO 0015 and CIO 0016 are written to
the last two digits of 0020.
0010
01000
:
01011 1
01012 0
: : :
01015 0
0015
001500
001501 1
001502 0
: : :
: : :
001515 0
Digit 0
0011
01100
:
01109 1
01110 0
: : :
01115 0
Digit 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
B
9
1
8
0016
001600
:
001608 1
001609 0
: : :
001615 0
0020
(111)
DMPX 0010 0020 #0010
0000
00
(111)
DMPX 0015 0020 #0012
00000 LD 000000
00001 DMPX(111) 0010
0020
#0010
00002 DMPX(111) 0015
0020
#0012
Address Instruction Operands
5-17-10 7-SEGMENT DECODER: SDEC(112)
Variations
j SDEC(112)
(112)
SDEC S Di D
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
S: Source word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM, DR, IR
D: 1st destination word CIO, G, A, DM
Di: Digit designator CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
When the execution condition is OFF, SDEC(112) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, SDEC(112) converts the designated digit(s) of S into
an 8-bit, 7-segment display code and places it into the destination word(s) be-
ginning with D.
Any or all of the digits in S may be converted in sequence from the designated
first digit. The first digit, the number of digits to be converted, and the half of D to
receive the first 7-segment display code (rightmost or leftmost 8 bits) are desig-
nated in Di. If multiple digits are designated, they will be placed in order starting
from the designated half of D, each requiring two digits. If more digits are desig-
nated than remain in S (counting from the designated first digit), further digits will
be used starting back at the beginning of S.
Example
Description
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
232
The digits of Di are set as shown below.
Specifies the first digit to receive converted data (0 to 3).
Number of digits to be converted (0 to 3)
0: 1 digit
1: 2 digits
2: 3 digits
3: 4 digits
First half of D to be used.
0: Rightmost 8 bits (1st half)
1: Leftmost 8 bits (2nd half)
Not used; set to 0.
Digit number: 3210
Some example Di values and the 4-bit binary to 7-segment display conversions
that they produce are shown below.
0
1
2
3
S digitsDi: 0011 D 0
1
2
3
Di: 0030
S digits
0
1
2
3
Di: 0130
S digits
Di: 0112
0
1
2
3
S digits
1st half
2nd half
D
1st half
2nd half
D+1
1st half
2nd half
D
1st half
2nd half
D+1
1st half
2nd half
D
1st half
2nd half
D+1
1st half
2nd half
D+2
1st half
2nd half
Di must be within the values given below.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Improper digit designator.
The following example shows the data to produce data for an “8.” The lower case
letters show which bits correspond to which segments of the 7-segment display.
Digit Designator
Precautions
Example
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
233
The table underneath shows the original data and converted code for all hexa-
decimal digits.
20
21
22
23
20
21
22
23
20
21
22
23
20
21
22
23
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
S
g
fb
c
d
e
a
D
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
x100
x101
x102
x103
Di
1: Second digit
0: One digit
0: Bits 00 through 07
Not used.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Bit 00
Bit 07
8
Original data Converted code (segments) Display
Digit Bits – g f e d c b a
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1
3 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1
4 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
5 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
7 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
A 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
B 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0
C 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1
D 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0
E 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1
F 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
234
5-17-11 ASCII CONVERT: ASC(113)
Variations
j ASC(113)
(113)
ASC S Di D
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
S: Source word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM, DR, IR
D: 1st destination word CIO, G, A, DM
Di: Digit designator CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
When the execution condition is OFF, ASC(113) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, ASC(113) converts the designated digit(s) of S into
the equivalent 8-bit ASCII code and places it into the destination word(s) begin-
ning with D.
Any or all of the digits in S may be converted in order from the designated first
digit. The first digit, the number of digits to be converted, and the half of D to re-
ceive the first ASCII code (rightmost or leftmost eight bits) are designated in Di. If
multiple digits are designated, they will be placed in order starting from the des-
ignated half of D, each requiring two digits. If more digits are designated than
remain in S (counting from the designated first digit), further digits will be used
starting back at the beginning of S.
Refer to
Appendix H
for a table of extended ASCII characters.
The digits of Di are set as shown below.
Specifies the first digit to be converted (0 to 3).
Number of digits to be converted (0 to 3)
0: 1 digit
1: 2 digits
2: 3 digits
3: 4 digits
First half of D to be used.
0: Rightmost 8 bits (1st half)
1: Leftmost 8 bits (2nd half)
Parity 0: none,
1: even,
2: odd
Digit number: 3210
Description
Digit Designator
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
(113)
ASC D00010 #0000 0001
0000
00
235
Some examples of Di values and the 4-bit binary to 8-bit ASCII conversions that
they produce are shown below.
0
1
2
3
SDi: 0011 D
0
1
2
3
Di: 0030
S
0
1
2
3
Di: 0130
S
Di: 0112
0
1
2
3
S
1st half
2nd half
D
1st half
2nd half
D+1
1st half
2nd half
D
1st half
2nd half
D+1
1st half
2nd half
D
1st half
2nd half
D+1
1st half
2nd half
D+2
1st half
2nd half
The leftmost bit of each ASCII character (2 digits) can be automatically adjusted
for either even or odd parity. If no parity is designated, the leftmost bit will always
be zero.
When even parity is designated, the leftmost bit will be adjusted so that the total
number of ON bits is even, e.g., when adjusted for even parity, ASCII “31”
(00110001) will be “B1” (10110001: parity bit turned ON to create an even num-
ber of ON bits); ASCII “36” (00110110) will be “36” (00110110: parity bit turned
OFF because the number of ON bits is already even). The status of the parity bit
does not affect the meaning of the ASCII code.
When odd parity is designated, the leftmost bit of each ASCII character will be
adjusted so that there is an odd number of ON bits.
Di must be within the values given below.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Improper digit designator.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the content of digit 0 in
D00010 (8) is converted to ASCII(38) and output to the leftmost 8 bits of
CIO 0001. “No parity” is specified, so CIO 000107 is set to 0.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 ASC(113) D00010
#0000
0001
Parity
Precautions
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
236
0 0 0 0
Di : #0000
Convert from digit 0.
Convert 1 digit.
Output to leftmost bits.
No parity.
1
000100 0
000102 0
000104 1
000106 0
000107 0
000108
000109
000110
000111
000112
000113
000114
000115
000101 0
000103 1
000105 1
0
21
0
0
0
0
0
1
20
22
23
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
20
21
22
23
21
20
22
23
21
20
22
23
8
$38
S: D00010 D: CIO 0001
8
3
5-17-12 BIT COUNTER: BCNT(114)
Variations
j BCNT(114)
(114)
BCNT N S R S: 1st source word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
R: Result word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM, DR, IR
N: Number of words CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, BCNT(114) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, BCNT(114) counts the total number of bits that are
ON in all words between S and S+(N–1) and places the result in R.
Precautions N must be BCD between 0001 and 9999.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): N is not BCD between 0001 and 9999.
If the total exceeds 9999.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): Result is 0.
Description
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
(114)
BCNT #0002 D00030 D00040
0000
07
237
Example When CIO 000007 is ON in the following example, all ON bits in D00030 and
D00031 are counted and the results is placed in D00040.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000007
00001 BCNT(114) #0002
D00030
D00040
Before
execution After
execution
0000000000001111
000F
D00030
0100000010010101
4095
D00031
0000000000000000
0000
D00040
0000000000001111
000F
D00030
0100000010010101
4095
D00031
0000000000001001
0009
D00040
5-17-13 COLUMN TO LINE: LINE(115)
Variations
j LINE(115)
(115)
LINE S Bi D
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
S: 1st source word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
D: Destination word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Bi: Bit designator CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
When the execution condition is OFF, LINE(115) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, LINE(115) copies bit column Bi from the 16-word set
S through S+15 to the 16 bits of word D (00 to 15), i.e., bit Bi of S+n is copied to bit
n of D, for n=00 to 15. In the following example, Bi would be 5.
0
0000111000100001
Bit
15 Bit
00
S
Bi
1101001001110001
S+1 0001101100100111
S+2
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
.
.
.
0111000110001010
S+15
1000001100000111
S+3
0 1 1
D1
Bit
15 Bit
00
.
.
.
S cannot be one of the last 15 words in a data area because it designates the first
of 16 words.
Bi must be BCD between 0000 and 0015.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Description
Precautions
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
0000
00 (115)
LINE D00100 #0008 D00005
238
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
The bit designator Bi is not BCD, or it is specifying a non-ex-
istent bit (i.e., bit specification must be between 00 and 15).
EQ (A50006): Content of D is 0 after execution
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the status of bits number 08 in
D00100 through D00115 are output in order to D00005, with the status of bit 08
in D00100 being output to bit 00 of D00005.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 LINE(115) D00100
#0008
D00005
5-17-14 LINE TO COLUMN: COLM(116)
Variations
j COLM(116)
(116)
COLM S D Bi
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
S: Source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Bi: Bit designator CIO, G, A, T, C, #(BCD), DM, DR, IR
D: 1st destination word CIO, G, A, DM
When the execution condition is OFF, COLM(116) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, COLM(116) copies the 16 bits of word S (00 to 15) to
bit Bi of the 16-word set D through D+15, i.e., bit n of S is copied to bit Bi of D+n,
for n=00 to 15. In the following example, Bi would be 5.
0
0000111000100001
Bit
15 Bit
00
D
Bi
1101001001110001
D+1 0001101100100111
D+2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0111000110001010
D+15
1000001100000111
D+3
0 1 1
S1
Bit
15 Bit
00
. . . . . .
.
.
.
Bi must be BCD between 0000 and 0015.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
The bit designator Bi is not BCD, or it is specifying a non-ex-
istent bit (i.e., bit specification must be between 00 and 15).
EQ (A50006): Content of S is 0
Description
Precautions
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
0000
00 (116)
COLM D00005 D00010 #0008
239
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the status of bits 00 to 15 in
D00005 are copied consecutively to bits number 08 of D00010 through D00025,
with the status of bit 00 being transferred to bit 08 of D00010.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 COLM(116) D00005
D00010
#0008
5-17-15 ASCII TO HEX: HEX(117)
(117)
HEX S Di D
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑HEX(117)
Operand Data Areas
S: First source word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
Di: Digit designator CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
D: Destination word CIO, G, A, DM
Description When the execution condition is OFF, HEX(117) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, HEX(117) converts the data in specified source
words from ASCII to hexadecimal data, and outputs the results to a specified
destination word.
The ASCII range that can be converted is the numerals 0 through 9 ($30 through
$39) and the capital letters A through F ($41 through $46).
If an attempt is made to convert other data, the Error Flag will turn ON and the
instruction will not be executed.
The digit designator, Di, specifies the first digit to receive the converted data, the
number of digits to be converted, the first ASCII data to be converted, and the
parity (see below).
Digit Designator
Specifies the first digit to receive converted data (0 to 3)
Number of digits to be converted (0 to 3)
0: 1 digit
1: 2 digits
2: 3 digits
3: 4 digits
First ASCII data to be converted.
0: Rightmost 8 bits
1: Leftmost 8 bits
Parity 0: None
1: Even
2: Odd
Digit number: 3210
Data i n the destination word (D) will not be changed except for the digits that are
converted to hexadecimal.
(CVM1 V2)
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
240
Digit Designator Examples The following examples show the digit designators (Di) used to make various
multiple-word conversions.
Rightmost 8 bits
Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 0
0112
Di Word Contents
Example 1
Leftmost 8 bits Rightmost 8 bitsLeftmost 8 bits
Word S+1 Word S
Word D
Rightmost 8 bits
Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 0
0030
Di Word Contents
Example 2
Leftmost 8 bits Rightmost 8 bitsLeftmost 8 bits
Word S+1 Word S
Word D
Rightmost 8 bits
Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 0
031
Di Word Contents
Example 3
Leftmost 8 bits Rightmost 8 bitsLeftmost 8 bits
Word S+1 Word S
Word D
1
Rightmost 8 bitsLeftmost 8 bits
Word S+2
Parity 0: None
With n o parity, data can only be converted when the leftmost bit is zero. If it is not
set to zero, the Error Flag will turn ON and the data will not be converted.
1: Even
The data (8 bits) can only be converted when the number of “1” bits is even. If the
number is odd, the Error Flag will turn ON and the data will not be converted.
1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
$31
Even number of “1” bits
Conversion
executed.
“1” 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
Odd number of “1” bits
Conversion
executed.
Not converted.
Example
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
(117)
HEX D00010 #1011 D00300
0000
00
241
2: Odd
The data (8 bits) can only be converted when the number of “1” bits is odd. If the
number is even, the Error Flag will turn ON and the data will not be converted.
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1
$41
Odd number of “1” bits
Conversion
executed.
“A” 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1
Even number of “1” bits
Conversion
executed.
Not converted.
Example
ASCII Code Table The following table shows the ASCII codes before conversion and the hexadeci-
mal values after conversion. Refer to
Appendix I
for a table of ASCII characters.
Original data Converted data
ASCII Code Bit status (See note.) Digit Bits
$30 P 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
$31 P 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
$32 P 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 1 0
$33 P 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 3 0 0 1 1
$34 P 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 4 0 1 0 0
$35 P 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 5 0 1 0 1
$36 P 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 6 0 1 1 0
$37 P 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 7 0 1 1 1
$38 P 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 8 1 0 0 0
$39 P 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 9 1 0 0 1
$41 P 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 A 1 0 1 0
$42 P 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 B 1 0 1 1
$43 P 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 C 1 1 0 0
$44 P 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 D 1 1 0 1
$45 P 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 E 1 1 1 0
$46 P 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 F 1 1 1 1
Note The leftmost bit of each ASCII code is adjusted for parity.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): ASCII in S does not match parity designation.
Data in word S is not ASCII that can be converted.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Programming Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the ASCII data in D00010 is
converted to binary data and then output to D00300.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 HEX(117) D00010
#1011
D00300
11
Specifies the first digit to receive converted data: 1
Number of digits to be converted: 2 digits
First ASCII data to be converted: Rightmost 8 bits
Parity: Even
Di Word Contents: #1011
1 0
Precautions
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
242
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
$43 $38
First ASCII data to be converted: Rightmost 8 bits
Converted to binary data
**
*
: Not changed.
Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 0
C8
First digit to receive converted data: 1
Number of digits to be converted: 2
D:D00300
Parity bits: Even
5-17-16 SIGNED BCD-TO-BINARY: BINS(275)
(275)
BINS C S D
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑BINS(275)
Operand Data Areas
C: Control word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
S: Source word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM, DR, IR
D: Destination word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Description When the execution condition is OFF, BINS(275) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, BINS(275) converts the data in a specified source
word (S) from signed BCD to signed binary, and outputs the result to a specified
destination word (D). The format of the source word is determined by the con-
tents of the control word (C).
Note Special I/O Units sometimes output signed BCD data. Calculations using this
data will normally be easier if it is first converted to signed binary data by means
of BINS(275) or BISL(277).
The input data format and range designations for the various control word con-
tents are as follows:
When C = 0000 (Input Data Range: –999 to 999 BCD)
3 digits BCD, 12 bits
Sign bit (0: Positive; 1: Negative)
Status of 3 bits: 0
When C = 0001 (Input Data Range: –7999 to 7999 BCD)
3 digits BCD, 12 bits
3 bits of digit 4 (0 to 7)
Sign bit (0: Positive; 1: Negative)
(CVM1 V2)
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
(275)
BINS #0000 D00100 D00200
0000
00
243
When C = 0002 (Input Data Range: –999 to 9999 BCD)
3 digits BCD, 12 bits
0 to 9: Fourth digit BCD
F: Negative (–)
A to E: Error
When C = 0003 (Input Data Range: –1999 to 9999 BCD)
3 digits BCD, 12 bits
0 to 9: Fourth digit BCD
A: Negative (–1)
F: Negative (–)
B to E: Error
First the signed BCD data format and range in word S are checked against the
data control word (C). If the check is okay, the signed BCD data in word S is con-
verted to binary and output to the designated word D. If the format and range are
not okay, the Error Flag (A50003) will turn ON and the instruction will not be
executed.
In signed BCD data, –0 is treated as +0. When the data to be converted is a neg-
ative number, it will be output as 2’s complement and the Negative Flag
(A50008) will turn ON. In order to convert a 2’s complement to the true value, it is
necessary to subtract it from 0.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Data format is 0002, and leftmost digit is A to E.
Data format is 0003, and the leftmost is B to E.
Data to be converted is not BCD.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006) Content of the converted data is all zeroes.
N (A50008) Converted number is negative.
Example 1 When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, first the signed BCD data for-
mat and range in D00100 are checked against data control word “0000” (first
operand). If the check is okay, the signed BCD data in D00100 is converted to
binary and output to D00200.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 BINS(275) #0000
D00100
D00200
Signed BCD data (–123)
S: D00100
1 1 2 3
Signed binary data
D: D00200
F F 8 5
Precautions
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
(275)
BINS #0003 D00300 D00400
0000
01
244
Example 2 When CIO 000001 is ON in the following example, first the signed BCD data for-
mat and range in D00300 are checked against data control word “0003” (first
operand). If the check is okay, the signed BCD data in D00300 is converted to
binary and output to D00400.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000001
00001 BINS(275) #0003
D00300
D00400
Signed BCD data
(–1369)
S: D00300
A 3 6 9
Signed binary data
D: D00400
F A A 7
5-17-17 SIGNED BINARY-TO-BCD: BCDS(276)
(276)
BCDS C S D
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑BCDS(276)
Operand Data Areas
C: Control word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
S: Source word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM, DR, IR
D: Destination word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Description When the execution condition is OFF, BCDS(276) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, BCDS(276) converts the data in a specified source
word (S) from signed binary to signed BCD, and outputs the results to a specified
destination word (C). The format of the destination word is determined by the
contents of the control word (C).
Note Special I/O Units sometimes require input of signed BCD data. BCDS(276) or
BDSL(278) can be used to easily convert signed binary data to signed BCD
data.
The output data format and range designations for the various control word con-
tents are as follows:
When C = 0000 (Output Data Range: –999 to 999 BCD)
3 digits BCD, 12 bits
Sign bit (0: Positive; 1: Negative)
Status of 3 bits: 0
When C = 0001 (Output Data Range: –7999 to 7999 BCD)
3 digits BCD, 12 bits
3 bits of digit 4 (0 to 7)
Sign bit (0: Positive; 1: Negative)
(CVM1 V2)
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
(276)
BCDS #0003 D00300 D00400
0000
01
245
When C = 0002 (Output Data Range: –999 to 9999 BCD)
3 digits BCD, 12 bits
0 to 9: Fourth digit BCD
F: Negative (–)
When C = 0003 (Output Data Range: –1999 to 9999 BCD)
3 digits BCD, 12 bits
0 to 9: Fourth digit BCD
A: Negative (–1)
F: Negative (–)
Data Ranges The range of data that can be input or output is determined by the control word
(0000 to 0003), as shown in the following table.
Data format Input range (binary) Output range (BCD)
0000 FFFF to FC19
0000 to 03E7 –999 to 999
0001 FFFF to F0C1
0000 to 1F3F –7999 to 7999
0002 FFFF to FC19
0000 to 270F –999 to 9999
0003 FFFF to F831
0000 to 270F –1999 to 9999
First the signed binary data in word S is checked against the data control word
(C). If the check is okay, the signed binary data in word S is converted to BCD
and output to the designated word D. If the check is not okay, the Error Flag
(A50003) will turn ON and the instruction will not be executed.
In signed BCD data, –0 is treated as +0.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Data is not within allowable range for data format.
Content of*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006) Content of the converted data is all zeroes.
N (A50008) Data to be converted is a negative number.
Example When CIO 000001 is ON in the following example, first the signed binary data in
D00300 is checked against data control word “0003” (first operand), and then
the signed binary data in D00300 is converted to signed BCD and output to
D00400.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000001
00001 BCDS(276) #0003
D00300
D00400
Precautions
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
246
Signed BCD data
(–1369)
S: D00300
A 3 6 9
Signed binary data
D: D00400
F A A 7
5-17-18 DOUBLE SIGNED BCD-TO-BINARY: BISL(277)
(277)
BISL C S D
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑BISL(277)
Operand Data Areas
C: Control word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM,
S: 1st source word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM,
D: 1st destination word CIO, G, A, DM,
Description When the execution condition is OFF, BISL(277) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, BISL(277) converts the data in specified source
words (S and S+1) from double signed BCD to double signed binary, and out-
puts the result to specified destination words (D and D+1). The format and data
range of the source word is determined by the contents of the control word (C).
Note Special I/O Units sometimes output signed BCD data. Calculations using this
data will normally be easier if it is first converted to signed binary data by means
of BINS(275) or BISL(277).
The input data format and range designations for the various control word con-
tents are as follows:.
When C = 0000 (Input Data Range: –999 9999 to 999 9999 BCD)
7 digits BCD, 28 bits
Sign bit (0: Positive; 1: Negative)
Status of 3 bits: 0
S+1 S
When C = 0001 (Input Data Range: –7999 9999 to 7999 9999 BCD)
7 digits BCD, 28 bits
Sign bit (0: Positive; 1: Negative)
S+1 S
3 bits of digit 8 (0 to 7)
When C = 0002 (Input Data Range: –999 9999 to 9999 9999 BCD)
7 digits BCD, 28 bits
S+1 S
0 to 9: Eighth digit BCD
F: Negative (–)
A to E: Error
(CVM1 V2)
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
(277)
BISL #0002 D00100 D00200
0000
00
247
When C = 0003 (Input Data Range: –1999 9999 to 9999 9999 BCD)
7 digits BCD, 28 bits
S+1 S
0 to 9: Eighth digit BCD
A: Negative (-1)
F: Negative (–)
B to E: Error
First the signed BCD data format and range in words S+1 and S are checked
against the data control word (C). If the check is okay, the signed BCD data in
words S+1 and S are converted to binary and output to the designated words
D+1 and D. If it is not okay, the Error Flag (A50003) will turn ON and the instruc-
tion will not be executed.
In signed BCD data, a –0 is treated as a +0.
When the data to be converted is a negative number, after being converted it will
be output as 2’s complement and the Negative Flag (A50008) will turn ON. In
order to convert a 2’s complement to the true value, it is necessary to subtract it
from 0.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Data format is 0002, and the leftmost digit is A to E
Data format is 0003, and the leftmost digit is B to E.
Data to be converted is not BCD.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006) Content of the converted data is all zeroes.
N (A50008) Converted number is negative.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, first the signed BCD data for-
mat and range in D00101 and D00100 are checked against data control word
“0002” (first operand). If the check is okay, the double signed BCD data in
D00101 and D00100 is converted to binary and output to D00201 and D00200.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 BISL(277) #0002
D00100
D00200
Double signed BCD data
(-3456789)
S+1: D00101
F 3 4 5
Double signed binary data
D+1: D00201
F F C B
S: D00100
6 7 8 9
D: D00200
4 0 E B
Precautions
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
248
5-17-19 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY-TO-BCD: BDSL(278)
(278)
BDSL C S D
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑BDSL(278)
Operand Data Areas
C: Control word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM,
S: 1st source word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM,
D: 1st destination word CIO, G, A, DM,
Description When the execution condition is OFF, BDSL(278) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, BDSL(278) converts the data in specified words (S
and S+1) from double signed binary to double signed BCD, and outputs the re-
sult to specified destination words (D and D+1). The format of the destination
word is determined by the contents of the control word (C).
Note Special I/O Units sometimes sometimes require input of signed BCD data.
BCDS(276) or BDSL(278) can be used to easily convert signed binary data to
signed BCD data.
The output data format and range designations for the various control word con-
tents are as follows:
When C = 0000 (Output Data Range: –999 9999 to 999 9999 BCD)
7 digits BCD, 28 bits
Sign bit (0: Positive; 1: Negative)
Status of 3 bits: 0
S+1 S
When C = 0001 (Output Data Range: –7999 9999 to 7999 9999 BCD)
7 digits BCD, 28 bits
Sign bit (0: Positive; 1: Negative)
S+1 S
3 bits of digit 8 (0 to 7)
When C = 0002 (Output Data Range: –999 9999 to 9999 9999 BCD)
7 digits BCD, 28 bits
S+1 S
0 to 9: Eighth digit BCD
F: Negative (–)
When C = 0003 (Output Data Range: –1999 9999 to 9999 9999 BCD)
7 digits BCD, 28 bits
S+1 S
0 to 9: Eighth digit BCD
A: Negative (-1)
F: Negative (–)
(CVM1 V2)
Conversion Instructions Section 5-17
(278)
BDSL #0003 D00100 D00200
0000
00
249
First the signed BCD data format and range in words S+1 and S are checked
against the data control word (C). If the check is okay, the signed BCD data in
words S+1 and S is converted to binary and output to the designated words D+1
and D. If the check is not okay, the Error Flag (A50003) will turn ON and the
instruction will not be executed.
In signed BCD data, –0 is treated as +0.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Data to be converted is not within range for data format.
Content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006) Content of the converted data is all zeroes.
N (A50008) Data to be converted is a negative number.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, first the data format and
range in D00101 and D00100 are checked against data control word “0003”
(first operand). If the check is okay, the double signed binary data in D00101 and
D00100 is converted to BCD and output to D00201 and D00200.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 BDSL(278) #0003
D00100
D00200
Double signed binary data
S+1: D00101
F F 8 B
Double signed BCD data
(-7654321)
D+1: D00201
F 7 6 5
S: D00100
3 4 4 F
D: D00200
4 3 2 1
5-18 BCD Calculation Instructions
The BCD Calculation Instructions perform arithmetic operations on BCD data.
These instructions are supported only by version-1 or later CPUs.
STC(078) and CLC(079), which set and clear the carry flag, are included in this
group because most of the BCD operations make use of the carry flag (CY) in
their results. Binary calculations and shift operations also use CY.
The addition and subtraction instructions include CY in the calculation as well as
in the result. Be sure to clear CY if its previous status is not required in the cal-
culation, and to use the result placed in CY, if required, before it is changed by
execution of any other instruction.
Note BCD calculation instructions are also supported by version-2 CVM1 CPUs as
symbol math instructions. Refer to
5-20 Symbol Math Instructions
for details.
Precautions
(V1/V2 CPUs)
BCD Calculation Instructions Section 5-18
250
5-18-1SET CARRY: STC(078)
(078)
STC
Variations
j STC(078)
Ladder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, STC(078) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, STC(078) turns ON CY (A50004).
5-18-2CLEAR CARRY: CLC(079)
(079)
CLC
Variations
j CLC(078)
Ladder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, CLC(079) is not executed.When the
execution condition is ON, CLC(079) turns OFF CY (A50004).
ADD(070), ADDL(074), ADB(080), ADBL(084), SUB(0710), SUBL(075),
SBB(081), and SBBL(085) all make use of the carry flag in their calculations.
When using any of these instructions, use CLC(079) to clear the carry flag in or-
der to avoid having the calculations affected by previous instructions.
ROL(062), ROLL(066), ROR(063), and RORL(067) make use of the carry flag in
their rotation shift operations. When using any of these instructions, use
STC(078) and CLC(079) to set and clear the carry flag.
Version-2 CVM1 CPUs supports add, subtract, and rotation shift instructions
that do not use the carry flag in their operations. These instructions do not re-
quire STC(078) and CLC(079), and reduce the number of program steps that
are needed.
5-18-3BCD ADD: ADD(070)
Variations
j ADD(070)
(070)
ADD Au Ad R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Au: Augend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Ad: Addend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
When the execution condition is OFF, ADD(070) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, ADD(070) adds the contents of Au, Ad, and CY, and
places the result in R. CY will be set if the result is greater than 9999.
Au + Ad + CY CY R
Note With version-2 CVM1 CPUs, mathematics instructions can use symbols. The
instructions corresponding to ADD(070) and ADDL(074) are +BC(406) and
+BCL(407).
Au and Ad must be BCD.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of Au or Ad is not BCD.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): There is a carry in the result.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
Description
Precautions
BCD Calculation Instructions Section 5-18
251
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, CY is cleared by CLC(079),
the content of CIO 0200 is added to the contents of CIO 0100 and the status of
CY, the results is placed in D00100, and then either all zeros or 0001 is moved
into D00101 depending on the status of CY (A50004). This ensures that any
carry from the last digit is preserved in R+1 so that the entire result can be later
handled as 8-digit data.
00000 LD 000000
00001 OUT TR0
00002 CLC(079)
00003 ADD(070) 0200
0100
D00100
00004 AND A50004
00005 MOV(030) #0001
D00101
00006 LD TR0
00007 AND NOT A50004
00008 MOV(030) #0000
D00101
(070)
ADD 0200 0100 D00100
(030)
MOV #0001 D00101
(030)
MOV #0000 D00101
(079)
CLC
0000
00
A500
04(CY)
A500
04(CY)
TR0 Address Instruction Operands
Although two ADD(070) can be used together to perform 8-digit BCD addition,
ADDL(074) is designed specifically for this purpose.
5-18-4BCD SUBTRACT: SUB(071)
Variations
j SUB(071)
(071)
SUB Mi Su R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Mi: Minuend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Su: Subtrahend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
When the execution condition is OFF, SUB(071) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, SUB(071) subtracts the contents of Su and CY from
Mi, and places the result in R. If the result is negative, CY is set and the 10’s com-
plement o f the actual result is placed in R. To convert the 10’s complement to the
true result, subtract the content of R from zero (see example below).
Mi – Su – CY CY R
Note With version-2 CVM1 CPUs, mathematics instructions can use symbols. The
instructions corresponding to SUB(071) and SUBL(075) are –BC(416) and –
BCL(417).
Mi and Su must be BCD.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of Mi or Su is not BCD.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): The result is negative, i.e., when Mi is less than Su plus CY.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
Example
Description
Precautions
BCD Calculation Instructions Section 5-18
252
Note Be sure to clear the carry flag with CLC(079) before executing SUB(071) if its
previous status is not required, and check the status of CY after doing a subtrac-
tion with SUB(071). If CY is ON as a result of executing SUB(071) (i.e., if the re-
sult is negative), the result is output as the 10’s complement of the true answer.
To convert the output result to the true value, subtract the value in R from 0.
When CIO 000002 is ON in the following example, the following ladder program
clears CY, subtracts the contents of D00100 and CY from the content of
CIO 0010, and places the result in CIO 0200.
If CY is set by executing SUB(071), the result in CIO 0200 is subtracted from
zero (note that CLC(079) is again required to obtain an accurate result), the re-
sult i s placed back in CIO 0200, and CIO 002100 is turned ON to indicate a neg-
ative result.
If CY is not set by executing SUB(071), the result is positive, the second subtrac-
tion is not performed, and CIO 002100 is not turned ON. CIO 002100 is pro-
grammed as a self-maintaining bit so that a change in the status of CY will not
turn it OFF when the program is re-scanned.
In this example, differentiated forms of SUB(071) are used so that the subtrac-
tion operation is performed only once each time CIO 000002 turns ON. When
another subtraction operation is to be performed, CIO 000002 will need to be
turned OFF for at least one scan (resetting CIO 002100) and then turned back
ON.
(079)
CLC
(071)
SUB 0010 D00100 0200
0000
02
A500
04(CY)
TR0
(079)
CLC
(071)
SUB #0000 0200 0200
0021
00
A500
04(CY)
0021
00
00000 LD 000002
00001 OUT TR0
00002 CLC(079)
00003 SUB(071) 0010
D00100
0200
00004 AND A50004
00005 CLC(079)
00006 SUB(071) #0000
0200
0200
00007 LD TR0
00008 AND A50004
00009 OR 002100
00010 OUT 002100
Address Instruction Operands
First
subtraction
Second
subtraction
Turned ON to
indicate nega-
tive result.
The first and second subtractions for this diagram are shown below using exam-
ple data for CIO 0010 and D00100.
The actual SUB(071) operation involves subtracting Su and CY from 10,000
plus Mi. For positive results the leftmost digit is truncated. For negative re-
sults the 10s complement is obtained. The procedure for establishing the cor-
rect answer is given below.
First Subtraction
CIO 0010 1029
D00100 – 3452
CY – 0
CIO 0200 7577 (1029 + (10000 – 3452))
CY 1 (negative result)
Example
Note
BCD Calculation Instructions Section 5-18
253
Second Subtraction
0000
CIO 0200 –7577
CY –0
CIO 0200 2423 (0000 + (10000 – 7577))
CY 1 (negative result)
In the above case, the program would turn ON CIO 002100 to indicate that the
value held in CIO 0200 is negative.
5-18-5BCD MULTIPLY: MUL(072)
Variations
j MUL(072)
(072)
MUL Md Mr R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Md: Multiplicand word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM
Mr: Multiplier word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
When the execution condition is OFF, MUL(072) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, MUL(072) multiplies Md by the content of Mr, and
places the result in R and R+1.
Md
Mr
R +1 R
X
Note With version-2 CVM1 CPUs, mathematics instructions can use symbols. The
instructions corresponding to MUL(072) and MULL(076) are *B(424) and
*BL(425).
Md and Mr must be BCD.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of Md or Mr is not BCD.
The content of a *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
Description
Precautions
BCD Calculation Instructions Section 5-18
254
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the contents of CIO 0013
and D00005 are multiplied and the results is placed in CIO 1207 and CIO 1208.
Example data and calculations are shown below the program.
R+1: CIO 1208 R: CIO 1207
00083900
Md: CIO 0013
3356
Mr: D00005
0025
X
00000 LD 000000
00001 MUL(072) 0013
D00005
1207
Address Instruction Operands
(072)
MUL 0013 D00005 1207
0000
00
5-18-6BCD DIVIDE: DIV(073)
Variations
j DIV(073)
(073)
DIV Dd Dr R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Dd: Dividend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM
Dr: Divisor word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
When the execution condition is OFF, DIV(073) is not executed and the program
moves to the next instruction. When the execution condition is ON, Dd is divided
by Dr and the result is placed in R and R + 1: the quotient in R and the remainder
in R + 1.
R+1 R
DdDr
QuotientRemainder
Note With version-2 CVM1 CPUs, mathematics instructions can use symbols. The
instructions corresponding to DIV(073) and DIVL(077) are /B(434) and /
BL(435).
Dd and Dr must be BCD.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of Dd or Dr is not BCD.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
Example
Description
Precautions
BCD Calculation Instructions Section 5-18
255
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the content of CIO 0020 is
divided by the content of CIO 1209 and the results is placed in D00017 and
D00018. Example data and calculations are shown below the program.
R: D00017 R + 1: D00018
11500002
Dd: CIO 0020
3452
Quotient Remainder
Dd: CIO 1209
0003
(073)
DIV 0020 1209 D00017
0000
00 Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 DIV(073) 0020
1209
D00017
5-18-7DOUBLE BCD ADD: ADDL(074)
Variations
j ADDL(074)
(074)
ADDL Au Ad R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Au: 1st augend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
Ad: 1st addend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
When the execution condition is OFF, ADDL(074) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, ADDL(074) adds the content of CY to the 8-digit val-
ue in Au and Au+1 to the 8-digit value in Ad and Ad+1 and places the result in R
and R+1. CY will be set if the result is greater than 9999 9999.
Au + 1 Au
Ad + 1 Ad
R + 1 R
+CY
CY
Note With version-2 CVM1 CPUs, mathematics instructions can use symbols. The
instructions corresponding to ADD(070) and ADDL(074) are +BC(406) and
+BCL(407).
Au and Ad must be BCD.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of Au or Ad is not BCD.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): There is a carry in the result.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
When CIO 000003 is ON, the following program adds two 12-digit numbers, th e
first contained in CIO 0020 through CIO 0022 and the second in D00010 through
D00012. The result is placed in D02000 through D02002. In the second addition
(using ADD(070)), any carry from the first addition will be automatically included.
Example
Description
Precautions
Example
BCD Calculation Instructions Section 5-18
256
The carry from the second addition is placed in D02003 by using another
ADD(070) with two all-zero constants.
(074)
ADDL 0020 D00010 D02000
(079)
CLC
00000
03
(070)
ADD 0022 D00012 D02002
(070)
ADD #0000 #0000 D02003
00000 LD 000003
00001 CLC(079)
00002 ADDL(074) 0020
D00010
D02000
00003 ADD(070) 0022
D00012
D02002
00004 ADD(070) #0000
#0000
D02003
Address Instruction Operands
5-18-8DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT: SUBL(075)
Variations
j SUBL(075)
(075)
SUBL Mi Su R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Mi: 1st minuend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
Su: 1st subtrahend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
When the execution condition is OFF, SUBL(075) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, SUBL(075) subtracts CY and the 8-digit content of Su
and Su+1 from the 8-digit value in Mi and Mi+1, and places the result in R and
R+1. If the result is negative, CY is set and the 10’s complement of the actual
result is placed in R. To convert the 10’s complement to the true result, subtract
the content of R from zero.
Mi + 1 Mi
Su + 1 Su
R + 1 R
–CY
CY
Note With version-2 CVM1 CPUs, mathematics instructions can use symbols. The
instructions corresponding to SUB(071) and SUBL(075) are –BC(416) and –
BCL(417).
Mi and Su must be BCD.
Constants are input using eight digits.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of Mi, Mi+1,Su or Su+1 is not BCD.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): There is a carry in the result.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
Description
Precautions
BCD Calculation Instructions Section 5-18
257
The following example works much like that for single-word subtraction. In this
example, however, the 8-digit number in CIO 0121 and CIO 0120 is subtracted
from the 8-digit number in CIO 0201 and CIO 0200 when CIO 000003 is ON, and
the result is output to D00101 and D00100. If the result is negative, the comple-
ment is then subtracted from 0 to yield the actual number and CIO bit 002100 (a
self-holding bit) is turned ON to indicate the negative result.
00000 LD 000003
00001 OUT TR0
00002 CLC(079)
00003 SUBL(075) 1220
1200
D00100
00004 AND A50004
00005 BSET(041) #0000
D00000
D00001
00006 CLC(079)
00007 SUBL(075) D00000
D00100
D00100
00008 LD TR0
00009 AND A50004
00010 OR 122100
00011 OUT 122100
First
subtraction
Second
subtraction
Turned ON to
indicate nega-
tive result.
Address Instruction Operands
(079)
CLC
(075)
SUBL 1220 1200 D00100
(041)
BSET #0000 D00000 D00001
(079)
CLC
(075)
SUBL D00000 D00100 D00100
0000
03
A500
04
A500
04
1221
00
1221
00
TR0
5-18-9DOUBLE BCD MULTIPLY: MULL(076)
Variations
j MULL(076)
(076)
MULL Md Mr R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Md: 1st multiplicand wd CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
Mr: 1st multiplier word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
When the execution condition is OFF, MULL(076) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, MULL(076) multiplies the 8-digit content of Md and
Md+1 by the content of Mr and Mr+1, and places the result in R to R+3.
Md + 1 Md
Mr + 1 Mr
R + 1 RR + 3 R + 2
x
Note With version-2 CVM1 CPUs, mathematics instructions can use symbols. The
instructions corresponding to MUL(072) and MULL(076) are *B(424) and
*BL(425).
Md, Md+1, Mr, and Mr+1 must be BCD.
Example
Description
Precautions
BCD Calculation Instructions Section 5-18
(076)
MULL D0005 0005 0007
0000
01
258
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of Md, Md+1, Mr, or Mr+1 is not BCD.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
Example When CIO 000001 is ON in the following example, the 8-digit content of D00005
and D00006 is multiplied by the content of CIO 0005 and CIO 0006 and places
the 16-digit result in CIO 0007, CIO 0008, CIO 0009, and CIO 0010.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000001
00001 MULL(076) D00005
0005
0007
80013592
D0006 D0005
00000025
0006 0005
00000020
0010 0009
00339800
0008 0007
X
5-18-10 DOUBLE BCD DIVIDE: DIVL(077)
Variations
j DIVL(077)
(077)
DIVL Dd Dr R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Dd: 1st dividend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
Dr: 1st divisor word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
When the execution condition is OFF, DIVL(077) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, the 8-digit content of Dd and D+1 is divided by the
content o f D r and Dr+1 and the result is placed in R to R+3: the quotient in R and
R+1, and the remainder in R+2 and R+3.
R+1 R
QuotientRemainder
Dd+1 DdDr+1 Dr
R+3 R+2
Note With version-2 CVM1 CPUs, mathematics instructions can use symbols. The
instructions corresponding to DIV(073) and DIVL(077) are /B(434) and /
BL(435).
Dr and Dr+1 must not contain 0 and the content of Dd, Dd+1, Dr or Dr+1 must be
BCD.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Description
Precautions
BCD Calculation Instructions Section 5-18
259
Flags ER (A50003): Dr and Dr+1 contain 0.
Content of Dd, Dd+1, Dr or Dr+1 is not BCD.
The content of a *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): There is a carry in the result.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
Example The following example shows how to use DIVL(77) to calculate the average of
100 four-digit numbers. These numbers are added and divided using the long
versions of the instructions so that the answer can be rounded to preserve accu-
racy. This example illustrates not only the use of DIVL(77), but also the use of
several other instructions and the use of indirect addressing.
The following words and bits are used in this program.
Bit/word Application
CIO 000000 Controls execution of the program.
D00101 and D00102 Hold the result of the addition.
D00000 Points to the next word to be added.
A50005 through A50007
(Less Than, Equals, and
Greater Than Flags)
Control execution in combination with CMP(020) to
end addition and initiate division when the 100th
number has been added and to add 1 when rounding
up the result is required.
CIO 0200 and 0201 Hold the next values to be added.
D00103 through D00105 Hold the results of division (D00105 is remainder).
CIO 0010 through CIO 0012 CIO 0012 outputs the average and CIO 0010 and
0011 output the sum of the 100 numbers.
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the first two lines in the pro-
gram clear words used in the remainder of the program. The remainder of the
instruction block from CMP(020) adds consecutive numbers indirectly ad-
dressed through D00000. The numbers are moved to CIO 0200 so that long
addition is possible (CIO 0201 is always zero).
When 100 numbers have been added, the CMP(020) instructions end the addi-
tion and start the division, rounding, and output procedure. The result is rounded
by incrementing D00103 when the remainder from the division is greater than
0049. Finally, XFER(040) is used to places the results in I/O words for output to
an external device, e.g., a display device.
BCD Calculation Instructions Section 5-18
(041)
jBSET #0000 D00101 D00102
(030)
jMOV #0000 D00000
(020)
CMP D00000 #0100
(090)
INC D00000
0000
00
(030)
MOV *D00000 0200
(030)
MOV #0000 0201
(079)
CLC
(074)
ADDL 0200 D00101 D00101
(020)
CMP D00000 #0100
(077)
DIVL D00101 #00000100 D00103
(020)
CMP D00105 #0049
(090)
INC D00103
(040)
jXFER #0003 D00101 0010
A500
07
0000
00
A500
06
A500
05
260
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 BSET(041) #000
D00101
D00102
00002 MOV(030) #0000
D00000
00003 CMP(020) D00000
#0100
00004 AND A50007
00005 INC(090) D00000
00006 MOV(030) *D00000
0200
00007 MOV(030) #0000
0201
00008 CLC(079)
00009 ADDL(074) 0200
D00101
D00101
00010 LD 000000
00011 CMP(020) D00000
#0100
00012 AND A50006
00013 DIVL(077) D00101
#00000100
D00103
00014 CMP(020) D00105
#0049
00015 OUT TR1
00016 AND A50005
00017 INC(090) D00103
00018 LD TR1
00019 XFER(040) #0003
D00101
0010
BCD Calculation Instructions Section 5-18
261
5-19 Binary Calculation Instructions
The Binary Calculation Instructions all perform arithmetic operations on binary
(hexadecimal) data.
The addition and subtraction instructions include CY in the calculation as well as
in the result. Be sure to clear CY if its previous status is not required in the cal-
culation, and to use the result placed in CY, if required, before it is changed by
the execution of any other instruction. STC(078) and CLC(079) can be used to
control CY. Refer to
5-18 BCD Calculation Instructions
for details on STC(078)
and CLC(079).
Note Binary calculation instructions are also supported by version-2 CVM1 CPUs as
symbol math instructions. Refer to
5-20 Symbol Math Instructions
for details.
5-19-1BINARY ADD: ADB(080)
Variations
j ADB(080)
(080)
ADB Au Ad R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Au: Augend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Ad: Addend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
When the execution condition is OFF, ADB(080) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, ADB(080) adds the content of Au, Ad, and CY, and
places the result in R. CY will be set if the result is greater than FFFF.
Au + Ad + CY CY R
Note With version-2 CVM1 CPUs, mathematics instructions can use symbols. The
instructions corresponding to ADB(080) and ADBL(084) are +C(402) and
+CL(403). In addition, Overflow (A50009) and Underflow (A50010) Flags are
added.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): The result is greater than FFFF.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of R after execution.
Description
Precautions
Binary Calculation Instructions Section 5-19
262
Examples The following example shows a four-digit addition with CY used to place either
0000 or 0001 into R+1 to ensure that any carry is preserved.
(079)
CLC
(080)
ADB 0010 D00100 1210
(030)
MOV #0000 1211
0000
00
A500
04
= R
= R+1
00000 LD 000000
00001 OUT TR0
00002 CLC(079)
00003 ADB(080) 0010
D00100
1210
00004 AND NOT A50004
00005 MOV(030) #0000
1211
00006 LD TR0
00007 AND A50004
00008 MOV(030) #0001
1211
Address Instruction Operands
(030)
MOV #0001 1211
A500
04
TR0
= R+1
In the following example, A6E2 + 80C5 = 127A7. The result is a five-digit num-
ber, so CY (A50004) = 1, and the content of R + 1 becomes 0001.
R+1: D01001 R: D01000
000127A7
Au: CIO 0010
A6E2
Ad: D00100
80C5
+
Eight-digit binary numbers can be added more quickly and easily using the
DOUBLE BINARY ADD: ADBL(084) instruction instead of a combination of
ADB(080) instructions.
5-19-2BINARY SUBTRACT: SBB(081)
Variations
j SBB(081)
(081)
SBB Mi Su R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Mi: Minuend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Su: Subtrahend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
When the execution condition is OFF, SBB(081) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, SBB(081) subtracts the contents of Su and CY from
Mi and places the result in R. If the result is negative, CY is set and the 2’s com-
plement of the actual result is placed in R. To obtain the true answer when the
result is negative, the 2’s complement placed in R must be subtracted from
0000.
Mi – Su – CY CY R
Description
Binary Calculation Instructions Section 5-19
263
Note With version-2 CVM1 CPUs, mathematics instructions can use symbols. The
instructions corresponding to SUB(081) and SUBL(085) are –C(412) and –
CL(413). In addition, Overflow (A50009) and Underflow (A50010) Flags are
added.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): The result is negative, i.e., when Mi is less than Su plus CY.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of R.
Example The following example demonstrates the use of SBB(081) in an 8-digit subtrac-
tion. In actual practice, 8-digit binary numbers can be subtracted more quickly
and easily using the DOUBLE BINARY SUBTRACT: SBBL(085) instruction
instead of a combination of SBB(081) instructions.
CY is tested following the first two subtractions to see if the result is negative. If it
is, the first result (the complement) is subtracted from zero to obtain the true re-
sult, and either 0000 or 0001 is placed in CIO 0102 (0001 indicates a negative
result).
(079)
CLC
(081)
SBB 0010 D00100 1210
(081)
SBB 0011 D00101 1211
(079)
CLC
(081)
SBB #0000 1210 1210
(081)
SBB #0000 1211 1211
(030)
MOV #0000 1212
0000
00
A500
04
A500
04
TR 0 00000 LD 000000
00001 OUT TR0
00002 CLC(079)
00003 SBB(081) 0010
D00100
1210
00004 SBB(081) 0011
D00101
1211
00005 AND A50004
00006 CLC(079)
00007 SBB(081) #0000
1210
1210
00008 SBB(081) #0000
1211
1211
00009 LD TR0
00010 AND NOT A50004
00011 MOV(30) #0000
1212
00012 LD TR0
00013 AND A50004
00014 MOV(30) #0001
1212
Address Instruction Operands
(030)
MOV #0001 1212
A500
04
Precautions
Binary Calculation Instructions Section 5-19
264
In the following example, 20F55A10 – B8A360E3 = 97AE06D3. In the rightmost
four-digit subtraction, Su is less than Mi, so CY (A50004) becomes 1, and the
result of the leftmost four-digit subtraction is decremented by 1. In the final cal-
culations, 0000 – F9D2 = 0000 + (10000 – F9D2) = 06D3.
0000 – 6851 –1
(because CY is 1)
= 0000 + (10000 – 6851 – 1) = 97AE.
The content of 0102, 0001, indicates a negative result.
R: 0100
F92D
Mi: 0010
5A10
Su: D00100
60E3
–
R+1: 0101
6851
Mi+1: 0011
20F5
Su+1: D00101
B8A3
–
CY = 1
Rightmost 4 Digits Leftmost 4 Digits
R+2: 0102 R+1: 0101 R: 0100
000197AE06D3
5A10 + (10000 – 60E3)
–10
–
20F5 + (10000 – B8A3) – 1
CY = 0
(from CLC(079))
CY = 1
0000
R: 0100
F92D
R: 0100
06D3
R+1: 0101
6851
R: 0101
97AE
––
CY = 1
0000 + (10000 – F92D)
–10
–
0000 + (10000 – 6851) – 1
CY = 0
(from CLC(079))
0000
Converting 2’s Complement
5-19-3BINARY MULTIPLY: MLB(082)
Variations
j MLB(082)
(082)
MLB Md Mr R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Md: Multiplicand word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM
Mr: Multiplier word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
When the execution condition is OFF, MLB(082) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, MLB(082) multiplies the content of Md by the content
of Mr, places the rightmost four digits of the result in R, and places the leftmost
four digits in R+1.
Md
Mr
R +1 R
X
Description
Binary Calculation Instructions Section 5-19
(082)
MLB D00200 D00201 D00202
0000
00
265
Note With version-2 CVM1 CPUs, mathematics instructions can use symbols. The
instructions corresponding to MLB(082) and MLBL(086) are *U(422) and
*UL(423).
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of R+1.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the four-digit hexadecimal
content o f D00200 is multiplied by the four-digit hexadecimal content of D00201
and the 8-digit hexadecimal result is stored in D00202 and D00203.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 MLB(0820 D00200
D00201
D00202
0FFF
D00200
0200
D00201
D00203 D00202
X
001FFE00
5-19-4BINARY DIVIDE: DVB(083)
Variations
j DVB(083)
(083)
DVB Dd Dr R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Dd: Dividend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM
Dr: Divisor word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
When the execution condition is OFF, DVB(083) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, DVB(083) divides the content of Dd by the content of
Dr and the result is placed in R and R+1: the quotient in R, the remainder in R+1.
DdDr
R R + 1
Quotient Remainder
Note With version-2 CVM1 CPUs, mathematics instructions can use symbols. The
instructions corresponding to DVB(083) and DVBL(085) are /U(432) and /
UL(433).
Dr must not be 0.
Precautions
Description
Precautions
Binary Calculation Instructions Section 5-19
(083)
DVB 0007 D00100 D00101
0000
02
266
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Dr contains 0.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of R.
Example When CIO 000002 is ON in the following example, the four-digit hexadecimal
content o f CIO 0007 is divided by the four-digit hexadecimal content of D00100.
The quotient is stored in D00101 with the remainder stored in D00102.
Note If the content of the divisor word D00101 is zero, the Error Flag (bit A50003) is
set and the instruction is not executed.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000002
00001 DVB(083) 0007
D00100
D00101
02AA
D00101
0FFF
0007
0003
D00102
0006
D00100
Quotient Remainder
5-19-5DOUBLE BINARY ADD: ADBL(084)
Variations
j ADBL(084)
(084)
ADBL Au Ad R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Au: 1st augend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
Ad: 1st addend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
When the execution condition is OFF, ADBL(084) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, ADBL(084) adds the 8-digit content of Au+1 and Au,
the 8-digit content of Ad+1 and Ad, and CY, and places the result in R. CY will be
set if the result is greater than FFFF FFFF.
Au + 1 Au
Ad + 1 Ad
R + 1 R
+CY
CY
Note With version-2 CVM1 CPUs, mathematics instructions can use symbols. The
instructions corresponding to ADB(080) and ADBL(084) are +C(402) and
+C(403). In addition, Overflow (OF) and Underflow (UF) Flags are added.
Description
Binary Calculation Instructions Section 5-19
(084)
ADBL 0500 D02000 D05000
(079)
CLC
0000
00
267
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): The result is greater than FFFF FFFF.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of R+1.
Example The following example shows an 8-digit addition with CY (A50004) used to store
the status of the 9th digit. The status of CY would need to be stored in another
word (normally D05002) before it was affected by execution of another instruc-
tion.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 CLC(079)
00002 ADBL(084) 0500
D02000
D05000
554B5952 + 614329D2 = B68E832A
Au + 1 : CIO 0501 Au : CIO 0500
Ad + 1 : D02001 Ad : D02000
554B 5952
6143 29D8
0
+
D + 1 : D05001 D : D05000
832AB68E
0
1
CY (Cleared with CLC(079))
CY (No carry)
N (Leftmost bit is ON)
Precautions
Binary Calculation Instructions Section 5-19
0000
00 (079)
CLC
(085)
SBBL D00100 0200 D00500
268
5-19-6DOUBLE BINARY SUBTRACT: SBBL(085)
Variations
j SBBL(085)
(085)
SBBL Mi Su R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Mi: 1st minuend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
Su: 1st subtrahend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
When the execution condition is OFF, SBBL(085) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, SBBL(085) subtracts CY and the 8-digit value in Su
and Su+1 from the 8-digit value in Mi and Mi+1, and places the result in R and
R+1. I f the result is negative, CY is set and the 2’ s complement of the actual re-
sult i s placed in R. To convert the 2’s complement to the true result, subtract the
content of R from zero.
Mi + 1 Mi
Su + 1 Su
R + 1 R
–CY
CY
Note With version-2 CVM1 CPUs, mathematics instructions can use symbols. The
instructions corresponding to SUB(081) and SUBL(085) are –C(412) and –
CL(413). In addition, Overflow (A50009) and Underflow (A50010) Flags are
added.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): The result is negative.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of R+1.
In this example, the 8-digit number in CIO 0201 and CIO 0200 is subtracted
from the 8-digit number in D00101 and D00100 when CIO 000000 is ON, and the
result is output to D00501 and D00500. If the result is negative, CY (A50004) is
turned ON and the 2’s complement of the result is output to D00501 and
D00500. Refer to
5-19-2 BINAR Y SUBTRACT: SBB(081)
for an example of con-
verting a 2’s complement.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 CLC(079)
00002 SBBL(085) D00100
0200
D00500
Description
Precautions
Example
Binary Calculation Instructions Section 5-19
(086)
MLBL D00010 #000000FF D00020
0000
10
269
97A071CA – 0F3B52D8 = 88651DF2
Mi + 1 : D00101 Mi : D00100
Su +1 : CIO 0201 Su : CIO 0200
97A0 71CA
0F3B 52D8
0
–
D + 1 : DD00501 D : D00500
1EF28865
0
1
CY (Cleared with CYC(079))
CY (No carry)
N (Leftmost bit is ON)
5-19-7DOUBLE BINARY MULTIPLY: MLBL(086)
Variations
j MLBL(086)
(086)
MLBL Md Mr R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Md: 1st multiplicand wd CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
Mr: 1st multiplier word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
When the execution condition is OFF, MLBL(086) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, MLBL(086) multiplies the 8-digit content of Md and
Md+1 by the content of Mr and Mr+1, and places the result in R to R+3.
Md + 1 Md
Mr + 1 Mr
R + 1 RR + 3 R + 2
x
Note With version-2 CVM1 CPUs, mathematics instructions can use symbols. The
instructions corresponding to MLB(082) and MLBL(086) are *U(422) and
*UL(423).
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of R+3.
Example When CIO 000010 is ON in the following example, the 8-digit content of
D000010 and D00011 is multiplied by 0000 00FF. The 16-digit resultS is stored
in D00020, D00021, D00022, and D00023.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000010
00001 MLBL(086) D00010
#000000FF
D00020
Description
Precautions
Binary Calculation Instructions Section 5-19
0000
00 (087)
DVBL 0100 D00500 D00200
270
F8AA
D00010
X
095A
D00011
00FF0000
B156
D00020
519D
D00021
0009
D00022
0000
D00023
5-19-8DOUBLE BINARY DIVIDE: DVBL(087)
Variations
j DVBL(087)
(087)
DVBL Dd Dr R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Dd: 1st dividend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
Dr: 1st divisor word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
When the execution condition is OFF, DVBL(087) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, the 8-digit content of Dd and D+1 is divided by the
content o f D r and Dr+1 and the result is placed in R to R+3: the quotient in R and
R+1, and the remainder in R+2 and R+3.
R+1 R
QuotientRemainder
Dd+1 DdDr+1 Dr
R+3 R+2
Note With version-2 CVM1 CPUs, mathematics instructions can use symbols. The
instructions corresponding to DVB(083) and DVBL(085) are /U(432) and /
UL(433). In addition, Overflow (A50009) and Underflow (A50010) Flags are
added.
Dr and Dr+1 must not contain 0.
Constants are expressed in eight digits.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Dr and Dr+1 contain 0.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of R+1.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example the content of CIO 0100 and
CIO 0101 is divided by the content of D00500 and D00501 and the results is out-
put to D00200 through D00203.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 DVBL(087) 0100
D00500
D00200
Description
Precautions
Binary Calculation Instructions Section 5-19
271
0 0 A B C D E F
Dd+1: CIO 0101 Dd: CIO 0100
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Dr+1: D00501 Dr : D00500
0 0 0 0 A B C D
R+1: D00201 R: D00200
0 0 0 0 0 0 E F
R+3: D00203 R+2: D00202
0
÷
Binary Calculation Instructions Section 5-19
272
5-20 Symbol Math Instructions
The Symbol Math Instructions perform arithmetic operations on BCD or binary
data.
5-20-1Binary Addition: +(400)/+L(401)/+C(402)/+CL(403)
SIGNED BINARY ADD WITHOUT CARRY: +(400)
Variations
j +(400)
(400)
+AuAdR Ad: Addend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Au: Augend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY ADD WITHOUT CARRY: +L(401)
Variations
j +L(401)
(401)
+L Au Ad R Ad: 2nd addend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
Au: 1st augend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
SIGNED BINARY ADD WITH CARRY: +C(402)
Variations
j +C(402)
(402)
+C Au Ad R Ad: Addend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Au: Augend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY ADD WITH CARRY: +CL(403)
Variations
j +CL(403)
(403)
+CL Au Ad R Ad: 2nd addend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
Au: 1st augend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Description SIGNED BINARY ADD WITHOUT CARRY
When the execution condition is OFF, +(400) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, +(400) adds the contents of Au and Ad and places the result
in R. CY will be set if the result is greater than FFFF.
Au
Ad
RCY
+
(CVM1 V2)
Symbol Math Instructions Section 5-20
273
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY ADD WITHOUT CARRY
When the execution condition is OFF, +L(401) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, +L(401) adds the 8-digit contents of Au+1 and Au and the
8-digit contents of Ad+1 and Ad, and places the result in R and R + 1. CY will be
set if the result is greater than FFFF FFFF.
Au +1
Ad + 1
R + 1CY
+
Au
Ad
R
SIGNED BINARY ADD WITH CARRY
When the execution condition is OFF, +C(402) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, +C(402) adds the contents of Au, Ad, and CY and places
the result in R. CY will be set if the result is greater than FFFF.
CY
+
Au
Ad
RCY
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY ADD WITH CARRY
When the execution condition is OFF, +CL(403) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, +CL(403) adds the 8-digit contents of Au+1, Au, the
8-digit contents of Ad+1 and Ad, and CY, and places the result in R and R + 1. CY
will be set if the result is greater than FFFF FFFF.
Au +1
Ad + 1
R + 1
CY
+
Au
Ad
RCY
Precautions Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): The result is greater than FFFF or FFFF FFFF.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of R or R+1.
OF (A50009) Au (Au +1) and Ad (Ad +1) are both positive numbers and
the result is negative.
UF (A50010) Au (Au +1) and Ad (Ad +1) are both negative numbers and
the result is positive.
Using Signed Binary Addition Instructions
The range for signed data is –32,768 to 32,767 in decimal (–2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647 for “double” instructions), and 8000 to FFFF and 0000 to 7FFF in
hexadecimal (8000 0000 to FFFF FFFF and 0000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF for
“double” instructions).
Negative numbers are expressed as 2’ s complements. If the result of the addi-
tion i s within the range of 8000 to FFFF, it represents a signed negative number
and the Negative Flag (A50008) turns ON.
Symbol Math Instructions Section 5-20
274
When Au and Ag are both positive numbers and the addition result is negative,
the Overflow Flag (A50009) turns ON. When Au and Ag are both negative num-
bers and the addition result is positive, the Underflow Flag (A50010) turns ON. If
a addition result in a carry, the Carry Flag turns ON.
The range for unsigned binary data is 0000 to FFFF (0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF
for “double” instructions), so the decimal range would be 0 to 65,535 (0 to
4,294,967,295).
5-20-2BCD Addition: +B(404)/ +BL(405)/+BC(406)/+BCL(407)
BCD ADD WITHOUT CARRY: +B(404)
Variations
j +B(404)
(404)
+B Au Ad R Ad: Addend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Au: Augend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
DOUBLE BCD ADD WITHOUT CARRY: +BL(405)
Variations
j +BL(405)
(405)
+BL Au Ad R Ad: 2nd addend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
Au: 1st augend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
BCD ADD WITH CARRY: +BC(406)
Variations
j +BC(406)
(406)
+BC Au Ad R Ad: Addend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Au: Augend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
DOUBLE BCD ADD WITH CARRY: +BCL(407)
Variations
j +BCL(407)
(407)
+BCL Au Ad R Ad: 2nd addend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
Au: 1st augend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
(CVM1 V2)
Symbol Math Instructions Section 5-20
275
Description BCD ADD WITHOUT CARRY
When the execution condition is OFF, +B(404) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, +B(404) adds the contents of Au and Ad and places the re-
sult in R. CY will be set if the result is greater than 9999.
Au
Ad
RCY
+
DOUBLE BCD ADD WITHOUT CARRY
When the execution condition is OFF, +BL(405) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, +BL(405) adds the 8-digit contents of Au+1 and Au
and the 8-digit contents of Ad+1 and Ad, and places the result in R and R + 1. CY
will be set if the result is greater than 9999 9999.
Au +1
Ad + 1
R + 1CY
+
Au
Ad
R
BCD ADD WITH CARRY
When the execution condition is OFF, +BC(406) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, +BC(406) adds the contents of Au, Ad, and CY and
places the result in R. CY will be set if the result is greater than 9999.
CY
+
Au
Ad
RCY
DOUBLE BCD ADD WITH CARRY
When the execution condition is OFF, +BCL(407) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, +BCL(407) adds the 8-digit contents of Au+1, Au, the
8-digit contents of Ad+1 and Ad, and CY, and places the result in R and R + 1. CY
will be set if the result is greater than 9999 9999.
Au +1
Ad + 1
R + 1
CY
+
Au
Ad
RCY
Precautions Au and Ad (or Au, Au+1, Ad, and Ad+1) must be BCD. If any other data is used,
the Error Flag (A50003) will turn ON and the instruction will not be executed.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Au and Ad (or Au, Au+1, Ad, and Ad+1) are not BCD.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): The result exceed the digits.
EQ(A50006): The result after the addition is all zeros.
Symbol Math Instructions Section 5-20
(407)
↑+BCL D00200 D00210 D00220
(405)
+BL D00100 D00110 D00120
0000
00
0000
01
276
Example +BL Operation
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the contents of D00101 and
D00100 are added to the content of D0011 1 and D00110, and the result is output
in eight-digit BCD to D00121 and D00120.
+BCL Operation
When CIO 000001 is ON in the following example, the contents of D00201 and
D00200 are added to the content of D00211 and D00210, and the result includ-
ing the carry is output in eight-digit BCD to D00221 and D00220.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 +BL(405) D00100
D00110
D00120
00002 LD 000001
00003 +BCL(407) D00200
D00210
D00220
5-20-3Binary Subtraction: –(410)/ –L(411)/–C(412)/–CL(413)
SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY: –(410)
Variations
j –(410)
(410)
–MiSuR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Mi: Minuend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Su: Subtrahend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY: –L(411)
Variations
j –L(411)
(411)
–L Mi Su R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Mi: Minuend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM,
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM,
Su: Subtrahend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM,
SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITH CARRY: –C(412)
Variations
j –C(412)
(412)
–C Mi Su R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Mi: Minuend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Su: Subtrahend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
(CVM1 V2)
Symbol Math Instructions Section 5-20
277
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITH CARRY: –CL(413)
Variations
j –CL(413)
(413)
–CL Mi Su R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Mi: Minuend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM,
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM,
Su: Subtrahend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM,
SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY
When the execution condition is OFF, –(410) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, –(410) subtracts the contents of Su from Mi and places the
result in R. If the subtraction resulted in a borrow, CY is set. To obtain the true
answer when the result is negative, the 2’s complement placed in R must be sub-
tracted from 0000.
Mi –Su CY R
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY
When the execution condition is OFF, –L(411) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, –L(411) subtracts the 8-digit value in Su and Su+1 from the
8-digit value in Mi and Mi+1, and places the result in R and R+1. If the subtraction
resulted in a borrow, CY is set.
Mi + 1 Mi
Su + 1 Su
R + 1 R
–
CY
SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITH CARRY
When the execution condition is OFF, –C(412) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, –C(412) subtracts the contents of Su and CY from Mi and
places the result in R. If the subtraction resulted in a borrow, CY is set.
Mi – Su – CY CY R
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITH CARRY
When the execution condition is OFF, –CL(413) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, –CL(413) subtracts CY and the 8-digit value in Su
and Su+1 from the 8-digit value in Mi and Mi+1, and places the result in R and
R+1. If the subtraction resulted in a borrow, CY is set.
Mi + 1 Mi
Su + 1 Su
R + 1 R
–CY
CY
Precautions Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Description
Symbol Math Instructions Section 5-20
278
Flags ER (A50003): The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): The subtraction resulted in a borrow.
EQ(A50006) The contents of word R (or word R and R+1 for “double”
instructions) after the subtraction is all zeros
N (A50008) The leftmost bit (MSB) of word R (or word R+1 for “double”
instructions) after the subtraction is “1.”
OF (A50009) Mi is a positive number, Su is negative, and the subtraction
result is negative.
UF (A50010) Mi is a negative number, Su is positive, and the subtraction
result is positive.
Using SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT Instructions
The range for signed data is –32,768 to 32,767 in decimal (–2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647 for “double” instructions), and 8000 to FFFF and 0000 to 7FFF in
hexadecimal (8000 0000 to FFFF FFFF and 0000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF for
“double” instructions).
Negative numbers are expressed as 2’s complements. If the result of the sub-
traction i s within the range of 8000 to FFFF, it represents a signed negative num-
ber and the Negative Flag (A50008) turns ON.
When M i i s a positive number, Su is negative and the subtraction result is nega-
tive, the Overflow Flag (A50009) turns ON. When Mi is a negative number, Su i s
positive, and the subtraction result is positive, the Underflow Flag (A50010)
turns ON. If a subtraction result in a borrow, the Carry Flag turns ON.
The range for unsigned binary data is 0000 to FFFF (0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF
for “double” instructions), so the decimal range would be 0 to 65,535 (0 to
4,294,967,295). When data is unsigned, the Carry Flag turning ON indicates
that the subtraction result is negative. The result is expressed as 2’s comple-
ment, s o i n order to find the true answer, the 2’s complement must be subtracted
from 0.
Numeric Example 1
FFFFH
0001H
–)
FFFEH
–1
+1
–)
–2 (Note 1)
65535
1
–)
65534 (Note 2)
Negative Flag ON
Carry Flag OFF
Signed data Unsigned data
Numeric Example 2
FFFDH
FFFFH
–)
FFFEH
–3
–1
–)
–2 (Note 1)
65533
–)
–2 (Note 3)
Negative Flag ON
Carry Flag ON
Signed data Unsigned data
65535
Note 1. Because the Negative Flag is ON, the result (FFFE) is a negative number
(2’s complement) and is expressed as –2.
2. The Carry Flag is OFF and the result (FFFE) is an unsigned positive number
(65,534).
3. The Carry Flag is ON so the result (FFFE) is an unsigned negative number
(2’s complement) and becomes –2 when converted.
Symbol Math Instructions Section 5-20
(413)
–CL D00200D00210 D00220
(411)
–L D00100 D00110 D00120
0000
00
0000
01
–L 0200 0120 D00100
TR0
0000
02
04 (CY)
A500
00
0021
(411)
04 (CY)
A500
1
–L #00000000 D00100 D00100
(411) 2
00
0021
“–” display
279
Programming Example 1 –L Operation
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the content of D00111 and
D00110 is subtracted from the content of D00101 and D00100, and the result is
output in eight-digit binary to D00121 and D00120. CY is set if the subtraction
resulted in a borrow.
–CL Operation
When CIO 000001 is ON in the following example, the content of D00211 and
D00210 i s subtracted from the content of D00201 and D00200, and the result i s
output in eight-digit binary to D00221 and D00220. CY is set if the subtraction
resulted in a borrow.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 –L(411) D00100
D00110
D00120
00002 LD 000001
00003 –CL(413) D00200
D00210
D00220
Program Example 2 Example (unsigned data): 20F55A10 – B8A360E3 = –97AE06D3.
In this example, the eight-digit binary value in CIO 0121 and CIO 0120 is sub-
tracted from the value in CIO 0201 and CIO 0200, and the result is output to
eight-digit binary in D00101 and D00100. If the result is negative, the instruction
at (2) will be executed, and the actual result will then be output to D00101 and
D00100.
The Carry Flag (A50004) will be turned ON, so the actual number is
–97AE06D3. Because the content of D00101 and D00100 is negative, CY is
used to turn ON a self-holding bit that turns ON a bit indicating a negative value.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000002
00001 OUT TR0
00002 –L(411) 0200
0120
D00100
00003 LD TR0
00004 AND A50004
00005 –L(411) #00000000
D00100
D00100
00006 LD TR0
00007 AND A50004
00008 OR 002100
00009 OUT 002100
Symbol Math Instructions Section 5-20
280
1
Mi+1: CIO 0201 Mi: CIO 0200
R+1: D00101
Su+1: CIO 0121 Su: CIO 0120
–
20F5 5A 0
3E063A8B
651 F92D1
CY R+1: D00100
Subtraction at 1
8
The Carry Flag (A50004) is ON, so the result is subtracted from 0000 0000 to
obtain the actual result.
R+1: D00101
Su+1: D00101 Su: D00100
–
00
3D60EA79
651 F92D
1
CY R+1: D00100
Subtraction at 2
000000
8
R+1: D00101
Su+1: D00101 Su: D00100
–
3D60EA79
651 F92D
1
CY R+1: D00100
Final Subtraction Result
1
Mi+1: CIO 0201 Mi: CIO 0200
20F5 5A 0
8
Symbol Math Instructions Section 5-20
281
5-20-4BCD Subtraction: –B(414)/ –BL(415)/–BC(416)/–BCL(417)
BCD SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY: –B(414)
Variations
j –B(414)
(414)
–B Mi Su R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Mi: Minuend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Su: Subtrahend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY: –BL(415)
Variations
j –BL(415)
(415)
–BL Mi Su R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Mi: 1st minuend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
Su: 1st subtrahend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
BCD SUBTRACT WITH CARRY: –BC(416)
Variations
j –BC(416)
(416)
–BC Mi Su R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Mi: Minuend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Su: Subtrahend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT WITH CARRY: –BCL(417)
Variations
j –BCL(417)
(417)
–BCL Mi Su R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Mi: 1st minuend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
Su: 1st subtrahend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
BCD SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY
When the execution condition is OFF, –B(414) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, –B(414) subtracts the BCD contents of Su from Mi, and
places the result in R. If the result is negative, CY is set and the 10’s complement
of the actual result is placed in R. To convert the 10’s complement to the true
result, subtract the content of R from 0000.
Mi – Su CY R
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Symbol Math Instructions Section 5-20
282
DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY
When the execution condition is OFF, –BL(415) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, –BL(415) subtracts the 8-digit BCD content of Su and
Su+1 from the 8-digit BCD content in Mi and Mi+1, and places the result in R and
R+1. If the result is negative, CY is set and the 10’s complement of the actual
result is placed in R. To convert the 10’s complement to the true result, subtract
the content of R from 0000 0000.
Mi + 1 Mi
Su + 1 Su
R + 1 R
–
CY
BCD SUBTRACT WITH CARRY
When the execution condition is OFF, –BC(416) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, –BC(416) subtracts the BCD contents of Su and CY
from Mi, and places the result in R. If the result is negative, CY is set and the 10’s
complement o f the actual result is placed in R. To convert the 10’s complement
to the true result, subtract the content of R from 0000.
Mi – Su – CY CY R
DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT WITH CARRY
When the execution condition is OFF, –BCL(417) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, –BCL(417) subtracts CY and the 8-digit BCD content
of Su and Su+1 from the 8-digit BCD content in Mi and Mi+1, and places the re-
sult in R and R+1. If the result is negative, CY is set and the 10’ s complement of
the actual result is placed in R. To convert the 10’s complement to the true result,
subtract the content of R from 0000 0000.
Mi + 1 Mi
Su + 1 Su
R + 1 R
–CY
CY
Precautions Mi and Su (or Mi, Mi+1, Su, and Su+1) must be BCD. If any other data is used,
the Error Flag (A50003) will turn ON and the instruction will not be executed.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Mi and Su (or Mi, Mi+1, Su, and Su+1) are not BCD.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): Subtraction result exceed the digits.
EQ(A50006): The result after the subtraction is all zeros.
Example –BL Operation
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the content of D00111 and
D00110 is subtracted from the content of D00101 and D00100, and the result is
output in eight-digit BCD to D00121 and D00120. CY is set if the result is nega-
tive
Symbol Math Instructions Section 5-20
(417)
–BCL D00200 D00210 D00220
(415)
–BL D00100 D00110 D00120
0000
00
0000
01
–BL 0200 0120 D00100
TR0
0000
02
04 (CY)
A500
00
0021
(415)
04 (CY)
A500
1
–BL #00000000 D00100 D00100
(415) 2
00
0021
“–” display
283
–BCL Operation
When CIO 000001 is ON in the following example, the content of D00211 and
D00210 are subtracted from the content of D00201 and D00200, and the result
including t h e c a rry is output in eight-digit BCD to D00221 and D00220. CY is set
if the result is negative
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 –BL(415) D00100
D00110
D00120
00002 LD 000001
00003 –BCL(417) D00200
D00210
D00220
Program Example Example: 9,583,960 – 17,072,641 = –7,488,681.
In this example, the eight-digit BCD content of CIO 0121 and CIO 0120 is sub-
tracted from the content of CIO 0201 and CIO 0200, and the result is output in
eight-digit BCD to D00101 and D00100. The result is negative, so the instruction
at (2) will be executed, and the true value will then be output to D00101 and
D00100.
The Carry Flag (A50004) will be turned ON, so the actual number is –7,488,681.
Because the content of D00101 and D00100 is negative, CY is used to turn ON a
self-holding bit that turns ON a bit indicating a negative value.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000002
00001 OUT TR0
00002 –BL(415) 0200
0120
D00100
00003 LD TR0
00004 AND A50004
00005 –BL(415) #00000000
D00100
D00100
00006 LD TR0
00007 AND A50004
00008 OR 002100
00009 OUT 002100
Symbol Math Instructions Section 5-20
284
6
Mi+1: CIO 0201 Mi: CIO 0200
R+1: D00101
Su+1: CIO 0121 Su: CIO 0120
–
0958 39 0
14627071
92251 13191
CY R+1: D00100
Subtraction at 1
09583960 + (100000000 – 17072641)
The Carry Flag (A50004) is ON, so the result is subtracted from 0000 0000.
Su+1: D00101 Su: D00100
–
00
92251 1319
Subtraction at 2
000000
R+1: D00101
048 86811
CY R+1: D00100
00000000 + (100000000 – 92511319)
7
R+1: D00101
Su+1: D00101 Su: D00100
–
18688470
651 F92D
1
CY R+1: D00100
Final Subtraction Result
1
Mi+1: CIO 0201 Mi: CIO 0200
20F5 5A 0
8
Symbol Math Instructions Section 5-20
285
5-20-5Binary Multiplication: *(420)/ *L(421)/*U(422)/*UL(423)
SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY: *(420)
Variations
j *(420)
(420)
*Md Mr R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Md: Multiplicand word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM
Mr: Multiplier word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY: *L(421)
Variations
j *L(421)
(421)
*LMdMr R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Md: 1st multiplicand wd CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
Mr: 1st multiplier word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
UNSIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY: *U(422)
Variations
j *U(422)
(422)
*UMdMr R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Md: Multiplicand word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM
Mr: Multiplier word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
DOUBLE UNSIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY: *UL(423)
Variations
j *UL(423)
(423)
*UL Md Mr R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Md: 1st multiplicand wd CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
Mr: 1st multiplier word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY
When the execution condition is OFF, *(420) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, *(420) multiplies the signed content of Md by the signed
content of Mr, places the rightmost four digits of the result in R, and places the
leftmost four digits in R+1.
Md
Mr
R +1 R
X
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Symbol Math Instructions Section 5-20
286
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY
When the execution condition is OFF, *L(421) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, *L(421) multiplies the signed 8-digit content of Md and
Md+1 by the signed content of Mr and Mr+1, and places the result in R to R+3.
Md + 1 Md
Mr + 1 Mr
R + 1 RR + 3 R + 2
x
UNSIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY
When the execution condition is OFF, *U(422) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, *U(422) multiplies the unsigned content of Md by the un-
signed content of Mr, places the rightmost four digits of the result in R, and
places the leftmost four digits in R+1.
Md
Mr
R +1 R
X
DOUBLE UNSIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY
When the execution condition is OFF, *UL(423) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, *UL(423) multiplies the unsigned 8-digit content of
Md and Md+1 by the unsigned content of Mr and Mr+1, and places the result in R
to R+3.
Md + 1 Md
Mr + 1 Mr
R + 1 RR + 3 R + 2
x
Precautions Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ(A50006) The multiplication result is all zeroes.
N (A50008) The leftmost bit (MSB) of word R+1 (or word R+3 for
“double” instructions) after the multiplication is “1.”
Example *L Operation
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the content of D00101 and
D00100 are multiplied by the content of D0011 1 and D00110, in eight-digit binary
with sign, and the result is output to D00123 through D00120.
Symbol Math Instructions Section 5-20
(423)
*UL D00200 D00210 D00220
(421)
*L D00100 D00110 D00120
0000
00
0000
01
287
*UL Operation
When CIO 000001 is ON in the following example, the content of D00201 and
D00200 are multiplied by the content of D00211 and D00210, in eight-digit
binary without sign, and the result is output to D00223 through D00220.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 *L(421) D00100
D00110
D00120
00002 LD 000001
00003 *UL(423) D00200
D00210
D00220
5-20-6BCD Multiplication: *B(424)/ *BL(425)
BCD MULTIPLY: *B(424)
Variations
j *B(424)
(424)
*BMdMr R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Md: Multiplicand word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM
Mr: Multiplier word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
DOUBLE BCD MULTIPLY: *BL(425)
Variations
j *BL(425)
(425)
*BL Md Mr R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Md: 1st multiplicand wd CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
Mr: 1st multiplier word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
BCD MULTIPLY
When the execution condition is OFF, *B(424) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, *B(424) multiplies the BCD content of Md by the BCD con-
tent of Mr, and places the result in R and R+1.
Md
Mr
R +1 R
X
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Symbol Math Instructions Section 5-20
(425)
*BL D00100 D00110 D00120
0000
00
288
DOUBLE BCD MULTIPLY
When the execution condition is OFF, *BL(425) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, *BL(425) multiplies the 8-digit BCD content of Md
and Md+1 by the BCD content of Mr and Mr+1, and places the result in R to R+3.
Md + 1 Md
Mr + 1 Mr
R + 1 RR + 3 R + 2
x
Md (Md+1) and Mr (Mr+1) must be BCD. If any other data is used, the Error Flag
(A50003) will turn ON and the instruction will not be executed.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of Md (Md+1) or Mr (Mr+1) is not BCD.
The content of a *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): There is a carry in the result.
EQ (A50006): The result is all zeros.
Example *BL Operation
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the content of D00101 and
D00100 IS multiplied by the content of D00111 and D00110, in eight-digit BCD,
and the result is output to D00123 through D00120.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 *BL(425) D00100
D00110
D00120
Precautions
Symbol Math Instructions Section 5-20
289
5-20-7Binary Division: /(430)/ /L(431)//U(432)//UL(433)
SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE: /(430)
Variations
j /(430)
(430)
/DdDrR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Dd: Dividend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM
Dr: Divisor word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE: /L(431)
Variations
j /L(431)
(431))
/L Dd Dr R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Dd: 1st dividend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
Dr: 1st divisor word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
UNSIGNED BINARY DIVIDE: /U(432)
Variations
j /U(432)
(432)
/U Dd Dr R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Dd: Dividend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM
Dr: Divisor word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
DOUBLE UNSIGNED BINARY DIVIDE: /UL(433)
Variations
j /UL(433)
(433)
/UL Dd Dr R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Dd: 1st dividend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
Dr: 1st divisor word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE
When the execution condition is OFF, /(430) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, /(430) divides the signed binary content of Dd by the signed
binary content of Dr and the result is placed in R and R+1: the quotient in R, the
remainder in R+1.
DdDr
R R + 1
Quotient Remainder
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Symbol Math Instructions Section 5-20
290
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE
When the execution condition is OFF, /L(431) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, /L(431) divides the signed 8-digit content of Dd and D+1 by
the signed content of Dr and Dr+1 and the result is placed in R to R+3: the quo-
tient in R and R+1, and the remainder in R+2 and R+3.
R+1 R
QuotientRemainder
Dd+1 DdDr+1 Dr
R+3 R+2
UNSIGNED BINARY DIVIDE
When the execution condition is O FF, /U(432) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, /U(432) divides the unsigned content of Dd by the unsigned
content of Dr and the result is placed in R and R+1: the quotient in R, the remain-
der in R+1.
DdDr
R R + 1
Quotient Remainder
DOUBLE UNSIGNED BINARY DIVIDE
When the execution condition is OFF, /UL(433) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, /UL(433) divides the 8-digit unsigned content of Dd
and D+1 by the unsigned content of Dr and Dr+1 and the result is placed in R to
R+3: the quotient in R and R+1, and the remainder in R+2 and R+3.
R+1 R
QuotientRemainder
Dd+1 DdDr+1 Dr
R+3 R+2
Precautions S2 (or S2, and S2+1) must not be all zeros.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Dr (or Dr and Dr+1) is all zeroes.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ(A50006) The division result is all zeroes in the quotient.
N (A50008) The leftmost bit (MSB) of word R (or word R+1 for “double”
instructions) after the division is “1.”
Example /L Operation
When C I O 000000 is ON in the following example, the signed content of D00101
and D00100 is divided by the signed content of D00111 and D00110, in eight-
digit binary. When the result is obtained, the quotient is output to D00121 and
D00120, and the remainder is output to D00123 and D00122.
Symbol Math Instructions Section 5-20
(433)
/UL D00200 D00210 D00220
(431)
/L D00100 D00110 D00120
0000
00
0000
01
291
/UL Operation
When CIO 000001 is ON in the following example, the unsigned content of
D00201 and D00200 is divided by the unsigned content of D00211 and D00210,
in eight-digit binary. When the result is obtained, the quotient is output to D00221
and D00220, and the remainder is output to D00223 and D00222.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 /L(431) D00100
D00110
D00120
00002 LD 000001
00003 /UL(433) D00200
D00210
D00220
5-20-8BCD Division: /B(434)/ /BL(435)
BCD DIVIDE: /B(434)
Variations
j /B(434)
(434)
/B Dd Dr R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Dd: Dividend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM
Dr: Divisor word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
DOUBLE BCD DIVIDE: /BL(435)
Variations
j /BL(435)
(435)
/BL Dd Dr R
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Dd: 1st dividend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
Dr: 1st divisor word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
BCD DIVIDE
When the execution condition is OFF, /B(434) is not executed and the program
moves to the next instruction. When the execution condition is ON, the BCD con-
tent of Dd is divided by the BCD content of Dr and the result is placed in R and R +
1: the quotient in R and the remainder in R + 1.
R+1 R
DdDr
QuotientRemainder
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Symbol Math Instructions Section 5-20
(435)
/BL D00100 D00110 D00120
0000
00
292
DOUBLE BCD DIVIDE
When the execution condition is OFF, /BL(435) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, the BCD 8-digit content of Dd and D+1 is divided by
the BCD content of Dr and Dr+1 and the result is placed in R to R+3: the quotient
in R and R+1, and the remainder in R+2 and R+3.
R+1 R
QuotientRemainder
Dd+1 DdDr+1 Dr
R+3 R+2
Precautions Dd and Dr (or Dd, Dd+1, Dr, and Dr+1) must be BCD. If any other data is used,
the Error Flag (A50003) will turn ON and the instruction will not be executed.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Dd and Dr (or Dd, Dd+1, Dr, and Dr+1) are not BCD.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ(A50006) The division result is all zeroes.
Example /BL Operation
When CIO 000001 is ON in the following example, the content of D00201 and
D00200 is divided by the content of D00211 and D00210, in eight-digit BCD.
When the result is obtained, the quotient is output to D00221 and D00220, and
the remainder is output to D00223 and D00222.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 /BL(435) D00100
D00110
D00120
Symbol Math Instructions Section 5-20
293
5-21 Floating-point Math Instructions
The Floating-point Math Instructions convert data and perform floating-point
arithmetic operations. Version-2 CVM1 CPUs support the following instructions.
Code Mnemonic Name
450 FIX (*) FLOATING TO 16-BIT
451 FIXL (*) FLOATING TO 32-BIT
452 FLT (*) 16-BIT TO FLOATING
453 FLTL (*) 32-BIT TO FLOATING
454 +F (*) FLOATING-POINT ADD
455 –F (*) FLOATING-POINT SUBTRACT
456 *F (*) FLOATING-POINT MULTIPLY
457 /F (*) FLOATING-POINT DIVIDE
458 RAD (*) DEGREES TO RADIANS
459 DEG (*) RADIANS-TO-DEGREES
460 SIN (*) SINE
461 COS (*) COSINE
462 TAN (*) TANGENT
463 ASIN (*) SINE TO ANGLE
464 ACOS (*) COS TO ANGLE
465 ATAN (*) TANGENT TO ANGLE
466 SQRT (*) SQUARE ROOT
467 EXP (*) EXPONENT
468 LOG (*) LOGARITHM
Floating-point data expresses real numbers using a sign, exponent, and mantis-
sa. When data is expressed in floating-point format, the following formula ap-
plies.
Real number = (–1)s 2e–127 (1.f)
s: Sign
e: Exponent
f: Mantissa
The floating-point data format conforms to the IEEE754 standards. Data is ex-
pressed in 32 bits, as follows:
Sign
se f
Exponent Mantissa
MSB 30 23 22 LSB
Data No. of bits Contents
s:sign 1 0: positive; 1: negative
e:exponent 8 The exponent (e) value ranges from 0 to 255.
The actual exponent is the value remaining
after 127 is subtracted from e, resulting in a
range of –127 to 128. “e=0” and “e=255”
express special numbers.
f: mantissa 23 The mantissa portion of binary floating-point
data fits the formal 2.0 > 1.f 1.0.
The number of effective digits for floating-point data is 24 bits for binary ( approx-
imately seven digits decimal).
Data Format
Number of Digits
Floating-point Math Instructions Section 5-21
294
The following data can be expressed by floating-point data:
•–
•–3.402823 x 1038 value –1.175494 x 10–38
•0
•1.175494 x 10–38 value 3.402823 x 1038
•+
•Not a number (NaN)
–1.175494 x 10–38 1.175494 x 10–38
–+
–3.402823 x 1038 3.402823 x 1038
–1 0 1
The formats for NaN, ±, and 0 are as follows:
NaN*: e = 255, f ≠ 0
+: e = 255, f = 0, s= 0
–: e = 255, f = 0, s= 1
0: e = 0
*NaN i s a valid floating-point number. Executing instructions involving data con-
version or calculations may result in NaN.
When the absolute value of the result is greater than the maximum value that
can be expressed for floating-point data, the Overflow Flag (A50009) will turn
ON and the result will be output as ±. If the result is positive, it will be output as
+; if negative, then –.
The Equals Flag (A50006) will only turn ON when both the exponent (e) and the
mantissa (f) are zero after a calculation. A calculation result will also be output as
zero when the absolute value of the result is less than the minimum value that
can be expressed for floating-point data. In that case the Underflow Flag
(A50010) will turn ON.
In this program example, the X-axis and Y-axis coordinates (x, y) are provided by
4-digit BCD content of D00000 and D00001. The distance (r) from the origin and
the angle (θ, in degrees) are found and output to D00100 and D00101. In the
result, everything to the right of the decimal point is truncated.
Floating-point Data
Special Numbers
Floating-point Data
Calculation Results
Example
Floating-point Math Instructions Section 5-21
(041)
BSET #0000 D00100 D00101
0000
00
(100)
BIN D00000 D00200
(100)
BIN D00001 D00201
(452)
FLT D00200 D00202
(452)
FLT D00201 D00204
(456)
*F D00202 D00202 D00206
(456)
*F D00204 D00204 D00208
(454)
+F D00206 D00208 D00210
(466)
SQRT D00210 D00212
(457)
/F D00204 D00202 D00214
(465)
ATAN D00214 D00216
(459)
DEG D00216 D00218
(450)
FIX D00212 D00220
(450)
FIX D00218 D00221
(101)
BCD D00220 D00100
(101)
BCD D00221 D00101
(1)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(2)
295
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 BSET(041)
#0000
D00100
D00101
00002 BIN(100)
D00000
D00200
00003 BIN(100)
D00001
D00201
00004 FLT(425)
D00200
D00202
00005 FLT(425)
D00201
D00204
00006 *F(456)
D00202
D00202
D00206
00007 *F(456)
D00204
D00204
D00208
00008 SQRT(466)
D00210
D00212
00009 /F(457)
D00204
D00202
D00214
00010 ATAN(465)
D00212
D00216
00011 DEG(459)
D00216
D00218
00012 FIX(450)
D00212
D00220
00013 FIX(450)
D00218
D00221
00014 BCD(101)
D00220
D00100
00015 BCD(101)
D00221
D00101
0
y
x
P (100, 100)
θ
Floating-point Math Instructions Section 5-21
296
100
100
Calculations
Distance r =
Angle θ = tan–1 (y
x)
Example
Distance r = = 141.4214
Angle θ = tan–1 () = 45.0
DM Contents
D00000 0 1 0 0
D00001 0 1 0 0
x
y
D00100 0 1 4 1
D00101 0 0 4 5
r
θ
x2y2
10021002
1, 2, 3...
1. This instruction clears (i.e., sets to “0”) D00100 and D00101 so that the dis-
tance and angle result can be output to those words.
2. This section of the program converts the data from BCD to floating-point.
a) The data area from D00200 onwards is used as a work area.
b) First BIN(100) is used to temporarily convert the BCD data to binary
data, and then FLT(452) is used to convert the binary data to floating-
point data.
c) The value of x that has been converted to floating-point data is output to
to D00203 and D00202.
d) The value of y that has been converted to floating-point data is output to
to D00205 and D00204.
3. In order to find the distance r, Floating-point Math Instructions are used to
calculate the square root of x2+y2. The result is then output to D00213 and
D00212 as floating-point data.
4. In order to find the angle θ, Floating-point Math Instructions are used to cal-
culate ta n–1 (y/x). ATAN(465) outputs the result in radians, so DEG(459) is
used to convert to degrees. The result is then output to D00219 and D00218
as floating-point data.
5. The data is converted back from floating-point to BCD.
a) First FIX(450) is used to temporarily convert the floating-point data to
binary data, and then BCD(101) is used to convert the binary data to
BCD data.
b) The distance r is output to to D00100.
c) The angle θ is output to to D00101.
5-21-1FLOATING TO 16-BIT: FIX(450)
(450)
FIX S R
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑FIX(450)
Operand Data Areas
S: First source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
When the execution condition OFF, FIX(450) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, FIX(450) converts the 32-bit floating-point content of S and
S+1 to 16-bit binary data, and places the result in R.
S+1 S
R
Floating-point data (32 bits)
Binary data (16 bits)
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Floating-point Math Instructions Section 5-21
297
Only the integer portion of the floating-point data is converted, and the fraction
portion is truncated. For example, “3.5” becomes “3,” and “–3.5” becomes “–3.”
Precautions S must be floating-point data between –32,768 and 32,767.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): S is not floating-point data.
The floating-point data is not between –32,768 to 32,767.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The converted binary data is all zeroes.
N (A50008): The result of the conversion is a negative number.
5-21-2FLOATING TO 32-BIT: FIXL(451)
(451)
FIXL S R
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑FIXL(451)
Operand Data Areas
S: First source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: First result word CIO, G, A, DM,
When the execution condition OFF, FIXL(451) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, FIXL(451) converts the 32-bit floating-point content of S
and S+1 to 32-bit binary data, and places the result in R and R+1.
S+1 S Floating-point data (32 bits)
Binary data (32 bits)
R+1 R
Only the integer portion of the floating-point data is converted, and the fraction
portion is truncated.
Note The maximum value for R other than indirect DM and indirect EM is –1.
Constants are expressed in eight digits. Data register and index register (direct)
cannot be used.
Precautions S must be floating-point data between –2,147483648 and 2,147483647.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): S is not floating-point data.
Floating-point data is not between –2,147483648 to
2,147483647.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The converted binary data is all zeroes.
N (A50008): The result of the conversion is a negative number.
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Floating-point Math Instructions Section 5-21
298
5-21-316-BIT TO FLOATING: FLT(452)
(452)
FLT S R
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑FLT(452)
Operand Data Areas
S: Source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: First result word CIO, G, A, DM
When the execution condition OFF, FLT(452) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, FLT(452) converts the 16-bit binary content of S to 32-bit
floating-point data, and places the result in R and R+1.
R+1 R
S
Floating-point data (32 bits)
Binary data (16 bits)
Only binary data within the range of –32,768 to 32,767 can be specified for S. To
convert binary data outside of that range, use FLTL(453). Refer to
5-21-4 32-BIT
TO FLOATING: FLTL(453
).
Precautions Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The exponent and mantissa of the result are 0.
N (A50008): The result of the conversion is a negative number.
5-21-432-BIT TO FLOATING: FLTL(453)
(453)
FLTL S R
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑FLTL(453)
Operand Data Areas
S: First source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM,
R: First result word CIO, G, A, DM
When the execution condition OFF, FLTL(453) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, FLTL(453) converts specified 32-bit binary data to 32-bit
floating-point data, and places the result in specified words.
R+1 R
S
Floating-point data (32 bits)
Binary data (32 bits)
S+1
binary data within the range of –2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 can be speci-
fied for S and S+1.
Note The maximum value for R other than indirect DM and indirect EM is –1.
Constants are expressed in eight digits. Data register and index register (direct)
cannot be used.
Precautions Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Description
Description
(CVM1 V2)
(CVM1 V2)
Floating-point Math Instructions Section 5-21
299
Flags ER (A50003): The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The exponent and mantissa of the result are 0.
N (A50008): The result of the conversion is a negative number.
5-21-5FLOATING-POINT ADD: +F(454)
(454)
+F Au Ad R
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑+F(454)
Operand Data Areas
Au: First augend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: First result word CIO, G, A, DM
Ad: First addend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
When the execution condition OFF, +F(454) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, +F(454) adds 32-bit floating-point content of Ad and Ad+1
to the 32-bit floating-point content of Au and Au+1 and places the result in R a n d
R+1.
R+1 R
Au Augend (floating-point data, 32 bits)
Au+1
Ad Addend (floating-point data, 32 bits)
Ad+1
Result (floating-point data, 32 bits)
+
If the absolute value of the result is greater than the maximum value that can be
expressed for floating-point data, the Overflow Flag (A50009) will turn ON and
the result will be output as ±.
If the absolute value of the result is less than the minimum value that can be ex-
pressed for floating-point data, the Underflow Flag (A50010) will turn ON and the
result will be output as 0.
The various combinations of augend and addend data will produce the results
shown in the following table.
Augend
Addend 0 Numeral +–NaN
00 Numeral +–
Numeral Numeral See note 1. +–
++++ER
–––ER –
NaN ER
Note 1. The results could be zero (including underflows), a numeral, +, or –.
2. ER: The Error Flag (A50003) turns ON and the instruction is not executed.
Precautions Au, Au+1, Ad, and Ad+1 must be floating-point data.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Au, Au+1, Ad, and Ad+1 are not floating-point data.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The exponent and mantissa of the result are 0.
N (A50008): The result is a negative number.
OF (A50009): The absolute value of the result is greater than the maximum
value that can be expressed for floating-point data.
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Floating-point Math Instructions Section 5-21
300
UF (A50010): Absolute value of the result is less than the minimum value
that can be expressed for floating-point data.
5-21-6FLOATING-POINT SUBTRACT: –F(455)
(455)
–F Mi Su R
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑–F(455)
Operand Data Areas
Mi: First minuend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: First result word CIO, G, A, DM
Su: First subtrahend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
When the execution condition OFF, –F(455) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, –F(455) subtracts the 32-bit floating-point content of Su and
Su+1 from the 32-bit floating-point content of Mi and Mi+1 and places the result
in R and R+1.
R+1 R
Mi Minuend (floating-point data, 32 bits)
Mi+1
Su Subtrahend (floating-point data, 32 bits)
Su+1
Result (floating-point data, 32 bits)
–
If the absolute value of the result is greater than the maximum value that can be
expressed for floating-point data, the Overflow Flag (A50009) will turn ON and
the result will be output as ±.
If the absolute value of the result is less than the minimum value that can be ex-
pressed for floating-point data, the Underflow Flag (A50010) will turn ON and the
result will be output as 0.
The various combinations of minuend and subtrahend data will produce the re-
sults shown in the following table.
Minuend
Subtrahend 0 Numeral +–NaN
00 Numeral +–
Numeral Numeral See note 1. +–
+––ER –
–+++ER
NaN ER
Note 1. The results could be zero (including underflows), a numeral, +, or –.
2. ER: The Error Flag (A50003) turns ON and the instruction is not executed.
Precautions Mi, Mi+1, Su, and Su+1 must be floating-point data.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Mi, Mi+1, Su, and Su+1 are not floating-point data.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The exponent and mantissa of the result are 0.
N (A50008): The result is a negative number.
OF (A50009): The absolute value of the result is greater than the maximum
value that can be expressed for floating-point data.
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Floating-point Math Instructions Section 5-21
301
UF (A50010): Absolute value of the result is less than the minimum value
that can be expressed for floating-point data.
5-21-7FLOATING-POINT MULTIPLY: *F(456)
(456)
*FMdMrR
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑*F(456)
Operand Data Areas
Md: First multiplicand word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: First result word CIO, G, A, DM
Mr: First multiplier word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
When the execution condition OFF, *F(456) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, *F(456) multiplies the 32-bit floating-point content of Md
and Md +1 by the 32-bit floating-point content of Mr and Mr +1 and places the
result in R and R+1.
R+1 R
Md Multiplicand (floating-point data, 32 bits)
Md+1
Mr Multiplier (floating-point data, 32 bits)
Mr+1
Result (floating-point data, 32 bits)
x
If the absolute value of the result is greater than the maximum value that can be
expressed for floating-point data, the Overflow Flag (A50009) will turn ON and
the result will be output as ±.
If the absolute value of the result is less than the minimum value that can be ex-
pressed for floating-point data, the Underflow Flag (A50010) will turn ON and the
result will be output as 0.
The various combinations of multiplicand and multiplier data will produce the r e -
sults shown in the following table.
Multiplicand
Multiplier 0 Numeral +–NaN
00 0 ER ER
Numeral 0See note 1. +/–+/–
+ER +/–+–
–ER +/––+
NaN ER
Note 1. The results could be zero (including underflows), a numeral, +, or –.
2. ER: The Error Flag (A50003) turns ON and the instruction is not executed.
Precautions Md, Md+1, Mr, and Mr+1 must be floating-point data.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Md, Md+1, Mr, and Mr+1 are not floating-point data.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The exponent and mantissa of the result are 0.
N (A50008): The result is a negative number.
OF (A50009): The absolute value of the result is greater than the maximum
value that can be expressed for floating-point data.
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Floating-point Math Instructions Section 5-21
302
UF (A50010): Absolute value of the result is less than the minimum value
that can be expressed for floating-point data.
5-21-8FLOATING-POINT DIVIDE: /F(457)
(457)
/F Dd Dr R
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑/F(457)
Operand Data Areas
Dd: First dividend word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: First result word CIO, G, A, DM
Dr: First divisor word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
When the execution condition OFF, /F(457) is not executed. When the execution
condition i s ON, /F(457) divides the 32-floating-point content of Dd and Dd+1 by
the 32-floating-point content of Dr and Dr+1 and places the result in R and R+1.
R+1 R
Dd Dividend (floating-point data, 32 bits)
Dd+1
Dr Divisor (floating-point data, 32 bits)
Dr+1
Result (floating-point data, 32 bits)
If the absolute value of the result is greater than the maximum value that can be
expressed for floating-point data, the Overflow Flag (A50009) will turn ON and
the result will be output as ±.
If the absolute value of the result is less than the minimum value that can be ex-
pressed for floating-point data, the Underflow Flag (A50010) will turn ON and the
result will be output as 0.
The various combinations of dividend and divisor data will produce the results
shown in the following table.
Dividend
Divisor 0 Numeral +–NaN
0ER +/–+–
Numeral 0See note 2. +/–+/–
+00 (see note 1) ER ER
–0 0* ER ER
NaN ER
Note 1. The results will be zero for underflows.
2. The results could be zero (including underflows), a numeral, +, or –.
3. ER: The Error Flag (A50003) turns ON and the instruction is not executed.
Precautions Dd, Dd+1, Dr, and Dr+1 must be floating-point data.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Dd, Dd+1, Dr, and Dr+1 are not floating-point data.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The exponent and mantissa of the result are 0.
N (A50008): The result is a negative number.
OF (A50009): The absolute value of the result is greater than the maximum
value that can be expressed for floating-point data.
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Floating-point Math Instructions Section 5-21
303
UF (A50010): Absolute value of the result is less than the minimum value
that can be expressed for floating-point data.
5-21-9DEGREES TO RADIANS: RAD(458)
(458)
RAD S R
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑RAD(458)
Operand Data Areas
S: First source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: First result word CIO, G, A, DM
When the execution condition OFF, RAD(458) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, RAD(458) converts the 32-floating-point content of S and
S+1 from degrees to radians, and places the result in R and R+1.
R+1 R
SSource (degrees, floating-point data, 32 bits)
S+1
Result (radians, floating-point data, 32 bits)
Degrees are converted to radians by means of the following formula:
Degrees x π/180 = radians
If the absolute value of the result is greater than the maximum value that can be
expressed for floating-point data, the Overflow Flag (A50009) will turn ON and
the result will be output as ±.
If the absolute value of the result is less than the minimum value that can be ex-
pressed for floating-point data, the Underflow Flag (A50010) will turn ON and the
result will be output as 0.
Precautions S and S+1must be floating-point data.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): S and S+1is not floating-point data.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The exponent and mantissa of the result are 0.
N (A50008): The result is a negative number.
OF (A50009): The absolute value of the result is greater than the maximum
value that can be expressed for floating-point data.
UF (A50010): Absolute value of the result is less than the minimum value
that can be expressed for floating-point data.
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Floating-point Math Instructions Section 5-21
304
5-21-10 RADIANS TO DEGREES: DEG(459)
(459)
DEG S R
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑RAD(459)
Operand Data Areas
S: First source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: First result word CIO, G, A, DM
When the execution condition OFF, DEG(459) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, DEG(459) converts the 32-floating-point content of S and
S+1 from degrees to radians, and places the result in R and R+1.
R+1 R
SSource (radians, floating-point data, 32 bits)
S+1
Result (degrees, floating-point data, 32 bits)
Degrees are converted to radians by means of the following formula:
Radians x 180/π = degrees
If the absolute value of the result is greater than the maximum value that can be
expressed for floating-point data, the Overflow Flag (A50009) will turn ON and
the result will be output as ±.
If the absolute value of the result is less than the minimum value that can be ex-
pressed for floating-point data, the Underflow Flag (A50010) will turn ON and the
result will be output as 0.
Precautions S and S+1must be floating-point data.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): S and S+1is not floating-point data.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The exponent and mantissa of the result are 0.
N (A50008): The result is a negative number.
OF (A50009): The absolute value of the result is greater than the maximum
value that can be expressed for floating-point data.
UF (A50010): Absolute value of the result is less than the minimum value
that can be expressed for floating-point data.
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Floating-point Math Instructions Section 5-21
305
5-21-11 SINE: SIN(460)
(460)
SIN S R
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑SIN(460)
Operand Data Areas
S: First source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: First result word CIO, G, A, DM
When the execution condition OFF, SIN(460) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, SIN(460) computes the sine of the angle (in radians) ex-
pressed as the 32-floating-point content of S and S+1, and places the result in R
and R+1.
R+1 R
SSource (floating-point data, 32 bits)
S+1
Result (sine value, floating-point data,
32 bits)
SIN
Specify the angle in radians for S and S+1. For information on converting from
degrees to radian, refer to
5-21-9 DEGREES-TO-RADIANS: RAD(458)
.
Relation Between Input Data and Result
S: Angle (radian) data
R: Result (sine)
R
Precautions S and S+1must be floating-point data and its absolute value of must be less than
65,536.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): The absolute value of S and S+1is 65,536 or greater.
S and S+1is not floating-point data.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The exponent and mantissa of the result are 0.
N (A50008): The result is a negative number.
OF (A50009): OFF when the computation is executed.
UF (A50010): OFF when the computation is executed.
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Floating-point Math Instructions Section 5-21
306
5-21-12 COSINE: COS(461)
(461)
COS S R
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑COS(461)
Operand Data Areas
S: First source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: First result word CIO, G, A, DM
When the execution condition OFF, COS(461) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, COS(461) computes the cosine of the angle (in radians)
expressed as the 32-floating-point content of S and S+1, and places the result in
R and R+1.
R+1 R
SSource (floating-point data, 32 bits)
S+1
Result (cosine value, floating-point
data, 32 bits)
COS
Specify the angle in radians for S and S+1. For information on converting from
degrees to radian, refer to
5-21-9 DEGREES-TO-RADIANS: RAD(458)
.
Relation Between Input Data and Result
S: Angle (radian) data
R: Result (cosine)
R
Precautions S and S+1must be floating-point data and its absolute value must be less than
65,536.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): The absolute value of S and S+1is 65,536 or greater.
S and S+1is not floating-point data.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The exponent and mantissa of the result are 0.
N (A50008): The result is a negative number.
OF (A50009): OFF when the computation is executed.
UF (A50010): OFF when the computation is executed.
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Floating-point Math Instructions Section 5-21
307
5-21-13 TANGENT: TAN(462)
(462)
TAN S R
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑TAN(462)
Operand Data Areas
S: First source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: First result word CIO, G, A, DM
When the execution condition OFF, TAN(462) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, TAN(462) computes the tangent of the angle (in radians)
expressed as the 32-floating-point content of S and S+1, and places the result in
R and R+1.
R+1 R
SSource (floating-point data, 32 bits)
S+1
Result (tangent value, floating-point
data, 32 bits)
TAN
Specify the angle in radians for S and S+1. For information on converting from
degrees to radian, refer to
5-21-9 DEGREES-TO-RADIANS: RAD(458)
.
If the absolute value of the result is greater than the maximum value that can be
expressed for floating-point data, the Overflow Flag (A50009) will turn ON and
the result will be output as ±.
Relation Between Input Data and Result
S: Angle (radian) data
R: Result (tangent)
R
Precautions S and S+1must be floating-point data and its absolute value must be less than
65,536.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): The absolute value of S and S+1is 65,536 or greater.
S and S+1is not floating-point data.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The exponent and mantissa of the result are 0.
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Floating-point Math Instructions Section 5-21
308
N (A50008): The result is a negative number.
OF (A50009): The absolute value of the result is greater than the maximum
value that can be expressed for floating-point data.
UF (A50010): OFF when the computation is executed.
5-21-14 SINE TO ANGLE: ASIN(463)
(463)
ASIN S R
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑ASIN(463)
Operand Data Areas
S: First source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: First result word CIO, G, A, DM
When the execution condition OFF, ASIN(463) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, ASIN(463) computes angle (in radians) for a sine ex-
pressed as the 32-floating-point content of S and S+1, and places the result in R
and R+1.
R+1 R
SSource (floating-point data, 32 bits)
S+1
Result (floating-point data, 32 bits)
SIN–1
The result is output to words R+1 and R as an angle (in radians) within the range
of –π/2 to π/2.
Relation Between Input Data and Result
S: Input data (sine)
R: Result (radians)
R
Precautions The sine must be floating-point data within the range of –1.0 to 1.0.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): The sine data is not within the range of –1.0 to 1.0.
The sine data is not floating-point data.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The exponent and mantissa of the result are 0.
N (A50008): The result is a negative number.
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Floating-point Math Instructions Section 5-21
309
OF (A50009): OFF when the computation is executed.
UF (A50010): OFF when the computation is executed.
5-21-15 COSINE TO ANGLE: ACOS(464)
(464)
ACOS S R
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑ACOS(464)
Operand Data Areas
S: First source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: First result word CIO, G, A, DM
When the execution condition OFF, ACOS(464) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, ACOS(464) computes the angle (in radians) for a co-
sine expressed as the 32-floating-point content of S and S+1, and places the
result in R and R+1.
R+1 R
SSource (floating-point data, 32 bits)
S+1
Result (floating-point data, 32 bits)
COS–1
The result is output to words R+1 and R as an angle (in radians) within the range
of 0 to π.
Relation Between Input Data and Result
S: Input data (cosine)
R: Result (radians)
R
Precautions The cosine must be floating-point data within the range of –1.0 to 1.0.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): The cosine data is not within the range of –1.0 to 1.0.
The cosine data is not floating-point data.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The exponent and mantissa of the result are 0.
N (A50008): OFF when the computation is executed.
OF (A50009): OFF when the computation is executed.
UF (A50010): OFF when the computation is executed.
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Floating-point Math Instructions Section 5-21
310
5-21-16 TANGENT TO ANGLE: ATAN(465)
(465)
ATAN S R
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑ATAN(465)
Operand Data Areas
S: First source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: First result word CIO, G, A, DM
When the execution condition OFF, ATAN(465) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, AT AN(465) computes the angle (in radians) for a tan-
gent expressed as the 32-floating-point content of S and S+1, and places the
result in R and R+1.
R+1 R
SSource (floating-point data, 32 bits)
S+1
Result (floating-point data, 32 bits)
TAN–1
The result is output to words R+1 and R as an angle (in radians) within the range
of –π/2 to π/2.
Relation Between Input Data and Result
S: Input data (tangent)
R: Result (radians)
R
Precautions The tangent must be floating-point data within a range of –1.0 to 1.0.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): The tangent is not within the range of –1.0 to 1.0.
The tangent is not floating-point data.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The exponent and mantissa of the result are 0.
N (A50008): The result is a negative number.
OF (A50009): OFF when the computation is executed.
UF (A50010): OFF when the computation is executed.
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Floating-point Math Instructions Section 5-21
311
5-21-17 SQUARE ROOT: SQRT(466)
(466)
SQRT S R
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑SQRT(466)
Operand Data Areas
S: First source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: First result word CIO, G, A, DM
When the execution condition OFF, SQRT(466) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, SQR T(466) computes the square root of the 32-float-
ing-point content of S and S+1, and places the result in R and R+1.
R+1 R
SSource (floating-point data, 32 bits)
S+1
Result (square root, floating-point data, 32 bits)
If the absolute value of the result is greater than the maximum value that can be
expressed for floating-point data, the Overflow Flag (A50009) will turn ON and
the result will be output as ±.
Relation Between Input Data and Result
S: Input data
R: Result
R
Precautions S and S+1must be non-negative floating-point data.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): S and S+1is a negative number.
S and S+1is not floating-point data.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The exponent and mantissa of the result are 0.
N (A50008): OFF when the computation is executed.
OF (A50009): The absolute value of the result is greater than the maximum
value that can be expressed for floating-point data.
UF (A50010): OFF when the computation is executed.
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Floating-point Math Instructions Section 5-21
312
5-21-18 EXPONENT: EXP(467)
(467)
EXP S R
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑EXP(467)
Operand Data Areas
S: First source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: First result word CIO, G, A, DM
When the execution condition OFF, EXP(467) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, EXP(467) computes the exponent for the 32-floating-point
content of S and S+1, and places the result in R and R+1. The operation is
executed with 2.718282 taken as the base (e).
R+1 R
SSource (floating-point data, 32 bits)
S+1
Result (exponent, floating-point data, 32 bits)
e
If the absolute value of the result is greater than the maximum value that can be
expressed for floating-point data, the Overflow Flag (A50009) will turn ON and
the result will be output as ±.
If the absolute value of the result is less than the minimum value that can be ex-
pressed for floating-point data, the Underflow Flag (A50010) will turn ON and the
result will be output as 0.
Relation Between Input Data and Result
S: Input data
R: Result
R
Precautions S and S+1must be floating-point data.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): S and S+1is not floating-point data.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The exponent and mantissa of the result are 0.
N (A50008): OFF when the computation is executed.
OF (A50009): The absolute value of the result is greater than the maximum
value that can be expressed for floating-point data.
UF (A50010): Absolute value of the result is less than the minimum value
that can be expressed for floating-point data.
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Floating-point Math Instructions Section 5-21
313
5-21-19 LOGARITHM: LOG(468)
(468)
LOG S R
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑LOG(468)
Operand Data Areas
S: First source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: First result word CIO, G, A, DM
When the execution condition OFF, LOG(468) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, LOG(468) computes the natural logarithm for the 32-float-
ing-point content of S and S+1, and places the result in R and R+1. The opera-
tion is executed with 2.718282 taken as the base (e).
R+1 R
SSource (floating-point data, 32 bits)
S+1
Result (exponent, floating-point data,
32 bits)
loge
If the absolute value of the result is greater than the maximum value that can be
expressed for floating-point data, the Overflow Flag (A50009) will turn ON and
the result will be output as ±.
Relation Between Input Data and Result
S: Input data
R: Result
R
Precautions S and S+1must be non-negative floating-point data.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): S and S+1is a negative number.
S and S+1is not floating-point data.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The exponent and mantissa of the result are 0.
N (A50008): The result is a negative number.
OF (A50009): The absolute value of the result is greater than the maximum
value that can be expressed for floating-point data.
UF (A50010): OFF when the computation is executed.
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Floating-point Math Instructions Section 5-21
(090)
INC D00010
0000
00
314
5-22 Increment/Decrement Instructions
The Increment/Decrement Instructions all either increment or decrement a num-
ber by one.
The content of the source word is overwritten with the instruction result for all
increment/decrement instructions.
5-22-1INCREMENT BCD: INC(090)
(090)
INC Wd Wd: Word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j INC(090)
When the execution condition is OFF, INC(090) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, INC(090) increments Wd, without af fecting carry (CY).
Wd must be BCD.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Wd is not BCD
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the content of D00010 is in-
cremented by 1 as a BCD value.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 INC(090) D00010
1234
D00010
1235
D00010
+ 1
5-22-2DECREMENT BCD: DEC(091)
(091)
DEC Wd Wd: Word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j DEC(091)
When the execution condition is OFF, DEC(091) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, DEC(091) decrements Wd, without affecting CY.
Wd must be BCD.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Wd is not BCD
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
Description
Precautions
Description
Precautions
Increment/Decrement Instructions Section 5-22
(091)
DEC D00010
0000
00
(092)
INCB D00010
0000
00
315
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the content of D00010 is
decremented by 1 as a BCD value.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 DEC(091) D00010
1234
D00010
1233
D00010
– 1
5-22-3INCREMENT BINARY: INCB(092)
(092)
INCB Wd Wd: Word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j INCB(092)
When the execution condition is OFF, INCB(092) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, INCB(092) increments Wd, without affecting carry (CY).
INCB(092) works the same way as INC(090) except that it increments a binary
value instead of a BCD value.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of Wd after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the content of D00010 is in-
cremented by 1 as a binary value.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 INCB(092) D00010
2A5F
D00010
2A60
D00010
+ 1
0N
Description
Precautions
Increment/Decrement Instructions Section 5-22
(093)
DECBD00020
0000
02
316
5-22-4DECREMENT BINARY: DECB(093)
(093)
DECB Wd Wd: Word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j DECB(093)
When the execution condition is OFF, DECB(093) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, DECB(093) decrements Wd, without affecting carry
(CY). DECB(093) works the same way as DEC(091) except that it decrements a
binary value instead of a BCD value.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of Wd after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the content of D00020 is
decremented by 1 as a binary value.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000002
00001 DECB(093) D00020
2C5A
D00020
2C59
D00020
– 1
0
5-22-5DOUBLE INCREMENT BCD: INCL(094)
(094)
INCL Wd Wd: Word CIO, G, A, DM
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j INCL(094)
When the execution condition is OFF, INCL(094) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, INCL(094) increments the 8-digit BCD number con-
tained in Wd+1 and Wd, without affecting carry (CY). Wd+1 contains the 104,
105, 106, and 107 digits.
Wd and Wd+1 must be BCD.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Wd or Wd+1 is not BCD
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
Description
Precautions
Description
Precautions
Increment/Decrement Instructions Section 5-22
(094)
INCL D01000
0000
00
0000
00 (095)
DECL D01000
317
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the content of D0100 and
D01001 is incremented by 1 as a BCD value.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 INCL(094) D01000
+ 1
Wd+1: D01001 Wd: D01000
0000 9999 Wd+1: D01001 Wd: D01000
0001 0000
5-22-6DOUBLE DECREMENT BCD: DECL(095)
(095)
DECL Wd Wd: Word CIO, G, A, DM
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j DECL(095)
When the execution condition is OFF, DECL(095) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, DECL(095) decrements the 8-digit BCD number con-
tained in Wd+1 and Wd, without affecting carry (CY). Wd+1 contains the 104,
105, 106, and 107 digits.
Wd and Wd+1 must be BCD.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Wd or Wd+1 is not BCD
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the content of D0100 and
D01001 is decremented by 1 as a BCD value.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 DECL(095) D01000
– 1
Wd+1: D01001 Wd: D01000
0001 0000 Wd+1: D01001 Wd: D01000
0000 9999
5-22-7DOUBLE INCREMENT BINARY: INBL(096)
(096)
INBL Wd Wd: Word CIO, G, A, DM
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j INBL(096)
When the execution condition is OFF, INBL(096) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, INBL(096) increments the 8-digit binary number con-
tained in Wd+1 and Wd, without affecting carry (CY). Wd+1 contains the 164,
165, 166, and 167 digits.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Description
Precautions
Description
Precautions
Increment/Decrement Instructions Section 5-22
0000
00 (096)
INBL 0500
(097)
DCBL 1200
0000
00
318
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of Wd+1 after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the content of CIO 0500 and
CIO 0501 is incremented by 1 as a binary value.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 INBL(096) 0500
Wd+1: CIO 0501 Wd: CIO 0500 + 1
0
0 0 0 0 F F F F Wd+1: CIO 0501 Wd: CIO 0500
0001 0000
N
5-22-8DOUBLE DECREMENT BINARY: DCBL(097)
(097)
DCBL Wd Wd: Word CIO, G, A, DM
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j DCBL(097)
When the execution condition is OFF, DCBL(097) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, DCBL(097) decrements the 8-digit binary number con-
tained in Wd+1 and Wd, without affecting carry (CY). Wd+1 contains the 164,
165, 166, and 167 digits.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of Wd+1 after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the content of CIO 1200 and
CIO 1201 is decremented by 1 as a binary value.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 DCBL(097) 1200
Wd+1: CIO 1201 Wd: CIO 1200 Wd+1: CIO 1201 Wd: CIO 1200
0001 0000 0000 FFFF
– 1
0N
Description
Precautions
Increment/Decrement Instructions Section 5-22
319
5-23 Special Math Instructions
The Special Math Instructions preform special arithmetic operations. MAX(165)
searches a range of words for the maximum value. MIN(166) searches a range
of words for the minimum value. SUM(167) adds a range of words. ROOT(140)
finds the square root of a value. FDIV(141) performs float-point division.
APR(142) finds the sine or cosine of an angle or extrapolates the Y value for a
given X value based on a table of coordinates.
5-23-1FIND MAXIMUM: MAX(165)
Variations
j MAX(165)
(165)
MAX C R1DR1: 1st word in range CIO, G, A, T, C, DM,
D: Destination word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
C: Control word CIO, G, A, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, MAX(165) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, MAX(165) searches the range of memory from R1 to
R1+N–1 for the address that contains the maximum value, outputs the maximum
value to the destination word (D) and, if bit 14 of C is ON, outputs the memory
address of the word containing the maximum value to IR0.
If bit 14 of C is ON and more than one address contains the same maximum val-
ue, the lowest of the addresses will be output to IR0.
The number of words within the range (N) is contained in the 3 rightmost digits of
C, which must be BCD between 001 and 999.
When bit 15 of C is OFF, data within the range is treated as unsigned binary and
when it is ON the data is treated as signed binary. Refer to
3-2 Data Area Struc-
ture
for information on signed and unsigned binary data.
15 14 13 12 11 00
Output address to IR0
1 (ON): Yes.
0 (OFF): No.
Number of words
in range (N)
Not used – set to zero.
Data type
1 (ON): Signed binary
0 (OFF): Unsigned binary
C:
The 3 rightmost digits of C must be BCD between 001 and 999.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): The 3 rightmost digits of C are not BCD between 001 and 999.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The maximum value is zero.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of the maximum value.
Description
Precautions
Special Math Instructions Section 5-23
(165)
MAX D03000 0200 D00500
0000
00
320
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, MAX(165) outputs to D00500
the maximum value within the 10-word range from CIO 0200 to CIO 0209. Be-
cause bit 14 of C is ON, the lower address of the two addresses within the range
that contain the maximum value is output to IR0.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 MAX(165) D03000
0200
D00500
D03000 4010
0200 3F2A $00C8
0201 51C3 $00C9
0202 E02A $00CA
0203 7C9F $00CB
0204 2A20 $00CC
0205 A827 $00CD
0206 2A20 $00CE
0207 E02A $00DF
0208 C755 $00D0
0209 94DC $00D1
D00500 E02A
IR0 00CA
10 words
5-23-2FIND MINIMUM: MIN(166)
Variations
j MIN(166)a
(166)
MIN C R1DR1: 1st word in range CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
D: Destination word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
C: Control word CIO, G, A, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, MIN(166) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, MIN(166) searches the range of memory from R1 to
R1+N–1 for the address that contains the minimum value, outputs that value to
the destination word (D) and, if bit 14 of C is ON, outputs the memory address of
the word containing the minimum value to IR0.
If bit 14 of C is ON and more than one address contains the same minimum val-
ue, the lowest of the addresses will be output to IR0.
The number of words within the range (N) is contained in the 3 rightmost digits of
C, which must be BCD between 001 and 999.
Description
Special Math Instructions Section 5-23
0000
00 (166)
MIN 2000 D00000 D00100
321
When bit 15 of C is OFF, data within the range is treated as unsigned binary and
when it is ON the data is treated as signed binary. Refer to
3-2 Data Area Struc-
ture
for information on signed and unsigned binary data.
15 14 13 12 11 00
Output address to IR0
1 (ON): Yes.
0 (OFF): No.
Number of words
in range (N)
Not used – set to zero.
Data type
1 (ON): Signed binary
0 (OFF): Unsigned binary
C:
The 3 rightmost digits of C must be BCD between 001 and 999.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): The 3 rightmost digits of C are not BCD between 001 and 999.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The minimum value is zero.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of the minimum value.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, MIN(166) outputs to D00100
the minimum value within the 10-word range from D00000 to D00009. Because
bit 14 of C is ON, the lower address of the two addresses within the range that
contain the minimum value is output to IR0.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 MIN(166) 2000
D00000
D00200
CIO 2000 4010
D00000 3F2A $2000
D00001 51C3 $2001
D00002 E02A $2002
D00003 7C9F $2003
D00004 2A20 $2004
D00005 A827 $2005
D00006 2A20 $2006
D00007 E02A $2007
D00008 C755 $2008
D00009 94DC $2009
D00100 2A20
IR0 2004
10 words
Precautions
Special Math Instructions Section 5-23
0000
00 (167)
SUM #4010 D00000 D00100
322
5-23-3SUM: SUM(167)
Variations
j SUM(167)
(167)
SUM C R1DR1: 1st word in range CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
D: 1st destination word CIO, G, A, DM
C: Control word CIO, G, A, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, SUM(167) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, SUM(167) computes the sum of the contents of words
from R 1 to R1+N–1 and outputs that value to the destination words (D and D+1).
The number of words within the range (N) is contained in the 3 rightmost digits of
C, which must be BCD between 001 and 999.
When bit 15 of C is OFF, data within the range is treated as unsigned binary and
when it is ON the data is treated as signed binary. Refer to
3-2 Data Area Struc-
ture
for information on signed and unsigned binary data.
When bit 14 of C is OFF, data within the range is treated as BCD and when it is
ON the data is treated as binary. The data will be treated as BCD when bit 14 is
OFF, even if bit 15 is ON, indicating signed binary data.
15 14 13 12 11 00
Data type
1 (ON): Binary
0 (OFF): BCD
Number of words
in range (N)
Not used – set to zero.
Data type
1 (ON): Signed binary
0 (OFF): Unsigned binary
C:
The 3 rightmost digits of C must be BCD between 001 and 999.
R1 and R1+N–1 must be in the same data area.
If bit 14 of C is OFF (setting for BCD data), all data within the range R1 to R1+N–1
must be BCD.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): The 3 rightmost digits of C are not BCD between 001 and 999.
Bit 14 of C is OFF, indicating BCD data, but the content of a
word within the range is not BCD.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is zero.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of D+1.
Example When C I O 000000 is ON in the following example, SUM(167) computes the sum
of the contents of the words within the 10-word range from D00000 to D00009
and outputs that value to D00100 and D00101. The data is treated as unsigned
binary data because the leftmost digit of the control word is 4.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 SUM(167) #4010
D00000
D00100
Description
Precautions
Special Math Instructions Section 5-23
323
0
D00000 3F2A $2000
D00001 51C3 $2001
D00002 E02A $2002
D00003 7C9F $2003
D00004 2A20 $2004
D00005 A827 $2005
D00006 2A20 $2006
D00007 E02A $2007
D00008 C755 $2008
D00009 94DC $2009
52578
D00101 D00100
0005 2678
10 words
100 0
01
10
04
Binary
Unsigned
C : #
5-23-4BCD SQUARE ROOT: ROOT(140)
(140)
ROOT Sq R R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Sq: 1st source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j ROOT(140)
When the execution condition is OFF, ROOT(140) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, ROOT(140) computes the square root of the 8-digit
content o f S q and Sq+1 and places the result in R. The fractional portion is trun-
cated.
R
Sq+1 Sq
Sq must be BCD.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Sq or the content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): ON when the result is 0.
Description
Precautions
Special Math Instructions Section 5-23
324
The following example shows how to take the square root of a 4-digit number
and then round the result.
When CIO 000000 is ON, first the words to be used are cleared to all zeros and
then the value whose square root is to be taken is moved to Sq+1. The result,
which has twice the number of digits as the correct answer (because
ROOT(140) operates on an 8-digit number and here we are using a 4-digit num-
ber), is placed in D00102, and the digits are split into two different words, the
leftmost two digits to CIO 0011 for the answer and the rightmost two digits to
D00103 s o that the answer in CIO 0011 can be rounded. The last step is to com-
pare the value in D00103 so that CIO 0011 can be incremented using the Great-
er Than Flag (A50005) when the value must be rounded up.
In this example, √6017 = 77.56. The result is rounded off to an integer, according
to the digit in the tenths place. Thus, 77.56 is rounded off to 78.
00000 LD 000000
00001 jBSET(041) #0000
D00100
D00101
00002 jMOV(030) 0010
D00101
00003 jROOT(140) D00100
D00102
00004 jMOV(030) #0000
0011
00005 jMOV(030) #0000
D00103
00006 jMOVD(043) D00102
#0012
0011
00007 jMOVD(043) D00102
#0210
D00103
00008 jCMP(020) D00103
#4900
00009 LD A50005
00010 jINC(090) 0011
010
6017
D00101 D00100
00000000
0000
D00101 D00100
60170000
D00102
7756
0011 D00103
00775600
0000
60170000= 7756.932
D00103 0011
00000000
00000000
5600 > 4900?
0011
0078
Address Instruction Operands
(041)
jBSET #0000 D00100 D00101
(030)
jMOV 0010 D00101
(140)
jROOT D00100 D00102
(030)
jMOV #0000 0011
(030)
jMOV #0000 D00103
(043)
jMOVD D00102 #0012 0011
(043)
jMOVD D00102 #0210 D00103
(020)
jCMP D00103 #4900
(090)
jINC 0011
0000
00
A500
05
Example
Special Math Instructions Section 5-23
(274)
ROTB 0001 D00100
0000
00
325
5-23-5BINARY ROOT: ROTB(274)
(274)
ROTB S R
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑ROTB(274)
Operand Data Areas
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
S: First source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
When the execution condition is OFF, ROTB(274) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, ROTB(274) computes the square root of the 32-bit
binary content of the specified word (S) and outputs the integer portion of the
result to the specified result word (R). The fraction portion is eliminated.
RS+1 S
Binary data (32 bits) Binary data (16 bits)
The range of data that can be specified for words S+1 and S is 0000 0000 to
3FFF FFFF. If a number from 4000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF is specified, it will be
treated as 3FFF FFFF for the square root computation.
Precautions S, S+1 must be non-negative between 0000 0000 and 3FFF FFFF.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): S, S+1 is negative (leftmost bit of S+1 is “1”).
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
= (A50006) The output data is all zeroes.
N (A50008) OFF when ROTB(274) is executed.
OF (A50009) The input data (S+1, S) is within the range of 4000 0000 to
7FFF FFFF.
UF (A50010) OFF when ROTB(274) is executed.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the square root of the data in
CIO 0002 and CIO 0001 is computed, and the result (integer only) is placed in
D00100.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 ROTB(274) 0001
D00100
014B 5A91
1234
D00100
CIO 0002 CIO 0001
Square root computation
(with fraction eliminated)
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Special Math Instructions Section 5-23
326
5-23-6FLOATING POINT DIVIDE: FDIV(141)
Variations
j FDIV(141)
(141)
FDIV Dd Dr R Dr: 1st divisor word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
Dd: 1st dividend word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, FDIV(141) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, FDIV(141) divides the floating-point value in Dd and
Dd+1 by that in Dr and Dr+1 and places the result in R and R+1.
R+1 R
Quotient
Dd+1 DdDr+1 Dr
To represent the floating point values, the rightmost seven digits are used for the
mantissa and the leftmost digit is used for the exponent, as shown in the diagram
below. The mantissa is expressed as a value less than one, i.e., to seven deci-
mal places.
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
First word
exponent (0 to 7)
sign of exponent 0: +
1: –
1010000100010001
mantissa (leftmost 3 digits)
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Second word
mantissa (rightmost 4 digits)
0001000100010011
= 0.1111113 x 10–2
Dd, Dd+1, Dr and Dr+1 must be BCD. Dr and Dr+1 cannot contain zero.
The dividend and divisor must be between 0.0000001 x 10–7 and
0.9999999 x 107. The results must be between 0.1 x 10–7 and 0.9999999 x 107.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Dr and Dr+1 contain 0.
Dd, Dd+1, Dr, or Dr+1 is not BCD.
The result is not between 0.1 x 10–7 and 0.999999 x 107.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): ON when the result is 0.
The following example shows how to divide two 4-digit whole numbers (i.e.,
numbers without fractions) so that a floating-point value can be obtained.
Description
Precautions
Example
Special Math Instructions Section 5-23
327
First the original numbers must be placed in floating-point form. Because the
numbers are originally without decimal points, the exponent will be 4 (e.g., 3452
would equal 0.3452 x 104). All of the moves are to place the proper data into con-
secutive words for the final division, including the exponent and zeros. Data
movements for Dd and Dd+1 are shown at the right below. Movements for Dr
and Dr+1 are basically the same.The original values to be divided are in D00000
and D00001. The final division is also shown.
D00000
3452
D00101 D00100
0000
0000
D00101 D00100
40000000
4000
D00101 D00100
43450000
D00000
3452
D00101 D00100
43452000
D00101 D00100
43452000
D00103 D00102
40079000
D00003 D00002
24369620
÷
0.4369620 x 102
00000 LD 000000
00001 jMOV(030) #0000
D00100
00002 jMOV(030) #0000
D00102
00003 jMOV(030) #4000
D00101
00004 jMOV(030) #4000
D00103
00005 jMOVD(043) D00000
#0021
D00101
00006 jMOVD(043) D00000
#0300
D00100
00007 jMOVD(043) D00001
#0021
D00103
00008 jMOVD(043) D00001
#0300
D00102
00009 jFDIV(141) D00100
D00102
D00002
Address Instruction Operands
(030)
jMOV #0000 D00100
(030)
jMOV #0000 D00102
(030)
jMOV #4000 D00101
(030)
jMOV #4000 D00103
(043)
jMOVD D00000 #0021 D00101
(043)
jMOVD D00001 #0021 D00103
(043)
jMOVD D00001 #0300 D00102
(141)
jFDIV D00100 D00102 D00002
0000
00
(043)
jMOVD D00000 #0300 D00100
Special Math Instructions Section 5-23
(142)
APR #0000 D00000 D00100
0000
00
0000
02 (142)
APR #0001 D00010 D00200
328
5-23-7ARITHMETIC PROCESS: APR(142)
Variations
j APR(142)
(142)
APR C S R S: Source data CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
C: Control word CIO, G, A, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, APR(142) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, the operation of APR(142) depends on the control word
C. If C is 0000 or 0001, APR(142) computes the sine or cosine of S. S in units of
tenths of degrees.
If C is a word address, APR(142) extrapolates the Y value for the X value in S
based on coordinates (forming line segments) entered in advance in a table be-
ginning at C.
For trigonometric functions, S must be BCD between 0000 and 0900 (between
0° and 90°). For linear extrapolation, S must be BCD when set for BCD.
C must be #0000, #0001, or a word address.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): For trigonometric functions, S is greater than 0900 or not BCD.
For linear extrapolation, S is not BCD when set for BCD or
the table is not readable.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): ON when the result is 0.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of the results.
The following example shows APR(142) used to calculate the sine of 30°. The
sine function is specified because C is #0000.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 APR(142) #0000
D00000
D00100
Source data Result
S: D00000 R: D00100
010
1
10010–1 10–1 10–2 10–3 10–4
0300 5000
Enter input data not exceeding #0900
in BCD form. Result data has four significant
digits, fifth
and higher digits are ignored.
The result for sin(90) will be
0.9999, not 1.
The following example shows APR(142) used to calculate the cosine of 30°. The
cosine function is specified because C is #0001.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 APR(142) #0000
D00010
D00200
Description
Precautions
Sine Function
Cosine Function
Special Math Instructions Section 5-23
Y0
Y2
Y1
Y3
Y4
Ym
X0X1X2X3X4Xm
X
Y
0000
00 (142)
APR D00000 0010 0011
329
Source data Result
S: D00010 R: D00200
010
1
10010–1 10–1 10–2 10–3 10–4
0300 8660
Enter input data not exceeding #0900
in BCD form. Result data has four significant
digits, fifth
and higher digits are ignored.
The result for cos(0) will be
0.9999, not 1.
APR(142) linear extrapolation is specified when C is a word address.
The content of word C specifies the number of coordinates in a data table start-
ing at C+2, the form of the source data, and whether data is BCD or binary.
Bits 00 to 0 7 contain the number (binary) of line coordinates less 1, m–1. Bits 08
to 12 are not used. Bit 13 specifies either f(x)=f(S) or f(x)=f(Xm–S): OFF specifies
f(x)=f(S) and ON specifies f(x)=f(X m–S). Bit 14 determines whether the output is
BCD or binary: OFF specifies BCD and ON specifies binary. Bit 15 determines
whether the input is BCD or binary: OFF specifies BCD and ON specifies binary.
15 14 13 Not used. 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Source data form
1 (ON): f(x)=f(Xm–S)
0 (OFF): f(x)=f(S)
Output form
Input form
Number of coordinates
minus one (m–1)
C:
Enter the coordinates of the m+1 end points, which define the m line segments,
as shown in the following table. Enter all coordinates in binary form.
Word Coordinate
C+1 X0
C+2 Y0
C+3 X1
C+4 Y1
C+5 X2
C+6 Y2
↓ ↓
C+(2m+1) Xm (max. X value)
C+(2m+2) Ym
The following example demonstrates the construction of a linear extrapolation
with 1 2 coordinates. The block of data is continuous, as it must be, from D00000
to D00026 (C to C + (2× 12 + 2)). The input data is taken from CIO 0010, and the
result is output to CIO 0011.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 APR(142) D00000
0010
0011
Linear Extrapolation
Special Math Instructions Section 5-23
!
330
D00000 $C00B
D00001 $0000 X0
D00002 $0000 Y0
D00003 $0005 X1
D00004 $0F00 Y1
D00005 $001A X2
D00006 $0402 Y2
↓↓ ↓
D00025 $05F0 X12
D00026 $1F20 Y12
1100000000001011
Bit
15 Bit
00
Output and
input both
binary
(m–1 = 11: 12 line
segments)
Content Coordinate
x=S
In this case, the source word, CIO 0010, contains 0014, and f(0014) = 0726 is
output to R, CIO 0011.
X
Y
$1F20
$0F00
$0726
$0402
(0,0) $0005 $0014 $001A $05F0
(x,y)
5-24 PID and Related Instructions
5-24-1 PID CONTROL: PID(270)
(270)
PID S C D
Ladder Symbol Operand Data Areas
S: Input word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
D: Output word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
C: First parameter word CIO, G, A, DM,
Caution A total of 33 continuous words starting with P1 must be provided for PID(––) to
operate correctly. Also, PID(––) may not operate dependably in any of the fol-
lowing situations: In interrupt programs, in subroutines, between IL(02) and
ILC(03), between JMP(04) and JME(05), and in step programming
(STEP(08)/SNXT(09)). Do not program PID(––) in these situations.
Description When the execution condition OFF, PID(270) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, PID(270) carries out PID control according to the desig-
nated parameters. It takes the specified input range of binary data from the con-
tents of input word S and carries out the PID action according to the parameters
that are set. The result is then stored as the manipulated variable in output word
D.
If the settings are not within the range of the PID parameters, the Error Flag
(A5003) will turn ON and the PID action will not be executed. The Error Flag will
also turn ON if the actual sampling period is two or more times the sampling peri-
od that has been set. In this case, however, the PID action will still be executed.
(CVM1 V2)
PID and Related Instructions Section 5-24
331
If the manipulated variable after the PID action exceeds the upper limit, the
Greater Than (>) Flag (A50005) will turn ON and the result will be output at the
upper limit. If the manipulated variable after the PID action is less than the lower
limit, the Less Than (<) Flag (A50007) will turn ON and the result will be output at
the lower limit.
PID parameter words range from C through C+38. The PID parameters are con-
figured as shown below.
Word 15 to 12 11 to 8 7 to 4 3 to 0
CSet value (SV)
C+1 Proportional band (P)
C+2 Tik = Integral constant (See note.)
C+3 Tdk = Derivative constant (See note.)
C+4 Sampling period (τ)
C+5 2-PID parameter (α)PID forward/
reverse designation
C+6 Manipulated
variable
output limit
control
Input range Integral and
derivative unit Output range
C+7 Manipulated variable output lower limit
C+8 Manipulated variable output upper limit
C+9 to C+38 Work area (Cannot be accessed directly from program.)
Note The values set for words C+2 and C+3 will vary according to the unit designated
in bits 04 to 07 of C+6.
Parameters
Item Contents Setting range
Set value (SV) The target value of the process being
controlled. Binary data (of the same
number of bits as specified for
the input range)
Proportional band The parameter for P action expressing the
proportional control range/total control range. 0001 to 9999 (4-digit BCD);
(0.1% to 999.9%, in units of
0.1%)
Tik A constant expressing the strength of the
integral action. As this value increases, the
integral strength decreases.
0001 to 8191 (4-digit BCD);
(9999 = Integral operation not
executed) (See note 1.)
Tdk A constant expressing the strength of the
derivative action. As this value increases, the
derivative strength decreases.
0001 to 8191 (4-digit BCD)
(0000 = Derivative operation
not executed) (See note 1.)
Sampling period (τ)Sets the period for executing the PID action. 0001 to 9999 (4-digit BCD);
(0.01 to 99.99 s, in units of
10 ms)
2-PID parameter
(α)The input filter coefficient. Normally use 0.65
(i.e., a setting of 000). The filter efficiency
decreases as the coefficient approaches 0.
000: α = 0.65
Setting from 100 to 199
means that the value of the
rightmost two digits is set from
α= 0.00 to α= 0.99. (See note
2.)
PID
forward/reverse
designation
Determines the direction of the proportional
action. 0: Reverse action
1: Forward action
Manipulated
variable output limit
control
Determines whether or not limit control will
apply to the manipulated variable output. 0: Disabled (no limit control)
1: Enabled (limit control)
PID and Related Instructions Section 5-24
332
Item Setting rangeContents
Input range The number of input data bits. 0: 8 bits
1: 9 bits
5: 13 bits
6: 14 bits
Output range The number of output data bits. {The number
of output bits is automatically the same as the
number of input bits.)
1
:
9
bit
s
2: 10 bits
3: 11 bits
4: 12 bits
6
:
14
bit
s
7: 15 bits
8: 16 bits
Integral and
derivative unit Determines the unit for expressing the integral
and derivative constants. 1: Sampling period multiple
9: Time (unit: 100 ms)
Manipulated
variable output
lower limit
The lower limit for when the manipulated
variable output limit is enabled. 0000 to FFFF (binary)
(See note 3.)
Manipulated
variable output
upper limit
The upper limit for when the manipulated
variable output limit is enabled. 0000 to FFFF (binary)
(See note 3.)
Note 1. When the unit is designated as 1, the range is from 1 to 8,191 times the peri-
od. When the unit is designated as 9, the range is from 0.1 to 819.1 s. When
9 is designated, set the integral and derivative times to within a range of 1 to
8,191 times the sampling period.
2. Setting the 2-PID parameter (α) to 000 yields 0.65, the normal value.
3. When the manipulated variable output limit control is enabled (i.e., set to
“1”), set the values as follows:
0000 lower limit upper limit output range maximum value
PID CONTROL Action Execution Condition OFF
All data that has been set is retained. When the execution condition is OFF, the
manipulated variable can be written to the output word (D) to achieve manual
control.
Rising Edge of the Execution Condition
The work area is initialized based on the PID parameters that have been set and
the PID control action is begin. Sudden and radical changes in the manipulated
variable output are not made when starting action to avoid adverse affect on the
controlled system (bumpless operation).
When PID parameters are changed, they first become valid when the execution
condition changes from OFF to ON.
Execution Condition ON
The PID action is executed at the intervals based on the sampling period, ac-
cording to the PID parameters that have been set.
Sampling Period and PID Execution Timing
The sampling period is the time interval to retrieve the measurement data for
carrying out a PID action. PID(270), however, is executed according to CPU
cycle, so there may be cases where the sampling period is exceeded. In such
cases, the time interval until the next sampling is reduced.
PID and Related Instructions Section 5-24
333
PID Control Method PID control actions are executed by means of PID control with feed-forward con-
trol (two degrees of freedom).
When overshooting is prevented with simple PID control, stabilization of distur-
bances is slowed (1). If stabilization of disturbances is speeded up, on the other
hand, overshooting occurs and response toward the target value is slowed (2).
With feed-forward PID control, there is no overshooting, and response toward
the target value and stabilization of disturbances can both be speeded up (3).
Simple PID Control Feed-forward PID control
As the target response is slowed,
the disturbance response worsens.
As the disturbance response is
slowed, the target response worsens.
Overshoot
Target response Disturbance response
(1)
(2)
Control Actions Proportional Action (P)
Proportional action is an operation in which a proportional band is established
with respect to the set value (SV), and within that band the manipulated variable
(MV) is made proportional to the deviation. An example for reverse operation is
shown in the following illustration
If the proportional action is used and the present value (PV) becomes smaller
than the proportional band, the manipulated variable (MV) is 100% (i.e., the
maximum value). Within the proportional band, the MV is made proportional t o
the deviation (the difference between from SV and PV) and gradually decreased
until the SV and PV match (i.e., until the deviation is 0), at which time the MV will
be 0% (i.e., the minimum value). The MV will also be 0% when the PV is larger
than the SV.
The proportional band is expressed as a percentage of the total input range. The
smaller the proportional band, the larger the proportional constant and the stron-
ger the corrective action will be. With proportional action an offset (residual devi-
ation) generally occurs, but the offset can be reduced by making the proportional
band smaller. If it is made too small, however, hunting will occur.
Proportional Action (Reverse Action) Adjusting the Proportional Band
SV
Proportional band too narrow (hunting occurring)
Proportional band just right
Proportional band too wide (large offset)
Offset
Manipulated
variable
Proportional
band
100%
0% SV
PID and Related Instructions Section 5-24
334
Integral Action (I)
Combining integral action with proportional action reduces the offset according
to the time that has passed. The strength of the integral action is indicated by the
integral time, which is the time required for the manipulated variable of the inte-
gral action to reach the same level as the manipulated variable of the proportion-
al action with respect to the step deviation, as shown in the following illustration.
The shorter the integral time, the stronger the correction by the integral action
will be. If the integral time is too short, the correction will be too strong and will
cause hunting to occur.
Integral Action
Pi Action and Integral Time
Deviation
Manipulated
variable
Step response
PI action
P action
Ti: Integral time
0
0
0
0
Deviation
Manipulated
variable
Step response
Derivative Action (D)
Proportional action and integral action both make corrections with respect to the
control results, so there is inevitably a response delay. Derivative action com-
pensates for that drawback. In response to a sudden disturbance it delivers a
large manipulated variable and rapidly restores the original status. A correction
is executed with the manipulated variable made proportional to the incline (de-
rivative coefficient) caused by the deviation.
PID and Related Instructions Section 5-24
335
The strength of the derivative action is indicated by the derivative time, which is
the time required for the manipulated variable of the derivative action to reach
the same level as the manipulated variable of the proportional action with re-
spect to the step deviation, as shown in the following illustration. The longer the
derivative time, the stronger the correction by the derivative action will be.
Derivative Action
PD Action and Derivative Time
Step response
PD action
P action
Td: Derivative time
D action
0
0
0
0
Ramp response
Deviation
Manipulated
variable
Deviation
Manipulated
variable
PID Action
PID action combines proportional action (P), integral action (I), and derivative
action (D). It produces superior control results even for control objects with dead
time. It employs proportional action to provide smooth control without hunting,
integral action to automatically correct any of fset, and derivative action to speed
up the response to disturbances.
Step Response of PID Control Action Output
Ramp Response of PID Control Action Output
PID action
I action
P action
D action
Step response
0
0
Deviation
Manipulated
variable
PID action
I action
P action
D action
Ramp response
0
0
Deviation
Manipulated
variable
Direction of Action When using PID action, select either of the following two control directions. In
either direction, the MV increases as the difference between the SV and the PV
increases.
PID and Related Instructions Section 5-24
336
•Forward action: MV is increased when the PV is larger than the SV.
•Reverse action: MV is increased when the PV is smaller than the SV.
Manipulated
variable
Reverse Action
Low
temperature SV High
temperature
Forward Action
100%
0%
SV
100%
0%
Proportional
band
Manipulated
variable
Proportional
band
Low
temperature High
temperature
Adjusting PID Parameters The general relationship between PID parameters and control status is shown
below.
•When i t i s not a problem if a certain amount of time is required for stabilization
(settlement time), but it is important not to cause overshooting, then enlarge
the proportional band.
SV
Control by measured PID
When P is enlarged
•When overshooting is not a problem but it is desirable to quickly stabilize con-
trol, then narrow the proportional band. If the proportional band is narrowed too
much, however, then hunting may occur.
When P is narrowed
Control by measured PID
SV
•When there is broad hunting, or when operation is tied up by overshooting and
undershooting, it is probably because integral action is too strong. The hunting
will be reduced if the integral time is increased or the proportional band is en-
larged.
Control by measured PID
(when loose hunting occurs)
Enlarge I or P.
SV
•If the period is short and hunting occurs, it may be that the control system re-
sponse is quick and the derivative action is too strong. In that case, set the de-
rivative action lower.
Control by measured PID
(when hunting occurs in a short period)
Lower D.
SV
PID and Related Instructions Section 5-24
337
Precautions PID data must be within prescribed ranges.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): PID data is outside of the allowable range.
The actual sampling period is two or more times the sam-
pling period that has been set.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): The PID action is executed.
> (A50005): The MV after the PID action exceeds the upper limit.
< (A50007): The MV after the PID action is less than the lower limit.
5-24-2 LIMIT CONTROL: LMT(271)
(271)
LMT S C D
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑LMT(271)
Operand Data Areas
D: Output word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM, DR, IR
C: First limit word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
S: Input word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Description When the execution condition is OFF, LMT(271) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, LMT(271) controls output data according to whether or
not the specified input data (signed 16-bit binary) is within the upper and lower
limits. The contents of words C and C+1 are as follows:
CLower limit data (minimum output data)
C+1 Upper limit data (maximum output data)
If the input data (S) is less than the lower limit (C), the lower limit data will be
output to D and the Less Than Flag (A50007) will turn ON.
If the input data (S) is greater than the upper limit (C+1), the upper limit data will
be output to D and the Greater Than Flag (A50005) will turn ON.
If the input data (S) is greater than or equal to the lower limit (C) and less than or
equal to the upper limit (C+1), the input data (S) will be output to D.
Upper limit (C+1)
Output
Input
Lower limit (C)
Precautions The lower limit (C) must be less than or equal to the upper limit (C+1).
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): The upper limit setting is less than the lower limit.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
> (A50005): The input data (S) is greater than the upper limit (C+1).
EQ (A50006): The output data is all zeros.
< (A50007): The input data (S) is less than the lower limit (C).
N (A50008): The output data is a negative number.
(CVM1 V2)
PID and Related Instructions Section 5-24
(271)
LMT 0001 D00100 D00110
0000
00
338
Example When CIO 000000 turns ON in the following example, one of the following will
occur:
•If the binary content of CIO 0001 is within the range specified by the content o f
D00100 and D00101, the content of CIO 0001 will be output to D00110.
•If the binary content of CIO 0001 is greater than the content of D00101, the
content of D00101 will be output to D00110.
•If the binary content of CIO 0001 is less than the content of D00100, the con-
tent of D00100 will be output to D00110.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 LMT(271) 0001
D00100
D00110
4FFF
CIO 0001
41F5
D00110
41F5
E325
E325 < 41F5 < 4FFF
4FFF
CIO 0001
78CC
D00110
4FFF
E325
A50005 (>) ON
D00101 D00100 D00101 D00100
78CC > 4FFF
5-24-3 DEAD-BAND CONTROL: BAND(272)
(272)
BAND S C D
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑BAND(272)
Operand Data Areas
D: Output word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM, DR, IR
C: First limit word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
S: Input word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Description When the execution condition is OFF, BAND(272) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, BAND(272) controls output data according to whether
or not the specified input data (signed 16-bit binary) is within the upper and lower
limits (dead band). The contents of words C and C+1 are as follows:
CLower limit data (dead band lower limit)
C+1 Upper limit data (dead band upper limit)
If the input data (S) is less than the lower limit (C), the difference between the
input data minus the lower limit data will be output to D and the Less Than Flag
(A50007) will turn ON.
If the input data (S) is greater than the upper limit (C+1), the difference between
the input data minus the upper limit data will be output to D and the Greater Than
Flag (A50005) will turn ON.
(CVM1 V2)
PID and Related Instructions Section 5-24
(272)
BAND 0001 D00100 D00110
0000
00
339
If the input data (S) is greater than or equal to the lower limit (C) and less than or
equal to the upper limit (C+1), 0000 will be output to D and the Equals Flag
(A50006) will turn ON.
Upper limit (C+1)
Output
Input
Lower limit (C)
If the output data is less than 8000 or greater than 7FFF, the sign will reverse. For
example, i f the lower limit is 0100 and the input data is 8000, the output data will
be as follows:
8000 – 0100 = 7F00
(–32,768)10 (256)10 (32,512)10
Precautions The lower limit (C) must be less than or equal to the upper limit (C+1).
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): The upper limit setting is less than the lower limit.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
> (A50005): The input data (S) is greater than the upper limit (C+1).
EQ (A50006): The output data is all zeros.
< (A50007): The input data (S) is less than the lower limit (C).
N (A50008): The output data is a negative number.
Example When CIO 000000 turns ON in the following example, one of the following will
occur:
•If the binary content of CIO 0001 is within the range specified by the content o f
D00100 and D00101, 0000 will be output to D00110.
•If the binary content of CIO 0001 is greater than the content of D00101, the
result of (CIO 0001 minus D00101) will be output to D00110.
•If the binary content of CIO 0001 is less than the content of D00100, the result
of (CIO 0001 minus D00100) will be output to D00110.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 BAND(272) 0001
D00100
D00110
4FFF
CIO 0001
41F5
D00110
0000
1000
1000 < 41F5 < 4FFF
E325
A50006 (=) ON
D00101 D00100
0000
4FFF
CIO 0001
D00110
28CD
78CC < 4FFF
A50005 (>) ON
D00101 D00100
78CC
78CC – 4FFF = 28CD
PID and Related Instructions Section 5-24
340
5-24-4 DEAD-ZONE CONTROL: ZONE(273)
(273)
ZONE S C D
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑ZONE(273)
Operand Data Areas
D: Output word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM, DR, IR
C: First bias word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
S: Input word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Description When the execution condition is OFF, ZONE(273) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, ZONE(273) adds the specified bias to the specified in-
put data (signed 16-bit binary) and places the result in a specified word. The con-
tents of words C and C+1 are as follows:
CNegative bias
C+1 Positive bias
If the input data (S) is less than zero, the input data plus the negative bias will be
output to D and the Less Than Flag (A50007) will turn ON.
If the input data (S) is greater than zero, the input data plus the positive bias will
be output to D and the Greater Than Flag (A50005) will turn ON.
If the input data (S) is equal to zero, 0000 will be output to D and the Equals Flag
(A50006) will turn ON.
Positive bias (C+1)
Output
Input
Negative bias (C)
If the output data is less than 8000 or greater than 7FFF, the sign will reverse. For
example, i f the negative bias is FF00 and the input data is 8000, the output data
will be as follows:
8000 +FF00 = 7F00
(–32,768)10 (–256)10 (32,512)10
Precautions The negative bias (C) must be less than or equal to the positive bias (C+1).
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): C is less than C+1.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
> (A50005): The input data (S) is greater than 0000.
EQ (A50006): The output data is all zeros.
< (A50007): The input data (S) is less than 0000.
N (A50008): The output data is a negative number.
(CVM1 V2)
PID and Related Instructions Section 5-24
(273)
ZONE 0001 D00100 D00110
0000
00
(130)
ANDW 0010 0020 D00200
0000
00
341
Example When CIO 000000 turns ON in the following example, one of the following will
occur:
•If the binary content of CIO 0001 is less than zero, the result of CIO 0001 plus
D00100 will be output to D00110.
•If the binary content of CIO 0001 is equal to zero, 0000 will be output to
D00110.
•If the binary content of CIO 0001 is greater than the content of D00100, the
result of (CIO 0001 plus D00100) will be output to D00110.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 ZONE(273) 0001
D00100
D00110
0500
CIO 0001
41F5
D00110
46F5
0100
41F5 > 0
FF9C
A50005 (>) ON
D00101 D00100
41F5 + 0500 = 46F5
0100
CIO 0001
D00110
8868
88CC < 0
A50007 (<) ON
D00101 D00100
88CC
88CC + FF9C = 8868
A50008 (N) ON
5-25 Logic Instructions
The logic instructions perform logic operations on word data.
5-25-1LOGICAL AND: ANDW(130)
Variations
j ANDW(130)
(130)
ANDW I1I2RI2: Input 2 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
I1: Input 1 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, ANDW(130) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, ANDW(130) logically AND’ s corresponding bits of I1
and I2 and places the result in R.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of R after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the logical AND is taken of
corresponding bits in CIO 0010 and CIO 0020 and the results is placed in corre-
sponding bits of D00200.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 ANDW(130) 0010
0020
D00200
Description
Precautions
Logic Instructions Section 5-25
(131)
ORW 0010 0020 D00200
0000
00
342
1001100110011001
15 00
0101010101010101
0001000100010001
15 00
15 00
CIO 0010
CIO 0020
D00200
5-25-2LOGICAL OR: ORW(131)
Variations
j ORW(131)
(131)
ORW I1I2RI2: Input 2 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
I1: Input 1 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, ORW(131) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, O RW(131) logically OR’s corresponding bits of I1 and I2
and places the result in R.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of R after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the logical OR is taken of cor-
responding bits in CIO 0010 and CIO 0020 and the results is placed in corre-
sponding bits of D00200.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 ORW(131) 0010
0020
D0020
1001100110011001
15 00
0101010101010101
1101110111011101
15 00
15 00
CIO 0010
CIO 0020
D00200
Description
Precautions
Logic Instructions Section 5-25
(132)
XORW 0010 0020 D00200
0000
00
343
5-25-3EXCLUSIVE OR: XORW(132)
Variations
j XORW(132)
(132)
XORW I1I2RI2: Input 2 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
I1: Input 1 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, XORW(132) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, XORW(132) exclusively OR’s corresponding bits of
I1 and I2 and places the result in R.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of R after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the logical exclusive OR is
taken of corresponding bits in CIO 0010 and CIO 0020 and the results is placed
in corresponding bits of D00200.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 XORW(132) 0010
0020
D0020
1001100110011001
15 00
0101010101010101
1100110011001100
15 00
15 00
CIO 0010
CIO 0020
D00200
5-25-4EXCLUSIVE NOR: XNRW(133)
Variations
j XNRW(133)
(133)
XNRW I1I2RI2: Input 2 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
I1: Input 1 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, XNRW(133) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, XNRW(133) exclusively NOR’s corresponding bits of
I1 and I2 and places the result in R.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Description
Precautions
Description
Precautions
Logic Instructions Section 5-25
(133)
XNRW 00100 0020 D00200
0000
00
(134)
ANDL 0010 0020 D00200
0000
00
344
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of R after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the logical exclusive NOR is
taken of corresponding bits in CIO 0010 and CIO 0020 and the results is placed
in corresponding bits of D00200.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 XNRW(133) 0010
0020
D0020
1001100110011001
15 00
0101010101010101
0011001100110011
15 00
15 00
CIO 0010
CIO 0020
D00200
5-25-5DOUBLE LOGICAL AND: ANDL(134)
Variations
j ANDL(134)
(134)
ANDL I1I2RI2: Input 2 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM
I1: Input 1 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, ANDL(134) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, ANDL(134) logically AND’s corresponding bits of I1 and
I1+1 with I2 and I2+1 and places the result in R and R+1.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of R+1 after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the logical AND is taken of
corresponding bits in CIO 0010 to CIO 0011 and CIO 0020 to CIO 0020 and the
results is placed in corresponding bits of D00200 and D00201.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 ANDL(134) 0010
0020
D0020
Description
Precautions
Logic Instructions Section 5-25
(135)
ORWL 0010 0020 D00200
0000
00
345
1001 1001
15 00
0101 0101
0001 0001
15 00
15 00
CIO 0011
CIO 0021
D00201
0111 1001
15 00
0101 1111
0101 1001
15 00
15 00
CIO 0010
CIO 0020
D00200
5-25-6DOUBLE LOGICAL OR: ORWL(135)
Variations
j ORWL(135)
(135)
ORWL I1I2RI2: Input 2 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM
I1: Input 1 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, ORWL(135) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, ORWL(135) logically OR’s corresponding bits of I1
and I1+1 with I2 and I2+1 and places the result in R and R+1.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of R+1 after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the logical OR is taken of cor-
responding bits in CIO 0010 to CIO 0011 and CIO 0020 to CIO 0020 and the re-
sults is placed in corresponding bits of D00200 and D00201.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 ORWL(135) 0010
0020
D0020
1001 1001
15 00
0101 0101
1101 1101
15 00
15 00
CIO 0011
CIO 0021
D00201
0111 1001
15 00
0101 1111
0111 1111
15 00
15 00
CIO 0010
CIO 0020
D00200
Description
Precautions
Logic Instructions Section 5-25
(136)
XORL 0010 0020 D00200
0000
00
346
5-25-7DOUBLE EXCLUSIVE OR: XORL(136)
Variations
j XORL(136)
(136)
XORL I1I2RI2: Input 2 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM
I1: Input 1 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, XORL(136) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, XORL(136) exclusively OR’s the contents of I1 and I1+1
with I2 and I2+1 bit-by-bit and places the result in R and R+1.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of R+1 after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the logical exclusive OR is
taken o f corresponding bits in CIO 0010 to CIO 0011 and CIO 0020 to CIO 0020
and the results is placed in corresponding bits of D00200 and D00201.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 XORL(136) 0010
0020
D0020
1001 1001
15 00
0101 0101
1100 1100
15 00
15 00
CIO 0011
CIO 0021
D00201
0111 1001
15 00
0101 1111
0010 0110
15 00
15 00
CIO 0010
CIO 0020
D00200
5-25-8DOUBLE EXCLUSIVE NOR: XNRL(137)
Variations
j XNRL(137)
(137)
XNRL I1I2RI2: Input 2 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: Result word CIO, G, A, DM
I1: Input 1 CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, XNRL(137) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, XNRL(137) exclusively NOR’s the contents of I1 and
I1+1 with I2 and I2+1 bit-by-bit and places the result in R and R+1.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Description
Precautions
Description
Precautions
Logic Instructions Section 5-25
(137)
XNRL 0010 0020 D00200
0000
00
(138)
COM D02000
0000
00
347
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of R+1 after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the logical exclusive NOR is
taken o f corresponding bits in CIO 0010 to CIO 0011 and CIO 0020 to CIO 0020
and the results is placed in corresponding bits of D00200 and D00201.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 XNRL(137) 0010
0020
D0020
1001 1001
15 00
0101 0101
0011 0011
15 00
15 00
CIO 0011
CIO 0021
D00201
0111 1001
15 00
0101 1111
1101 1001
15 00
15 00
CIO 0010
CIO 0020
D00200
5-25-9COMPLEMENT: COM(138)
(138)
COM Wd Wd: Word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j COM(138)
When the execution condition is OFF, COM(138) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, COM(138) turns OFF all ON bits and turns ON all OFF
bits in Wd.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of R after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the complement of the status
of each bit in D02000 is taken and written back to D02000, i.e., the status of each
bit is reversed.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 COM(138) D02000
Description
Precautions
Logic Instructions Section 5-25
(139)
COMLD02000
0000
00
348
1001100110011001
0110011001100110
15 00
15 00
Original
Complement
D02000
5-25-10 DOUBLE COMPLEMENT: COML(139)
(139)
COML Wd Wd: Word CIO, G, A, DM
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j COML(139)
When the execution condition is OFF, COML(139) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, COML(139) turns OFF all ON bits and turns ON all
OFF bits in Wd and Wd+1.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): The result is 0.
N (A50008): Shows the status of bit 15 of R+1 after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the complement of the status
of each bit in D02000 and D02001 is taken and written back to D02000 and
D02001, i.e., the status of each bit is reversed.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 COML(139)
00002 D02000
0101 0101
1010 1010
15 00
15 00
0101 1111
1010 0000
15 00
15 00
Original
Complement
D02000D02001
Description
Precautions
Logic Instructions Section 5-25
349
5-26 T ime Instructions
The first two Time Instructions convert time formats. The last two Time Instruc-
tions add/subtract time from calendar values.
5-26-1HOURS TO SECONDS: SEC(143)
(143)
SEC S R R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
S: 1st source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j SEC(143)
Description When the execution condition is OFF, SEC(143) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, SEC(143) converts time notation in hours/minutes/se-
conds to an equivalent time in seconds only.
For the source data, the seconds are designated in bits 00 through 07 and the
minutes are designated in bits 08 through 15 of S. The hours are designated in
S+1. The maximum is thus 9,999 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
The results are output to R and R+1. The maximum obtainable value is
35,999,999 seconds.
Precautions S and S+1 must be BCD and must be in the proper hours/minutes/seconds for-
mat.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): S or S+1 are not BCD.
Number of seconds or minutes exceeds 59.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): ON when the result is 0.
Example When 00000 is OFF (i.e., the execution condition is ON), the following instruc-
tion would convert the hours, minutes, and seconds given in D00100 and
D00101 to seconds and store the results in D00200 and D00201 as shown.
D00100 3 2 0 7
D00101 2 8 1 5
D00200 5 9 2 7
D00201 1 0 1 3
2,815 hrs, 32 min, 07 s
10,135,927 s
00000 LD NOT 000000
00001 SEC(143) D00100
D00200
(143)
SEC D00100 D00200 Address Instruction Operands
0000
00
Time Instructions Section 5-26
350
5-26-2SECONDS TO HOURS: HMS(144)
(144)
HMS S R R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
S: 1st source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j HMS(144)
Description When the execution condition is OFF, HMS(144) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, HMS(144) converts time notation in seconds to an
equivalent time in hours/minutes/seconds.
The number of seconds designated in S and S+1 is converted to hours/minutes/
seconds and placed in R and R+1.
For the results, the seconds are placed in bits 00 through 07 and the minutes are
placed i n bits 08 through 15 of R. The hours are placed in R+1. The maximum will
be 9,999 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Precautions S+1 and S must be BCD and less than or equal to 3599 9999.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): S and/or S+1 do not contain BCD or exceed 35,999,999 s.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): ON when the result is 0.
Example When CIO 000000 is OFF in the following example, the following instruction
would convert the seconds given in D00000 and D00001 to hours, minutes, and
seconds and store the results in D00100 and D00101 as shown.
(144)
HMS D00000 D00100
D00000 5 9 2 7
D00001 1 0 1 3
D00100 3 2 0 7
D00101 2 8 1 5
10,135,927 s
2,815 hrs, 32 min, 07 s
00000 LD NOT 000000
00001 HMS(144) D00000
D00100
0000
00 Address Instruction Operands
5-26-3CALENDAR ADD: CADD(145)
Variations
j CADD(145)
(145)
CADD C T R T: 1st time word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
C: 1st calendar word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Description When the execution condition is OFF, CADD(145) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, CADD(145) adds the time in words T and T+1 to the
calendar data in words C, C+1, and C+2, and outputs the result to words R, R+1,
and R+2.
CADD(145) (and the Calendar/Clock Area (G001 to G004)) corrects for leap
year.
Time Instructions Section 5-26
(145)
CADD D01000 D02000 D03000
0000
00
351
The following table shows the format of calendar information. The format is the
same for the results output to R, R+1, and R+2.
Word Bits Contents Possible values
C00 to 07 Seconds 00 to 59
08 to 15 Minutes 00 to 59
C+1 00 to 07 Hours 00 to 23 (24-hour system)
08 to 15 Day of month 01 to 31 (adjusted by month and for leap year)
C+2 00 to 07 Month 01 to 12
08 to 15 Year 00 to 99 (Rightmost two digits of year)
The following table shows the format of the time information.
Word Bits Contents Possible values
T00 to 07 Seconds 00 to 59
08 to 15 Minutes 00 to 59
T+1 00 to 07 Hours 0000 to 9999
Precautions C, C+1, C+2, T, and T+1 must be BCD and in the proper format.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Time or calendar data is not in the correct format
(including impossible dates such as Feb. 30).
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): ON when the content of R, R+1, and R+2 is 0 after execu-
tion.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the time data in D02000 and
D02001 i s added to the calender data in D01000 through D01002 and output as
calender data to D03000 through D03002.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 CADD(145) D01000
D02000
D03000
90 07
28 18
40 30
1532
27 19
90 09
30 15
07 49
C + 2 : D01002
C + 1 : D01001
C : D01000
T + 1 : D02001
T : D02000
R + 2 : D03002
R + 1 : D03001
R : D03000
Time Instructions Section 5-26
0000
00 (146)
CSUB D00100 D02000 D00500
352
5-26-4CALENDAR SUBTRACT: CSUB(146)
Variations
j CSUB(146)
(146)
CSUB C T R T: 1st time word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
R: 1st result word CIO, G, A, DM
C: 1st calendar word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Description When the execution condition is OFF, CSUB(146) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, CSUB(146) subtracts the time in words T and T+1 from
the calendar data in words C, C+1, and C+2, and outputs the result to words R,
R+1, and R+2.
CSUB(146) (and the Calendar/Clock Area (G001 to G004)) corrects for leap
year.
The following table shows the format of calendar information. The format is the
same for the results output to R, R+1, and R+2.
Word Bits Contents Possible values
C00 to 07 Seconds 00 to 59
08 to 15 Minutes 00 to 59
C+1 00 to 07 Hours 00 to 23 (24-hour system)
08 to 15 Day of month 01 to 31 (adjusted by month and for leap year)
C+2 00 to 07 Month 01 to 12
08 to 15 Year 00 to 99 (Rightmost two digits of year)
The following table shows the format of the time information.
Word Bits Contents Possible values
T00 to 07 Seconds 00 to 59
08 to 15 Minutes 00 to 59
T+1 00 to 07 Hours 0000 to 9999
Precautions C, C+1, C+2, T, and T+1 must be BCD and in the proper format.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Time or calendar data is not in the correct format
(including impossible dates such as Feb. 30).
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): ON when the content of R, R+1, and R+2 is 0 after execu-
tion.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the time data in D02000 and
D02001 is subtracted from the calender data in D01000 through D01002 and
output as calender data to D00500 through D00502.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 CSUB(146) D00100
D00200
D00500
Time Instructions Section 5-26
353
90 04
12 18
40 30
1532
27 19
90 02
07 22
13 11
C + 2 : D00102
C + 1 : D00101
C : D00100
T + 1 : D02001
T : D02000
R + 2 : D00502
R + 1 : D00501
R : D00500
5-26-5 CLOCK COMPENSATION: DATE(179)
(179)
DATE C
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑DATE(179)
Operand Data Areas
C: Control word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
Description When the execution condition OFF, DATE(179) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, DATE(179) changes the internal clock setting according
to the clock data in four consecutive control words (first word: C). The internal
clock setting is copied to the clock function area (G001 to G004).
Word 15 to 08 07 to 00
CMinute (00 to 59) Second (00 to 59)
C+1 Day (01 to 31) Hour (00 to 23)
C+2 Year (00 to 99)* Month (01 to 12)
C+3 ––– Day (00 to 06)
00: Sunday
01: Monday
02: Tuesday
03: Wednesday
04: Thursday
05: Friday
06: Saturday
Note *Set the last two digits of the year.
Precautions The lower limit (C) must be less than or equal to the upper limit (C+1).
An error will not be generated even if the internal clock is set to a non-existent
date (such as November 31, for example).
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): The control word is not within the allowable range.
The content of a*DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
(CVM1 V2)
Time Instructions Section 5-26
000000 (179)
DATE D00100
354
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the internal clock setting will
be changed according to the content of D00100 through D00103.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 DATE(179) D00100
2632
2513
9405
0003
D00100
D00101
D00102
D00103
May 25, 1994 (Wednesday)
1:26:32 PM
5-27 Special Instructions
FAL(006) and FALS(007) are used to generate error codes and signals from the
program. IORF(184) is used to refresh specified I/O words. IODP(189) is used t o
output displays on SYSMAC BUS2 Slaves, I/O Control Units, or I/O Interface
Units. EMBC(171) is used to change the EM Area bank. SRCH(164) is used to
search a specified range of words for a value.
5-27-1FAILURE/SEVERE FAILURE ALARM: FAL(006) and FALS(007)
FAILURE ALARM: FAL(006)
(006)
FAL N M M: 1st message word CIO, G, A, #, DM
N: FAL number 000 to 511
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j FAL(006)
SEVERE FAILURE ALARM: FALS(007)
(007)
FALS N M M: 1st message word CIO, G, A, #, DM
N: FAL number 001 to 511
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
FAL(006) and FALS(007) are provided so that the programmer can output error
numbers and messages for use in operation, maintenance, and debugging.
When executed with an ON execution condition, the FAL(006) instruction will
turn ON the bit in the Auxiliary Area that corresponds to the FAL number. Bits
A43001 to A46115 correspond to FAL numbers 001 to 511. FAL number 000 is
used to reset FAL errors (see below).
Description
Special Instructions Section 5-27
355
When executed with an ON execution condition, both FAL(006) and FALS(007)
cause an error code to be output to A400. The error code identifies the FAL num-
ber (FAL(006) and FALS(007) use the same FAL numbers) and whether the er-
ror is an FAL or FALS error, as shown in the table. If an error occurs that is more
serious than the one recorded in A400 (including errors other than those gener-
ated with FAL(006) and FALS(007)), the new error code will replace the previous
one. The system also outputs error codes to A400. Refer to
Section 8 Error Pro-
cessing
for details on error code priority.
FAL number FAL error code FALS error code
001 4101 C101
002 4102 C102
. . .
. . .
. . .
511 42FF C2FF
When FAL(006) is executed with an ON execution condition, the FAL Instruction
Flag (A40215) will be turned ON, and the ALARM indicator on the front of the
CPU will light, but PC operation will continue. When FALS(007) is executed with
an ON execution condition, the FALS Instruction Flag (A40106) will be turned
ON, the ERROR indicator will light, all outputs will be turned OFF, and PC opera-
tion will stop.
Operand M determines whether or not a message will be output to the CVSS
when an FAL(006) or FALS(007) instruction is executed. If M is input as a num-
ber (#0000 to #FFFF), the message function is disabled. If M is an address, it is
the leading address of an 8-word table containing a 16-character ASCII mes-
sage. Refer to
5-36-3 DISPLAY MESSAGE: MSG(195)
, for information on the
format for the message data. If the contents of words M to M+7 are changed after
an FAL(006) or FALS(007) instruction is executed, the message will also be
changed.
FAL errors can be cleared by executing the FAL(006) instruction with N equal to
000, o r from the CVSS. FALS errors can be cleared from the CVSS or turning the
power OFF and ON after first correcting the cause of the error.
When FAL(006) is executed with N=000 and M equal to an FAL number (0001 to
0511), both the error code in A400 and the bit between A43001 and A46115 cor-
responding to the FAL number in M will be reset.
When FAL(006) is executed with N=000 and M equal to FFFF, all non-fatal errors
will be cleared, i.e., all errors that don’t stop PC operation will be cleared, and
words A400 and A430 to A461 will be reset.
N must be between 000 and 511 for FAL(006) or between 001 and 511 for
FALS(007).
If M designates the first word in a table containing a message, it cannot be one of
the last seven words in a data area.
FAL(006) and FALS(007) share FAL numbers. If two instructions use the same
FAL number, only the first instruction using the FAL number Will be recognized.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Resetting Errors
Precautions
Special Instructions Section 5-27
(006)
FAL 000 #0001
0000
01
0000
02 (007)
FALS 002 D00100
0000
00 (006)
FAL 001 #0000
356
Flags ER (A50003): N contains improper data.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
A40215: The FAL Instruction Flag will be turned ON when an
FAL(006) instruction is executed.
A40106: The FALS Instruction Flag will be turned ON when an
FALS(007) instruction is executed.
A43001 to A46115:
These flags are turned ON to indicate the FAL numbers for
which FAL(006) or FALS(007) have been executed.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, a non-fatal error is generated
as FAL 001, the ALARM indicator on the CPU lights, A43001 turns ON, and 4101
is output to A400. Program execution will continue.
When CIO 000001 turns ON, the FAL 001 error is cleared, A43001 turns OFF,
the error code in A400 is cleared (if it is 4101), and the ALARM indicator turns off
(assuming no other errors have occurred).
When CIO 000002 turns ON, a fatal error is generated as FAL 002, the ERROR
indicator on the CPU lights, all outputs are turned OFF, and C102 is output to
A400. Program execution will stop. If a Programming Device is connected and
online, the message stored in D00100 through D00107 will also be displayed as
an error message.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 FAL(006) 001
#0000
00002 LD 000001
00003 FAL(006) 000
#0001
00004 LD 000002
00005 FALS(007) 002
D00100
5-27-2 FAILURE POINT DETECTION: FPD(177)
(177)
FPD C T D T: Monitoring time CIO, G, A, #, DM
D: First register word CIO, G, A, DM
C: Control data #
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Description FPD(177) is used to monitor the execution of an instruction block according to
specified conditions, detect errors, and determine the input conditions responsi-
ble for the errors. FPD(177) is used either to monitor the time between the
execution o f FPD(177) and the execution of a diagnostic output or to determine
the input in the instruction block that is preventing an output from being turned
ON.
FPD(177) can be used in the program as many times as desired, but each must
use a different D even if the same message is being output.
(CVM1 V2)
Special Instructions Section 5-27
357
The following diagram illustrates the type of program section that can be diag-
nosed with FPD(177). The instruction block that is diagnosed by FPD(177)
starts at the fist LD after FPD(177) (excluding LD for TR bits) and ends at the
next output or special (right-hand) instruction (except for OUT for TR bits).
The program sections marked by dashed lines in the following diagram can be
written according to the needs of the particular program application. The proces-
sing programming section triggered by CY is optional and can used any instruc-
tions but LD and LD NOT. The logic diagnostic instructions and execution condi-
tion can consist of any combination of NC or NO conditions desired.
A500
04 Processing after
error detection.
Execution
condition Branch
Logic
diagnostic
instructions
Diagnostic
output
(177
FPD C T D
(CY Flag)
Time Monitoring When the execution condition is OFF, FPD(177) is not executed. When the ex e-
cution condition is ON, FPD(177) monitors the time until the diagnostic output is
executed with an ON execution condition. If this time exceeds T, the following will
occur:
1, 2, 3...
1. An FAL(06) error is generated with the FAL number specified in the first two
digits of C. If 00 is specified, however, an error will not be generated.
2. The CY Flag (A 50004) is turned ON. An error processing program section
can be executed using the CY Flag if desired.
3. If bit 15 of C is ON, a preset message with up to 8 ASCII characters will be
displayed on the Peripheral Device along with the bit address mentioned in
step 2.
The following chart shows the timing that occurs when the execution condition
for FPC(177) turns ON.
Execution condition
for FPD(177)
Diagnostic output
CY (A50004)
Monitoring time Monitoring time
Error detected Error not detected because
diagnostic output turned
ON during monitoring time.
Logic Diagnosis FPD(177) also searches for the input condition that is responsible for the diag-
nostic output not turning ON and outputs diagnostic results and, if specified, a
message. The following instructions are examined: LD (excluding LD for TR
bits), LD NOT, AND, AND NOT, OR , and OR NOT. Operands addressed indi-
rectly through index registers, however, are not examined. If more than one in-
put condition is OFF, the input condition on the highest instruction line and near-
est the left bus bar is selected.
Special Instructions Section 5-27
358
When IR 00000 to IR 00003 are ON in the following example, the normally
closed condition IR 00002 would be found as the cause of the diagnostic output
not turning ON.
00000 00002
00001 00003
Diagnostic
output
The logic diagnosis operation runs independently from the time monitoring op-
eration. The bit address information bit (bit 15 of D) can be examined to see if
information has been output for logic diagnosis.
Control Data The function of the control data bits in C are shown in the following diagram.
15 14 08 07 00
FAL number
(2-digit BCD, 00 to 99)
C:
Not used. Set to zero.
Diagnostics output
0 (OFF): Bit address output (binary)
1 (ON): Bit address and message output (ASCII)
Diagnostics Output There are two ways to output the bit address of the OFF condition detected in the
logic diagnosis operation.
1, 2, 3...
1. Bit address output (used when bit 15 of C is OFF).
Bit 15 of D indicates whether or not bit address information is stored in D+1.
If there is, bit 14 of D indicates whether the input condition is normally open
or closed.
15 14 13 00D:
Not used.
Input condition
0 (OFF): Normally open
1 (ON): Normally closed
Bit address information bit
0 (OFF): Not recorded in D+1.
1 (ON): Recorded in D+1.
D+1 contains the memory address of the operand of the input condition. The
absolute memory address is given in the same form used for indirect ad-
dressing. Refer to
Section 3 Memory Areas
and to the discussion of indirect
addressing on page 70 for details on absolute memory addresses.
2. Bit address and message output (used when bit 15 of C is ON).
Bit 15 of D indicates whether or not there is bit address information stored in
D+1 to D+3. If there is, bit 14 of D indicates whether the input condition is
normally open or closed. Refer to the following table.
Special Instructions Section 5-27
359
Words D+1 to D+8 contain information in ASCII displayed on a Peripheral
Device along with the bit address when FPD(177) is executed. Words D+5
to D+8 contain the message preset by the user as shown in the following
table.
Word Bits 15 to 08 Bits 07 to 00
D+1 20 = space First ASCII character of bit address
D+2 Second ASCII character of bit address Third ASCII character of bit address
D+3 Fourth ASCII character of bit address Fifth ASCII character of bit address
D+4 2D = “–” “30”=normally open,
“31”=normally closed
D+5 First ASCII character of message Second ASCII character of message
D+6 Third ASCII character of message Fourth ASCII character of message
D+7 Fifth ASCII character of message Sixth ASCII character of message
D+8 Seventh ASCII character of message Eighth ASCII character of message
Note If 8 characters are not needed in the message, input “0D” after the
last character.
Setting the Monitoring Time The procedure below can be used to automatically set the monitoring time, T,
under actual operating conditions when specifying a word operand for T. This
operation cannot be used if a constant is set for T.
1, 2, 3...
1. Connect a Peripheral Device, such as a Programming Console.
2. Use the Peripheral Device to turn ON control bit A09800.
3. Execute the program with A09800 turned ON. If the monitoring time current-
ly in T is exceeded, 1.5 times the actual monitoring time will be stored in T.
4. Turn OFF A09800 when an acceptable value has been stored in T.
Example In the following example, the FPD(177) is set to display the bit address and mes-
sage (“EMG”) when a monitoring time of 15 s is exceeded.
The first two instruction lines store the message “EMG” in D00105 and D00106.
The control data for FPD(177) specifies a FAL number of 010 and message out-
put.
An error will be detected if CIO 002000 does not turn ON within 15 s after CIO
000000 turns ON. When the error is detected, an FAL error number 010 will be
generated, the ASCII of the address of the bit responsible for CIO 0020000 not
turning O N would be output to D00101 through D00103, and the bit address and
message “EMG” would be displayed on a Peripheral Device. CY would also turn
ON, causing the contents of CIO 0005 to be moved to D00200.
Special Instructions Section 5-27
(030)
MOV #454D D00105
A500
(177)
FPD #8010 #0150 D00100
0000
00200000
(030)
MOV #470D D00106
(030)
MOV 0005 D00200
A500
0000
0000
0000
15
00
01
02
03
04
04
00
First Scan Flag
CY
360
In the following example, it is assumed that CIO 000001 through CIO 000004 are
all ON, thus CIO 000003 is output as the address of the bit responsible for CIO
002000 not turning ON.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD A50015
00001 MOV(030) #454D
D00105
00002 MOV(030) #047D
D00106
00003 LD 000000
00004 FPD(177) #8010
#0150
D00100
00005 AND A50004
00006 MOV(030) 0005
D00200
00007 LD 000001
00008 OR 000002
00009 LD NOT 000003
00010 OR NOT 000004
00011 AND LD
00012 OUT 002000
The contents of D00100 through D00108 would be as follows for the conditions
described above. This data would be displayed on the Peripheral Device as
“000003 – 1EMG.
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Meaning
D00100 1 1 (Not used.) Bit information present, NC
D00101 3 0 3 0 “00” Bit address
(di l d)
D00102 3 0 3 0 “00” (displayed)
D00103 3 0 3 3 “03”
D00104 2 D 0 1 “–1” Message
(di l d)
D00105 4 5 4 D “EM”
g
(displayed)
D00106 4 7 0 D “G”
Return
D00107 0 0 0 0 Spaces Message
(i d)
D00108 0 0 0 0 Spaces
g
(ignored)
Flags ER (A50003): T is not BCD.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Control word data is incorrect.
CY (A50004): Time between the execution of FPD(177) and the execution
of a diagnostic output exceeds T.
Special Instructions Section 5-27
(178)
WDT #0030
0000
00
(178)
WDT #3900
0000
01
(178)
WDT #0100
0000
02
361
5-27-3 MAXIMUM CYCLE TIME EXTEND: WDT(178)
(178)
WDT T T: Timer value # (0000 to 3999)
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j WDT(178)
Generally, the maximum cycle time is designated in the PC Setup, and if the
cycle time exceeds the designated value, a fatal error (Cycle T ime Too Long) will
occur. WDT(178) allows you to extend the maximum cycle time during program
execution without changing the designate value in the PC Setup. WDT(178) is
useful w hen executing a process that requires a long cycle time to avoid causing
a fatal error.
Description When the execution condition is OFF, WDT(178) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, WDT(178) extends the maximum cycle time by 10 ms
times T. The value is set by default to 1,000 ms unless changed in PC Setup.
Time extension = 10 ms x T.
Specify T in BCD between 0000 and 3999 (i.e., 0 to 39,990 ms).
WDT(178) can be programmed and executed as many times as desired and
each will extend the maximum cycle time by the specified amount until the value
is set to 40,000 ms. If WDT(178) is executed after the value has reached 40,000
ms, it will remain set to 40,000 ms.
Flags There are no flags affected by this instruction.
Example This example assumes that the maximum cycle time is set to 1,000 ms when
execution of the following instructions is started.
When CIO 000000 turns ON, the maximum cycle time will be extended by 300
ms to 1,300 ms.
When CIO 000001 turns ON, an attempt will be made to extend the maximum
cycle time by 39,000 ms, but doing so will exceed 40,000 ms, so the timer will be
set to 40,000 ms.
When CIO 000002 turns ON, the maximum cycle time will not be extended be-
cause it is already at 40,000 ms, where it will stay.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 WDT(178) #0030
00002 LD 000001
00003 WDT(178) #3900
00004 LD 000002
00005 WDT(178) #0100
(CVM1 V2)
Special Instructions Section 5-27
0000
00 (184)
IORF 0010 0014
362
5-27-4I/O REFRESH: IORF(184)
(184)
IORF St E E: Ending word CIO
St: Starting word CIO
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j IORF(184)
When the execution condition is OFF, IORF(184) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, all words between St and E will be refreshed. This will be
in addition to the normal I/O refresh performed during the CPU’s scan.
IORF(184) can be used to refresh I/O words on the CPU, Expansion CPU, or
Expansion I/O Racks only. It cannot be used for other I/O words in SYSMAC
BUS or SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O Systems.
St must be less than or equal to E. If St is greater than E, the instruction will be
treated as NOP(000).
St and E must be in the I/O Area, CIO 0000 to CIO 0511.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
There are no flags affected by this instruction.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the status of all inputs allo-
cated t o bits in words from CIO 0010 through CIO 0014 will be read into memory,
refreshing the status of these input bits.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 IORF(184) 0010
0014
5-27-5I/O DISPLAY: IODP(189)
(189)
IODP C S S: Source word(s) CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
C: Control word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j IODP(189)
When the execution condition is OFF, IODP(189) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, IODP(189) outputs four characters to the 7-segment
display o n a SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O Slave Unit, I/O Control Unit, or I/O In-
terface Unit. The four characters can be in 7-segment display code in source
words S and S+1, or the content of a single hexadecimal source word (S).
The control word contains information defining the Unit to which the characters
will be output, whether the source data is hexadecimal or 7-segment display,
whether the characters are to flash or not, and whether the display can be con-
trolled from the Unit itself.
Description
Precautions
Flags
Description
Control Word
Special Instructions Section 5-27
(189)
IODP D15000 0200
0000
00
363
Bits 0 0 t o 0 6 specify the Unit to which the characters will be output (specifics are
shown in the following diagram). Bit 07 determines whether the source data is
hexadecimal (OFF) or 7-segment display code (ON). Bit 08 determines whether
the characters will flash (ON) or not (OFF).
If bit 09 of C is set for automatic display (ON), the characters will be displayed
regardless o f the Unit’ s display mode, but if bit 09 of C is OFF, the characters will
be displayed only when the Unit is set to display mode 3.
15 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 00
Unit type
0 (OFF): I/O Control/Interface
1 (ON): Remote I/O Slave
Rack number/
Slave number
Not used,
set to zero.
Data type
0 (OFF): Hexadecimal
1 (ON): 7-segment display code
C:
Automatic display
0 (OFF): No
1 (ON): Yes
Flashing display
0 (OFF): No
1 (ON): Yes
Master address
(Set to zero if
bit 06 is zero.)
If bit 07 is set for hexadecimal data, the characters are output as they are in the
source word. The rightmost digit will be the rightmost on the display.
If bit 07 is set for 7-segment display code, segments a to f of the leftmost digit are
contained in S bits 00 to 06, segments a to f of the second digit are contained in S
bits 08 to 14. Set bits 07 and 15 to zero. The segments for the third and fourth
digits follow the same pattern in word S+1, as shown in the following diagram.
The table shows the number of the bit that must be turned ON in S or S+1 to turn
ON each segment of each digit in the display.
Segment g f e d c b a
SDigit 1 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Digit 2 14 13 12 11 10 09 08
S+1 Digit 3 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Digit 4 14 13 12 11 10 09 08
S cannot be the last word in a data area when S and S+1 contain 7-segment
display code.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Control word data is incorrect.
The following example show how to produce the display “a051” from both a
7-segment display code.
When CIO 000000 is ON, the content of CIO 0200 and CIO 0201 is displayed
according to the specifications in D15000.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 IODP(189) D15000
0200
Precautions
Example
Special Instructions Section 5-27
g
fb
c
d
e
a
364
0000001110000010
Set to 0
Rack no. 2
Set to 0
I/O Interface Unit
Segment specified
Blinking indication
Automatic indication
MSB D15000 LSB
0111011100111111
7
CIO 0201
73F
gfedcba gfedcba
(LED4) (LED3)
(LED2) (LED1)
0110110100000110
gfedcba gfedcba
D
CIO 0200
606
R
M
0
R
M
1
Rack no. 0
Rack no. 1
Rack no. 2
RT address 0
R
T
0
RT address 1
R
T
1
RT address 2
R
T
2
773F6D06
MSB CIO 0201 CIO 0200 LSB
5-27-6SELECT EM BANK: EMBC(171)
(171)
EMBC N N: EM bank number CIO, G, A, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j EMBC(171)
When the execution condition is OFF, EMBC(171) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, EMBC(171) changes the current EM bank to the one
indicated by the EM bank number (N).
The current EM bank number is recorded in the least significant (rightmost) digit
of A511. Bit A51115 is ON when EM is mounted to the CPU.
When power returns to the CPU after an interruption, the current EM bank num-
ber will revert to the bank number recorded in A511 before the power was inter-
rupted, even if EMBC(171) is used in a power OFF interruption program to
change the current bank number regardless of the IOM Hold settings.
N must be between 0000 and 0007.
EMBC(171) can be used only with CPUs that support the EM Area.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): N is not between 0000 and 0007.
The EM Unit does not have the EM bank indicated by N, or
the indicated bank is being used as file memory.
The CPU does not support the EM Area.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Description
Precautions
Special Instructions Section 5-27
(171)
EMBC #0003
0000
00
(164)
SRCH #0010 D00000 0500
0000
00
365
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the current EM bank is
changed t o bank 3. The contents of A511 would change to “8003” to indicate that
bank 3 is the current bank.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 EMBC(171) #0003
5-27-7DATA SEARCH: SRCH(164)
Variations
j SRCH(164)
(164)
SRCH N R1Cd R1: 1st word in range CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
Cd: Comparison data CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
N: Number of words CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, SRCH(164) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, SRCH(164) searches the range of memory from R1 to
R1+N–1 for addresses that contain the comparison data (Cd).
If the content of an address within the range match the comparison data, the EQ
Flag (A50006) is turned ON and the address is written to index register IR0. If
more than one address contains the comparison data, the EQ Flag (A50006) is
turned ON and only the lowest address containing the comparison data is writ-
ten to IR0.
If none of the addresses within the range contain the comparison data, the EQ
Flag (A50006) is turned OFF, and IR0 is left unchanged.
N must be BCD between 0001 and 9999.
R1 and R1+N–1 must be in the same data area.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): N is 0000 or is not BCD.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
EQ (A50006): An address within the range contains the comparison data.
Example In the following example, the 10-word range from D00000 to D00009 is
searched for addresses that contain the same data as CIO 0500. Since two ad-
dresses within the range contain the same data as CIO 0500, the EQ Flag
(A50006) i s turned ON, and the lowest address containing the comparison data
is written to IR0.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 SRCH(164) #0010
D00000
0500
Description
Precautions
Special Instructions Section 5-27
(172)
CCL
0000
01
366
Wd 0500 89AB
D00000 1234 $2000
D00001 5678 $2001
D00002 ABCD $2002
D00003 EF13 $2003
D00004 89AB $2004
D00005 8860 $2005
D00006 90CD $2006
D00007 00FF $2007
D00008 89AB $2008
D00009 810C $2009
Memory
address
10 words Same data
Same data
5-28 Flag/Register Instructions
The Flag/Register Instruction and used to save or reload the contents of the
Arithmetic Flags or the index/data registers.
5-28-1LOAD FLAGS: CCL(172)
(172)
CCL
Variations
j CCL(172)
Ladder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, CCL(172) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, CCL(172) changes the Arithmetic Flags to the status
recorded by the last CCS(173) instruction.
The following table shows the Arithmetic Flags affected by CCL(172).
Bit Arithmetic Flag
A50003 Instruction Execution Error Flag
A50004 Carry Flag
A50005 Greater Than Flag
A50006 Equals Flag
A50007 Less Than Flag
A50008 Negative Flag
A50009 Overflow Flag
A50010 Underflow Flag
CCL(172) should not be executed unless CCS(173) has been executed earlier.
Arithmetic Flags are changed to the status recorded by the last CCS(173) in-
struction.
Example When CIO 000001 is ON in the following example, the status of the arithmetic
flags are all restored to the status they had the last time CCS(173) was
executed.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000001
00001 CCL(172)
Description
Precautions
Flags
Flag/Register Instructions Section 5-28
(173)
CCS
0000
00
(175)
REGL D10000
0000
00
367
5-28-2SAVE FLAGS: CCS(173)
(173)
CCS
Variations
j CCS(173)
Ladder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, CCS(173) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, CCS(173) records the current status of the Arithmetic
Flags in the CPU for later retrieval by the CCL(172) instruction.
Refer to the table in
5-28-1 LOAD FLAGS: CCL(172)
for the Arithmetic Flags
recorded by CCS(173).
When CCS(173) is executed, it records over the data recorded by the previous
CCS(173) instruction.
No flags are affected by CCS(173).
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the status of all the arithmetic
flags is stored in memory for possible later retrieval.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 CCS(173)
5-28-3LOAD REGISTER: REGL(175)
(175)
REGL S S: 1st source word CIO, G, A, DM
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j REGL(175)
When the execution condition is OFF, REGL(175) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, REGL(175) copies the data from S, S+1, and S+2 to
data registers DR0, DR1, and DR2, and copies the data from S+3, S+4, and S+5
to index registers IR0, IR1, and IR2.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the contents of words
D10000 through D10005 is copied to the data and index registers.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 REGL(175) D10000
3 5 2 A
3 5 2 A C 7 3 9
1 D A 2
E 5 2 A
5 1 B 0
0 E 7 3
C 7 3 9
1 D A 2
E 5 2 A
0 E 7 3
5 1 B 0
D10000
D10001
D10002
D10004
D10003
D10005
DR0
DR1
DR2
IR0
IR1
IR2
Description
Precautions
Flags
Description
Precautions
Flag/Register Instructions Section 5-28
(176)
REGSD10000
0000
00
368
5-28-4SAVE REGISTER: REGS(176)
(176)
REGS D D: 1st destination word CIO, G, A, DM
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j REGS(176)
When the execution condition is OFF, REGS(176) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, REGS(176) copies the data from data registers DR0,
DR1, and DR2 to D, D+1, and D+2, and copies the data from index registers IR0,
IR1, and IR2 to D+3, D+4, and D+5.
Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the contents of words the
data and index registers is copied to D10000 through D10005.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 REGS(176) D10000
3 5 2 A 3 5 2 A
C 7 3 9
1 D A 2
E 5 2 A
5 1 B 0
0 E 7 3
C 7 3 9
1 D A 2
E 5 2 A
0 E 7 3
5 1 B 0
D10000
D10001
D10002
D10004
D10003
D10005
DR0
DR1
DR2
IR0
IR1
IR2
5-29 STEP DEFINE and STEP START: STEP(008)/SNXT(009)
The step instructions STEP(008) and SNXT(009) are used in conjunction to set
up break points between sections in a large program so that the sections can be
executed as units and reset upon completion. A section of program will usually
be defined to correspond to an actual process in the application. (Refer to the
application examples later in this section.) A step is written like a normal pro-
gramming code, except that certain instructions (END(001), IL(002)/ILC(003),
JMP(004)/JME(005), and SBN(150)) may not be included.
The steps described here are not related to SFC programming.
Description
Precautions
STEP DEFINE and STEP START: STEP(008)/SNXT(009) Section 5-29
369
STEP DEFINE: STEP(008)
(008)
STEP B B: Bit CIO, G, A
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
(008)
STEP
STEP START: SNXT(009)
(009)
SNXT B B: Bit CIO, G, A
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
STEP(008) uses a control bit to define the beginning of a section of the program
called a step. STEP(008) does not require an execution condition, i.e., its execu-
tion is controlled through the control bit.
To start step execution, SNXT(009) is used with the same control bit as used for
the first STEP(008). If SNXT(009) is executed with an ON execution condition,
the step with the same control bit is executed. If the execution condition is OFF,
the step is not executed. You must use a differentiated execution condition for
the SNXT(009) instruction that starts step execution or step execution will last
for only one cycle.
The SNXT(009) instruction must be written into the program before the program
reaches the step it starts. It can be used at different locations before the step to
control the step according to two different execution conditions (see example 2,
below). Any step in the program that has not been started with SNXT(009) will
not be executed.
Once SNXT(009) is used to start step execution, step execution will continue
until STEP(008) is executed without a control bit. STEP(008) executed without a
control bit is used to stop step execution and return to normal execution.
STEP(008) without a control bit must be preceded by SNXT(009) with a dummy
control bit. It cannot be a control bit used in a STEP(008).
Execution o f a step is completed either by execution of the next SNXT(009) or by
turning OFF the control bit for the step (see example 3). When the step is com-
pleted, all I/O Area output bits, W ork Area, Holding Area, and CPU Bus Link Area
bits in the step are turned OFF, Timers (except TTIM(120), TIML(121), and
MTIM(122)) in th e s t e p a r e r eset to their SVs. Counters, shift registers, and bits
used in KEEP(011) maintain status.
Steps can be programmed consecutively. Each step must start with STEP(008)
and generally ends with SNXT(009) (see example 3, for an exception). All con-
trol bits must be in the same word and they must be consecutive.
When steps are programmed in series, three types of execution are possible:
sequential, branching, or parallel. The execution conditions for, and the position-
ing of, SNXT(009) determine how the steps are executed. The three examples
given later demonstrate these three types of step execution.
Description
STEP DEFINE and STEP START: STEP(008)/SNXT(009) Section 5-29
370
Two simple steps are shown below. In this example, the 1st step would be ex-
ecuted from the time that CIO 00000 goes ON until CIO 000001 goes ON. The
2nd step would be executed for the time the CIO 000001 goes ON until CIO
000002 goes ON. When CIO 000002 goes ON, step execution will be termi-
nated.
(009)
SNXT020200
(008)
STEP 020200
Step controlled by 20200
(009)
SNXT020201
(008)
STEP 020201
Step controlled by 20201
(009)
SNXT020202
(008)
STEP
0000
00
00001
0
0000
02
Starts step
execution
Ends step
execution
1st step
2nd step
00000 LD 000000
00001 SNXT(009) 020200
00002 STEP(008) 020200
Step controlled by 20200.
00100 LD 000001
00101 SNXT(009) 020201
00102 STEP(008) 020201
Step controlled by 20201.
00200 LD 000002
00201 SNXT(009) 020202
00202 STEP(008) ---
Address Instruction Operands
Control bits within one section of step programming must be sequential and from
the same word.
STEP(008) and SNXT(009) cannot be used inside of subroutines, interrupt pro-
grams, or block programs.
Only one step programming area can be executed during any one cycle.
Interlocks, jumps, SBN(150), and END(001) cannot be used within step pro-
grams.
You must use a differentiated execution condition for the SNXT(009) instruction
that starts step execution.
Bits used as control bits must not be used anywhere else in the program unless
they are being used to control the operation of the step (see example 3, below).
All control bits must be in the same word and must be consecutive.
Control bit status will be lost during any power interruption if it is not in the Hold-
ing Area. If it is necessary to maintain status to resume execution at the same
step, Holding Area bits must be used.
Only one section of step programming can be started during a cycle. Be sure that
two steps aren’t started during a cycle, particularly when using steps with SFC.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Precautions
STEP DEFINE and STEP START: STEP(008)/SNXT(009) Section 5-29
371
Flags A50012:
The Step Flag is turned ON for one cycle when STEP(008) is executed and if
necessary it can be used to reset counters in steps as shown below.
(009)
SNXT001000
(008)
STEP 001000
CNT 0001 #0003
0000
00
0001
00
A500
12
1 Cycle
A50012
01000
Start
00000 LD 000000
00001 SNXT(009) 001000
00002 STEP(008) 001000
00003 LD 000100
00004 LD A50012
00005 CNT 001
#0003
Address Instruction Operands
The following three examples demonstrate the three types of execution control
possible with step programming.
Example 1
demonstrates sequential execu-
tion;
Example 2
, branching execution; and
Example 3
, parallel execution.
The following process requires that three processes, loading, part installation,
and inspection/discharge, be executed in sequence with each process being re-
set before continuing on the the next process. Various sensors (SW1, SW2,
SW3, and SW4) are positioned to signal when processes are to start and end.
SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW 4
Loading Part installation Inspection/discharge
Examples
Example 1:
Sequential Execution
STEP DEFINE and STEP START: STEP(008)/SNXT(009) Section 5-29
372
The following diagram demonstrates the flow of processing and the switches
that are used for execution control.
Process A
Process B
Process C
Loading
Part Installation
Inspection/discharge
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
The program for this process, shown below, utilizes the most basic type of step
programming: each step is completed by a unique SNXT(009) that starts the
next step. Each step starts when the switch that indicates the previous step has
been completed turns ON.
(009)
SNXT012800
(008)
STEP 012800
(009)
SNXT012801
(008)
STEP 012801
(009)
SNXT012802
(008)
STEP 012802
(009)
SNXT012803
(008)
STEP 012803
0000
01
0000
02
0000
03
0000
04
Programming for process A
Programming for process B
Programming for process C
Process
A started.
Process
A reset.
Process
B started.
Process
B reset.
Process
C started.
Process
C reset.
00000 LD 000001
00001 SNXT(009) 012800
00002 STEP(008) 012800
Process A
00100 LD 000002
00101 SNXT(009) 012801
00102 STEP(008) 012801
Process B
00100 LD 000003
00101 SNXT(009) 012802
00102 STEP(008) 012802
Process C
00200 LD 000004
00201 SNXT(009) 012803
00202 STEP(008) 012803
Address Instruction Operands
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
STEP DEFINE and STEP START: STEP(008)/SNXT(009) Section 5-29
373
The following process requires that a product is processed in one of two ways,
depending on its weight, before it is printed. The printing process is the same
regardless of which of the first processes is used. Various sensors are posi-
tioned to signal when processes are to start and end.
SW A1 SW A2
SW B1 SW B2
Process CWeight scale
Process B
Process A
Printer SW D
The following diagram demonstrates the flow of processing and the switches
that are used for execution control. Here, either process A or process B is used
depending on the status of SW A1 and SW B1.
Process A
Process C
End
SW A1 SW B1
SW A2 SW B2
SW D
Process B
Example 2:
Branching Execution
STEP DEFINE and STEP START: STEP(008)/SNXT(009) Section 5-29
374
The program for this process, shown below, starts with two SNXT(009) instruc-
tions that start processes A and B. Because of the way CIO 000001 (SW A1) and
CIO 000002 (SW B1) are programmed, only one of these will be executed with
an ON execution condition to start either process A or process B. Both of the
steps for these processes end with a SNXT(009) that starts the step (process C).
Process
A started.
Process
A reset.
Process
B started.
Process
B reset.
Process
C started.
Process
C reset.
0000
01(SW A1)
0000
03(SW A2)
0000
04(SW B2)
0000
05(SW D)
0000
02(SW B1)
0000
02(SW B1)
0000
01(SW A1)
(009)
SNXT010000
(009)
SNXT010001
(009)
SNXT010002
(008)
STEP 010001
(009)
SNXT010002
(008)
STEP 010002
(009)
SNXT024614
(008)
STEP
(008)
STEP 010000
Programming for process A
Programming for process B
Programming for process C
00000 jLD 000001
00001 AND NOT 000002
00002 SNXT(009) 010000
00003 LD NOT 000001
00004 jAND 000002
00005 SNXT(009) 010001
00006 STEP(008) 010000
Process A
00100 LD 000003
00101 SNXT(009) 010002
00102 STEP(008) 010001
Process B
00100 LD 000004
00101 SNXT(009) 010002
00102 STEP(008) 010002
Process C
00200 LD 000005
00201 SNXT(009) 024614
00202 STEP(008) ---
Address Instruction Operands
Note In the above programming, CIO 010002 is used in two
SNXT(0009) instructions. This will not produce a duplica-
tion error during the program check.
The following process requires that two parts of a product pass simultaneously
through two processes each before they are joined together in a fifth process.
Various sensors are positioned to signal when processes are to start and end.
Process C
SW1
SW2
Process A SW3
SW4
Process D
Process B
Process E
SW6
SW5 SW7
Example 3:
Parallel Execution
STEP DEFINE and STEP START: STEP(008)/SNXT(009) Section 5-29
375
The following diagram demonstrates the flow of processing and the switches
that are used for execution control. Here, process A and process C are started
together. When process A finishes, process B starts; when process C finishes,
process D starts. When both processes B and D have finished, process E starts.
Process A
Process E
End
Process C
SW7
Process B Process D
SW3 SW4
SW 1 and SW2 both ON
SW5 and SW6 both ON
The program for this operation, shown below, starts with two SNXT(009) instruc-
tions that start processes A and C. These instructions branch from the same in-
struction line and are always executed together, starting steps for both A and C.
When the steps for both A and C have finished, the steps for process B and D
begin immediately.
STEP DEFINE and STEP START: STEP(008)/SNXT(009) Section 5-29
376
When both process B and process D have finished (i.e., when SW5 and SW6
turn ON), processes B and D are reset together by the SNXT(009) at the end of
the programming for process B. Although there is no SNXT(009) at the end of
process D, the control bit for it is turned OFF by executing SNXT(009) 050004.
This is because the OUT for bit 050003 is in the step reset by SNXT(009)
050004, i.e., bit 050003 is turned OFF when SNXT(009) 050004 is executed.
Process B i s thus reset directly and process D is reset indirectly before executing
the step for process E.
(009)
SNXT050000
(009)
SNXT050002
(008)
STEP 050000
0000
01
0000
02 (009)
SNXT050001
(008)
STEP 050001
Programming for process A
0000
03
Programming for process B
(009)
SNXT050004
0000
03 (009)
SNXT050003
(008)
STEP 050003
Programming for process C
0000
04( SW5, SW6
SW4
(008)
STEP 050004
Programming for process D
SW3
SW1, SW2
(009)
SNXT024613
Programming for process E
(008)
STEP ...
0000
05 SW7
Process A
started.
Process A
reset.
Process B
started.
Process C
started.
Process E
started.
Used to
turn off
process D.
Process C
reset.
Process D
started.
(008)
STEP 050002
Process E
reset.
00000 LD 000001
00001 SNXT(009) 050000
00002 SNXT(009) 050002
00003 STEP(008) 050000
Process A
00100 LD 000002
00101 SNXT(009) 050001
00102 STEP(008) 050001
Process B
00100 LD 000003
00101 OUT 050003
00101 AND 000004
00101 SNXT(009) 050004
00102 STEP(008) 050002
Process C
00200 LD 000003
00201 SNXT(009) 050003
00202 STEP(008) 050003
Process D
00300 STEP(008) 050004
Process E
00400 LD 000005
00401 SNXT(009) 024613
00402 STEP(008) ---
Address Instruction Operands
0500
03
STEP DEFINE and STEP START: STEP(008)/SNXT(009) Section 5-29
377
5-30 Subroutines Subroutines break large control tasks into smaller ones and enable you to reuse
a given set of instructions. When the main program calls a subroutine, control is
transferred to the subroutine and the subroutine instructions are executed. The
instructions within a subroutine are written in the same way as main program
code. When all the subroutine instructions have been executed, control returns
to the main program to the point just after the point from which the subroutine
was entered (unless otherwise specified in the subroutine).
5-30-1SUBROUTINE ENTRY and RETURN: SBN(150)/RET(152)
SUBROUTINE ENTRY: SBN(150)
(150)
SBN N N: Subroutine number #
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
SUBROUTINE RETURN: RET(152)
(152)
RET
Ladder Symbol
SBN(150) is used to mark the beginning of a subroutine program; RET(152) is
used to mark the end. Each subroutine is identified with a subroutine number, N,
that is programmed as the definer for SBN(150). This same subroutine number
is used in any SBS(151) that calls the subroutine (see next subsection). No sub-
routine number is required with RET(152).
All subroutines must be programmed at the end of the main program. When one
or more subroutines have been programmed, the main program will be ex-
ecuted up to the first SBN(150) before returning to address 00000 for the next
scan; if part of the main program is placed after a SBN(150), it will be executed
only as part of a subroutine, if at all. Subroutines will not be executed unless
called by SBS(151) or activated by an interrupt.
END(001) must be placed at the end of the last subroutine program, i.e., after the
last RET(152). END(001) is not required at any other point in the program. (Re-
fer to the next subsection for further details.)
N must be between 000 and 999 for the CV1000, CV2000, CVM1-CPU11-EV2,
or CVM1-CPU21-EV2 or between 000 and 099 for the CV500 or
CVM1-CPU01-EV2. Each subroutine number can be used in SBN(150) once
only.
If SBN(150) is mistakenly placed in the main program, it will inhibit program ex-
ecution past that point, i.e., program execution will return to the beginning when
SBN(150) is encountered.
If either DIFU(013) or DIFU(014) is placed within a subroutine, the operand bit
will not be turned OFF until the next time the subroutine is executed, i.e., the op-
erand bit may stay ON longer than one cycle.
The step instructions, STEP(008) and SNXT(009), cannot be used within a sub-
routine.
There are no flags directly affected by these instructions.
Description
Precautions
Flags
Subroutines Section 5-30
(150)
SBN 001
(152)
RET
(151)
SBS 001
0000
00
(Subroutine)
(Other instructions)
378
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the instructions between
SBN(150) 001 and RET(152) are executed once before returning to execute the
next instruction line after SBS(151).
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 SBS(151) 001
(Other instructions)
00023 SBN(150) 001
(Subroutine)
00035 RET(152)
5-30-2SUBROUTINE CALL: SBS(151)
(151)
SBS N N: Subroutine number #
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j SBS(151)
A subroutine can be executed by placing SBS(151) in the main program at the
point where the subroutine is desired. The subroutine number used in SBS(151)
indicates the desired subroutine. When SBS(151) is executed with an ON ex-
ecution, the instructions between the SBN(150) with the same subroutine num-
ber and the first RET(152) after it are executed before execution returns to the
instruction following the SBS(151) that made the call.
SBS(151) 00
SBN(150) 00
RET(152)
END(001)
Main program
Subroutine
Main program
SBS(151) may be used as many times as desired in the program, i.e., the same
subroutine may be called from different places in the program.
SBS(151) may also be placed into a subroutine to shift program execution from
one subroutine to another, i.e., subroutines may be nested. When the second
subroutine has been completed (i.e., RET(152) has been reached), program ex-
ecution returns to the original subroutine which is then completed before return-
ing to the main program. As many nesting levels as desired can be programmed.
A subroutine cannot call itself, (e.g., SBS(151) 00 cannot be programmed within
Description
Subroutines Section 5-30
379
the subroutine defined with SBN(150) 00). The following diagram illustrates two
levels of nesting.
SBN(150) 010 SBN(150) 011 SBN(150) 012
SBS(151) 011
RET(152)
SBS(151) 010 SBS(151) 012
RET(152) RET(152)
Although subroutines 00 through 31 can be called by using SBS(151), they are
also activated by interrupt signals from Interrupt Input Units. Subroutine 99,
which can also be called using SBS(151), is used for the scheduled interrupt.
(Refer to the next subsection for details.)
The following diagram illustrates program execution flow for various execution
conditions for two SBS(151).
SBS(151) 000
SBS(151) 001
SBN(150) 000
RET(152)
SBN(150) 001
RET(152)
END(001)
Main
program
Subroutines
A
B
C
D
E
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
C
C
C
C
D
D
E
E
OFF execution conditions for
subroutines 000 and 001
ON execution condition for
subroutine 000 only
ON execution condition for
subroutine 001 only
ON execution conditions for
subroutines 000 and 001
N must be between 000 and 999 for the CV1000, CV2000, CVM1-CPU11-EV2,
or CVM1-CPU21-EV2, or between 000 and 099 for the CV500 or
CVM1-CPU01-EV2.
Flags ER (A50003): No subroutine exists with the specified subroutine number.
A subroutine has called itself.
A subroutine being executed has been called.
Example Refer to
5-30-1 SUBROUTINE ENTRY and RETURN: SBN(150)/RET(152)
for
an example.
Precautions
Subroutines Section 5-30
(156)
MCRO 010 0200 0300
0000
00
(150)
SBN 010
(152)
RET
Main program
Subroutine
(Subroutine)
(Other instructions)
380
5-30-3 MACRO: MCRO(156)
(156)
MCRO N S D
Ladder Symbol
Variations
↑MCRO(156)
Operand Data Areas
D: First output parameter word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
S: First input parameter word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
N: Subroutine number 000 to 999 or 000 to 099
Description MCRO(156) a l l ows a single subroutine to replace several subroutines that have
identical structure but different operands. There are four input words, A200
through A203, and four output words, A204 through A207, allocated to
MCRO(156). These eight words are used in the subroutine and take their con-
tents from S through S+3 and then output their contents to D through D+3 after
the subroutine is executed.
When the execution condition is OFF, MCRO(156) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, MCRO(156) copies the contents of S through S+3 t o
A200 through A203, and then calls and executes the subroutine specified in N.
When the subroutine is completed, the contents of A204 through A207 are then
transferred back to D through D+3 before MCRO(156) is completed.
Subroutines called b y MCRO(156) are defined by SBN(150) and RET(152) just
like normal subroutines. For details concerning the use of subroutines, refer to
the sections in this manual explaining SBN(150), SBS(151), and RET(152).
Precautions Nesting is possible with MCRO(156), but the data must be saved before calling
another subroutine because there is only one processing area (A200 through
A207). Recursive calls are not possible, i.e., a subroutine cannot call itself.
N must be between 000 and 999 for the CV1000, CV2000, CVM1-CPU11-EV2,
or CVM1-CPU21-EV2 or between 000 and 099 for the CV500 or
CVM1-CPU01-EV2.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Subroutine does not exist for the specified subroutine number.
A subroutine has called itself.
An active subroutine has been called.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the contents of CIO 0200
through CIO 0203 are copied to A200 through A203, and subroutine 10 is called
and executed. When the subroutine is completed, the contents of A204 through
A207 are copied back to CIO 0300 through CIO 0303.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 MCRO(156) 010
0200
0300
(Other instructions)
00023 SBN(150) 010
(Subroutine)
00035 RET(152)
(CVM1 V2)
Subroutines Section 5-30
010000
000000 010001
010000
010001
000001 000002
010500
000200 010501
010500
010501
000201 000202
012000
000500 012001
012000
012001
000501 000502
015000
001000 015001
015000
015001
001001 001002
381
Input
(Processing)
Output
Return
Call
Main Program Subroutine
CIO 0200
CIO 0201
CIO 0202
CIO 0203
CIO 0300
CIO 0301
CIO 0302
CIO 0303
A200
A201
A202
A203
A204
A205
A206
A207
Program Examples The following examples show how MCRO(156) can be used to simplify a pro-
gram. The second program section uses MCRO(156), whereas the first one
does not.
Address Instruction Operand
00000 LD 000000
00001 OR 010000
00002 AND 010001
00003 OUT 010000
00004 LD 000001
00005 AND 000002
00006 OUT 010001
00007 LD 000200
00008 OR 010500
00009 AND 010501
00010 OUT 010500
00011 LD 000201
00012 AND 000202
00013 OUT 010501
00014 LD 000500
00015 OR 012000
00016 AND 012001
00017 OUT 012000
00018 LD 000501
00019 AND 000502
00020 OUT 012001
00021 LD 001000
00022 OR 015000
00023 AND 015001
00024 OUT 015000
00025 LD 001001
00026 AND 001002
00027 OUT 015011
Subroutines Section 5-30
A20400
A20000 A20401
A20400
A20401
A20001 A20002
A50013 (156)
MCRO 010 0000 0100
(156)
MCRO 010 0002 0105
(156)
MCRO 010 0005 0120
(156)
MCRO 010 0010 0150
(150)
SBN 010
(152)
RET
382
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD A50013
00001 MCRO(156) 010
0000
0100
00002 MCRO(156) 010
0002
0105
00003 MCRO(156) 010
0005
0120
00004 MCRO(156) 010
0010
0150
00005 SBN(150) 010
00006 LD A20000
00007 OR A20400
00008 AND A20401
00009 OUT A20400
00010 LD A20001
00011 AND A20002
00012 OUT A20401
00013 RET(152)
5-31 Interrupt Control
Interrupts cause a break in the flow of the main program execution such that the
flow can be resumed from that point after completion of the interrupt program.
Interrupt programs should be entered in SFC if SFC programming is being used.
Interrupt programs are written as a ladder program only if the program type is
ladder.
Note Be sure to include an END(01) instruction at the end of interrupt programs if the
program type is ladder.
There are three instructions that control and monitor I/O interrupts and sched-
uled interrupts, MSKS(153), CLI(154), and MSKR(155). MSKS(153) masks in-
terrupts from Interrupt Input Units (so that they are recorded but ignored) and
sets the time interval for scheduled interrupts, CLI(154) clears interrupts, and
MSKR(155) writes either the current mask status of a designated Interrupt Input
Unit or the current scheduled interrupt interval into a designated word.
The four types of interrupts, I/O, scheduled, power OFF, and power ON are de-
scribed briefly below.
An I/O interrupt is caused by an input signal from an Interrupt Input Unit.
Up to four Interrupt Input Units (0 to 3) can be mounted on the CPU Rack and
Expansion CPU Racks. Each Unit is allocated one I/O word.
Interrupt Control Section 5-31
383
For each Interrupt Input Unit, bits 00 through 07 may be used for interrupt sig-
nals. Bits 08 through 15 are not used. When one of the bits assigned to an Inter-
rupt Input Unit turns ON, the interrupt program associated with it is called and
executed. A unique interrupt program number is associated with each bit ac-
cording to the following table.
Interrupt Input Unit Program Interrupt Input Unit Program
Unit no. Bit no. Unit no. Bit no.
0 0 00 2 0 16
1 01 1 17
2 02 2 18
3 03 3 19
4 04 4 20
5 05 5 21
6 06 6 22
7 07 7 23
1 0 08 3 0 24
1 09 1 25
2 10 2 26
311 3 27
4 12 4 28
5 13 5 29
6 14 6 30
7 15 7 31
A scheduled interrupt is repeated at regular intervals.
The time interval between interrupts is set by the user and is unrelated to the
cycle timing of the PC. The time interval can be set between 10 and 99,990 ms.
This capability is useful for periodic supervisory or executive program execution.
A power OFF interrupt is generated by an interruption of power to the CPU
longer than the momentary power interruption time set in the PC Setup (0 to
9 ms).
If the PC Setup (Execution controls 2) has been preset to enable power OFF
interrupts, the interrupt program is activated to manage the power outage.
The length of the power OFF interrupt program is limited. Refer to
6-1-6 Power
OFF Interruption and Restart Continuation
for details.
A power ON interrupt is activated when power returns to the CPU after an inter-
ruption. The power ON interrupt is effective only if there is a power ON interrupt
program. The power ON interrupt program is executed after initialization.
The PC employs a priority system for handling interrupts. A power OFF interrupt
is given the highest priority, followed by power ON, scheduled, and I/O inter-
rupts, in that order. Lower numbered I/O interrupts are given priority over a high-
er numbered I/O interrupts.
In the CV1000, CV2000, CVM1-CPU11-EV2, or CVM1-CPU21-EV2 a level 0
scheduled interrupt (defined by setting N=4 in MSKS(153)) takes priority over a
level 1 scheduled interrupt (defined by setting N=5 when MSKS(153)). If a level
0 scheduled interrupt occurs while a level 1 scheduled interrupt is being ex-
ecuted, the level 1 scheduled interrupt program is halted until the level 0 sched-
uled interrupt is completed.
The I/O interrupt setting in the PC Setup determines whether I/O interrupts with
higher priority will be serviced immediately (interrupting the I/O interrupt pro-
gram currently being executed) or wait until the current I/O interrupt is com-
pleted.
Interrupt Priority Levels
Interrupt Control Section 5-31
384
When the I/O interrupt setting in the PC Setup (execution controls 2) is set to
hold other I/O interrupts, an incoming I/O interrupt must wait until the first I/O in-
terrupt is finished, regardless of the priority ranking of the two I/O interrupts. The
following example shows program execution with this I/O interrupt setting.
Interrupt
input 2
Scheduled
interrupt 0
Scheduled
interrupt 1
Interrupt
input 0
Interrupt
input 1
Scheduled interrupt
program 0
I/O Interrupt
program 0
I/O Interrupt
program 1
I/O Interrupt
program 2
Main program
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt
Scheduled interrupt
program 1
Restarted
Restarted
Restarted
Restarted
Ignored
Interrupt
When the I/O interrupt setting in the PC Setup is set to execute higher priority
interrupts, an incoming I/O interrupt will be serviced immediately if its interrupt
program number is higher than that of the I/O interrupt currently being serviced.
The following example shows program execution with this I/O interrupt setting.
Interrupt
input 2
Scheduled
interrupt 0
Scheduled
interrupt 1
Interrupt
input 0
Interrupt
input 1
Scheduled interrupt
program 0
I/O Interrupt
program 0
I/O Interrupt
program 1
I/O Interrupt
program 2
Main program
Interrupt
Interrupt
Scheduled interrupt
program 1 Restarted
Restarted
Restarted Interrupt Restarted
Restarted
Restarted
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt Control Section 5-31
385
5-31-1INTERRUPT MASK: MSKS(153)
(153)
MSKS N S S: Data source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
N: Interrupt source # (0 to 5)
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j MSKS(153)
When the execution condition is OFF, MSKS(153) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, MSKS(153) masks interrupts from Interrupt Input Units
(so that they are recorded but ignored) if N is 0 to 3 or sets the time interval for
scheduled interrupts if N is 4 or 5.
N specifies the interrupt. Numbers 0 to 3 indicate I/O Interrupt Input Units 0 to 3,
and numbers 4 and 5 indicate scheduled interrupts 0 and 1, respectively. The
CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2 has scheduled interrupt 0 only.
If N is 0 to 3, it designates an Interrupt Input Unit, and MSKS(153) causes the bits
of the designated Interrupt Input Unit corresponding to ON bits in S to be
masked, and those corresponding to OFF bits in S to be unmasked. All masked
interrupts will still be recorded. When a masked bit has been recorded as being
ON, the interrupt program for it will be run as soon as the bit is unmasked (unless
it is cleared first; see
5-31-2 CLEAR INTERRUPT: CLI(154)
). All interrupts are
initially masked.
If N is 4 or 5, it designates a scheduled interrupt and MSKS(153) sets the time
interval for the scheduled interrupt. The interval between interrupts can be set
between 1 0 and 99,990 ms, depending on both the content of S and the time unit
set in the PC Setup. S can have any value between 0001 and 9999, and time
units can be and set to 0.5 ms, 1 ms, or 10 ms.
To cancel the scheduled interrupt, execute MSKS(153) with S set to 0000. This
is the initial setting. Refer to
5-31-2 CLEAR INTERRUPT: CLI(154)
for an exam-
ple of scheduled interrupts.
CLI(154) should be used to set the time to the first scheduled interrupt. Unstable
operation may result if the time to the first interrupt is not set. Refer to
5-31-2
CLEAR INTERRUPT: CLI(154)
.
N must be between 0 and 5 for the CV1000, CV2000, CVM1-CPU11-EV2, or
CVM1-CPU21-EV2 or between 0 and 4 for the CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2.
S must be between 0000 and 00FF when N is between 0 and 3. S must be BCD
between 0001 and 9999 when N is 4 or 5.
I/O interrupts and scheduled interrupts are masked when power is turned on or
the PC mode is changed.
Both the scheduled interrupt time and the time to the first scheduled interrupt
must be 10 ms or greater.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): N or S contain improper data
(e.g., data in S is not BCD when N is 4 or 5).
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
A value of 5 is entered for N in the CV500 or
CVM1-CPU01-EV2.
Description
Precautions
Interrupt Control Section 5-31
(153)
MSKS 0 D00100
0000
00
386
Example In the following example, inputs 0 to 3 of Interrupt Input Unit 0 are unmasked,
and inputs 4 to 7 are masked when CIO 000000 is ON.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 MSKS(153) 0
D00100
D00100
D00101 0 0 F 0
0 0 F 2
5-31-2CLEAR INTERRUPT: CLI(154)
(154)
CLI N S S: Data source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
N: Interrupt source # (0 to 5)
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j CLI(154)
When the execution condition is OFF, CLI(154) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, CLI(154) clears the recorded interrupts of the desig-
nated Interrupt Input Unit if N is 0 to 3, or sets the time to the first scheduled inter-
rupt if N is 4 or 5.
N specifies the interrupt. Numbers 0 to 3 indicate I/O Interrupt Input Units 0 to 3,
and numbers 4 and 5 indicate scheduled interrupts 0 and 1, respectively. The
CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2 has scheduled interrupt 0 only.
Because interrupt inputs are stored, masked interrupts will be serviced after the
mask is removed, unless they are cleared first. If N designates an Interrupt Input
Unit, CLI(154) clears the recorded interrupts of the inputs from the designated
Interrupt Input Unit corresponding to ON bits in S. Once an interrupt is cleared,
the interrupt program will not be executed even if the interrupt is unmasked.
In the following example, CLI(154) is executed with S=00F2, so the recorded
interrupts for inputs 1, 4, 5, 6, and 7 are cleared. Recorded interrupts for inputs 0,
2, and 3 are unaffected.
Interrupt input 0
Interrupt input 1
Interrupt input 3
Memory status
Interrupt program execution
Interrupt program 3 CLI(154) used to clear interrupt 1
Interrupt program 0
Interrupt program 3
Ignored (interrupt already recorded)
0
1
3
Description
Interrupt Control Section 5-31
!
387
Interrupt program 3
Interrupt program 0
Interrupt program 1
Interrupt program 2
Interrupt program 3
Numbers 4 or 5 designate a scheduled interrupt, and CLI(154) sets the time to
the first interrupt. The time to the first interrupt can be set between 10 and
99,990 ms, depending on both the content of S and the time unit set in the PC
Setup. S can have any value between 0001 and 9999, and time units can be and
set to 0.5 ms, 1 ms, or 10 ms.
Caution CLI(154) can be used to change the time interval to the next interrupt for one
cycle. The new time interval is effective immediately. The scheduled interrupt
may never actually occur if the time to the first interrupt is changed repeatedly,
i.e., before the interrupt has time to occur.
N must be between 0 and 5 for the CV1000, CV2000, CVM1-CPU11-EV2, or
CVM1-CPU21-EV2 or between 0 and 4 for the CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2.
S must be between 0000 and 00FF when N is between 0 and 3. S must be BCD
between 0000 and 9999 when N is 4 or 5.
If the ER Flag (A50003) is turned ON, the instruction will not be executed.
I/O interrupts and scheduled interrupts are masked when power is turned on or
the PC mode is changed.
Both the scheduled interrupt time and the time to the first scheduled interrupt
must be 10 ms or longer.
END(001) i s required at the end of both the main program and scheduled inter-
rupt program.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): N or S contain incorrect data
(e.g., data in S is not BCD when N is 4 or 5).
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
A value of 5 is entered for N in the CV500 or
CVM1-CPU01-EV2.
The following program shows the overall structure and operation of the sched-
uled interrupt.
Here, the interrupt program is started 20 ms after execution of CLI(154), and re-
peated every 100 ms thereafter. When bit 010000 is turned ON, CLI(154)
changes the time interval to the next interrupt to 50 ms for one cycle. When bit
010001 is turned ON, MSKS(153) changes the scheduled time interval to
200 ms. The scheduled interrupts continue until bit 010002 is turned ON, and
MSKS(153) is executed with S set to 0000.
Precautions
Example
Interrupt Control Section 5-31
388
The control flow logic of the main program is unaf fected by execution of the inter-
rupt program, i.e., immediately after the interrupt program has finished execu-
tion, control returns to the point in the main program where it was suspended.
00000 LD A50015
00001 CLI(154) 004
#0002
00002 MSKS(153) 004
#0010
00003 LD 010000
00004 CLI(154) 004
#0005
00005 LD 010001
00006 MSKS(153) 004
#0020
00007 LD 010002
00008 MSKS(153) 004
#0000
00500 END(001)
Scheduled interrupt program area
00600 END(001)
Address Instruction Operands
(154)
CLI 004 #0002
First Scan Flag
A500
15
(153)
MSKS 004 #0010
(001)
END
Scheduled interrupt program area
Main Program Area
(154)
CLI 004 #0005
0100
00
(153)
MSKS 004 #0020
0100
01
(153)
MSKS 004 #0000
0100
02
(001)
END
5-31-3READ MASK: MSKR(155)
(155)
MSKR N D D: Destination word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
N: Interrupt source # (0 to 5)
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j MSKR(155)
When the execution condition is OFF, MSKR(155) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, MSKR(155) writes the current mask status of the
designated Interrupt Input Unit into D if N is 0 to 3, or writes the scheduled inter-
rupt interval into D if N is 4 or 5. If N is between 0 and 3, it designates the unit
number o f the Interrupt Input Units. If N is 4, it designates scheduled interrupt #0.
If N is 5, it designates scheduled interrupt #1.
N must be between 0 and 5 for the CV1000, CV2000, CVM1-CPU11-EV2, or
CVM1-CPU21-EV2 or between 0 and 4 for the CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): N contains incorrect data.
A value of 5 is entered for N in the CV500 or
CVM1-CPU01-EV2.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Description
Precautions
Interrupt Control Section 5-31
(155)
jMSKR 4 1500
(155)
MSKR 2 D00100
0000
00
0000
01
389
Example In the following example, MSKR(155) writes the current mask status of Interrupt
Input Unit number 2 into D00100 when CIO 000000 is ON. jMSKR(155) writes
the time interval for scheduled interrupt 0 into CIO 1500 the next execution after
CIO 000001 turns ON.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 MSKR(155) 2
D00100
00002 MSKR(155) 4
1500
76543210
11110111
Interrupt inputs for Unit #2
Interrupt mask data
1: Interrupt masked
0: Interrupt unmasked
00F7
D00100
Maintain previous status
Unit is 10 ms
The unit is set at
system setting.
0010
0010 x 10 ms = 100 ms
CIO 1500
5-32 Stack Instructions
Stack Instructions are used to create and manipulate data tables in memory into
which data can be placed and retrieved. Different instructions allow you take
data out of the stack in the same order or in the opposite order from which it was
placed into the stack. SSET(160) must be used to create a stack before any of
the other stack instructions can be used.
5-32-1SET STACK: SSET(160)
(160)
SSET TB1 N N: Number of words CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
TB1: 1st stack address CIO, G, A, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j SSET(160)
When the execution condition is OFF, SSET(160) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, SSET(160) defines a stack from TB1 to TB1+N–1, and
writes zeros to all words from TB+2 to TB1+N–1. TB1 contains the memory ad-
dress of TB1+N–1, and TB1+1 contains the memory address of the word that will
be accessed by the next stack instruction. TB1+1 is called the stack pointer , and
contains the memory address for TB1+2 after SSET(160) is executed.
SSET(160) must be used to create one or more stacks before any of the other
stack instructions can be used.
N must be BCD between 0003 and 9999.
Description
Precautions
Stack Instructions Section 5-32
(160)
SSET D00000 #0007
0000
00
390
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of N is less than 0003, or is not BCD.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, SSET(160) defines a 7-word
stack from D00000 to D00006. The memory address of the last word in the
stack, $2006, is written into D00000 and the memory address of TB1+2, $2002,
is written into D00001. The rest of the words in the stack, D00002 to D00006, are
reset.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 SSET(160) D00000
#0007
D00000 $2006 (Address of last stack word) $2000
D00001 $2002 (Adr. of first stack word+2) $2001
D00002 0000 $2002
D00003 0000 $2003
D00004 0000 $2004
D00005 0000 $2005
D00006 0000 $2006
Memory
address
7 words
5-32-2PUSH ONTO STACK: PUSH(161)
(161)
PUSHTB1 S S: Source word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
TB1: 1st stack address CIO, G, A, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j PUSH(161)
When the execution condition is OFF, PUSH(161) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, PUSH(161) copies the data from the source word (S) to
the word indicated by the stack pointer (TB1+1). The address in the stack pointer
is then incremented by one.
TB1 must be the first address of a stack defined using SSET(160).
Do not allow the stack pointer to be incremented higher than the address of the
last word in the stack. If the content of the stack pointer is greater than the ad-
dress in TB1, the ER Flag (A50003) will be turned ON.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of TB1+1 is greater than the content of TB1.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Description
Precautions
Stack Instructions Section 5-32
0000
00 (161)
PUSH D00000 1000
0000
00 (162)
LIFO D00000 2000
391
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, PUSH(161) is used to write
the data in CIO 1000 to the 7-word stack from D00000 to D00006. The stack
pointer contains the memory address of D00002, so the data in CIO 1000 is co-
pied t o D00002. The content of the stack pointer is then incremented from $2002
to $2003.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 PUSH(161) D00000
1000
D00000 $2006 (Final stack address) $2000
D00001 $2002 (Stack pointer) $2001
D00002 0000 $2002
D00003 0000 $2003
D00004 0000 $2004
D00005 0000 $2005
D00006 0000 $2006
ABCD
Stack pointer
incremented
D00000 $2006 (Final stack address) $2000
D00001 $2003 (Stack pointer) $2001
D00002 ABCD $2002
D00003 0000 $2003
D00004 0000 $2004
D00005 0000 $2005
D00006 0000 $2006
1000 Memory
address Memory
address
5-32-3LAST IN FIRST OUT: LIFO(162)
(162)
LIFO TB1 D D: Destination word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
TB1: 1st stack address CIO, G, A, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j LIFO(162)
When the execution condition is OFF, LIFO(162) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, LIFO(162) decrements the memory address in the
stack pointer (TB1+1) by one, and then copies the data from the word indicated
by the stack pointer (the last written to the stack) to the destination word (D). The
stack pointer is the only word changed in the stack.
TB1 must be the first address of a stack defined using SSET(160).
Do not allow the stack pointer to be decremented to the memory address of the
stack pointer. If the content of the stack pointer is less than or equal to the ad-
dress of the stack pointer itself, the ER Flag (A50003) will be turned ON.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of TB1+1 is less than or equal to the address of TB1+1.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, LIFO(162) is used to decre-
ment the content of the stack pointer from $2004 to $2003, and copy the last data
written to the stack to CIO 2000.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 LIFO(162) D00000
2000
Description
Precautions
Stack Instructions Section 5-32
0000
00 (163)
FIFO D00000 2001
392
D00000 $2006 (Final stack address) $2000
D00001 $2004 (Stack pointer) $2001
D00002 ABCD $2002
D00003 37B4 $2003
D00004 0000 $2004
D00005 0000 $2005
D00006 0000 $2006
2000
37B4
Stack pointer
decremented
D00000 $2006 (Final stack address) $2000
D00001 $2003 (Stack pointer) $2001
D00002 ABCD $2002
D00003 37B4 (Moved to CIO 0200) $2003
D00004 0000 $2004
D00005 0000 $2005
D00006 0000 $2006
Memory
address
Memory
address
5-32-4FIRST IN FIRST OUT: FIFO(163)
(163)
FIFO TB1 D D: Destination word CIO, G, A, DM, DR, IR
TB1: 1st stack address CIO, G, A, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j FIFO(162)
When the execution condition is OFF, FIFO(163) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, FIFO(163) writes zeros into the last word of the stack
and shifts the contents of each word within the stack down by one address, final-
ly shifting the data from TB1+2 (the first value written to the stack) to the destina-
tion word (D). The memory address in the stack pointer (TB1+1) is then decrem-
ented by one.
TB1 must be the first address of a stack defined using SSET(160).
Do not allow the stack pointer to be decremented to the memory address of the
stack pointer. If the content of the stack pointer is less than or equal to the
memory address of the stack pointer itself, the ER Flag (A50003) will be turned
ON.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): TB1+1 is less than or equal to the address of the stack pointer.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the first value in the stack
(ABCD at D00002) is moved to CIO 2001 and all values remaining in the stack
are moved up on word in the stack.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 FIFO(163) D00000
2001
D00000 $2006 (Final stack address) $2000
D00001 $2005 (Stack pointer) $2001
D00002 ABCD $2002
D00003 37B4 $2003
D00004 8E19 $2004
D00005 0000 $2005
D00006 0000 $2006
CIO 2001
ABCD
D00000 $2006 (Final stack address) $2000
D00001 $2004 (Stack pointer) $2001
D00002 37B4 $2002
D00003 8E19 $2003
D00004 0000 $2004
D00005 0000 $2005
D00006 0000 $2006
Memory
address
Memory
address
Description
Precautions
Example
Stack Instructions Section 5-32
393
5-33 Data Tracing Data tracing can be used to facilitate debugging programs and is described in
detail in the CVSS
Operation Manual: Online
. This section shows the ladder
symbols for TRSM(170) and MARK(171) and provides example programs.
5-33-1TRACE MEMORY SAMPLING: TRSM(170)
(170)
TRSM
Ladder Symbol
TRSM(170) is used in the program to mark locations where specified data is to
be stored in Trace Memory. Up to 12 bits and up to 3 words may be designated
for tracing.
TRSM(170) is not controlled by an execution condition, but rather by two bits in
the Auxiliary Area: A00815 and A00814. A00815 is the Sampling Start Bit. This
bit is turned ON to start the sampling processes for tracing. The Sampling Start
Bit must not be turned ON from the program, i.e., it must be turned ON only from
CVSS. A00814 is the Trace Start Bit. When it is set, the specified data is re-
corded i n Trace Memory. The T race Start Bit can be set either from the program
or from CVSS. A positive or negative delay can also be set to alter the actual
point from which tracing will begin.
Data can be recorded in two ways. In the first method, a timer interval is set from
CVSS so that the specified data will be traced at a regular interval independent
of the cycle time (refer to
4-2 Data Tracing
in the
CV Support Software: Online
Operation Manual
). The timer interval can be set to between 5 and 2550 ms, in 5
ms steps. If the timer interval is set to 0 ms, the sampling will take place once
each cycle; data will be recorded periodically and TRSM(170) instructions in the
program won’t trigger sampling.
To disable periodic sampling and enable sampling when TRSM(170) is ex-
ecuted in the program, the timer interval is set to “TRSM.” TRSM(170) can be
placed at one or more locations in the program to indicate where the specified
data is to be traced.
TRSM(170) can be incorporated anywhere in a program, any number of times.
The data in the trace memory can be monitored via CVSS.
Control Bits and Flags The following control bits and flags are used during data tracing. The Tracing
Flag will be ON during tracing operations. The Trace Completed Flag will turn
ON when enough data has been traced to fill Trace Memory.
Only A00814 and A00815 are meant to be controlled by the user, and A00815
must not be turned ON from the program, i.e., it must be turned ON only from
CVSS.
Flag Function
A00811 Trace Trigger Monitor Flag
A00812 Trace Completed Flag
A00813 Trace Busy Flag
A00814 Trace Start Bit
A00815 Sampling Start Bit
Example The following shows the basic program and operation for data tracing. The Sam-
pling Start Bit starts the sampling. The data is read and stored into trace memory.
When the Trace Start Bit is received, the CPU looks at the delay and marks the
trace memory accordingly. This can mean that some of the samples already
Description
Data Tracing Section 5-33
394
made will be recorded as the trace memory (negative delay), or that more sam-
ples will be made before they are recorded (positive delay). The sampled data is
written to trace memory, jumping to the beginning of the memory area once the
end has been reached and continuing up to the start marker. This might mean
that previously recorded data (i.e., data from this sample that falls before the
start marker) is overwritten (this is especially true if the delay is positive). The
negative delay cannot be such that the required data was executed before sam-
pling was started.
0002
01
0002
00
A008
13
A008
12
A008
14
0000
00
(170)
TRSM
Trace Trigger Bit
Indicates trace is
in progress.
Indicates trace is finished.
InstructionAddress Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 OUT A00814
00002 TRSM(170)
00003 LD A00813
00004 OUT 000200
00005 LD A00812
00006 OUT 000201
A00815
A00814
A00813
A00812
Sampling
Trace memory A00812 turns ON and the
trace is complete when
enough data to fill trace
memory has been sampled.
Sampling
Start tracing
Tracing Flag
Trace Completed Flag
Positive
delay
*Negative
delay
No delay
*Negative delays cannot be such that the
requested data was executed before the
sampling started.
A00811 Trace Start Monitor Flag
Data Tracing Section 5-33
395
5-33-2MARK TRACE: MARK(174)
(174)
MARK N N: Mark number #
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Like TRSM(170), MARK(174) is used in the program to mark locations where
specified data is to be stored in T race Memory. Two words may be designated for
tracing, and each time the MARK(174) instruction is executed, the word ad-
dress, content, and mark number are stored in Trace Memory.
MARK(174) can also be used to measure the elapsed time between the execu-
tion of two MARK(174) instructions. The Execution Time Measured Flag
(A00808) turns ON when the specified execution time has been measured. Re-
fer to the CVSS
Operation Manual: Online
for details.
The word addresses, trigger conditions, and delay must be set beforehand from
the CVSS. MARK(174) uses the control bits and flags shown in the following
table.
Flag Function
A00808 Execution Time Measured Flag
A00811 Trace Trigger Monitor Flag
A00812 Trace Completed Flag
A00813 Trace Busy Flag
A00814 Trace Start Bit
A00815 Sampling Start Bit
Sampling
Trace memory
A00812 turns ON and the
trace is complete when
enough data to fill trace
memory has been sampled.
Delay
N must be BCD.
Description
Precautions
Data Tracing Section 5-33
396
5-34 Memory Card Instructions
Memory Card Instructions all involve the transfer of data to and from the Memory
Card in the memory card drive. The instructions described in this section can
thus only be used if there is a Memory Card in the drive.
Exercise care when transferring a very large number of words, because it can
greatly increase the overall cycle time.
The following flags are used by all of the Memory Card instructions. Refer to
3-6-20 Memory Card Flags
for details.
A343 bit(s) Function
00 to 03 Memory Card Type (0:None, 1: RAM, 2: EPROM, 3: EEPROM)
07 Memory Card Format Error Flag
08 Memory Card Transfer Error Flag
09 Memory Card Write Error Flag
10 Memory Card Read Error Flag
11 FIle Missing Flag
12 Memory Card Write Flag
13 Memory Card Instruction Flag
14 Accessing Memory Card Flag
15 Memory Card Protected Flag
A346 contains the number of words (4-digit BCD) left to transfer from the
Memory Card with FILR(180)/FILW(181).
5-34-1READ DATA FILE: FILR(180)
Variations
j FILR(180)
(180)
FILR N D C D: 1st destination word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
C: 1st control word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
N: Words to transfer CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OF F, FILR(180) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, FILR(180) reads N words of data from the memory card
data file (
filename
.IOM) specified in C+1 to C+4, and outputs the data to the des-
ignated memory area beginning at D.
The name of the file from which the data is read is specified by eight ASCII char-
acters in C+1 to C+4. Data will be read from the word indicated in C+5 if C bit 04
(the O f fset Enable Bit) is ON. The following table shows the function of bits in the
control words.
Word Bit(s) Function Bit(s) Function
C 04 Offset Enable Bit (ON:
enabled, OFF: disabled) Other Turn OFF.
C+1 08 to 15 First character in name 00 to 07 Second character in name
C+2 08 to 15 Third character in name 00 to 07 Fourth character in file
C+3 08 to 15 Fifth character in name 00 to 07 Sixth character in file
C+4 08 to 15 Seventh character in name 00 to 07 Eighth character in file
C+5 00 to 15 Offset from beginning of file (0000 to 9999, BCD)
If the filename is less than 8 characters long, enter #20 for the bytes that aren’t
required. It is not necessary to input the filename extension “.IOM.”
Description
Memory Card Instructions Section 5-34
(180)
FILR 0300 D01000 0500
0000
00
397
When FILR(180) is executed, the CPU first checks whether the ER Flag
(A50003) is ON, then processes the data transfer and following instructions in
parallel, so check the Memory Card Instruction Flag (A34313) to verify that
FILR(180) has been completed correctly.
The number of words to transfer (N) must be BCD.
If bit 04 of C is ON, C+5 must be BCD.
If N exceeds the number of words remaining in the file, only the words in the file
will be transferred and no error will occur.
Write the execution condition for FLSP(183) so that the instruction will not be
executed if the Memory Card Instruction Flag (A34313) is ON (when another
memory card instruction is being executed).
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): N is not BCD.
Bit 04 of C is ON, but the content C+5 is not BCD.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
A Memory Card is not mounted.
A34310: The file not read if the offset in C+5 is larger than the file.
A34311: The specified file doesn’t exist on the card.
In the following example, 20 words, beginning from the 17th word of the file, are
transferred from memory card data file “ABCD” to D01000 to D01019.
Here, the content of CIO 0300 would be 0020 (BCD) to indicate reading 20
words. The contents of the control words would be as follows:
Word Leftmost
byte Rightmost
byte Meaning
CIO 0500 0 0 1 0 Enable offset
CIO 0501 4 1 4 2 A B
CIO 0502 4 3 4 4 C D
CIO 0503 2 0 2 0 Indicates end of name
CIO 0504 2 0 2 0 Indicates end of name
CIO 0505 0 0 1 7 Offset
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 FILR(180) 0300
D01000
0500
Memory Card
ABCD.IOM
D01000
D01019
PC Memory
17th word
36th word
Precautions
Example
Memory Card Instructions Section 5-34
398
5-34-2WRITE DATA FILE: FILW(181)
Variations
j FILW(181)
(181)
FILW N S C S: 1st source word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
C: 1st control word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
N: Words to transfer CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition i s O F F, FILW(181) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, FILW(181) writes the data in S to S+N–1 to a Memory
Card data file (
FILENAME
.IOM) specified in C+1 to C+4. The data will replace
data i n the file if C bit 07 (the Overwrite Bit) is ON, or be added to the end of the
file if C bit 07 is OFF.
The name of the file to which the data is written is specified by eight ASCII char-
acters in C+1 to C+4. Data will be written from the word indicated in C+5 if C bit
04 (the Offset Enable Bit) is ON. If the specified file name does not exist, a new
file b y that name will be created; the data will be written from the beginning of the
file, regardless of the status of the Of fset Enable bit. The following table shows
the function of bits in the control words.
Word Bit(s) Function Bit(s) Function
C 04 Offset Enable Bit (ON:
enabled, OFF: disabled) 07 Overwrite Bit (ON: replace
data, OFF: add data)
C+1 08 to 15 First character in name 00 to 07 Second character in name
C+2 08 to 15 Third character in name 00 to 07 Fourth character in file
C+3 08 to 15 Fifth character in name 00 to 07 Sixth character in file
C+4 08 to 15 Seventh character in name 00 to 07 Eighth character in file
C+5 00 to 15 Offset from beginning of file (0000 to 9999, BCD)
If the filename is less than 8 characters long, enter #20 to the bytes that aren’t
required. It is not necessary to input the filename extension “.IOM.”
When FILW(181) is executed, the CPU first checks whether the ER Flag
(A50003) is ON, then processes the data transfer and following instructions in
parallel, so check the Memory Card Write Flag (A34312) or the Memory Card
Instruction Flag (A34313) to verify that FILW(181) has been completed correctly .
The number of words to transfer (N) must be BCD.
If bit 04 of C is ON, C+5 must contain BCD.
Do not use the following filenames: AUX, CON, LST, PRN, NUL.
If N exceeds the number of words remaining in the file, data will be transferred
until the end of the file is reached, the remaining data will not be transferred and
no error will occur.
Write the execution condition for FILW(181) so that the instruction will not be
executed if the Memory Card Instruction Flag (A34313) is ON (when another
Memory Card instruction is being executed).
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): N is not BCD.
Bit 04 of C is ON, but the content C+5 is not BCD.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
A Memory Card is not mounted.
A34308: Turned ON and the data not written if the of fset in C+5 is
larger than the file size.
Description
Precautions
Memory Card Instructions Section 5-34
(181)
FILW 0300 D01000 0500
0000
00
399
In the following example the data in D01000 to D01019 is written over the 20
words in memory card data file “ABCD” beginning at the 17th word of file.
Here, the content of CIO 0300 would be 0020 (BCD) to indicate reading 20
words. The contents of the control words would be as follows:
Word Leftmost
byte Rightmost
byte Meaning
CIO 0500 0 0 9 0 Overwrite; enable offset
CIO 0501 4 1 4 2 A B
CIO 0502 4 3 4 4 C D
CIO 0503 2 0 2 0 Indicates end of name
CIO 0504 2 0 2 0 Indicates end of name
CIO 0505 0 0 1 7 Offset
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 FILW(181)
00002 0300
D01000
0500
Memory Card
ABCD.IOM
D01000
D01019
PC Memory
17th word
36th word
Example
Memory Card Instructions Section 5-34
400
5-34-3READ PROGRAM FILE: FILP(182)
(182)
FILP C C: 1st control word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j FILP(182)
When the execution condition is OFF, FILP(182) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, FILP(182) reads the ladder program file (
filename
.LDP)
specified in C+1 to C+4 from the Memory Card, and writes the data over the cur-
rent ladder program beginning at the instruction just after FILP(182). The pro-
gram file must be written to the Memory Card beforehand with the CVSS.
The program will be executed from the beginning when FILP(182) has been
completed.
Word Bit(s) Function Bit(s) Function
C 07 Write Method (ON: overwrite,
OFF: replace to END(001)) Other Set to OFF.
C+1 08 to 15 First character in name 00 to 07 Second character in name
C+2 08 to 15 Third character in name 00 to 07 Fourth character in file
C+3 08 to 15 Fifth character in name 00 to 07 Sixth character in file
C+4 08 to 15 Seventh character in name 00 to 07 Eighth character in file
If the filename is less than 8 characters long, enter #20 to the bytes that aren’t
required. It is not necessary to input the filename extension “.LDP.”
Write the execution condition so that the instruction will not be executed the first
time i t i s examined (i.e., the first cycle when SFC programming is not being used
and the first cycle that the step containing FILP(182) goes from inactive to active
for SFC programming). If FILP(182) is executed during the first cycle, a non-fatal
SFC continuation error will occur.
When executing FILP(182), set the maximum cycle time to 2 seconds in the PC
Setup.
The program will not be executed for several cycles (30 seconds or more max.)
when FILP(182) is executed; the cycle time will be reduced during this period.
When the Write Method Bit (C bit 07) is ON, FILP(182) will erase just enough of
the current ladder program to accommodate the program file. If the program file
transferred from the Memory Card ends with END(001), the ladder program will
end there. If the transferred program file does not end in END(001), the ladder
program will be executed until the END(001) of the original program is reached.
A program file that is longer than the original ladder program from FILP(182) to
END(001) must have its own END(001) instruction because the END(001) in-
struction in the original ladder program will be overwritten.
FILP
END
Program
file
Write
over
To here if END is in pro-
gram file
To here if END is not in
program file
Program
execution
Description
Overwrite Method
Memory Card Instructions Section 5-34
0000
00 A343
13 (182)
FILP 0500
401
If the program file is shorter than the original ladder program from FILP(182) to
END(001) and doesn’t end in END(001), be sure that the program file doesn’t
overwrite only the first part of an instruction in the original ladder program creat-
ing an instruction format error.
FILP
M0V0100
D00300
M0V
#ABCD
D02200
FILP
Program file
Improper
instruction
to
M0V
#00FF
D02000
to
M0V
#00FF
D02000
D00300
M0V
#ABCD
D02200
to
When the Write Method Bit (C bit 07) is OFF, FILP(182) will erase the current
ladder program from the instruction just after FILP(182) to END(001), then insert
the program file. It is not necessary for the program file to end in END(001).
If the program file is shorter than the original ladder program from FILP(182) to
END(001), the ladder program will be shorter after FILP(182) is executed.
FILP
END
Program
file
Area reduced
Delete
If the program file is longer than the original ladder program from FILP(182) to
END(001), the ladder program will be longer after FILP(182) is executed.
FILP
END
Program
file
Area increased
Delete
FILP(182) cannot be used in an interrupt program.
The instruction trace operation and online editing cannot be performed while
FILP(182) is being executed.
Write the execution condition for FILP(182) so that the instruction will not be
executed if the Memory Card Instruction Flag (A34313) is ON (when another
Memory Card instruction is being executed).
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): A Memory Card is not mounted.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
In the following example, the ladder program file “ABCD.LDP” is transferred
from the Memory Card using the “replace to END(001)” method. When
CIO 000000 is ON and A34313 (Memory Card Instruction Flag) is OFF, the
contents of ABCD.LDP is written over all instructions after the instruction line
containing FILP(182).
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 AND NOT A34313
00002 FILP(182) 0500
Replace to END(001)
Method
Precautions
Example
Memory Card Instructions Section 5-34
402
CIO 0500 0000 Overwrite
CIO 0501 4142 “A,” “B”
CIO 0502 4344 “C,” “D”
CIO 0503 2020
CIO 0504 2020
MSB LSB
5-34-4CHANGE STEP PROGRAM: FLSP(183)
(183)
FLSP N C C: 1st control word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
N: Step number CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j FLSP(183)
When the execution condition is OFF, FLSP(183) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, FLSP(183) reads the step program file specified in C+ 1
to C+4 (
filename
.SFC) from the Memory Card and writes the data over the step
indicated by N, changing the contents of the action block. The step program file
must be written to the Memory Card beforehand with the CVSS.
A step that is active or that contains actions that are still being executed cannot
be changed. Also, the number of actions in the new step must be the same as the
number in the step that is being overwritten.
The contents of C must be all zeros to indicate the Memory Card and the file
name i s specified in C+1 to C+4 as shown in the following table. If the filename is
less than 8 characters long, enter #20 for the bytes that aren’t required. It is not
necessary to input the filename extension “.SFC.” It is assumed.
Word Bit(s) Function Bit(s) Function
C00 to 15 OFF to indicate the Memory Card.
C+1 08 to 15 First character in name 00 to 07 Second character in name
C+2 08 to 15 Third character in name 00 to 07 Fourth character in file
C+3 08 to 15 Fifth character in name 00 to 07 Sixth character in file
C+4 08 to 15 Seventh character in name 00 to 07 Eighth character in file
Description
Memory Card Instructions Section 5-34
403
The contents of a subchart will be changed if the step number of a subchart
dummy step is specified for N. The number of the steps in the subchart can be
changed, as shown in the following diagram.
ST0100
ST0510
ST0500
ST0600
ST0610
ST0630
ST0620
ST0100 0500
0600
FLSP(183) can be used only by CPUs that support SFC programming.
N must be BCD between 0000 and 0511 for the CV500, or between 0000 and
1023 for the CV1000 or CV2000.
FLSP(183) cannot be used in an interrupt program.
Online editing cannot be performed while FLSP(183) is being executed.
Write the execution condition for FLSP(183) so that the instruction will not be
executed if the Memory Card Instruction Flag (A34313) is ON (when another
Memory Card instruction is being executed).
The number of actions in the step program file must match the number in the
step being replaced. If the number of actions is not the same, the Memory Card
Read Error Flag (A34310) will be turned ON and the instruction won’t be
executed.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): A Memory Card is not mounted.
N is not BCD between 0000 and 0511 for the CV500, or be-
tween 0000 and 1023 for the CV1000 or CV2000.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
A34310: The number of actions in the step program file doesn’t match
the number in the step being changed.
The indicated step is active, or an action within the step with
an action qualifier of “S” is being executed.
The indicated step doesn’t exist.
Precautions
Memory Card Instructions Section 5-34
0000
00 (183)
FLSP #0050 0500
404
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example with the memory contents
shown, the contents of step 0050 will be overwritten with the contents of
ABCD.SFC. The structure of the SFC program will not change, but the contents
of the action block for step 0050 will be replaced with the contents of ABCD.SFC.
The extension “.SFC” is assumed and is not input.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 FLSP(183) #0050
0500
Word Leftmost
byte Rightmost
byte Meaning
CIO 0500 0 0 0 0 Indicates the Memory Card
CIO 0501 4 1 4 2 A B
CIO 0502 4 3 4 4 C D
CIO 0503 2 0 2 0 Indicates end of name
CIO 0504 2 0 2 0 Indicates end of name
ST0050 03
ST0060 07
ST0050 03
ST0060 07
ABCD.SFC
written into
step 0050.
Action Block for Step 0050 Action Block for Step 0050
AQ SV Action FV ABCD.SFC AQ SV Action FV
NAC 0300
ABCD
.
SFC
written into
ste
p
0050
NAC 0550
N AC 0310 step
0050
.S AC 0580
N AC 0320 N AC 0800
5-35 Special I/O Instructions
The Special I/O Instructions are used to write data to or read data from Special
I/O Units, such as an ASCII Unit. Refer to the operation manual of the Special I/O
Unit for details on the use and content of data transfers.
5-35-1I/O READ: READ(190)
Variations
j READ(190)
(190)
READ N S D S: Source word CIO
D: 1st destination word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
N: Words to transfer CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, READ(190) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, READ(190) reads data from the memory area of the
Special I/O Unit allocated word S and transfers it to D through D+N–1. N indi-
cates the number of words to be read. S indicates the rightmost (first) of the two
words allocated for the Special I/O Unit (i.e., the input word).
Description
Special I/O Instructions Section 5-35
405
This instruction cannot be used to read data from Special I/O Units mounted to
Slave Racks in SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Systems. It can be used for certain
Special I/O Units mounted to newer version of SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O Sys-
tems. Refer to page 43 for details.
N must be BCD. (Special I/O Units can transfer up to 255 words of data.)
S must be in the I/O Area and allocated to a Special I/O Unit.
If the ER Flag (A50003) or CY Flag (A50004) is turned ON, the instruction will not
be executed.
If the data cannot be sent or the Special I/O Unit is busy, the data will be trans-
ferred during the next cycle. To make sure that READ(190) execution has been
completed, check EQ (A50006).
A maximum of two READ(190)/WRIT(191) instructions can be used for Slaves
connected to the same Master. If a third instruction is attempted when two
instructions are already being executed, the third instruction will not be executed
and the Carry Flag (A50004) will turn ON. Be sure to control execution of these
instructions so that no more than two are being executed simultaneously for
Units connected under the same Master.
This instruction cannot be used to read data from Special I/O Units mounted to
Slave Racks in SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Systems. It can be used for Units
mounted t o Slave Racks in SYSMAC BUS/2 Systems as long as the the follow-
ing conditions are met.
1, 2, 3...
1. The lot number of the Remote I/O Master Unit and Remote I/O Slave Unit
must be the same as or latter than the following.
1992
October (Y: November; Z: December)
1st
01 X 2
2. The DIP switch on the Remote I/O Slave Unit must be set to “54MH.” (Only
four Slaves can be connected to each Master when this setting is used.)
3. The Special I/O Unit must be one of the following: AD101, CT012, CT041,
ASC04, IDS01-V1, IDS02, IDS21, IDS22, LDP01-V1, or NC222.
4. No more than one READ(190) and/or WRIT(191) cannot be executed for
the same Special I/O Unit at the same time. Be sure the first instruction has
completed execution before starting execution of another
READ(190)/WRIT(191) instruction.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
S is not allocated to a Special I/O Unit.
N is not BCD.
Instruction executed reading more than 255 words from a
Special I/O Unit on a SYSMAC BUS/2 Slave Rack.
The Slave is not set to 54MH.
CY (A50004): This Flag operates only for Special I/O Units mounted to
SYSMAC BUS/2 Slave Racks and turns on for the following:
The Special I/O Unit or Slave is busy.
An error has occurred in the Special I/O Unit.
Word operands have been designated for a Special I/O Unit
that requires a constant.
The communications path is not normal.
EQ (A50006): OFF while data is being read; ON when reading has been
completed.
Precautions
Special I/O Instructions Section 5-35
0100
00
(190)
READ 0001 0003 D00010
0000
00
0100
00 Equals
Flag
A500
06
406
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the number of words speci-
fied i n CIO 0001 is read through CIO 0003 (the I/O word allocated to the Special
I/O Unit) and stored at consecutive words starting at D00010.
The following program section uses a self-holding bit to ensure that the read op-
eration is executed even if the Special I/O Unit (or Slave Rack) is busy when
READ(190) is executed. The type of programming is also effective when the
read operation requires more than one cycle. The Equals Flag, which turns ON
when the reading operation is completed, is used to end the execution.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 OR 010000
00002 READ(190) 0001
0003
D00010
00003 AND NOT A50006
00004 OUT 010000
5-35-2 I/O READ 2: RD2(280)
(280)
RD2 C S D
Ladder Symbol Operand Data Areas
D: First destination word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
S: Source word CIO
C: Control word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Description When the execution condition is OFF, RD2(280) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, RD2(280) reads the memory contents of a Special I/O
Unit to specified words (beginning with D) in the Programmable Controller
through the source word ( S). The word specified for S is the third of the four
words (i.e., the first input word) that serve as the interface with the Special I/O
Unit.
The words that are to be transferred are specified by the control word. The con-
tents of the control word are as follows:
Number of words to be read (binary 00 to FF)
Control Word Contents
Beginning address to be read (binary 00 to FF)
MSB LSB
The beginning address to be read specifies the rightmost (lowest) word of the
range of data that is to be read from the memory area in the Special I/O Unit.
If 00 is specified as the number of words to be read, the instruction will not be
executed. If the sum of the beginning address to be read plus the number of
words to b e read is more than 100 (binary), the Error Flag (A5003) will turn ON.
If an error occurs at the Special I/O Unit (such as, for example, a non-readable
area being specified), the Carry Flag (A50004) will turn ON.
The Equals Flag (A50006) can be used to check whether or not RD2(280)
execution has been completed.
Precautions Several cycles may be required before RD2(280) execution is completed. Dur-
ing that time, the execution condition for RD2(28) must remain ON.
(CVM1 V2)
Special I/O Instructions Section 5-35
00
A5000010
(280)
RD2 #020C 0004 D00300
Equals Flag
0000
00 06 0010
00
407
RD2(280) carries out data exchange with the Special I/O Unit via the I/O area, so
the time required to complete execution depends on the I/O refresh interval (i.e.,
the cycle time).
Be sure that there is a Special I/O Unit mounted. If no Special I/O Unit is
mounted, RD2(280) execution will continue without stopping.
As of this printing, the RD2(280) can only be used with the C500-CT021 High-
speed C ounter Unit is set to four-word operation (normally, when used with SYS-
MAC BUS).
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Beginning address plus number of words exceeds 100 binary.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): An error has occurred at the Special I/O Unit.
EQ (A50006): The read operation has been completed.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the contents of words 02
through 1 2 i n the Special I/O Unit’ s memory area are read in order, one word at a
time, through CIO 0004, and the contents that are read are transferred in order
to D00300 through D00311.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 OR 001000
00002 RD2(280) #020C
0004
D00300
00003 AND NOT A50006
00004 OUT 001000
0 2
Number of words to be read: 12
C: Control Word Contents
Beginning address to be read: Word 02
0 C (Binary data)
Special I/O Instructions Section 5-35
408
Number of words
to be read
PC Memory
Beginning address
to be read
Words allocated to
Special I/O Unit
(CIO Area)
D: First destination word
S: Source word
Special I/O Unit Memory
5-35-3I/O WRITE: WRIT(191)
Variations
j WRIT(191)
(191)
WRIT N S D S: 1st source word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
D: Destination word CIO
N: Words to transfer CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, WRIT(191) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, WRIT(191) transfers the contents of S through
S+(N–1) to the Special I/O Unit allocated word D. N indicates the number of
words to be read. D indicates the rightmost (first) of the two words allocated for
the Special I/O Unit (i.e., the output word).
N must be BCD. (Special I/O Units can transfer up to 255 words of data.)
D must be in the I/O Area and allocated to a Special I/O Unit.
If a Special I/O Unit is busy and unable to receive data, the data will be written
during the next cycle. To make sure that WRIT(191) execution has been com-
pleted, check EQ (A50006).
A maximum of two READ(190)/WRIT(191) instructions can be used for Slaves
connected to the same Master. If a third instruction is attempted when two
instructions are already being executed, the third instruction will not be executed
Description
Precautions
Special I/O Instructions Section 5-35
409
and the Carry Flag (A50004) will turn ON. Be sure to control execution of these
instructions so that no more than two are being executed simultaneously for
Units connected under the same Master.
This instruction cannot be used to write data to Special I/O Units mounted to
Slave Racks in SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Systems. It can be used for Units
mounted t o Slave Racks in SYSMAC BUS/2 Systems as long as the the follow-
ing conditions are met.
1, 2, 3...
1. The lot number of the Remote I/O Master Unit and Remote I/O Slave Unit
must be the same as or latter than the following.
1992
October (Y: November; Z: December)
1st
01 X 2
2. The DIP switch on the Remote I/O Slave Unit must be set to “54MH.” (Only
four Slaves can be connected to each Master when this setting is used.)
3. The Special I/O Unit must be one of the following: AD101, CT012, CT041,
ASC04, IDS01-V1, IDS02, IDS21, IDS22, LDP01-V1, or NC222.
4. No more than one READ(190) and/or WRIT(191) cannot be executed for
the same Special I/O Unit at the same time. Be sure the first instruction has
completed execution before starting execution of another
READ(190)/WRIT(191) instruction.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
D is not allocated to a Special I/O Unit.
N is not BCD.
Instruction executed transferring more than 255 words to a
Special I/O Unit on a SYSMAC BUS/2 Slave Rack.
The Slave is not set to 54MH.
CY (A50004): This Flag operates only for Special I/O Units mounted to
SYSMAC BUS/2 Slave Racks and turns on for the following:
The Special I/O Unit or Slave is busy.
An error has occurred in the Special I/O Unit.
Word operands have been designated for a Special I/O Unit
that requires a constant.
The communications path is not normal.
EQ (A50006): OFF while data is being written; ON when writing has been
completed.
Example 1 When CIO 000001 is ON in the following example, the number of words speci-
fied in CIO 0001 is read consecutive from words starting at D00010 and trans-
ferred to the Special I/O Unit through CIO 0004 (the I/O word allocated to the
Special I/O Unit).
Special I/O Instructions Section 5-35
0110
00
(191)
WRIT 0001 D00010 0004
0000
01
A500
06
0110
00 Equals
Flag
CNT 0010 #0100
(090)
jINC D00000
(030)
jMOV 0002 *D00000
(191)
WRIT #0100 d00001 0003
0200
0200
0001
(041)
BSET #0000 D00000 D00100
0001
0200
0000
0000
0200
A500
A500
00
C0010
00
C0010
00
01
06
03
00
01
00
01
Error
Flag
Equals
Flag
D00001
to
D00100
CIO 0003
CIO 0002
Sensor: 000000
Sensor
PC ASCII Unit
Printer or
other external
device
410
The following program section uses a self-holding bit to ensure that the write op-
eration is executed even if the Special I/O Unit (or Slave Rack) is busy when
WRIT(191) i s executed. The type of programming is also ef fective when the read
operation requires more than one cycle. The Equals Flag, which turns ON when
the reading operation is completed, is used to end execution.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 OR 011000
00002 WRIT(191) 0001
D00010
0004
00003 AND NOT A50006
00004 OUT 011000
Example 2 The following program section shows one way to pass data from a weighing sta-
tion on a conveyor line through an ASCII Unit to a printer or other external de-
vice. Data is input via CIO 0002, stored in D00001 through D00100, and output
via CIO 0003.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 LD C0010
00002 CNT 0010
#0100
00003 LD 000000
00004 jINC(090) D00000
00005 jMOV(030) 0002
*D00000
00006 LD C0010
00007 OR 020000
00008 AND NOT 020001
00009 OUT 020000
00010 WRIT(191) #0100
D00001
0003
00011 AND A50006
00012 OUT 020001
00013 OUT 000100
00014 BSET(041) #0000
D00000
D0010
00015 AND A50003
00016 OUT 000101
Special I/O Instructions Section 5-35
411
5-35-4 I/O WRITE 2: WR2(281)
(281)
WR2 C S D
Ladder Symbol Operand Data Areas
D: Destination word CIO
S: First source word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
C: Control word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Description When the execution condition is OFF, WR2(281) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, WR2(281) writes the specified number of words to the
specified address in a Special I/O Unit via the destination word (D). The word
specified for D is the first of the four words (i.e., the first output word) that serve
as the interface with the Special I/O Unit.
The words that are to be transferred are specified by the control word. The con-
tents of the control word are as follows:
Number of words to be written (binary 00 to FF)
Control Word Contents
Beginning address for writing (binary 00 to FF)
MSB LSB
The beginning address for writing specifies the rightmost (lowest) word of the
range of in the Special I/O Unit into which the data is to be written.
If 00 is specified as the number of words to be written, the instruction will not be
executed. If the sum of the beginning address for writing plus the number of
words to b e written is more than 100 (binary), the Error Flag (A5003) will turn ON.
If an error occurs at the Special I/O Unit (such as, for example, an area for in
writing is not possible being specified), the Carry Flag (A50004) will turn ON.
The Equals Flag (A50006) can be used to check whether or not WR2(281)
execution has been completed.
Precautions Several cycles may be required before WR2(281) execution is completed. Dur-
ing that time, the execution condition for RD2(28) must remain ON.
WR2(281) carries out data exchange with the Special I/O Unit via the I/O area,
so the time required to complete execution depends on the I/O refresh interval
(i.e., the cycle time).
Be sure that there is a Special I/O Unit mounted. If no Special I/O Unit is
mounted, WR2(210) execution will continue without stopping.
As of this printing, WR2(281) can only be used for the C500-CT021 High-speed
Counter Unit is set for four-word operation (normally, when used with SYSMAC
BUS).
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Beginning address plus number of words exceeds 100 binary.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
CY (A50004): An error has occurred at the Special I/O Unit.
EQ (A50006): The write operation has been completed.
(CVM1 V2)
Special I/O Instructions Section 5-35
0000
A5000010
(281)
WR2 #0010 D00300 0002
Equals Flag
0010
01
01
01 06
412
Example When CIO 000001 is ON in the following example, the 16 words beginning with
D00300 are transferred in order through CIO 0002 and are written in order to
words 00 through 0F in the Special I/O Unit‘s memory area.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000001
00001 OR 001001
00002 WR2(281) #0010
D00300
0002
00003 AND NOT A50006
00004 OUT 001001
0 0
Number of words to be written: 16
C: Control Word Contents
Beginning address for writing: word 00
1 0 (Binary data)
Number of words
to be written
PC Memory
Beginning address
for writing
Words allocated to
Special I/O Unit
S: First source word
D: Destination word
Special I/O Unit Memory
Special I/O Instructions Section 5-35
(187)
IOSP
0000
00
413
5-36 Network Instructions
The Network Instructions are used for communicating with or control PCs or oth-
er Units linked through the SYSMAC NET Link System or SYSMAC LINK Sys-
tem. The first two Network Instructions are used to control the access right to the
PC from both local and remote Peripheral Devices.
5-36-1DISABLE ACCESS: IOSP(187)
(187)
IOSP
Variations
j IOSP(187)
Ladder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, IOSP(187) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, both read and write access to PC memory from all Pe-
ripheral Devices (GPC, CVSS, SSS, and Programming Console) and access
from BASIC Units, Personal Computer Units, Ethernet Units, and Temperature
Controller Data Link Units, and through SYSMAC NET Link Systems, SYSMAC
BUS/2 Systems, SYSMAC LINK Systems, Host Link Systems, etc., is disabled.
Access t o memory is disabled until either END(001) or IORS(188) is executed or
PC operation is stopped.
If PC memory is being accessed when IOSP(187) is executed, access will not be
disabled until the current accessing has been completed.
IOSP(187) i s designed to temporarily disable access, e.g., during read/write op-
erations. Servicing CPU Bus Units, the host link interface, and Peripheral De-
vices can also be disabled by turning ON the bits shown in the following table.
These bit can be turned ON at the beginning of the user program to more perma-
nently disable memory access than is possible with IOSP(187), which is ef fec-
tive only until the next IORS(188) or END(01) instruction (or until power is turned
OFF).
Bit(s) Name Function
A01500 through
A01515 CPU Service Dis-
able Bits Turned ON to stop service to CPU Bus
Units numbered #0 through #15, respec-
tively.
A01703 Host Link Service
Disable Bit Turned ON to stop Host Link and NT Link
System servicing.
A01704 Peripheral Service
Disable Bit Turned ON to stop service to Peripheral
Devices.
There are no flags affected by this instruction.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, memory access is disabled
from Peripheral Devices, through communications systems, and from other
specified Units.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 IOSP(187)
Description
Flags
Network Instructions Section 5-36
(188)
IORS
0000
01
414
5-36-2ENABLE ACCESS: IORS(188)
(188)
IORS
Ladder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, IORS(188) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, both read and write access to PC memory from Periph-
eral Devices is enabled.
There are no flags affected by this instruction.
Example When CIO 000001 is ON in the following example, memory access is enabled.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 IORS(188)
5-36-3DISPLAY MESSAGE: MSG(195)
(195)
MSG N M M: 1st message word CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM
N: Message number CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j MSG(195)
When the execution condition is OFF, MSG(195) is not executed. When ex-
ecuted with an ON execution condition, MSG(195) reads sixteen words of ex-
tended ASCII from M to M+15 and displays the message on the CVSS screen or
other Peripheral Device. The displayed message can be up to 32 characters
long, i.e., each ASCII character code requires eight bits (two digits). Refer to
Ap-
pendix H
for the extended ASCII codes. Japanese katakana characters are in-
cluded in this code.
If the message data changes while the message is being displayed, the display
will also change.
If not all sixteen words are required for the message, it can be stopped at any
point b y inputting “OD.” When OD is encountered in a message, no more words
will b e read and the words that normally would be used for the message can be
used for other purposes.
Only the messages whose message number has been preset in the Peripheral
Device will be displayed. If two or more MSG(195) instructions have the same
message number, the earlier message will be replaced when another MSG(195)
instruction with the same message number is executed later.
When a message instruction is executed, its corresponding Message Flag will
be turned ON (bits A09900 to A09907 correspond to messages 0 to 7).
A message instruction can be cleared by executing the instruction with a con-
stant (#0000 to #FFFF) entered for M.
Precautions N must be BCD between 0000 and 0007.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): N is not between 0 and 7.
Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Description
Flags
Description
Clearing Messages
Network Instructions Section 5-36
ABC123
The last character displayed is just
before “OD” in the message data.
415
The following example shows the display that would be produced for the instruc-
tion and data given when CIO 000000 is ON. If CIO 000001 goes ON, message
0 will be cleared.
The display message number must be set to 0 in the Peripheral Device before
executing the instruction.
00000 LD 000000
00001 MSG(195) #0000
0500
00002 LD 000001
00003 MSG(195) #0000
#0000
Address Instruction Operands
(195)
MSG #0000 0500
(195)
MSG #0000 #0000
0000
00
0000
01
DM contents ASCII
equivalent
0500 4 1 4 2 A B
0501 4 3 4 4 C D
0502 4 5 4 6 E F
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
0513 3 1 3 2 1 2
0514 3 3 0 D 3 (end)
0515 3 4 3 5 5 6
xx
5-36-4NETWORK SEND: SEND(192)
Variations
j SEND(192)
(192)
SEND S D C D: 1st destination word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
C: 1st control word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
S: 1st source word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, SEND(192) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, SEND(192) transfers data beginning at word S, to ad-
dresses beginning at D in the designated PC, BASIC Unit, Personal Computer
Unit, o r computer in the designated node on the designated SYSMAC NET Link
or SYSMAC LINK System.
The possible values for D depend on the destination Unit. Check the settings for
the Unit. If D is in the EM Area, data will be transferred to the current EM bank in
destination Unit.
The control words, beginning with C, specify the number of words to be sent, the
destination node, and other parameters. Some control data parameters depend
on whether a transmission is being sent through a SYSMAC NET Link System or
a SYSMAC LINK System.
SEND(192) only starts the transmission. Verify that the transmission has been
completed with the Network Status Flags in A502.
Note The node number for SYSMAC LINK Units and SYSMAC NET Link Units corre-
sponds to the unit number for the host link interface in the PC Setup.
Example
Description
Network Instructions Section 5-36
416
Control Data
SYSMAC NET Link Systems Set the destination node number to $FF to send the data to all nodes in the des-
ignated network or to $00 to send to a destination within the node of the PC ex-
ecuting the send. Refer to the
SYSMAC NET Link System Manual
for details.
Word Bits 00 to 07 Bits 08 to 15
CNumber of words (1 to 0990 in 4-digit hexadecimal, i.e., $0001 to $03DE)
C+1 Destination network address
(0 to 127, i.e., $00 to $7F)1Bits 08 to 11: ($0 to $F)2
Bits 12 to 15: Set to 0.
C+2 Destination unit address3Destination node number4
C+3 Bits 00 to 03:
No. of retries (0 to 15 in
hexadecimal,
i.e., $0 to $F)
Bits 04 to 07:
Set to 0.
Bits 08 to 11:
Transmission port number
($0 to $7)
Bit 12 to 14:
Set to 0.
Bit 15: ON: No response.
OFF: Response returned.
C+4 Response monitoring time ( $0001 to $FFFF = 0.1 to 6553.5 seconds)5
Note 1. Set the destination network address to $00 when transmitting within the lo-
cal network. In this case, the network of the Link Unit with the lowest unit
number will be selected if the PC belongs to more than one network.
2. The BASIC Unit interrupt number when a BASIC Unit is designated.
3. Indicates a Unit as shown in the following table.
Unit Setting
PC 00
SYSMAC NET Link or SYSMAC LINK
Unit $10 to $1F: Unit numbers 0 to F
$FE: The local Unit
SYSMAC BUS/2 Master, BASIC Unit,
or Personal Computer Unit $10 to $1F: Unit numbers 0 to F
SYSMAC BUS/2 Group-2 Slave $90 to $CF:
Unit number+90+10×Master
address
4. Values o f $01 to $7E indicate nodes 1 to 126. Set to $FF to send to all nodes,
$00 to send data within the local PC.
5. Designates the length of time that the PC retries transmission when bit 15 of
C+3 is OFF and no response is received. The default value is $0000, which
indicates 2 seconds. The response function is not used when the destina-
tion node number is set to $FF, broadcasting to all nodes in the network.
6. Transmissions cannot be sent to the PC executing the send.
SYSMAC LINK System Set the destination node number to $FF to send the data to all nodes in the des-
ignated network or to $00 to send to a destination within the node of the PC ex-
ecuting the send. Refer to the
SYSMAC LINK System Manual
for details.
Word Bits 00 to 07 Bits 08 to 15
CNumber of words (1 to 256 in 4-digit hexadecimal, i.e., $0001 to $0100)
C+1 Destination network address
(0 to 127, i.e., $00 to $7F)1Bits 08 to 11: ($0 to $F)2
Bits 12 to 15: Set to 0.
C+2 Destination unit address3Destination node number4
C+3 Bits 00 to 03:
No. of retries (0 to 15 in
hexadecimal,
i.e., $0 to $F)
Bits 04 to 07:
Set to 0.
Bits 08 to 11:
Transmission port number
($0 to $7)
Bit 12 to 14:
Set to 0.
Bit 15: ON: No response.
OFF: Response returned.
C+4 Response monitoring time ( $0001 to $FFFF = 0.1 to 6553.5 seconds)5
Network Instructions Section 5-36
417
Note 1. Set the destination network address to $00 when transmitting within the lo-
cal network. In this case, the network of the Link Unit with the lowest unit
number will be selected if the PC belongs to more than one network.
2. The BASIC Unit interrupt number when a BASIC Unit is designated.
3. Same as for SYSMAC NET Link Systems. See note 3 above.
4. Values of $01 to $3E indicate nodes 1 to 62. Set to $FF to send to all nodes,
$00 to send data within the local PC.
5. Designates the length of time that the PC retries transmission when bit 15 of
C+3 is OFF and no response is received. The default value is $0000, which
indicates 2 seconds. The response function is not used when the destina-
tion node number is set to $FF, broadcasting to all nodes in the network.
6. Transmissions cannot be sent to the PC executing the send.
Precautions C through C+4 must be within the values specified above. To be able use of
SEND(192), the PC must have a SYSMAC NET Link Unit or SYSMAC LINK Unit
mounted.
Do not change the control data during a transmission (i.e., while the correspond-
ing Port Enabled Flag in A502 is OFF).
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Example The following example is for transmission to a PC through a SYSMAC NET Link
System. When CIO 000000 is ON, the SEND(192) transfers the content of
CIO 0100 through CIO 0104 to D05001 through D05005 of the PC on node 3 of
network 1 . The control words also specify that a response is required, use of port
2, 7 retries, and a 10-second response monitoring time.
0005
0001
0300
CIO 0101
CIO 0102
CIO 0103
CIO 0104
CIO 0105
D05001
D05002
D05003
D05004
D05005
D00010
D00011
D00012
15 0 Node 3
(192)
SEND 0101 D05001 D00010
0000
00 Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 SEND(192) 0101
D05001
D00010
Control Words
0207
0064
D00013
D00014
Network Instructions Section 5-36
418
5-36-5NETWORK RECEIVE: RECV(193)
Variations
j RECV(193)
(193)
RECV S D C D: 1st destination word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
C: 1st control word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
S: 1st source word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, RECV(193) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, RECV(193) transfers data beginning at word S from the
designated PC, BASIC Unit, Personal Computer Unit, or host computer in the
designated node on the SYSMAC NET Link/SYSMAC LINK System to address-
es beginning at D in the PC executing the instruction.
The possible values for S depend on the source Unit. Check the settings for the
Unit. I f S i s i n the EM Area, data will be transferred from the current EM bank in
the source Unit.
The control words, beginning with C, specify the number of words to be received,
the source node, and other parameters. Some control data parameters depend
on whether a transmission is being received in a SYSMAC NET Link System or a
SYSMAC LINK System.
Normally a response is required with RECV(193), so set C+3 bit 15 to OFF.
RECV(193) only starts the transmission. Verify that the transmission has been
completed with the Network Status Flags in A502.
Note The node number for SYSMAC LINK Units and SYSMAC NET Link Units corre-
sponds to the unit number for the host link interface in the PC Setup.
Control Data
SYSMAC NET Link Systems Set the source node number to $00 to send data within the PC executing the
instruction. Refer to the
SYSMAC NET Link System Manual
for details.
Word Bits 00 to 07 Bits 08 to 15
CNumber of words (1 to 0990 in 4-digit hexadecimal, i.e., $0001 to $03DE)
C+1 Source network address
(0 to 127, i.e., $00 to $7F)1Bits 08 to 11: ($0 to $F)2
Bits 12 to 15: Set to 0.
C+2 Source unit address3Source node number4
C+3 Bits 00 to 03:
No. of retries (0 to 15 in
hexadecimal,
i.e., $0 to $F)
Bits 04 to 07:
Set to 0.
Bits 08 to 11:
Transmission port number
($0 to $7)
Bit 12 to 14:
Set to 0.
Bit 15: ON: No response.
OFF: Response returned.
C+4 Response monitoring time ( $0001 to $FFFF = 0.1 to 6553.5 seconds)5
Note 1. Set the source network address to $00 when transmitting within the same
network. In this case, the network of the Link Unit with the lowest unit num-
ber will be selected if the PC belongs to more than one network.
2. The BASIC Unit interrupt number when a BASIC Unit is designated.
Description
Network Instructions Section 5-36
419
3. Indicates a Unit as shown in the following table.
Unit Setting
PC 00
SYSMAC NET Link or SYSMAC LINK
Unit $10 to $1F: Unit numbers 0 to F
$FE: The local Unit
SYSMAC BUS/2 Master, BASIC Unit,
or Personal Computer Unit $10 to $1F: Unit numbers 0 to F
SYSMAC BUS/2 Group 2 Slave $90 to $CF:
Unit number+90+10×Master
address
4. Values of $01 to$7E indicate nodes 1 to 126. Set to $00 to receive data from
within the local PC.
5. Designates the length of time that the PC retries transmission when bit 15 of
C+3 is OFF and no response is received. The default value is $0000, which
indicates 2 seconds.
6. Transmissions cannot be received from the PC executing RECV(193).
SYSMAC LINK System Set the source node number to $00 to receive from a source within the node of
the PC executing the instruction. Refer to the
SYSMAC LINK System Manual
for
details.
Word Bits 00 to 07 Bits 08 to 15
CNumber of words (1 to 256 in 4-digit hexadecimal, i.e., $0001 to $0100)
C+1 Source network address
(0 to 127, i.e., $00 to $7F)1Bits 08 to 11: ($0 to $F)2
Bits 12 to 15: Set to 0.
C+2 Source unit address3Source node number4
C+3 Bits 00 to 03:
No. of retries (0 to 15 in
hexadecimal,
i.e., $0 to $F)
Bits 04 to 07:
Set to 0.
Bits 08 to 11:
Transmission port number
($0 to $7)
Bit 12 to 14:
Set to 0.
Bit 15: ON: No response.
OFF: Response returned.
C+4 Response monitoring time ( $0001 to $FFFF = 0.1 to 6553.5 seconds)5
Note 1. Set the source network address to $00 when transmitting within the same
network. In this case, the network of the Link Unit with the lowest unit num-
ber will be selected if the PC belongs to more than one network.
2. The BASIC Unit interrupt number when a BASIC Unit is designated.
3. Same as for SYSMAC NET Link Systems. See note 3 above.
4. Values of $01 to $3E indicate nodes 1 to 62. Set to $00 to receive data from
within the local PC.
5. Designates the length of time that the PC retries transmission when bit 15 of
C+3 is OFF and no response is received. The default value is $0000, which
indicates 2 seconds.
6. Transmissions cannot be received from the PC executing RECV(193).
Precautions C through C+4 must be within the values specified above. To be able use of
RECV(193), the PC must have a SYSMAC NET Link or SYSMAC LINK Unit
mounted.
Do not change the control data during a transmission (i.e., while the correspond-
ing Port Enabled Flag in A502 is OFF).
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Network Instructions Section 5-36
420
Example The following example is for receiving from a PC through a SYSMAC NET Link
System. When CIO 000000 is ON, the RECV(193) transfers the content of
CIO 0101 through CIO 0105 of the PC on node 3 of network 1, to D05001
through D05005 of the PC executing RECV(193). The control words also speci-
fy that a response is required, use of port 2, 7 retries, and a 10-second response
monitoring time.
0005
0001
0300
CIO 0101
CIO 0102
CIO 0103
CIO 0104
CIO 0105
D05001
D05002
D05003
D05004
D05005
D00010
D00011
D00012
15 0 Node 3
00000 LD 000000
00001 RECV(193) 0101
D05001
D00010
Address Instruction Operands
0000
00 (193)
RECV 0101 D05001 D00010
Control Words
0207
0064
D00013
D00014
5-36-6DELIVER COMMAND: CMND(194)
Variations
j CMND(194)
(194)
CMND S D C D: 1st response word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
C: 1st control word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
S: 1st command word CIO, G, A, T, C, DM
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
When the execution condition is OFF, CMND(194) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, CMND(194) transmits the command beginning at
word S t o the designated Unit at the destination node number in the designated
network of the SYSMAC NET Link/SYSMAC LINK System, and receives the r e -
sponse beginning at word D.
If the destination node number is $FF, the command will be broadcast to all
nodes in the designated network. Normally a response is required with
CMND(194) and C+3 bit 15 is turned OFF. The response function is disabled
when the command is sent to all nodes.
Any of the CV-mode (FINS) commands supported by the CV-series PCs can be
sent with certain changes (see below). Refer to the
CV-series PC Operation
Manual: Host Interface
for details on the CV-mode commands.
The following table shows differences between the CV-mode commands used
through the Host Link System and those used with CMND(194).
Host Link FINS command CMND(194)
ASCII Binary
The node number, header, FCS, and
terminator are required in the command
frame. (See note.)
Only the command part is required. The
header code, FCS, etc. are not
required.
Note The node number for SYSMAC LINK Units and SYSMAC NET Link Units corre-
sponds to the unit number for the host link interface in the PC Setup.
Description
Network Instructions Section 5-36
421
Control Data The control words, beginning with C, specify the number of bytes of control data
to be sent, the number of bytes of response data to be received, the destination
node, and other parameters. Some control data parameters depend on whether
a transmission is being received in a SYSMAC NET Link System or a SYSMAC
LINK System.
Word Bits 00 to 07 Bits 08 to 15
CNumber of bytes to send (0 to 1990, i.e., $0000 to $07C6)1
C+1 Number of bytes to receive (0 to 1990, i.e., $0000 to $07C6)1
C+2 Destination network address
(0 to 127, i.e., $00 to $7F)2Bits 08 to 11: ($0 to $F)3
Bits 12 to 15: Set to 0.
C+3 Destination unit address4Destination node number5
C+4 Bits 00 to 03:
No. of retries (0 to 15 in
hexadecimal,
i.e., $0 to $F)
Bits 04 to 07:
Set to 0.
Bits 08 to 11:
Transmission port number
($0 to $7)
Bit 12 to 14:
Set to 0.
Bit 15: ON: No response.
OFF: Response returned.
C+5 Response monitoring time ( $0001 to $FFFF = 0.1 to 6553.5 seconds)6
Note 1. Maximum number of bytes that can be sent or received:
System Max. number of bytes
SYSMAC NET Link $07C6 (1990)
SYSMAC LINK $021E (542)
SYSMAC BUS/2 $021E (542)
2. Set the destination network address to $00 when transmitting within the
same network.
3. The BASIC Unit interrupt number when a BASIC Unit is designated.
4. Indicates a Unit as shown in the following table.
Unit Setting
PC $00
SYSMAC NET Link or SYSMAC LINK
Unit $10 to $1F: Unit numbers 0 to F
$FE: The local Unit
SYSMAC BUS/2 Master, BASIC Unit,
or Personal Computer Unit $10 to $1F: Unit numbers 0 to F
SYSMAC BUS/2 Group 2 Slave $90 to $CF:
Unit number+90+10×Master
address
5. The destination node number can have the following values:
System/type of transmission Possible values
SYSMAC NET Link System $01 to $7E (nodes 1 to 126)
SYSMAC LINK System $01 to $3E (nodes 1 to 62)
Broadcast to all nodes in network $FF
Transmit within the PC
(to/from CPU Bus Units) $00
6. Designates the length of time that the PC retries transmission when bit 15 of
C+3 is OFF and no response is received. The default value is $0000, which
indicates 2 seconds.
7. Transmissions cannot be sent to the PC executing CMND(194) (i.e., the
Unit cannot be specified as $00 and the destination node number set to
$00).
Precautions C through C+5 must be within the values specified below. To be able use of
CMND(194), the PC must have a SYSMAC NET Link, SYSMAC LINK Unit, or
SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O Master Unit mounted.
Network Instructions Section 5-36
422
Do not change the control data during a transmission (i.e., while the correspond-
ing Port Enabled Flag in A502 is OFF).
The Execute Error Flag for the designated port will be turned ON if no response
is received in the response monitoring time (C+5), the amount of command data
transmitted exceeds the maximum for the system, or the response data exceeds
the number of bytes specified in C+1.
The amount of response data can be less than the “number of bytes to receive”
in C+1 without causing an error, but the amount of the command data must
agree with the “number of bytes to send” in C or a command length error will oc-
cur. Be sure that the command data and response data do not go over the end of
a data area.
CMND(194) only starts the transmission of command data. Verify that the trans-
mission has been completed with the Network Status Flags in A502. If data is
changed before transmission is completed, the data might be transmitted while
data is being changed.
Note Refer to page 115 for general precautions on operand data areas.
Flags ER (A50003): Content of *DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
Example This example shows CMND(194) used to transmit a command to the PC on
node 3 of network 1 to change the PC to MONITOR mode when CIO 00000 is
ON. D05001 is the first word to receive the response, and D04001 through
D04003 contain the command data.
00000 LD 000000
00001 CMND(194) D04001
D05001
D01001
Address Instruction Operands
0000
00 (194)
CMND D04001 D05001 D01001
Word Content
D04001 0401
D04002 0000
D04003 0002
D01001 to D01006 contain the control data, as shown below.
Word Content Function
D01001 0006 Number of bytes to send = 6
D01002 0100 Number of bytes to receive = 256
D01003 0001 Destination network address = 01
D01004 0300 Destination node number = 03; unit = PC
D01005 0207 Response returned; transmission port = 2; retries = 7
D01006 0064 Response monitoring time = 10 seconds
Network Instructions Section 5-36
423
5-36-7About SYSMAC NET Link/SYSMAC LINK Operations
SEND(192), RECV(193), and CMND(194) are based on command/response
processing. That is, the transmission is not complete until the sending node re-
ceives and acknowledges a response from the destination node, unless the re-
sponse function is disabled in the control word or data is being broadcast to all
nodes in a network. Refer to the
SYSMAC NET Link System Manual
or
SYS-
MAC LINK System Manual
for details about command/response operations.
If more than one network instruction (SEND(192)/RECV(193)/CMND(194)) is
used through one port, the following flags must be used to ensure that any pre-
vious operation has completed before attempting further network instructions.
Flag Functions
Port #0 to #7
Enabled Flags
(A50200 to A50207)
Enabled Flags A50200 to A50207 are OFF during
network instruction execution for ports #0 to #7,
respectively. Do not start a network instruction for a port
unless the corresponding Enabled Flag is ON.
Port #0 to #7
Execution Error Flags
(A50208 to A50215)
OFF following normal completion of a network
instruction (i.e., after reception of response signal)
ON after an unsuccessful network instruction attempt.
Error status is maintained until the next network
instruction.
Error types:
Time-out error (command/response time greater than
the response monitoring time set in the control words)
Transmission data errors
Port #0 to #7
Completion Codes
(A503 to A510)
A503 to A510 contain the completion codes for errors
that occur during network instruction execution for ports
#0 to #7, respectively. The code for normal completion of
a network instruction is 0000. Refer to the
SYSMAC
NET Link System Manual
or
SYSMAC LINK System
Manual
for details about error codes.
Timing
Instruction
received Transmission
completes
normally
Instruction
received Transmission
error Instruction
received
Enabled
Flag
Execution
Error Flag
Data i s transmitted on a network when SEND(192), RECV(193), or CMND(194)
is executed. Final processing for transmissions/receptions is performed during
servicing of Link Units.
Instruction execution and peripheral device servicing are processed in parallel,
thus data from network instructions might not be processed synchronously. To
synchronize data processing, set the PC to synchronous execution or use the
IOSP(187) and IORS(188) instructions.
To ensure successful SEND(192)/RECV(193) operations with more than one in-
struction for a single port, your program must use the Enabled Flag and Error
Flag t o confirm that execution is possible. The following program shows one ex-
ample o f how to do this for port 4 in a SYSMAC NET Link System. The program is
effective when both bit 000000 and the Port 4 Enable Flag (A50204) are ON.
Data Processing for
Network Instructions
Programming Example:
Multiple Instructions
Network Instructions Section 5-36
424
(011)
KEEP 012800
(030)
jMOV #000A D00010
(030)
jMOV #000A D00000
A502
04 0128
02
0128
01
0128
00
(030)
jMOV #0001 D00001
(030)
jMOV #0300 D00002
(030)
jMOV #0405 D00003
(030)
jMOV #0000 D00004
(192)
jSEND D00010 D00020 D00000
(013)
DIFU 012801
0128
00 A502
04
0002
00
0128
00 A502
12
0128
02
(030)
jMOV #000A D00000
(030)
jMOV #0400 D00012
(030)
jMOV #0405 D00013
(030)
jMOV #0030 D00014
(041)
jXFER #0010 0100 D000010
(193)
jRECV D01000 D02000 D00100
0128
02 A502
04 (013)
DIFU 012803
0002
01
0128
02 A502
12
0128
02 0128
03 A502
12 (041)
XFER #0010 D02000 D05030
CIO 000000 is turned ON to start transmission. CIO
012800 remains ON until SEND(192) has completed.
Data is placed into control data words to specify the
10 words to be transmitted to the PC of node 3 of
network 01, through port 4, with response, 5 retries,
and a response monitoring time of 2 seconds.
Turns ON to indicate transmission error.
CIO 012802 prevents execution of RECV(193) when
SEND(192) above has not completed. CIO 000001 is
turned ON to start transmission if the Port 4 Enable Flag
is also ON. CIO 012802 remains ON until RECV(193)
has completed.
Turned ON to indicate transmission error.
10 words of data for transmission moved from CIO 0100
through CIO 0109 into words D00010 through D00019
for storage.
SEND(192) is executed.
When the Port 4 Enable Flag goes ON, CIO 012801 is
turned ON to indicate completion of the SEND(192)
program.
Data is placed into control data words to specify the
10 words to be transmitted from the PC of node 4 of
network 01, through port 4, with response, 5 retries,
and a response monitoring time of 4.8 seconds.
RECV(193) is executed.
When the Port 4 Enable Flag goes ON, CIO 012803 is
turned ON to indicate completion of the RECV(193)
program.
10 words of Transmitted data moved from
D02000 through D02009 into words D05030
through D05039 for storage.
0000
00
(011)
KEEP 012802
A502
04 0128
00
0128
03
Port Enabled Flag
0000
01
Port Enabled Flag
Network Instructions Section 5-36
425
00000 jLD 000000
00001 AND A50204
00002 AND NOT 012802
00003 LD 012801
00004 KEEP(011) 012800
00005 LD 012800
00006 jMOV(030) #000A
D00000
00007 jMOV(030) #0001
D00001
00008 jMOV(030) #0300
D00002
00009 jMOV(030) #0405
D00003
00010 jMOV(030) #0000
D00004
00011 jXFER(041) #0010
0100
D00010
00012 jSEND(192) D00010
D00020
D00000
00013 LD 012800
00014 AND A50204
00015 DIFU(13) 012801
00016 LD 012800
00017 AND A50204
00018 OUT 000200
00019 jLD 000001
00020 AND A50204
00021 AND NOT 012800
00022 LD 012803
00023 KEEP(011) 012802
00024 LD 012802
00025 jMOV(030) #000A
D00010
00026 jMOV(030) #000A
D00000
00027 jMOV(030) #0400
D00012
00028 jMOV(030) #0405
D00013
00029 jMOV(030) #0030
D00014
00030 jRECV(193) D01000
D02000
D00100
00031 LD 012802
00032 AND A50204
00033 DIFU(13) 012803
00034 LD 012802
00035 AND A50204
00036 OUT 000201
00037 LD 012802
00038 AND 012803
00039 AND NOT A50212
00040 XFER(041) #0010
D02000
D05030
Address Instruction Operands Address Instruction Operands
Network Instructions Section 5-36
426
The following program shows how to synchronize data transmission during
asynchronous operation using IOSP(187) and IORS(188).
In the program in PC A (the sending PC), the data is set in memory while the
Enabled Flag is ON, i.e., when SEND(192) is not being executed, and a code is
added in the last word of data to verify that the data has been transmitted suc-
cessfully.
In the program in PC B (the receiving PC), the code in the last word of the trans-
mitted data is used to prevent more data from being transferred until the trans-
mitted data is copied to another section of Data Memory for storage. The code is
erased from the original block of data after it is copied.
S
L
K
C
P
U
P
SS
L
K
C
P
U
P
S
PC A PC B
jSEND D00000 D01000 D02000
SEND
(004)
JMP 000
(020)
CMP #AAAA D01255
$AAAA
(040)
XFER #0255 D01000 D02000
(187)
IOSP
A500
13
A500
06
(188)
IORS
(005)
JME 00
(030)
M0V #0000 D01255
Data
Terminator set in send data
at PC A.
Programming Example:
Synchronizing Data
Network Instructions Section 5-36
427
5-37 SFC Control Instructions
SFC Control Instructions are used to control step status in the SFC program or to
output transition conditions from transition programs (TOUT(202) and
TCNT(123)). Refer to the
CV-series PC Operation Manual: SFC
for details on
SFC programming.
Note The CVM1 does not support SFC programming and must be programmed using
ladder diagrams only.
5-37-1ACTIVATE STEP: SA(210)
(210)
SA N1N2N2: Subchart entry step ST or 9999
N1: Step number ST
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j SA(210)
Description When the execution condition is OFF, SA(210) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, SA(210) changes a designated step or subchart to execute
status and starts execution of actions. A step activated by SA(210) will be
executed a s the last active step in the execution cycle for the first cycle after the
step goes active.
To designate a step in a subchart, specify the step number of the entry step call-
ing the subchart as the subchart entry step (N2) and then designate the step
number within the subchart.
To designate a subchart, designate the step number of the entry step calling the
subchart a s the step number, N1 and designate the subchart entry step as 9999.
To designate a step not in a subchart, designate the step number and designate
a subchart entry step of 9999.
Note SA(210) cannot be executed either from an interrupt program or for steps in in-
terrupt programs.
Normal Steps The specific results of executing SA(210) for steps in each step status are de-
scribed below for normal steps inside or outside of subcharts.
Execute Status does not change, but status will not be transferred to the next step for one
execution cycle after execution of SA(210).
Pause Changes the step status from pause to execute. The output status that was in
effect at the time the status was changed from execute to pause will be contin-
ued, and execution will begin from the top of the step.
Halt Changes the step status from halt to execute. The output status that was in e ffect
at the time the status was changed from execute to pause will be continued, and
execution will begin from the top of the designated step.
Inactive Changes the step status from inactive to execute. Execution will begin from the
top action of the designated step. The step timer will begin.
SFC Control Instructions Section 5-37
428
Subchart Dummy Steps The specific results of executing SA(210) for steps in each step status are de-
scribed below for dummy steps controlling subcharts.
Execute SA(210) does not change the subchart dummy step itself. All the steps in a sub-
chart that are active when SA(210) is executed go to execute status. The output
status that was in effect at the time the status was changed from execute to
pause o r halt will be continued, and execution will begin from the action at the top
of the step.
Pause Changes the subchart dummy step and the steps in the subchart that are in
pause status to execute status. The output status that was in effect at the time
the status was changed from execute to pause will be continued, and execution
will begin from the top.
Halt Changes the subchart dummy step, and the steps in the subchart that are in halt
status, to execute status. The output status that was in e ffect at the time the sta-
tus was changed from execute to halt will be continued, and execution will begin
from the top.
Inactive Changes the subchart dummy step, and the steps in the subchart that are inac-
tive, to execute status. SA(210) also places the designated subchart entry step
in execute status, and starts operation from the top action. The step timer will
begin.
Flags ER (A50003): Turns ON when the step designated by N1 is undefined.
Turns ON when the subchart designated by N2 is undefined.
Turns ON when the subchart designated by N2 is not being
executed.
5-37-2PAUSE STEP: SP(211)
(211)
SP N N: Step number ST
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j SP(211)
Description When the execution condition is OFF, SP(211) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, SP(211) changes the status of a step or subchart from
execute to pause. To designate a subchart, designate the step number of the
dummy step calling the subchart as the step number, N
In pause status, the execution of actions with N, P, L, and D action qualifiers is
stopped, but the present values of TIM and TIMH instructions that have been
started continue to operate. The present values of other timers and counters, as
well as other outputs, are maintained. Step timers continue to operate, so be
careful when using L and D action qualifiers.
Note SP(211) cannot be executed for steps in an interrupt program.
Normal Steps Status The specific results of executing SP(211) for steps in each step status are de-
scribed below for normal steps inside or outside of subcharts.
Execute Changes step status from execute to pause. Execution of actions will be paused,
but output status will be maintained and the step timer will continue. When
SP(211) is executed on a step in a subchart, execution of the actions in that step
will be paused beginning with the next execution cycle.
SFC Control Instructions Section 5-37
429
Pause, Halt, Inactive Step status does not change.
Subchart Dummy Steps The specific results of executing SP(211) for steps in each step status are de-
scribed below for dummy steps controlling subcharts.
Execute Changes the status of the subchart dummy step from execute to pause. All ac-
tive steps in the designated subchart (including those in halt status) will be
placed i n pause status. Execution of actions will be paused, but output status will
be maintained and the step timer will continue. If SP(211) is executed for a sub-
chart from within the same subchart, the actions within the only step containing
SP(211) will be paused beginning with the next execution cycle.
Pause, Halt, Inactive Step status does not change.
5-37-3RESTART STEP: SR(212)
(212)
SR N N: Step number ST
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j SR(212)
Description When the execution condition is OFF, SR(212) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, SR(212) changes the status of a step or subchart from
pause to execute.
Note SR(212) cannot be executed for steps in an interrupt program.
Normal Steps Status The specific results of executing SR(212) for steps in each step status are de-
scribed below for normal steps inside or outside of subcharts.
Execute Step status does not change.
Pause Changes the step status from pause to execute. Execution will be resumed from
the beginning of the subchart, and output status will continue with the status that
existed at the time the step was changed to pause status.
Halt, Inactive Step status does not change.
Subchart Dummy Steps The specific results of executing SR(212) for steps in each step status are de-
scribed below for dummy steps controlling subcharts.
Execute Step status does not change.
Pause Changes the status of the subchart dummy step and all steps in the subchart that
are in pause status from pause to execute. Execution will be resumed from the
beginning o f the subchart, and output status will continue with the status that ex-
isted at the time the dummy step was changed to pause status.
Halt, Inactive Step status does not change.
SFC Control Instructions Section 5-37
430
5-37-4END STEP: SF(213)
(213)
SF N N: Step number ST
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j SF(213)
Description When the execution condition is OFF, SF(213) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, SF(213) changes the status of a step or subchart from
execute or pause to halt.
In halt status, the execution of actions with N, P, L, and D action qualifiers is
stopped, but the present values of TIM and TIMH instructions that have been
started continues to operate. The present values of other timers and counters,
as well as other outputs, are maintained. Step timers continue to operate, so be
careful when using L and D action qualifiers.
Note SF(213) cannot be executed for steps in an interrupt program.
Normal Steps Status The specific results of executing SF(213) for steps in each step status are de-
scribed below for normal steps inside or outside of subcharts.
Execute Changes the step status from execute to halt. Execution of actions will be
stopped, but output status will be maintained and the step timer will continue
counting. When SF(213) is executed on a step in a subchart, execution of the
actions in that step will be stopped beginning with the next execution cycle.
Pause Changes the step status from pause to halt.
Halt, Inactive Step status does not change.
Subchart Dummy Steps The specific results of executing SF(213) for steps in each step status are de-
scribed below for dummy steps controlling subcharts.
Execute Changes the status of the subchart dummy step from execute to halt. All active
steps in the designated subchart (including those in pause status) will be
changed t o halt status. Execution of actions will be stopped, but output status will
be maintained and the step timer will continue counting. If SF(213) is executed
for a subchart from within the same subchart, the actions within only the step
containing SF(213) will be stopped beginning with the next execution cycle.
Pause Changes the status of the subchart dummy step from pause to halt. All paused
steps in the designated subchart will be changed to halt status. Execution of ac-
tions will be stopped, but output status will be maintained and step timers will
continue.
Halt, Inactive Step status does not change.
SFC Control Instructions Section 5-37
431
5-37-5DEACTIVATE STEP: SE(214)
(214)
SE N N: Step number ST
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j SE(214)
Description When the execution condition is OFF, SE(214) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, SE(214) changes the status of a step or subchart from ac-
tive (execute, pause or halt) to inactive status.
SE(214) does not necessarily result in transfer of active status from one step to
another. When SE(214) is executed, it simply makes the designated step or sub-
chart inactive.
Note SE(214) cannot be executed from any interrupt program other than a power-on
interrupt program. In addition, SE(214) cannot be executed for steps in any in-
terrupt program (including a power-on interrupt program).
Normal Steps Status The specific results of executing SE(214) for steps in each step status are de-
scribed below for normal steps inside or outside of subcharts.
Execute Changes the step status from execute to inactive. Execution of actions will be
stopped and the actions will be reset. Actions with the optional hold action quali-
fier, however, will be stopped but not reset. In addition, execution will be contin-
ued for actions with S-group AQs. The step timer will continue. If SE(214) is
executed on steps in a subchart, step execution will be stopped directly after
execution of the instruction.
Pause Changes the step status from pause to inactive. Execution of actions will be
stopped and the actions will be reset. Actions with the optional hold action quali-
fier, however, will be stopped but not reset. In addition, execution will be contin-
ued for actions with S-group AQs. The step timer will continue.
Halt Changes the step status from halt to inactive. The step’s actions will be reset.
Actions with the optional hold action qualifier, however, will not be reset. In addi-
tion, execution will be continued for actions with S-group AQs. The step timer will
continue.
Inactive Step status does not change.
Subchart Dummy Steps The specific results of executing SE(214) for steps in each step status are de-
scribed below for dummy steps controlling subcharts.
Execute Changes status of subchart dummy step from execute to inactive, and makes
inactive all of the steps in the subchart that were active at the time the instruction
was executed. Actions will be stopped and reset. Actions with the optional hold
action qualifier, however , will be stopped but not reset. In addition, execution will
be continued for actions with S-group AQs. Step timers will continue. If SE(214)
is executed on steps in a subchart, step execution will be stopped directly after
execution of the instruction.
Pause Changes status of subchart dummy step from pause to inactive, and makes in-
active all of the steps in the subchart that were active at the time the instruction
was executed. Actions will be stopped and reset. Actions with the optional hold
action qualifier, however , will be stopped but not reset. In addition, execution will
be continued for actions with S-group AQs. Step timers will continue.
SFC Control Instructions Section 5-37
432
Halt Changes status of subchart dummy step from halt to inactive, and makes inac-
tive all of the steps in the subchart that were active at the time the instruction was
executed. Actions will be reset. Actions with the optional hold action qualifier,
however, will not be reset. In addition, execution will be continued for actions
with S-group AQs. Step timers will continue.
Inactive Step status does not change.
5-37-6RESET STEP: SOFF(215)
(215)
SOFF N N: Step number ST
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
Variations
j SOFF(215)
Description When the execution condition is OFF, SOFF(215) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, SOFF(215) places a designated step or subchart in-
active and resets all of the actions in the step.
SOFF(215) does not necessarily result in transfer of active status from one step
to another. When SOFF(215) is executed, it simply makes the designated step
or subchart inactive.
Note SOFF(215) cannot be executed from any interrupt program other than a power-
on interrupt program. In addition, SE(214) cannot be executed for steps in any
interrupt program (including a power-on interrupt program).
Normal Steps Status The specific results of executing SOFF(215) for steps in each step status are
described below for normal steps inside or outside of subcharts.
Execute Changes the step status from execute to inactive. Execution of all actions (in-
cluding actions with the optional hold action qualifier and actions with S-group
AQs) will be stopped and the actions will be reset. The step timer will also be
stopped. I f SOFF(215) is executed on steps in a subchart, step execution will be
stopped directly after execution of the instruction.
Pause Changes the step status from pause to inactive. Execution of all actions (includ-
ing actions with the optional hold action qualifier and actions with S-group AQs)
will b e stopped and the actions will be reset. The step timer will also be stopped.
Halt Changes the step status from halt to inactive. All actions (including actions with
the optional hold action qualifier and actions with S-group AQs) will be stopped
and reset. The step timer will be stopped.
Inactive Execution of actions with S-group AQs will be stopped and the actions will be
reset. Actions with the optional hold action qualifier will be reset. The step timer
will also be stopped.
Subchart Dummy Steps The specific results of executing SOFF(215) for steps in each step status are
described below for dummy steps controlling subcharts.
Execute Changes the status of the subchart dummy step from execute to inactive and
places all of the steps in the subchart inactive. Execution of all actions (including
actions with the optional hold action qualifier and actions with S-group AQs) will
be stopped and the actions will be reset. Step timers will also be stopped. If
SOFF(215) is executed on steps in a subchart, step execution will be stopped
directly after execution of the instruction.
SFC Control Instructions Section 5-37
433
Pause Changes the status of the subchart dummy step from pause to inactive and
places all of the steps in the subchart inactive. Execution of all actions (including
actions with the optional hold action qualifier and actions with S-group AQs) will
be stopped and the actions will be reset. Step timers will also be stopped.
Halt Changes the status of the subchart dummy step from halt to inactive and places
all of the steps in the subchart inactive. Execution of all actions (including actions
with the optional hold action qualifier and actions with S-group AQs) will be
stopped and the actions will be reset. The step timer will also be stopped.
Inactive Resets all actions of steps in the subchart. Execution of Actions with the optional
hold action qualifier and actions with S-group AQs will also be stopped and the
actions will be reset. Step timers will also be stopped.
5-37-7TRANSITION OUTPUT: TOUT(202)
(202)
TOUT
Ladder Symbol
Description When the execution condition is OFF, TOUT(202) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, TOUT(202) outputs the result of a transition condition
operation t o the Transition Flag to control the transition condition. If TOUT(202)
is executed with an ON execution condition, the Transition Flag will be turned
ON. If TOUT(202) is executed with an OFF execution condition, the Transition
Flag will be turned OFF.
TOUT(202) cannot be used outside of a transition program and writing to the
Transition Flag area cannot be achieved with any instructions other than
TOUT(202) and TCNT(123) (see next section).
If either TOUT(202) and/or TCNT(123) is used more than once in one transition
program, the status of the Transition Flag will be controlled by the last
TOUT(202) or TCNT(123) in the transition program.
The ON/OFF status of a Transition Flag determined by T OUT(202) is held until
the next execution of TOUT(202), even if the step status changes.
Note 1. A50015 (First Cycle Flag) cannot be used within a transition program.
2. The following three conditions must be met in order for active status to be
transferred from one step to another:
The transition condition (i.e., the Transition Flag) must be ON.
The step(s) before the transition must be active (execute or halt, but not
pause).
The step(s) after the transition must be inactive.
Example If in the following example CIO 000000 is ON and D10000 and D20000 have the
same content, the Equals Flag, A50006, will turn ON, and TOUT(202) will turn
ON the Transition Flag. If CIO 00000 is OFF or D10000 and D20000 have differ-
ent contents, TOUT(202) will turn OFF the Transition Flag.
SFC Control Instructions Section 5-37
(001)
END
(202)
TOUT
0000
00 A500
06(=)
ST0000
TN0000
ST0010
(020)
CMP D10000 D20000
Transition condition
TN0000
434
If the Transition Flag turns ON, ST0000 is active (but not in pause status), and
ST0010 i s inactive, then all of the transition conditions are met and active status
will be transferred from ST0000 to ST0010.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 CMP(020) D10000
D20000
00002 AND A50006
00003 TOUT(202)
00004 END(001)
5-37-8TRANSITION COUNTER: TCNT(123)
(123)
TCNT N S S: No. of executions CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
N: Counter number C
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Description When the execution condition is OFF, TCNT(123) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, TCNT(123) turns a corresponding Transition Flag
ON or OFF according to the number of times the transition program is executed.
The counter is started the first time TCNT(123) is executed with an ON execution
condition after it is reset and the present value is incremented starting with the
second execution. Therefore, the actual number of execution will be S + 1.
When the present value reaches the value set for S, the Transition Flag and the
Counter Flag will turn ON.
The status of the transition counter is maintained even when step status is
changed, so the transition counter should normally be reset using CNR(236) in
the previous step.
If either TOUT(202) and/or TCNT(123) is used more than once in one transition
program, the status of the Transition Flag will be controlled by the last
TOUT(202) or TCNT(123) in the transition program.
TCNT(123) cannot be used outside of a transition program and writing to the
Transition Flag area cannot be achieved with any instructions other than
TOUT(202) (see previous section) and TCNT(123).
Note 1. A50015 (First Cycle Flag) cannot be used within a transition program.
2. The following three conditions must be met in order for active status to be
transferred from one step to another:
The transition condition (i.e., the Transition Flag) must be ON.
The step(s) before the transition must be active (execute or halt, but not
pause).
The step(s) after the transition must be inactive.
Precautions S must be in BCD.
The same counter numbers are used by CNT, CNTR(012), and TCNT(123). Do
not use the same number to define more than one counter, regardless of the
counter instruction used.
The transition counter counts each time the transition program is executed.
When using a parallel join, be particularly careful of the number that is set, be-
cause the transition program will be executed each time the steps just above the
transition are executed.
SFC Control Instructions Section 5-37
(123)
TCNT 0100 #0015
(001)
END
ST0010
TN0020
ST0020
TN0010
A500
13
Always ON
435
Flags ER (A50003): ON when the content of N is not a counter number.
ON when the content of S is not BCD data.
On when the content of *DM or *EM word is not BCD.
Example When the program for TN0020 is executed for the first time, counter C0100 will
be started. After that, the transition program will be counted each time it is
executed. A s a result, the Completion Flag for C0100 will turn ON when the pro-
gram has been executed 1 + 15 times, turning ON the Transition Flag for
TN0020. From the 17th execution onwards, C0100 and the Transition Flag will
remain ON until reset in a following execution cycle.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD A50013
00001 TCNT(123) 0100
#0015
00002 END(001)
Note Here, CNR(236) would be used in the ST0010 action block to reset counter
C0100 with A50015 (First Cycle Flag).
5-37-9READ STEP TIMER: TSR(124)
(124)
TSR N D D: Destination CIO, G, A, T, C, DM, DR, IR
N: Step number CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j TSR(124)
Description When the execution condition is OFF, TSR(124) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, TSR(124) reads the present value (PV) of the step
timer for the specified step and stores it as a binary value in the word designated
in D. When executed with an OFF execution condition, TSR(124) does nothing.
Step Timers Step timers time SFC steps and are used for operations such as measuring AQ
timing when the AQ uses a set value to control action execution. Each step has
its own step timer. Step timers are incremental timers that are reset and begin
counting when the step becomes active, and which retain the present value
when the step becomes inactive. If, however, the actions in the step continue to
be executed (e.g., for S-group AQs), the step timer continues operating until all
execution has been completed.
The PC can be set so that step timers operate in increments of either 0.1 second
or 1 second. The increment is set in the PC system settings. The default setting
is 0.1 second. Step timers can count up to 6553.5 s (when the unit is 0.1 s) or
65,535 s (when the unit is 1 s). The step timer retains the maximum value if the
present value goes beyond the timeable range.
Step timer values are stored and handled as binary data.
SFC Control Instructions Section 5-37
0000
00 (124)
TSR #0100 D00500
0000
00 (125)
TSW D00500 #0100
436
Flags ER (A50003): ON when the N is set outside of the range.
On when the content of *DM or *EM word is not BCD.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the present value of the step
timer for step ST0100 will be output to D00500 in binary data. This is unrelated to
the active/inactive status of the step.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 TSR(124) #0100
D00500
64A8 64A8
PV of step 0100 timer
Unit Time
0.1 s 2576.8 s
1 s 25768 s
D005000
5-37-10 WRITE STEP TIMER: TSW(125)
(125)
TSW S N N: Step number CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
S: Source CIO, G, A, T, C, DM, DR, IR
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
Variations
j TSW(125)
Description When the execution condition is OFF, TSW(125) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, TSW(125) changes the present value (PV) of the step
timer. If TSW(125) is executed with an ON execution condition, the contents of
word S is written as the present value for the step timer for step N. When
executed with an OFF execution condition, TSW(125) does nothing.
Refer to the previous instruction for details on set timers.
Precautions The contents of S must be set with binary data.
Step timers are used to control the execution timing of actions with certain AQ.
Be careful when making changes with TSW(125).
Flags ER (A50003): ON when the N is set outside of the range.
ON when the content of *DM or *EM word is not BCD.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the contents of D00500
($7E3A) will be written as the present value for the step timer of step ST0100.
This is unrelated to the active/inactive status of the step.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 TSW(125) D00500
#0100
7E3A 7E3A
PV of step ST0100 timer
Unit Time
0.1 s 3231.4 s
1 s 32314 s
D005000
SFC Control Instructions Section 5-37
437
5-37-11 SFC Control Program Example
The operation of the SFC control instructions used in the following programming
example is described following the program.
ST0010 02
TN0010
ST0020 01
TN0020
ST0030 01
TN30
ST0040 03
ST0120 03
TN0120
0400ST0130
ST0400 01
TN0500
ST0500 01
TN0510
ST0510 03
TN0520
ST0700 03
ST0600 04
TN0610
ST0610 01
TN0620
TN0600
ST
0130
0000
00
0000
01
ST
0500
T0001
0000
02
(211)
jSP 0500
(001)
END
(213)
jSF 0500
(210)
jSA 0500 #0400
(030)
MOV 1000 D04000
TIM 0001 #0060
(212)
jSR 0500
Action Program for AC0020 (ST0020)
0000
01
T0001
T0002
(214)
jSE 0500
(001)
END
(040)
XFER #0100 D0400 D10000
TIM 0002 #0060
TIM 0002 #0060
(215)
jSOFF 0500
Action Program for AC0500 (ST0500)
Main SFC Program
Subchart Called
from ST 0130
Action Block for ST0020
AQ SV Action FV
N******** AC0020 ********
Action Block for ST0030
AQ SV Action FV
N******** AC0030 ********
Action Block for ST0500
AQ SV Action FV
S******** AC0050 ********
SA(210) in AC0020 When subchart ST0400
(i.e., the subchart with step ST0400) is active,
SA(210) changes the status of ST0500 in the subchart
to execute status. (Subchart ST0400 is executed
while ST0130 is active.)
SP(211) in AC0020 SP(211) changes the status
of ST0500 to pause.
SR(212) in AC0020 SR(212) changes the status
of ST0500 back from pause to execute.
SF(213) in AC0020 SF(213) changes the status
of ST0500 to halt. Execution of action AC0500 will
continue because it has an “S” AQ.
SE(214) in AC0500 SE(214) changes the status
of ST0500 to inactive. Execution of action AC0500 will
continue because it has an “S” AQ.
SOFF(215) in AC0500 SOFF(215) changes the sta-
tus of ST0500 to inactive. The action in the step is
stopped and reset even though is has an S-group AQ.
SFC Control Instructions Section 5-37
438
5-38 Block Programming Instructions
Block programming can be used with version-2 CVM1 CPUs to program opera-
tions that are dif ficult to program with ladder diagrams, such as certain data com-
putations. E f fective block programming can be use to reduce the number of pro-
gramming steps required for certain operations, thus reducing the cycle time
and increasing overall processing speed.
A maximum of 100 block programs can be used.
5-38-1Overview
Instructions The following block programming instructions are available.
Name Mnemonic Function
BLOCK PROGRAM
BEGIN BPRG(250) Changes to block programming
(BPRG(250) is actually a ladder
diagram instruction.)
BLOCK PROGRAM
END BEND<001> Ends a block program.
IF (NOT) IF<002> (NOT) Starts conditional branching.
ELSE ELSE<003> Marks the alternate route for
conditional branching.
IF END IEND<004> Ends conditional branching.
ONE CYCLE AND
WAIT (NOT) WAIT<005> (NOT) Creates a conditional one-cycle wait.
CONDITIONAL
BLOCK EXIT (NOT) EXIT <006> (NOT) Conditionally ends block program
execution.
LOOP LOOP<009> Starts a loop.
LOOP END (NOT) LEND<010>(NOT) Ends a loop.
BLOCK PROGRAM
PAUSE BPPS<011> Temporarily stops block program
execution.
BLOCK PROGRAM
RESTART BPRS<012> Restarts block program execution.
TIMER WAIT TIMW<013> Creates a timed wait.
COUNTER WAIT CNTW<014> Creates a wait based on a counter.
HIGH-SPEED
TIMER WAIT TMHW<015> Creates a high-speed timed wait.
Restricted Instructions Although most ladder-diagram instructions can also b e used in mnemonic form
within a block program, there are restrictions for the following instructions.
LD, LD NOT, AND, AND NOT, AND LD, OR LD, UP(018), DOWN(19),
EQU(025), symbol comparison instructions (300 to 328), TST(350), and
TSTN(351).
The instructions must be combined with either the IF<002>, WAIT<005>,
EXIT<006>, or LEND<010> instructions, or with ladder-diagram jump instruc-
tions.
Note The operation of the above instructions will not be dependable is they are not
used in combination as described or if they are used in combination with other
instructions.
Block Programming Instructions Section 5-38
439
The following instructions cannot be used in block programs.
Group Mnemonic Remarks
Bit control
ii
DIFU(013) ---
instructions DIFD(014)
KEEP(011)
OUT Use SET(016) and RSET(017). (There are
not block SET and RSET instructions for
OUT NOT no
t
bl
oc
k
SET
an
d
RSET
i
ns
t
ruc
ti
ons
f
or
CV-series PCs.)
Interlock and
j
IL(002) ---
jump
instructions
ILC(003)
i
nstruct
i
ons JMP(004) 0000 These instruction can be used if the PC
Si h lilj ihj
CJP(221) 0000 Setup is set so that multiple jump with jump
number 0000 cannot be used
CJPN(222) 0000 num
b
er
0000
cannot
b
e use
d
.
JME(005) 0000
END END(001) Use BEND<001>.
Timer and TIM Use the block programming timer and counter
ii
counter
instructions
CNT
gg
instructions.
i
nstruct
i
ons TIMH(015)
TTIM(120) ---
TIML(121)
MTIM(122)
CNTR(012)
Step
ii
STEP(008) ---
instructions SNXT(009)
Shift
instructions SFT(050) ---
Subroutine
ii
SBN(150) ---
instructions RET(152)
Diagnostic
instructions FPD(177) ---
PID and related
instructions PID(270) ---
Special I/O Unit
ii
RD2(280) ---
instructions WR2(281)
Differentiated
instructions --- No input differentiated instructions () can be
used in block programs.
5-38-2 BLOCK PROGRAM BEGIN/END: BPRG(250) / BEND<001>
(250)
BPRG N N: Block program number # (00 to 99)
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
BEND<001>
BPRG(250) is used to switch to block programming and BEND<001> is used
to switch back to ladder-diagram programming. For every BPRG(250) there
must be a corresponding BEND<001>. The corresponding block program will
be executed with the execution condition for BPRG(250) is ON and it will be
skipped (not executed) when the execution condition is OFF.
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Block Programming Instructions Section 5-38
440
Precautions The same block number cannot be used more than once.
Block programs cannot be nested.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following diagram, the block program between
program addresses 000501 and 000600 will be executed.
(250)
BPRG 99 000500 BPRG(250) 99
Block program.
000600 BEND<001>
BEND<001>
Block program
Address Instruction Operands
0000
00
5-38-3 Branching–IF<002>, ELSE<003>, and IEND<004>
B: Bit CIO, G, A, T, C
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
IF<002> B
IF<002>
IF<002> NOT B
ELSE<003>
IEND<004>
Branching instructions are used to branch according to either the current
execution condition or the status of a designated bit. IF<002> and IF<002>
NOT must be used in combination with IEND<004). ELSE<003> may be
used in between them, but is optional.
Branching is initiated with any of the following: IF<002> with a bit operand,
IF<002> without a bit operand, or IF<002> NOT with a bit operand.
If the IF condition is YES, the instructions immediately following the IF<002>
or IF<002> NOT will be executed. A YES execution condition is produced by
an ON bit or ON execution condition for IF<002> or an OFF bit for
IF<002>NOT.
If ELSE<003> is encountered following IF<002> or IF<002>NOT, execution
will jump to IEND<003> without executing any instruction in between. If
ELSE<003> is not encountered, execution will continue as normal.
If the IF condition is NO, execution will jump to ELSE<003> or to IEND<004>,
whichever appears first after the IF<002> or IF<002> NOT.
LD, possible in combination with AND or OR, must be used to establish the
execution condition for IF<002> without an operand or IF<002> NOT without
an operand.
Execution Flow Examples
IF<002> to ELSE to IEND
A
IF<002> B
ELSE<003>
C
IEND<004>
When B is ON, A is executed.
When B is OFF, C is executed.
Description
IF<002> with an Operand
(CVM1 V2)
Block Programming Instructions Section 5-38
441
IF<002> NOT to ELSE to IEND
C
IF<002> NOT B
ELSE<003>
D
IEND<004>
When B is OFF, C is executed.
When B is ON, D is executed.
IF<002> to ELSE to IEND
A
ELSE<003>
C
IEND<004>
When 00000, 00001 are ON, A is executed.
When either is OFF, C is executed.
LD 00000
AND 00001
IF<002>
IF<002> to IEND
C
IEND<004>
When 00001 is ON, C is executed.
LD 00001
IF<002>
IF<002> blocks can be nested up to a maximum of 253 levels. Each IF<002>
or IF<002> NOT will be effective through the next ELSE<003> and/or
IEND<004>.
IF<002>
IF<002>
IF<002>
IEND
IEND
IEND
Flags No flags are affected by these instructions.
Example The following example shows two different block programs controlled by
CIO 000000 and CIO 000002.
The first block executes one of two additions depending on the status of
CIO 000001.This block is executed when CIO 000000 is ON. If CIO 000001 is
ON, 0001 is added to the contents of CIO 0001. If CIO 000001 is OFF, 0002 is
added t o the contents of CIO 0001. In either case the result is placed in D00000.
IF<002> NOT with an
Operand
IF<002> without an
Operand
IF<002> without ELSE
Nesting
Block Programming Instructions Section 5-38
IF<002> 000001
+B(404) 0001
#0001
D00000
ELSE<003>
+B(404) 0001
#0002
D00000
IEND<004>
BEND<001>
LD 000003
AND 000004
IF<002>
+B(404) 1200
0002
D00010
IF<002> A50004
MOV(030) #0001
D00011
IEND<004>
ELSE<003>
SET(016) 000301
IEND<004>
BEND<001>
(250)
BPRG 00
0000
00
(250)
BPRG 01
0000
02
442
The second block is executed when CIO 000002 is ON and shows nesting two
levels. If CIO 000003 and CIO 000004 are both ON, the contents of CIO 1200
and CIO 0002 are added and the result is placed in D00010 and then 0001 is
moved into D00011 based on the status of CY. If either CIO 000003 or
CIO 000004 is OFF, then the entire addition operation is skipped and
CIO 000301 is turned ON.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 BPRG(250) 00
00002 IF<002> 000001
00003 +B(404) 0001
#0001
D00000
00004 ELSE<003>
00005 +B(404) 0001
#0002
D00000
00006 IEND<004>
00007 BEND<001>
00008 LD 000002
00009 BPRG(250) 01
00010 LD 000003
00011 AND 000004
00012 IF<002>
00013 +B(404) 1200
0002
D00010
00014 IF<002> A50004
00015 MOV(030) #0001
D00011
00016 IEND<004>
00017 ELSE<003>
00018 SET(016) 000301
00019 IEND<004>
00020 BEND<001>
Block Programming Instructions Section 5-38
443
5-38-4 ONE CYCLE AND WAIT: WAIT<005>
B: Bit CIO, G, A, T, C
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
WAIT<005>
WAIT<005> B
WAIT<005> NOT B
WAIT<005> and WAIT<005> NOT allow you to inhibit execution of the por-
tion of block program from WAIT<005> to BEND<001> until B turns ON or if
a bit is not specified, until the execution condition turns ON.
As long of the execution condition or operand bit of WAIT<005> is ON, or the
operand bit of WAIT<005> NOT is OFF, the block program will be executed
as normal. If the execution condition or operand bit of WAIT<005> is OFF or
the operand bit of WAIT<005> NOT is ON, only the part of the block program
up to the WAIT<005> or WAIT<005> NOT instruction will be executed during
the first cycle. During following cycles, none of the block program will be
executed until the operand bit or execution condition changes, at which point
the remainder of the block program will be executed. Once the entire block
program has been executed, the process is repeated.
WAIT<005> NOT cannot be used without an operand bit.
If programs are edited online from a Peripheral Device, the wait status that is
normally saved until the wait condition goes ON will be cleared and the block
program will be executed from the beginning again.
When using WAIT<005> without an bit operand, the instructions used to create
the execution condition for WAIT<05> must begin with LD.
When CIO 000000 is ON, the block program is executed as normal. If
CIO 000001 is OFF, however, A is executed and then B is skipped and pro-
gram control jumps to BEND<001>. During the following cycles, no instruc-
tions within block 00 will be executed (except WAIT <005>) until CIO 000001
turns ON, at which point B will be executed.
WAIT<005> 00001
A
B
BEND<001>
C
Address Instruction Operands
000000 LD 000000
000001 BPRG(250) 00
A
000100 WAIT<005> 000001
B
000200 BEND<001>
C
(250)
BPRG 00
0000
00
Description
Precautions
Execution Flow Examples
(CVM1 V2)
Block Programming Instructions Section 5-38
444
The execution flow for this example would be as shown below:
000000 ON A
000000 ON
000001 ON B
000001 OFF
C
C
Initial execution
The following example would work similarly, except that execution of
WAIT<005> would be based on an AND between the status of CIO 000001
and CIO 000002.
LD
AND
WAIT<005>
A
B
BEND<001>
C
000001
000002
Address Instruction Operands
000000 LD 000000
000001 BPRG(250) 01
A
000200 LD 000001
000201 AND 000002
000202 WAIT<005>
B
000300 BEND<001>
C
(250)
BPRG 01
0000
00
5-38-5 CONDITIONAL BLOCK EXIT: EXIT<006>
B: Bit CIO, G, A, T, C
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
EXIT<006>
EXIT<006> B
EXIT<006> NOT B
EXIT<006> and EXIT<006> NOT allow you to skip the portion of block pro-
gram from EXIT<006> to BEND<001> while B is ON or if a bit is not speci-
fied, while the execution condition is ON.
As long of the execution condition or operand bit of EXIT<006> is OFF, or the
operand bit of EXIT<006> NOT is ON, the block program will be executed as
normal. If the execution condition or operand bit of EXIT<006> is ON or the
operand bit of EXIT<006> NOT is OFF, only the part of the block program up
to the EXIT<006> or EXIT<006> NOT instruction will be executed and the
rest of the block program through BEND<001> will be skipped. If a bit is not
programmed for EXIT<006>, then the same operation will occur, but it will be
based on the status of the execution condition for EXIT<006>.
EXIT<006> NOT cannot be used without an operand bit.
Description
Precautions
(CVM1 V2)
Block Programming Instructions Section 5-38
445
When using EXIT<006> without an bit operand, the instructions used to create
the execution condition for EXIT<006> must begin with LD.
When CIO 000000 is OFF, the block program is executed as normal. If
CIO 000001 turns ON, however, A is executed and then B is skipped and
program control jumps to BEND<001>. Section B of the program will contin-
ue to be skipped until CIO 000001 turns OFF again.
EXIT<006> 000001
A
B
BEND<001>
C
Address Instruction Operands
000000 LD 000000
000001 BPRG(250) 00
A
000100 EXIT<006> 000001
B
000200 BEND<001>
C
(250)
BPRG 00
0000
00
5-38-6 Loop Control–LOOP<009>/LEND<010>
B: Bit CIO, G, A, T/C
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
LOOP<009>
LEND<010>
LEND<010> B
LEND<010> NOT B
LOOP<009> and LEND<010> are used to create a loop that is repeatedly
executed until the LOOP END condition becomes YES. LOOP<009> desig-
nates the beginning of the loop program, and a LEND<010> or LEND<010>
NOT instruction specifies the end of the loop. When LEND<010> or
LEND<010> NOT is reached, program execution will loop back to the next
previous LOOP<009> an exit condition is attained.
A YES LOOP END condition is produced by an ON execution condition for
LEND<010> without an operand, by an ON bit for LEND<010> with an oper-
and bit, or by an OFF bit for LEND<010> NOT with an operand bit.
LD, possibly in combination with AND or OR, must be used to create an
execution condition for LEND<010> when used without an operand bit.
Note Execution inside a loop does not refresh I/O data. If I/O data must be re-
freshed during the loop, use IORF(184).
•Conditional block branching can be used within a loop, but the entire
branch operation must be within the loop.
Correct: Incorrect:
LOOP<009> LOOP<009>
IF<002> IF<002>
IF<002> IF<002>
Execution Flow Examples
Description
Precautions
(CVM1 V2)
Block Programming Instructions Section 5-38
LOOP<009>
A
B
BEND<001>
(250)
BPRG 00
0000
00
C
IORF(184) 0000
0000
LEND<010> 000001
446
IEND<004> IEND<004>
IEND<004> LEND<010>
LEND<010>
•Loops cannot be nested within loops.
Incorrect:
LOOP<009>
LOOP<009>
LEND<010>
LEND<010>
•Do not reverse the order of LOOP and LEND.
Incorrect:
LEND<010>
:
:
LOOP<009>
When CIO 000000 is ON, the block program is executed. After A is executed,
B and the IORF(184) after it will be executed repeatedly until CIO 000001 is
ON, at which time C will be executed and the block program will end.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 BPRG(250) 00
A
00015 LOOP<009>
B
00024 IORF(184) 0000
0000
00025 LEND<010> 000001
C
00033 BEND<001>
5-38-7 BLOCK PROGRAM PAUSE/RESTART : BPPS<011>/BPRS<012>
N: Block program number # (00 to 99)
Operand Data AreaLadder Symbol
BPPS<011> N
BPRS<012> N
BPPS<011> is used inside one block program to suspend the execution of
another block program. BPRS<012> restarts the specified block program.
These instructions are effective whenever executed, i.e., they do not rely on
operand bit status or execution condition.
Precautions Even if the execution of a block program is suspended, PVs of all timer and
high-speed timer with timer number T0000 through T0127 for the
CVM1-CPU01-EV2 and T0000 through T0255 for the CVM1-CPU11-EV2 or
CVM1-CPU21-EV2 defined by TIMW<013> or TMHW<015> inside the block
program are updated continuously.
Execution Flow Examples
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Block Programming Instructions Section 5-38
447
Example If CIO 000000 is ON, the following program suspends execution of either
block program 01 or block program 02 depending on the status of
CIO 000001. The block program that was suspended is then restarted after
10 seconds.
IF<002>
BPPS<011>
ELSE<003>
BPPS<011>
IEND<004>
TIMW<003>
BPRS<012>
BPRS<012>
BEND<001>
000001
01
02
0000
#0100
01
02
Address Instruction Operands
000000 LD 000000
000001 BPRG(250) 00
000002 IF<002> 000001
000003 BPPS<011> 01
000004 ELSE<003>
000005 BPPS<011> 02
000006 IEND<004>
000007 TIMW<003> 0000
# 0100
000008 BPRS<012> 01
000009 BPRS<012> 02
000010 BEND<001>
(250)
BPRG 00
0000
00
5-38-8 HIGH-SPEED TIMER/TIMER WAIT: TIMW<013>/TMHW<015>
SV: Set value CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
N: Timer number T
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
TIMW<013> N
SV
TMHW<015> N
SV
TIMW<013> and TMHW<015> allow you to create a specified time lag (SV)
between execution of the program part preceding it and the part following.
The first part will be executed the first time the block program is entered.
When the block timer instruction is reached, execution of the block program
will halt until SV has expired, at which time the second part of the block pro-
gram will be executed. Once the entire block program has been executed,
the process is repeated.
SV is between 000.0 and 999.9 s for TIMW<013>, and between 00.00 and
99.99 s for TMHW<015>. The decimal point is not entered.
Precautions Each timer number can be used as the definer in only one timer instruction, in-
cluding those used in normal ladder-diagram timers.
If cycle time is greater than 10 ms, TC 0000 through TC 0255 must be used for
TMHW<015> to ensure accuracy.
Description
(CVM1 V2)
Block Programming Instructions Section 5-38
448
Example In the following example, B will be executed 20 seconds after A whenever
CIO 000000 is ON, and CIO 002000 will be set 0.2 seconds after
CIO 000001 goes ON.
000000 LD 000000
000001 BPRG(250) 00
A
000200 TIMW<013> 0001
# 0200
B
000300 BEND<001>
000301 LD 000001
000302 BPRG(250) 01
000303 TMHW<015> 0002
# 0020
000304 SET(016) 002000
000305 BEND<001>
TIMW<013>
A
B
BEND<001>
0001
#0200
TMHW<015>
SET(016)
BEND<001>
0002
#0020
002000
Address Instruction Operands
(250)
BPRG 00
0000
00
(250)
BPRG 01
0000
01
Flags ER (A 50003): SV data is not BCD.
Indirectly addressed D M word is non-existent. (Content of *DM
word is not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceed-
ed.)
5-38-9 COUNTER WAIT: CNTW<014>
SV: Set value CIO, G, A, T, C, #, DM, DR, IR
I: Count input CIO, G, A, T, C
N: Counter number C
Operand Data AreasLadder Symbol
CNTW<014> N
SV
I
CNTW<014> allows you to create a ‘count’ lag (SV) between execution of the
program part preceding the CNTW<014> (i.e., between BPRG(250) and
CNTW<014> ) and the part following it (i.e., between CNTW<014> and
BEND<001>). The first part will be executed the first time the block program
is entered. When CNTW<014> is reached, the execution of the block pro-
gram will stop until SV has been reached, at which time the second part of
the block program will be executed. Once the entire block program has been
executed, the process is repeated.
Each counter number can be used as the definer in only one timer or counter
instruction, including the normal ladder-diagram timers and counters.
Description
Precautions
(CVM1 V2)
Block Programming Instructions Section 5-38
449
Example In the following example, B will be executed after the execution of A and after
7,000 counts of CIO 000100 while CIO 000000 is ON.
CNTW<014>
A
B
BEND<001>
0005
#7000
000100
Address Instruction Operands
000000 LD 000000
000001 BPRG(250) 00
A
000200 CNTW<014> 0005
# 7000
000100
B
000300 BEND<001>
(250)
BPRG 00
0000
00
Flags ER (A50003): SV data is not BCD.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of
*DM word is not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been
exceeded.)
Block Programming Instructions Section 5-38
451
SECTION 6
Program Execution Timing
This section explains the execution cycle of the PC and shows how to calculate the cycle time and I/O response times.
I/O response times in Link Systems are described in the individual System Manuals. These manuals are listed at the end
of Section 1 Introduction.
6-1 PC Operation 452. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-1 Initialization 452. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-2 Asynchronous Operation 453. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-3 Synchronous Operation 455. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-4 I/O Refreshing 456. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-5 Power OFF Operation 458. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-6 Power OFF Interruption and Restart Continuation 461. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2 Cycle Time 464. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-1 Asynchronous Operation 464. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-2 Synchronous Operation 467. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-3 Operations Significantly Increasing Cycle Time 468. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-4 Potential Problems with Event Processing 469. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3 Calculating Cycle Time 470. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4 Instruction Execution Times 472. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5 I/O Response Time 486. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-1 I/O Units Only 486. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-2 Asynchronous Operation with a SYSMAC BUS System 487. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-3 Synchronous Operation with a SYSMAC BUS System 489. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-4 Asynchronous Operation with a SYSMAC BUS/2 System 490. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-5 Synchronous Operation with a SYSMAC BUS/2 System 492. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
452
6-1 PC Operation
This section details basic CPU operation of CV-series PCs. The CV-series
PCs can process instruction execution and I/O refreshing independently of
peripheral servicing. Independent parallel processing is called asynchronous
operation, and synchronized processing is called synchronous operation.
Select asynchronous or synchronous operation in the PC Setup.
6-1-1 Initialization The flow of initialization on power-up is as follows:
1, 2, 3...
1. When power is turned on to the CPU, the first diagnostic program is run to
check hardware and memory.
2. If the system is set for transfer of the program and/or Extended PC Setup,
the data is transferred from the Memory Card.
3. All bits in memory except Holding Bits and bits set to be held in the PC Setup
are turned OFF.
4. All I/O Units, Remote I/O Units, and CPU Bus Unit connections are checked.
5. The section diagnostic program is run to check the I/O table, I/O bus, CPU
bus, and program memory.
6. All timer PVs are reset.
7. If the system is set to execute a power ON interrupt, an interrupt is generated
and the power ON interrupt program is executed.
8. Synchronous or asynchronous operation is entered as specified in the PC
Setup.
YES
NO
Power application
Clear IOM
Diagnostics I
Set for program
transfer? Program transferred from Memory
Card to Program Memory.
(Turns OFF all bits except those in the
Holding Area, unless the IOM Hold Bit and
PC Systems Settings are set to retain IOM.)
Checks I/O Unit, Remote I/O Unit,
and CPU Bus Unit connections
(Checks hardware and memory.)
Diagnostics II (Verifies I/O table and checks the I/O bus,
CPU bus, and Program Memory.)
Resets timer PVs
YES
NO
Power ON interrupt
program? Executes the power ON interrupt pro-
gram if PC set for restart continuation.
Synchronous operationAsynchronous operation
PC Operation Section 6-1
453
6-1-2 Asynchronous Operation
The CV-series PCs can execute instructions and refresh I/O in parallel with
peripheral servicing (CPU Bus Units, Host Link Units, etc.). Peripheral servic-
ing will access data in the Link Area, SYSMAC BUS/2 Area, CPU Bus Unit
Area, and CPU Bus Link Area completely independently of program execu-
tion timing. This independent parallel processing is called asynchronous op-
eration.
Normally, instruction execution and peripheral servicing are independent,
however, an event processing request from a Unit is synchronized with pro-
gram execution. The cycle time for asynchronous operation is the time re-
quired for instruction execution.
Basic processes
Cycle time and
Event processing
Write I/O memory
Write program
Read program
Monitoring
Forced Set/Reset
processing
Program execution
Refresh timers
Input and output refreshing
Basic processes
CPU Bus Unit servicing*
Peripheral Device servicing
Host interface servicing
CPU bus check
Memory check
Battery check
Clock update
Start input check
Unit #0 refreshing
Unit #0 event processing
Unit #15 refreshing
Unit #15 event processing
Event
processing
request
Interrupt processing:
SYSMAC NET Link refreshing
SYSMAC LINK refreshing
SYSMAC BUS/2 refreshing
CPU Bus Link refreshing
Interrupt processing:
I/O Interrupt program
Scheduled interrupt program
SYSMAC BUS refreshing
TIMH(015) refreshing (every 10 ms)
Scheduled refreshing
Timer refreshing (every 80 ms)
I/O bus check
Program Execution Peripheral Servicing
memory check
Note *Only BASIC Units and Personal Computer Units are refreshed in CPU Bus Unit
servicing. Other CPU Bus Units are refreshed in interrupt processing.
When the PC is in asynchronous operation, instruction execution and peripheral
servicing accesses I/O memory independently.
Instruction Execution PC Memory Peripheral servicing
Read
Write
Write
Read
Programming Precautions
PC Operation Section 6-1
(040)
XFER #0010 S XXX
(187)
IOSP
(188)
IORS
0000
00
454
It is possible for the data in the CPU Bus Link Area, SYSMAC BUS/2 Area, CPU
Bus Unit Area, etc., to be changed by peripheral servicing between the execu-
tion of two instructions or even during the execution of an instruction accessing
many words. For example, if data is moved from XXXX in the CPU Bus Link Area
to words D1 and D2 in two consecutive MOV(030) instructions, the data i n D 1 and
D2 might be dif ferent if CPU Bus Link Area was refreshed between the execution
of the first and second MOV(030) instructions.
If an instruction changing many words in the CPU Bus Link Area such as
XFER(040) is executed while the CPU Bus Link Area is being refreshed, all of
the words might not be transferred to the peripheral unit at the same time.
The DISABLE ACCESS IOSP(187) and ENABLE ACCESS IORS(188) instruc-
tions can be used to ensure that the data being accessed is not simultaneously
accessed by peripheral servicing. In the example below, IOSP(187) and
IORS(188) are used to ensure that the ten words of data transferred to the CPU
Bus Link Area will be transmitted to the Peripheral Device at the same time.
Address Instruction Operands
00000 LD 000000
00001 IOSP(187)
00002 XFER(040) #0010
s
XXX
00003 IORS(188)
If IOSP(187) is executed while the CPU Bus Link Area is being refreshed, ac-
cess to the CPU Bus Link Area won’t be stopped until the refreshing has been
completed. When XFER(040) is executed, CPU Bus Link Area refreshing will be
disabled. CPU Bus Link Area refreshing will be enabled by IORS(188) after t he
10 words of data have been transferred to the CPU Bus Link Area.
PC Operation Section 6-1
455
6-1-3 Synchronous Operation
PC operation can be set to synchronous operation in the PC Setup to syn-
chronize instruction execution and peripheral servicing. The following dia-
gram shows CPU operation during synchronous operation.
Basic processes
Cycle time and
Write I/O memory
Write program
Read program
Monitoring
Forced Set/Reset
processing
Execute program
Refresh timers
Basic processes
Synchronizing
Peripheral device servicing
Host Link servicing
CPU bus check
Memory check
Battery check
Clock update
Start input check
Unit #0 refreshing
Unit #0 event processing
Interrupt processing:
SYSMAC NET Link refreshing
SYSMAC LINK refreshing
SYSMAC BUS/2 refreshing
CPU Bus Link refreshing (*3)
Interrupt processing (*4):
I/O Interrupt program
Scheduled interrupt program
SYSMAC BUS refreshing
TIMH(015) refreshing (every 10 ms)
Scheduled refreshing
Timer refreshing (every 80 ms)
I/O bus check
Event processing
Input, output, and
SYSMAC BUS refreshing
Synchronizing
CPU Bus Unit servicing (*1)
Waiting
Waiting
Synchronizing
(*2)
Unit #15 refreshing (*2)
Unit #15 event processing
(*3)
(*2)
memory check
Note 1. Only BASIC Units and Personal Computer Units are refreshed in CPU Bus
Unit servicing. Other CPU Bus Units are refreshed in interrupt processing.
2. Interrupts (for SYSMAC NET Link, SYSMAC LINK, and SYSMAC BUS/2 re-
freshing) are processed once each cycle, but if the cycle time is less than the
communications cycle time, these Units might not be serviced every cycle.
3. The CPU Bus Link Area data may not be synchronized even with synchro-
nous operation.
4. I/O interrupts, scheduled interrupts, and scheduled refreshing will be per-
formed even during peripheral servicing.
PC Operation Section 6-1
456
6-1-4 I/O Refreshing
I/O refreshing refers to the reading of ON/OFF input bit data from Input Units to
I/O memory and the writing of ON/OFF output bit data from I/O memory to Out-
put Units.
CPU, CPU Expansion, and Expansion I/O Racks
The following list shows the five methods for refreshing I/O words allocated to
Units on the CPU, CPU Expansion, and Expansion I/O Racks. The first three
methods refresh all I/O points at once, the fourth refreshes a selected group of
I/O words, and the fifth refreshes only those I/O points affected by an instruction.
1, 2, 3...
1. Cyclic refreshing
2. Scheduled refreshing
3. Zero-cross refreshing
4. IORF(184) refreshing
5. Immediate refreshing
One of the first three refreshing methods must be selected in the PC Setup. The
default method is cyclic refreshing. Immediate and IORF(184) refreshing can be
used in addition to the I/O refreshing method selected in the PC Setup. If all three
methods are disabled by setting scheduled refreshing with an interval of 00, only
Immediate and IORF(184) refreshing will be possible.
Cyclic Refreshing In cyclic refreshing, all I/O points are refreshed once each cycle after the pro-
gram i s executed. When SFC programming is not used, I/O points are refreshed
when the program has been executed from the first instruction to END(001); with
SFC programming, I/O points are refreshed when the actions in active steps
have all been executed. Output points are refreshed first, then input points.
Scheduled Refreshing In scheduled refreshing, all I/O points are refreshed at a regular interval preset
between 10 ms and 120 ms in the PC Setup. Scheduled refreshing is only pos-
sible when the PC is set for asynchronous operation. If a scheduled refresh oc-
curs during program execution or interrupt processing, the scheduled refreshing
will not begin until that procedure is completed. Scheduled refreshing can be
stopped by turning ON bit A01705 (the I/O Refresh Disable Bit).
If the interval between refreshes is set to 00, refreshing will be disabled and only
immediate or IORF(184) refreshing will be possible.
Zero-cross Refreshing In zero-cross refreshing, all output points are refreshed when the AC power su p -
ply voltage crosses 0 V, the program is executed next, and then input points are
refreshed. Zero-cross refreshing is for use with output points allocated to Output
Units mounted on a CPU Rack, CPU Expansion Rack, or Expansion I/O Rack.
Zero-cross refreshing has the following advantages, particularly when used with
AC output devices:
1, 2, 3...
1. The voltage supplied to the load is near zero when it is switched ON or OFF,
so surge voltages are not generated.
2. The simultaneous ON time for devices such as solenoids operating against
each other can be reduced and coil burning can be prevented.
Use a commercial power supply with a sine-wave output.
PC Operation Section 6-1
!
457
As shown in the following diagram, output points are refreshed (A) when the zero
voltage signal is received, the program is executed (B), input points are re-
freshed (C), and the CPU waits for the next zero voltage signal (D). If I/O refresh-
ing and program execution exceed one half the AC cycle (B’), the next output
refreshing will occur when the next zero voltage signal is received.
AC power supply
Zero-cross signal
PC operation A DC AB ADC AB DCB’
A: Output points are refreshed
B: Program is executed
B’:I/O refreshing and program execution
exceed one half the AC cycle
C: Input points are refreshed
D: CPU waits for the next zero voltage signal
Caution Do not use zero-cross refreshing with the CV2000 or CVM1-CPU21-EV2 if the
number of points output from the PC is greater than 1,024 (64 words). If zero-
cross refreshing is used with more than 1,024 output points, zero-cross effec-
tiveness will be lost for all outputs past the first 1,024 in memory.
IORF(184) Refreshing IORF(184) requires two operands, St and E, which define the first and last word
in a group of I/O words. When IORF(184) is executed, all words between St and
E are refreshed. This is in addition to the I/O refreshing performed by the I/O re-
freshing method selected in the PC Setup. Refer to
5-27-4 I/O REFRESH –
IORF(184)
for details.
Immediate Refreshing Immediate refreshing refreshes the input/output points affected by an instruc-
tion immediately before/after the instruction is executed; this i s in addition to the
I/O refreshing performed by the I/O refreshing method selected in the PC Setup.
Immediate refreshing is available for many instructions and is selected by enter-
ing a “!” prefix before the instruction when writing the program. Only I/O points
allocated to I/O Units (except High-density I/O Units using dynamic I/O)
mounted o n a CPU Rack, Expansion CPU Rack, or Expansion I/O Rack can be
refreshed with immediate refreshing.
SYSMAC BUS/2 and SYSMAC BUS Systems
The five methods for refreshing I/O described above cannot be used for I/O
points allocated in SYSMAC BUS/2 and SYSMAC BUS Systems. Refreshing of
I/O points in SYSMAC BUS/2 and SYSMAC BUS Systems differs for synchro-
nous and asynchronous operation, as shown in the following tables.
PC Operation Section 6-1
458
SYSMAC BUS/2 I/O refreshing of Units in a SYSMAC BUS/2 System can be disabled by turning
ON the corresponding CPU Bus Service Disable Bits in A015. Bits 00 to 15
correspond to Units #0 to #15, respectively. Turn the bits OFF again to enable
service and resume I/O refreshing.
Asynchronous operation Synchronous operation
I/O refreshing takes place once each
communications cycle.
(Refer to the
SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote
I/O System Manual
for details on the
communications cycle.)
I/O refreshing takes place once each
PC cycle, but I/O points in the SYSMAC
BUS/2 System may not be refreshed
every cycle if the SYSMAC BUS/2
communications cycle is longer than
the PC cycle.
SYSMAC BUS I/O refreshing of Units in a SYSMAC BUS System can be disabled by turning ON
bit A01705 (the I/O Refresh Disable Bit). T urn A01705 OFF again to resume I/O
refreshing.
Asynchronous operation Synchronous operation
I/O refreshing takes place at regular
intervals. The length of the interval
depends on the number of Masters.
Multiply the number of Masters
connected by 5 ms to calculate the
interval.
I/O refreshing takes place once each
PC cycle.
6-1-5 Power OFF Operation
This section details CPU operation when power is turned OFF and ON, and dur-
ing a momentary power interruption.
Power OFF/ON The following diagram and explanation show the CPU operation when the power
goes off and when power is turned on.
Power supply
Power interruption
signal
Program execution
Momentary Power
Interruption Flag
(A40202)
CPU reset signal
RUN output
85%
Power interruption detection
time: 10 to 25 ms for AC power,
0.3 to 1 ms for DC power
Initialization processing
Normal
Power OFF
interrupt program Power ON interrupt
program
Shutdown processing
Normal
Stops
Standby
Power interruption
Momentary power interruption
time (default: 0 ms)
Power hold time: 10 ms (fixed)
The following list shows CPU operation when power is interrupted.
1, 2, 3...
1. A power interruption signal is output when the CPU detects a power supply
voltage below 85% of full power. It takes the CPU between 10 ms and 25 ms
to detect the power interruption with an AC power supply and between
0.3 ms and 1 ms to detect the power interruption with a DC power supply.
2. When the power interruption signal is output, program execution is stopped
and the system shutdown procedure (1 ms) takes place. At this point, output
status and timer PV status are maintained.
Power OFF Operation
PC Operation Section 6-1
459
3. After the power interruption signal is output, the CPU waits for the momen-
tary power interruption time set in the PC Setup (default: 0 ms) before pro-
ceeding. Set the power interruption time to 9–T ms max. (T is the time re-
quired t o execute the power OFF interrupt program if there is one), because
the power maintenance time is 10 ms and 1 ms is required for the system
shutdown procedure.
4. The CPU determines that a power interruption has occurred if power hasn’t
returned by the end of the power interruption time. If a power OFF interrupt
program has been prepared, it will be executed as soon as the instruction
interrupted b y the power interruption signal has been completed. The power
OFF interrupt program will be stopped if it is still running 10 ms after the pow-
er interrupt signal was received (10 ms is the power hold time).
Be sure that the total time required for the system shutdown procedure
(1 ms), momentary power interruption time (set in the PC Setup), inter-
rupted instruction completion time (depends on the interruption point), and
the power OFF interrupt program (depends on program length) does not ex-
ceed 10 ms.
5. A CPU reset signal will be generated and the CPU will be stopped 10 ms
after the power interruption signal is output. At this point, all outputs will turn
OFF.
The following list shows CPU procedures when power is returned to the PC.
1, 2, 3...
1. When the CPU detects a power supply voltage above 85% of full power,
both the power interruption signal and the CPU reset signal will be turned
OFF.
2. The CPU will begin initialization when the CPU reset signal is turned OFF.
3. When CPU initialization is completed, the program will be executed. If the
PC is set for restart continuation and a power ON interrupt program has
been prepared, the power ON interrupt program will be executed first, then
the main program.
Power ON Procedure
PC Operation Section 6-1
460
Momentary Power Interruptions
The following diagram and explanation show the CPU operation when the power
goes off momentarily.
Power
supply
Power
interruption
signal
Program
execution
Momentary Power
Interruption Flag
(A40202)
CPU reset
signal
RUN output
85% Power interruption
Power interruption detection
time: 10 to 25 ms for AC power,
0.3 to 1 ms for DC power
Shutdown
processing (default: 0 ms)
NormalNormal Stops Standby
Power restored
(recorded in A007)
Duration of
interruption
OFF
ON
Recovery
Momentary power
interruption time
The initial CPU operation during a momentary power interruption is identical to
the first two items under the power OFF procedure heading above. In a momen-
tary power interruption, power returns to 85% of full power before the power in-
terruption time is exceeded.
When the CPU detects a power supply voltage above 85% of full power, the
power interruption signal will be turned OFF and program execution will contin-
ue from the point at which it was interrupted. The momentary power interruption
time (the time from the system shutdown procedure to the point that the power
interruption signal was turned OFF) is recorded in milliseconds (0000 ms to
9999 ms) in A007. The day and time that the most recent power interruption oc-
curred are recorded in A012 and A013, and the total number of interruptions is
recorded in BCD in A014.
Auxiliary Area words A012 and A013 contain the time at which power was inter-
rupted, as shown in the following table.
Word Bits Contents Possible values
A012 00 to 07 Seconds 00 to 59
08 to 15 Minutes 00 to 59
A013 00 to 07 Hours 00 to 23 (24-hour system)
08 to 15 Day of month 01 to 31 (adjusted by month and for leap year)
The default for the momentary power interruption time in the PC Setup is 0 ms.
Set the momentary power interruption time to 9 ms or less. Even if the momen-
tary power interruption time exceeds the power hold time (10 ms), only those
power interruptions shorter than 10 ms will be considered as momentary power
interruptions.
To determine the actual length of a power interruption, add the time recorded in
A007 t o the time required to detect a power interruption (10 ms to 25 ms) and the
time required to execute the system shut down procedure (1 ms).
PC Operation Section 6-1
461
6-1-6 Power OFF Interruption and Restart Continuation
This section details the steps required to prepare a power OFF interrupt pro-
gram and to restart the PC after a power interruption.
Power OFF Interrupts Follow the steps below to use a power OFF interrupt program.
1, 2, 3...
1. Enable the power OFF interrupt in the PC Setup.
2. Write the power OFF interrupt program as an SFC program if SFC program-
ming i s being used or as a ladder diagram if SFC programming is not being
used.
The following instructions cannot be included in a power OFF interrupt pro-
gram: FAL(006), FALS(007), FILR(180), FILW(181), FILP(182), IOSP(187),
READ(190), WRIT(191), SEND(192), RECV(193), CMND(194), SA(210),
SP(211), SR(212), SF(213), SE(214), and SOFF(215).
3. The time allowed for a power OFF interrupt program is limited. Verify that the
total time required for the system shutdown procedure (1 ms), momentary
power interruption time (set in the PC Setup), interrupted instruction
completion time (depends on the instruction that is interrupted), and the
power OFF interrupt program (depends on program length) does not ex-
ceed 10 ms.
The power OFF interrupt program will stopped if it is still running 10 ms after
the power interrupt signal was received.
Restart Continuation The following steps are required to cause the PC to automatically resume opera-
tion after the program has been stopped because of a power interruption.
1, 2, 3...
1. Select the following settings in the PC Setup.
Item Required setting
Startup Hold Settings IOM Hold Bit Status Hold (Yes)
Restart Continuation Bit
Status Hold (Yes)
Startup Mode Setting RUN or MONITOR
Execution Controls 2 Power OFF interrupt Enabled (Yes)
2. Turn ON the following Auxiliary Area control bits. These are normally turned
ON from the program.
Bit Bit name Setting
A00011 Restart Continuation Bit Hold ON
A00012 IOM Hold Bit ON
3. A power OFF interrupt program must be prepared for restart continuation.
4. A power ON interrupt program may be written if required. The power ON in-
terrupt program will only be executed if the PC is set for restart continuation.
Write the power ON interrupt program as an SFC program if SFC program-
ming is being used or as a ladder diagram if SFC programming is not being
used.
5. When the CPU is stopped due to a power interruption, all outputs will be
turned OFF and the Output OFF Bit (A00015) will be turned ON. When re-
starting the PC, the Output OFF Bit must be turned OFF in either the power
ON interrupt program or the main program.
Power OFF Interrupt
Program
Settings
PC Operation Section 6-1
462
The diagram and explanation below describe CPU operation when the PC is set
for restart continuation and power is interrupted and then returned after the CPU
is stopped.
Shutdown
processing
(1 ms) Momentary power
interruption time
(default: 0 ms)
Initialization
processing Normal
Normal
CPU stopped
Standby Power OFF interrupt
program
Power ON interrupt program
Power restored
Execution of current instruction completed.
Execution
continues
from next
instruction.
Power
interruption
detected
Program
execution
Power hold time: 10 ms (fixed)
1, 2, 3...
1. Execution of the main program is stopped when the power interruption sig-
nal is output, and the CPU then waits for the momentary power interruption
time set in the PC Setup.
2. The power OFF interrupt program is executed when the momentary power
interruption time is exceeded. If program execution was interrupted by the
power interruption signal, the power OFF interrupt program is executed af-
ter the interrupted instruction has been completed.
3. The CPU will be stopped and all outputs turned OFF when either the power
OFF interrupt program is completed or 10 ms has passed since the power
interruption signal was output, whichever occurs first.
4. Initialization processing will be performed when power returns to the PC.
5. After initialization, the power ON interrupt program will be executed if one
has been prepared.
6. The main program will then be executed from the instruction just after the
one that was being executed when the power interruption signal was output.
Take the following precautions to ensure proper restart continuation.
1, 2, 3...
1. If 10 ms has elapsed since the power interrupt signal was received, the CPU
will be stopped even if the power OFF interrupt program is still running. Be
sure that the power OFF interrupt program is as short as possible.
Verify that the total time required for the system shutdown procedure (1 ms),
momentary power interruption time (set in the PC Setup), interrupted
instruction completion time (depends on the instruction that is interrupted),
and the power OFF interrupt program (depends on program length) does
not exceed 10 ms.
2. When program execution was interrupted by the power interruption signal,
the power OFF interrupt program is executed after the interrupted instruc-
tion is completed.
A particularly long instruction, such as SEND(192) or RECV(193), might not
be completed by the end of the 10 ms power hold time, and some data might
be lost.
3. Restart continuation will not occur when:
d) A fatal error (one stopping the CPU) occurs.
e) The power OFF interrupt program was not completed within the power
hold time (10 ms).
f) The PC memory has somehow been completely altered when power
was interrupted.
If memory is disrupted, the main program will be executed from the be-
ginning if the PC can still run when power returns.
Operation
Precautions
PC Operation Section 6-1
463
4. If a power interruption occurs during initialization or execution of the power
ON interrupt program, restart continuation will begin at initialization or from
the beginning of the power ON interrupt program.
5. Timers are stopped when a power interruption occurs and their PVs are
maintained. The timers begin counting again when the power OFF interrupt
program is executed, and are once again stopped with PVs maintained
when the power OFF interrupt program is completed.
Timing begins again when the main program is started. Timers are held dur-
ing initialization and execution of the power ON interrupt program.
6. An I/O interrupt program will be executed from the instruction just after the
one that was being executed when the power interruption signal was output,
just like the main program.
When power returns, all I/O interrupts will be masked, so the masks will have
to be removed with MSKS(153) in the power ON interrupt program if the in-
terrupts are to operate.
7. Scheduled interrupts are cancelled by a power interruption, so reset sched-
uled interrupts in the power ON program if necessary.
8. If SE(214)/SOFF(215) are executed in the power ON interrupt program,
main program execution will start from the active step with the highest prior-
ity.
9. When power is interrupted, the address being executed is recorded in the
CPU and program execution proceeds from the next address when the PC
is restarted. The program on the Memory Card must therefore be identical to
the one in the PC if the program is automatically transferred from the
Memory Card when power returns to the PC. If the program has been
changed, the PC might not operate properly.
10. If the DIP switch on the CPU is set to transfer the program from the Memory
Card on power-up, the PC Setup will be transferred at the same time. Be
sure that any important changes to the PC Setup are recorded in the version
of the PC Setup on the Memory Card.
The following parameters are maintained when the PC is restarted.
1, 2, 3...
1. Active status of steps
2. Execution status of interrupt programs
3. The cause of interrupt programs received before the power interruption (ex-
cept for power OFF interrupt program)
4. The address being executed in the program
5. Interlock status
6. IOM (I/O memory) status
7. Forced Set/Reset status (if PC Setup and A00013 are set to maintain forced
status)
8. Timer and counter PVs
9. Step timer PVs
10. Elapsed time for AQ (L, D, SL, SD, DS)
11. Trace execution status
12. Trace initial start, when the PC Setup is set for Trace execution on power-up
13. Arithmetic Flag status saved with CCS(173)
14. Index register contents
15. The current EM bank number
Note Even i f the current EM bank number is changed in the power OFF in-
terrupt program, the EM bank number will revert to the one that was
valid just before the power OFF interrupt program was executed.
Parameters Maintained for
Restart Continuation
PC Operation Section 6-1
464
The following parameters are not maintained when the PC is restarted.
1, 2, 3...
1. Error status (but the Error Log is maintained.)
2. Disabled access to I/O memory by IOSP(187)
3. Data displayed on I/O Control Units, I/O Interface Units, and Slave Units by
IODP(189)
4. Status of CPU Bus Unit Service Disable Bits (A015)
5. Status of Service Disable Bits in A017
6. Message data
7. I/O interrupt mask status
8. Scheduled interrupt interval data
9. Data Register contents
10. Execution status of differentiated status monitoring
11. Execution status of execution time measurements
12. Execution status of stop monitoring
13. Execution of the following instructions may not be completed depending on
how much of the instruction had been executed when the power interruption
occurred: FILR(180), FILW(181), FILP(182), FLSP(183), READ(190),
WRIT(191), SEND(192), RECV(193), CMND(194)
6-2 Cycle T ime Understanding the operations that occur during the cycle and the elements that
affect cycle time is essential to effective programming and PC operations. The
major factors in determining program timing are the cycle time and the I/O re-
sponse time. One cycle of CPU operation is called a cycle; the time required for
one cycle is called the cycle time. The time required to produce a control output
signal following reception of an input signal is called the I/O response time.
To aid in PC operation, the present and maximum cycle times are recorded in the
read-only section of the Auxiliary Area. The present cycle time is held in A462
and A463 and the maximum cycle time is held in A464 and A465.
6-2-1 Asynchronous Operation
In asynchronous operation, instruction execution and I/O refreshing are pro-
cessed in a cycle that is independent of the cycle for peripheral servicing
(CPU Bus Units, host interface, etc.). Since the cycles are independent, the
number of CPU Bus Units, host interface links, etc., that are connected to the
PC has no effect on the instruction execution cycle time.
Parameters Not Maintained
for Restart Continuation
Cycle Time Section 6-2
465
Instruction Execution Cycle Time
Process Actions Processing time
CV500/CVM1-CPU01-EV2 CV1000/2000/
CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2
Basic
processes Checks the cycle time and PC memory. 0.6 ms 0.5 ms
Event
processing Execution of non-scheduled requests for
data processing from peripherals. 0 ms if there is no processing request; 20 ms max.
(12% of cycle time is for servicing.)
Program
execution Program executed. For ladder programs, total execution time for all
instructions varies with program size, the instructions
used, and execution conditions. Refer to
6-4 Instruction
Execution Times
for details.
For SFC programs, refer to the
CV-series PC Operation
Manual: SFC
.
Timer
refreshing Updates the PVs of all timers in the
program. 10 µs + 1.1 µs per timer 8 µs + 0.9 µs per timer
Output
refreshing Output terminals updated according to
status of output bits in memory (including
Special I/O Units).
8 µs per word (per 16 pts.) 7 µs per word (per 16 pts.)
Input
refreshing Input bits updated according to the status
of input signals (including Special I/O
Units).
10 µs per word (per 16 pts.) 8 µs per word (per 16 pts.)
Depending on the program, the following interrupt processes is executed in
addition t o the processes detailed in the table above. The actual cycle time is the
sum of the cycle time calculated in the table above and the time required for the
processes in the table below.
Process Actions Processing time
CV500/CVM1-CPU01-EV2 CV1000/2000/
CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2
I/O interrupts I/O interrupt programs started with receipt
of interrupt requests from Interrupt Input
Units.
Depends on the I/O interrupt program.
Scheduled
interrupt Scheduled interrupt program(s) started at
preset interval(s). Depends on the Scheduled interrupt program.
SYSMAC BUS
refreshing Masters receive I/O data from Slaves
every 5 ms. 0.6 ms per Master plus
60 µs per word controlled
though each Master
0.5 ms per Master plus
50 µs per word controlled
though each Master
TIMH(015)
refreshing Updates the PVs of high-speed timers in
the program every 10 ms. 12 µs + 0.8 µs per timer 10 µs + 0.7 µs per timer
Timer
refreshing Updates the PVs of all timers in the
program every 80 ms if the cycle time
exceeds 80 ms.
10 µs + 1.1 µs per timer 8 µs + 0.9 µs per timer
I/O bus check Checks the I/O bus on the CPU,
Expansion CPU, and Expansion I/O
Racks
0.7 µs every 20 ms 0.6 µs every 20 ms
Interrupt Processing
Cycle Time Section 6-2
466
Peripheral Servicing Cycle Time
Processes Actions Processing time
CV500/CVM1-CPU01-EV2 CV1000/2000/
CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2
Basic
processes Checks the CPU bus, PC memory,
battery, start input, and updates the clock. Approx. 2.8 ms
CPU Bus Unit
servicing Starting from Unit #0, events (requests for
non-scheduled data processing) are
processed to refresh BASIC Unit and
Personal Computer Units.
Approx. 1 ms for event processing; approx. 0.8 ms for
BASIC Unit refreshing; and approx. 0.8 ms for Personal
Computer Unit refreshing.
Peripheral
Device
servicing
If a peripheral Device is connected,
commands from it are processed. 1.2 ms
Host interface
servicing (Pin 3
of DIP switch
OFF)
Commands from computers connected
through the host interface are processed. 1.2 ms
NT link
servicing (Pin 3
of DIP switch
ON)
The NT link is serviced when a PT is
connected to the CPU and the NT link is
being used.
Fixed at 2.2 ms
Depending o n the program, the following interrupt processes might be executed
in addition to the processes detailed in the table above. The actual cycle time is
the sum of the cycle time calculated in the table above and the time required for
the processes in the table below.
Process Actions Processing time
CV500/CVM1-CPU01-EV2 CV1000/2000/
CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2
SYSMAC NET
Link refreshing The data link words allocated to SYSMAC
NET Link Units are refreshed. Approx. 1.4 ms + 1 µs per data link word, add 0.3 ms if
both DM and CIO are used for data links.
SYSMAC LINK
refreshing The data link words allocated to SYSMAC
LINK Units are refreshed. Approx. 1.4 ms + 1 µs per data link word, add 0.3 ms if
both DM and CIO are used for data links.
SYSMAC
BUS/2
refreshing
Masters receive I/O data from Slaves. Approx. 2.0 ms plus 1 µs per word refreshed
CPU Bus Link
refreshing Data in the CPU Bus Link Area is
refreshed. 0.8 ms every 10 ms (when the PC is set to use the CPU
Bus Link Area in the PC Setup)
Interrupt Refresh
Processing
Cycle Time Section 6-2
467
6-2-2 Synchronous Operation
In synchronous operation, instruction execution and I/O refreshing are pro-
cessed along with peripheral servicing (CPU Bus Units, host interface, etc.)
in a single cycle. The cycle time is thus the sum of the time required for
instruction execution and that required for peripheral servicing, and the cycle
time will lengthen as more peripherals are connected.
Instruction Execution Cycle Time
Process Actions Processing time
CV500/CVM1-CPU01-EV2 CV1000/2000/
CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2
Basic
processes Checks the cycle
time and PC
memory.
Checks the CPU
bus, PC memory,
battery, start input,
and updates the
clock.
Approx. 3.7 ms Approx. 3.5 ms
Event
processing Execution of non-scheduled requests for
data processing from peripherals. 0 ms if there is no processing request; 20 ms max.
(12% of cycle time is for servicing.)
Program
execution Program executed. For ladder programs, total execution time for all
instructions varies with program size, the instructions
used, and execution conditions. Refer to
6-4 Instruction
Execution Times
for details.
For SFC programs, refer to the
CV-series PC Operation
Manual: SFC
.
Timer
refreshing Updates the PVs of all timers in the
program. 10 µs + 1.1 µs per timer 8 µs + 0.9 µs per timer
Output
refreshing Output terminals are updated according to
status of output bits in memory (including
Special I/O Units).
8 µs per word (per 16 pts.) 7 µs per word (per 16 pts.)
Input
refreshing Input bits are updated according to status
of input signals (including Special I/O
Units).
10µs per word (per 16 pts.) 8 µs per word (per 16 pts.)
SYSMAC BUS
refreshing Input bits allocated to Units connected to
Slaves are updated according to status of
input signals.
Output signals sent to Units connected to
Slaves are updated according to status of
output bits in memory.
1 ms per Master plus 60 µs
per word controlled though
each Master
1 ms per Master plus 50 µs
per word controlled though
each Master
CPU Bus Unit
servicing Starting from Unit #0, events (requests for
non-scheduled data processing) are
processed to refresh BASIC Unit and
Personal Computer Units.
Approx. 1 ms for event processing; approx. 0.8 ms for
BASIC Unit refreshing; and approx. 0.8 ms for Personal
Computer
Peripheral
Device
servicing
If a peripheral device is connected,
commands from it are processed. 1.2 ms
Host interface
servicing (Pin 3
of DIP switch
OFF)
Commands from computers connected
through the host interface are processed. 1.2 ms
NT link
servicing (Pin 3
of DIP switch
ON)
The NT link is serviced when a PT is
connected to the CPU and the NT link is
being used.
Fixed at 2.2 ms
Cycle Time Section 6-2
468
Depending o n the program, the following interrupt processes might be executed
in addition to the processes detailed in the table above. The actual cycle time is
the sum of the cycle time calculated in the table above and the time required for
the processes in the table below.
Process Actions Processing time
CV500/CVM1-CPU01-EV2 CV1000/2000/
CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2
I/O interrupts I/O interrupt programs started with receipt
of interrupts from Interrupt Input Units. Depends on the I/O interrupt programs.
Scheduled
interrupt Scheduled interrupt program(s) started at
preset interval(s). Depends on the scheduled interrupt program(s).
TIMH(015)
refreshing Updates the PVs of high-speed timers in
the program every 10 ms. 12 µs + 0.8 µs per timer 10 µs + 0.7 µs per timer
Timer
refreshing Updates the PVs of all timers in the
program every 80 ms if the cycle time
exceeds 80 ms.
10 µs + 1.1 µs per timer 8 µs + 0.9 µs per timer
I/O bus check Checks the I/O bus on the CPU,
Expansion CPU, and Expansion I/O
Racks
0.6 µs every 20 ms
SYSMAC NET
Link refreshing The data link words allocated to SYSMAC
NET Link Units are refreshed.
Interrupt processing can occur as often as
once each cycle.
Approx. 1.4 ms + 1 µs per data link word, add 0.3 ms if
both DM and CIO are used for data links.
SYSMAC LINK
refreshing The data link words allocated to SYSMAC
LINK Units are refreshed.
Interrupt processing can occur as often as
once each cycle.
Approx. 1.4 ms + 1 µs per data link word, add 0.3 ms if
both DM and CIO are used for data links.
SYSMAC
BUS/2
refreshing
Masters receive I/O data from Slaves. Approx. 2.0 ms plus 1 µs per word refreshed
CPU Bus Link
refreshing Data in the CPU Bus Link Area is
refreshed. 0.8 ms every 10 ms (when the PC is set to use the CPU
Bus Link Area in the PC Setup)
The Service Disable Bits shown in the table below are primarily used during syn-
chronous operation to reduce the cycle time; they are only ef fective in RUN and
MONITOR modes. The bits are OFF when the PC is first turned on, and are nor-
mally turned ON from the program.
Do not leave Service Disable Bits ON for longer than is necessary; service be-
tween the PC and the designated Unit will be stopped completely as long as the
corresponding Service Disable Bit is ON.
Word(s) Bit(s) Function
A015 00 to 15 CPU Bus Service Disable Bits (Bits 00 to 15
correspond to units #0 to #15.)
A017 03 Host Link/NT Link Service Disable Bit
04 Peripheral Service Disable Bit
05 I/O Refresh Disable Bit
6-2-3 Operations Significantly Increasing Cycle Time
The instruction trace operation described below can significantly affect the cycle
time when performed from CVSS/SSS.
Operation Effect on cycle time Precautions
Instruction trace Cycle time increased 3 to
5 times. The cycle time will change during an instruction trace and high-speed
input signals might not be detected.
Set the maximum cycle time in the PC Setup at least 5 times higher
than its usual value.
Interrupt Processing
Service Disable Bits
Cycle Time Section 6-2
469
Note 1. In the earlier version, executing the online edit operation could increase
cycle time by as much as 3 seconds. In the CVM1(V2), PC operation is
stopped for the times shown in the following table but there is no effect on
cycle time (i.e., those times are not added to the cycle time). While PC op-
eration is stopped, output status is retained and inputs are not accepted.
Online edit operation Stopped time
Instruction block inserted or deleted at the beginning of the
62K-word users program. Approx. 0.5 s
Instruction block including JME(005) deleted at the beginning
of the 62K-word users program. Approx. 2.0 s
2. In the earlier version, executing FILP(182) could increase cycle time by as
much as 3 seconds, but this instruction does not affect cycle time in the
CVM1(V2). Just as in the earlier version, however, PC operation is stopped
for as much as 30 seconds for program replacement processing. While PC
operation is stopped, output status is retained and inputs are not accepted.
Communications with SYSMAC NET, SYSMAC LINK, SYSMAC BUS/2,
Host Link, and peripheral devices also stop during those periods. Therefore,
when using a program in which FILP(182) is executed, set the response
time in the System Setup to 30 seconds or more.
3. These changes apply not only to the CVM1(V2), but also to CV500,
CV1000, and CV2000 products in which the rightmost digit of the lot number
is “5.”
6-2-4 Potential Problems with Event Processing
It is possible for two or more events (unscheduled requests for data processing)
from Peripheral Devices, the host interface, or CPU Bus Units to occur at the
same time.
When two or more writing events (writing the program, writing parameters, reg-
istering the I/O table, changing the mode) occur simultaneously, they are pro-
cessed in the order in which they were received. The later arriving events will not
be executed until the earlier events have been completed.
The following CVSS/SSS operations are writing events:
Data modification, set, reset, online edit, DM edit, mode change, transfer
block (CVSS/SSS to PC), save block (CVSS/SSS to PC), I/O table transfer,
I/O table register, PC Setup, PC Setup information transfer, data trace
execution, program trace execution, setup for BASIC Units and Personal
Computer Units, software switch settings for BASIC Units and Personal
Computer Units, data link table transfer, routing table transfer, clearing
errors, clearing the error log, setting the clock, setting program memory
protect, clearing program memory protect, Memory Card to PC transfer,
debug transfer, reading cycle time
The following host interface operations are writing events:
Data area block write, data area transfer, parameter area write, parameter
area block write, start program area protect, clear protect area, program
area write, program area clear, start execution, stop execution, write clock
information, clear message, allow access, force allow access, open access,
clearing errors, clearing the error log, variable area to file transfer,
parameter area to file transfer, program area to file transfer, force set/reset,
force set/reset for all bits
Like writing events, when two or more instruction execution events (reading/
writing the program, etc.) occur simultaneously, they are processed in the order
in which they were received. The later arriving events will not be executed until
the earlier events have been completed.
Multiple Writing Events
Multiple Instruction
Execution Events
Cycle Time Section 6-2
470
The following CVSS/SSS operations are instruction execution events:
Monitoring, data modification, set, reset, online edit, DM edit, search,
transfer bl ock (CVSS/SSS to PC), save block (CVSS/SSS to PC), I/O table
change, PC Setup, PC Setup information transfer, data trace execution,
program trace execution, setting program memory protect, clearing
program memory protect, Memory Card (program, I/O memory)
The following host interface operations are writing events:
Data area block write, data area transfer, parameter area write, parameter
area block write, start program area protect, clear protect area, program
area read, program area write, program area clear, cycle time read, program
area to file transfer, force set/reset, force set/reset for all bits
When SFC online editing is selected from the CVSS, all writing events will be
suspended until the online editing has been completed.
6-3 Calculating Cycle Time
The PC configuration, the program, and program execution conditions must
be taken into consideration when calculating the cycle time. This means tak-
ing into account such things as the number of I/O points, the programming
instructions used, and whether or not Peripheral Devices are being used.
This section shows a basic example of cycle time calculation. Operating
times are given in the tables in
6-2 Cycle Time
.
Here, we’ll compute the cycle time for a CV1000 or CV2000 set for cyclic re-
freshing. The PC controls only I/O Units, ten on the CPU Rack and eleven on
an Expansion I/O Rack. The PC configuration for this is shown below. It is
assumed that the program contains 20,000 instructions requiring an average
of 0.3 µs each to execute.
Refer to the next section for instruction execution times. Using the cycle time
in calculating the I/O response time is described in the last part of
Section 6
.
32-point Output Units
16-point Input
Units
32-point Input Units
16-point Output
Units
CPU Rack
Expansion I/O
Rack
The equation for the cycle time from above is as follows:
Cycle time = overseeing time (basic processes)
+ program execution
+ output refreshing
+ input refreshing time
The overseeing time is fixed at 0.5 ms for nonsynchronous processing.
The program execution time is 6 ms (0.3 µs/instruction times 20,000 instruc-
tions).
SFC Online Editing
Calculations
Calculating Cycle Time Section 6-3
471
The output refreshing time would be as follows for the five 16-point Output
Units and six 32-point Output Units controlled by the PC:
16 points
(16 points x 5) + (32 points x 6) x 7 µs = 0.12 ms
The input refresh time would be as follows for the five 16-point Input Units
and five 32-point Input Units controlled by the PC:
16 points
(16 points x 5) + (32 points x 5) x 8 µs = 0.12 ms
The cycle time would thus be:
0.5 ms + 6.0 ms + 0.12 ms + 0.12 ms 6.74 ms
Calculating Cycle Time Section 6-3
472
6-4 Instruction Execution Times
This following table lists the execution times for CV-series PC instructions. The
maximum and minimum execution times and the conditions which cause them
are given where relevant. When “word” is referred to in the Conditions column, it
implies the content of any word except for indirectly addressed DM words. Indi-
rectly addressed DM words, which create longer execution times when used,
are indicated by “*DM.”
Execution times for most instructions depend on whether they are executed with
an ON or an OFF execution condition. Exceptions are the ladder diagram
instructions OUT and OUT NOT, which require the same time regardless of the
execution condition. The OFF execution time for an instruction can also vary de-
pending on the circumstances, i.e., whether it is in an interlocked program sec-
tion and the execution condition for IL is OFF, whether it is between JMP(004)
and JME(005) and the execution condition for JMP(004) is OFF, or whether it is
reset by an OFF execution condition. “R,” “IL,” and “JMP” are used to indicate
these three times.
The
Words
column provides the number of words required by the instruction in
program memory. With CV-series PCs, instructions can require between one
and eight words in memory. The length of an instruction depends not only on the
instruction, but also on the operands used for the instruction. If an index register
is addressed directly or a data register is used as an operand, the instruction will
require one word less than when specifying a word address for the operand. If a
constant i s designated for an instruction that uses 2-word operands, the instruc-
tion will require one word more than when specifying a word address for the op-
erand.
Table: Instruction Execution Times
Instruction Words Conditions ON execution time (µs) OFF execution time (µs)
CV500* CV1000* CV500* CV1000*
LD 1 CIO 000000 to CIO 051115 for
operand 0.15 0.13 0.15 0.13
2CIO 051200 to CIO 255515 for
operand 0.3
j/i: 0.45
!: 2.25
0.25
j/i: 0.375
!: 2.0
0.3
j/i: 0.75
!: 2.25
0.25
j/i: 0.625
!: 2.0
LD NOT 1 CIO 000000 to CIO 051115 for
operand 0.15 0.13 0.15 0.13
2CIO 051200 to CIO 255515 for
operand 0.3
j/i: 0.45
!: 2.25
0.25
j/i: 0.375
!: 2.0
0.3
j/i: 0.45
!: 2.25
0.25
j/i: 0.375
!: 2.0
AND 1 CIO 000000 to CIO 051115 for
operand 0.15 0.13 0.15 0.13
2CIO 051200 to CIO 255515 for
operand 0.3
j/i: 0.45
!: 2.25
0.25
j/i: 0.375
!: 2.0
0.3
j/i: 0.45
!: 2.25
0.25
j/i: 0.375
!: 2.0
AND NOT 1 CIO 000000 to CIO 051115 for
operand 0.15 0.13 0.15 0.13
2CIO 051200 to CIO 255515 for
operand 0.3
j/i: 0.45
!: 2.25
0.25
j/i: 0.375
!: 2.0
0.3
j/i: 0.45
!: 2.25
0.25
j/i: 0.375
!: 2.0
OR 1 CIO 000000 to CIO 051115 for
operand 0.15 0.13 0.15 0.13
2CIO 051200 to CIO 255515 for
operand 0.3
j/i: 0.45
!: 2.25
0.25
j/i: 0.375
!: 2.0
0.3
j/i: 0.45
!: 2.25
0.25
j/i: 0.375
!: 2.0
*Note: CV500 = CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2; CV1000 = CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2
Instruction Execution Times Section 6-4
473
Instruction OFF execution time (µs)ON execution time (µs)
ConditionsWords
CV1000*CV500*CV1000*CV500*
OR NOT 1 CIO 000000 to CIO 051115 for
operand 0.15 0.13 0.15 0.13
2CIO 051200 to CIO 255515 for
operand 0.3
j/i: 0.45
!: 2.25
0.25
j/i: 0.375
!: 2.0
0.3
j/i: 0.45
!: 2.25
0.25
j/i: 0.375
!: 2.0
AND LD 1 --- 0.15 0.13 0.15 0.13
OR LD 1 --- 0.15 0.13 0.15 0.13
OUT 2 --- 0.45
!: 2.25 0.38
!: 1.75 0.45
!: 2.25 0.38
!: 1.75
OUT NOT 2 --- 0.45
!: 2.25 0.375
!: 1.75 0.45
!: 2.25 0.375
!: 1.75
TIM 3 Constant for SV 1.2 1.0 R or IL: 6.6 R or IL: 5.5
*DM for SV R or IL: 10.2 R or IL: 8.5
CNT 3 Constant for SV 1.2 1.0 R or IL: 1.2 R or IL: 1.0
*DM for SV R: 6.6
IL: 1.2 R: 5.5
IL: 1.0
NOP(000) 1 --- 0.15 0.13 --- ---
END(001) 1 4.5 3.75
IL(002) 2 --- 1.8 1.5 1.2 1.0
ILC(003) 2 1.2 1.0 1.2 1.0
JMP(004) 3 --- 13.2 11.0 1.05 0.88
JME(005) 2 --- 0.3 0.25 0.3 0.25
FAL(006) 4 --- 465 457 1.2 1.0
FAL(006) 00 620 611 1.2 1.0
FALS(007) 4 837 825 1.2 1.0
STEP(008) 3 --- 262 218 245 207
SNXT(009) 3 --- 270 225 1.05 0.875
NOT(010) 1 --- 0.15 0.13 0.15 0.13
KEEP(011) 2 --- 0.45 0.38 0.45 0.38
CNTR(012) 4 Constant for SV 7.2 6.0 R: 9.0
IL: 6.3 R: 7.5
IL: 5.3
*DM for SV 9.6 8.0 R: 10.7
IL: 6.3 R: 8.9
IL: 5.3
DIFU(013) 2 --- 0.75 0.63 0.75 0.63
DIFD(014) 2 --- 0.75 0.63 0.75 0.63
TIMH(015) 3 Constant for SV 1.2 1.0 R or IL: 6.6 R or IL: 5.5
*DM for SV 1.2 1.0 R or IL: 10.2 R or IL: 8.5
SET(016) 2 --- 0.45 0.375 0.45 0.375
RSET(017) 2
UP(018) 2 --- 4.8 4.0 4.8 4.0
DOWN(019) 2
CMP(020) 4 When comparing a constant to a
word 3.9 3.3 1.05 0.88
When comparing two *DM 7.1 5.9
*Note: CV500 = CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2; CV1000 = CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2
Instruction Execution Times Section 6-4
474
Instruction OFF execution time (µs)ON execution time (µs)
ConditionsWords
CV1000*CV500*CV1000*CV500*
!CMP(020) 4 Additional time over CMP(020) for
each input word being compared +5.5 +5.0 1.05 0.88
Additional time over CMP(020) for
each output word being compared +4.4 +4.0
Additional time over CMP(020) for
words other than I/O words +0 +0
CMPL(021) 4 When comparing two words 5.1 4.3 1.2 1.0
When comparing two *DM 8.1 6.8
BCMP(022) 5 Comparing constant to table with
results to a word 20.3 16.9 1.35 1.13
Comparing *DM to table with results
to *DM 24.3 20.3
TCMP(023) 5 When comparing a word to a word
table 17.9 14.9
When comparing a *DM to *DM table 21.9 18.3
MCMP(024) 5 When comparing two words 20.6 17.3
When comparing two *DM 24.2 20.3
EQU(025) 4 Comparing two words 3.8 3.1 1.2 1.0
Comparing two *DM 6.9 5.8
CPS(026) 4 Comparing constants and words 4.2 3.5
Comparing two *DM 7.5 6.25
!CPS(026) 4 Amount added per input word at time
of comparison +5.5 +5.0
Amount added per output word at
time of comparison +4.4 +4.0
Other areas at time of comparison +0 +0
CPSL(027) 4 Comparing constants and words 5.4 4.5
Comparing two *DM 8.25 6.88
CMP(028) 4 Comparing constants and words 3.9 3.3 1.05 0.88
Comparing two *DM 7.1 5.9
!CMP(028) 4 Amount added per input word at time
of comparison +5.5 +5.0
Amount added per output word at
time of comparison +4.4 +4.0
Other areas at time of comparison +0 +0
CMPL(029) 4 Comparing two words 5.1 4.3 1.2 1.0
Comparing two *DM 8.1 6.8
MOV(030) 4 When transferring a constant to a
word 5.1 4.3
When transferring *DM to *DM 6.3 5.3
!MOV(030) Additional time over MOV(020) for
each input word being used +5.5 +5.0
Additional time over MOV(020) for
each output word being used +4.4 +4.0
Additional time over MOV(020) for
words other than I/O words +0 +0
MVN(031) 4 When transferring a constant to a
word 5.3 4.4
When transferring *DM to *DM 6.5 5.4
MOVL(032) 4 When transferring a word to a word 6.5 5.4
When transferring *DM to *DM 7.5 6.3
*Note: CV500 = CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2; CV1000 = CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2
Instruction Execution Times Section 6-4
475
Instruction OFF execution time (µs)ON execution time (µs)
ConditionsWords
CV1000*CV500*CV1000*CV500*
MVNL(033) 4 When transferring a word to a word 6.5 5.4 1.2 1.0
When transferring *DM to *DM 7.5 6.3
XCHG(034) 4 Word → word 7.7 6.4
*DM → *DM 8.3 6.9
XCGL(035) 4 Word → word 10.2 8.5
*DM → *DM 10.8 9.0
MOVR(036) 3 Word → IR 5.0 4.1 1.05 0.88
*DM → IR 5.3 4.4
MOVQ(037) 3 When transferring a word to a word 0.6 0.5 0.45 0.38
When transferring a constant to a
word 0.75 0.63
XFRB(038) 3 When transferring 1 bit from word to
word 15.0 12.5 1.35 1.13
When transferring 255 bits from *DM
to *DM 58.7 48.9
XFER(040) 5 When transferring 1 word 14.7 12.3
When transferring 1000 words by
*DM 1.81 ms 1.51 ms
BSET(041) 5 When setting a constant to one word 13.7 11.4
When setting 1000 DM words using
*DM 1.39 ms 1.16 ms
MOVB(042) 5 When transferring a word to a word 9.8 8.1
When transferring *DM to *DM 13.7 11.4
MOVD(043) 5 When transferring a word data to a
word 8.9 7.4
When transferring *DM to *DM 12.8 10.8
DIST(044) 5 Constant → (word + word) 6.9 5.8
*DM → (*DM + *DM) 9.3 7.8
COLL(045) 5 (word + word) → word 7.5 6.3 1.35 1.13
(*DM + *DM) → *DM 11.3 9.4
BXFR(046) 5 Transferring 1 word from word to
word 19.4 16.1
*DM → *DM, *DM (1000 words)
transfer 1.82 ms 1.52 ms
SETA(047) 5 Setting 1 bit in a word 16.5 13.8
*DM → *DM (1000 bits) set 119 99.5
RSTA(048) 5 Resetting 1 bit in a word 16.7 13.9
*DM → *DM, *DM (1000 bits) reset 120 99.8
SFT(050) 5 With 1 word shift register 16.8 14.0 R: 14.4
IL: 1.2 R: 12.0
IL: 1.0
With 1000 words shift register 1.54 ms 1.28 ms R: 1.38 ms
IL: 1.2 R: 1.15 ms
IL: 1.0
SFTR(051) 5 When shifting 1 word 16.8 13.5 1.35 1.13
When shifting DM 1000 words using
*DM 1.56 ms 1.30 ms
ASFT(052) 5 When shifting 1 word 439 366
When shifting DM 1000 words using
*DM 16.0 ms 13.3 ms
*Note: CV500 = CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2; CV1000 = CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2
Instruction Execution Times Section 6-4
476
Instruction OFF execution time (µs)ON execution time (µs)
ConditionsWords
CV1000*CV500*CV1000*CV500*
WSFT(053) 5 When shifting 1 word 13.8 11.5 1.35 1.13
When shifting 1000 DM words using
*DM 1.40 ms 1.17 ms
NSFL(054) 5 Shifting 1 bit in a word 18.9 15.8
*DM → *DM (15 bits) shift 38.9 32.4
NSFR(055) 5 Shifting 1 bit in a word 18.8 15.6
*DM → *DM (15 bits) shift 38.9 32.4
NASL(056) 4 1-bit word shift 17.0 14.1 1.2 1.0
*DM (16 bits) shift 23.3 19.4
NASR(057) 4 1-bit word shift 17.0 14.1
*DM (16 bits) shift 23.3 19.4
NSLL(058) 4 1-bit word shift 18.0 15.0
*DM (32 bits) shift 42.5 35.4
NSRL(059) 4 1-bit word shift 17.7 14.8
*DM (32 bits) shift 42.2 35.1
ASL(060) 3 When shifting a word to left 6.2 5.1 1.05 0.88
When shifting *DM to left 7.4 6.1
ASR(061) 3 When shifting a word to right 6.3 5.3
When shifting *DM to right 7.5 6.3
ROL(062) 3 When rotating a word to
counterclockwise 6.3 5.3
When rotating *DM to
counterclockwise 7.5 6.3
ROR(063) 3 When rotating a word to clockwise 6.5 5.4
When rotating *DM to clockwise 7.7 6.4
ASLL(064) 3 When shifting two words to left 7.5 6.3
When shifting two *DM to left 8.7 7.3
ASRL(065) 3 When shifting two words to right 7.5 6.3
When shifting two *DM to right 8.7 7.3
ROLL(066) 3 When rotating two words to
counterclockwise 7.7 6.4
When rotating two *DM to
counterclockwise 8.9 7.4
RORL(067) 3 When rotating two words to clockwise 7.7 6.4
When rotating two *DM to clockwise 8.9 7.4
SLD(068) 4 When shifting 1 word 13.7 11.4 1.2 1.0
When shifting 1000 DM words using
*DM 181 151
SRD(069) 4 When shifting 1 word 13.7 11.4
When shifting 1000 DM words using
*DM 181 151
ADD(070) 5 Constant + word → word 9.0 7.5 1.35 1.13
*DM + *DM → *DM 10.8 9.0
SUB(071) 5 Constant – word → word 8.9 7.4
*DM – *DM → *DM 10.7 8.9
MUL(072) 5 Constant x word → word 22.1 18.4
*DM x *DM → word 23.7 19.8
DIV(073) 5 Word ÷ constant → word 21.0 17.5
*Note: CV500 = CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2; CV1000 = CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2
Instruction Execution Times Section 6-4
477
Instruction OFF execution time (µs)ON execution time (µs)
ConditionsWords
CV1000*CV500*CV1000*CV500*
*DM ÷ *DM → *DM 25.4 21.1
ADDL(074) 5 Constant + word → word 21.8 18.0 1.35 1.13
*DM + *DM → *DM 25.8 21.5
SUBL(075) 5 Constant – word → word 21.0 17.5
*DM – *DM → *DM 25.2 21.0
MULL(076) 5 Constant x word → word 64.5 53.8
*DM x *DM → word 68.7 57.3
DIVL(077) 5 Word ÷ constant → word 74.6 62.1
*DM ÷ *DM → *DM 78.6 65.5
STC(078) 2 --- 1.65 1.38 0.9 0.75
CLC(079) 2 --- 1.65 1.38
ADB(080) 5 Constant + word → word 7.2 6.0 1.35 1.13
*DM + *DM → *DM 11.6 9.6
SBB(081) 5 Constant – word → word 7.4 6.1
*DM – *DM → *DM 11.7 9.8
MLB(082) 5 Constant x word → word 15.8 13.1
*DM x *DM → word 20.1 16.8
DVB(083) 5 Word ÷ constant → word 19.1 15.9
*DM ÷ *DM → *DM 23.4 19.5
ADBL(084) 5 Constant + word → word 9.2 7.6
*DM + *DM → *DM 13.4 11.1
SBBL(085) 5 Constant – word → word 9.3 7.8
*DM – *DM → *DM 13.5 11.3
MLBL(086) 5 Constant x word → word 46.1 38.4
*DM x *DM → word 50.3 41.9
DVBL(087) 5 Word ÷ constant → word 57.3 47.8
*DM ÷ *DM → *DM 61.5 51.3
INC(090) 3 Word increment 6.3 5.3 1.05 0.88
*DM increment 7.5 6.3
DEC(091) 3 Word decrement 6.5 5.4
*DM decrement 7.7 6.4
INCB(092) 3 Word increment 5.6 4.6
*DM increment 6.8 5.6
DECB(093) 3 Word decrement 5.9 4.9
*DM decrement 7.1 5.9
INCL(094) 3 Word increment 15.5 12.9
*DM increment 16.7 13.9
DECL(095) 3 Word decrement 15.3 12.8 1.05 0.875
*DM decrement 16.5 13.8
INBL(096) 3 Word increment 6.8 5.6
*DM increment 8.0 6.6
DCBL(097) 3 Word decrement 6.9 5.8
*DM decrement 8.0 6.6
BIN(100) 4 When converting a word to a word 6.2 5.1 1.2 1.0
When converting *DM to *DM 8.6 7.1
BCD(101) 4 When converting a word to a word 6.0 5.0
*Note: CV500 = CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2; CV1000 = CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2
Instruction Execution Times Section 6-4
478
Instruction OFF execution time (µs)ON execution time (µs)
ConditionsWords
CV1000*CV500*CV1000*CV500*
When converting *DM to *DM 8.4 7.0
BINL(102) 4 When converting a word to a word 10.2 8.5 1.2 1.0
When converting *DM to *DM 12.6 10.5
BCDL(103) 4 When converting a word to a word 11.6 9.6
When converting *DM to *DM 14.0 11.6
NEG(104) 4 When converting a word to a word 5.7 4.8
When converting *DM to *DM 8.3 6.9
NEGL(105) 4 When converting a word to a word 7.1 5.9
When converting *DM to *DM 9.5 7.9
SIGN(106) 4 When expanding a word to a word 6.6 5.5
When expanding *DM to *DM 9.0 7.5
MLPX(110) 5 When decoding a word to a word 7.2 6.0 1.35 1.13
When decoding *DM to *DM 15.6 13.0
DMPX111) 5 When encoding a word to a word 9.8 8.1
When encoding *DM to *DM 16.2 13.5
SDEC(112) 5 When decoding a word to a word 317 264
When decoding *DM to *DM 424 353
ASC(113) 5 Word → word 324 270
*DM → *DM 431 359
BCNT(114) 5 When counting 1 word 412 344
When counting 1000 words with *DM 20.5 ms 17.1 ms
LINE(115) 5 When converting word to word using
constant specification 14.0 11.6
When converting *DM to *DM with
DM specification 18.0 15.0
COLM(116) 5 When converting word to word using
constant specification 25.1 20.9
When converting *DM to *DM with
DM specification 29.4 24.5
HEX(117) 5 Converting 1 digit, word → word 20.6 17.1
Converting 4 digits, *DM → *DM 48.6 40.5
TTIM(120) 4 Constant for SV 11.1 9.3 R: 9.8
IL: 3.0 R: 8.1
IL: 2.5
*DM for SV 12.8 10.6 R: 11.4
IL: 3.0 R: 9.5
IL: 2.5
TIML(121) 5 --- 1.71 ms 1.42 ms R or IL: 1.15 R or IL: 0.96
MTIM(122) 5 --- 2.25 ms 1.88 ms 1.35 1.113
TCNT(123) 4 Constant for execution times 11.4 9.5 1.2 1.0
*DM for execution times 13.1 10.9
TSR(124) 4 When reading to a word 6.3 5.3
When reading to *DM 9.9 8.3
TSW(125) 4 When writing to a word 5.9 4.9
When writing to *DM 9.6 8.0
ANDW(130) 5 Constant AND word → word 6.8 5.6 1.35 1.13
*DM AND *DM → *DM 11.0 9.1
ORW(131) 5 Constant OR word → word 6.8 5.6
*DM OR *DM → *DM 11.1 9.3
*Note: CV500 = CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2; CV1000 = CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2
Instruction Execution Times Section 6-4
479
Instruction OFF execution time (µs)ON execution time (µs)
ConditionsWords
CV1000*CV500*CV1000*CV500*
XORW(132) 5 Constant XOR word → word 6.8 5.6
*DM XOR *DM → *DM 11.1 9.3
XNRW(133) 5 Constant XNOR word → word 6.8 5.6 1.35 1.13
*DM XNOR *DM → *DM 11.1 9.3
ANDL(134) 5 Constant AND word → word 8.7 9.3
*DM AND *DM → *DM 12.9 10.8
ORWL(135) 5 Constant OR word → word 8.7 7.3
*DM OR *DM → *DM 12.9 10.8
XORL(136) 5 Constant XOR word → word 8.7 7.3
*DM XOR *DM → *DM 12.9 10.8
XNRL(137) 5 Constant XNOR word → word 8.7 7.3
*DM XNOR *DM → *DM 12.9 10.8
COM(138) 3 When inverting a word 5.6 4.6 1.05 0.88
When inverting *DM 6.8 5.6
COML(139) 3 When inverting a word 6.6 5.5
When inverting *DM 7.8 6.5
ROOT(140) 4 --- 777 647 1.2 1.0
FDIV(141) 5 Word ÷ word → word (equals 0) 366 305 1.35 1.13
Word ÷ word → word (not 0) 1.72 ms 1.43 ms
*DM ÷ *DM → *DM 1.73 ms 1.45 ms
APR(142) 5 When specifying sine or cosine 405 338
When specifying a word with
256-word table 2.82 ms 2.35 ms
SEC(143) 4 When converting a word to a word 411 342 1.2 1.0
When converting *DM to *DM 573 477
HMS(144) 4 --- 888 740
CADD(145) 5 --- 1.13 ms 0.94 ms 1.35 1.13
CSUB(146) 5 --- 1.13 ms 0.94 ms
SBN(150) 2 --- --- --- --- ---
SBS(151) 3 --- 3.8 3.1 1.05 0.88
RET(152) 2 --- 13.8 11.5 8.6 7.1
MSKS(153) 4 When setting a constant 5.0 4.1 1.2 1.0
When setting *DM 6.8 5.6
CLI(154) 4 When setting a constant 5.4 4.5
When setting *DM 6.8 5.6
MSKR(155) 4 When setting a word 7.4 6.1
When setting *DM 8.6 7.1
MCRO(156) 5 Parameter word designation 35.4 29.5 1.35 1.13
()
Parameter *DM designation 37.7 31.4
SSET(160) 4 When setting a 3-word stack 15.2 12.6 1.2 1.0
When setting a 999-word stack 773 644
PUSH(161) 4 When designating stack through word 3.9 3.3
When designating stack through *DM 5.7 4.8
LIFO(162) 4 When designating stack through word 4.1 3.4
When designating stack through *DM 5.3 4.4
FIFO(163) 4 When using 3-word stack 14.7 12.3
When using 999-word stack 1.25 ms 1.04 ms
*Note: CV500 = CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2; CV1000 = CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2
Instruction Execution Times Section 6-4
480
Instruction OFF execution time (µs)ON execution time (µs)
ConditionsWords
CV1000*CV500*CV1000*CV500*
SRCH(164) 5 When searching 1 word 347 289 1.35 1.13
When searching 1000 words for *DM 11.4 ms 9.54 ms
MAX(165) 5 When searching 1 word 464 386 1.35 1.13
When searching 1000 words for *DM 68.2 ms 56.9 ms
MIN(166) 5 When searching 1 word 465 388
When searching 1000 words for *DM 68.2 ms 57.1 ms
SUM(167) 5 When adding 1 word 758 632
When adding 1000 words via *DM 173 ms 144 ms
TRSM(170) 2 When sampling 1 point + 0 word 21.6 18.0
When sampling 12 points + 3 words 50.4 42.0
EMBC(171) 3 When setting a constant 3.6 3.0 1.05 0.88
When setting *DM 5.4 4.5
CCL(172) 2 --- 2.6 2.1 0.9 0.75
CCS(173) 2 --- 2.0 1.6
MARK(174) 3 When sampling 0 words 17.7 14.8 2.7 2.25
When sampling 2 words 24.8 20.6
REGL(175) 3 When setting a word 5.9 4.9 1.05 0.88
When setting *DM 7.1 5.9
REGS(176) 3 When setting a word 9.8 8.1
When setting *DM 11.0 9.1
FPD(177) 5 Without message output: execution 930 775 263 219
()
Without message output: first time 971 809
With message output: execution 1.00 ms 835
With message output: first time 1.05 ms 874
WDT(178) 3 --- 8.61 7.18 1.05 0.88
DATE(179) 3 Word designation 310 259
()
*DM designation 315 262
FILR(180) 5 --- 415 406 1.35 1.13
FILW(181) 5 --- 423 414
FILP(182) 5 When reading 10 steps 99.2 ms 99.2 ms 1.05 0.88
When reading 1000 steps 519 ms 519 ms
FLSP(183) 4 --- 29.4 ms 29.4 ms 1.2 1.0
IORF(184) 4 When refreshing 1 word 27.6 23.6 1.2 1.0
When refreshing 32 words 325 279
IOSP(187) 2 --- 230 228 0.9 0.75
IORS(188) 2 --- 2.4 2.0 IL: 0.9 IL: 0.75
IODP(189) 4 --- 369 308 1.2 1.0
READ(190) 5 When reading 1 word 568 473 1.35 1.13
When reading 255 words 4.64 ms 3.87 ms
WRIT(191) 5 When writing 1 word 661 551
When writing 255 words 4.9 ms 4.1 ms
SEND(192) 5 --- 244 235
RECV(193) 5 --- 251 241
CMND(194) 5 --- 240 230
MSG(195) 4 When specifying constant and a word 6.2 5.1 1.2 1.0
When specifying two *DM 9.2 7.6
TOUT(202) 2 --- 4.7 3.9 4.7 3.9
*Note: CV500 = CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2; CV1000 = CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2
Instruction Execution Times Section 6-4
481
Instruction OFF execution time (µs)ON execution time (µs)
ConditionsWords
CV1000*CV500*CV1000*CV500*
SA(210) 4 When activating 1 step 39.5 32.9 1.2 1.0
When activating a 15-step subchart 48.2 40.1
SP(211) 3 When pausing 1 step 25.8 21.5 1.05 0.88
When pausing a 15-step subchart 64.8 54.0
SR(212) 3 When releasing 1 step 26.4 22.0
When releasing a 15-step subchart 65.4 54.5
SF(213) 3 When stopping 1 step 25.7 21.4
When stopping a 15-step subchart 62.4 52.0
SE(214) 3 When inactivating 1 step 609 507
When inactivating a 15-step subchart 810 675
SOFF(215) 3 When resetting 1 step 621 518
When resetting a 15-step subchart 2.2 ms 1.9 ms
CJP(221) 3 Jumping to designated word 10.5 8.75 2.85 2.38
Jumping to designated *DM 11.9 9.88
CJPN(222) 3 Jumping to designated word 10.5 8.75 2.70 2.25
Jumping to designated *DM 11.9 9.88
CNR(236) 4 When resetting 1 word 20.3 16.9 1.2 1.0
When resetting 1000 words via *DM 623 519
BPRG(250) 3 --- 5.85 4.88 3.00 2.50
RLNC(260) 3 Rotating word 11.6 9.63 1.05 0.88
Rotating *DM 14.1 11.8
RRNC(261) 3 Rotating word 11.7 9.75
Rotating *DM 14.3 11.9
RLNL(262) 3 Rotating word 12.9 10.8
Rotating *DM 15.5 12.9
RLNL(263) 3 Rotating word 12.9 10.8
Rotating *DM 15.5 12.9
PID(270) 5 When not sampling 22.7 18.9 5.40 4.50
When sampling 368 306
When executing first time 807 673
LMT(271) 5 Input, output word designation 17.3 14.3 1.35 1.13
Input, output *DM designation 25.1 20.9
BAND(272) 5 Input, output word designation 17.3 14.4
Input, output *DM designation 25.2 21.0
ZONE(273) 5 Input, output word designation 17.6 14.6
Input, output *DM designation 25.5 21.3
ROTB(274) 3 Word → word 41.6 34.6 1.20 1.00
*DM → *DM 46.8 39.0
BINS(275) 5 Word → word 16.1 13.4 1.35 1.13
*DM → *DM 25.1 20.9
BCDS(276) 5 Word → word 16.2 13.5
*DM → *DM 24.3 20.3
BISL(277) 5 Word → word 21.3 17.8
*DM → *DM 30.5 25.4
BDSL(278) 5 Word → word 23.3 19.4
*DM → *DM 31.4 26.1
RD2(280) 5 Reading 1 word to word 20.3 16.9 5.25 4.38
*Note: CV500 = CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2; CV1000 = CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2
Instruction Execution Times Section 6-4
482
Instruction OFF execution time (µs)ON execution time (µs)
ConditionsWords
CV1000*CV500*CV1000*CV500*
Reading 255 words *DM to *DM 26.0 21.6
WR2(281) 5 Writing 1 word to word 21.3 17.8 5.40 4.50
Writing 255 words *DM to *DM 27.0 22.5
=(300) 5 Comparing constant and word 14.7 12.3 6.15 5.13
Comparing *DM and *DM 20.1 16.8
=L(301) 5 Comparing constant and word 15.6 13.0
Comparing *DM and *DM 21.0 17.5
=S(302) 5 Comparing constant and word 15.0 12.5
Comparing *DM and *DM 20.4 17.0
=SL(303) 5 Comparing constant and word 15.9 13.3
Comparing *DM and *DM 21.3 17.8
<>(305) 5 Comparing constant and word 14.7 12.3
Comparing *DM and *DM 20.1 16.8
<>L(306) 5 Comparing constant and word 15.6 13.0
Comparing *DM and *DM 21.0 17.5
<>S(307) 5 Comparing constant and word 15.0 12.5
Comparing *DM and *DM 20.4 17.0
<>SL(308) 5 Comparing constant and word 15.9 13.3
Comparing *DM and *DM 21.3 17.8
<(310) 5 Comparing constant and word 14.7 12.3
Comparing *DM and *DM 20.1 16.8
<L(311) 5 Comparing constant and word 15.6 13.0
Comparing *DM and *DM 21.0 17.5
<S(312) 5 Comparing constant and word 15.0 12.5
Comparing *DM and *DM 20.4 17.0
<SL(313) 5 Comparing constant and word 15.9 13.3
Comparing *DM and *DM 21.3 17.8
<=(315) 5 Comparing constant and word 14.7 12.3
Comparing *DM and *DM 20.1 16.8
<=L(316) 5 Comparing constant and word 15.6 13.0
Comparing *DM and *DM 21.0 17.5
<=S(317) 5 Comparing constant and word 15.0 12.5
Comparing *DM and *DM 20.4 17.0
<=SL(318) 5 Comparing constant and word 15.9 13.3
Comparing *DM and *DM 21.3 17.8
>(320) 5 Comparing constant and word 14.7 12.3
Comparing *DM and *DM 20.1 16.8
>L(321) 5 Comparing constant and word 15.6 13.0
Comparing *DM and *DM 21.0 17.5
>S(322) 5 Comparing constant and word 15.0 12.5
Comparing *DM and *DM 20.4 17.0
>SL(323) 5 Comparing constant and word 15.9 13.3
Comparing *DM and *DM 21.3 17.8
>=(325) 5 Comparing constant and word 14.7 12.3
Comparing *DM and *DM 20.1 16.8
>=(326) 5 Comparing constant and word 15.6 13.0
Comparing *DM and *DM 21.0 17.5
*Note: CV500 = CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2; CV1000 = CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2
Instruction Execution Times Section 6-4
483
Instruction OFF execution time (µs)ON execution time (µs)
ConditionsWords
CV1000*CV500*CV1000*CV500*
>=S(327) 5 Comparing constant and word 15.0 12.5 6.15 5.13
Comparing *DM and *DM 20.4 17.0
>=SL(328) 5 Comparing constant and word 15.9 13.3
Comparing *DM and *DM 21.3 17.8
TST(350) 5 Designating constant for word bit 14.6 12.1
Designating constant for *DM bit 20.4 17.0
TSTN(351) 5 Designating constant for word bit 14.4 12.0
Designating constant for *DM bit 20.3 16.9
+(400) 5 Constant + word → word 16.4 13.6 1.35 1.13
*DM + *DM → *DM 24.0 20.0
+L(401) 5 Constant + word → word 18.5 15.4
*DM + *DM → *DM 26.4 22.0
+C(402) 5 Constant + word → word 8.40 7.00
*DM + *DM → *DM 12.6 10.5
+CL(403) 5 Constant + word → word 10.4 8.63
*DM + *DM → *DM 14.9 12.4
+B(404) 5 Constant + word → word 16.8 14.0
*DM + *DM → *DM 25.7 21.4
+BL(405) 5 Constant + word → word 29.3 24.4
*DM + *DM → *DM 38.0 31.6
+BC(406) 5 Constant + word → word 9.00 7.50
*DM + *DM → *DM 13.8 11.5
+BCL(407) 5 Constant + word → word 21.5 17.9
*DM + *DM → *DM 26.1 21.8
–(410) 5 Constant – word → word 16.7 13.9
*DM – *DM → *DM 24.6 20.5
–L(411) 5 Constant – word → word 18.3 15.3
*DM – *DM → *DM 26.3 21.9
–C(412) 5 Constant – word → word 8.25 6.88
*DM – *DM → *DM 13.4 11.1
–CL(413) 5 Constant – word → word 10.4 8.63
*DM – *DM → *DM 14.6 12.1
–B(414) 5 Constant – word → word 16.5 13.8
*DM – *DM → *DM 25.4 21.1
–BL(415) 5 Constant – word → word 28.7 23.9
*DM – *DM → *DM 36.9 30.8
–BC(416) 5 Constant – word → word 8.85 7.38
*DM – *DM → *DM 13.7 11.4
–BCL(417) 5 Constant – word → word 21.0 17.5
*DM – *DM → *DM 25.2 21.0
*(420) 5Constant x word → word 24.9 20.8
*DM x *DM → *DM 34.4 28.6
*L(421) 5Constant x word → word 55.4 46.1
*DM x *DM → *DM 66.6 55.5
*U(422) 5Constant x word → word 16.2 13.5
*DM x *DM → *DM 20.9 17.4
*Note: CV500 = CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2; CV1000 = CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2
Instruction Execution Times Section 6-4
484
Instruction OFF execution time (µs)ON execution time (µs)
ConditionsWords
CV1000*CV500*CV1000*CV500*
*UL(423) 5Constant x word → word 46.8 39.0 1.35 1.13
*DM x *DM → *DM 54.0 45.0
*B(424) 5Constant x word → word 22.1 18.4
*DM x *DM → *DM 27.0 22.5
*BL(425) 5Constant x word → word 64.2 53.5
*DM x *DM → *DM 72.2 60.1
/(430) 5 Constant word → word 27.8 23.1
*DM *DM → *DM 35.9 29.9
/L(431) 5 Constant word → word 69.6 58.0
*DM *DM → *DM 77.6 64.6
/U(432) 5 Constant word → word 18.9 15.8
*DM *DM → *DM 22.5 18.8
/UL(433) 5 Constant word → word 59.7 49.8
*DM *DM → *DM 63.6 53.0
/B(434) 5 Constant word → word 20.7 17.3
*DM *DM → *DM 24.9 20.8
/BL(435) 5 Constant word → word 75.2 62.6
*DM *DM → *DM 79.1 65.9
FIX(450) 5 Word → word 335 279 1.2 1.0
*DM → *DM 336 280
FIXL(451) 5 Word → word 413 344
*DM → *DM 413 344
FLT(452) 4 Word → word 327 272
*DM → *DM 332 277
FLTL(453) 5 Word → word 402 335
*DM → *DM 408 340
+F(454) 5 Constant + word → word 421 351 1.35 1.13
*DM + *DM → *DM 429 358
–F(455) 5 Constant – word → word 449 374
*DM – *DM → *DM 457 381
*F(456) 5Constant x word → word 436 363
*DM x *DM → *DM 444 370
/F(457) 5 Constant word → word 481 401
*DM *DM → *DM 490 408
RAD(458) 5 Word → word 438 365 1.2 1.0
DEG(459) 5 Word → word 438 365
SIN(460) 5 Word → word 2.80 ms 2.34 ms
COS(461) 5 Word → word 2.68 ms 2.23 ms
TAN(462) 5 Word → word 4.31 ms 3.59 ms
ASIN(463) 5 Word → word 4.51 ms 3.76 ms
ACOS(464) 5 Word → word 4.61 ms 3.85 ms
ATAN(465) 5 Word → word 2.18 ms 1.82 ms
SQRT(466) 5 Word → word 890 742
EXP(467) 5 Word → word 4.47 ms 3.72 ms
LOG(468) 5 Word → word 2.25 ms 1.87 ms
BEND<001> 2 --- 4.65 3.88 2.85 2.38
*Note: CV500 = CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2; CV1000 = CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2
Instruction Execution Times Section 6-4
485
Instruction OFF execution time (µs)ON execution time (µs)
ConditionsWords
CV1000*CV500*CV1000*CV500*
IF<002> 3 Without operand 4.20 3.50 2.70 2.25
With operand 8.10 6.75
ELSE<003> 2 --- 4.35 3.63
IEND<004> 2 --- 4.50 3.75
WAIT<005> 3 Without operand 4.35 3.63
With operand 8.70 7.25
EXIT<006> 3 Without operand 4.95 4.13
With operand 8.85 7.38
LOOP<009> 2 --- 4.20 3.50 2.55 2.13
LEND<010> 3 Without operand 4.05 3.38 2.70 2.25
With operand 7.95 6.63
BPPS<011> 3 --- 4.95 4.13 3.00 2.50
BPRS<012> 3 --- 4.05 3.38
TIMW<013> 4 Initial startup 24.6 20.5 3.45 2.88
Normal execution 20.0 16.6
CNTW<014> 5Initial startup 21.5 17.9 3.30 2.75
Normal execution 21.2 17.6
TMHW<015> 4Initial startup 24.8 20.6 3.45 2.88
Normal execution 20.0 16.6
*Note: CV500 = CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2; CV1000 = CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2
Instruction Execution Times Section 6-4
486
6-5 I/O Response T ime
The I/O response time is the time it takes for the PC to output a control signal
after i t has received an input signal. The time it takes to respond depends on the
cycle time and when the CPU receives the input signal relative to the input re-
fresh period.
The minimum and maximum I/O response time calculations described below
are for where bit 000000 is the input bit that receives the signal and bit 000200 is
the output bit corresponding to the desired output point.
0000
00 00020
00
6-5-1 I/O Units Only
Here, we’ll compute the minimum and maximum I/O response times for a
CV1000 set for cyclic refreshing. The PC controls only I/O Units, mounted on t he
CPU Rack, Expansion CPU Rack, or Expansion I/O Rack. The calculation is
identical for asynchronous and synchronous operation.
The data in the following table is used to produce the minimum and maximum
cycle times shown calculated below.
Input ON delay 1.5 ms
Cycle time 20 ms
Output ON delay 15 ms
The PC responds most quickly when it receives an input signal just prior to the
input refresh period in the cycle. Once the input bit corresponding to the signal
has been turned ON, the program will have to be executed once to turn ON the
output bit for the desired output signal and then the output refresh operation re-
freshes the output bit. The I/O response time in this case is thus found by adding
the input ON delay time, the cycle time, and the output ON delay time. This situa-
tion is illustrated below.
Cycle time
Input
signal
Output
signal
Cycle
Cycle time
I/O refresh
Overseeing
I/O response time
CPU reads
input signal
Output ON delay
Input ON delay
CPU writes
output signal
Program execution Program execution
Minimum I/O response time = input ON delay + cycle time + output ON delay
Minimum I/O response time = 1.5 + 20 +15 = 36.5 ms
Minimum I/O Response
Time
I/O Response Time Section 6-5
487
The PC takes longest to respond when it receives the input signal just after the
input refresh phase of the cycle. In this case the CPU does not recognize the
input signal until the end of the next cycle. The maximum response time is thus
one cycle longer than the minimum I/O response time.
Cycle time
Input
signal
Output
signal
Cycle
Cycle time
I/O refresh
Overseeing
I/O response time
CPU reads
input signal
Output ON delay
Input ON delay
CPU writes
output signal
Program execution Program execution
Maximum I/O response time =
input ON delay + (cycle time x 2) + output ON delay
Maximum I/O response time = 1.5 + (20 x 2) +15 = 56.5 ms
6-5-2 Asynchronous Operation with a SYSMAC BUS System
Here, we’ll compute the minimum and maximum I/O response times for a
CV1000 that is set for asynchronous operation and controls a SYSMAC BUS
System with a single Master. Both the input and output are on I/O Units con-
nected to Slave Racks. In asynchronous operation, SYSMAC BUS refreshing
occurs every 5×n ms, where n is the number of Masters mounted, and can occur
at any point of the instruction execution cycle. In this case only one Master is
involved, so refreshing occurs every 5 ms.
The transmission time for a Master is the sum total of the transmission times for
all Slaves connected to it. The transmission time for Slave Racks is 1.4 + (0.2×
a
)
ms, where a is the number of I/O words on the Slave. The transmission time for
I/O Terminals is 2×b ms, where b is the number of I/O words on the I/O Terminals.
The data in the following table is used to produce the minimum and maximum
cycle times shown calculated below.
Input ON delay 1.5 ms
Cycle time 20 ms
Output ON delay 15 ms
Slave Rack transmission time 1.4 + (0.2×4) = 2.2 ms
I/O Terminal transmission time 2×3 = 6 ms
Master transmission time (TRM)2.2 ms + 6 ms = 8.2 ms
Maximum I/O Response
Time
I/O Response Time Section 6-5
488
The PC responds most quickly when the instruction that uses the input signal is
executed between two SYSMAC BUS refreshes. This situation is illustrated be-
low.
Input signal
Output signal
Cycle
Cycle time
I/O refresh
I/O response time
Output ON delay
Input ON delay
Program execution
Buffer in Master
Transmission time
5 ms
Minimum I/O response time = Input ON delay +
Refreshing interval (5 ms × n)+ Master transmission time
+ Output ON delay
Where, n = Number of SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Units
Minimum I/O response time = 1.5 + 5 + 8.2 +15 = 29.7 ms
The PC takes longest to respond when the instruction that uses the input signal
is executed just before SYSMAC BUS refreshing, so the instruction won’t be
executed with the new input bit status until the next cycle. This situation is illus-
trated below.
Input signal
Output signal
Cycle
Cycle time
I/O refresh
I/O response time
Output ON delay
Input ON delay
Program
Buffer in Master
Transmission time
5 ms
Program
TRM
Maximum I/O response time = Input ON delay + (Cycle time + 10 ms × n) +
+ Master transmission time × 2 + Slave transmission time + Output ON delay
Where, n = Number of SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Units
Master transmission time = Total refresh time for all Slaves controlled =
Sum of all Slave transmission times
Slave transmission time = 1.4 + (0.2 ms × Number of Slave I/O words)
Minimum I/O Response
Time
Maximum I/O Response
Time
I/O Response Time Section 6-5
489
Maximum I/O response time = 1.5 + (20 + 10) + (8.2 ×2) + 2.2 + 15 = 65.1 ms
6-5-3 Synchronous Operation with a SYSMAC BUS System
Here, we’ll compute the minimum and maximum I/O response times for a
CV1000 that is set for synchronous operation and controls a SYSMAC BUS Sys-
tem. Both the input and output are on I/O Units connected to Slave Racks. In
synchronous operation, SYSMAC BUS refreshing is carried out just after I/O re-
freshing as one phase of a single PC cycle.
The transmission time for a Master is the sum total of the transmission times for
all Slaves connected to it. The transmission time for Slave Racks is 1.4 + (0.2×
a
)
ms, where
a
is the number of I/O words on the Slave. The transmission time for
I/O Terminals is 2×
b
ms, where
b
is the number of I/O words on the I/O Terminals.
The data in the following table is used to produce the minimum and maximum
cycle times shown calculated below.
Input ON delay 1.5 ms
Cycle time 20 ms
Output ON delay 15 ms
Slave Rack transmission time 1.4 + (0.2×4) = 2.2 ms
I/O Terminal transmission time 2×3 = 6 ms
Master transmission time (TRM)2.2 ms + 6 ms = 8.2 ms
The PC responds most quickly when the Master receives the input signal just
prior to I/O refreshing. This situation is illustrated below.
Input signal
Output signal
Cycle
Cycle time
I/O refresh
I/O response time
Output ON delay
Input ON delay
Program execution
Buffer in Master
Transmission time
Peripheral servicing
Minimum I/O response time = input ON delay + cycle time
+ Slave transmission time x 2 + output ON delay
Minimum I/O response time = 1.5 + 20 + 2.2×2 +15 = 40.9 ms
Minimum I/O Response
Time
I/O Response Time Section 6-5
490
The PC takes longest to respond when the Master receives the input signal just
after I/O refreshing. This situation is illustrated below.
Input signal
Output signal
Cycle
Cycle time
I/O refresh
I/O response time
Output ON delay
Input ON delay
Buffer in Master
Transmission time
TRM
AB AB AB AB
A: Program execution
B: Peripheral servicing
Maximum I/O response time = input ON delay + cycle time x 2
+ Master transmission time x 2 + Slave transmission time x 2
+ output ON delay
Maximum I/O response time = 1.5 + (20×2) +(8.2 ×2) +(2.2 ×2) +15 = 77.3 ms
6-5-4 Asynchronous Operation with a SYSMAC BUS/2 System
Here, we’ll compute the minimum and maximum I/O response times for a
CV1000 that is set for asynchronous operation and controls a SYSMAC BUS/2
System. Both the input and output are on I/O Units connected to Slave Racks. I n
asynchronous operation, SYSMAC BUS/2 refreshing occurs at the end of the
SYSMAC BUS/2 communications cycle.
This calculation only applies when the SYSMAC BUS/2 Master is the only CPU
Bus Unit connected to the CPU. If other CPU Bus Units are connected, add the
following delay to the maximum I/O response time calculated later in this sec-
tion: (other Unit’s refreshing time +1.5 ms)×(number of CPU Bus Units con-
nected)
If a higher priority peripheral process such as a SEND(192), RECV(193), or
FAL(006) instruction occurs, it will be processed before the SYSMAC BUS/2
servicing, increasing the I/O response time.
Maximum I/O Response
Time
I/O Response Time Section 6-5
491
The remote refresh time is 2.0 + (0.2×
a
) ms, where
a
is the number of words to
refresh. The communications cycle time is 5 ms or the sum total of the commu-
nications times of Slaves connected to the Master. The communications cycle
time can also be set in the SYSMAC BUS/2 settings in the PC Setup, refer to the
SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O System Manual
for details. The following table lists
the communications times of the various Slaves.
Slave Transmission type Communications time
Group 1 Wired 0.16 ms
Optical 0.32 ms
Group 2 Wired 0.31 ms
Optical 0.47 ms
58M Wired 1.25 ms
Optical 1.89 ms
Group 3 54MH Wired 2.5 ms
Optical 4.5 ms
122M Wired 2.5 ms
Optical 4.5 ms
The data in the following table is used to produce the minimum and maximum
cycle times shown calculated below.
Input ON delay 1.5 ms
Cycle time 20 ms
Output ON delay 15 ms
Communications cycle time 5 ms (one group 3, 58M Slave)
Remote refresh time Approx. 2 ms
The PC responds most quickly when the Master receives the input signal just
prior t o SYSMAC BUS/2 refreshing and the relevant instruction is executed with-
in the communications cycle time. This situation is illustrated below.
Input signal
Output signal
Cycle
Cycle time
I/O refresh
I/O response time
Output ON delay
Input ON delay
Program
execution
Buffer in Master
Communications
cycle time
Minimum I/O response time = input ON delay
+ communications cycle time ×6 + remote refresh time
+ output ON delay
Minimum I/O response time = 1.5 + (5×6) + 2 +15 = 48.5 ms
Minimum I/O Response
Time
I/O Response Time Section 6-5
492
The PC takes longest to respond when the relevant instruction is executed just
prior to SYSMAC BUS/2 refreshing. In this case the CPU does not execute the
instruction with the new input bit status until the next cycle. This situation is illus-
trated below.
Program
execution
Input signal
Output signal
Cycle
Cycle time
I/O refresh
I/O response time
Output ON delay
Input ON delay
Buffer in Master
Communications
cycle time
Program
execution
Maximum I/O response time = input ON delay
+ communications cycle time ×8 + cycle time + remote refresh time
+ 15 ms + output ON delay
Maximum I/O response time = 1.5 + (5×8) + 20 +2 + 15 + 15 = 93.5 ms
6-5-5 Synchronous Operation with a SYSMAC BUS/2 System
Here, we’ll compute the minimum and maximum I/O response times for a
CV1000 that is set for synchronous operation and controls a SYSMAC BUS/2
System. Both the input and output are on Units connected to Slave Racks. The
PC receives data from the Master once each cycle. The Master waits to transfer
to the PC after refreshing.
The data in the following table is used to produce the minimum and maximum
cycle times shown calculated below.
Input ON delay 1.5 ms
Cycle time 20 ms
Output ON delay 15 ms
Communications cycle time 5 ms (one group 3, 58M Slave)
Maximum I/O Response
Time
I/O Response Time Section 6-5
493
The PC responds most quickly when it receives an input signal just prior to SYS-
MAC BUS/2 refreshing.
Input signal
Output signal
Cycle
Cycle time
I/O refresh
I/O response time
Output ON delay
Input ON delay
Buffer in Master
AB A: Program execution
B: Peripheral servicing
AB AB
Minimum I/O response time = input ON delay
+ communications cycle time ×5+ cycle time x 2
+ output ON delay
Minimum I/O response time = 1.5 + (5×5) + (20×2) +15 = 81.5 ms
The PC takes longest to respond when it receives the input signal just after SYS-
MAC BUS/2 refreshing. In this case the CPU does not recognize the input signal
until the next cycle. This situation is illustrated below.
Input signal
Output signal
Cycle
Cycle time
I/O refresh
I/O response time
Output ON delay
Input ON delay
Buffer in Master
AB A: Program execution
B: Peripheral servicing
AB AB A
Maximum I/O response time = input ON delay
+ communications cycle time ×7 + cycle time ×3
+ 10 ms + output ON delay
Maximum I/O response time = 1.5 + (5×7) + (20×3) +10 +15 = 121.5 ms
Minimum I/O Response
Time
Maximum I/O Response
Time
I/O Response Time Section 6-5
495
SECTION 7
PC Setup
The tables in this section list the parameters in the PC Setup, provide examples of normal application, and provide the default
values. The PC Setup can be changed from the CVSS/SSS. Refer to CVSS/SSS Operation Manuals for details changing set-
tings. The use of each parameter in the PC Setup is described where relevant in this manual and in other CV-series manuals.
7-1 PC Setup Overview 496. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 PC Setup Details 497. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 PC Setup Default Settings 501. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
496
7-1 PC Setup Overview
Parameter Function Normal application(s)
A:Hold areas H:Hold areas Specifies which bits are to maintain
status when power is turned off. To extend the Holding Area beyond CIO
300.
R:Hold bits Specifies Racks or Masters (Remote
I/O Subsystems) that are to maintain
status when operation is stopped or
modes are changed.
To maintain output status for specific
Racks or Remote I/O Subsystems.
B:Startup
hold K:Forced Status
(A00013) Maintains the status of the Forced
Status Hold Bit when power is turned off
and on.
To maintain the status of bits forced ON
or OFF.
I:I/O bits (A00012) Maintains the status of the IOM Hold Bit
when power is turned off and on. To prevent I/O status from being cleared
when power is turned on.
D:Power on flag
(A00011) Maintains the status of the Restart
Continuation Bit when power is turned
off and on.
These parameters must be set to YES
when using restart continuation.
C:Startup mode Specifies the initial PC operating mode. To automatically start the PC when
power is turned ON. Set the mode to
MONITOR or RUN when using restart
continuation.
D:Startup processing Specifies whether the user program is
loaded from the Memory Card when
power is turned on.
To enable using a ROM Memory Card
without a backup battery.
E:I/O refresh Sets the refresh method to cyclic,
zero-cross, or scheduled. To reduce the cycle time by using
immediate refreshing or to reduce surge
voltages for AC outputs.
F:Execute
control 1 B:Detect low
battery Specifies detection of CPU battery
errors. To disable detection when batteries are
not being used.
S:Error on power
off Specifies if momentary power
interruptions are to be treated as errors. To generate an error for momentary
power interrupts when they adversely
affect system operation.
T:CPU standby Specifies whether the CPU is to go on standby or start operation while initializing
the system or detecting terminators in SYSMAC BUS/2 Systems.
K:Measure CPU
SIOU cycle Specifies whether or not the CPU Bus Unit servicing cycle is to be measured.
G:Execute
control 2 C:Execute process Specifies whether Peripheral Devices
are to be serviced synchronously or
asynchronously with program
execution.
To increase processing capacity
(speed) by using asynchronous
processing.
I:I/O interrupt Specifies whether higher-priority I/O interrupts are to be executed before a current
I/O interrupt.
D:Power OFF
interrupt Specifies whether a power off interrupt
is to be executed. To save system status when power
turns off.
A:Dup action
process Specifies whether an error is to be generated when the same action is executed
simultaneously from two different locations in the program.
T:Step timer Sets the units for the step timer to 0.1 or to 1 s.
J:Startup trace Specifies whether a trace is to be automatically executed when power is turned on.
B:*DM BIN/BCD Specifies whether indirect addresses
are treated as binary (memory
addresses) or BCD (data area
addresses).
To enable indirectly addresses for the
entire DM and EM areas by using
binary addresses.
P:Multiple use of
JMP000 Specifies whether or not multiple JMP000 instructions can be programmed.
E:Comp error
process Specifies whether I/O verification errors are to be fatal or non-fatal.
H:Host link Sets communications parameters for
the host link interface. These settings must be made when
using the host link interface.
I:CPU bus link Specifies whether or not CPU bus links
are to be created. To enable linking of two or more BASIC
Units.
PC Setup Overview Section 7-1
497
Parameter Normal application(s)Function
J:Scheduled interrupt Sets the unit for setting the scheduled interrupt to 10.0, 1.0, or 0.5 ms.
K:1st Rack addr Sets the first word for each of the CPU,
Expansion CPU, and Expansion I/O
Racks.
To simplify word allocations, to prevent
changes in allocations, or to allow for
expansion without changes in
allocations.
L:Group 1,2 1st addr Sets the first word for group-1 and
group-2 Slaves for each Master. To prevent overlapping of word
allocations when group-1 and group-2
Slaves require more then 50 words per
Master.
M:Trans I/O addr Sets the first word for I/O Terminals for
each Master. To separate I/O Terminal allocations
from those for other Slaves.
N:Group 3, RT 1st addr Sets the first word for each Slave Rack. To simplify word allocations, to prevent
changes in allocations, or to allow for
expansion without changes in
allocations.
O:CV–SIOU 1st addr Not used at present. ---
P:Power break Sets the length of time to be treated as
a momentary power interruption. To enable ignoring short primary voltage
drops for poor power supplies.
Q:Cycle time Sets a minimum cycle time. To eliminate irregular I/O delays.
R:Watch cycle time Sets a maximum cycle time. To stop operation when a specified
cycle time is exceeded or to enable
longer cycle times by setting a high
maximum.
S:Error log Sets the number of records recorded
and the words in which they are
recorded.
To increase the number or error records
that are maintained.
T:IOIF, RT display Sets the startup display mode for the 7-segment displays on I/O Control Units, I/O
Interface Units, and SYSMAC BUS/2 Slave Racks.
7-2 PC Setup Details
Name Operation
A:Hold
areas Hold area The status of bits specified here will be maintained when power is turned off and
on. The holding bits can be set in any continuous range between CIO 1000 to
CIO 2399. Be sure to perform the Create I/O Table operation or turn the power off
and on after changing this parameter.
Do not specify any bits allocated to I/O points on Remote I/O Units. Outputs on
Remote I/O Units will remain on after program execution stops if they are in the
hold area.
(Default: CIO 1200 to CIO 1499)
Hold bits The I/O status on Racks specified here or in all Slaves connected to Masters
specified here will be maintained when operation is stopped or when PC
operating modes are changed. Status will not be maintained for these outputs
when power is turned off. Be sure to perform the Create I/O Table operation or
turn the power off and on after changing this parameter.
(Default: nothing held)
PC Setup Details Section 7-2
498
Name Operation
B:Startup
hold Forced Status Hold
Bit status (A00013)
(Forced status)
Specify whether the status of the Forced Status Hold Bit is to be maintained or
reset to OFF when power is turned on. If A00013 is reset, the forced ON/OFF
status of all force-set and force-reset bits will be cleared when power is turned
on. Changes to this setting are effective the next time the power is turned ON.
(Default: A00013 turned OFF)
IOM Hold Bit status
(A00012)
(I/O bits)
Specify whether the status of the IOM Hold Bit is to be maintained or reset to
OFF when power is turned on. If A00012 is reset, the CIO Area, Transition Flags,
Timer Flags, Timer PVs, index registers, data register, and the Current EM bank
number will be cleared when power is turned on. Changes to this setting are
effective the next time the power is turned ON.
(Default: A00012 turned OFF)
Restart Continuation
Bit status (A00011)
(Power on flag)
Specify whether the status of the Restart Continuation Bit is to be maintained or
reset to OFF when power is turned on. If A00011 is reset, restart continuation
won’t be performed when power is turned on. Changes to this setting are
effective the next time the power is turned ON.
(Default: A00011 turned OFF)
The following settings are required to continue operation after a power
interruption:
Restart Continuation Bit (A00011):
ON and maintained
IOM Hold Bit (A00012): ON and maintained
Startup mode: RUN or MONITOR
Power OFF interrupt program: Exists
C:Startup mode Designate the PC operating mode to be set when PC power is turned ON.
Changes to this setting are valid the next time the power is turned ON.
(Default: PROGRAM)
D:Startup processing Designate whether the user program (AUTOEXEC.OBJ) is automatically
transferred from the Memory Card to PC memory when the power is turned ON.
If this parameter is set to transfer the program, the program will be transferred
regardless of the PC’s startup mode setting. Changes to this setting are effective
the next time the power is turned ON.
DIP switch pin #5 on the CPU can be turned ON to transfer both the user
program (AUTOEXEC.OBJ) and the PC setup (AUTOEXEC.STD). Refer to
information on the Memory Card for details.
(Default: Don’t transfer)
E:I/O refresh Designate the I/O refresh method as cyclic, zero-cross, scheduled, or immediate.
Cyclic refreshing occurs once each cycle at the end of program execution.
Zero-cross refreshing occurs each time the AC power supply voltage crosses
zero. Set this method to more accurately turn off output devices when using AC
power supplies.
Scheduled refreshing occurs at a specific timer interval. The scheduled refresh
interval must also be set. Set the execution interval between 10 and 120 ms.
Scheduled refreshing cannot be used if the PC is set for synchronous operation.
Immediate refreshing occurs when certain instructions are set to interrupt for
refreshing from the user program. To set immediate refreshing, specify scheduled
refreshing with a refresh interval of 00 ms. If this is done, I/O status will be
refreshed only when instructions in the user program call for it.
Changes to this setting are effective immediately.
(Default: Cyclic)
PC Setup Details Section 7-2
499
Name Operation
F:Execute
control 1 Detect low battery Designate whether battery errors are detected. Changes to this setting are
effective immediately.
(Default: Detect)
The following bits will be turned ON when a battery error is detected.
A40204 Battery Low Flag (PC or Memory Card)
A42614 Memory Card Battery Low Flag
A42615 PC Battery Low Flag
Error on power off Designate whether a momentary power interruption is ignored or treated as a
non-fatal error. If momentary power interrupts are treated as errors, they will be
recorded in the error log (see setting F). Changes to this setting are effective
immediately.
(Default: Not an error)
CPU standby Designate whether PC operation will begin or the CPU will standby during
initialization and until SYSMAC BUS/2 terminators are properly detected. If this
parameter is set for operation, PC operation will continue even if SYSMAC BUS/2
terminators aren’t detected. Changes to this setting are effective immediately.
(Default: CPU standby)
Measure CPU-bus
Unit (CPU SIOU)
cycle
Designate whether or not the time between CPU-bus Unit services is to be
measured. If measured, the cycle is stored starting at A310. Changes to this
setting are effective immediately.
(Default: Don’t measure cycle)
G:Execute
control 2 Execute process Designate whether instruction execution and Peripheral Device servicing are to
be carried out synchronously or asynchronously. If synchronous execution is
used, Peripheral Device access to IOM can be disabled during user program
execution. Changes to this setting are effective the next time the power is turned
ON.
(Default: Asynchronous)
I/O interrupts Designate whether or not I/O interrupt program execution is interrupted for
higher-priority I/O interrupts. The I/O interrupt program with the lowest input
number has highest priority.
Power OFF interrupts, power ON interrupts, and scheduled interrupts take priority
over I/O interrupts regardless of this setting.
Changes to this setting are effective immediately.
(Default: Do not interrupt lower-priority I/O interrupts.)
Power OFF interrupt Designate whether or not power OFF interrupts are generated. If an interrupt is
generated, the power OFF interrupt program will be executed. Changes to this
setting are effective immediately.
(Default: No power OFF interrupt)
Dup action process Not used.
Step timer Designate whether the step timer is set in increments of 0.1 s or 1.0 s. Changes
to this setting are effective immediately.
(Default: 0.1 s)
Startup trace Designate whether a trace is executed automatically according to the preset
conditions when the power is turned on or the operating mode is changed.
Changes to this setting are effective the next time power is turned on.
(Default: Don’t start trace.)
Indirect DM
binary/BCD
(*DM BIN/BCD)
Designate whether indirect DM and EM addresses are binary (PC memory
addresses) or BCD (DM and EM area addresses). Changes to this setting are
effective immediately.
(Default: BCD)
Multiple use of
JMP000 Specify whether multiple JMP000 instructions can be programmed. Changes to
this setting are effective immediately.
(Default: Multiple use of JMP000 enabled)
Comparison error
process Designate whether or not to start operation even though an I/O verification error
has occurred. This setting affects only the start of PC operation. The I/O
verification error is non-fatal, so PC operation will continue if an I/O verification
error occurs. Changes to this setting are effective immediately.
(Default: Run after error)
PC Setup Details Section 7-2
500
Name Operation
H:Host link Baud rate Designate 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200 bps.
(Default: 9600 bps)
Stop bits Designate either 1 stop bit or 2 stop bits.
(Default: 2 stop bits)
Parity Designate even, odd, or no parity.
(Default: Even parity)
Data length
(Data bits) Designate either 7-bit or 8-bit data.
(Default: 7-bit data)
Unit number Designate the unit number between 00 and 31. The unit number must not be the
same as the unit number of another node in an RS-422 host link. Changes to this
setting are effective immediately.
(Default: 00)
I:CPU bus link Designate whether or not CPU bus links are used. CPU bus links are used
between BASIC Units only. The CPU bus link service interval is 10 ms. Changes
to this setting are effective immediately.
(Default: Don’t use CPU bus link)
J:Scheduled interrupt interval Designate whether the scheduled interrupt time is set in increments of 10.0 ms,
1.0 ms, or 0.5 ms. Changes to this setting are effective the next time the power is
turned ON.
(Default: 10 ms)
K:1st Rack addr Designate the first CIO words allocated to the CPU, Expansion CPU, and
Expansion I/O Rack. The first word can be set between 0 and 511. Do not allow
word allocations to overlap. Racks without a designated first word will be
allocated words automatically beginning from CIO 0000. Perform the Create I/O
Table or Change I/O Table operation or turn the power off and on after changing
this setting.
(Default: Automatic allocation by rack number beginning from CIO 0000)
L:Group 1,2 1st addr Designate the first words between CIO 0000 and CIO 0999 for each SYSMAC
BUS/2 group-1 and group-2 Masters. The default first word will be used for
Masters without a designated first word. Perform the Create I/O Table or Change
I/O Table operation or turn the power off and on after changing this setting.
(Default: See the table on page 7-3 for details.)
M:Trans I/O addr Designate the first word between CIO 0000 and CIO 2555 for each Master for
SYSMAC BUS I/O Terminals. Do not designate any bits that are in the hold area.
Outputs on I/O Terminals will remain on after program execution stops if they are
in the hold area.
The default first word will be used for Masters without a designated first word.
This setting does not change the Slave address. Perform the Create I/O Table or
Change I/O Table operation or turn the power off and on after changing this
setting.
(Default: 32 words per I/O Terminal starting from CIO 2300)
N:Group 3, RT 1st addr Designate the first word for each SYSMAC BUS/2 group-3 Slave between CIO
0000 and CIO 0999 and for each SYSMAC BUS Slave Rack between CIO 0000
and CIO 2555.
Do not designate any bits that are in the hold area. Outputs on Slaves will remain
on after program execution stops if they are in the hold area.
The default first word will be used for Slaves without a designated first word.
Perform the Create I/O Table or Change I/O Table operation or turn the power off
and on after changing this setting.
(Default: See the table on page 7-3 for details.)
O:CV-SIOU 1st addr Not used.
PC Setup Details Section 7-2
501
Name Operation
P:Power break Designate the momentary power interruption time between 0 and 9 ms.
Operation will continue for momentary power interruptions if the power supply is
restored within this time after a power interruption.
If the momentary power interruption time is greater than 0 ms, Peripheral Device
and Host Link communications may be disrupted and may go on standby for
momentary power interruptions.
This setting will be ignored and the default value will be used if a C500 Expansion
I/O Rack is connected to the System.
Changes to this setting are effective immediately.
(Default: 0 ms)
Q:Cycle time Set the minimum cycle time to between 0 and 32,000 ms. If the actual cycle time
is less than the set cycle time, execution will be halted until the set cycle time
elapses before the next cycle is executed. If the actual cycle time exceeds the set
cycle time, the setting is ignored and the next cycle is executed when the current
cycle is complete. Changes to this setting are effective immediately.
The actual cycle time might vary 3 to 4 ms from the set cycle time. If an interrupt
program is executed, the actual cycle time might be extended by the additional
time it takes to execute the interrupt program.
(Default: Variable cycle)
R:Watch cycle time Designate the maximum cycle time between 10 and 40,000 ms. If the cycle time
exceeds the designated value, a fatal error will occur and A40108 will be turned
ON (Cycle Time Too Long Flag). The actual maximum cycle time might vary
about 5 ms from the designated value.
Changes to this setting are effective immediately.
(Default: 1,000 ms)
S:Error log Designate the size and range of the error log area. When a error occurs,
information about the error is saved in this memory area together with the time
that the error occurred. The error log can be allocated in the DM or EM Area. Up
to 2,047 errors can be recorded.
Changes to this setting are effective the next time the power is turned ON.
(Default: 20 records of 5 words each in A100 to A199)
T:IOIF, RT display Designate the display mode to be used for the 7-segment displays on I/O
Interface Units, the I/O Control Unit, and SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O Slave
Units when the power is turned ON.
Changes to this setting are effective the next time the power is turned ON.
(Default: Mode 1)
7-3 PC Setup Default Settings
Parameter Default value
A:Hold areas H:Hold areas CIO 1200 to CIO 1499
R:Hold bits Nothing held.
B:Startup hold K:Forced Status Reset at startup.
I:I/O bits
D:Power on flag
C:Startup mode PROGRAM
D:Startup processing Don’t transfer program.
E:I/O refresh Cyclic refreshing
F:Execute
l1
B:Detect low battery Detect
control 1 S:Error on power off Fatal
T:CPU standby CPU waits
K:Measure CPU SIOU
cycle Don’t measure cycle.
PC Setup Default Settings Section 7-3
502
Parameter Default value
G:Execute
l2
C:Execute process Asynchronous
control 2 I:I/O interrupt Nesting
D:Power OFF interrupt Disable
A:Dup action process Error
T:Step timer Set to 0.1 s
J:Startup trace Don’t start trace.
B:*DM BIN/BCD BCD
P:Multiple use of JMP000 Enabled
E:Compare error process Run after error
H:Host link B:Baud rate 9600 bps
S:Stop bit 2 bits
P:Parity Even
D:Data bits 7 bits
G:Unit # Unit number 0
I:CPU bus link Don’t use CPU Bus Link.
J:Scheduled interrupt 10.0 ms
K:1st Rack addr (First words for local racks) 0 for CPU Rack
L:Group 1,2 1st addr
(First words for SYSMAC BUS/2 Slaves) RM0 RM1 RM2 RM3
Group 1:CIO 0200CIO 0400CIO 0600CIO 0800
Group 2:CIO 0250CIO 0450CIO 0650CIO 0850
M:Trans I/O addr (First words for I/O
Terminals) RM0 RM1 RM2 RM3
CIO 2300 CIO2332 CIO 2364 CIO2396
RM4 RM5 RM6 RM7
CIO 2428 CIO 2460 CIO 2492 CIO 2524
N:Group 3, RT 1st addr
(First words for group-3 Slave Racks) Group 3 (SYSMAC BUS/2):
RM0 RM1 RM2 RM3
CIO 0300 CIO 0500 CIO 0700 CIO 0900
Words allocated to Units in order under each Master.
RT (SYSMAC BUS):
Defaults for SYSMAC BUS Slaves are the same as for I/O Terminals
(see above). Words allocated to Units in order under each Master.
O:CV–SIOU 1st addr Not used at present.
P:Power break (Momentary power interruption
time) 0 ms
Q:Cycle time Cycle variable
R:Watch cycle time (Cycle time monitoring
time) 1,000 ms
S:Error log 20 records in A100 through A199
T:IOIF, RT display (Slave display modes at
startup) Mode 1
PC Setup Default Settings Section 7-3
503
SECTION 8
Error Processing
This section provides information on hardware and software errors that occur during PC operation. Program input and
program syntax errors are described in the CVSS/SSS Operation Manuals. Although described in Section 3 Memory
Areas, flags and other error information provided in the Auxiliary Area are listed in 8-5 Error Flags.
8-1 Alarm Indicators 504. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2 Programmed Alarms and Error Messages 504. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3 Reading and Clearing Errors and Messages 504. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4 Error Messages 504. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-1 Initialization Errors 505. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-2 Non-fatal Operating Errors 505. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-3 Fatal Operating Errors 507. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5 Error Flags 509. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
!
504
8-1 Alarm Indicators
There are two indicators on the front of the CPU that provide visual indication
of an abnormality in the PC. The error indicator (ERROR) indicates fatal er-
rors (i.e., ones that will stop PC operation); the alarm indicator (ALARM) indi-
cates non-fatal ones. These indicators are shown in
2-1-1 Indicators
.
Caution The PC will turn ON the error indicator (ERROR), stop program execution, and
turn OFF all outputs from the PC for most hardware errors, for certain fatal soft-
ware errors, or when FALS(007) is executed in the program (see tables on fol-
lowing pages). PC operation will continue for all other errors. It is the user’s re-
sponsibility t o take adequate measures to ensure that a hazardous situation will
not result from automatic system shutdown for fatal errors and to ensure that
proper actions are taken for errors for which the system is not automatically shut
down. System flags and other system and/or user-programmed error indica-
tions can be used to program proper actions.
8-2 Programmed Alarms and Error Messages
FAL(006) and FALS(007) can be used in the program to provide user-pro-
grammed information on error conditions. With these instructions, the user
can tailor error diagnosis to aid in troubleshooting.
FAL(006) and FALS(007) share FAL numbers 001 to 511. If two instructions use
the same FAL number, the instruction executed later will not be recognized.
Executing FAL(006) will not stop PC operation or directly affect any outputs
from the PC. Executing FALS(007) will stop PC operation and will cause all
outputs from the PC to be turned OFF.
It is possible to program the FAL(006) and FALS(007) instructions to output a
message when executed. The use of these instructions is described in detail
in
Section 5 Instruction Set
.
8-3 Reading and Clearing Errors and Messages
Errors should be cleared promptly by the displaying and clearing errors op-
eration with CVSS/SSS. The cause of fatal errors must be corrected in PRO-
GRAM mode before clearing the error and resuming operation. FAL errors
can also be cleared using FAL(006); refer to
5-27-1 FAILURE ALARM –
FAL(006)
for details.
Errors can also be cleared by turning the PC power off and on, or switching
from PROGRAM to RUN, MONITOR, or DEBUG modes. I/O bus errors, how-
ever, should be cleared with CVSS/SSS.
8-4 Error Messages
There are basically three types of errors for which messages are displayed:
initialization errors, non-fatal operating errors, and fatal operating errors.
The type of error can be quickly determined from the indicators on the CPU,
as described below for the three types of errors. If the status of an indicator is
not mentioned in the description, it makes no difference whether it is lit or not.
If an error has an error code, that code will be output to A400 when the error
occurs. If more than one error occurs simultaneously, the code of the highest
priority error will be output to A400. Errors are listed in order of their priority in
the following tables, with the highest priority errors listed first. Fatal errors
have higher priority than non-fatal errors.
Error Messages Section 8-4
505
The Error Log contains a record the last 100 errors and can be expanded in
the PC Setup to record up to 2,047 errors. Each record stores the error code,
the error contents (for example the SFC error code for an SFC error), and the
date and time that the error occurred. Refer to
3-6-15 Error Log Area
for de-
tails.
After eliminating the cause of an error, clear the error message from memory
before resuming operation.
8-4-1 Initialization Errors
The following errors occur before program execution has been started. The
POWER indicator will be lit and the RUN indicator will not be lit for any of these.
The RUN output will be OFF for each of these errors. The alarm indicator
(ALARM) will be ON for the I/O table verification error.
Error Probable cause Flag(s) Error code
(A400) Possible remedy
Waiting for start input Start input on CPU Power
Unit is OFF. A30600 None Turn ON the start input on the
CPU Power Unit or short start
input terminals on the CPU Power
Unit.
Waiting for SYSMAC BUS Power to Slave is OFF or
terminator is not set or
doubly set.
A30602 None Check power supply to Slaves
and terminator setting.
Initializing CPU Bus Unit SYSMAC BUS/2 terminator
is missing or power to Slave
is OFF.
A30603 None Check power supply to Slaves
and terminator setting.
I/O table error A Unit has been changed
making the I/O table
incorrect.
A30601
A40209 00E7 Check the I/O table from the
CVSS/SSS and either connect
Dummy I/O Units or correct the
I/O table.
Note The I/O table verification error can be set as an initialization error in the PC Set-
up.
8-4-2 Non-fatal Operating Errors
The following errors occur after program execution has been started. PC opera-
tion and program execution will continue after one or more of these errors have
occurred. For each of these errors, the POWER, RUN, and ALARM indicators
will be lit and the ERROR indicator will not be lit. The RUN output will be ON.
Error Probable cause Flag(s) Error code
(A400) Possible remedy
FAL error FAL(006) has been executed in
program. Check the FAL number
to determine conditions that
would cause execution
(programmed by user).
A40215 4101 to 42FF
correspond to
FAL numbers
001 to 511.
Correct according to cause
indicated by FAL number
(set by user).
Jump error No JME(005) for a JMP(004),
CJP(221), or CJPN(222) in the
program.
A40213 00F9 Check and correct the
program.
Indirect DM BCD error Indirectly addressed DM address
data is not BCD. A40212 00F8
Non-fatal SFC error An error has occurred during
SFC execution. A40211 00F4 Check and correct the
program. (Refer to the next
table for information on
non-fatal SFC errors.)
Expansion I/O Rack power
interruption (when set in
PC Setup)
Power is not being supplied to an
Expansion I/O Rack. A40210 00001 Supply power to the Racks.
Check A419 (CPU-
recognized Rack Numbers)
Error Messages Section 8-4
506
Error Possible remedyError code
(A400)
Flag(s)Probable cause
I/O table error Unit has been removed making
I/O table incorrect. A40209 00E7 Check the I/O table from the
CVSS/SSS and either
connect Dummy I/O Units or
correct the I/O table.
CPU Bus Unit error A parity error has occurred in the
transfer of data between the
CPU and a CPU Bus Unit or in
the CPU Bus Link.
A40207 0200 to 0215
or 02311Check the errant Unit.
SYSMAC BUS/2 error An error has occurred between a
Master and Slave Rack. A40206 00B0 to 00B3
(Masters
#0 to #3.)2
Verify that the Slave Rack is
operating properly, and
check the transmission line.
SYSMAC BUS error An error has occurred between a
Master and Slave Rack. A40205 00A0 to 00A7
(Masters
#0 to #7.)3
Verify that the Slave Rack is
operating properly, and
check the transmission line.
Battery error CPU or Memory Card backup
battery is missing or its voltage
has dropped.
A40204 00F7 Check battery and replace if
necessary.4
CPU Bus Unit setting error The registered CPU Bus Unit
number doesn’t agree with the
registered unit number.
A40203 0400 to 0415
or 04315Check the errant Unit.
Momentary power
interruption A momentary power interruption
can be set as an non-fatal error
in the PC Setup.
A40202 0002 Check the power supply
voltage and lines.
Note 1. Error codes 0200 to 0215 indicate CPU Bus Units #00 to #15, respectively,
while 0231 indicates a CPU bus link error. Also, A422 contains the errant
Unit’s number, and A42315 is turned ON to indicate a CPU bus link error.
2. A424 contains the unit number of the Master involved, and A480 to A499
contain the unit number of the Slave involved.
3. A425 contains the unit number of the Master involved, and A470 to A477
contain the unit number of the Slave involved.
4. A42615 is turned ON to indicate a battery error, and A42614 is turned ON to
indicate a Memory Card battery error.
5. Error codes 0400 to 0415 indicate CPU Bus Units #00 to #15, respectively,
while 0431 indicates a CPU Bus Link error. Also, A427 contains the errant
Unit’s number.
The following table describes SFC non-fatal errors. When an SFC non-fatal er-
ror occurs, the SFC Non-fatal Error Flag (A40211) is turned ON, and the error
code is output to A418.
Error Error code
(A418) Probable cause Possible remedy
Overlapping action
execution 0001 The program attempted to execute the same
action from more than one step at the same
time.
Check the program. If you
wish, you can make a PC
system setting so that
overlapping action execution
will not generate an error.
With the default setting, this
non-fatal SFC error is
generated.
S-group AQ overuse
(Note) 0002 The program attempted to simultaneously
execute 128 or more actions with S-group AQs.
Any actions that exceed the maximum
allowable 127 will not be executed.
Check the program. S-group
AQs include S, SL, SD, and
DS.
Overlapping S-group
AQ execution (Note) 0003 The program attempted multiple execution of
the same action having an S-group AQ. Check the program.
SFC Non-fatal Errors
Error Messages Section 8-4
507
8-4-3 Fatal Operating Errors
The following errors occur after program execution has been started. PC opera-
tion and program execution will stop and all outputs from the PC will be turned
OFF when any of the following errors occur.
None o f the CPU indicators will be lit for the power interruption error , and only the
POWER indicator will be lit for the Expansion Rack power interruption error. The
POWER and WDT indicators will be lit for the CPU error. For all other fatal oper-
ating errors, the POWER and ERROR indicators will be lit. The RUN output will
be OFF.
Error and message Probable Cause Flag(s) Error code
(A400) Possible remedy
Power interruption error A power interruption
longer than the
momentary power
interruption time has
occurred.
None None Check power supply voltage and
power lines. Try to power-up again.
Expansion Rack power
interruption error A power interruption to an
Expansion Rack has
occurred.
None None Turn on the power supply to the
Expansion CPU and Expansion I/O
Racks.
CPU error Watchdog timer has
exceeded maximum
setting.
None 80FF Turn the power OFF and restart.
Memory error An error has occurred
during check of the PC,
Memory Card or EM Unit
memory, or program
transfer could not be
completed at start-up.
A40115 80F1 Check Memory Card and EM Unit
to make sure they are mounted and
backed up properly. Perform a
Program Check Operation to locate
cause of error. If error not
correctable, try inputting program
again.
I/O Bus error Error has occurred in the
bus line between the
CPU and I/O Units.
A40114 80C0 to 80C7
or 80CE or
80CF1
Check cable connections between
the I/O Units and Racks. Verify that
terminators are connected, and
then clear the error. A404 contains
the errant rack/slot number.
Duplicate number error The same number has
been allocated to more
than one Expansion
Rack, more than one
CPU Bus Unit, or one I/O
word has been allocated
to more than one I/O Unit.
A40113 80E9 After checking the rack numbers,
unit numbers, or word allocation,
turn the relevant power supply ON,
OFF, and ON again, and then clear
the error. A409 contains the
duplicate rack number, and A410
contains the duplicate unit number.
CPU bus error Watchdog timer error has
occurred during data
transfer between the CPU
and CPU Bus Unit.
A40112 8100 to 8115
(indicate
Units 0 to 15)
Check cable connections between
the CPU and CPU Bus Units, and
then clear the error.
A405 contains the errant unit
number.
Too many I/O points Maximum number of I/O
points or I/O Units has
been exceeded in the I/O
Table.
A40111 80E1 Check the number of points with I/O
Table Read. If necessary, reduce
number of Units in the system to
keep within maximum number of
I/O points and register the I/O table
again.2
Input-output I/O table error Input and output word
designations registered in
I/O table do no agree with
input/output words
required by Units actually
mounted.
A40110 80E0 Check the I/O table with I/O Table
Verification operation and check all
Units to see that they are in correct
configuration. When the system has
been confirmed, register the I/O
table again.
Program error END(001) is not written
anywhere in program or
the program exceeds
memory capacity.
A40109 80F0 Correct the program and then clear
the error.
Error Messages Section 8-4
508
Error and message Possible remedyError code
(A400)
Flag(s)Probable Cause
Cycle time too long The cycle time has
exceeded the maximum
cycle time set in the PC
Setup.
A40108 809F Change the program or the
maximum cycle time.3
SFC fatal error The program contains an
error in SFC syntax or an
END(01) instruction is
missing.
A40107 80F3 Correct the program and then clear
the error. (Refer to the next table for
information on SFC fatal errors.)
Check to be sure that all programs
end in END(01).
FALS error FALS has been executed
by the program. Check
the FAL number to
determine conditions that
would cause execution.
A40106 C101 to C2FF
correspond to
FAL numbers
001 to 511.
Correct according to cause
indicated by FAL number.
Note 1. Error codes 80C0 to 80C7 indicate Rack numbers 0 to 7, respectively. Error
codes 80CE and 80CF indicate that the terminator is missing in operating
system 0 and 1, respectively.
2. The total number of I/O words allocated to the CPU, CPU Expansion, and
Expansion I/O Racks is contained in A407. A408 contains the total number
of I/O words allocated to the SYSMAC BUS/2 System, and A478 contains
the total number of I/O words allocated to the SYSMAC BUS System.
3. The maximum cycle time since start-up is contained in A462 and 463, and
the present cycle time is contained in A464 and 465.
The following table describes SFC fatal errors. When an SFC fatal error occurs,
the SFC Fatal Error Flag (A40107) is turned ON, and the error code is output to
A414.
Error Error code
(A418) Probable cause Possible remedy
No active step 0001 There is not even one active step. Check the program.
No subchart 0002 There is no subchart entry step for the subchart
dummy step, or the subchart number is
incorrect.
Check and then re-transfer
the program.
No initial step 0003 There is not even one initial step in the
program. Create an initial step and
then re-transfer the program.
No action set 0007 There is no action program set, or the bit
address for the action is incorrect. Check and then re-transfer
the program.
No transition set 0008 There is no transition program set, or the bit
address for the transition is incorrect.
Interrupt return error 0014 An interrupt return terminal was detected
outside of an interrupt program. Check the program.
Subchart return error 0015 A subchart return step was detected outside of
a subchart program.
Memory error 0004 to 0006,
0009 to 0013 Memory contents are incorrect. Re-transfer the program.
SFC Fatal Errors
Error Messages Section 8-4
509
8-5 Error Flags
The following table lists the flags and other information provided in the Auxil-
iary Area that can be used in troubleshooting. Details are provided in
3-6
Auxiliary Area.
Error Address(es) Function
Power interruption error A012 and A013 Date and time of last power
interruption
A014 Number of power interruptions
Expansion Rack power
interruption error None ---
CPU error None ---
Memory error A40115 Memory Error Flag
A403 Memory error area location
I/O bus error A40114 I/O Bus Error Flag
A404 I/O Bus error rack/slot number
Duplicate number error A40113 Duplication Error Flag
A409 Duplicate rack number
A410 CPU Bus Unit duplicate number
CPU Bus error A40112 CPU Bus Error Flag
A405 CPU Bus Unit error unit number
Too many I/O points A40111 Too Many I/O Points Flag
A407 Total I/O words on CPU and
Expansion Racks
A408 Total SYSMAC BUS/2 I/O words
A478 Total SYSMAC BUS I/O words
Input-output I/O table error A40110 I/O Setting Error Flag
Program error A40109 Program Error Flag
Cycle time too long A40108 Cycle Time Too Long Flag
A462 and A463 Maximum cycle time since start-up
A464 and A465 Present cycle time
SFC fatal error A40107 SFC Fatal Error Flag
A414 SFC fatal error code
FALS error A40106 FALS Instruction Flag
Error Address(es) Function
FAL error A40215 FAL Flag
A430 to A461 Executed FAL number
Jump error A40213 Jump Error Flag
Indirect DM BCD error A40212 Indirect DM Error Flag
SFC non-fatal error A40211 SFC Non-fatal Error Flag
A418 SFC non-fatal error code
I/O table error A40209 I/O Verification Error Flag
CPU Bus Unit error A40207 CPU Bus Unit Error Flag
A422 CPU Bus Unit error unit number
A42315 CPU Bus Link Error Flag
SYSMAC BUS/2 error A40206 SYSMAC BUS/2 Error Flag
A424 SYSMAC BUS/2 error Master
number
A480 to A499 Slave unit number
Fatal Errors
Non-fatal Errors
Error Flags Section 8-5
510
Error FunctionAddress(es)
SYSMAC BUS error A40205 SYSMAC BUS Error Flag
A425 SYSMAC BUS error Master number
A470 to A477 Slave unit number
Battery error A40204 Battery Low Flag
A42614 Memory Card Battery Low Flag
A42615 PC Battery Low Flag
CPU Bus Unit setting error A40203 CPU Bus Unit Parameter Error Flag
A427 CPU Bus Unit Parameter Error unit
number
Momentary power
interruption error A40202 Power Interruption Flag
A412 and A413 Date and time of last power
interruption
A014 Number of power interruptions
Error Flags Section 8-5
511
Note Instructions marked with an asterisk (*) are supported by version-2 CVM1 CPUs only.
Appendix A
Instruction Set
Alphabetic List of Instructions by Mnemonics
The DM and EM areas can be indirectly addressed by specifying the data area as *DM or *EM, and then entering
the address of the DM or EM word that contains the actual data. Index and data registers can also be used for
indirect addressing.
Mnemonic Code Name
ACOS(j)* 464 COSINE-TO-ANGLE
ADB(j)080 BINARY ADD
ADBL(j)084 DOUBLE BINARY ADD
ADD(j)070 BCD ADD
ADDL(j)074 DOUBLE BCD ADD
ANDL(j)134 DOUBLE LOGICAL AND
ANDW(j)130 LOGICAL AND
APR(j)142 ARITHMETIC PROCESS
ASC(j)113 ASCII CONVERT
ASFT(j)052 ASYNCHRONOUS SHIFT
REGISTER
ASIN(j)* 463 SINE-TO-ANGLE
ASL(j)060 ARITHMETIC SHIFT LEFT
ASLL(j)064 DOUBLE SHIFT LEFT
ASR(j)061 ARITHMETIC SHIFT RIGHT
ASRL(j)065 DOUBLE SHIFT RIGHT
ATAN(j)* 465 TANGENT-TO-ANGLE
BAND(j)* 272 DEAD BAND CONTROL
BCD(j)101 BINARY-TO-BCD
BCDL(j)103 DOUBLE BINARY-TO-DOUBLE
BCD
BCDS(j)* 276 SIGNED BINARY-TO-BCD
BCMP(j)022 BLOCK COMPARE
BCNT(j)114 BIT COUNTER
BDSL(j)* 278 DOUBLE SIGNED
BINARY-TO-BCD
BEND* <001> BLOCK PROGRAM END
BIN(j)100 BCD-TO-BINARY
BINL(j)102 DOUBLE BCD-TO-DOUBLE
BINARY
BINS(j)* 275 SIGNED BCD-TO-BINARY
BISL(j)* 277 DOUBLE SIGNED
BCD-TO-BINARY
BPPS* <011> BLOCK PROGRAM PAUSE
BPRG* 250 BLOCK PROGRAM
BPRS* <012> BLOCK PROGRAM RESTART
BSET(j)041 BLOCK SET
Mnemonic Code Name
BXFR(j)* 046 INTERBANK BLOCK
TRANSFER
CADD(j)145 CALENDAR ADD
CCL(j)172 LOAD FLAGS
CCS(j)173 SAVE FLAGS
CJP* 221 CONDITIONAL JUMP
CJPN* 222 CONDITIONAL JUMP
CLC(j)079 CLEAR CARRY
CLI(j)154 CLEAR INTERRUPT
CMND(j)194 DELIVER COMMAND
CMP(!) 020 COMPARE
CMP(!)* 028 UNSIGNED COMPARE
CMPL 021 DOUBLE COMPARE
CMPL* 029 DOUBLE UNSIGNED
COMPARE
CNR(j)236 RESET TIMER/COUNTER
CNTR 012 REVERSIBLE COUNTER
CNTW* <014> COUNTER WAIT
COLL(j)045 DATA COLLECT
COLM(j)116 LINE-TO-COLUMN
COM(j)138 COMPLEMENT
COML(j)139 DOUBLE COMPLEMENT
COS* 461 COSINE
CPS(!)* 026 SIGNED BINAR Y COMPARE
CPSL* 027 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
COMPARE
CSUB(j)146 CALENDAR SUBTRACT
DATE(j)* 179 CLOCK COMPENSATION
DCBL(j)097 DOUBLE DECREMENT
BINARY
DEC(j)091 DECREMENT BCD
DECB(j)093 DECREMENT BINARY
DECL(j)095 DOUBLE DECREMENT BCD
DEG(j)* 459 RADIANS-TO-DEGREES
DIFD(!) 014 DIFFERENTIATE DOWN
DIFU(!) 013 DIFFERENTIATE UP
DIST(j)044 SINGLE WORD DISTRIBUTE
DIV(j)073 BCD DIVIDE
DIVL(j)077 DOUBLE BCD DIVIDE
Appendix AInstruction Set
512 Note Instructions marked with an asterisk (*) are supported by version-2 CVM1 CPUs only.
Mnemonic Code Name
DMPX(j)111 16-TO-4/256-8 ENCODER
DOWN* 019 CONDITION OFF
DVB(j)083 BINARY DIVIDE
DVBL(j)087 DOUBLE BINARY DIVIDE
ELSE* <003> NO CONDITIONAL BRANCH
EMBC(j)171 SELECT EM BANK
END 001 END
EQU(j)025 EQUAL
EXIT(NOT)* <006> CONDITIONAL END
EXP(j)* 467 EXPONENT
FAL(j)006 FAILURE ALARM
FALS(j)007 FAILURE ALARM
FDIV(j)141 FLOATING POINT
DIVIDE(BCD)
FIFO(j)163 FIRST IN FIRST OUT
FILP(j)182 READ PROGRAM FILE
FILR(j)180 READ DATA FILE
FILW(j)181 WRITE DATA FILE
FIX(j)* 450 FLOATING-TO-16-BIT
FIXL(j)* 451 FLOATING-TO-32-BIT
FLSP(j)183 CHANGE STEP PROGRAM
FLT(j)* 452 16-BIT-TO-FLOATING
FLTL(j)* 453 32-BIT-TO-FLOATING
FPD* 177 FAILURE POINT DETECTION
HEX(j)* 117 ASCII-TO-HEX
HMS(j)144 SECONDS-TO-HOURS
IEND* <004> END OF BRANCH
IF(NOT)* <002> CONDITIONAL BRANCH
IL 002 INTERLOCK
ILC 003 INTERLOCK CLEAR
INBL(j)096 DOUBLE INCREMENT BINARY
INC(j)090 INCREMENT BCD
INCB(j)092 INCREMENT BINARY
INCL(j)094 DOUBLE INCREMENT BCD
IODP(j)189 I/O DISPLAY
IORF(j)184 I/O REFRESH
IORS 188 ENABLE ACCESS
IOSP(j)187 DISABLE ACCESS
JME 005 JUMP END
JMP 004 JUMP
KEEP(!) 011 KEEP
Mnemonic Code Name
LEND(NOT)
*<010> REPEAT BLOCK END
LIFO(j)162 LAST IN FIRST OUT
LINE(j)115 COLUMN-TO-LINE
LMT(j)* 271 LIMIT CONTROL
LOG(j)* 468 LOGARITHM
LOOP* <009> REPEAT BLOCK
MARK 174 MARK TRACE
MAX(j)165 FIND MAXIMUM
MCMP(j)024 MULTIPLE COMPARE
MCRO(j)* 156 MACRO
MIN(j)166 FIND MINIMUM
MLB(j)082 BINARY MULTIPLY
MLBL(j)086 DOUBLE BINARY MULTIPLY
MLPX(j)110 4-TO-16/8-TO-256 DECODER
MOV(!j)030 MOVE
MOVB(j)042 MOVE BIT
MOVD(j)043 MOVE DIGIT
MOVL(j)032 DOUBLE MOVE
MOVQ 037 MOVE QUICK
MOVR(j)036 MOVE TO REGISTER
MSG(j)195 MESSAGE
MSKR(j)155 READ MASK
MSKS(j)153 INTERRUPT MASK
MTIM 122 MULTI-OUTPUT TIMER
MUL(j)072 BCD MULTIPLY
MULL(j)076 DOUBLE BCD MULTIPLY
MVN(j)031 MOVE NOT
MVNL(j)033 DOUBLE MOVE NOT
NASL(j)* 056 SHIFT N-BITS LEFT
NASR(j)* 057 SHIFT N-BITS RIGHT
NEG(j)104 2’S COMPLEMENT
NEGL(j)105 DOUBLE 2’S COMPLEMENT
NOP 000 NO OPERATION
NOT 010 NOT
NSFL(j)* 054 SHIFT N-BIT DATA LEFT
NSFR(j)* 055 SHIFT N-BIT DATA RIGHT
NSLL(j)* 058 DOUBLE SHIFT N-BIT LEFT
NSRL(j)* 059 DOUBLE SHIFT N-BIT RIGHT
ORW(j)131 LOGICAL OR
ORWL(j)135 DOUBLE LOGICAL OR
PID* 270 PID CONTROL
PUSH(j)161 PUSH ONTO STACK
Appendix AInstruction Set
513
Note Instructions marked with an asterisk (*) are supported by version-2 CVM1 CPUs only.
Mnemonic Code Name
RAD(j)* 458 DEGREES-TO-RADIANS
RD2* 280 I/O READ 2
READ 190 I/O READ
RECV(j)193 NETWORK RECEIVE
REGL(j)175 LOAD REGISTER
REGS(j)176 SAVE REGISTER
RET 152 SUBROUTINE RETURN
RLNC(j)* 260 ROTATE LEFT WITHOUT
CARRY
RLNL(j)* 262 DOUBLE ROTATE LEFT
WITHOUT CARRY
ROL(j)062 ROTATE LEFT WITH CARRY
ROLL(j)066 DOUBLE ROTATE LEFT WITH
CARRY
ROOT(j)140 BCD SQUARE ROOT
ROR(j)063 ROTATE RIGHT WITH CARRY
RORL(j)067 DOUBLE ROTATE RIGHT
WITH CARRY
ROTB(j)* 274 BINARY ROOT
RRNC(j)* 261 ROTATE RIGHT WITHOUT
CARRY
RRNL(j)* 263 ROTATE LEFT WITHOUT
CARRY
RSET(!ji)017 RSET
RSTA(j)* 048 MULTIPLE BIT RESET
SA(j)210 ACTIVATE STEP
SBB(j)081 BINARY SUBTRACT
SBBL(j)085 DOUBLE BINARY SUBTRACT
SBN 150 SUBROUTINE ENTER
SBS(j)151 SUBROUTINE CALL
SDEC(j)112 7-SEGMENT DECODER
SE(j)214 DEACTIVATE STEP
SEC(j)143 HOURS-TO-SECONDS
SEND(j)192 NETWORK SEND
SET(!ji)016 SET
SETA(j)* 047 MULTIPLE BIT SET
SF(j)213 END STEP
SFT 050 SHIFT REGISTER
SFTR(j)051 REVERSIBLE SHIFT
REGISTER
SIGN(j)106 SIGN
SIN(j)* 460 SINE
SLD(j)068 SHIFT DIGIT LEFT
SNXT 009 STEP START
SOFF(j)215 RESET STEP
SP(j)211 PAUSE STEP
Mnemonic Code Name
SQRT(j)* 466 SQUARE ROOT
SR(j)212 RESTART STEP
SRCH(j)164 DATA SEARCH
SRD(j)069 SHIFT DIGIT RIGHT
SSET(j)160 SET STACK
STC(j)078 SET CARRY
STEP 008 STEP DEFINE
SUB(j)071 BCD SUBTRACT
SUBL(j)075 DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT
SUM(j)167 SUM
TAN(j)* 462 TANGENT
TCMP(j)023 TABLE COMPARE
TCNT 123 TRANSITION COUNTER
TIMH 015 HIGH-SPEED TIMER
TIML 121 DOUBLE TIMER
TIMW* <013> TIMER WAIT
TMHW* <015> HIGH-SPEED TIMER WAIT
TOUT 202 TRANSITION OUTPUT
TRSM 170 TRACE MEMORY
TSR(j)124 READ STEP TIMER
TST* 350 BIT TEST
TSTN* 351 BIT TEST
TSW(j)125 WRITE STEP TIMER
TTIM 120 ACCUMULATIVE TIMER
UP* 018 CONDITION ON
WAIT(NOT)
*<005> 1-SCAN WAIT
WDT* 178 MAXIMUM CYCLE TIME
EXTEND
WR2* 281 I/O UNIT WRITE 2
WRIT 191 I/O WRITE
WSFT(j)053 WORD SHIFT
XCGL(j)035 DOUBLE DATA EXCHANGE
XCHG(j)034 DATA EXCHANGE
XFER(j)040 BLOCK TRANSFER
XFRB(j)* 038 MULTIPLE BIT TRANSFER
XNRL(j)137 DOUBLE EXCLUSIVE NOR
XNRW(j)133 EXCLUSIVE NOR
XORL(j)136 DOUBLE EXCLUSIVE OR
XORW(j)132 EXCLUSIVE OR
ZONE(j)* 273 DEAD-ZONE CONTROL
/(j)* 430 SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE
/B(j)* 434 BCD DIVIDE
/BL(j)* 435 DOUBLE BCD DIVIDE
Appendix AInstruction Set
514 Note Instructions marked with an asterisk (*) are supported by version-2 CVM1 CPUs only.
Mnemonic Code Name
/F(j)* 457 FLOATING-POINT DIVIDE
/L(j)* 431 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
DIVIDE
/U(j)* 432 UNSIGNED BINARY DIVIDE
/UL(j)* 433 DOUBLE UNSIGNED BINARY
DIVIDE
+(j)* 400 SIGNED BINARY ADD
WITHOUT CARRY
+B(j)* 404 BCD ADD WITHOUT CARRY
+BC(j)* 406 BCD ADD WITH CARRY
+BCL(j)* 407 DOUBLE BCD ADD WITH
CARRY
+BL(j)* 405 DOUBLE BCD ADD WITHOUT
CARRY
+C(j)* 402 SIGNED BINARY ADD WITH
CARRY
+CL(j)* 403 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
ADD WITH CARRY
+F(j)* 454 FLOATING-POINT ADD
+L(j)* 401 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
ADD WITHOUT CARRY
–(j)* 410 SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT
WITHOUT CARRY
–B(j)* 414 BCD SUBTRACT WITHOUT
CARRY
–BC(j)* 416 BCD SUBTRACT WITH CARRY
–BCL(j)* 417 DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT
WITH CARRY
–BL(j)* 415 DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT
WITHOUT CARRY
–C(j)* 412 SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT
WITH CARRY
–CL(j)* 413 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
SUBTRACT WITH CARRY
–F(j)* 455 FLOATING-POINT SUBTRACT
–L(j)* 411 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY
=* 300 EQUAL
=L* 301 DOUBLE EQUAL
Mnemonic Code Name
=S* 302 SIGNED EQUAL
=SL* 303 DOUBLE SIGNED EQUAL
<* 310 LESS THAN
<=* 315 LESS THAN OR EQUAL
<=L* 316 DOUBLE LESS THAN OR
EQUAL
<=S* 317 SIGNED LESS THAN OR
EQUAL
<=SL* 318 DOUBLE SIGNED LESS THAN
OR EQUAL
<>* 305 NOT EQUAL
<>L* 306 DOUBLE NOT EQUAL
<>S* 307 SIGNED NOT EQUAL
<>SL* 308 DOUBLE SIGNED NOT EQUAL
<L* 311 DOUBLE LESS THAN
<S* 312 SIGNED LESS THAN
<SL* 313 DOUBLE SIGNED LESS THAN
>* 320 GREATER THAN
>=* 325 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL
>=L* 326 DOUBLE GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
>=S* 327 SIGNED GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
>=SL* 328 DOUBLE SIGNED GREATER
THAN OR EQUAL
>L* 321 DOUBLE GREATER THAN
>S* 322 SIGNED GREATER THAN
>SL* 323 DOUBLE SIGNED GREATER
THAN
*(j)* 420 SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY
*B(j)* 424 BCD MULTIPLY
*BL(j)* 425 DOUBLE BCD MULTIPLY
*F(j)* 456 FLOATING-POINT MULTIPLY
*L(j)* 421 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
MULTIPLY
*U(j)* 422 UNSIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY
*UL(j)* 423 DOUBLE UNSIGNED BINARY
MULTIPLY
Appendix AInstruction Set
515
Note Instructions marked with an asterisk (*) are supported by version-2 CVM1 CPUs only.
Alphabetic List of Instructions by Function Code
Sequence Control, Error Handling, and Step
Control Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
000 NOP NO OPERATION
001 END END
002 IL INTERLOCK
003 ILC INTERLOCK CLEAR
004 JMP JUMP
005 JME JUMP END
006 FAL(j)FAILURE ALARM
007 FALS FAILURE ALARM
008 STEP STEP DEFINE
009 SNXT STEP START
Sequence I/O Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
010 NOT NOT
011 KEEP(!) KEEP
012 CNTR REVERSIBLE COUNTER
013 DIFU(!) DIFFERENTIATE UP
014 DIFD(!) DIFFERENTIATE DOWN
015 TIMH HIGH-SPEED TIMER
016 SET(!ji)SET
017 RSET(!ji)RSET
018 UP* CONDITION ON
019 DOWN* CONDITION OFF
Data Compare Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
020 CMP(!j)COMPARE
021 CMPL DOUBLE COMPARE
022 BCMP(j)BLOCK COMPARE
023 TCMP(j)TABLE COMPARE
024 MCMP(j)MULTIPLE COMPARE
025 EQU(j)EQUAL
026 CPS(!)* SIGNED BINARY
COMPARE
027 CPSL* DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
COMPARE
028 CMP(!)* UNSIGNED COMPARE
029 CMPL* DOUBLE UNSIGNED
COMPARE
Data Move and Sequence Output Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
030 MOV(!j)MOVE
031 MVN(j)MOVE NOT
032 MOVL(j)DOUBLE MOVE
033 MVNL(j)DOUBLE MOVE NOT
034 XCHG(j)DATA EXCHANGE
035 XCGL(j)DOUBLE DATA EXCHANGE
036 MOVR(j)MOVE TO REGISTER
037 MOVQ MOVE QUICK
038 XFRB(j)* MULTIPLE BIT TRANSFER
040 XFER(j)BLOCK TRANSFER
041 BSET(j)BLOCK SET
042 MOVB(j)MOVE BIT
043 MOVD(j)MOVE DIGIT
044 DIST(j)SINGLE WORD
DISTRIBUTE
045 COLL(j)DATA COLLECT
046 BXFR(j)* INTERBANK BLOCK
TRANSFER
047 SETA(j)* MULTIPLE BIT SET
048 RSTA(j)* MULTIPLE BIT RESET
Appendix AInstruction Set
516 Note Instructions marked with an asterisk (*) are supported by version-2 CVM1 CPUs only.
Data Shift Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
050 SFT SHIFT REGISTER
051 SFTR(j)REVERSIBLE SHIFT
REGISTER
052 ASFT(j)ASYNCHRONOUS SHIFT
REGISTER
053 WSFT(j)WORD SHIFT
054 NSFL* SHIFT N-BIT DATA LEFT
055 NSFR* SHIFT N-BIT DATA RIGHT
056 NASL* SHIFT N-BITS LEFT
057 NASR* SHIFT N-BITS RIGHT
058 NSLL* DOUBLE SHIFT N-BIT LEFT
059 NSRL* DOUBLE SHIFT N-BIT
RIGHT
060 ASL(j)ARITHMETIC SHIFT LEFT
061 ASR(j)ARITHMETIC SHIFT RIGHT
062 ROL(j)ROTATE LEFT
063 ROR(j)ROTATE RIGHT
064 ASLL(j)DOUBLE SHIFT LEFT
065 ASRL(j)DOUBLE SHIFT RIGHT
066 ROLL(j)DOUBLE ROTATE LEFT
067 RORL(j)DOUBLE ROTATE RIGHT
068 SLD(j)SHIFT DIGIT LEFT
069 SRD(j)SHIFT DIGIT RIGHT
BCD Calculation and Carry Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
070 ADD(j)BCD ADD
071 SUB(j)BCD SUBTRACT
072 MUL(j)BCD MULTIPLY
073 DIV(j)BCD DIVIDE
074 ADDL(j)DOUBLE BCD ADD
075 SUBL(j)DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT
076 MULL(j)DOUBLE BCD MULTIPLY
077 DIVL(j)DOUBLE BCD DIVIDE
078 STC(j)SET CARRY
079 CLC(j)CLEAR CARRY
Binary Calculation Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
080 ADB(j)BINARY ADD
081 SBB(j)BINARY SUBTRACT
082 MLB(j)BINARY MULTIPLY
083 DVB(j)BINARY DIVIDE
084 ADBL(j)DOUBLE BINARY ADD
085 SBBL(j)DOUBLE BINARY
SUBTRACT
086 MLBL(j)DOUBLE BINARY
MULTIPLY
087 DVBL(j)DOUBLE BINARY DIVIDE
Increment/Decrement Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
090 INC(j)INCREMENT BCD
091 DEC(j)DECREMENT BCD
092 INCB(j)INCREMENT BINARY
093 DECB(j)DECREMENT BINARY
094 INCL(j)DOUBLE INCREMENT BCD
095 DECL(j)DOUBLE DECREMENT
BCD
096 INBL(j)DOUBLE INCREMENT
BINARY
097 DCBL(j)DOUBLE DECREMENT
BINARY
Data Format Conversion and Special
Calculation Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
100 BIN(j)BCD-TO-BINARY
101 BCD(j)BINARY-TO-BCD
102 BINL(j)DOUBLE BCD-TO-DOUBLE
BINARY
103 BCDL(j)DOUBLE
BINARY-TO-DOUBLE BCD
104 NEG(j)2’S COMPLEMENT
105 NEGL(j)DOUBLE 2’S
COMPLEMENT
106 SIGN(j)SIGN
Basic I/O Unit Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
110 MLPX(j)4-TO-16 DECODER
111 DMPX(j)16-TO-4 ENCODER
112 SDEC(j)7-SEGMENT DECODER
113 ASC(j)ASCII CONVERT
114 BCNT(j)BIT COUNTER
115 LINE(j)COLUMN-TO-LINE
116 COLM(j)LINE-TO-COLUMN
117 HEX(j)* ASCII-TO-HEX
Appendix AInstruction Set
517
Note Instructions marked with an asterisk (*) are supported by version-2 CVM1 CPUs only.
Special Timer and SFC Control Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
120 TTIM ACCUMULATIVE TIMER
121 TIML DOUBLE TIMER
122 MTIM MULTI-OUTPUT TIMER
123 TCNT TRANSITION COUNTER
124 TSR(j)READ STEP TIMER
125 TSW(j)WRITE STEP TIMER
Logical Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
130 ANDW(j)LOGICAL AND
131 ORW(j)LOGICAL OR
132 XORW(j)EXCLUSIVE OR
133 XNRW(j)EXCLUSIVE NOR
134 ANDL(j)DOUBLE LOGICAL AND
135 ORWL(j)DOUBLE LOGICAL OR
136 XORL(j)DOUBLE EXCLUSIVE OR
137 XNRL(j)DOUBLE EXCLUSIVE NOR
138 COM(j)COMPLEMENT
139 COML(j)DOUBLE COMPLEMENT
Special and Time-related Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
140 ROOT(j)BCD SQUARE ROOT
141 FDIV(j)FLOATING POINT
DIVIDE(BCD)
142 APR(j)ARITHMETIC PROCESS
143 SEC(j)HOURS-TO-SECONDS
144 HMS(j)SECONDS-TO-HOURS
145 CADD(j)CALENDAR ADD
146 CSUB(j)CALENDAR SUBTRACT
Subroutine and Interrupt Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
150 SBN SUBROUTINE ENTER
151 SBS(j)SUBROUTINE CALL
152 RET SUBROUTINE RETURN
153 MSKS(j)INTERRUPT MASK
154 CLI(j)CLEAR INTERRUPT
155 MSKR(j)READ MASK
156 MCRO(j)* MACRO
Table Data Processing Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
160 SSET(j)SET STACK
161 PUSH(j)PUSH ONTO STACK
162 LIFO(j)LAST IN FIRST OUT
163 FIFO(j)FIRST IN FIRST OUT
164 SRCH(j)DATA SEARCH
165 MAX(j)FIND MAXIMUM
166 MIN(j)FIND MINIMUM
167 SUM(j)SUM
Debugging, Special, Error Processing and
Time-related Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
170 TRSM TRACE MEMORY
171 EMBC(j)SELECT EM BANK
172 CCL(j)LOAD FLAGS
173 CCS(j)SAVE FLAGS
174 MARK MARK TRACE
175 REGL(j)LOAD REGISTER
176 REGS(j)SAVE REGISTER
177 FPD* FAILURE POINT
DETECTION
178 WDT(j)* MAXIMUM CYCLE TIME
EXTEND
179 DATE(j)* CLOCK COMPENSATION
File Memory, Basic I/O, and Special I/O
Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
180 FILR(j)READ DATA FILE
181 FILW(j)WRITE DATA FILE
182 FILP(j)READ PROGRAM FILE
183 FLSP(j)CHANGE STEP PROGRAM
184 IORF(j)I/O REFRESH
187 IOSP(j)DISABLE ACCESS
188 IORS ENABLE ACCESS
189 IODP(j)I/O DISPLAY
190 READ I/O READ
191 WRIT I/O WRITE
192 SEND(j)NETWORK SEND
193 RECV(j)NETWORK RECEIVE
194 CMND(j)DELIVER COMMAND
195 MSG(j)MESSAGE
Appendix AInstruction Set
518 Note Instructions marked with an asterisk (*) are supported by version-2 CVM1 CPUs only.
SFC Control Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
202 TOUT TRANSITION OUTPUT
210 SA(j)ACTIVATE STEP
211 SP(j)PAUSE STEP
212 SR(j)RESTART STEP
213 SF(j)END STEP
214 SE(j)DEACTIVATE STEP
215 SOFF(j)RESET STEP
Sequence Control and Timer/Counter Reset
Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
221 CJP* CONDITIONAL JUMP
222 CJPN* CONDITIONAL JUMP
236 CNR(j)RESET TIMER/COUNTER
Block Program Instruction( )
Code Mnemonic Name
250 BPRG* BLOCK PROGRAM
Block Program Instructions < >
Code Mnemonic Name
<001> BEND* BLOCK PROGRAM END
<002> IF(NOT)* CONDITIONAL BRANCH
<003> ELSE* NO CONDITIONAL
BRANCH
<004> IEND* END OF BRANCH
<005> WAIT(NOT)* 1-SCAN WAIT
<006> EXIT(NOT)* CONDITIONAL END
<009> LOOP* REPEAT BLOCK
<010> LEND(NOT)* REPEAT BLOCK END
<011> BPPS* BLOCK PROGRAM PAUSE
<012> BPRS* BLOCK PROGRAM
RESTART
<013> TIMW* TIMER WAIT
<014> CNTW* COUNTER WAIT
<015> TMHW* HIGH-SPEED TIMER WAIT
Data Shift Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
260 RLNC(j)* ROTATE LEFT WITHOUT
CARRY
261 RRNC(j)* ROTATE RIGHT WITHOUT
CARRY
262 RLNL(j)* DOUBLE ROTATE LEFT
WITHOUT CARRY
263 RRNL(j)* ROTATE LEFT WITHOUT
CARRY
Data Control, Special Calculation, and Data
Conversion Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
270 PID* PID CONTROL
271 LMT(j)* LIMIT CONTROL
272 BAND(j)* DEAD BAND CONTROL
273 ZONE(j)* DEAD-ZONE CONTROL
274 ROTB(j)* BINARY ROOT
275 BINS(j)* SIGNED BCD-TO-BINARY
276 BCDS(j)* SIGNED BINARY-TO-BCD
277 BISL(j)* DOUBLE SIGNED
BCD-TO-BINARY
278 BDSL(j)* DOUBLE SIGNED
BINARY-TO-BCD
Special I/O Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
280 RD2* I/O READ 2
281 WR2* I/O UNIT WRITE 2
Data Comparison Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
300 =* EQUAL
301 =L* DOUBLE EQUAL
302 =S* SIGNED EQUAL
303 =SL* DOUBLE SIGNED EQUAL
305 <>* NOT EQUAL
306 <>L* DOUBLE NOT EQUAL
307 <>S* SIGNED NOT EQUAL
308 <>SL* DOUBLE SIGNED NOT
EQUAL
310 <* LESS THAN
311 <L* DOUBLE LESS THAN
312 <S* SIGNED LESS THAN
313 <SL* DOUBLE SIGNED LESS
THAN
315 <=* LESS THAN OR EQUAL
316 <=L* DOUBLE LESS THAN OR
EQUAL
317 <=S* SIGNED LESS THAN OR
EQUAL
318 <=SL* DOUBLE SIGNED LESS
THAN OR EQUAL
320 >* GREATER THAN
321 >L* DOUBLE GREATER THAN
322 >S* SIGNED GREATER THAN
323 >SL* DOUBLE SIGNED
GREATER THAN
325 >=* GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
326 >=L* DOUBLE GREATER THAN
OR EQUAL
327 >=S* SIGNED GREATER THAN
OR EQUAL
328 >=SL* DOUBLE SIGNED GREAT-
ER THAN OR EQUAL
Appendix AInstruction Set
519
Note Instructions marked with an asterisk (*) are supported by version-2 CVM1 CPUs only.
Bit Tests
Code Mnemonic Name
350 TST* BIT TEST
351 TSTN* BIT TEST
Symbol Math Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
400 +(j)* SIGNED BINARY ADD
WITHOUT CARRY
401 +L(j)* DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
ADD WITHOUT CARRY
402 +C(j)* SIGNED BINARY ADD
WITH CARRY
403 +CL(j)* DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
ADD WITH CARRY
404 +B(j)* BCD ADD WITHOUT
CARRY
405 +BL(j)* DOUBLE BCD ADD
WITHOUT CARRY
406 +BC(j)* BCD ADD WITH CARRY
407 +BCL(j)* DOUBLE BCD ADD WITH
CARRY
410 –(j)* SIGNED BINARY
SUBTRACT WITHOUT
CARRY
411 -L(j)* DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
SUBTRACT WITHOUT
CARRY
412 –C(j)* SIGNED BINARY
SUBTRACT WITH CARRY
413 –CL(j)* DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
SUBTRACT WITH CARRY
414 –B(j)* BCD SUBTRACT WITHOUT
CARRY
415 –BL(j)* DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT
WITHOUT CARRY
416 –BC(j)* BCD SUBTRACT WITH
CARRY
417 –BCL(j)* DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT
WITH CARRY
420 *(j)* SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY
421 *L(j)* DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
MULTIPLY
422 *U(j)* UNSIGNED BINARY
MULTIPLY
423 *UL(j)* DOUBLE UNSIGNED
BINARY MULTIPLY
424 *B(j)* BCD MULTIPLY
425 *BL(j)* DOUBLE BCD MULTIPLY
430 /(j)* SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE
431 /L(j)* DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
DIVIDE
432 /U(j)* UNSIGNED BINARY DIVIDE
433 /UL(j)* DOUBLE UNSIGNED
BINARY DIVIDE
434 /B(j)* BCD DIVIDE
435 /BL(j)* DOUBLE BCD DIVIDE
Floating-point Math Instructions
Code Mnemonic Name
450 FIX(j)* FLOATING-TO-16-BIT
451 FIXL(j)* FLOATING-TO-32-BIT
452 FLT(j)* 16-BIT-TO-FLOATING
453 FLTL(j)* 32-BIT-TO-FLOATING
454 +F(j)* FLOATING-POINT ADD
455 –F(j)* FLOATING-POINT
SUBTRACT
456 *F(j)* FLOATING-POINT
MULTIPLY
457 /F(j)* FLOATING-POINT DIVIDE
458 RAD(j)* DEGREES-TO-RADIANS
459 DEG(j)* RADIANS-TO-DEGREES
460 SIN(j)* SINE
461 COS(j)* COSINE
462 TAN(j)* TANGENT
463 ASIN(j)* SINE-TO-ANGLE
464 ACOS(j)* COSINE-TO-ANGLE
465 ATAN(j)* TANGENT-TO-ANGLE
466 SQRT(j)* SQUARE ROOT
467 EXP(j)* EXPONENT
468 LOG(j)* LOGARITHM
Appendix AInstruction Set
520
Programming Instructions
The following tables detail all of the ladder diagram programming instructions for the CV-series PCs and the
applicable data areas for each. Bit and word addresses for each area are given in the footnotes.
Up and down differentiated instructions are indicated with an up or down arrow (j or i) prefix. Immediate re-
fresh instructions are indicated with a “!” prefix.
The DM and EM areas can be indirectly addressed by specifying the data area as *DM or *EM, and then en-
tering the address of the DM or EM word that contains the actual data. Index and data registers can also be
used for indirect addressing.
BASIC Instructions
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol Function Operand data
areas Page
LOAD
LD, !LD, jLD, iLD,
!jLD, !iLD BDefines the status of bit B as the execution
condition for subsequent operations on the
instruction line.
B:
CIO
G
A
T/C
ST
TN
121
LOAD NOT
LD NOT, !LD NOT BDefines the inverse of the status of bit B as the
execution condition for subsequent operations
on the instruction line.
B:
CIO
G
A
T/C
ST
TN
121
AND
AND, !AND, jAND,
iAND, !jAND, !iAND BLogically ANDs the status of the designated bit
with the current execution condition. B:
CIO
G
A
T/C
ST
TN
121
AND NOT
AND NOT, !AND NOT BLogically ANDs the inverse of the status of the
designated bit with the current execution
condition.
B:
CIO
G
A
T/C
ST
TN
121
Appendix AInstruction Set
521
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
OR
OR, !OR, jOR, iOR,
!jOR, !iOR B
Logically ORs the status of the designated bit
with the current execution condition. B:
CIO
G
A
T/C
ST
TN
121
OR NOT
OR NOT, !OR NOT B
Logically ORs the inverse of the status of the
designated bit with the current execution
condition.
B:
CIO
G
A
T/C
ST
TN
121
AND LOAD
AND LD Logically ANDs the execution conditions left
over from preceding logic blocks. None 125
OR LOAD
OR LOAD Logically ORs the execution conditions left
over from preceding logic blocks. None 125
OUTPUT
OUT, !OUT BTurns B ON for an ON execution condition;
turns B OFF for an OFF execution condition. B:
CIO
G
A
TR
126
OUTPUT NOT
OUT NOT, !OUT NOT BTurns B OFF for an ON execution condition;
turns B ON for an OFF execution condition. B:
CIO
G
A
126
TIMER
TIM
TIM N S
Creates a decrementing ON-delay timer. S
(set value): 000.0 to 999.9 s. Each timer
number (BCD) can be used in only one timer
instruction (TIM, TIMH(015), and TTIM(120)),
unless the timers are never active
simultaneously. The timer number can be
designated as a constant or indirectly
addressed by placing the address of the
present value for the timer in an Index
Register.
N:
#S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
142
Appendix AInstruction Set
522
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
COUNTER
CNT
CNT N S
CP
R
Creates a decrementing counter. S (set value):
0 to 9999; CP: count pulse; R: reset input.
Each counter number (BCD) can be used in
only one counter instruction (CNT,
CNTR(012), and TCNT(123)), unless the
counters are never active simultaneously. The
counter number can be designated as a
constant or indirectly addressed by placing the
address of the present value of the counter in
an Index Register.
N:
#S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
153
Special Instructions
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol Function Operand data
areas Page
NO OPERATION
NOP (000)
NOP
Nothing is executed and program operation
moves to the next instruction. None 139
END
END (001)
END
Required at the end of each program,
including action and transition programs.
Instructions located after END(01) will not be
executed.
None 139
INTERLOCK
IL
INTERLOCK CLEAR
ILC (002)
IL
(003)
ILC
If an interlock condition is OFF, all outputs
between the current IL(002) and the next
ILC(003) are turned OFF; the PVs of timers
that use timer numbers (TIM, TIMH(015), and
TIML(121)) are reset. Other instructions are
treated as NOP. The PVs of counters,
TTIM(120), and MTIM(122) are maintained. If
the execution condition is ON, execution
continues normally.
None 134
JUMP
JMP
(004)
JMP N
JMP(004) is always used in conjunction with
JME(005) to create jumps, i.e., to skip from
one point in a ladder diagram to another point.
JMP(004) defines the point from which the
jump will be made; JME(005) defines the
destination of the jump. When the execution
condition for JMP(004) in ON, no jump is
made and the program is executed
consecutively as written. When the execution
condition for JMP(004) is OFF, program
execution will go immediately to the JME(005)
with the same jump number without executing
any instructions in between. TIM and
TIMH(015) continue counting even when
jumped.
N:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
136
JUMP END
JME
(005)
JME N
JME(005) defines the destination of a jump
started by JMP(004). N:
#136
Appendix AInstruction Set
523
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
FAILURE ALARM
FAL, jFAL
(006)
FAL N M
Outputs a FAL error number (N) and
generates a non-fatal error when the
execution condition is ON. N must be between
001 and 511. When the FAL number is
generated, a corresponding bit is turned ON in
the FAL output area, and the FAL number is
output to A400. A 16 character message
stored in M to M+7 can be output to a
Peripheral Device if desired. The same FAL
numbers are used for both FAL(006) and
FALS(007), except 000. N can be set to 000 to
reset a single FAL error designated by M or to
reset all non-fatal errors by designating FFFF
for M.
N:
#M:
CIO
G
A
#
DM
354
FAILURE ALARM
FALS, jFALS
(007)
FALS N M
Outputs the FAL error number (N) and
generates a fatal error when the execution
condition is ON. N must be between 001 and
511. The error number is output to A400. The
same FAL numbers are used for both
FAL(006) and FALS(007), except N cannot be
defined as 000 with FALS(007). A 16
character message stored in M to M+7 can be
output to a Peripheral Device if desired.
N:
#M:
CIO
G
A
#
DM
354
STEP DEFINE
STEP
(008)
STEP B
(008)
STEP
When used with a control bit (B), defines the
start of a new step and resets the previous
step. When used without B, it defines the end
of step execution. The steps referred to here
are for step execution of ladder diagram
programs and are not related to SFC.
B:
CIO
G
A
368
STEP START
SNXT
(009)
SNXT B
Used with a control bit (B) to indicate the end
of the previous step, reset the previous step,
and start the step which has been defined with
the same control bit. The steps referred to
here are for step execution of ladder diagram
programs and are not related to SFC.
B:
CIO
G
A
368
NOT
NOT
(010)
NOT
NOT(010) is used along an instruction line to
invert the current execution condition. It
cannot be placed at the end of an instruction
line, only between conditions or between a
condition and a right-hand instruction.
None 125
KEEP
KEEP, !KEEP
(011)
KEEP B
S
R
Defines a bit (B) as a latch controlled by the
set (S) and reset (R) inputs. B will turn ON
when S turns ON and will turn OFF when R
turns OFF. B will turn OFF if both S and R are
ON.
B:
CIO
G
A
132
REVERSIBLE COUNTER
CNTR
(012)
CNTR N S
II
DI
R
Increases or decreases the PV by one
whenever the increment input (II) or
decrement input (DI) condition, respectively,
go from OFF to ON. S (set value): 0 to 9999;
R: reset input. Each counter number can be
used in only one counter instruction (CNT,
CNTR(012), and TCNT(123)), unless the
counters are never active simultaneously. The
counter number can be entered as a constant
or indirectly addressed by placing the address
of the present value of the counter in an Index
Register.
N:
#S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
156
Appendix AInstruction Set
524
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
DIFFERENTIATE UP
DIFU, !DIFU
(013)
DIFU B
DIFU(013) turns ON the designated bit (B) for
one cycle when the execution condition
changes from OFF to ON.
B:
CIO
G
A
127
DIFFERENTIATE DOWN
DIFD, !DIFD
(014)
DIFD B
DIFD(014) turns ON the designated bit (B) for
one cycle when the execution condition
changes from ON to OFF.
B:
CIO
G
A
127
HIGH-SPEED TIMER
TIMH
(015)
TIMH N S
Creates a high-speed, decrementing,
ON-delay timer. S (set value): 00.02 to
99.99 s. Each timer number can be used in
only one timer instruction (TIM, TIMH(015),
and TTIM(120)), unless the timers are never
active simultaneously.
N:
#
G
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
146
SET
SET, !SET, jSET, !iSET, !jSET, !iSET
(016)
SET B
Turns ON the designated bit when the
execution condition is ON, and does not affect
the status of the designated bit when the
execution condition is OFF.
B:
CIO
G
A
129
RSET
RSET, !RSET, jRSET, !iRSET, !jRSET,
!iRSET
(017)
RSET B
Turns OFF the designated bit when the
execution condition is ON, and does not affect
the status of the designated bit when the
execution condition is OFF.
B:
CIO
G
A
129
CONDITION ON
UP (018)
UP
(V2 only) Turns ON the execution condition for one
cycle at the rising edge (OFF to ON) of the
execution condition and then turns OFF the
execution condition until the next time a rising
edge is detected.
None 123
CONDITION OFF
DOWN (019)
DOWN
(V2 only) Turns ON the execution condition for one
cycle at the falling edge (ON to OFF) of the
execution condition and then turns OFF the
execution condition until the next time a falling
edge is detected.
None
COMPARE
CMP, !CMP
(020)
CMP Cp1Cp2
Compares the data in two 4-digit hexadecimal
words (Cp1 and Cp2) and outputs result to the
GR, EQ, or LE Flags. CMP(020) cannot be
placed at the end of an instruction line, only
between conditions or between a condition
and a right-hand instruction.
Cp1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Cp2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
205
DOUBLE COMPARE
CMPL
(021)
CMPL Cp1Cp2
Compares the 8-digit hexadecimal content of
Cp1+1 and Cp1 to the 8-digit hexadecimal
content of Cp2+1 and Cp2 and outputs result
to the GR, EQ, or LE Flags. CMPL(021)
cannot be placed at the end of an instruction
line, only between conditions or between a
condition and a right-hand instruction.
Cp1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Cp2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
207
Appendix AInstruction Set
525
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
BLOCK COMPARE
BCMP, jBCMP
(022)
BCMP S CB R
Compares a 1-word binary value (S) with the
16 ranges given in the comparison table (CB
is the starting word of the comparison block).
If the value falls within any of the ranges, the
corresponding bits in the result word (R) is
turned ON (set to 1). The comparison block
must be within one data area.
S
CB CB+1
CB+2 CB+3
CB+4 CB+5
CB+30 CB+31
1
0
1
0
Lower limit Upper limit
Lower limit ≤ S ≤ Upper limit 1
Result
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
CB:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
208
TABLE COMPARE
TCMP, jTCMP
(023)
TCMP S TB R
Compares a 4-digit hexadecimal value (S)
with values in table consisting of 16 words
(TB is the first word of the comparison table).
If the value of S equals the content of a word
in the table, the corresponding bit in result
word (R) is set (1 for agreement, and 0 for
disagreement). The table must be entirely
within one data area.
STB
TB+1
TB+13
TB+14
TB+15
1: agreement
0: disagreement
0
1
1
0
1
R
0
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
TB:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
210
MULTIPLE COMPARE
MCMP, jMCMP
(024)
MCMPTB1TB2R
Compares the contents of the 16 words TB1
through TB1+15 to the contents of the 16
words TB2 through TB2+15, and turns ON
the corresponding bit in word R when the
contents are not equal. (In the example
below, the contents of TB1 and TB2 are not
equal, and the contents of TB1+1 and TB2+1
are equal.) The table must be entirely within
one data area.
TB2+1
TB2+13
TB2+14
TB2+15
0: agreement
1: disagreement
0
1
1
0
1
R
0
TB1+1
TB1+13
TB1+14
TB1+15
TB1TB2
TB1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
TB2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
211
Appendix AInstruction Set
526
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
EQUAL
EQU, jEQU
(025)
EQU Cp1Cp2
Compares the data in two 4-digit hexadecimal
words (Cp1 and Cp2) and produces an ON
execution condition if the contents are the
same. EQU(025) cannot be placed at the end
of an instruction line, only between conditions
or between a condition and a right-hand
instruction.
Cp1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Cp2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
212
SIGNED BINARY COMPARE
CPS, !CPS
(026)
CPS S1S2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in signed
16-bit binary. The content of S1 is compared to
that of S2.
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
215
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
COMPARE
CPSL, !CPSL
(027)
CPSL S1S2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in signed
32-bit binary. The content of S1 and S1+1 is
compared to that of S2 and S2+1.
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
216
UNSIGNED COMPARE
CMP, !CMP
(028)
CMP S1S2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in four
digits hexadecimal. The content of S1 is
compared to that of S2.
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
217
DOUBLE UNSIGNED
COMPARE
CMPL, !CMPL
(029)
CMPL S1S2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in eight
digits hexadecimal. The content of S1 and
S1+1 is compared to that of S2 and S2+1.
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
217
MOVE
MOV, !MOV, jMOV, !jMOV
(030)
MOV S D
Copies data from the source word (S) to the
destination word (D). S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
D:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
187
MOVE NOT
MVN, jMVN
(031)
MVN S D
Copies the inverse of the data in the source
word (S) to the destination word (D). S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
D:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
188
Appendix AInstruction Set
527
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
DOUBLE MOVE
MOVL, jMOVL
(032)
MOVl S D
Copies data from the source words (S and
S+1) to the destination words (D and D+1). S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
D:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
189
DOUBLE MOVE NOT
MVNL, jMVNL
(033)
MVNL S D
Copies the inverse of the data in the source
words (S and S+1) to destination words (D
and D+1).
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
D:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
190
DATA EXCHANGE
XCHG, jXCHG
(034)
XCHG E1E2
Exchanges the contents of two words (E1 and
E2).
E2
E1
E1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
E2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
191
DOUBLE DATA EXCHANGE
XCGL, jXCGL
(035)
XCGL E1E2
Exchanges the contents of E1 and E1+1 with
the contents of E2 and E2+1.
E2+1E1+1
E2
E1
E1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
E2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
192
MOVE TO REGISTER
MOVR, jMOVR
(036)
MOVR S D
Copies the memory address of word or bit S to
the Index Register designated in D. The Index
Register must be directly addressed. When S
contains a timer or counter number, the
address of the timer or counter Completion
Flag is copied to the Index Register.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
TN
ST
DM
D:
IR** 193
MOVE QUICK
MOVQ
(037)
MOVQ S D
Copies the content of S to D at high speed.
MOVQ(037) copies the content of S to D at
least 10 times faster than MOV(030).
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM*
D:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM*
194
MULTIPLE BIT TRANSFER
XFRB, ↑XFRB
(038)
XFRB C S D
(V2 only) Transfers specified consecutive bits to a
destination beginning with a specified bit in a
specified word.
Number of bits to be transferred (00 to FF)
Beginning transfer bit address
in source word (0 to F)
Beginning transfer bit address
in destination word (0 to F)
Contents of C
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
195
Appendix AInstruction Set
528
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
BLOCK TRANSFER
XFER, jXFER
(040)
XFER N S D
Moves the content of several consecutive
source words (S gives the address of the
starting source word) to consecutive
destination words (D is the starting destination
word). All source words must be in the same
data area, as must all destination words.
Transfers can be within one data area or
between two data areas, but the source and
destination words must not overlap.
S
S+1
D
D+1
S+N–1 D+N–1
No. of
Words
N:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR*
IR*
D:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR*
IR*
197
BLOCK SET
BSET, jBSET
(041)
BSET S St E
Copies the content of one word or constant (S)
to several consecutive words (from the starting
word, St, through to the ending word, E). St
and E must be in the same data area.
SSt
E
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
St:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR*
IR*
E:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR*
IR*
198
MOVE BIT
MOVB, jMOVB
(042)
MOVB S Bi D
Copies the data from the bit in the source
word (S) specified in the bit designator (Bi) to
the bit in the destination word (D) specified in
the bit designator (Bi).
The rightmost two digits of Bi designate the
source bit and the leftmost two digits
designate the destination bit.
1
Bi
120
Source bit (00 to 15)
Destination bit (00 to 15)
S:
CIO
G
A
#
DM
DR
IR
Bi:
CIO
G
A
#
T/C
DM
DR
IR
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
199
MOVE DIGIT
MOVD, jMOVD
(043)
MOVD S Di D
Copies the content of the specified digit(s) in S
to the specified digit(s) in D. Up to four digits
can be transferred at one time. The first digit to
be copied, the number of digits to be copied,
and the first digit to receive the copy are
designated in Di. The rightmost digit in Di
determines the first digit in S to be transferred.
The next digit determines the number of digits
to be transferred, and the third digit
determines the first digit in D to which data will
be transferred.
First digit in S (0 to 3)
Number of digits (0 to 3)
0: 1 digit
1: 2 digits
2: 3 digits
3: 4 digits
First digit in D (0 to 3)
3 2 1 0
Not used.
Di
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Di:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
D:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
201
Appendix AInstruction Set
529
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
SINGLE WORD DISTRIBUTE
DIST, jDIST
(044)
DIST S DBs Of
Copies one word of source data (S) to the
destination word whose address is given by
the destination base word (DBs) plus the
offset (Of).
SBase (DBs)
+
Offset (OF)
(S) (DBs+Of)
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
DBs:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR*
IR*
Of:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR*
IR*
202
DATA COLLECT
COLL, jCOLL
(045)
COLL SBs Of D
Copies data from the source word and writes
it to the destination word (D). The source
word is determined by adding the offset (Of)
to the address of the source base word (SBs).
Base (DBs)
+
Offset (OF)
(SBs+Of) (D)
SBs:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR*
IR*
Of:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
D:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
203
INTERBANK BLOCK
TRANSFER
BXFR, ↑BXFR
(046)
BXFR C S D
(V2 only) Transfers specified consecutive bits from the
source bank to a destination beginning with a
specified word in a specified bank.
Dest. bank no. Source bank no.
x103x102x101x100
x104
000
C
C+1
C+2
Words to
transfer
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
D:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
204
MULTIPLE BIT SET
SETA, ↑SETA
(047)
SETA D N1N2
(V2 only) Turns ON a designated number of continuous
bits, beginning from the designated bit of the
designated word.
D:
CIO
G
A
N1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
N2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
130
MULTIPLE BIT RESET
RSTA, ↑RSTA
(048)
RSTA D N1N2
(V2 only) Turns OFF a designated number of continuous
bits, beginning from the designated bit of the
designated word.
D:
CIO
G
A
N1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
N2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
130
SHIFT REGISTER
SFT
(050)
SFT St E
I
P
R
Creates a bit shift register for data from the
starting word (St) through to the ending word
(E). I: input bit; P: shift pulse; R: reset input. St
must be less than or equal to E. St and E
must be in the same data area.
ESt
15 1500 IN
00
St:
CIO
G
A
E:
CIO
G
A
159
Appendix AInstruction Set
530
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
REVERSIBLE SHIFT REGISTER
SFTR, jSFTR
(051)
SFTR C St E
Shifts bits in the specified word or series of
words either left or right. Starting (St) and
ending words (E) must be specified. Control
word (C) contains shift direction, reset input,
and data input. (Bit 12: 0 = shift right, 1 = shift
left. Bit 13 is the value shifted in, with the bit at
the opposite end being moved to CY. Bit 14: 1
= shift enabled, 0 = shift disabled. If bit 15 is
ON when SFTR(051) is executed with an ON
condition, the entire shift register and CY will
be set to zero.) St and E must be in the same
data area and St must be less than or equal to
E.
CY
ESt
15
00
CY
E
IN
St IN
00 15 00
15 00 15
C:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
St:
CIO
G
A
DM
E:
CIO
G
A
DM
162
ASYNCHRONOUS SHIFT REGISTER
ASFT, jASFT
(052)
ASFT C St E
Exchanges the contents of adjacent words
when the contents of one of the words is zero
and the other is non-zero. By repeating the
instruction several times, all of the words with
a content of zero accumulate at the lower or
higher end of the range defined by St and E. If
C contains 4000, non-zero words are shifted
to the next higher address; if C contains 6000,
non-zero words are shifted to the next lower
address; and if C contains 8000, all words in
the register are set to zero.
C:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
St:
CIO
G
A
DM
E:
CIO
G
A
DM
163
WORD SHIFT
WSFT, jWSFT
(053)
WSFT S St E
The data in the source word (S) is transferred
into the starting word (St), and the data in the
words from the starting word (St) through to
the ending word (E) is shifted left in word
units. The data in the ending word is lost. St
must be less than or equal to E, and St and E
must be in the same data area.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
St:
CIO
G
A
DM
E:
CIO
G
A
DM
165
SHIFT N-BIT DATA LEFT
NSFL, ↑NSFL
(054)
NSFL D C N
(V2 only) Shifts the specified number of bits (i.e., the
shift data length), from the beginning bit of the
beginning word, one bit at a time to the left. A
“0” is entered for the beginning bit (bit C of
word D). The status of the Nth bit is then
shifted to CY.
CY
D Wd: C bit
N bits
0
D Wd
D:
CIO
G
A
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
N:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
166
Appendix AInstruction Set
531
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
SHIFT N-BIT DATA RIGHT
NSFR, ↑NSFR
(055)
NSFR D C N
(V2 only) Shifts the specified number of bits (i.e., the
shift data length), from the beginning bit of the
beginning word, one bit at a time to the right. A
“0” is entered for the beginning bit (bit C of
word D). The status of the Nth bit is then
shifted to CY.
CY
D Wd: C bit
N bits
0
Wd D
D:
CIO
G
A
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
N:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
167
SHIFT N-BITS LEFT
NASL, ↑NASL
(056)
NASL D C
(V2 only) Shifts to the left, for the specified number of
bits, the status of the 16 bits in the specified
word.
CY
. . . . .
Number of bits shifted
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
168
SHIFT N-BITS RIGHT
NASR, ↑NASR
(057)
NASR D C
(V2 only) Shifts to the right, for the specified number of
bits, the status of the 16 bits in the specified
word.
CY
Wd D
. . . . .
Number of bits shifted
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
169
DOUBLE SHIFT N-BITS
LEFT
NSLL, ↑NSLL
(058)
NSLL D C
(V2 only) Shifts to the left, for the specified number of
bits, the status of the 32 bits in the specified
words.
CY
Wd D
. . .
Number of bits shifted
. . .
Wd D+1
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
170
DOUBLE SHIFT N-BITS
RIGHT
NSRL, ↑NSRL
(059)
NSRL D C
(V2 only) Shifts to the right, for the specified number of
bits, the status of the 32 bits in the specified
words.
CY
Wd D
. . .
Number of bits shifted
. . .
Wd D+1
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
172
Appendix AInstruction Set
532
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
ARITHMETIC SHIFT LEFT
ASL, jASL
(060)
ASL Wd
Each bit within a single word of data (Wd) is
shifted one bit to the left, with zero written to
bit 00 and bit 15 moved to CY.
Wd
15 00
CY 0
Wd:
CIO
G
A
DM
173
ARITHMETIC SHIFT RIGHT
ASR, jASR
(061)
ASR Wd
Each bit within a single word of data (Wd) is
shifted one bit to the right, with zero written to
bit 15 and bit 00 moved to CY.
0Wd CY
15 00
Wd:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
174
ROTATE LEFT
ROL, jROL
(062)
ROL Wd
Each bit within a single word of data (Wd) is
moved one bit to the left, with bit 15 moving to
carry (CY) and CY moving to bit 00.
15 00 CY
Wd
Wd:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
175
ROTATE RIGHT
ROR, jROR
(063)
ROR Wd
Each bit within a single word of data (Wd) is
moved one bit to the right, with bit 00 moving
to carry (CY) and CY moving to bit 15.
15 00
CY Wd
Wd:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
176
DOUBLE SHIFT LEFT
ASLL, jASLL
(064)
ASLL Wd
Each bit within two consecutive words of data
(Wd and Wd+1) is shifted one bit to the left,
with zero written to bit 00 of Wd and bit 15 of
Wd+1 moved to CY.
Wd+1
15 00
CY 15 00 0
Wd
Wd:
CIO
G
A
DM
177
DOUBLE SHIFT RIGHT
ASRL, jASRL
(065)
ASRL Wd
Each bit within two consecutive words of data
(Wd and Wd+1) is shifted one bit to the right,
with zero written to bit 15 of Wd+1 and bit 00
of Wd moved to CY. 15 00
0Wd CY
15 00
Wd+1
Wd:
CIO
G
A
DM
178
DOUBLE ROTATE LEFT
ROLL, jROLL
(066)
ROLL Wd
Each bit within two consecutive words of data
(Wd and Wd+1) is moved one bit to the left,
with bit 15 of Wd+1 moving to carry (CY) and
CY moving to bit 00 of Wd.
15 00 CY
Wd+1 15 00
Wd
Wd:
CIO
G
A
DM
179
DOUBLE ROTATE RIGHT
RORL, jRORL
(067)
RORL Wd
Each bit within two consecutive words of data
(Wd and Wd+1) is moved one bit to the right,
with bit 00 of Wd moving to carry (CY) and CY
moving to bit 15 of Wd+1.
15 00
CY Wd+1 Wd
15 00
Wd:
CIO
G
A
DM
182
Appendix AInstruction Set
533
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
SHIFT DIGIT LEFT
SLD, jSLD
(068)
SLD St E
Shifts all data between the starting word (St)
and ending word (E) one digit (four bits) to the
left, writing zero into the rightmost digit of the
starting word. St and E must be in the same
data area.
E
St
St+1
0
Lost data
St:
CIO
G
A
DM
E:
CIO
G
A
DM
185
SHIFT DIGIT RIGHT
SRD, jSRD
(069)
SRD St E
Shifts all data between starting word (St) and
ending word (E) one digit (four bits) to the
right, writing zero into the leftmost digit of the
ending word. St and E must be in the same
data area.
E
St
St+1
0
Lost data
St:
CIO
G
A
DM
E:
CIO
G
A
DM
186
BCD ADD
ADD, jADD
(070)
ADD Au Ad R
Adds two 4-digit BCD values (Au and Ad) and
the content of CY, and outputs the result to the
specified result word (R).
Au + Ad + CY CY R
Au:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Ad:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
250
BCD SUBTRACT
SUB, jSUB
(071)
SUB Mi Su R
Subtracts both the 4-digit BCD subtrahend
(Su) and the content of CY from the 4-digit
BCD minuend (Mi) and outputs the result to
the specified result word (R).
Mi – Su – CY CY R
Mi:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Su:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
251
BCD MULTIPLY
MUL, jMUL
(072)
MUL Md Mr R
Multiplies the 4-digit BCD multiplicand (Md)
and 4-digit BCD multiplier (Mr) and outputs the
result to the specified result words (R and
R+1). R and R+1 must be in the same data
area.
Md x Mr R+1 R
Md:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Mr:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
253
Appendix AInstruction Set
534
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
BCD DIVIDE
DIV, jDIV
(073)
DIV Dd Dr R
Divides the 4-digit BCD dividend (Dd) by the
4-digit BCD divisor (Dr) and outputs the result
to the specified result words. R receives the
quotient; R+1 receives the remainder. R and
R+1 must be in the same data area.
R+1 R
Dd ÷ Dr
Dd:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Dr:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
254
DOUBLE BCD ADD
ADDL, jADDL
(074)
ADDL Au Ad R
Adds two 8-digit BCD values (2 words each)
and the content of CY and outputs the result to
the specified result words. All words for any
one operand must be in the same data area.
Au+1
+ Ad+1
+
CY R+1
CY
Au
Ad
R
Au:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Ad:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
255
DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT
SUBL, jSUBL
(075)
SUBL Mi Su R
Subtracts both the 8-digit BCD subtrahend
and the content of CY from an 8-digit BCD
minuend, and outputs the result to the
specified result words. All words for any one
operand must be in the same data area.
Mi+1 Mi
– Su+1 Su
–
CY R+1 R
CY
Mi:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Su:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
256
DOUBLE BCD MULTIPLY
MULL, jMULL
(076)
MULL Md Mr R
Multiplies the 8-digit BCD multiplicand and
8-digit BCD multiplier, and outputs the result to
the specified result words. All words for any
one operand must be in the same data area.
Md+1 Md
Mr+1 Md
R+3 R+2 R+1 R
X
Md:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Mr:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
257
DOUBLE BCD DIVIDE
DIVL, jDIVL
(077)
DIVL Dd Dr R
Divides the 8-digit BCD dividend by an 8-digit
BCD divisor, and outputs the result to the
specified result words. All words for any one
operand must be in the same data area.
Dd+1 Dd
Dr+1 Dr
R+1 R
R+3 R+2
Quotient
Remainder
÷
Dd:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Dr:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
258
SET CARRY
STC, jSTC (078)
STC
Sets the Carry Flag (i.e., turns ON A50004). None 250
Appendix AInstruction Set
535
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
CLEAR CARRY
CLC, jCLC (079)
CLC
Clears the Carry Flag (i.e., turns OFF
A50004). None 250
BINARY ADD
ADB, jADB
(080)
ADB Au Ad R
Adds two 4-digit hexadecimal values (Au and
Ad) and content of CY and outputs the result
to the specified result word (R).
Au + Ad + CY CY R
Au:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Ad:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
261
BINARY SUBTRACT
SBB, jSBB
(081)
SBB Mi Su R
Subtracts both the 4-digit hexadecimal
subtrahend (Su) and content of CY from the
4-digit hexadecimal minuend (Mi) and outputs
the result to the specified result word (R).
Mi – Su – CY CY R
Mi:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Su:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
262
BINARY MULTIPLY
MLB, jMLB
(082)
MLB Md Mr R
Multiplies the 4-digit hexadecimal multiplicand
(Md) and 4-digit hexadecimal multiplier (Mr)
and outputs the result to the specified result
words (R and R+1). R and R+1 must be in the
same data area.
Md x Mr R+1 R
Md:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Mr:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
264
BINARY DIVIDE
DVB, jDVB
(083)
DVB Dd Dr R
Divides the 4-digit hexadecimal dividend (Dd)
by the 4-digit hexadecimal divisor (Dr) and
outputs the result to the specified result words.
R receives the quotient; R+1 receives the
remainder. R and R+1 must be in the same
data area.
R+1 R
Dd ÷ Dr
Dd:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Dr:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
265
DOUBLE BINARY ADD
ADBL, jADBL
(084)
ADBL Au Ad R
Adds two 8-digit hexadecimal values (2 words
each) and the content of CY, and outputs the
result to the specified result words. All words
for any one operand must be in the same data
area. CY will be set (acting as the 9th digit) if
the result is greater than FFFF.
Au+1
+ Ad+1
+
CY R+1
CY
Au
Ad
R
Au:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Ad:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
266
Appendix AInstruction Set
536
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
DOUBLE BINARY SUBTRACT
SBBL, jSBBL
(085)
SBBL Mi Su R
Subtracts both the 8-digit hexadecimal
subtrahend and the content of CY from an
8-digit hexadecimal minuend and outputs the
result to the specified result words. All words
for any one operand must be in the same data
area. The Carry Flag will be set to indicate a
negative result.
Mi+1 Mi
– Su+1 Su
–
CY R+ 1 R
CY
Mi:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Su:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
268
DOUBLE BINARY MULTIPLY
MLBL, jMLBL
(086)
MLBL Md Mr R
Multiplies the 8-digit hexadecimal multiplicand
and 8-digit hexadecimal multiplier and outputs
the result to the specified result words. All
words for any one operand must be in the
same data area.
Md+1 Md
Mr+1 Md
R+3 R+2 R+1 R
X
Md:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Mr:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
269
DOUBLE BINARY DIVIDE
DVBL, jDVBL
(087)
DVBL Dd Dr R
Divides the 8-digit hexadecimal dividend by an
8-digit hexadecimal divisor and outputs the
result to the specified result words. All words
for any one operand must be in the same data
area.
Dd+1 Dd
Dr+1 Dr
R+1 R
R+3 R+2
Quotient
Remainder
÷
Dd:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Dr:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
270
INCREMENT BCD
INC, jINC
(090)
INC Wd
Increments the value of a 4-digit BCD word
(Wd) by one, without affecting carry (CY). Wd:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
314
DECREMENT BCD
DEC, jDEC
(091)
DEC Wd
Decrements the value of a 4-digit BCD word
(Wd) by one, without affecting carry (CY). Wd:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
314
INCREMENT BINARY
INCB, jINCB
(092)
INCB Wd
Increments the value of a 4-digit hexadecimal
word (Wd) by one, without affecting carry
(CY).
Wd:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
315
Appendix AInstruction Set
537
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
DECREMENT BINARY
DECB, jDECB
(093)
DECB Wd
Decrements the value of a 4-digit hexadecimal
word (Wd) by one, without affecting carry
(CY).
Wd:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
316
DOUBLE INCREMENT BCD
INCL, jINCL
(094)
INCL Wd
Increments the 8-digit BCD value contained in
Wd+1 and Wd, without affecting carry (CY). Wd:
CIO
G
A
DM
316
DOUBLE DECREMENT BCD
DECL, jDECL
(095)
DECL Wd
Decrements the 8-digit BCD value contained
in Wd+1 and Wd, without affecting carry (CY). Wd:
CIO
G
A
DM
317
DOUBLE INCREMENT BINARY
INBL, jINBL
(096)
INBL Wd
Increments the 8-digit hexadecimal value
contained in Wd+1 and Wd, without affecting
carry (CY).
Wd:
CIO
G
A
DM
317
DOUBLE DECREMENT BINARY
DCBL, jDCBL
(097)
DCBL Wd
Decrements the 8-digit hexadecimal value
contained in Wd+1 and Wd, without affecting
carry (CY).
Wd:
CIO
G
A
DM
318
BCD-TO-BINARY
BIN, jBIN
(100)
BIN S R
Converts 4-digit, BCD data in source word (S)
into 16-bit binary data, and outputs converted
data to result word (R).
S
x100
x101
x102
x103
x160
x161
x162
x163
(BCD)(BIN)
R
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
219
BINARY-TO-BCD
BCD, jBCD
(101)
BCD S R
Converts binary data in source word (S) into
BCD, and outputs converted data to result
word (R).
x160
x161
x162
x163
x101
x102
x103
S R
(BIN) (BCD)x100
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
220
Appendix AInstruction Set
538
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
DOUBLE BCD-TO-DOUBLE BINARY
BINL, jBINL
(102)
BINL S R
Converts the BCD value of the two source
words (S: starting word) into binary and
outputs the converted data to the two result
words (R: starting word). All words for any one
operand must be in the same data area.
S
S+1
R
R+1
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
221
DOUBLE BINARY-TO-DOUBLE BCD
BCDL, jBCDL
(103)
BCDL S R
Converts the binary value of the two source
words (S: starting word) into eight digits of
BCD data, and outputs the converted data to
the two result words (R: starting result word).
Both words for any one operand must be in
the same data area.
S
S+1
R
R+1
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
222
2’S COMPLEMENT
NEG, jNEG
(104)
NEG S D
Takes the 2’s complement of the 4-digit
hexadecimal content of the source word (S)
and outputs the result to the result word (R).
This operation is effectively the same as
subtracting S from $0000 and outputting the
result to R.
GR (A50005) is ON when the content of S is
$8000.
EQ (A50006) is ON when the content of S is 0.
N (A50008) is the same as the status of bit 15
of R after execution.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
223
DOUBLE 2’S COMPLEMENT
NEGL, jNEGL
(105)
NEGL S D
Takes the 2’s complement of the 8-digit
hexadecimal content of the source words (S
and S+1) and outputs the result to the result
words (R and R+1). This operation is
effectively the same as subtracting S and S+1
from $0000 0000 and outputting the result to R
and R+1.
GR (A50005) is ON when the content of S is
$8000.
EQ (A50006) is ON when the content of S is 0.
N (A50008) is the same as the status of bit 15
of R after execution.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
224
SIGN
SIGN, jSIGN
(106)
SIGN S D
Places FFFF into D+1 if the sign bit (bit 15) of
S is 1, places 0000 into D+1 if the sign bit is 0,
and copies the content of S to D.
D+1 D
S
0000 or
FFFF
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
225
Appendix AInstruction Set
539
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
DATA DECODER
MLPX, jMLPX
(110)
MLPX S Di R
Converts up to four hexadecimal digits in the
source word (S) into decimal values from 0 to
15 and turns ON the corresponding bit(s) in
the result word(s) (R), or converts up to two
8-bit values in the source word (S) into
decimal values from 0 to 256 and turns on the
corresponding bit in sets of 16 result words.
There is one result word or set of 16 result
words for each converted value. Operation is
controlled by Di as follows:
Specifies the first digit to be converted
4-to-16: 0 to 3
8-to-256: 0 or 1
Number of digits to be converted
4-to-16: 0 to 3 (1 to 4 digits)
8-to-256: 0 or 1 (1 or 2 digits)
Process
0: 4-to-16
1: 8-to-256
3 2 1 0 Digit
0
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
Di:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
226
DATA ENCODER
DMPX, jDMPX
(111)
DMPX SB R Di
Determines the position of the leftmost ON bit
in the source word(s) or set of 16 source
words (starting word: SB) and then turns ON
the corresponding bit(s) in the specified digit of
the result word (R) or outputs the sequential
value of the bit as an 8-bit value to R. One
4-bit or 8-bit value is used for each source
word or set of 16 source words. Operation is
controlled by Di as follows:
Specifies the first digit to receive
converted data
16-to-4: 0 to 3
256-to-8: 0 or 1
Number of digits to be converted
16-to-4: 0 to 3 (1 to 4 digits)
256-to-8: 0 or 1 (1 or 2 digits)
Process
0: 16-to-4
1: 256-to-8
3210 Digit
0
SB:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
Di:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
228
7-SEGMENT DECODER
SDEC, jSDEC
(112)
SDEC S Di D
Converts hexadecimal digits from the source
word (S) into 7-segment display data. Results
are placed in consecutive half-words, starting
at the first destination word (D). Di gives digit
and destination details. The rightmost digit
gives the first digit to be converted. The next
digit to the left gives the number of digits to be
converted minus 1. If the third digit is 1, the
first converted data is transferred to left half of
the first destination word. If it is 0, the transfer
is to the right half.
S
D0 to F
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
Di:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
231
Appendix AInstruction Set
540
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
ASCII CONVERT
ASC, jASC
(113)
ASC S Di D
Converts hexadecimal digits from the source
word (S) into 8-bit ASCII values, starting at
leftmost or rightmost half of the starting
destination word (D). The rightmost digit of Di
designates the first source digit. The next digit
to the left gives the number of digits to be
converted. The third digit specifies the whether
the data is to be transferred to the rightmost
(0) or leftmost (1) half of the first destination
word. The leftmost digit specifies parity:
0: none,
1: even, or
2: odd.
S
D8-bit
data
0 to F
15 08 07 00
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
Di:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
234
BIT COUNTER
BCNT, jBCNT
(114)
BCNT N St R
Counts the number of ON bits in one or more
words (St is the beginning source word) and
outputs the result to the specified result word
(R). N must be in BCD and gives the number
of words to be counted. All words in which bits
are to be counted must be in the same data
area.
N:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
#
DR
IR
St:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
236
COLUMN TO LINE
LINE, jLINE
(115)
LINE S Bi D
Copies bit column Bi from the 16 word set S
through S+15 to the 16 bits of word D (00 to
15). In other words, bit Bi of S+n is copied to
bit n of D for n = 00 to 15.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
Bi:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
237
LINE TO COLUMN
COLM, jCOLM
(116)
COLM S D Bi
Copies the 16 bits of word S (00 to 15) to bit
column Bi of the 16 word set D through D+15.
In other words, bit n of S is copied to bit Bi of
D+n, for n=00 to 15.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
Bi:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
238
Appendix AInstruction Set
541
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
ASCII TO HEX
HEX, ↑HEX
(117)
HEX S C D
(V2 only) Converts the data in specified words from
ASCII to hexadecimal, and outputs the result
to a specified destination word.
Specifies the first digit to be output.
Number of digits to be converted.
0: 1 digit
1: 2 digits
2: 3 digits
3: 4 digits
First ASCII data to be converted.
0: Rightmost 8 bits
1: Leftmost 8 bits
Parity 0: None
1: Even
2: Odd
C
MSB LSB
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
239
ACCUMULATIVE TIMER
TTIM
(120)
TTIM N S
I
R
Creates a totalizing timer. I is the timer input; R
is the reset input. The timer PV is incremented
while the timer input is ON, maintained when I
is OFF, and reset to zero when R is ON. If
both I and R are ON simultaneously, the timer
is reset. The time is incremented from zero in
units of 0.1 second, and accuracy is +0.0/–0.1
second. The set value (S) must be between
000.0 and 999.9 s. The decimal point is not
entered. Each timer number (BCD) can be
used in only one timer instruction (TIM,
TIMH(015), and TTIM(120)), unless the timers
are never active simultaneously. The timer
number can be designated as a constant or
indirectly addressed by placing the address of
the present value for the timer in an Index
Register.
N:
#S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
148
LONG TIMER
TIML
(121)
TIML D1D2S
Creates a decrementing ON-delay timer that
can time up to 9,999,999.9 s (approx. 115
days). The timer is activated when its
execution condition goes ON and is reset (to
SV) when the execution condition goes OFF.
Once activated, TIML(121) measures in units
of 0.1 second from the SV, and accuracy is
+0.0/–0.1 second. The Completion Flag is bit
00 of D1. The PV is output to D2 and D2+1,
and the SV is set in S and S+1.
D1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
D2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
150
MULTI-OUTPUT TIMER
MTIM
(122)
MTIM D1D2S
Creates a totalizing timer that can have up to
eight pairs of set values and Completion
Flags. The timer is activated when the
execution condition is ON, and the reset bit
(bit 08 of D1) goes from ON to OFF. Each time
the instruction is executed, the PV (content of
D2) is compared to the eight SVs in S through
S+7 and if any of the SVs is less than or equal
to the PV, the corresponding Completion Flag
(bits 00 through 07 of D1 ) is turned ON. The
same MTIM(122) can be input into the
program several times to increase comparison
frequency and therefore accuracy.
D1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
D2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
151
Appendix AInstruction Set
542
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
TRANSITION COUNTER
TCNT
(123)
TCNT N S
Computes the number of times that a
transition program is executed and turns ON
the Transition Flag when the preset count is
reached. Each counter number (BCD) can be
used in only one counter instruction (CNT,
CNTR(012), and TCNT(123)), unless the
counters are never active simultaneously.
N:
#S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
#
DR
IR
434
READ STEP TIMER
TSR, jTSR
(124)
TSR N D
Reads the present value of the step timer for
step N and writes to D. N:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
#
DR
IR
D:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
435
WRITE STEP TIMER
TSW, jTSW
(125)
TSW S N
Changes the present value of the step timer
for step N to the value in S. S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
N:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
#
DR
IR
436
LOGICAL AND
ANDW, jANDW
(130)
ANDW I1I2R
Logically ANDs two 16-bit input words (I1 and
I2) and sets the bits in the result word (R) if the
corresponding bits in the input words are both
ON.
I1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
I2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
341
LOGICAL OR
ORW, jORW
(131)
ORW I1I2R
Logically ORs two 16-bit input words (I1 and
I2) and sets the bits in the result word (R)
when one or both of the corresponding bits in
the input words is/are ON.
I1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
I2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
342
EXCLUSIVE OR
XORW, jXORW
(132)
XORW I1I2R
Exclusively ORs two 16-bit input words (I1 and
I2) and sets the bits in the result word (R)
when the corresponding bits in input words
differ in status.
I1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
I2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
343
EXCLUSIVE NOR
XNRW, jXNRW
(133)
XNRW I1I2R
Exclusively NORs two 16-bit input words (I1
and I2) and sets the bits in the result word (R)
when the corresponding bits in both input
words have the same status.
I1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
I2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
343
Appendix AInstruction Set
543
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
DOUBLE LOGICAL AND
ANDL, jANDL
(134)
ANDL I1I2R
Logically ANDs the contents of I1 and I1+1
with the contents of I2 and I2+1 and sets the
bits in the result words (R and R+1) if the
corresponding bits in the input words are both
ON.
I1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
I2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
344
DOUBLE LOGICAL OR
ORWL, jORWL
(135)
ORWL I1I2R
Logically ORs the contents of I1 and I1+1 with
the contents of I2 and I2+1 and sets the bits in
the result words (R and R+1) when one or
both of the corresponding bits in the input
words are ON.
I1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
I2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
345
DOUBLE EXCLUSIVE OR
XORL, jXORL
(136)
XORL I1I2R
Exclusively ORs the contents of I 1 and I1+1
with the contents of I2 and I2+1 and sets the
bits in the result words (R and R+1) when the
corresponding bits in input words differ in
status.
I1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
I2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
346
DOUBLE EXCLUSIVE NOR
XNRL, jXNRL
(137)
XNRL I1I2R
Exclusively NORs the contents of I1 and I1+1
with the contents of I2 and I2+1 and sets the
bits in the result words (R and R+1) when the
corresponding bits in both input words have
the same status.
I1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
I2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
346
COMPLEMENT
COM, jCOM
(138)
COM Wd
Inverts the bit status of one word (Wd) of data,
changing 0s to 1s and 1s to 0s.
Wd Wd
Wd:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
347
DOUBLE COMPLEMENT
COML, jCOML
(139)
COML Wd
Inverts the bit status of two consecutive words
of data (Wd and Wd+1), changing 0s to 1s and
1s to 0s.
Wd and Wd+1 Wd and Wd+1
Wd:
CIO
G
A
DM
348
SQUARE ROOT
ROOT, jROOT
(140)
ROOT Sq R
Computes the square root of an 8-digit BCD
value (Sq and Sq+1) and outputs the
truncated 4-digit integer result to the specified
result word (R). Sq and Sq+1 must be in the
same data area.
Sq+1 Sq
R
Sq:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
323
Appendix AInstruction Set
544
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
FLOATING POINT DIVIDE
FDIV, jFDIV
(141)
FDIV Dd Dr R
Divides one floating point value by another
and outputs a floating point result. The
rightmost seven digits of each set of two
words (eight digits) are used for mantissa, and
the leftmost digit is used for the exponent and
its sign. Bits 12 to 14 give the exponent value
between 0 and 7. If bit 15 is 0, the exponent is
positive; if it’s 1, the exponent is negative.
÷
Dd+ 1 Dd
Dr+ 1 Dr
R+1 R
Dd:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
Dr:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
326
ARITHMETIC PROCESS
APR, jAPR
(142)
APR C S R
The operation of APR(142) depends on the
control word C. If C is #0000 or #0001,
APR(142) computes sin(Θ) or cos(Θ) and
outputs the result to R. Θ is contained in S in
units of tenths of degrees (0°≤Θ ≤90°).
If C is an address, APR(142) computes the
value of a function from the data in S and
outputs the result to R. The function is a series
of line segments (which can approximate a
curve) entered in advance in a table beginning
at C.
C:
CIO
G
A
#
DM
DR
IR
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
328
HOURS TO SECONDS
SEC, jSEC
(143)
SEC S R
Converts a time given in hours, minutes, and
seconds (S and S+1) to an equivalent time in
seconds only (R and R+1). S and S+1 must be
BCD and within one data area. R and R+1
must also be within one data area.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
349
SECONDS TO HOURS
HMS, jHMS
(144)
HMS S R
Converts a time given in seconds (S and S+1)
to an equivalent time in hours, minutes, and
seconds (R and R+1). S and S+1 must be
BCD between 0 and 35,999,999 and within the
same data area. R and R+1 must also be
within one data area.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
350
CALENDAR ADD
CADD, jCADD
(145)
CADD C T R
Adds the time in words T and T+1 to the
calendar data in words C, C+1, and C+2, and
outputs the result to words R, R+1, and R+2.
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
350
CALENDAR SUBTRACT
CSUB, jCSUB
(146)
CSUB C T R
Subtracts the time in words T and T+1 from
the calendar data in words C, C+1, and C+2,
and outputs the result to words R, R+1, and
R+2. The time and calendar formats are the
same as in CADD(145).
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
352
Appendix AInstruction Set
545
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
SUBROUTINE ENTRY
SBN (150)
SBN N
Calls subroutine N. Moves program operation
to the specified subroutine. N must be BCD
between 000 and 999 for the CV1000,
CV2000, or CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2 or between
000 and 099 for the CV500 or
CVM1-CPU01-EV2.
N:
#377
SUBROUTINE CALL
SBS, jSBS
(151)
SBS N
Marks the start of subroutine N. N must be
BCD between 000 and 999 for the CV1000,
CV2000, or CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2 or between
000 and 099 for the CV500 or
CVM1-CPU01-EV2.
N:
#378
SUBROUTINE RETURN
RET (152)
RET
Marks the end of a subroutine and returns
control to the main program. None 377
INTERRUPT MASK
MSKS, jMSKS
(153)
MSKS N S
N must be between 0 and 5 for the CV1000,
CV2000, or CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2 or between
0 and 4 for the CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2.
If N is 0 to 3, it designates the unit number of
the Interrupt Input Unit 0 to 3, the bits of the
designated Interrupt Input Unit corresponding
to ON bits in S are masked, and bits
corresponding to OFF bits in S are unmasked.
If N is 4 or 5, a scheduled interrupt is
designated and the time interval for the
scheduled interrupt is set according to the
value in S and the time unit set in the PC
Setup. CLI(154) should be used to set the time
to the first scheduled interrupt. Unstable
operation might result if the time to the first
interrupt is not set.
N:
#S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
385
CLEAR INTERRUPT
CLI, jCLI
(154)
CLI N S
N must be between 0 and 5 for the CV1000,
CV2000, or CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2 or between
0 and 4 for the CV500 or CVM1-CPU01-EV2.
If N is 0 to 3, it designates the unit number of
the Interrupt Input Unit and the interrupt inputs
from the designated Interrupt Input Unit
corresponding to ON bits in S are cleared. If N
is 4 or 5, a scheduled interrupt is designated
and the time to the first interrupt is set
according to the value in S and the time unit
set in the PC Setup.
N:
#S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
386
READ MASK
MSKR, jMSKR
(155)
MSKR N D
If N is 0 to 3, writes the current mask status of
the designated Interrupt Input Unit into D. If N
is 4 or 5, writes the scheduled interrupt interval
into D. N must be between 0 and 5 for the
CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1-CPU11/21-EV2 or
between 0 and 4 for the CV500 or
CVM1-CPU01-EV2.
N:
#D:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
388
MACRO
MCRO, ↑MCRO
(156)
MCRO N S D
(V2 only) MCRO(156) allows a single subroutine to
replace several subroutines that have identical
structure but different operands. The
subroutine number (N) range is 000 to 999.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
D:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
380
Appendix AInstruction Set
546
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
SET STACK
SSET, jSSET
(160)
SSET TB N
Defines a stack from TB to TB+N–1 and
resets to zero all words from TB+2 to TB+N–1.
TB contains the memory address for TB+N–1,
and TB+1 contains the memory address of
TB+2. TB+1 is called the stack pointer, and
contains the memory address for TB+2 after
SSET(160) is executed. N must be BCD
between #0003 and #9999.
TB:
CIO
G
A
DM
N:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
389
PUSH ONTO STACK
PUSH, jPUSH
(161)
PUSH TB S
Copies the data from the source word (S) to
the word indicated by the stack pointer (TB+1).
The memory address in the stack pointer is
then incremented by one.
TB must be the first address of a stack defined
using SSET(160).
TB:
CIO
G
A
DM
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
390
LAST IN FIRST OUT
LIFO, jLIFO
(162)
LIFO TB D
Decrements the memory address in the stack
pointer (TB+1) by one and then copies the
data from the word indicated by the stack
pointer (the last written to the table) to the
destination word (D). The stack pointer is the
only word changed in the stack.
TB must be the first address of a stack defined
using SSET(160).
TB:
CIO
G
A
DM
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
391
FIRST IN FIRST OUT
FIFO, jFIFO
(163)
FIFO TB D
Writes zero into the last word of the stack and
shifts the contents of each word within the
stack down by one address, finally shifting the
data from TB+2 (the first written to the stack)
to the destination word (D). The memory
address in the stack pointer (TB+1) is then
decremented by one.
TB must be the first address of a stack defined
using SSET(160).
TB:
CIO
G
A
DM
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
392
DATA SEARCH
SRCH, jSRCH
(164)
SRCH N St Cd
Searches the range of memory from St to
St+N–1 for addresses that contain the
comparison data (Cd). If the content of an
address within the range matches the
comparison data, the EQ Flag (A50006) is
turned ON and the address is written to Index
Register IR0. If more than one address
contains the comparison data, only the lowest
address containing the comparison data is
written to IR0. If none of the addresses within
the range contains the comparison data, the
EQ Flag (A50006) is turned OFF and IR0 is
left unchanged.
N:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
St:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
Cd:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
365
FIND MAXIMUM
MAX, jMAX
(165)
MAX C St D
Searches the range of memory from St to
St+N–1 for the address that contains the
maximum value and outputs that value to the
destination word (D). The number of words
within the range (N) is contained in the 3
rightmost digits of C, which must be BCD
between #001 and #999. When bit 15 of C is
OFF, data within the range is treated as
unsigned hexadecimal values, and when it is
ON the data is treated as signed hexadecimal
values. When bit 14 of C is OFF, the address
of the word containing the maximum value will
not be output to IR0; when it is ON, the value
will be output to IR0.
C:
CIO
G
A
#
DM
DR
IR
St:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
319
Appendix AInstruction Set
547
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
FIND MINIMUM
MIN, jMIN
(166)
MIN C St D
Searches the range of memory from St to
St+N–1 for the address that contains the
minimum value and outputs that value to the
destination word (D). The number of words
within the range (N) is contained in the 3
rightmost digits of C, which must be BCD
between #001 and #999. When bit 15 of C is
OFF, data within the range is treated as
unsigned hexadecimal values, and when it is
ON the data is treated as signed hexadecimal
values. When bit 14 of C is OFF, the address
of the word containing the minimum value will
not be output to IR0; when it is ON, the value
will be output to IR0.
C:
CIO
G
A
#
DM
DR
IR
St:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
320
SUM
SUM, jSUM
(167)
SUM C St D
Computes the sum of the contents of words
from St to St+N–1 and outputs that value to
the destination words (D and D+1). The
number of words within the range (N) is
contained in the 3 rightmost digits of C, which
must be BCD between #001 and #999. When
bit 15 of C is OFF, data within the range is
treated as unsigned values, and when it is ON
the data is treated as signed values. When bit
14 of C is OFF, data within the range is treated
as BCD and when it is ON the data is treated
as hexadecimal.
C:
CIO
G
A
#
DM
DR
IR
St:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
322
TRACE MEMORY
TRSM (170)
TRSM
Marks the start of tracing. This instruction is
effective only when tracing is being executed
from a Peripheral Device. Changes in status of
the bits and words specified from the
Peripheral Device are stored in trace memory.
None 393
SELECT EM BANK
EMBC, jEMBC
(171)
EMBC N
Changes the current EM bank to the one
indicated by the EM bank number (N). N must
be between #0000 and #0007. The current EM
bank number is recorded in the least
significant (rightmost) digit of A511. Bit A51115
is ON when an Expansion Data Memory Unit
is mounted to the CPU. EM is optional and
available with various numbers of banks.
N:
CIO
G
A
#
DM
DR
IR
364
LOAD FLAGS
CCL, jCCL (172)
CCL
Changes the Arithmetic Flags to the status
recorded by the last CCS(173) instruction.
Arithmetic Flags include the following:
ER (A50003), CY (A50004), GR (A50005),
EQ (A50006), LE (A50007), and N (A50008).
None 366
SAVE FLAGS
CCS, jCCS (173)
CCS
Records the current status of the Arithmetic
Flags in the CPU for later retrieval by the
CCS(173) instruction.
None 367
MARK TRACE
MARK
(174)
MARK N
Marks the location for sampling when
executing a mark trace from a Peripheral
Device or when measuring the execution time
between MARK(174) instructions. When
executing a mark trace, the status of the
words specified from the Peripheral Devices
are stored in trace memory.
N:
#395
LOAD REGISTER
REGL, jREGL
(175)
REGL S
Copies the data from S, S+1, and S+2 to Data
Registers DR0, DR1, and DR2, and copies the
data from S+3, S+4, and S+5 to Index
Registers IR0, IR1, and IR2. S to S+5 must be
in the same data area.
S:
CIO
G
A
DM
367
Appendix AInstruction Set
548
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
SAVE REGISTER
REGS, jREGS
(176)
REGS D
Copies the data from Data Registers DR0,
DR1, and DR2 to D, D+1, and D+2, and
copies the data from Index Registers IR0, IR1,
and IR2 to D+3, D+4, and D+5. D to D+5 must
be in the same data area.
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
368
FAILURE POINT
DETECTION
FPD
(177)
FPD C W D
(V2 only) Monitors the execution of an instruction block
according to specified conditions, detects
errors, and determines the input conditions
responsible for the errors.
C:
#
Ti
W:
CIO
G
A
DM
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
356
MAXIMUM CYCLE TIME EXTEND
WDT, ↑WDT
(178)
WDT T
(V2 only) Extends the setting of the watchdog timer by
10 ms times T. # (0000 to 3999) 361
(179)
DATE C
CLOCK COMPENSATION
DATE, ↑DATE (V2 only) Changes the internal clock setting according
to the clock data in four consecutive specified
words beginning with C
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
353
READ DATA FILE
FILR, jFILR
(180)
FILR N D C
Reads N words of data from the Memory Card
data file specified in C+1 to C+4 and outputs
the data to the designated data area beginning
at D. The name of the file from which the data
is read is specified by eight ASCII characters
in C+1 to C+4. Data will be read from the word
indicated in C+5 if bit 04 of C (the Offset
Enable Bit) is ON.
N:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
D:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
396
WRITE DATA FILE
FILW, jFILW
(181)
FILW N S C
Writes the data in S to S+N–1 to a Memory
Card data file specified in C+1 to C+4. The
data will replace data in the file if bit 07 of C
(the Write-over Bit) is ON, or will be added to
the end of the file if bit 07 of C is OFF. Data
will be written from the word indicated in C+5 if
bit 04 of C (the Offset Enable Bit) is ON.
If the specified file name does not exist, a new
file by that name will be created and the data
will be written from the beginning of the file,
regardless of the status of the Offset Enable
Bit.
N:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
398
READ PROGRAM FILE
FILP, jFILP
(182)
FILP C
Reads the ladder program file (extension
.LDP) named in C+1 to C+4 and either
overwrites or replaces the program following
the FILP(182) instruction with it. The program
file must be written to the Memory Card
beforehand with CVSS. The file name is given
in eight ASCII characters starting in the
leftmost half of C+1. The extension is not
required. When the Write Method Bit (C bit 07)
is ON, FILP(182) will overwrite just enough of
the current ladder program to accommodate
the program file. When C bit 07 is OFF,
FILP(182) will erase the current ladder
program from the instruction just after
FILP(182) to END(001), then insert the
program file. The program will be executed
from the beginning when FILP(182) has been
completed.
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
400
Appendix AInstruction Set
549
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
CHANGE STEP PROGRAM
FLSP, jFLSP
(183)
FLSP N C
Reads from the Memory Card the action block
in the step program file (extension .SFC)
specified in C and replaces the action block for
step N with it. The new action block must have
the same number of actions as the one being
replaced. The file name is given in eight ASCII
characters starting in the leftmost half of C+1.
The extension is not required.
The step program file must be written to the
Memory Card beforehand with CVSS.
N:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
#
DR
IR
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
402
I/O REFRESH
IORF, jIORF
(184)
IORF St E
Refreshes all I/O words between the start (St)
and end (E) words. Only I/O words may be
designated. Normally these words are
refreshed only once per cycle, but refreshing
words before use in an instruction can
increase processing speed. St must be less
than or equal to E. St and E must be between
CIO 0000 and CIO 0511.
St:
CIO
DR*
IR*
E:
CIO 362
DISABLE ACCESS
IOSP, jIOSP (187)
IOSP
Disables both read and write access to PC
memory from Peripheral Devices, SYSMAC
NET Link Units, SYSMAC LINK Units, Host
Link Systems, BASIC Units, etc. Access to
memory is disabled until either END(001) or
IORS(188) is executed or PC operation is
stopped.
None 413
ENABLE ACCESS
IORS (188)
IORS
Enables both read and write access to PC
memory from Peripheral Devices, SYSMAC
NET Link Units, SYSMAC LINK Units, Host
Link Systems, BASIC Units, etc.
None 414
I/O DISPLAY
IODP, jIODP
(189)
IODP C S
Outputs the message in S to the 7-segment
display on a Remote I/O Slave Unit, I/O
Control Unit, or I/O Interface Unit. The four
display characters can be in 7-segment
display code in source words S and S+1, or
converted automatically from a single
hexadecimal source word (S). The Unit and
the display attributes are specified in C.
15 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 00
Unit type
0 (OFF):I/O Control/Interface
1 (ON): Remote I/O Slave
Rack number/
Slave number
Not used,
set to zero.
Data type
0 (OFF):Hexadecimal
1 (ON): 7-segment display code
C
Automatic display
0 (OFF):No
1 (ON): Yes
Flashing display
0 (OFF):No
1 (ON): Yes
Master address
(Set to zero if
bit 06 is zero.)
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
#
362
Appendix AInstruction Set
550
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
I/O READ
READ
(190)
READ N S D
Reads data from memory area of a Special I/O
Unit through a word (S) allocated to the
Special I/O Unit to destination words (D gives
the address of the first destination word). N
must be in BCD and is the number of words to
be transferred. If the Special I/O Unit is busy
and unable to receive data, the data will be
written during the next cycle. The EQ Flag is
set when read transfer is completed.
N
DS
D+1
D+N–1
Special
I/O Unit
N:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
#
DR
IR
S:
CIO
DR*
IR*
D:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
404
I/O WRITE
WRIT
(191)
WRIT N S D
Writes data through the I/O word (D) allocated
to a Special I/O Unit to the memory area of the
Special I/O Unit. N must be in BCD and is the
number of words to be transferred. If the
Special I/O Unit is busy and unable to receive
data, the data will be written during the next
cycle. S is the address of the first PC source
word to be transferred. The EQ Flag is set
when the transfer is completed.
S
S+1
S+N–1
N
D
Special
I/O Unit
N:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
#
DR
IR
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
D:
CIO 408
NETWORK SEND
SEND, jSEND
(192)
SEND S D C
Sends data from n source words (S is the
starting word) to the destination words (D is
the first word) in the specified node of the
specified network in a SYSMAC LINK or
SYSMAC NET Link System. The destination
node can be a PC, a BASIC Unit, or a
computer. The number of words to be
transferred, the source (local) node and
network addresses, the destination node and
network addresses, and other parameters are
given in C to C+4. Destination nodeLocal node
S
S+1
S+n–1
D
D+1
D+n–1
S/D/C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
415
Appendix AInstruction Set
551
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
NETWORK RECEIVE
RECV, jRECV
(193)
RECV S D C
Receives data from n source words (S is the
starting word) from the specified node of the
specified network and writes it to the
destination words (D is the first word) in a
SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET Link System.
The source node can be a PC, a BASIC Unit,
or a computer. The number of words to be
transferred, the destination (local) node and
network addresses, the source node and
network addresses, and other parameters are
given in C to C+4. Local nodeSource node
S
S+1
S+n–1
D
D+1
D+n–1
S/D/C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
418
DELIVER COMMAND
CMND, jCMND
(194)
CMND S D C
Sends the FINS command starting in S to the
specified node of the specified network in a
SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET Link System
and stores the response starting at D. The
number of words to be transferred, the
destination node and network addresses, and
other parameters are given in C to C+5. The
FINS commands used here are the same as
those used in the Host Link System.
If the destination node number is $FF, the
command will be broadcast to all nodes in the
designated network.
S/D/C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
420
MESSAGE
MSG, jMSG
(195)
MSG N S
Displays 32 ASCII characters from 16 words
starting at S on the Peripheral Device. If not all
sixteen words are required for the message, it
can be stopped at any point by inputting “OD.”
The message number (N) must be registered
in the System Setup of the Peripheral Device.
N must be in BCD and must be between 0000
and 0007. The message is cleared when the
next message is displayed or when a constant
is input for S.M
M+ 15
C D
A B
D P
ABCD........DP
Display on Pe-
ripheral Device
N:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
#
DR
IR
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
#
414
TRANSITION OUTPUT
TOUT (202)
TOUT
Outputs the result of a transition program to
the Transition Flag. None 433
ACTIVATE STEP
SA, jSA
(210)
SA N1N2
Places step N1 in subchart N2 in execute
status to start the execution of actions. N1 and
N2 are input as the numeric portions of ST
addresses. Specify 9999 for N2 if the step is
not in a subchart. To activate a subchart,
specify the subchart dummy step for N1.
N1/N2:
#427
Appendix AInstruction Set
552
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
PAUSE STEP
SP, jSP
(211)
SP N
Changes a step or subchart from execute to
pause status. To pause a subchart, specify the
subchart dummy step for N1. Actions with
S-type action qualifiers will continue to be
executed.
N:
#428
RESTART STEP
SR, jSR
(212)
SR N
Changes step N from pause to execute status.
To restart a subchart, specify the subchart
dummy step for N.
N:
#429
END STEP
SF, jSF
(213)
SF N
Changes step N from execute or pause to halt
status. To halt a subchart, specify the subchart
dummy step for N. Actions with S-type action
qualifiers will continue to be executed.
N:
#430
DEACTIVATE STEP
SE, jSE
(214)
SE N
Changes step N from active (execute, pause,
or halt) to inactive status. To deactivate a
subchart, specify the subchart dummy step for
N. Actions with S-type action qualifiers and
those with action qualifier with the H option will
not be reset.
N:
#431
RESET STEP
SOFF, jSOFF
(215)
SOFF N
Resets step N (regardless of its status) to
inactive status. It also resets actions with
action qualifiers S, SD, DS, and SL. To reset a
subchart, specify the subchart dummy step for
N.
N:
#432
CONDITIONAL JUMP
CJP
(221)
CJP N
(V2 only) When the execution condition is ON, the
program jumps directly to JME(005). N:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
138
CONDITIONAL JUMP
CJPN
(222)
CJPN N
(V2 only) When the execution condition is OFF, the
program jumps directly to JME(005). N:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
138
RESET TIMER/COUNTER
CNR, jCNR
(236)
CNR D1D2
When D1 and D2 are timer or counter
numbers, CNR(236) resets the PV of timers
from D1 through D2 without starting the timers
or counters. PVs for TIM, TIMH(015), CNT,
and TCNT(123) are reset to the SV, while PVs
for CNTR(012) and TTIM(120) are reset to
zero. TIML(121) and MTIM(122) timers cannot
be reset with CNR(236). If only one timer or
counter needs to be reset, that timer or
counter number can be entered alone. It is not
necessary to enter both D1 and D2.
When D1 and D2 are addresses in a data
area, CNR(236) sets the content of words D1
through D2 to zero.
D1 must be less than or equal to D2.
D1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
D2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
158
Appendix AInstruction Set
553
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
BLOCK PROGRAM
BPRG
(250)
BPRG N
(V2 only) Indicates the beginning of the designated
block program. 439
(260)
RLNC Wd
ROTATE LEFT WITHOUT
CARRY
RLNC, ↑RLNC
(V2 only) Shifts all Wd bits one bit to the left, shifting the
status of bit 15 of Wd simultaneously into bit
00 and CY.
10110011100011010
CY Bit
00
Bit
15
Wd:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
180
(261)
RRNC Wd
ROTATE RIGHT WITHOUT
CARRY
RRNC, ↑RRNC
(V2 only) Shifts all Wd bits one bit to the right, shifting
the status of bit 00 simultaneously into bit 15
of Wd and into CY.
0 1 0 1 010001110001 0
Bit
15 CY
Bit
00
Wd
Wd:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
181
(262)
RLNL Wd
DOUBLE ROTATE LEFT
WITHOUT CARRY
RLNL, ↑RLNL
(V2 only) Shifts all bits previously in Wd and Wd+1 to
the left, and shifts bit 15 of Wd+1
simultaneously into bit 00 or Wd and into CY.
CY Bit
00
Bit
15 WdWd+1
Wd:
CIO
G
A
DM
182
(263)
RRNL Wd
DOUBLE ROTATE RIGHT
WITHOUT CARRY
RRNL, ↑RRNL
(V2 only) Shifts all bits previously in Wd and Wd+1 to
the right, and shifts bit 00 of Wd
simultaneously into bit 15 of Wd+1 and into
CY.
Bit
15 CY
Bit
00
WdWd+1
Wd:
CIO
G
A
DM
183
PID CONTROL
PID
(270)
PID S C D
(V2 only) PID(270) carries out PID control according to
the designated parameters. It takes the
specified input range of binary data from the
contents of input word S and carries out the
PID operation according to the parameters
that are set. The results are then stored as the
operation output amount in output word D.
S:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
C:
CIO
G
A
DM
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
330
LIMIT CONTROL
LMT, ↑LMT
(271)
LMT S C D
(V2 only) Controls output data according to whether or
not the specified input data (signed 16-bit
binary) is within the upper and lower limits.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
D:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
337
DEAD-BAND CONTROL
BAND, ↑BAND
(272)
BAND S C D
(V2 only) Controls output data according to whether or
not the specified input data (signed 16-bit
binary) is within the upper and lower limits
(dead band).
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
D:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
338
Appendix AInstruction Set
554
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
DEAD-ZONE CONTROL
ZONE, ↑ZONE
(273)
ZONE S C D
(V2 only) Adds the specified bias value to the specified
input data (signed 16-bit binary) and places
the result in a specified word.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
D:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
340
BINARY ROOT
ROTB, ↑ROTB
(274)
ROTB S R
(V2 only) Computes the square root of the 32-bit binary
content of the specified word (S) and outputs
the integer portion of the result to the specified
result word (R).
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
#
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
325
SIGNED BCD-TO-BINARY
BINS, ↑BINS
(275)
BINS C S D
(V2 only) Converts the data in specified words from
signed BCD to signed binary, and outputs the
result to a specified destination word.
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
242
SIGNED BINARY-TO-BCD
BCDS, ↑BCDS
(276)
BCDS C S D
(V2 only) Converts the data in specified words from
signed binary to signed BCD, and outputs the
result to a specified destination word.
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
DR
IR
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
244
DOUBLE SIGNED
BCD-TO-BINARY
BISL, ↑BISL
(277)
BINS C S D
(V2 only) Converts the data in specified words from
double signed BCD to double signed binary,
and outputs the result to specified destination
words.
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
246
DOUBLE SIGNED
BINARY-TO-BCD
BDSL, ↑BDSL
(278)
BDSL C S D
(V2 only) Converts the data in specified words from
double signed binary to double signed BCD,
and outputs the result to specified destination
words.
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
D:
CIO
G
A
DM
248
I/O READ 2
RD2, ↑RD2
(280)
RD2 C S D
(V2 only) Reads the memory contents of a Special I/O
Unit to specified words (beginning with D) in
the Programmable Controller, via a specified
Special I/O Unit interface word ( S) in the PC’s
memory. The words that are to be transferred
are specified by the control word (C).
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
S:
CIO D:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
406
Appendix AInstruction Set
555
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
I/O WRITE 2
WR2, ↑WR2
(281)
WR2 C S D
(V2 only) Writes the specified number of words to a
specified address in a Special I/O Unit, via a
specified Special I/O Unit interface word (S) in
the PC’s memory. The words that are to be
transferred are specified by the control word
(C).
C:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
DM
D:
CIO 411
EQUAL
=
(300)
=S
1S
2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in four
digits hexadecimal, and turns ON the
execution condition if the result is true (i.e., if
S1 = S2).
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
213
DOUBLE EQUAL
=L
(301)
=L S1S2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in eight
digits hexadecimal, and turns ON the
execution condition if the result is true (i.e., if
S1 = S2).
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
213
SIGNED EQUAL
=S
(302)
=S S1S2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in four
digits signed hexadecimal, and turns ON the
execution condition if the result is true (i.e., if
S1 = S2).
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
213
DOUBLE SIGNED EQUAL
=SL
(303)
=SL S1S2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in eight
digits of signed hexadecimal, and turns ON
the execution condition if the result is true (i.e.,
if S1 = S2).
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
213
DOUBLE NOT EQUAL
< >L
(306)
< >L S 1S2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in eight
digits hexadecimal, and turns ON the
execution condition if the result is true (i.e., if
S1 <> S2).
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
213
SIGNED NOT EQUAL
< >S
(307)
< >S S 1S2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in four
digits signed hexadecimal, and turns ON the
execution condition if the result is true (i.e., if
S1 <> S2).
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
213
Appendix AInstruction Set
556
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
DOUBLE SIGNED NOT
EQUAL
< >SL
(308)
< >SL S1S2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in eight
digits signed hexadecimal, and turns ON the
execution condition if the result is true (i.e., if
S1 <> S2).
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
213
LESS THAN
<
(310)
<S
1S
2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in four
digits hexadecimal, and turns ON the
execution condition if the result is true (i.e., if
S1 < S2).
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
213
DOUBLE LESS THAN
<L
(311)
<L S1S2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in eight
digits hexadecimal, and turns ON the
execution condition if the result is true (i.e., if
S1 < S2).
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
213
SIGNED LESS THAN
<S
(312)
<S S1S2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in four
digits signed hexadecimal, and turns ON the
execution condition if the result is true (i.e., if
S1 < S2).
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
213
DOUBLE SIGNED LESS
THAN
<SL
(313)
<SL S1S2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in eight
digits signed hexadecimal, and turns ON the
execution condition if the result is true (i.e., if
S1 < S2).
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
213
LESS THAN OR EQUAL
< =
(315)
<= S1S2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in four
digits hexadecimal, and turns ON the
execution condition if the result is true (i.e., if
S1 S2).
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
213
DOUBLE LESS THAN OR
EQUAL
< =L
(316)
<=L S1S2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in eight
digits hexadecimal, and turns ON the
execution condition if the result is true (i.e., if
S1 S2).
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
213
Appendix AInstruction Set
557
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
SIGNED LESS THAN OR
EQUAL
< =S
(317)
<=S S1S2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in four
digits signed hexadecimal, and turns ON the
execution condition if the result is true (i.e., if
S1 S2).
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
213
DOUBLE SIGNED LESS
THAN OR EQUAL
< =SL
(318)
<=SL S1S2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in eight
digits signed hexadecimal, and turns ON the
execution condition if the result is true (i.e., if
S1 S2).
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
213
GREATER THAN
>
(320)
>S
1S
2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in four
digits hexadecimal, and turns ON the
execution condition if the result is true (i.e., if
S1 > S2).
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
213
DOUBLE GREATER THAN
>L
(321)
>L S1S2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in eight
digits hexadecimal, and turns ON the
execution condition if the result is true (i.e., if
S1 > S2).
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
213
SIGNED GREATER THAN
>S
(322)
>S S1S2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in four
digits signed hexadecimal, and turns ON the
execution condition if the result is true (i.e., if
S1 > S2).
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
213
DOUBLE SIGNED GREATER
THAN
>SL
(323)
>SL S1S2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in eight
digits signed hexadecimal, and turns ON the
execution condition if the result is true (i.e., if
S1 > S2).
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
213
GREATER THAN OR EQUAL
> =
(325)
>= S1S2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in four
digits hexadecimal, and turns ON the
execution condition if the result is true (i.e., if
S1 S2).
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
213
Appendix AInstruction Set
558
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
DOUBLE GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
> =L
(326)
>=L S1S2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in eight
digits hexadecimal, and turns ON the
execution condition if the result is true (i.e., if
S1 S2).
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
213
SIGNED GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
> =S
(327)
>=S S1S2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in four
digits signed hexadecimal, and turns ON the
execution condition if the result is true (i.e., if
S1 S2).
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
213
DOUBLE SIGNED GREATER
THAN OR EQUAL
> =SL
(328)
>=SL S1S2
(V2 only) Compares word data and constants in eight
digits signed hexadecimal, and turns ON the
execution condition if the result is true (i.e., if
S1 S2).
S1:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
S2:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
213
BIT TEST
TST
(350)
TST S N
(V2 only) Turns ON the execution condition when a
designated bit in a designated word turns ON. S:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
N:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
124
BIT TEST
TSTN
(351)
TSTN S N
(V2 only) Turns ON the execution condition when a
designated bit in a designated word turns OFF. S:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
N:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
124
SIGNED BINARY ADD
WITHOUT CARRY
+, ↑+
(400)
+AuAdR
(V2 only) Adds word data and constants in four digits
hexadecimal with sign, and outputs the result
to a specified word.
Au
Ad
RCY
+
Au:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Ad:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
272
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
ADD WITHOUT CARRY
+L, ↑+L
(401)
+L Au Ad R
(V2 only) Adds word data and constants in eight digits
hexadecimal with sign, and outputs the result
to specified words.
Au+1
Ad + 1
R + 1CY
+
Au
Ad
R
Au:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Ad:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
272
Appendix AInstruction Set
559
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
SIGNED BINARY ADD WITH
CARRY
+C, ↑+C
(402)
+C Au Ad R
(V2 only) Adds word data and constants, including carry,
in four digits hexadecimal with sign, and
outputs the result to a specified word.
Au
Ad
RCY
+CY
Au:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Ad:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
272
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
ADD WITH CARRY
+CL, ↑+CL
(403)
+CL Au Ad R
(V2 only) Adds word data and constants, including carry,
in eight digits hexadecimal with sign, and
outputs the result to specified words.
Au+1
Ad+ 1
R + 1
CY
+
Au
Ad
RCY
Au:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Ad:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
272
BCD ADD WITHOUT CARRY
+B, ↑+B
(404)
+B Au Ad R
(V2 only) Adds word data and constants in four digits
BCD, and outputs the result to a specified
word.
Au
Ad
RCY
+
Au:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Ad:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
274
DOUBLE BCD ADD
WITHOUT CARRY
+BL, ↑+BL
(405)
+BL Au Ad R
(V2 only) Adds word data and constants in eight digits
BCD, and outputs the result to specified
words.
Au+1
Ad + 1
R + 1CY
+
Au
Ad
R
Au:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Ad:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
274
BCD ADD WITH CARRY
+BC, ↑+BC
(406)
+BC Au Ad R
(V2 only) Adds word data and constants, including carry,
in four digits BCD, and outputs the result to a
specified word.
Au
Ad
RCY
+CY
Au:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Ad:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
274
Appendix AInstruction Set
560
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
DOUBLE BCD ADD WITH
CARRY
+BCL, ↑+BCL
(407)
+BCL Au Ad R
(V2 only) Adds word data and constants, including carry,
in eight digits BCD, and outputs the result to
specified words.
Au+1
Ad+ 1
R + 1
CY
+
Au
Ad
RCY
Au:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Ad:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
274
SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT
WITHOUT CARRY
–, ↑–
(410)
–MiSuR
(V2 only) Subtracts word data and constants in four
digits hexadecimal with sign, and outputs the
result to a specified word. Mi
Su
RCY
–
Mi:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Su:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
276
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY
–L, ↑–L
(411)
–L Mi Su R
(V2 only) Subtracts word data and constants in eight
digits hexadecimal with sign, and outputs the
result to specified words.
Mi+1
Su + 1
R + 1CY
–
Mi
Su
R
Mi:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Su:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
276
SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT
WITH CARRY
–C, ↑–C
(412)
–C Mi Su R
(V2 only) Subtracts word data and constants in four
digits hexadecimal with sign, including carry,
and outputs the result to a specified word.
Mi
Su
RCY
–CY
Mi:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Su:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
276
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
SUBTRACT WITH CARRY
–CL, ↑–CL
(413)
–CL Mi Su R
(V2 only) Subtracts word data and constants in eight
digits hexadecimal with sign, including carry,
and outputs the result to specified words.
Mi+1
Su + 1
R + 1CY
–
Mi
Su
R
CY
–
Mi:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Su:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
276
Appendix AInstruction Set
561
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
BCD SUBTRACT WITHOUT
CARRY
–B, ↑–B
(414)
–B Mi Su R
(V2 only) Subtracts word data and constants in four
digits BCD, and outputs the result to a
specified word. Mi
Su
RCY
–
Mi:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Su:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
281
DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT
WITHOUT CARRY
–BL, ↑–BL
(415)
–BL Mi Su R
(V2 only) Subtracts word data and constants in eight
digits BCD, and outputs the result to specified
words.
Mi+1
Su + 1
R + 1CY
–
Mi
Su
R
Mi:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Su:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
281
BCD SUBTRACT WITH
CARRY
–BC, ↑–BC
(416)
–BC Mi Su R
(V2 only) Subtracts word data and constants in four
digits BCD, including carry, and outputs the
result to a specified word.
Mi
Su
RCY
–CY
Mi:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Su:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
281
DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT
WITH CARRY
–BCL, ↑–BCL
(417)
–BCL Mi Su R
(V2 only) Subtracts word data and constants in eight
digits BCD, including carry, and outputs the
result to specified words.
Mi+1
Su + 1
R + 1CY
–
Mi
Su
R
CY
–
Mi:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Su:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
281
SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY
*, ↑*
(420)
*Md Mr R
(V2 only) Multiplies word data and constants in four
digits hexadecimal with sign, and outputs the
result to specified words.
Md
Mr
RR+1
x
Md:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Mr:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
285
Appendix AInstruction Set
562
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
MULTIPLY
*L, ↑*L
(421)
*LMdMr R
(V2 only) Multiplies word data and constants in eight
digits hexadecimal with sign, and outputs the
result to specified words.
Md+1
Mr + 1
R+ 1
x
Md
Mr
RR + 3 R+ 2
Md:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Mr:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
285
UNSIGNED BINARY
MULTIPLY
*U, ↑*U
(422)
*UMdMr R
(V2 only) Multiplies word data and constants in four
digits hexadecimal without sign, and outputs
the result to specified words.
Md
Mr
RR+1
x
Md:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Mr:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
285
DOUBLE UNSIGNED
BINARY MULTIPLY
*UL, ↑*UL
(423)
*UL Md Mr R
(V2 only) Multiplies word data and constants in eight
digits hexadecimal without sign, and outputs
the result to specified words.
Md+1
Mr + 1
R+ 1
x
Md
Mr
RR + 3 R+ 2
Md:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Mr:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
285
BCD MULTIPLY
*B, ↑*B
(424)
*BMdMr R
(V2 only) Multiplies word data and constants in four
digits BCD, and outputs the result to specified
words.
Md
Mr
RR+1
x
Md:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Mr:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
287
DOUBLE BCD MULTIPLY
*BL, ↑*BL
(425)
*BL Md Mr R
(V2 only) Multiplies word data and constants in eight
digits BCD, and outputs the result to specified
words.
Md+1
Mr + 1
R+ 1
x
Md
Mr
RR + 3 R+ 2
Md:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Mr:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
287
SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE
/, ↑/
(430)
/DdDrR
(V2 only) Divides word data and constants in four digits
hexadecimal with sign, and outputs the result
to specified words. Dd
Dr
R
R+1
Remainder Quotient
Dd:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Dr:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
289
Appendix AInstruction Set
563
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
DIVIDE
/L, ↑/L
(431)
/L Dd Dr R
(V2 only) Divides word data and constants in eight digits
hexadecimal with sign, and outputs the result
to specified words. Dd+1
Dr + 1
R+ 1
Dd
Dr
RR + 3 R+ 2
Remainder Quotient
Dd:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Dr:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
289
UNSIGNED BINARY DIVIDE
/U, ↑/U
(432)
/U Dd Dr R
(V2 only) Divides word data and constants in four digits
hexadecimal without sign, and outputs the
result to specified words. Dd
Dr
R
R+1
Remainder Quotient
Dd:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Dr:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
289
DOUBLE UNSIGNED BINARY
DIVIDE
/UL, ↑/UL
(433)
/UL Dd Dr R
(V2 only) Divides word data and constants in eight digits
hexadecimal without sign, and outputs the
result to specified words. Dd+1
Dr + 1
R+ 1
Dd
Dr
RR + 3 R+ 2
Remainder Quotient
Dd:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Dr:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
289
BCD DIVIDE
/B, ↑/B
(434)
/B Dd Dr R
(V2 only) Divides word data and constants in four digits
BCD, and outputs the result to specified
words. Dd
Dr
R
R+1
Remainder Quotient
Dd:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
Dr:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
291
DOUBLE BCD DIVIDE
/BL, ↑/BL
(435)
/BL Dd Dr R
(V2 only) Divides word data and constants in eight digits
BCD, and outputs the result to specified
words. Dd+1
Dr + 1
R+ 1
Dd
Dr
RR + 3 R+ 2
Remainder Quotient
Dd:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Dr:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
291
FLOATING TO 16-BIT
FIX, ↑FIX
(450)
FIX S R
(V2 only) Converts specified 32-bit floating-point data to
16-bit binary data, and places the result in a
specified word.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
DR
IR
296
Appendix AInstruction Set
564
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
FLOATING TO 32-BIT
FIXL, ↑FIXL
(451)
FIXL S R
(V2 only) Converts specified 32-bit floating-point data to
32-bit binary data, and places the result in a
specified word.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
297
16-BIT TO FLOATING
FLT, ↑FLT
(452)
FLT S R
(V2 only) Converts specified 16-bit binary data to 32-bit
floating-point data, and places the result in
specified words.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
DR
IR
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
298
32-BIT TO FLOATING
FLTL, ↑FLTL
(453)
FLTL S R
(V2 only) Converts specified 32-bit binary data to 32-bit
floating-point data, and places the result in
specified words.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
298
FLOATING-POINT ADD
+F, ↑+F
(454)
+F Au Ad R
(V2 only) Adds specified 32-bit floating-point data and
places the result in specified words.
Au+1
Ad + 1
R + 1
+
Au
Ad
R
Au:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Ad:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
299
FLOATING-POINT
SUBTRACT
–F, ↑–F
(455)
–F Mi Su R
(V2 only) Subtracts specified 32-bit floating-point data
and places the result in specified words.
Mi+1
Su + 1
R + 1
–
Mi
Su
R
Mi:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Su:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
300
FLOATING-POINT MULTIPLY
*F, ↑*F
(456)
*FMdMr R
(V2 only) Multiplies specified 32-bit floating-point data
and places the result in specified words.
Md+1
Mr + 1
R+ 1
x
Md
Mr
R
Md:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Mr:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
301
FLOATING-POINT DIVIDE
/F, ↑/F
(457)
/F Dd Dr R
(V2 only) Divides specified 32-bit floating-point data and
places the result in specified words.
Dd+1
Dr + 1
R+ 1
Dd
Dr
R
Dd:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
Dr:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
302
Appendix AInstruction Set
565
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
DEGREES TO RADIANS
RAD, ↑RAD
(458)
RAD S R
(V2 only) Converts specified 32-bit floating-point data
from degrees to radians, and places the result
in specified words.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
303
RADIANS TO DEGREES
DEG, ↑DEG
(459)
DEG S R
(V2 only) Converts specified 32-bit floating-point data
from radians to degrees, and places the result
in specified words.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
304
SINE
SIN, ↑SIN
(460)
SIN S R
(V2 only) Computes the sine value for angle data (in
radian units) expressed as specified 32-bit
floating-point data, and places the result in
specified words.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
305
COSINE
COS, ↑COS
(461)
COS S R
(V2 only) Computes the cosine value for angle data (in
radian units) expressed as specified 32-bit
floating-point data, and places the result in
specified words.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
306
TANGENT
TAN, ↑TAN
(462)
TAN S R
(V2 only) Computes the tangent value for angle data (in
radian units) expressed as specified 32-bit
floating-point data, and places the result in
specified words.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
307
SINE TO ANGLE
ASIN, ↑ASIN
(463)
ASIN S R
(V2 only) Computes angle data (in radian units) from a
sine value expressed as specified 32-bit
floating-point data, and places the result in
specified words.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
308
COSINE TO ANGLE
ACOS, ↑ACOS
(464)
ACOS S R
(V2 only) Computes angle data (in radian units) from a
cosine value expressed as specified 32-bit
floating-point data, and places the result in
specified words.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
309
TANGENT TO ANGLE
ATAN, ↑ATAN
(465)
ATAN S R
(V2 only) Computes angle data (in radian units) from a
tangent value expressed as specified 32-bit
floating-point data, and places the result in
specified words.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
310
SQUARE ROOT
SQRT, ↑SQRT
(466)
SQRT S R
(V2 only) Computes the square root of specified 32-bit
floating-point data, and places the result in
specified words.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
311
Appendix AInstruction Set
566
Name, mnemonic, variations,
and symbol PageOperand data
areas
Function
EXPONENT
EXP, ↑EXP
(467)
EXP S R
(V2 only) Computes the exponent for specified 32-bit
floating-point data, and places the result in
specified words.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
312
LOGARITHM
LOG, ↑LOG
(468)
LOG S R
(V2 only) Computes the natural logarithm for specified
32-bit floating-point data, and places the result
in specified words.
S:
CIO
G
A
T/C
#
DM
R:
CIO
G
A
DM
313
Appendix AInstruction Set
567
Block Programming Instructions
The following instructions are supported by version-2 CVM1 CPUs only.
Name Mnemonic Function Operand Data Areas Page
BLOCK PROGRAM END
BEND<001> Indicates the end of a block program. None 439
CONDITIONAL BRANCH
IF<002>
IF<002> B
IF<002> NOT B
Indicates the part of the program that is to be executed
when a given condition is satisfied. B:
IR
SR
HR
AR
LR
TC
440
NO BRANCH
ELSE<003> Specifies the part of the program that is to be executed
when the IF condition is not satisfied. None 440
BRANCH END
IEND<004> Defines the end of the program portion that has started
with IF<002>. None 440
ONE CYCLE AND WAIT
WAIT<005>
WAIT<005> B
WAIT<005> NOT B
Halts execution of a block program until a specified
condition is satisfied. B:
IR
SR
HR
AR
LR
TC
443
CONDITIONAL BLOCK
EXIT
EXIT<006>
EXIT<006 B
EXIT<006> NOT B
Exits a block program if a given condition is satisfied. B:
IR
SR
HR
AR
LR
TC
444
LOOP
LOOP<009> Defines the beginning of section to be repeated until a
specified terminal condition is satisfied. None 445
LOOP END
LEND<010>
LEND<010> B
LEND<010> NOT B
Defines the end of the section to be repeated. Execution
of the specified section continues until the terminal
condition is satisfied.
B:
IR
SR
HR
AR
LR
TC
445
BLOCK PROGRAM
PAUSE
BPPS<011> N
Causes the execution of designated block program to
pause until a specified condition is satisfied (often used in
conjunction with a timer or counter).
N:
0 to 99 446
BLOCK PROGRAM
RESTART
BPRS<012> N
Restarts execution of the designated block program. N:
0 to 99 446
TIMER WAIT
TIMW<013> N
SV
The execution of the block program between the
TIMW<013> instruction and BEND<004> is not executed
until the set value of the specified timer has been reached.
SV: 000.0 to 999.9 s
SV:
IR
AR
DM
HR
LR
#
N:
TC 447
COUNTER WAIT
CNTW<014> N
SV
I
The portion of block program between the CNTW<014>
instruction and BEND<004> is not executed until the set
value of the specified counter has been reached.
SV:
IR
AR
DM
HR
LR
#
N:
TC 448
Appendix AInstruction Set
568
Name Mnemonic PageOperand Data AreasFunction
HIGH-SPEED TIMER
WAIT
TMHW<015> N
SV
The portion of program between the TIMH<015>
instruction and BEND<004> is not executed until the set
value of the high-speed timer has been reached.
SV: 00.00 to 99.99 s
SV:
IR
AR
DM
HR
LR
#
N:
TC 447
569
Appendix B
Error and Arithmetic Flag Operation
The following table shows the instructions that affect the ER, CY, GR, LE, EQ, OF, UF, and N flags. In general,
ER indicates that operand data is not within requirements. CY indicates arithmetic or data shift results. GR
indicates that a compared value is larger than some standard, LE that it is smaller, EQ that it is the same. EQ
also indicates a result of zero for arithmetic operations. N generally indicates that bit 15 of the result word is
ON. OF indicates that the results was greater than could be stored in memory; UF indicates that the results
was less than could be stored in memory. Refer to subsections of
Section 5 Instruction Set
for details.
A set value (SV) BCD check is carried out at the time of resetting (TIM, CNT, TIMH(015), TIML(121),
TCNT(123), TIMW<013>, CNTW<014>, and TMHW<015>), or counting (CNTR(012), TTIM(120), and
MTIM(122)).
When CCL(172) is executed, the status of these flags will return to the status when CCS(173) was last
executed. CCL(172), STC(078), and CLC(079) are the only instructions that can directly change the status of
the arithmetic flags.
“ON/OFF” in the table indicate the flags that are turned ON and OFF according to the result of the instruction.
Although ladder diagram instructions, TIM, CNT, TIMH(015), CNTR(012), TIML(121), TIMW<013>,
CNTW<014>, and TMHW <015> are executed when ER is ON, other instructions with “ON/OFF” under the
Error Flag (A50003) column are not executed if ER is ON. All of the other flags in the following table will also
not operate when ER is ON.
Instructions not shown do not affect any of the flags in the table. Although only the non-differentiated form of
each instruction is shown, all variations of an instructions affect flags in exactly the same way.
Instructions marked with an asterisk (*) are supported by version-2 CVM1 CPUs only.
The status of the ER, CY, GT, LT and EQ Flags is affected by instruction execution and will change each time an
instruction that affects them is executed. Differentiated instructions are executed only once when their execution
condition changes (ON to OFF or OFF to ON) and are not executed again until the next specified change in their
execution condition. The status of the ER, CY, GT, LT and EQ Flags is thus affected by a differentiated instruction
only when the execution condition changes and is not affected during scans when the instruction is not executed,
i.e., when the specified change does not occur in the execution condition. When a differentiated instruction is not
executed, the status of the ER, CY, GT, LT and EQ Flags will not change and will maintain the status produced by
the last instruction that was executed.
Instructions A50003
(ER) A50004
(CY) A50005
(GR) A50006
(EQ) A50007
(LE) A50008
(N) A50009
(OF) A50010
(UF)
TIM ON/OFF
CNT
JMP(004) ON/OFF
FAL(006)
FALS(007)
CNTR(012)
TIMH(015)
CMP(020) ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
CMPL(021)
BCMP(022) ON/OFF ON/OFF
TCMP(023)
MCMP(024)
EQU(025) ON/OFF
CPS(026)* ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
CPSL(027)*
CMP(028)*
CMPL(029)*
Note “ON/OFF” means that the flag is affected by the result of instruction execution.
Appendix BError and Arithmetic Flag Operation
570
Instructions A50010
(UF)
A50009
(OF)
A50008
(N)
A50007
(LE)
A50006
(EQ)
A50005
(GR)
A50004
(CY)
A50003
(ER)
MOV(030) ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
MVN(031)
MOVL(032)
MVNL(033)
XCHG(034) ON/OFF
XCGL(035)
MOVR(036) ON/OFF ON/OFF
XFRB(038)* ON/OFF
XFER(040) ON/OFF
BSET(041)
MOVB(042)
MOVD(043)
DIST(044) ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
COLL(045)
BXFR(046)* ON/OFF
SETA(047)*
RSTA(048)*
SFTR(051) ON/OFF ON/OFF
ASFT(052) ON/OFF
WSFT(053)
NSFL(054)* ON/OFF ON/OFF
NSFR(055)*
NASL(056)* ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
NASR(057)*
NSLL(058)*
NSRL(059)*
ASL(060) ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
ASR(061) ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF OFF
ROL(062) ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
ROR(063)
ASLL(064)
ASRL(065) ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF OFF
ROLL(066) ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
RORL(067)
SLD(068) ON/OFF
SRD(069)
ADD(070) ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
SUB(071)
MUL(072) ON/OFF ON/OFF
DIV(073)
ADDL(074) ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
SUBL(075)
MULL(076) ON/OFF ON/OFF
DIVL(077)
STC(078) ON
CLC(079) OFF
Note “ON/OFF” means that the flag is affected by the result of instruction execution.
Appendix BError and Arithmetic Flag Operation
571
Instructions A50010
(UF)
A50009
(OF)
A50008
(N)
A50007
(LE)
A50006
(EQ)
A50005
(GR)
A50004
(CY)
A50003
(ER)
ADB(080) ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
SBB(081)
MLB(082) ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
DVB(083)
ADBL(084) ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
SBBL(085)
MLBL(086) ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
DVBL(087)
INC(090) ON/OFF ON/OFF
DEC(091)
INCB(092) ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
DECB(093)
INCL(094) ON/OFF ON/OFF
DECL(095)
INBL(096) ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
DCBL(097)
BIN(100) ON/OFF ON/OFF OFF
BCD(101) ON/OFF ON/OFF
BINL(102) ON/OFF ON/OFF OFF
BCDL(103) ON/OFF ON/OFF
NEG(104) ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
NEGL(105)
SIGN(106)
MLPX(110) ON/OFF
DMPX(111)
SDEC(112)
ASC(113)
BCNT(114) ON/OFF ON/OFF
LINE(115)
COLM(116)
HEX(117)* ON/OFF
TTIM(120)
TIML(121)
MTIM(122)
TCNT(123)
TSR(124)
TSW(125)
ANDW(130) ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
ORW(131)
XORW(132)
XNRW(133)
ANDL(134)
ORWL(135)
XORL(136)
XNRL(137)
COM(138)
COML(139)
Note “ON/OFF” means that the flag is affected by the result of instruction execution.
Appendix BError and Arithmetic Flag Operation
572
Instructions A50010
(UF)
A50009
(OF)
A50008
(N)
A50007
(LE)
A50006
(EQ)
A50005
(GR)
A50004
(CY)
A50003
(ER)
ROOT(140) ON/OFF ON/OFF
FDIV(141)
APR(142) ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
SEC(143) ON/OFF ON/OFF
HMS(144)
CADD(145)
CSUB(146)
SBS(151) ON/OFF
MSKS(153)
CLI(154)
MSKR(155)
MCRO(156)*
SSET(160)
PUSH(161)
LIFO(162)
FIFO(163)
SRCH(164) ON/OFF ON/OFF
MAX(165) ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
MIN(166)
SUM(167)
EMBC(171) ON/OFF
CCL(172) ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
REGL(175) ON/OFF
REGS(176)
FPD(177)* ON/OFF ON/OFF
DATE(179)* ON/OFF
FILR(180)
FILW(181)
FILP(182)
FLSP(183)
IODP(189)
READ(190) ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
WRIT(191)
SEND(192) ON/OFF
RECV(193)
CMND(194)
MSG(195)
SA(210)
CJP(221)*
CJPN(222)*
CNR(236)
RLNC(260)* ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
RRNC(261)*
RLNL(262)*
RRNL(263)*
PID(270)* ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
Note “ON/OFF” means that the flag is affected by the result of instruction execution.
Appendix BError and Arithmetic Flag Operation
573
Instructions A50010
(UF)
A50009
(OF)
A50008
(N)
A50007
(LE)
A50006
(EQ)
A50005
(GR)
A50004
(CY)
A50003
(ER)
LMT(271)* ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
BAND(272)*
ZONE(273)*
ROTB(274)* ON/OFF ON/OFF OFF ON/OFF OFF
BINS(275)* ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
BCDS(276)*
BISL(277)*
BDSL(278)*
RD2(280)* ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
WR2(281)*
+(400)* ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
+L(401)*
+C(402)*
+CL(403)*
+B(404)* ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
+BL(405)*
+BC(406)*
+BCL(407)*
–(410)* ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
–L(411)*
–C(412)*
–CL(413)*
–B(414)* ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
–BL(415)*
–BC(416)*
–BCL(417)*
*(420)* ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
*L(421)*
*U(422)*
*UL(423)*
*B(424)* ON/OFF ON/OFF
*BL(425)*
/(430)* ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
/L(431)*
/U(432)*
/UL(433)*
/B(434)* ON/OFF ON/OFF
/BL(435)*
FIX(450)* ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
FIXL(451)*
FLT(452)*
FLTL(453)*
+F(454)* ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
–F(455)*
*F(456)*
/F(457)*
RAD(458)*
DEG(459)*
Note “ON/OFF” means that the flag is affected by the result of instruction execution.
Appendix BError and Arithmetic Flag Operation
574
Instructions A50010
(UF)
A50009
(OF)
A50008
(N)
A50007
(LE)
A50006
(EQ)
A50005
(GR)
A50004
(CY)
A50003
(ER)
SIN(460)* ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF OFF OFF
COS(461)*
TAN(462)* ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF OFF
ASIN(463)* ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF OFF OFF
ACOS(464)* ON/OFF ON/OFF OFF OFF OFF
ATAN(465)* ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF OFF OFF
SQRT(466)* ON/OFF ON/OFF OFF ON/OFF OFF
EXP(467)* ON/OFF ON/OFF OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
LOG(468)* ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF OFF
TIMW<013>* ON/OFF
CNTW<014>*
TMHW<015>*
Note “ON/OFF” means that the flag is affected by the result of instruction execution.
575
Appendix C
PC Setup Default Settings
Parameter Default value
A:Hold areas H:Hold areas CIO 1200 to CIO 1499
R:Hold bits Nothing held.
B:Startup hold K:Forced Status Reset at startup.
I:I/O bits
D:Power on flag
C:Startup mode PROGRAM
D:Startup processing Don’t transfer program.
E:I/O refresh Cyclic refreshing
F:Execute
l1
B:Detect low battery Detect
control 1 S:Error on power off Fatal
T:CPU standby CPU waits
K:Measure CPU SIOU
cycle Don’t measure cycle.
G:Execute
l2
C:Execute process Asynchronous
control 2 I:I/O interrupt Nesting
D:Power OFF interrupt Disable
A:Dup action process Error
T:Step timer Set to 0.1 s
J:Startup trace Don’t start trace.
B:*DM BIN/BCD BCD
P:Multiple use of JMP000 Enabled
E:Compare error process Run after error
H:Host link B:Baud rate 9600 bps
S:Stop bit 2 bits
P:Parity Even
D:Data bits 7 bits
G:Unit # Unit number 0
I:CPU bus link Don’t use CPU Bus Link.
J:Scheduled interrupt 10.0 ms
K:1st Rack addr (First words for local racks) 0 for CPU Rack
L:Group 1,2 1st addr
(First words for SYSMAC BUS/2 Slaves) RM0 RM1 RM2 RM3
Group 1:CIO 0200CIO 0400CIO 0600CIO 0800
Group 2:CIO 0250CIO 0450CIO 0650CIO 0850
M:Trans I/O addr (First words for I/O
Terminals) RM0 RM1 RM2 RM3
CIO 2300 CIO2332 CIO 2364 CIO2396
RM4 RM5 RM6 RM7
CIO 2428 CIO 2460 CIO 2492 CIO 2524
N:Group 3, RT 1st addr
(First words for group-3 Slave Racks) Group 3 (SYSMAC BUS/2):
RM0 RM1 RM2 RM3
CIO 0300 CIO 0500 CIO 0700 CIO 0900
Words allocated to Units in order under each Master.
RT (SYSMAC BUS):
Defaults for SYSMAC BUS Slaves are the same as for I/O Terminals
(see above). Words allocated to Units in order under each Master.
P:Power break (Momentary power interruption
time) 0 ms
Q:Cycle time Cycle variable
R:Watch cycle time (Cycle time monitoring
time) 1,000 ms
Appendix CPC Setup Default Settings
576
Parameter Default value
S:Error log 20 records in A100 through A199
T:IOIF, RT display (Slave display modes at
startup) Mode 1
577
Appendix D
Data Areas
The data areas in the CV-series PCs are summarized below. These are the same for all PCs unless specified.
Only dedicated bits are shown specifically. The use of all other bits is determined either by the System the PC
is involved in, e.g., SYSMAC LINK Systems use the Link Area, or by the programmer, e.g., storage of data in
the Dm Area.
Area PC Range Function
CIO Area
(Core I/O) CV500/
CVM1-CPU01-EV2 Words: CIO 0000 to CIO 2427
Bits: CIO 000000 to CIO 242715
($0000 to $097B)
The CIO (Core I/O) Area is divided into
eight sections, five controlling I/O and three
used to store and manipulate data
internally.
CV1000/CV2000/
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
Words: CIO 0000 to CIO 2555
Bits: CIO 000000 to CIO 255515
($0000 to $09FB)
Refer to
3-3 CIO (Core I/O) Area
for details.
Temporary
Relay Area All TR0 to TR7 (bits only)
($09FF) Used to temporarily store execution
conditions. TR bits are not input when
programming directly in ladder diagrams,
and are used only when programming in
mnemonic form.
CPU Bus
Link Area All Words: G000 to G255
Bits: G00000 to G25515
($0A00 to $0AFF)
G000 is the PC Status Area; G001 to G004,
the Clock Area. G008 to G127 contain PC
output bits; G128 to G255, CPU Bus Unit
output bits.
Auxiliary
Area All Words: A000 to A511
Bits: A00000 to A51115
($0B00 to $0CFF)
Contains flags and bits with special
functions.
Transition
Area CV500 TN0000 to TN0511
($0D00 to $0D1F) Transition Flags for the transitions in the
SFC program.
CV1000/CV2000 TN0000 to TN1023 ($0D00 to $0D3F)
Step Area CV500 ST0000 to ST0511 ($0E00 to $0E1F) Step Flags for steps in the SFC program. A
i i h i fl i ON
CV1000/CV2000 ST0000 to ST1023 ($0E00 to $0E3F)
gg
step is active when its flag is ON.
Timer Area CV500/
CVM1-CPU01-EV2 T0000 to T0511
(Completion Flags: $0F00 to $0F1F
Present Values: $1000 to $11FF)
Used to define timers (normal, high-speed,
and totalizing) and to access Completion
Flags, PV, and SV.
CV1000/CV2000/
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
T0000 to T1023
(Completion Flags: $0F00 to $0F3F
Present Values: $1000 to $13FF)
Counter
Area CV500/
CVM1-CPU01-EV2 C0000 to C0511
(Completion Flags: $0F80 to $0F9F
Present Values: $1800 to $19FF)
Used to define counters (normal, reversible,
and transition) and to access Completion
Flags, PV, and SV.
CV1000/CV2000/
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
C0000 to C1023
(Completion Flags: $0F80 to $0FBF
Present Values: $1800 to $1BFF)
DM Area CV500/
CVM1-CPU01-EV2 D00000 to D08191 ($2000 to $3FFF) Used for internal data storage and
manipulation.
CV1000/CV2000/
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
D00000 to D24575 ($2000 to $7FFF)
EM Area CV1000/CV2000
CVM1-CPU21-EV2 E00000 to E32765 for each bank; 2,
4, or 8 banks ($8000 to $8FFD) EM functions just like DM. An Extended
Data Memory Unit must be installed.
Index
registers All IR0 to IR2 Used for indirect addressing.
Data
registers All DR0 to DR2 Generally used for indirect addressing.
Appendix DData Areas
578
Dedicated Bits
Some of the bits in the CPU Bus Link Area and most of the bits in the Auxiliary Area and are dedicated for
specific purposes. These are summarized in the following tables. Refer to
3-5 CPU Bus Link Area
and
3-6
Auxiliary Area
for details.
CPU Bus Link Area
Most CPU Bus Link Area bits are in the Data Link Area, used to transfer information between the CPU and
CPU Bus Units, but G000 contains flags and control bits relating to PC status and G001 to G004 is the Clock/
Calendar Area.
Word(s) Bit(s) Function
G000 00 ON when the PC is in PROGRAM mode.
01 ON when the PC is in Debug mode.
02 ON when the PC is in MONITOR mode.
03 ON when the PC is in RUN mode.
04 ON when the program is being executed.
05 Not used.
06 ON when a non-fatal error has occured. (PC operation continues.)
07 ON when a fatal error has occured. (PC stops.)
08 to 10 Not used.
11 UM Protect Bit. Prevents both reading out and writing to Program Memory when turned ON.
Set with the CVSS.
12 Memory Card Protect Bit. Prevents writing to Memory Card when turned ON. Set with the
Memory Card Protect Switch.
13 and 14 Not used.
15 UM Protect Bit. Prevents writing to Program Memory when turned ON. Set with the System
Protect Key Switch.
G 001 00 to 07 Seconds (00 to 59)
08 to 15 Minutes (00 to 59)
G 002 00 to 07 Hours (00 to 23)
08 to 15 Day of month (01 to 31)
G 003 00 to 07 Month (1 to 12)
08 to 15 Year (00 to 99)
G 004 00 to 07 Day of week (00 to 06, 00 = Sun.)
Appendix DData Areas
579
Auxiliary Area
As a rule, Auxiliary Area bits can be used only for the purposes for which they are dedicated. A256 to A511
are read only.
Word(s) Bit(s) Function
A000 00 to 10 Not used.
11 Restart Continuation Bit
12 IOM Hold Bit
13 Forced Status Hold Bit
14 Error Log Reset Bit
15 Output OFF Bit
A001 00 to 15 CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits
A002 to A004 00 to 15 Not used.
A005 00 to 07 SYSMAC BUS Error Check Bits
08 to 15 Not used.
A006 00 to 15 Not used.
A007 00 to 15 Momentary Power Interruption Time (BCD)
A008 00 to 06 Not used.
07 Stop Monitor Flag
08 Execution Time Measured Flag
09 Differentiate Monitor Completed Flag
10 Stop Monitor Completed Flag
11 Trace Trigger Monitor Flag
12 Trace Completed Flag
13 Trace Busy Flag
14 Trace Start Bit
15 Sampling Start Bit
A009 00 to 15 Not used.
A010 to A011 00 to 15 Startup Time (BCD)
A012 to A013 00 to 15 Power Interruption Time (BCD)
A014 00 to 15 Number of Power Interruptions (BCD)
A015 00 to 15 CPU Bus Service Disable Bits
A016 00 to 15 Not used.
A017 00 to 02 Not used.
03 Host Link Service Disable Bit
04 Peripheral Service Disable Bit
05 I/O Refresh Disable Bit
06 to 15 Not used.
A018 to A089 00 to 15 Not used.
A090 to A097 00 to 15 Reserved for system use
A098 00 FPD(177) Teaching Bit
01 to 15 Not used.
A099 00 to 07 Message #0 to #7 Flags
08 to 15 Not used.
A100 to A199 00 to 15 Error Log Area (20 × 5 words)
A200 to A203 00 to 15 Macro area inputs
A204 to A207 00 to 15 Macro area outputs
A208 to A255 00 to 15 Not used.
A256 to A299 00 to 15 Not used.
A300 00 to 15 Error Log Pointer (binary)
A301 00 to 15 Not used.
Appendix DData Areas
580
Word(s) FunctionBit(s)
A302 00 to 15 CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags
A303 to A305 00 to 15 Not used.
A306 00 Start Input Wait Flag
01 I/O Verification Error Wait Flag
02 SYSMAC BUS Terminator Wait Flag
03 CPU Bus Unit Initializing Wait Flag
04 to 07 Not used.
08 to 11 Connected Device Code 2: GPC
3: Programming Console
12 to 14 Not used.
15 Peripheral Connected Flag
A307 00 to 07 Peripheral Connected Flags for RT #0 to RT #7 of RM/2 #0
08 to 15 Peripheral Connected Flags for RT #0 to RT #7 of RM/2 #1
A308 00 to 07 Peripheral Connected Flags for RT #0 to RT #7 of RM/2 #2
08 to 15 Peripheral Connected Flags for RT #0 to RT #7 of RM/2 #3
A309 00 to 15 Peripheral Device Cycle Time (binary)
A310 to A325 00 to 15 CPU Bus Unit Service Interval (binary)
A326 to A342 00 to 15 Not used.
A343 00 to 02 Memory Card Type
03 to 06 Not used.
07 Memory Card Format Error Flag
08 Memory Card Transfer Error Flag
09 Memory Card Write Error Flag
10 Memory Card Read Error Flag
11 FIle Missing Flag
12 Memory Card Write Flag
13 Memory Card Instruction Flag
14 Accessing Memory Card Flag
15 Memory Card Protected Flag
A344 to 345 00 to 15 Not used.
A346 00 to 15 Number of Words Remaining to transfer to memory card for a file read/write instruction
(BCD)
A347 to A399 00 to 15 Not used.
A400 00 to 15 Error Code
A401 00 to 05 Not used.
06 FALS Error Flag
07 SFC Fatal Error Flag
08 Cycle Time Too Long Flag
09 Program Error Flag
10 I/O Setting Error Flag
11 Too Many I/O Points Flag
12 CPU Bus Error Flag
13 Duplication Error Flag
14 I/O Bus Error Flag
15 Memory Error Flag
Appendix DData Areas
581
Word(s) FunctionBit(s)
A402 00 to 01 Not used.
02 Power Interruption Flag
03 CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Flag
04 Battery Low Flag
05 SYSMAC BUS Error Flag
06 SYSMAC BUS/2 Error Flag
07 CPU Bus Unit Error Flag
08 Not used.
09 I/O Verification Error Flag
10 Not used.
11 SFC Non-fatal Error Flag
12 Indirect DM Error Flag
13 Jump Error Flag
14 Not used.
15 FAL Error Flag
A403 00 to 08 Memory Error Area Location
09 Memory Card Startup Transfer Error Flag
10 to 15 Not used.
A404 00 to 07 I/O Bus Error Slot Number (BCD)
08 to 15 I/O Bus Error Rack Number (BCD)
A405 00 to 15 CPU Bus Unit Error Unit Number
A406 00 to 15 Not used.
A407 00 to 15 Total I/O Words on CPU and Expansion Racks (BCD)
A408 00 to 15 Total SYSMAC BUS/2 I/O Words (BCD)
A409 00 to 07 Duplicate Rack Number
08 to 14 Not used
15 Duplicate System Parameter Words Flag
A410 00 to 15 CPU Bus Unit Duplicate Number
A411 to A413 00 to 15 Not used.
A414 00 to 15 SFC Fatal Error Code
A415 to A417 00 to 15 Not used.
A418 00 to 15 SFC Non-fatal Error Code
A419 00 to 07 CPU-recognized Rack Numbers
08 to 15 Not used.
A420 to A421 00 to 15 Not used.
A422 00 to 15 CPU Bus Unit Error Unit Number
A423 00 to 13 Not used.
14 CPU Bus Unit Number Setting Error Flag
15 CPU Bus Link Error Flag
A424 00 to 03 SYSMAC BUS/2 Error Master Number
04 to 15 Not used.
A425 00 to 07 SYSMAC BUS Error Master Number
08 to 15 Not used.
A426 00 to 13 Not used
14 Memory Card Battery Low Flag
15 PC Battery Low Flag
A427 00 to 15 CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Unit Number
A428 to A429 00 to 15 Not used.
A430 to A461 00 to 15 Executed FAL Number
Appendix DData Areas
582
Word(s) FunctionBit(s)
A462 to A463 00 to 15 Maximum Cycle Time (BCD, 8 digits)
A464 to A465 00 to 15 Present Cycle Time (BCD, 8 digits)
A466 to A469 00 to 15 Not used.
A470 to A477 00 to 15 SYSMAC BUS Error Codes:
RM # 0 (A470) RM #1 (A471)
RM # 2 (A472) RM #3 (A473)
RM # 4 (A474) RM #5 (A475)
RM # 6 (A476) RM #7 (A477)
A478 00 to 15 Total SYSMAC BUS I/O Words (BCD)
A479 00 to 15 Not used.
A480 to A499 00 to 15 SYSMAC BUS/2 Error Unit Number:
RM # 0 (A480 to A484) RM #1 (A485 to A489)
RM # 2 (A490 to A494) RM #3 (A495 to A499)
A500 00 to 02 Not used.
03 Instruction Execution Error Flag
04 Carry Flag
05 Greater Than Flag
06 Equals Flag
07 Less Than Flag
08 Negative Flag
09 Overflow Flag
10 Underflow Flag
11 Not used.
12 First Cycle Flag when one-step operation is started with STEP instruction
13 Always ON Flag
14 Always OFF Flag
15 First Cycle Flag
A501 00 0.1-s Clock Pulse
01 0.2-s Clock Pulse
02 1.0-s Clock Pulse
03 0.02-s Clock Pulse
04 to 15 Not used.
A502 00 to 07 Port #0 to #7 Enabled Flags
08 to 15 Port #0 to #7 Execute Error Flags
A503 to A510 00 to 15 Port #0 to #7 Completion Codes
A511 00 to 04 Current EM Bank (0 to 7)
05 to 14 Not used.
15 EM Installed Flag
583
Appendix E
I/O Assignment Sheets
This appendix contains sheets that can be copied by the programmer to record I/O bit allocations and terminal
assignments on the Racks, as well as details of work bits, data storage areas, timers, and counters.
Appendix EI/O Assignment Sheets
584
Programmer: Program: Date: Page:
Word: Unit:
Bit Field device Notes
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Word: Unit:
Bit Field device Notes
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Word: Unit:
Bit Field device Notes
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Word: Unit:
Bit Field device Notes
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
I/O Bits
Appendix EI/O Assignment Sheets
585
Programmer: Program: Date: Page:
Area: Word:
Bit Usage Notes
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Area: Word:
Bit Usage Notes
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Area: Word:
Bit Usage Notes
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Area: Word:
Bit Usage Notes
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Work Bits
Appendix EI/O Assignment Sheets
586
Programmer: Program: Date: Page:
Word Contents Notes Word Contents Notes
Data Storage
Appendix EI/O Assignment Sheets
587
Programmer: Program: Date: Page:
Timer Set value Notes Counter Set value Notes
Timers and Counters
589
Appendix F
Program Coding Sheet
The following page can be copied for use in coding ladder diagram programs. It is designed for flexibility, al-
lowing the user to input all required addresses and instructions.
When coding programs, be sure to specify all function codes for instructions and data areas (or # for constant)
for operands. These will be necessary when inputting programs though a Programming Console or other Pe-
ripheral Device.
Appendix FProgram Coding Sheet
590
Programmer: Program: Date: Page:
Address Instruction Operand(s) Address Instruction Operand(s)
Appendix FProgram Coding Sheet
591
Programmer: Program: Date: Page:
Address Instruction Operand(s) Address Instruction Operand(s)
593
Appendix G
Data Conversion Table
Decimal BCD Hex Binary
00 00000000 00 00000000
01 00000001 01 00000001
02 00000010 02 00000010
03 00000011 03 00000011
04 00000100 04 00000100
05 00000101 05 00000101
06 00000110 06 00000110
07 00000111 07 00000111
08 00001000 08 00001000
09 00001001 09 00001001
10 00010000 0A 00001010
11 00010001 0B 00001011
12 00010010 0C 00001100
13 00010011 0D 00001101
14 00010100 0E 00001110
15 00010101 0F 00001111
16 00010110 10 00010000
17 00010111 11 00010001
18 00011000 12 00010010
19 00011001 13 00010011
20 00100000 14 00010100
21 00100001 15 00010101
22 00100010 16 00010110
23 00100011 17 00010111
24 00100100 18 00011000
25 00100101 19 00011001
26 00100110 1A 00011010
27 00100111 1B 00011011
28 00101000 1C 00011100
29 00101001 1D 00011101
30 00110000 1E 00011110
31 00110001 1F 00011111
32 00110010 20 00100000
595
Appendix H
Extended ASCII
Bits 0 to 3 Bits 4 to 7
Binary 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111
Hex 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A B C D E F
0000 0 NUL DLE Space 0 @ P ` p 0 @ P ` p
0001 1 SOH DC1! 1 A Q a q ! 1 A Q a q
0010 2 STX DC2" 2 B R b r " 2 B R b r
0011 3 ETX DC3# 3 C S c s # 3 C S c s
0100 4 EOT DC4$ 4 D T d t $ 4 D T d t
0101 5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u % 5 E U e u
0110 6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v & 6 F V f v
0111 7 BEL ETB ' 7 G W g w ' 7 G W g w
1000 8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x ( 8 H X h x
1001 9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y ) 9 I Y i y
1010 A LF SUB * : J Z j z * : J Z j z
1011 B VT ESC + ; K [ k { + ; K [ k {
1100 C FF FS , < L \ l | , < L \ l |
1101 D CR GS = M ] m } = M ] m }
1110 E S0 RS . > N ^ n « . > N ^ n
1111 F S1 US / ? O _ o ~ / ? O _ o ~
597
Glossary
action In SFC programs, the individual executable elements in an action block. An ac-
tion can be defined either as a ladder diagram or as a single bit in memory.
Action Area A memory area that contains flags that indicate when actions are active.
action block A collection of all the actions for a single step in an SFC program. Each action is
accompanied by its action qualifier, set value, and feedback variable.
action number A number assigned to an action. Each action has a unique number. These num-
bers are used to access and to control the status of the action.
action program A ladder diagram program written to define an action.
action qualifier A designation made for a action to control when the action is to be executed in
respect to the status of the step.
active status One of the two main statuses that a step can be in. Active status includes pause,
halt, and execute status.
active step A step that is in either pause, halt, or execute status. There can be more than on e
active step.
address A number used to identify the location of data or programming instructions in
memory or to identify the location of a network or a unit in a network.
advanced instruction An instruction input with a function code that handles data processing opera-
tions within ladder diagrams, as opposed to a basic instruction, which makes up
the fundamental portion of a ladder diagram.
allocation The process by which the PC assigns certain bits or words in memory for various
functions. This includes pairing I/O bits to I/O points on Units.
analog Something that represents or can process a continuous range of values as op-
posed to values that can be represented in distinct increments. Something that
represents or can process values represented in distinct increments is called
digital.
Analog I/O Unit I/O Units that convert I/O between analog and digital values. An Analog Input
Input converts an analog input to a digital value for processing by the PC. An
Analog Output Unit converts a digital value to an analog output.
AND A logic operation whereby the result is true if and only if both premises are true.
In ladder-diagram programming the premises are usually ON/OFF states of bits
or the logical combination of such states called execution conditions.
AQ See
action qualifier
.
area See
data area
and
memory area
.
area prefix A one or two letter prefix used to identify a memory area in the PC. All memory
areas except the CIO area require prefixes to identify addresses in them.
arithmetic shift A shift operation wherein the carry flag is included in the shift.
Glossary
598
ASCII Short for American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII is used to
code characters for output to printers and other external devices.
asynchronous execution Execution of programs and servicing operations in which program execution
and servicing are not synchronized with each other.
auto-decrement A process that can be used when addressing memory through index registers so
that the address in the register is automatically reduced by 1 before each use.
auto-increment A process that can be used when addressing memory through index registers so
that the address in the register is automatically increased by 1 after each use.
Auxiliary Area A PC data area allocated to flags and control bits.
auxiliary bit A bit in the Auxiliary Area.
Backplane A base to which Units are mounted to form a Rack. Backplanes provide a series
of connectors for these Units along with buses to connect them to the CPU and
other Units and wiring to connect them to the Power Supply Unit. Backplanes
also provide connectors used to connect them to other Backplanes.
back-up A copy made of existing data to ensure that the data will not be lost even if the
original data is corrupted or erased.
bank One of multiple sections of a storage area for data or settings. The EM Area is
divided into banks each of which is accessed using the same addresses, but d if -
ferent bank numbers.
BASIC A common programming language. BASIC Units are programmed in BASIC.
basic instruction A fundamental instruction used in a ladder diagram. See
advanced instruction
.
Basic Rack Any of the following Racks: CPU Rack, Expansion CPU Rack, or Expansion I/O
Rack.
BASIC Unit A CPU Bus Unit used to run programs in BASIC.
baud rate The data transmission speed between two devices in a system measured in bits
per second.
BCD Short for binary-coded decimal.
BCD calculation An arithmetic calculation that uses numbers expressed in binary-coded deci-
mal.
binary A number system where all numbers are expressed in base 2, i.e., numbers are
written using only 0’s and 1’ s. Each group of four binary bits is equivalent to one
hexadecimal digit. Binary data in memory is thus often expressed in hexadeci-
mal for convenience.
binary calculation An arithmetic calculation that uses numbers expressed in binary.
binary-coded decimal A system used to represent numbers so that every four binary bits is numerically
equivalent to one decimal digit.
bit The smallest piece of information that can be represented on a computer. A bit
has the value of either zero or one, corresponding to the electrical signals ON
Glossary
599
and OFF. A bit represents one binary digit. Some bits at particular addresses are
allocated to special purposes, such as holding the status of input from external
devices, while other bits are available for general use in programming.
bit address The location in memory where a bit of data is stored. A bit address specifies the
data area and word that is being addressed as well as the number of the bit with-
in the word.
bit designator An operand that is used to designate the bit or bits of a word to be used by an
instruction.
bit number A number that indicates the location of a bit within a word. Bit 00 is the rightmost
(least-significant) bit; bit 15 is the leftmost (most-significant) bit.
bit-control instruction An instruction that is used to control the status of an individual bit as opposed to
the status of an entire word.
block See
logic block
and
instruction block
.
buffer A temporary storage space for data in a computerized device.
building-block PC A PC that is constructed from individual components, or “building blocks.” With
building-block PCs, there is no one Unit that is independently identifiable as a
PC. The PC is rather a functional assembly of Units.
bus A communications path used to pass data between any of the Units connected
to it.
bus bar The line leading down the left and sometimes right side of a ladder diagram. In-
struction execution proceeds down the bus bar, which is the starting point for all
instruction lines.
bus link A data link that passed data between two Units across a bus.
byte A unit of data equivalent to 8 bits, i.e., half a word.
call A process by which instruction execution shifts from the main program to a sub-
routine. The subroutine may be called by an instruction or by an interrupt.
Carry Flag A flag that is used with arithmetic operations to hold a carry from an addition or
multiplication operation, or to indicate that the result is negative in a subtraction
operation. The carry flag is also used with certain types of shift operations.
central processing unit A device that is capable of storing programs and data, and executing the instruc-
tions contained in the programs. In a PC System, the central processing unit ex-
ecutes the program, processes I/O signals, communicates with external de-
vices, etc.
channel See
word
.
character code A numeric (usually binary) code used to represent an alphanumeric character.
checksum A sum transmitted with a data pack in communications. The checksum can be
recalculated from the received data to confirm that the data in the transmission
has not been corrupted.
CIO Area A memory area used to control I/O and to store and manipulate data. CIO Area
addresses do not require prefixes.
Glossary
600
clock pulse A pulse available at specific bits in memory for use in timing operations. Various
clock pulses are available with dif ferent pulse widths, and therefore dif ferent fre-
quencies.
clock pulse bit A bit in memory that supplies a pulse that can be used to time operations. Vari-
ous clock pulse bits are available with different pulse widths, and therefore differ-
ent frequencies.
comparison instruction An instruction used to compare data at different locations in memory to deter-
mine the relationship between the data.
Completion Flag A flag used with a timer or counter that turns ON when the timer has timed out or
the counter has reached its set value.
condition A symbol placed on an instruction line to indicate an instruction that controls the
execution condition for the terminal instruction. Each condition is assigned a bit
in memory that determines its status. The status of the bit assigned to each con-
dition determines the next execution condition. Conditions correspond to LOAD,
LOAD NOT, AND, AND NOT, OR, or OR NOT instructions.
constant An input for an operand in which the actual numeric value is specified. Constants
can be input for certain operands in place of memory area addresses. Some op-
erands must be input as constants.
control bit A bit in a memory area that is set either through the program or via a Program-
ming Device to achieve a specific purpose, e.g., a Restart Bit is turned ON and
OFF to restart a Unit.
control data An operand that specifies how an instruction is to be executed. The control data
may specify the part of a word is to be used as the operand, it may specify the
destination for a data transfer instructions, it may specify the size of a data table
used in an instruction, etc.
control signal A signal sent from the PC to effect the operation of the controlled system.
Control System All of the hardware and software components used to control other devices. A
Control System includes the PC System, the PC programs, and all I/O devices
that are used to control or obtain feedback from the controlled system.
controlled system The devices that are being controlled by a PC System.
count pulse The signal counted by a counter.
counter A dedicated group of digits or words in memory used to count the number of
times a specific process has occurred, or a location in memory accessed
through a TC bit and used to count the number of times the status of a bit or an
execution condition has changed from OFF to ON.
CPU See
central processing unit
.
CPU Backplane A Backplane used to create a CPU Rack.
CPU Bus Unit A special Unit used with CV-series PCs that mounts to the CPU bus. This con-
nection t o the CPU bus enables special data links, data transfers, and process-
ing.
CPU Rack The main Rack in a building-block PC, the CPU Rack contains the CPU, a Power
Supply, and other Units. The CPU Rack, along with the Expansion CPU Rack,
provides both an I/O bus and a CPU bus.
Glossary
601
C-series PC Any of the following PCs: C2000H, C1000H, C500, C200H, C40H, C28H, C20H,
C60K, C60P, C40K, C40P, C28K, C28P, C20K, C20P, C120, or C20.
custom data area A data area defined by the user within the CIO Area. Custom data areas can be
set from the CVSS and certain other Programming Devices.
CV Support Software A programming package run on an IBM PC/AT or compatible to serve as a Pro-
gramming Device for CV-series PCs.
CV-series PC Any of the following PCs: CV500, CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1
CVSS See
CV Support Software
.
cycle One unit of processing performed by the CPU, including SFC/ladder program
execution, peripheral servicing, I/O refreshing, etc. The cycle is called the scan
with C-series PCs.
cycle time The time required to complete one cycle of CPU processing.
cyclic interrupt See
scheduled interrupt.
data area An area in the PC’s memory that is designed to hold a specific type of data.
data area boundary The highest address available within a data area. When designating an operand
that requires multiple words, it is necessary to ensure that the highest address in
the data area is not exceeded.
data link An automatic data transmission operation that allows PCs or Units within PC to
pass data back and forth via common data areas.
data movement instruction An instruction used to move data from one location in memory to another. The
data in the original memory location is left unchanged.
data register A storage location in memory used to hold data. In CV-series PCs, data registers
are used with or without index registers to hold data used in indirect addressing.
data trace A process in which changes in the contents of specific memory locations are re-
corded during program execution.
data transfer Moving data from one memory location to another, either within the same device
or between different devices connected via a communications line or network.
debug A process by which a draft program is corrected until it operates as intended.
Debugging includes both the removal of syntax errors, as well as the fine-tuning
of timing and coordination of control operations.
DEBUG mode A mode of PC operation which enables basic debugging of user programs.
decimal A number system where numbers are expressed to the base 10. In a PC all data
is ultimately stored in binary form, four binary bits are often used to represent
one decimal digit, via a system called binary-coded decimal.
decrement Decreasing a numeric value, usually by 1.
default A value automatically set by the PC when the user does not specifically set
another value. Many devices will assume such default conditions upon the appli-
cation of power.
Glossary
602
definer A number used as an operand for an instruction but that serves to define the in-
struction itself, rather that the data on which the instruction is to operate. Defin-
ers include jump numbers, subroutine numbers, etc.
destination The location where an instruction places the data on which it is operating, as op-
posed t o the location from which data is taken for use in the instruction. The loca-
tion from which data is taken is called the source.
differentiated instruction An instruction that is executed only once each time its execution condition goes
from OFF to ON. Non-differentiated instructions are executed for each scan as
long as the execution condition stays ON.
differentiation instruction An instruction used to ensure that the operand bit is never turned ON for more
than one scan after the execution condition goes either from OFF to ON for a
Differentiate Up instruction or from ON to OFF for a Differentiate Down instruc-
tion.
digit A unit of storage in memory that consists of four bits.
digit designator An operand that is used to designate the digit or digits of a word to be used by an
instruction.
DIP switch Dual in-line package switch, an array of pins in a signal package that is mounted
to a circuit board and is used to set operating parameters.
distributed control A automation concept in which control of each portion of an automated system is
located near the devices actually being controlled, i.e., control is decentralized
and ‘distributed’ over the system. Distributed control is a concept basic to PC
Systems.
DM Area A data area used to hold only word data. Words in the DM area cannot be ac-
cessed bit by bit.
DM word A word in the DM Area.
downloading The process of transferring a program or data from a higher-level or host com-
puter to a lower-level or slave computer. If a Programming Device is involved,
the Programming Device is considered the host computer.
DR See
data register
.
Dummy I/O Unit An I/O Unit that has no functional capabilities but that can be mounted to a slot on
a Rack so that words can be allocated to that slot. Dummy I/O Units can be used
to avoid changing operand addresses in programs by reserving words for a slot
for future use or by filling a slot vacated by a Unit to which words have already
been allocated.
EEPROM Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory; a type of ROM in which
stored data can be erased and reprogrammed. This is accomplished using a
special control lead connected to the EEPROM chip and can be done without
having to remove the EEPROM chip from the device in which it is mounted.
electrical noise Random variations of one or more electrical characteristics such as voltage, cur-
rent, and data, which might interfere with the normal operation of a device.
EM Area Extended Data Memory Area; an area that can be optionally added to certain
PCs to enable greater data storage. Functionally, the EM Area operates like the
Glossary
603
DM Area. Area addresses are prefixes with E and only words can be accessed.
The EM Area is separated into multiple banks.
EM card A card mounted inside certain PCs to added an EM Area.
EPROM Erasable programmable read-only memory; a type of ROM in which stored data
can be erased, by ultraviolet light or other means, and reprogrammed.
error code A numeric code generated to indicate that an error exists, and something about
the nature of the error. Some error codes are generated by the system; others
are defined in the program by the operator.
Error Log Area An area in System DM that is used to store records indicating the time and nature
of errors that have occurred in the system.
event processing Processing that is performed in response to an event, e.g., an interrupt signal.
exclusive NOR A logic operation whereby the result is true if both of the premises are true or both
of the premises are false. In ladder-diagram programming, the premises are
usually the ON/OFF states of bits, or the logical combination of such states,
called execution conditions.
exclusive OR A logic operation whereby the result is true if one, and only one, of the premises
is true. In ladder-diagram programming the premises are usually the ON/OFF
states of bits, or the logical combination of such states, called execution condi-
tions.
execution condition The ON or OFF status under which an instruction is executed. The execution
condition i s determined by the logical combination of conditions on the same in-
struction line and up to the instruction currently being executed.
execution cycle The cycle used to execute all processes required by the CPU, including program
execution, I/O refreshing, peripheral servicing, etc.
execution time The time required for the CPU to execute either an individual instruction or an
entire program.
Expansion CPU Rack A Rack connected to the CPU Rack to increase the virtual size of the CPU Rack.
Units that may be mounted to the CPU Backplane may also be mounted to the
Expansion CPU Backplane.
Expansion Data Memory Unit A card mounted inside certain PCs to added an EM Area.
Expansion I/O Rack A Rack used to increase the I/O capacity of a PC. In CV-Series PC, either one
Expansion I/O Rack can be connected directly to the CPU or Expansion CPU
Rack or multiple Expansion I/O Racks can be connected by using an I/O Control
and I/O Interface Units.
extended counter A counter created in a program by using two or more count instructions in suc-
cession. Such a counter is capable of counting higher than any of the standard
counters provided by the individual instructions.
extended timer A timer created in a program by using two or more timers in succession. Such a
timer is capable of timing longer than any of the standard timers provided by the
individual instructions.
FA Factory automation.
Glossary
604
factory computer A general-purpose computer, usually quite similar to a business computer, that
is used in automated factory control.
FAL error An error generated from the user program by execution of an FAL(006) instruc-
tion.
FALS error An error generated from the user program by execution of an FALS(007) instruc-
tion or an error generated by the system.
fatal error An error that stops PC operation and requires correction before operation can
continue.
FINS See
CV-mode
.
flag A dedicated bit in memory that is set by the system to indicate some type of oper-
ating s t a t u s . Some flags, such as the carry flag, can also be set by the operator
or via the program.
flicker bit A bit that is programmed to turn ON and OFF at a specific frequency.
floating-point decimal A decimal number expressed as a number (the mantissa) multiplied by a power
of 10, e.g., 0.538 x 10–5.
force reset The process of forcibly turning OFF a bit via a programming device. Bits are usu-
ally turned OFF as a result of program execution.
force set The process of forcibly turning ON a bit via a programming device. Bits are usu-
ally turned ON as a result of program execution.
forced status The status of bits that have been force reset or force set.
frame checksum The results of exclusive ORing all data within a specified calculation range. The
frame checksum can be calculated on both the sending and receiving end of a
data transfer to confirm that data was transmitted correctly.
function code A two-digit number used to input an instruction into the PC.
GPC An acronym for Graphic Programming Console.
Graphic Programming Console A programming device with advanced programming and debugging capabilities
to facilitate PC operation. A Graphic Programming Console is provided with a
large display onto which ladder-diagram programs can be written directly in lad-
der-diagram symbols for input into the PC without conversion to mnemonic
form.
hardware error An error originating in the hardware structure (electronic components) of the PC,
as opposed to a software error, which originates in software (i.e., programs).
hexadecimal A number system where all numbers are expressed to the base 16. In a PC all
data is ultimately stored in binary form, however, displays and inputs on Pro-
gramming Devices are often expressed in hexadecimal to simplify operation.
Each group of four binary bits is numerically equivalent to one hexadecimal digit.
hold bit A bit in memory designated to maintain status when the PC’s operating mode is
changed or power is turned off and then back on.
hold Rack A Rack designated to maintain output status when the PC’s operating mode is
changed or power is turned off and then back on.
Glossary
605
holding area Words in memory designated to maintain status when the PC’ s operating mode
is changed or power is turned off and then back on.
host interface An interface that allows communications with a host computer.
Host Link System A system with one or more host computers connected to one or more PCs via
Host Link Units or host interfaces so that the host computer can be used to trans-
fer data to and from the PC(s). Host Link Systems enable centralized manage-
ment and control of PC Systems.
Host Link Unit An interface used to connect a C-series PC to a host computer in a Host Link
System.
I/O allocation The process by which the PC assigns certain bits in memory for various func-
tions. This includes pairing I/O bits to I/O points on Units.
I/O bit A bit in memory used to hold I/O status. Input bits reflect the status of input termi-
nals; output bits hold the status for output terminals.
I/O Block Either a n Input Block or an Output Block. I/O Blocks provide mounting positions
for replaceable relays.
I/O capacity The number of inputs and outputs that a PC is able to handle. This number
ranges from around one hundred for smaller PCs to two thousand for the largest
ones.
I/O Control Unit A Unit mounted to the CPU Rack to monitor and control I/O points on Expansion
CPU Racks or Expansion I/O Racks.
I/O delay The delay in time from when a signal is sent to an output to when the status of the
output is actually in effect or the delay in time from when the status of an input
changes until the signal indicating the change in the status is received.
I/O device A device connected to the I/O terminals on I/O Units, Special I/O Units, etc. I/O
devices may be either part of the Control System, if they function to help control
other devices, or they may be part of the controlled system.
I/O Interface Unit A Unit mounted to an Expansion CPU Rack or Expansion I/O Rack to interface
the Rack to the CPU Rack.
I/O interrupt An interrupt generated by a signal from I/O.
I/O point The place at which an input signal enters the PC System, or at which an output
signal leaves the PC System. In physical terms, I/O points correspond to termi-
nals or connector pins on a Unit; in terms of programming, an I/O points corre-
spond to I/O bits in the IR area.
I/O refreshing The process of updating output status sent to external devices so that it agrees
with the status of output bits held in memory and of updating input bits in memory
so that they agree with the status of inputs from external devices.
I/O response time The time required for an output signal to be sent from the PC in response to an
input signal received from an external device.
I/O table A table created within the memory of the PC that lists the I/O words allocated to
each Unit in the PC System. The I/O table can be created by, or modified from, a
Programming Device.
Glossary
606
I/O Terminal A Remote I/O Unit connected in a Wired Remote I/O System to provide a limited
number of I/O points at one location. There are several types of I/O Terminals.
I/O Unit The most basic type of Unit mounted to a Backplane. I/O Units include Input
Units and Output Units, each of which is available in a range of specifications.
I/O Units do not include Special I/O Units, Link Units, etc.
I/O verification error A error generated by a disagreement between the Units registered in the I/O
table and the Units actually mounted to the PC.
I/O word A word in the CIO area that is allocated to a Unit in the PC System and is used to
hold I/O status for that Unit.
IBM PC/AT or compatible A computer that has similar architecture to, that is logically compatible with, and
that can run software designed for an IBM PC/AT computer.
immediate refreshing A form of I/O refreshing that is executed by certain types of instruction when the
instruction i s executed to ensure that the most current input status is used for an
operand or to ensure that an output is effective immediately.
increment Increasing a numeric value, usually by 1.
index register A data storage location used with or without a data register in indirect address-
ing.
indirect address An address whose contents indicates another address. The contents of the sec-
ond address will be used as the actual operand.
initialization error An error that occurs either in hardware or software during the PC System star-
tup, i.e., during initialization.
initialize Part of the startup process whereby some memory areas are cleared, system
setup is checked, and default values are set.
input The signal coming from an external device into the PC. The term input is often
used abstractly or collectively to refer to incoming signals.
input bit A bit in the CIO area that is allocated to hold the status of an input.
Input Block A Unit used in combination with a Remote Interface to create an I/O Terminal. An
Input Block provides mounting positions for replaceable relays. Each relay can
be selected according to specific input requirements.
input device An external device that sends signals into the PC System.
input point The point at which an input enters the PC System. Input points correspond phys-
ically to terminals or connector pins.
input signal A change in the status of a connection entering the PC. Generally an input signal
is said to exist when, for example, a connection point goes from low to high volt-
age or from a nonconductive to a conductive state.
Input Terminal An I/O Terminal that provides input points.
instruction A direction given in the program that tells the PC of the action to be carried out,
and the data to be used in carrying out the action. Instructions can be used to
simply turn a bit ON or OFF, or they can perform much more complex actions,
such as converting and/or transferring large blocks of data.
Glossary
607
instruction block A group of instructions that is logically related in a ladder-diagram program. A
logic block includes all of the instruction lines that interconnect with each other
from one or more line connecting to the left bus bar to one or more right-hand
instructions connecting to the right bus bar.
instruction execution time The time required to execute an instruction. The execution time for any one in-
struction can vary with the execution conditions for the instruction and the oper-
ands used in it.
instruction line A group of conditions that lie together on the same horizontal line of a ladder dia-
gram. Instruction lines can branch apart or join together to form instruction
blocks. Also called a rung.
interface An interface is the conceptual boundary between systems or devices and usual-
ly involves changes in the way the communicated data is represented. Interface
devices such as NSBs perform operations like changing the coding, format, or
speed of the data.
interlock A programming method used to treat a number of instructions as a group so that
the entire group can be reset together when individual execution is not required.
An interlocked program section is executed normally for an ON execution condi-
tion and partially reset for an OFF execution condition.
intermediate instruction An instruction other than one corresponding to a condition that appears in the
middle o f a n instruction line and requires at least one more instruction between it
and the right bus bar.
interrupt (signal) A signal that stops normal program execution and causes a subroutine to be run
or other processing to take place.
Interrupt Input Unit A Rack-mounting Unit used to input external interrupts into a PC System.
interrupt program A program that is executed in response to an interrupt.
inverse condition See
normally closed condition
.
IOIF An acronym for I/O Interface Unit.
IOM (Area) A collective memory area containing all of the memory areas that can be ac-
cessed by bit, including timer and counter Completion Flags. The IOM Area in-
cludes all memory area memory addresses between 0000 and 0FFF.
JIS An acronym for Japanese Industrial Standards.
jump A type of programming where execution moves directly from one point in a pro-
gram to another, without sequentially executing any instructions in between.
Jumps in ladder diagrams are usually conditional on an execution condition;
jumps in SFC programs are conditional on the step status and transition condi-
tion status before the jump.
jump number A definer used with a jump that defines the points from and to which a jump is to
be made.
ladder diagram (program) A form of program arising out of relay-based control systems that uses cir-
cuit-type diagrams to represent the logic flow of programming instructions. The
appearance of the program is similar to a ladder, and thus the name.
ladder diagram symbol A symbol used in drawing a ladder-diagram program.
Glossary
608
ladder instruction An instruction that represents the conditions on a ladder-diagram program. The
other instructions in a ladder diagram fall along the right side of the diagram and
are called terminal instructions.
least-significant (bit/word) See
rightmost (bit/word)
.
LED Acronym for light-emitting diode; a device used as for indicators or displays.
leftmost (bit/word) The highest numbered bits of a group of bits, generally of an entire word, or the
highest numbered words of a group of words. These bits/words are often called
most-significant bits/words.
link A hardware or software connection formed between two Units. “Link” can refer
either to a part of the physical connection between two Units or a software con-
nection created to data existing at another location (i.e., data links).
Link Area A data area that is designed for use in data links.
Link System A system used to connect remote I/O or to connect multiple PCs in a network.
Link Systems include the following: SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Systems, SYS-
MAC BUS/2 Remote I/O Systems, SYSMAC LINK Systems, Host Link Systems,
and SYSMAC NET Link Systems.
Link Unit Any of the Units used to connect a PC to a Link System. These include Remote
I/O Units, SYSMAC LINK Units, and SYSMAC NET Link Units.
load The processes of copying data either from an external device or from a storage
area to an active portion of the system such as a display buffer. Also, an output
device connected to the PC is called a load.
logic block A group of instructions that is logically related in a ladder-diagram program and
that requires logic block instructions to relate it to other instructions or logic
blocks.
logic block instruction An instruction used to locally combine the execution condition resulting from a
logic block with a current execution condition. The current execution condition
could b e the result of a single condition, or of another logic block. AND Load and
OR Load are the two logic block instructions.
logic instruction Instructions used to logically combine the content of two words and output the
logical results to a specified result word. The logic instructions combine all the
same-numbered bits in the two words and output the result to the bit of the same
number in the specified result word.
loop A group of instructions that can be executed more than once in succession (i.e.,
repeated) depending on an execution condition or bit status.
main program All of a program except for subroutine and interrupt programs.
mark trace A process in which changes in the contents of specific memory locations are re-
corded during program execution using MARK (174) instructions.
masked bit A bit whose status has been temporarily made ineffective.
masking ‘Covering’ a n interrupt signal so that the interrupt is not effective until the mask is
removed.
MCR Unit Magnetic Card Reader Unit.
Glossary
609
megabyte A unit of storage equal to one million bytes.
memory area Any of the areas in the PC used to hold data or programs.
memory card A data storage media similar to a floppy disk.
message number A number assigned to a message generated with the MSG(195) instruction.
mnemonic code A form of a ladder-diagram program that consists of a sequential list of the in-
structions without using a ladder diagram.
MONITOR mode A mode of PC operation in which normal program execution is possible, and
which allows modification of data held in memory. Used for monitoring or debug-
ging the PC.
most-significant (bit/word) See
leftmost (bit/word).
NC input An input that is normally closed, i.e., the input signal is considered to be present
when the circuit connected to the input opens.
negative delay A delay set for a data trace in which recording data begins before the trace signal
by a specified amount.
nesting Programming one loop within another loop, programming a call to a subroutine
within another subroutine, or programming an IF-ELSE programming section
within another IF-ELSE section.
Network Service Board A device with an interface to connect devices other than PCs to a SYSMAC NET
Link System.
Network Service Unit A Unit that provides two interfaces to connect peripheral devices to a SYSMAC
NET Link System.
NO input An input that is normally open, i.e., the input signal is considered to be present
when the circuit connected to the input closes.
noise interference Disturbances in signals caused by electrical noise.
nonfatal error A hardware or software error that produces a warning but does not stop the PC
from operating.
normal condition See
normally open condition
.
normally closed condition A condition that produces an ON execution condition when the bit assigned to it
is OFF, and an OFF execution condition when the bit assigned to it is ON.
normally open condition A condition that produces an ON execution condition when the bit assigned to it
is ON, and an OFF execution condition when the bit assigned to it is OFF.
NOT A logic operation which inverts the status of the operand. For example, AND
NOT indicates an AND operation with the opposite of the actual status of the op-
erand bit.
octal A number system where all numbers are expressed in base 8, i.e., numbers are
written using only numerals 0 through 7.
OFF The status of an input or output when a signal is said not to be present. The OFF
state i s generally represented by a low voltage or by non-conductivity, bu t can be
defined as the opposite of either.
Glossary
610
OFF delay The delay between the time when a signal is switched OFF (e.g., by an input
device o r PC) and the time when the signal reaches a state readable as an OFF
signal (i.e., as no signal) by a receiving party (e.g., output device or PC).
offset A positive or negative value added to a base value such as an address to specify
a desired value.
ON The status of an input or output when a signal is said to be present. The ON state
is generally represented by a high voltage or by conductivity, but can be defined
as the opposite of either.
ON delay The delay between the time when an ON signal is initiated (e.g., by an input de-
vice or PC) and the time when the signal reaches a state readable as an ON sig-
nal by a receiving party (e.g., output device or PC).
one-shot bit A bit that is turned ON or OFF for a specified interval of time which is longer than
one scan.
operand The values designated as the data to be used for an instruction. An operand can
be input as a constant expressing the actual numeric value to be used or as an
address to express the location in memory of the data to be used.
operand bit A bit designated as an operand for an instruction.
operand word A word designated as an operand for an instruction.
operating error An error that occurs during actual PC operation as opposed to an initialization
error, which occurs before actual operations can begin.
OR A logic operation whereby the result is true if either of two premises is true, or if
both are true. In ladder-diagram programming the premises are usually ON/OFF
states of bits or the logical combination of such states called execution condi-
tions.
output The signal sent from the PC to an external device. The term output is often used
abstractly or collectively to refer to outgoing signals.
output bit A bit in the IR area that is allocated to hold the status to be sent to an output de-
vice.
Output Block A Unit used in combination with a Remote Interface to create an I/O Terminal. An
Output Block provides mounting positions for replaceable relays. Each relay can
be selected according to specific output requirements.
output device An external device that receives signals from the PC System.
output point The point at which an output leaves the PC System. Output points correspond
physically to terminals or connector pins.
output signal A signal being sent to an external device. Generally an output signal is said to
exist when, for example, a connection point goes from low to high voltage or from
a nonconductive to a conductive state.
Output Terminal An I/O Terminal that provides output points.
overflow The state where the capacity of a data storage location has been exceeded.
overseeing Part of the processing performed by the CPU that includes general tasks re-
quired to operate the PC.
Glossary
611
overwrite Changing the content of a memory location so that the previous content is lost.
Parameter Area A part of System DM used to designate various PC operating parameters.
Parameter Backup Area A part of System DM used to back up the Parameter Area.
parity Adjustment of the number of ON bits in a word or other unit of data so that the
total is always an even number or always an odd number. Parity is generally
used to check the accuracy of data after being transmitted by confirming that the
number of ON bits is still even or still odd.
parity check Checking parity to ensure that transmitted data has not been corrupted.
PC An acronym for Programmable Controller.
PC configuration The arrangement and interconnections of the Units that are put together to form
a functional PC.
PC System With building-block PCs, all of the Racks and independent Units connected di-
rectly to them up to, but not including the I/O devices. The boundaries of a PC
System are the PC and the program in its CPU at the upper end; and the I/O
Units, Special I/O Units, Optical I/O Units, Remote Terminals, etc., at the lower
end.
PCB An acronym for printed circuit board.
PC Setup A group of operating parameters set in the PC from a Programming Device to
control PC operation.
Peripheral Device Devices connected to a PC System to aid in system operation. Peripheral de-
vices include printers, programming devices, external storage media, etc.
peripheral servicing Processing signals to and from peripheral devices, including refreshing, com-
munications processing, interrupts, etc.
PID Unit A Unit designed for PID control.
pointer A variable or register which contains the address of some object in memory.
positive delay A delay set for a data trace in which recording data begins after the trace signal
by a specified amount.
power-off interrupt An interrupt executed when power to the PC is turned off.
power-on interrupt An interrupt executed when power to the PC is turned on.
present value The current value registered in a device at any instant during its operation. Pres-
ent value is abbreviated as PV. The use of this term is generally restricted to tim-
ers and counters.
printed circuit board A board onto which electrical circuits are printed for mounting into a computer or
electrical device.
PROGRAM mode A mode of operation that allows inputting and debugging of programs to be c a r -
ried out, but that does not permit normal execution of the program.
Programmable Controller A computerized device that can accept inputs from external devices and gener-
ate outputs to external devices according to a program held in memory. Pro-
Glossary
612
grammable Controllers are used to automate control of external devices. Al-
though single-unit Programmable Controllers are available, building-block Pro-
grammable Controllers are constructed from separate components. Such Pro-
grammable Controllers are formed only when enough of these separate compo-
nents are assembled to form a functional assembly, i.e., there is no one individu-
al Unit called a PC.
programmed alarm An alarm given as a result of execution of an instruction designed to generate the
alarm in the program, as opposed to one generated by the system.
programmed error An error arising as a result of the execution of an instruction designed to gener-
ate the error in the program, as opposed to one generated by the system.
programmed message A message generated as a result of execution of an instruction designed to gen-
erate the message in the program, as opposed to one generated by the system.
Programming Console The simplest form or programming device available for a PC. Programming
Consoles are available both as hand-held models and as CPU-mounting mod-
els.
Programming Device A Peripheral Device used to input a program into a PC or to alter or monitor a
program already held in the PC. There are dedicated programming devices,
such as Programming Consoles, and there are non-dedicated devices, such a s
a host computer.
PROM Programmable read-only memory; a type of ROM into which the program or
data may be written after manufacture, by a customer, but which is fixed from
that time on.
PROM Writer A peripheral device used to write programs and other data into a ROM for per-
manent storage and application.
prompt A message or symbol that appears on a display to request input from the opera-
tor.
protocol The parameters and procedures that are standardized to enable two devices to
communicate or to enable a programmer or operator to communicate with a de-
vice.
PV See
present value
.
Rack An assembly that forms a functional unit in a Rack PC System. A Rack consists
of a Backplane and the Units mounted to it. These Units include the Power Sup-
ply, CPU, and I/O Units. Racks include CPU Racks, Expansion I/O Racks, and
I/O Racks. The CPU Rack is the Rack with the CPU mounted to it. An Expansion
I/O Rack is an additional Rack that holds extra I/O Units. An I/O Rack is used in
the C2000H Duplex System, because there is no room for any I/O Units on the
CPU Rack in this System.
rack number A number assigned to a Rack according to the order that it is connected to the
CPU Rack, with the CPU Rack generally being rack number 0.
Rack PC A PC that is composed of Units mounted to one or more Racks. This configura-
tion is the most flexible, and most large PCs are Rack PCs. A Rack PC is the
opposite o f a Package-type PC, which has all of the basic I/O, storage, and con-
trol functions built into a single package.
RAM Random access memory; a data storage media. RAM will not retain data when
power is disconnected.
Glossary
613
RAS An acronym for reliability, assurance, safety.
read-only area A memory area from which the user can read status but to which data cannot be
written.
refresh The process of updating output status sent to external devices so that it agrees
with the status of output bits held in memory and of updating input bits in memory
so that they agree with the status of inputs from external devices.
refresh period The period during which memory status is actual read and written, e.g., during
the I/O refresh period, input bit status is written to agree with input terminal status
and output terminals are changes to agree with output bit status.
Register Area A memory are that contains both index registers and data registers.
relay-based control The forerunner of PCs. In relay-based control, groups of relays are intercon-
nected t o form control circuits. In a PC, these are replaced by programmable cir-
cuits.
remote I/O word An I/O word allocated to a Unit in a Remote I/O System.
reserved bit A bit that is not available for user application.
reserved word A word in memory that is reserved for a special purpose and cannot be accessed
by the user.
reset The process of turning a bit or signal OFF or of changing the present value of a
timer or counter to its set value or to zero.
Restart Bit A bit used to restart a Unit mounted to a PC.
restart continuation A process which allows memory and program execution status to be maintained
so that PC operation can be restarted from the state it was in when operation
was stopped by a power interruption.
result word A word used to hold the results from the execution of an instruction.
retrieve The processes of copying data either from an external device or from a storage
area to an active portion of the system such as a display buffer. Also, an output
device connected to the PC is called a load.
retry The process whereby a device will re-transmit data which has resulted in an er-
ror message from the receiving device.
return The process by which instruction execution shifts from a subroutine back to the
main program (usually the point from which the subroutine was called).
reversible counter A counter that can be both incremented and decremented depending on the
specified conditions.
reversible shift register A shift register that can shift data in either direction depending on the specified
conditions.
right-hand instruction See
terminal instruction
.
rightmost (bit/word) The lowest numbered bits of a group of bits, generally of an entire word, or the
lowest numbered words of a group of words. These bits/words are often called
least-significant bits/words.
Glossary
614
rising edge The point where a signal actually changes from an OFF to an ON status.
ROM Read only memory; a type of digital storage that cannot be written to. A ROM
chip is manufactured with its program or data already stored in it and can never
be changed. However, the program or data can be read as many times as de-
sired.
rotate register A shift register in which the data moved out from one end is placed back into the
shift register at the other end.
RS-232C interface An industry standard for serial communications.
RS-422 interface An industry standard for serial communications.
RUN mode The operating mode used by the PC for normal control operations.
rung See
instruction line
.
scan The process used to execute a ladder-diagram program. The program is ex-
amined sequentially from start to finish and each instruction is executed in turn
based on execution conditions. The scan also includes peripheral processing,
I/O refreshing, etc. The scan is called the cycle with CV-series PCs.
scan time The time required for a single scan of a ladder-diagram program.
scheduled interrupt An interrupt that is automatically generated by the system at a specific time or
program location specified by the operator. Scheduled interrupts result in the e x -
ecution o f specific subroutines that can be used for instructions that must be ex-
ecuted repeatedly at a specified interval of time.
seal See
self-maintaining bit
.
self diagnosis A process whereby the system checks its own operation and generates a warn-
ing or error if an abnormality is discovered.
self-maintaining bit A bit that is programmed to maintain either an OFF or ON status until set or reset
by specified conditions.
series A wiring method in which Units are wired consecutively in a string. In Link Sys-
tems wired through Link Adapters, the Units are still functionally wired in series,
even though Units are placed on branch lines.
servicing The process whereby the PC provides data to or receives data from external de-
vices or remote I/O Units, or otherwise handles data transactions for Link Sys-
tems.
set The process of turning a bit or signal ON.
set value The value from which a decrementing counter starts counting down or to which
an incrementing counter counts up (i.e., the maximum count), or the time from
which or for which a timer starts timing. Set value is abbreviated SV.
shift register One or more words in which data is shifted a specified number of units to the right
or left in bit, digit, or word units. In a rotate register, data shifted out one end is
shifted back into the other end. In other shift registers, new data (either specified
data, zero(s) or one(s)) is shifted into one end and the data shifted out at the oth-
er end is lost.
Glossary
615
signed binary A binary value that is stored in memory along with a bit that indicates whether the
value is positive or negative.
software error An error that originates in a software program.
software protect A means of protecting data from being changed that uses software as opposed
to a physical switch or other hardware setting.
software switch See
memory switch
.
source (word) The location from which data is taken for use in an instruction, as opposed to the
location to which the result of an instruction is to be written. The latter is called
the destination.
Special I/O Unit A Unit that is designed for a specific purpose. Special I/O Units include Position
Control Units, High-speed Counter Units, Analog I/O Units, etc.
SRAM Static random access memory; a data storage media.
stack instruction An instruction that manipulates data in a stack.
stack pointer The register which points to the top of the stack. See
stack
and
pointer
.
step A basic unit of execution in an SFC program. Steps are used to organize an SFC
program by process and control the overall flow of program execution.
Step Area A memory area that contains a flag that indicates the status of steps in an SFC
program.
subroutine A group of instructions placed separate from the main program and executed
only when called from the main program or activated by an interrupt.
subroutine number A definer used to identify the subroutine that a subroutine call or interrupt acti-
vates.
SV Abbreviation for set value.
synchronous execution Execution of programs and servicing operations in which program execution
and servicing are synchronized so that all servicing operations are executed
each time the programs are executed.
syntax The form of a program statement (as opposed to its meaning). For example, the
two statements, LET A=B+B and LET A=B*2 use different syntaxes, but have
the same meaning.
syntax error An error in the way in which a program is written. Syntax errors can include
‘spelling’ mistakes (i.e., a function code that does not exist), mistakes in specify-
ing operands within acceptable parameters (e.g., specifying read-only bits as a
destination), and mistakes in actual application of instructions (e.g., a call to a
subroutine that does not exist).
system configuration The arrangement in which Units in a System are connected. This term refers to
the conceptual arrangement and wiring together of all the devices needed to
comprise the System. In OMRON terminology, system configuration is used to
describe the arrangement and connection of the Units comprising a Control Sys-
tem that includes one or more PCs.
System DM A dedicated portion of the DM area that is used for special purposes in control-
ling and managing the PC. Includes the Program Version, Parameter Area, Pa-
rameter Backup Area, User Program Header, and Error Log Area.
Glossary
616
system error An error generated by the system, as opposed to one resulting from execution o f
an instruction designed to generate an error.
system error message An error message generated by the system, as opposed to one resulting from
execution of an instruction designed to generate a message.
terminal instruction An instruction placed on the right side of a ladder diagram that uses the final ex-
ecution conditions of an instruction line.
terminator The code comprising an asterisk and a carriage return (* CR) which indicates the
end of a block of data in communications between devices. Frames within a mul-
ti-frame block are separated by delimiters. Also a Unit in a Link System desig-
nated as the last Unit on the communications line.
timer A location in memory accessed through a TC bit and used to time down from the
timer’s set value. Timers are turned ON and reset according to their execution
conditions.
TR Area A data area used to store execution conditions so that they can be reloaded later
for use with other instructions.
TR bit A bit in the TR Area.
trace An operation whereby the program is executed and the resulting data is stored to
enable step-by-step analysis and debugging.
trace memory A memory area used to store the results of trace operations.
transfer The process of moving data from one location to another within the PC, or be-
tween the PC and external devices. When data is transferred, generally a copy
of the data is sent to the destination, i.e., the content of the source of the transfer
is not changed.
transition A status in a SFC program that determines when active status is transferred
from one step to another. Transitions can be defined either as the status of a bit
or as an execution condition resulting from a ladder diagram.
Transition Area A memory area that contains T ransition Flags.
Transition Flag A flag that indicates when a transition is ON or OFF.
transition number A number assigned to a transition and used to access its Transition Flag.
transmission distance The distance that a signal can be transmitted.
trigger A signal used to activate some process, e.g., the execution of a trace operation.
trigger address An address in the program that defines the beginning point for tracing. The ac-
tual beginning point can be altered from the trigger by defining either a positive or
negative delay.
UM area The memory area used to hold the active program, i.e., the program that is being
currently executed.
Unit In OMRON PC terminology, the word Unit is capitalized to indicate any product
sold for a PC System. Though most of the names of these products end with the
word Unit, not all do, e.g., a Remote Terminal is referred to in a collective sense
as a Unit. Context generally makes any limitations of this word clear.
Glossary
617
unit address A number used to control network communications. Unit addresses are com-
puted for Units in various ways, e.g., 10 hex is added to the unit number to deter-
mine the unit address for a CPU Bus Unit.
unit number A number assigned to some Link Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units to
facilitate identification when assigning words or other operating parameters.
unmasked bit A bit whose status is effective. See
masked bit
.
unsigned binary A binary value that is stored in memory without any indication of whether it is
positive or negative.
uploading The process of transferring a program or data from a lower-level or slave com-
puter to a higher-level or host computer. If a Programming Devices is involved,
the Programming Device is considered the host computer.
watchdog timer A timer within the system that ensures that the scan time stays within specified
limits. When limits are reached, either warnings are given or PC operation is
stopped depending on the particular limit that is reached.
WDT See
watchdog timer
.
wire communications A communications method in which signals are sent over wire cable. Although
noise resistance and transmission distance can sometimes be a problem with
wire communications, they are still the cheapest and the most common, and per-
fectly adequate for many applications.
word A unit of data storage in memory that consists of 16 bits. All data areas consists
of words. Some data areas can be accessed only by words; others, by either
words or bits.
word address The location in memory where a word of data is stored. A word address must
specify (sometimes by default) the data area and the number of the word that is
being addressed.
word allocation The process of assigning I/O words and bits in memory to I/O Units and termi-
nals in a PC System to create an I/O Table.
Word Grouping See
custom data area
.
work area A part of memory containing work words/bits.
work bit A bit in a work word.
work word A word that can be used for data calculation or other manipulation in program-
ming, i.e., a ‘work space’ in memory. A large portion of the IR area is always re-
served for work words. Parts of other areas not required for special purposes
may also be used as work words.
write protect switch A switch used to write-protect the contents of a storage device, e.g., a floppy
disk. If the hole on the upper left of a floppy disk is open, the information on this
floppy disk cannot be altered.
write-protect A state in which the contents of a storage device can be read but cannot be al-
tered.
zero-cross refresh An I/O refresh process in which I/O status is refreshed when the voltage of an AC
power supply is at zero volts.
619
Index
A
acronym, definition, 36
actions, maximum number, 24
address tracing. See tracing
addresses
data area, description, 36
memory, description, 36
arithmetic flags, 65, 116
operation, 569, 570, 571
recording current status, 367
retrieving recorded status, 366
ASCII
converting data, 234
table of extended ASCII characters, 595
asynchronous operations, 453, 464
I/O response time, example, 487, 490
auto-increments, with Index and Data Registers, 71
auto-decrements, with Index and Data Registers, 71
Auxiliary Area, 50–66
B
BASIC Unit, 14
BASIC Units
disabling read/write access, 413
enabling read/write access, 414
I/O allocation, 50
servicing, 466, 467
BCD
calculations, 274, 281, 287, 291
version-1/2 CPUs, 249–260
converting, 37
definition, 37
binary
calculations, 261, 272, 276, 285, 289
definition, 37
signed binary, 38
unsigned binary, 38
bits, controlling, 126
blackout, power. See power interruptions
branching, block programs, 440
brownout, power. See power interruptions
bus bar, definition, 75
C
Calendar/Clock Area, 49
CIO (Core I/O) Area, 40–48
clock, 49
adding to clock time, 350
compensation, 353
subtracting from clock time, 352
clock pulse bits, 66
commands, delivering commands through a network, 420
compatibility, C–CV Series, 9
complements, calculating, 347–348
CompoBus/D, memory areas, 47
conditions, definition, 75
constants, operands, 115
control bits
CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits, 55
CPU Service Disable Bits, 57, 468
definition, 36
Error Log Reset Bit, 55
Forced Status Hold Bit, 55
Host Link Service Disable Bit, 57, 468
I/O Refresh Disable Bit, 57, 468
IOM Hold Bit, 54
Output OFF Bit, 55
Peripheral Service Disable Bit, 57, 468
Restart Continuation Bit, 54
Sampling Start Bit, 56, 393, 395
Service Disable Bits, 57, 468
summary, 578
SYSMAC BUS Error Check Bits, 55, 62
Trace Start Bit, 56, 393, 395
control systems, 4
configuration, 31
design, 5
controlled systems, 4
converting. See data, converting
Counter Area, 68
counters, 68, 139
block programs, 448
conditions when reset, 156
Counter Completion Flags, 68
counter numbers, 68, 140
counter present values, 68
creating extended timers, 155
extended counters, 154
PV and SV, 140
resetting with CNR(236), 158
reversible counter, 156
CPU
asynchronous operation, 453, 464
components, 22
indicators, 22
operation, during power interruption, 458
operational flow, 452
synchronous operation, 455, 467
CPU Bus Link Area, 49
CPU Bus Unit Area, 47
Index
620
CPU Bus Units
definition, 47
disabling service, 57, 468
Duplication Error Flags, 61
Error Flags, 61, 63
I/O allocation, 47
Initializing Flags, 58
Initializing Wait Flag, 59
service interval, 59
servicing, 466, 467
Setting Error Flag, 61
Unit Number Setting Error Flag, 64
CPU Rack, 31
CPUs
comparison, 16
improved specifications, 16
new, 15
C-series Units, compatibility with CV-series, 9
CV Support Software, 7, xi
CVSS, 7, xi
CVSS flags, 56
CY. See flags, CY
cycle, First Cycle Flag, 65
cycle times, 464
calculating, 464
examples, 470–471
Cycle Time Too Long Flag, 60
instruction execution times, 472
maximum since start-up, 64
operations significantly increasing, 468
Peripheral Device servicing, 59
present, 64
cyclic refreshing, 456
D
data
comparison, 99
comparison instructions, 205–218
converting, 37, 219–249
data conversion table, 593
floating-point data, 293
radians and degrees, 303, 304
decrementing, 314–318
formats, 104
incrementing, 314–318
math calculations, 103
moving, 187–205
retention
in DM Area, 68
in EM Area, 68
searching, 365
shifting, 159–186
tracing. See tracing
data areas
definition, 35
structure, 36
summary, 577, 578, 579
data conversion table, 593
data files
reading from Memory Card, 28, 396
writing to Memory Card, 28, 398
Data Link Area, 50
Data Registers, 70
copying current contents, 368
loading data, 367
data tracing. See tracing
dead-band control, 338
dead-zone control, 340
DEBUG mode, description, 6
decrementing, 314–318
dedicated bits, summary, 578
definers, definition, 114
differentiated instructions, 117
function codes, 114
digit numbers, 37
DIP switch, 23
display, I/O Control and I/O Interface Units, 29
outputting characters, 362
DM Area, 68–70
DR, Data Registers, 70
E
EM Area, 68–70
EM Unit, 28
current bank number, 66
main components, 29
selecting bank number, 364
EQ. See flags, EQ
ER. See flags, Instruction Execution Error
Error Log Area, 57
errors
Auxiliary Area error flags, 509
codes, 60
Error Log Area, 57
programming, 354
SFC fatal error, 60
SFC non-fatal error, 63
Error Flag operation, 569, 570, 571
error processing, 503
fatal, 507
initialization, 505
Instruction Execution Error Flag, 64
LED indicators, 504
message tables, 504–508
messages, programming, 414
non-fatal, 505
programming indications, 504
programming messages, 414
reading and clearing messages, 504
event processing, potential problems, 469
Index
621
execution condition, definition, 76
execution time, instructions, 472–485
Expansion CPU Rack, 32
Expansion Data Memory Unit. See EM Unit
Expansion I/O Rack, 32
exponents, 312
extended ASCII, 595
Extended PC Setup, definition, 26
F
failure point detection, 356
FAL
area, 354
errors, 505
FAL number, 63
FALS errors, 507
FALS Flag, 60
fatal operating errors, 507
files
data files
reading from Memory Card, 28, 396
writing to Memory Card, 28, 398
file memory, 25
ladder program
automatic transfer at start-up, 27
reading from Memory Card, 28, 400
step program file, reading from Memory Card, 28, 402
transferring to/from Memory Card, 26
types of Memory Card files, 26
flags
Accessing Memory Card Flag, 60
arithmetic, 65
programming example, 206
arithmetic flag operation, 569, 570, 571
Auxiliary Area error flags, 509
Battery Low Flags, 62
Counter Completion Flags, 68
CPU Bus Error Flag, 61
CPU Bus Link Error Flag, 64
CPU Bus Unit Error Flag, 63
CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags, 58
CPU Bus Unit Initializing Wait Flag, 59
CPU Bus Unit Number Setting Error Flag, 64
CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Flag, 61
CVSS, 56
CY, 65
clearing, 250
setting, 250
Cycle Time Too Long Flag, 60
definition, 36
Differentiate Monitor Completed Flag, 56
Duplication Error Flag, 61
EM Installed Flag, 66
EM Status Flags, 66
EQ, 65
Execution Time Measured Flag, 56, 395
FAL Flag, 63
FALS Flag, 60
File Missing Flag, 60
First Cycle Flag, 65
GR, 65
I/O Bus Error Flag, 61
I/O Setting Error Flag, 60
I/O Verification Error Flag, 63
I/O Verification Error Wait Flag, 59
Indirect DM BCD Error Flag, 63
Instruction Execution Error, 64
Jump Error Flag, 63
LE, 65
Memory Card flags, 59, 396
Memory Card Format Error Flag, 59
Memory Card Instruction Flag, 60
Memory Card Protected Flag, 60
Memory Card Read Error Flag, 59
Memory Card Start-up Transfer Error Flag, 64
Memory Card Transfer Error Flag, 59
Memory Card Write Error Flag, 59
Memory Card Write Flag, 60
Memory Error Flag, 61
Message Flags, 57
N, 65
Network Status Flags, 66
overflow, 54, 582
Peripheral Connected Flag, 59
Peripheral Device flags, 59
Power Interruption Flag, 61
Program Error Flag, 60
SFC Fatal Error Flag, 60
SFC Non-fatal Error Flag, 63
Start-up Wait Flag, 58
Step, 65
Step Flags, 67
Stop Monitor Completed Flag, 56
Stop Monitor Flag, 56
summary, 578
SYSMAC BUS Error Flag, 62
SYSMAC BUS Terminator Wait Flag, 59
SYSMAC BUS/2 Error Flag, 62
SYSMAC BUS/2 Peripheral Flags, 59
Timer Completion Flags, 67
Too Many I/O Points Flag, 60
Trace Busy Flag, 56, 393, 395
Trace Completed Flag, 56, 393, 395
Trace Trigger Monitor Flag, 56, 393, 395
Transition Flags, 66
controlling status, 433, 434
underflow, 54, 582
flags and control bits, summary, 578
floating-point data, 104
See also mathematics
division, 326
exponents, 312
logarithms, 313
square roots, 311
floating-point instructions, 293
function codes, 114
Index
622
G
GPC, 7
GPC (Graphics Programming Console), 7
GR. See flags, GR
Graphics Programming Console, 7
H
hexadecimal, definition, 37
Hold Area, 47
Host Link System, 14
disabling read/write access, 413
disabling service to, 57, 468
enabling read/write access, 414
I
I/O allocations
displaying the first I/O word on a Rack, 30
example, 44
I/O assignment sheets, 583, 584, 585
I/O Area, 41–45
I/O assignment sheets, 583, 584, 585
I/O bits
definition, 41
limits, 41
I/O Control Unit, display. See display
I/O Interface Unit, display. See display
I/O points, determining requirements, 6
I/O refreshing, 456
asynchronous operation, 453
cyclic, 456
I/O response time, 464, 486
immediate, 457
IORF(184), 362, 457
scheduled, 456
synchronous operation, 455
zero-cross, 456
I/O response time, 464, 486
I/O tables
changing, 45
creating, 42
I/O Units. See Units
I/O words
allocation, 42
definition, 41
limits, 41
reserving in I/O table, 45
Units requirements, 42
immediate refreshing, 118, 457
incrementing, 314–318
Index Registers, 70
copying current contents, 368
loading data, 367
indirect addressing
BCD (in DM or EM), 116
binary (in DM or EM), 117
DM and EM Areas, 69
with Index and Data Registers, 70
input bits
application, 41
definition, 3
input comparison instructions, 99, 213
input device, definition, 3
input point, definition, 3
input signal, definition, 3
instruction lines, definition, 75
instruction sets
+F(454), 299
–F(455), 300
*F(456), 301
/F(457), 302
ACOS(464), 309
ADB(080), 261
ADBL(084), 266
ADD(070), 250
ADDL(074), 255
AND, 78, 121
combining with OR, 79
AND LD, 81, 125
combining with OR LD, 83
using in logic blocks, 82
AND NOT, 78, 121
ANDL(134), 344
ANDW(130), 341
APR(142), 328
ASC(113), 234
ASFT(052), 163
ASIN(463), 308
ASL(060), 173
ASLL(064), 177
ASR(061), 174
ASRL(065), 178
ATAN(465), 310
BAND(272), 338
BCD(101), 220
BCDL(103), 222
BCDS(276), 244
BCMP(022), 208
BCNT(114), 236
BDSL(278), 248
BEND<001>, 439
BIN(100), 219
BINL(102), 221
BINS(275), 242
BISL(277), 246
BPPS<011>, 446
BPRG(250), 439
BPRS<012>, 446
BSET(041), 198
BXFR(046), 204
CADD(145), 350
CCL(172), 366
Index
623
CCS(173), 367
CJP(221), 138
CJPN(222), 138
CLC(079), 250
CLI(154), 386
CMND(194), 420, 423
CMP(020), 205
CMP(028), 217
CMPL(021), 207
CMPL(029), 217
CNR(236), 158
CNT, 153
CNTR(012), 156
CNTW<014>, 448
COLL(045), 203
COLM(116), 238
COM(138), 347
COML(139), 348
COS(461), 306
CPS(026), 215
CPSL(027), 216
CSUB(146), 352
DATE(179), 353
DCBL(097), 318
DEC(091), 314
DECB(093), 316
DECL(095), 317
DEG(459), 304
DIFD(014), 94, 127–128
using in interlocks, 135
using in jumps, 137
DIFU(013), 94, 127–128
using in interlocks, 135
using in jumps, 137
DIST(044), 202
DIV(073), 254
DIVL(077), 258
DMPX(111), 228
DOWN(019), 123
DVB(083), 265
DVBL(087), 270
ELSE<003>, 440
EMBC(171), 364
END(001), 80, 120, 139
EQU(025), 212
EXIT<006>, 444
EXP(467), 312
FAL(006), 354
FALS(007), 354
FDIV(141), 326
FIFO(163), 392
FILP(182), 400
FILR(180), 396
FILW(181), 398
FIX(450), 296
FIXL(451), 297
FLSP(183), 402
FLT(452), 298
FLTL(453), 298
FPD(177), 356
HEX(117), 239
HMS(144), 350
IEND<004>, 440
IF<002>, 440
IF<002> NOT, 440
IL(002), 90, 134–136
ILC(003), 90, 134–136
INBL(096), 317
INC(090), 314
INCB(092), 315
INCL(094), 316
input comparison instructions (300 to 328), 213
IODP(189), 362
IORF(184), 362
IORS(188), 414
example, 426
IOSP(187), 413
example, 426
JME(005), 136
JMP(004), 136
JMP(004) and JME(005), 92
KEEP(011), 132
in controlling bit status, 94
ladder instructions, 77
LD, 78, 121
LD NOT, 78, 121
LEND<010>, 445
LIFO(162), 391
LINE(115), 237
LMT(271), 337
LOG(468), 313
LOOP<009>, 445
MARK(174), 395
MAX(165), 319
MCMP(024), 211
MCRO(156), 380
MIN(166), 320
MLB(082), 264
MLBL(086), 269
MLPX(110), 226
MOV(030), 187
MOVD(043), 201
MOVL(032), 189
MOVQ(037), 194
MOVR(036), 193
MSG(195), 414
MSKR(155), 388
MSKS(153), 385
MTIM(122), 151
MUL(072), 253
MULL(076), 257
MVN(031), 188
MVNL(033), 190
NASL(056), 168
NASR(057), 169
NEG(104), 223
NEGL(105), 224
NOP(000), 139
NOT, 75
NOT(010), 125
NSFL(054), 166
NSFR(055), 167
NSLL(058), 170
NSRL(059), 172
OR, 78, 122
combining with AND, 79
OR LD, 82, 125
combining with AND LD, 83
use in logic blocks, 83
Index
624
OR NOT, 78, 122
ORW(131), 342
ORWL(135), 345
OUT, 79, 126
OUT NOT, 79, 126
PID(270), 330
PUSH(161), 390
RAD(458), 303
RD2(280), 406
READ(190), 404
RECV(193), 418, 423
REGL(175), 367
REGS(176), 368
RET(152), 377, 379
RLNC(260), 180
ROL(062), 175
ROLL(066), 179, 181
ROOT(140), 323
ROR(063), 176, 183
RORL(067), 182
ROTB(274), 325
RRNL(263), 184
RSET(017), 94, 129–130
RSTA(048), 130–132
SA(210), 427
SBB(081), 262
SBBL(085), 268
SBN(150), 377, 379
SBS(151), 378
SDEC(112), 231
SE(214), 431
SEC(143), 349
SEND(192), 415, 423
SET(016), 94, 129–130
SETA(047), 130–132
SF(213), 430
SFT(050), 159
SFTR(051), 162
SIGN(106), 225
SIN(460), 305
SLD(068), 185
SNXT(009), 368
SOFF(215), 432
SP(211), 428
SQRT(466), 311
SR(212), 429
SRCH(164), 365
SRD(069), 186
SSET(160), 389
STC(078), 250
STEP(008), 368
SUB(071), 251
SUBL(075), 256
SUM(167), 322
TAN(462), 307
TCMP(023), 210
TCNT(123), 434
testing bit status, 124
TIM, 142
TIMH(015), 146
TIML(121), 150
TIMW<013>, 447
TMHW<015>, 447
TOUT(202), 433
TRSM(170), 393
TSR(124), 435
TST(350), 124
TSTN(351), 124
TSW(125), 436
TTIM(120), 148
UP(018), 123
WAIT<005>, 443
WDT(178), 361
WR2(281), 411
WRIT(191), 408
WSFT(053), 165
XCGL(035), 192
XCHG(034), 191
XFER(040), 197
XFRB(038), 195
XNRL(137), 346
XNRW(133), 343
XORL(136), 346
XORW(132), 343
ZONE(273), 340
instructions
combining, AND LD and OR LD, 83
controlling bit status
using KEEP (011), 94
using OUT and OUT NOT, 126
controlling execution conditions, UP(018) and DOWN(019),
123
differentiated instructions, 117
execution times, 472–485
floating-point data, 293
format, 114
immediate refresh instructions, 118
input comparison, 99
intermediate instructions, 96
ladder diagram instructions, 121
ladder instructions, 77, 121
list by mnemonics, 511
logic block instructions, 121
logic instructions, 341
math, 103
mnemonic code, 119
operands, 74
right-hand instructions, 75
summary, 520
symbol math instructions, 272
terminology, 74
Intelligent I/O Unit, (Special I/O Units). See Units
interlocks, 134–136
converting to mnemonic code, 135
using self-maintaining bits, 95
intermediate instructions, 75, 96
Index
625
interrupts, 377, 382
clearing, 386
masking, 385
power OFF, 383
power OFF interrupt, 459, 461
power ON, 383
priority, 383
reading mask status, 388
refresh servicing
in asynchronous operation, 466
in synchronous operation, 468
scheduled, 383
example, 387
reading interval, 388
setting interval, 385
setting time to the first interrupt, 387
IR, Index Registers, 70
J-L
jump numbers, 137
jumps, 136–137
CJP(221) and CJPN(222), 138
ladder diagrams
branching, 87
IL(002) and ILC(003), 90
using TR bits, 88
controlling bit status
using DIFU(013) and DIFD(014), 94, 127–128
using KEEP(011), 132–142
using OUT and OUT NOT, 79
using SET(016) and RSET(017), 94, 129–130
using SETA(047) and RSTA(048), 130–132
converting to mnemonic code, 76–80
instructions, 121–125
summary, 520
notation, 114
structure, 75
using logic blocks, 80
ladder program files
automatic transfer at start-up, 27
reading from Memory Card, 28, 400
latching relays, using KEEP(011), 132
LE. See flags, LE
LEDs. See CPU, indicators
leftmost, definition, 36
limit control, 337
Link Area, 46
Link Units
See also Units
data links, 46
logarithm, 313
logic blocks, 76
See also ladder diagram
instructions, converting to mnemonic code, 80–87
logic instructions, 341–348
M
macros, 380
manuals, 8
CV-series, 8
mathematics
See also trigonometric functions
adding a range of words, 322
BCD calculation instructions, 274, 281, 287, 291
version-1/2 CPUs, 249
binary calculation instructions, 261, 272, 276, 285, 289
exponents, 312
finding the maximum in a range, 319
finding the minimum in a range, 320
floating-point addition, 299
floating-point data, 293
floating-point division, 302, 326
floating-point multiplication, 301
floating-point subtraction, 300
linear extrapolation, 329
logarithm, 313
square root, 311, 323, 325
trigonometric functions, 328
maximum cycle time, extending, 361
memory areas, definition, 35
Memory Cards, 25–28
flags, 59, 396
instructions, 396
mounting and removing, 25
Number of Words (left) to Transfer, 60
power switch, 23
reading data file, 28, 396
reading ladder program file, 28, 400
reading step program file, 28, 402
transferring files, 26
types, 59
types of Memory Card files, 26
writing data file, 28, 398
Memory Error, Area Location, 64
Message Flags, 57
messages, programming, 414
mnemonic code
converting, 76–80
right-hand instructions, 119
modes, PC, definition, 6
momentary power interruption
definition, 460
time, 459
Momentary Power Interruption Time, 55
MONITOR mode, description, 6
N
N. See flags, N
nesting, subroutines, 379
networks, 10
new CPUs, 15
Index
626
non-fatal operating errors, 505
normally closed condition, definition, 75
normally open condition, definition, 75
NOT, definition, 75
O
offset indirect addressing, 71
operands, 114
allowable designations, 115
bits, 76
definition, 74
definition, 74
word, definition, 74
output bits
application, 41
controlling ON/OFF time, 126
controlling status, 93, 95
definition, 3
output device, definition, 3
output point, definition, 3
output signal, definition, 3
OV. See flags, overflow
P
parameters, PC Setup, 496
PC
configuration, 31
definition, 3
modes, 6
flags indicating, 49
operation, overview, 4
PC Setup, 24, 496
automatic transfer at start-up, 27
default settings, 501, 575, 576
Extended PC Setup, 26
PC Status Area, 49
periodic refreshing, disabling, 57, 468
Peripheral Devices, 7, 31
Connected Device Code, 59
disabling service, 57, 468
flags, 59
Peripheral Device Cycle Time, 59
peripheral servicing, in asynchronous operation, 453, 455, 466,
467
Personal Computer Unit, 15
PID control, 330
power
OFF, 458
ON, 459
power interruption, 458
automatic restart following. See restart continuation
momentary, 460
number since start-up, 57
time of occurrence, 56, 460
precautions
general, xiii
operand data areas, 115
programming, 98, 102
zero-cross refreshing, 457
Program Area, 24
Program Memory, 24
structure, 76
PROGRAM mode, description, 6
programming
basic steps, 4
example, using shift register, 160
example SFC control program, 437
I/O assignment sheets, 583, 584, 585
jumps, 92
pausing/restarting block programs, 446
power OFF interrupt program, 461
precautions, 98
preparing data in data areas, 198
program capacity, 24
program coding sheets, 589, 590, 591
Program Error Flag, 60
sequencing control operation, 6
SFC program, controlling step status, 427
simplification with differentiated instructions, 128
using work bits, 96
writing, 74
Programming Console, 7, xi
programs
capacity, 24
coding sheet, 589, 590, 591
execution, 99
power OFF interrupt, 461
PV
CNTR(012), 156
timers and counters, 140
R
Rack numbers
CPU-recognized rack numbers, 64
Duplication Error Flags, 61
setting, 32
Racks, types, 31
Remote I/O Systems, 10
response times, I/O, 486–493
restart continuation, 461
precautions, 462
right-hand instruction, definition, 75
rightmost, definition, 36
RUN mode, description, 6
Index
627
S
scan times. See cycle times
scheduled refreshing, 456
self-maintaining bits, using KEEP(011), 133
seven-segment displays, converting data, 231
SFC control instructions, 427
SFC control program, example, 437
SFC errors, 506, 508
SFC program
basic description, 2
controlling step status, 427
shift registers, 159–186
controlling individual bits, 160
signed BCD, 104
signed binary, 104
signed binary data, 38
signed data, removing sign, 225
Special I/O Units. See Units
special math instructions. See mathematics
square root. See mathematics
SSS, 7, xi
stack instructions, 389
start-up
processing, 27
time, 56
status indicators. See CPU indicators
steps
changing step status
from pause to execute, 429
resetting, 432
to execute, 427
to halt, 430
to inactive, 431
to pause, 428
changing step timers, 436
maximum number, 24
reading step timers, 435
Step Area, 67
step executions, Step Flag, 65
step instructions, 368–376
step program files, reading from Memory Card, 28, 402
subcharts, changing subchart status
from pause to execute, 429
resetting, 432
to execute, 427
to halt, 430
to inactive, 431
to pause, 428
subroutines, 377–389
number, 377
SV
CNTR(012), 156
timers and counters, 140
switches
DIP. See DIP switch
Memory Card power, 23
synchronous operation, 455, 467
I/O response time, example, 489, 492
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O System, 13
disabling read/write access, 413
disabling refreshing, 57, 468
enabling read/write access, 414
Error Flags and Check Bits, 62
I/O allocation, 48
I/O refreshing, 457
I/O response time, example, 487, 489
reading error codes, 55
servicing, 466, 468
SYSMAC BUS Area, 48
SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O System, 12
disabling read/write access, 413
enabling read/write access, 414
Error Flags, 62
I/O allocation, 46
I/O refreshing, 457
I/O response time, example, 490, 492
servicing, 466, 468
Slaves, outputting to the display. See display
SYSMAC BUS/2 Area, 46
SYSMAC LINK System, 11
communications, 423–426
data links, 47
disabling read/write access, 413
enabling read/write access, 414
flags, 66
instructions, 413
servicing, 466, 468
SYSMAC NET Link System, 10
communications, 423–426
data links, 47
disabling read/write access, 413
enabling read/write access, 414
flags, 66
instructions, 413
servicing, 466, 468
SYSMAC Support Software, 7, xi
SYSMAC WAY, 14
T
time
See also clock
converting time notation, 349, 350
time instructions, 349–354
Index
628
timers, 67, 139
block programs, 447
changing step timers, 436
conditions when reset
TIM, 143
TIM(015), 147
TIML(121), 150
TTIM(120), 149
example using CMP(020), 206
extended timers, 144
flicker bits, 146
ON/OFF delays, 144
one-shot bits, 145
PV and SV, 140
reading step timers, 435
resetting with CNR(236), 158
Timer Area, 67
Timer Completion Flags, 67
timer numbers, 67, 139
timer present values, 67
TR bits, 87
TR (Temporary Relay) Area, 48
use in branching, 88
tracing, 393–394
effect of instruction trace on cycle time, 468
flags and control bits, 393, 395
transitions
maximum number, 24
Transition Area, 66–67
Transition Flag, controlling status, 433, 434
trigonometric functions
converting to angles, 308, 309, 310
cosine, 306
sine, 305
tangent, 307
troubleshooting, 503
failure point detection, 356
U
UN. See flags, underflow
Units
changing configuration, 44
definition, 4
determining requirements, 6
I/O Units, definition, 4
Link Units, definition, 4
Special I/O Units
definition, 4
READ(190) and WRIT(191), 404
unit numbers, Duplication Error Flags, 61
words required, 42
unsigned BCD, 104
unsigned binary, 104
unsigned binary data, 38
V-Z
Version-2 CVM1 CPUs
improvements, 18
new features, 99
Wait Flags, 58
watchdog timer, extending, 361
words, definition, 36
Work Area, 45–46
work bit, 96
definition, 45
work word, 96
definition, 45
zero-cross refreshing, 456
629
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. W202-E1-5 Revision code
The following table outlines changes made to the manual. Page numbers refer to the previous version.
Revision code Date Revised content
1 June 1992 Original production
1A July 1992 Page 58: Descriptions for “Greater Than Flag, GR” and “Less Than Flag, LE” changed.
2January 1993 PC setup defaults added to appendices and following corrections made.
Page 7 and 8: Personal Computer Unit added to table.
Page 8: Unclear entries removed from table and maximum number of words transferable
in SYSMAC NET System corrected to 990.
Page 17: Notes added to table.
Page 20: “EEPROM” removed from last paragraph.
Page 24: Note on restrictions on Peripheral Devices connected to Slaves added.
Page 42 and others: Maximum value for seconds corrected to 59.
Page 56: “Group-2” corrected to “Group–1,” “Group-3” corrected to “Group–2,” and
“(Group-3 Slaves)” added to fifth line of bottom table.
Page 58: “First” and “second” reversed for GR and LE.
Page 65: Last address in second line corrected to CIO 1897.
Page 71: First operand in table corrected to 000000.
Page 72: First instruction in second mnemonic table corrected to LD NOT.
Page 75: Vertical line between conditions removed.
Page 76: Mnemonic tables corrected for top ladder diagram.
Page 81 and others: Leading zeros added to make six-digit addresses for CIO Area.
Page 89: “, and certain unused bits in the AR area,” removed from second paragraph in
section 4-9.
Page 99/100: Missing text restored.
Page 102 and others: Leading zeros cut to make four-digit timer addresses.
Page 103 and 104: DM removed as a possible operand.
Page 109: Timing chart lines for jSET and iSET reversed.
Page 117: Temporary bits removed from program; MOVR added; mnemonics corrected.
Page 118, 119, 121, 122,: Precaution added; example programs modified accordingly.
Page 122: Second LD in second program changed to AND.
Page 125: LD added to mnemonics and precaution added.
Page 142 and 143: Description of ASFT(052) corrected and revised, including reversing
direction of data shift.
Page 145: Precaution added.
Page 155: Operands for OUT in top diagram corrected.
Page 159: “Upper limits” changed to “Compare table” in diagram.
Page 179: Second operand for second SUB(071) corrected.
Page 187: Positions of “=R” and other callouts lowered one line.
Page 187, 189, 210, 253, 271, 272: “025504” changed to A50004,” “025515” changed to
A50015,” and “025512” changed to A50012.”
Page 207: “02AE” changed to “E02A.”
Page 214: Second and next to last lines of bottom table corrected.
Page 217: Description for
Example
corrected.
Page 230, 232, and 234: Ladder diagrams corrected and note added (page 232).
Page 254: Direction of arrow reversed.
Page 263, 266, 268: Precaution added.
Page 264 and 266: Control data and node number corrected in
Example
.
Page 280: “D100000” corrected to “D10000” in first paragraph of
Example
.
Page 291: Program modified.
Page 298 and 300: Input and output refreshing actions modified.
Page 301: Timer refreshing actions modified.
Page 325: “(SYSMAC BUS/2)” added to L and M settings and “(SYSMAC BUS/2 and
SYSMAC BUS)” added to N setting.
Page 328: First “SYSMAC BUS” corrected to “SYSMAC BUS/2” in N setting.
Page 329 and 330: “IORF” corrected to “IOIF” in T setting.
Page 344: Following mnemonics corrected: 030: MOVE to MOV; 078: SLD to STC; and
079: SRD to CLC.
Page 357 and 358: DM removed as possible operand.
Revision History
630
Revision code Revised contentDate
3March 1993 CV2000, CVM1, and Personal Computer Unit added.
Page 18: Program area capacity corrected in tables.
Page 36: Notes concerning Units mounted to Slave Racks and use of Intelligent I/O
Read/Write instructions corrected.
Page 116: Description of refreshing of Completion Flags corrected.
Page 119: Precaution on using Completion Flag to reset timer removed.
Page 143: Instruction added for example.
Pages 259 and 260: CY Flag operation added to I/O READ and I/O WRITE instructions.
Pages 302 and 303: “Data area write” removed from list of events.
Page 329: Designation for momentary power interruption time corrected to 0 to 9 ms.
3A December 1993 Several new functions have been added to the CPUs of CV-series PCs (CVM1, CV500,
CV1000, and CV2000). The new CPUs have an EV1 suffix.
Page 15: Improved Specifications 5, 6, and 7 added.
Page 20 : “See note 2” deleted from table at bottom of page.
Page 247: Program example corrected and sentence added to Precautions.
4February 1995 The following major revisions were implemented:
Information added on version-2 CVM1 CPUs (see end of section 1 for overview).
Programming examples were added for most instructions.
Information in section 5 was reorganized to aid understanding and reduce the redundancy
of information (mostly precautionary).
SSS added.
4A July 1995 The following additions/corrections were made.
Page 7: Motion Control Unit added to table.
Page 16: Special I/O Units readable/writeable on Slave Racks revised.
Page 21: Default communications setting modified.
Pages 40 and 41: CT021 and Motion Control Units added.
Pages 52 and 115: Note added.
Page 91: Instruction corrected in note.
Page 139: Jump number changed and caution added.
Page 323: Minimum results value corrected and precaution added.
Page 328: Caution added.
Page 330: Number of zeros in note 3 corrected.
Page 380: Note added.
Pages 518 to 567: Note removed from bottom of table.
Page 569: Paragraph added before table.
5August 1998 PLP section added to beginning of manual.
Pages 8, 41: CompoBus/D added.
Page 16: Corrected first paragraph is 1-13-1.
Page 18: Section added.
Pages 21, 25, 26: Information added on simplified backup function.
Page 23: Information added on using commercial memory cards.
Pages 24, 25: Note modified.
Page 38: Added CompoBus/D Area.
Page 43: Changed work area addresses.
Page 47: Note on clock accuracy added.
Pages 63, 64: Description of A50015 corrected.
Page 147: Precaution added on long cycle times.
Page 331: Corrected graphic and description of P on lower left of page.
Page 334: Corrected graphics at top of page.
Page 405, 408: Precautions added and “The Slave is not set to 54MH” moved to Error
Flag section for READ(190) and WRIT(191).
Pages 412, 415: Descriptions corrected for D and S, respectively.
Page 418: Description clarified for item 7.
Page 484: Corrected equation at bottom of page.
Page 504: Descriptions for SFC fatal error corrected.
